PROCEEDINGS

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

PHILADELPHIA.

18 8 4.

committee of publication:

Joseph Leidy, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Edward J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

John H. Redfield.

Editor : EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D.

PHILADELPHIA :

ACADEMY OF NATURAL. SCIENCES,

S. W. Corner Nineteenth and Race Streets.

18 85.

h

AoADBMY OF Natural Sciences of Philadelphia,

February 27, 1885.

I hereby certify that iDrinted copies of the Proceedings for 1884 have been
presented at the meetings of the Academy, as follows : —

Pages

9 to 24

25 to 40

41 to 72

73 to 88

89 to 104

105 to 136

137 to 168

169 to 184

185 to 200

201 to 216

217 to 232

233 to 264

265 to 280

281 to 296

297 to 328

April

April

April

April

May

June

August

August

August

November

November

November

December

January

February

1, 1884
15, 1884
22, 1884
29, 1884
20, 1884

3, 1884

12. 1884
19, 1884
26, 1884

4, 1884
11,1884
18, 1881

2, 1884

13, 1885

3, 1885

EDWARD J. NOLAN,

Recording Secretary.

PHILAOILPMIA
W P KlUOAOC, PRIMTKH.

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

With reference to the several articles contributed by each.

For Verbal Communications see General Index.

FAGK.

Araugo, Rafael. Description of new Species of Terrestrial MoUusca

of Cuba 211

Brinton, D. G., M. D. On the Cuspidiform Petroglyplis, or so-called

Bird track Rock-sculptures of Ohio 275

Carter, Henry J. Catalogue of Marine Sponges collected by Mr. Jos.

Willcox on the West Coast of Florida 202

Chester, Frederick D. Pi'eliminary Notes on the Geology of Delaware

— Laurentian, Palaeozoic and Cretaceous Areas (Plate V.) 237

Fordice, Morton W. A Review of the American Species of Stroma-

teidae 311

Foulke, Sara Gwendolen. Some Phenomena in the Life-history of

Clatbrulina elegans 17

On a new Species of Rotifer of the Genus Apsilus (Plate I.) 37

Gill, Theodore. On the Mutual Relations of the Hemibranchiate

Fishes 154

On the Anacanthine Fishes 167

Gray, Asa. Notes on the Movements of the Andrcecium in Sun-
flowers 287

Heilprin, Angelo. On a Carboniferous Ammonite from Texas.- 53

On a Remarkable Exposure of Columnar Trap near Orange, N, J.

(Plate VIII. ) 318

Notes on some new Foraminifera from the Nummulitic Formation

of Florida 321

Jordan, David S. List of Fishes from Egmont Key, Florida, in the

Museum of Yale College, with Description of two new Species.. 42
Notes on Species of Fishes improperly ascribed to the Fauna of

North America 97

McCook, Rev. Henry C, D. D. The Rufous or Thatching Ant of

Dakota and Colorado 57

Meehan, Thomas. Catalogue of Plants collected in July, 1883, during

an Excursion along the Pacific Coast in Southeastern Alaska. .. 76

I ^ 3 z £,

O LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

PAOB.

Meek, Seth E. A Review of the American Species of the Genus

Synodus 130

Meek, Seth E., and David K. Goss. A Eeview of the American

Species of the Genus Trachynotus 121

A Review of the American Species of the Genus Hemiramphus. .. 221

Meek, Seth E., and Martin L. Hoffman, A Review of the American

Species of the Genus Teuthis 237

Meek, Seth E., and Robert G. Newland. A Review of the American

Species of the Genus Sphyraena 67

A Review of the American Species of Scomberomorus 232

Meyer, Otto. Notes on Tertiary Shells 104

Osborn, Henry F. Preliminary Observations upon the Brain of Meno-

poraa (Plate VI. ) 262

Potts, Edward. On a Supposed New Species of Cristatella (Plate W.) 193

Randolph, N. A., M. D. On the Behavior of Petrolatum in the

Digestive Tract 281

Ringueberg, Eugene N. S. New Fossils from the Four Groups of the

Niagara Period of Western New York (Plates II and III.) 144

Scribner, F. Lamson. Observations on the Genus Cinna, with Descrip-
tion of a New Species (Plate VII.) 289

Sharp, Benjamin. On Semper's Method of Making Dried Preparations. 24
Homologies of the Vertebrate Crystalline Lens 300

Strecker, Herman. Descriptions of New Species of North American

Heterocera 283

Swain, Joseph, and Seth E. Meek. Notes on a Collection of Anchovies
from Havana and Key West, with an Account of a New Species
(Stolephorus eurystole) from Wood's Holl, Mass 34

Willcox, Jos. Notes on the Geology and Natural History of the West

Coast of Florida 188

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OP

PHILADELPHIA.

1884.

January 1, 1884.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Fourteen persons present.

Ant infected with a Fungus. — Prof. Leidy exhibited an ant,
Camponotus pennfiyJvanicus, which was rigid, with limbs and
antennae extended, as in life, in which condition it was found
under the bark of a decaying tree. It was infected with a fungus
which spread through everj- part of the body.

Cassiterite from Black Hills, Dakota. — Prof. Leidy exhibited
specimens of tin ore submitted for examination by Mr. Eltonhead,
who reports them to have been obtained at Black Hills, Dakota.
They consisted of a mass of granite containing cassiterite, a
fragment of quartz with the same, and a mass of pure cassiterite
of about one pound weight. Prof. Leidy said he had also seen
several pounds of large grains obtained from gold washings.
From among these he had picked out several characteristic
crystals.

January 8.
Mr. Geo. Y. Shoemaker in the chair.
Ten persons present.

A paper entitled " Some Phenomena in the Life-History of
Clathrulina elegans," by Miss S. G. Foulke, was presented for
publication.
3

10 PROCJCEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Visual Organa of Lamellibranchs. — Dr. Benjamin Sharp re-
ported on his work on the lamellibranch eye. He had examined
the edge of the mantle of Ostrea virginica and Mitilis edulis of
the Asiphonata, and the siphons of Venus mercenaria^ Mya
arenaria, Mactra solidissima, besides the forms already described
for Solen ensis and S. vagina (Proc. of Academy of Nat. Sciences
of Phila., 1883, pp. 248-9). The pigmented cells found in these
parts are essentially the same as those found in Solen ensis and S.
vagina. The smallest of all the cells were found in Ostrea and
the largest in Venus. Experiments on these forms show their
sensitiveness to light and shadow, and the cells showing the
retinal character described leaves little doubt as to the power
of vision. No nerves could be demonstrated passing direct to
these cells, and probably those distributed to the general
epidermis serve in transmitting the impressions. The visual
IDOwer is so low that nerves have not been yet specialized for
this purpose.

January 15.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty persons present.

A Fhosphorescent Variety of Limestone. — Professor Lewis gave
a description of a remarkable substance found in one of the
mountain mines of Utah, near Salt Lake City, sent to him some
months ago by Professor Cope. It is a white rock which phos-
phoresces with a lurid red light whenever struck or scratched
with a hard substance, and on that account has been called by
the miners. Hell-fire rock.

It proves upon examination to be an almost perfectly pure car-
bonate of lime, containing occasionally slight impurities of iron,
etc. It is a loose grained, white, crystalline limestone, the grains
of which are but slightly coherent, giving the rock the appear-
ance of a soft sandstone. Upon slight abrasion in the hand, it
crumbles to form a coarse, calcareous sand. Under the micro-
scope the rock appears as a loose mass of irregular, angular
grains, which are nearly transparent, and which have a lustre
resembling that of alum. Portions of the rock are colored slightly
yellow by oxide of iron.

Its phosphorescent properties are very remarkable, entitling it
to rank as anew variety of limestone. It was long ago noticed
by Becquerel that some limestones were slightly phosphorescent
after heating or insolation, but so far as known, no other lime-
stone possesses this property in a degree at all approaching that

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 11

now described, the phosphorescence of which is nearly as strong
as that of fluor spar.

Phosphorescence is developed when the rock is either struck,
scratched or heated. Upon using- metal, glass or any other hard
substance to strike or to scratch it, a deep red light is emitted,
which continues sometimes for several seconds after the blow.
Rubbing with other fragments or grinding in a mortar developed
a white light. The most remarkable phosphorescence is devel-
oped by heating a fragment of the limestone in a glass tube over
a flame. It then glows with a deep red light which lasts for a
minute or more after withdrawing the flame. The color of the
light emitted resembles that of a red-hot body. Several seconds
before dying out, the light becomes white or bluish white. Upon
cooling and subsequent heating, phosphorescence is again devel-
oped in the same fragment, but much more feebly and for a
shorter period, and afcer two or three such heatings, its phos-
phorescence is destroyed.

Experiments made by the speaker upon the temperature at
which " Hell-fire rock " became phosphorescent, showed that
phosphorescence occurred at a temperature somewhat under
500° F. Small fragments phosphoresced much more quickly
than large ones. The lurid red light produced by a blow from a
hammer varied in duration of AMsibility according to the strength
of the blow. The phosphorescence produced by a slight touch
lasted only half a second, while a sharp blow produced a light
which remained more than twent}^ seconds after the blow was
given. Doubtless, a blow with a miner's pick upon the rock
would cause still longer phosphorescence.

It was found that the phosphorescence developed by heating
occurred nearly contemporaneously with the decrepitation of the
calcite, and this fact may be of value in theoretical considerations.

A search through the collection of the Academy for limestones
having similar properties resulted in finding a limestone from
Kaghberry, India, which glowed with a strong yellow phosphor-
escent light when heated. No phosphorescence was produced by
friction alone, as in the case of the Utah limestone. It was of
great interest to find that this Indian limestone, and this one
alone of all in the collection, had the precise external characters
of that from Utah. It had the same crystalline structure and
state of aggregation, crumbling readily in the fingers, and resem-
bling a sandstone. It was labeled " Phosphorescent Sandstone,''
although containing no siliceous sand.

This similarity of external characters between the two phos-
phorescent limestones is certainly more than a coincidence. It
confirms Becquerel's view that phosphorescence depends upon
physical rather than chemical conditions. He has shown that
when Ai'agonite is calcined, fused with sulphur and then heated,
it phosphoresces with a green light; whereas calcite, similarly

12 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

treated, gives a yellow light ; from which he concludes that the
different colors depend upon different crystalline states, the com-
position remaining the same.

The speaker had been fortunate enough to observe the rare phe-
nomenon of the phosphorescence of snow, having seen a snow-
covered Alpine mountain shining at night as though illuminated
by moonlight. This beantiful appearance lasted for about half
an hour only, and was confined to a single mountain. Here again
the phosphorescence, although of quite a different kind from
either of those mentioned above, was purely physical, depending
upon the assumption of a certain crystalline condition of the
snow.

In general, the phosphorescence of a substance may be said to
depend upon an alteration in its molecular state of aggregation.
In the case of " Hell-fire rock " it appears to be the result of a
disturbance of its loosely aggregated crystalline particles, whether
such disturbance be produced by percussion, friction, heat or
decrepitation.

The New Jersey Coast after the storm of Jam. <?, 188 Jf^. — Pro-
fessor Leidy stated that, in company with Dr. Sharp and Mr.
Ford, he had made a trip to Atlantic City, N. J., to observe the
result of the recent storm on the marine animals of our coast.
The shore at the highest line reached by the tides was for miles
covered with incalculable numbers of the Beach-clam, Mactra
solidissima. These in many places formed extensive patches
actually closely paved with the clams. Besides those visible, it
is probable as many or more were covered by the sand thrown
up with the clams. Until this evidence of the storm, he had no
suspicion that the mollusk was so exceedingly abundant on the
coast, though he had been well aware that it was very common,
and had repeatedly seen large quantities thrown on shore under
similar circumstances. With the Mactra were other mollusks,
and, though numerous enough, they appeared to be few compared
with the former. These were Fulgur carica and F, canaliculata,
Natica heros and N. dupHcnta, and Nassa obsoleta. Hermit
crabs were also numerous, Eupa gurus poUicaris in shells of
Natica and Fulgur, and E. longicarpus in shells of Nassa The
former shells had attached abundance of (Jrepidula wiguifornns,
and occasionally on the outside a C. fornica'ta. Of other crabs,
the Spider-crab, Libinia canaliculata and Platyonichus ocellatus
were frequent. A few half-grown Horse-shoe crabs, Limulus
polyphemus, were also observed. A few bunches of Mytilus
edulis were occasionally met with.

It seemed remarkable that certain common m Husks were con-
spicuously absent, as the Oyster, Ostrea virginiana, the Clara,
Venus rriercenaria^thG Squirt-clam, My a arenaria, and the Horse
mussel, Modiola jylicatula. Scarcely any annelides were observed,

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 13

except masses of dead Serpula invested with Eschara variabilis.
Thiere were also no echinoderms, except one, the Gaudina arenata,
which occui'red in some places in considerable numbers. This,
it was believed, is the first time the animal has been observed on
the coast of New Jersey. The specimens presented were collected
by Mr. Ford. They usually range from three to four or five
inches in length ; but several were upwards of six inches, and
over an inch at the thicker portion of the body.

It is an interesting question as to what becomes of the vast
quantities of Macira and other shells incessantly cast on shore.
Storms annuall}^ oblige the ocean to contribute from its inex-
haustible stores, multitudes of mollusks and other animals to the
sandy beach. By exposure to the influence of the weather, the
air, the sun, the rain, frosts and other violence, the calcareous
shells are broken and decomposed, and in a comparativel}^ few
years entirely disappear. Carbonic acid, of the rain-water, must
be a potent agent in their ultimate soliition as it percolates
through the sands. While the beach receives its constant sup-
plies of shells, no trace of these is to be found in the sands
immediately back of the shore ; which sands in former times
received the same incessant contributions. For similar reasons,
no doubt, calcareous fossils are comparatively rare in sandstones,
though in many cases their impressions are well preserved.

Flora of North America. — At the meeting of the Botanical
Section of the Academy, held on January 14, Dr. Asa Gray
spoke of the progress of the forthcoming portion of the Synop-
tical Flora of North America, and of the occasions which had led
to the publication of the middle portions in advance of the earlier.
It had seemed important now to secure the results of the many
years of study which he had given to the large and difficult order
of Compositae, which will form the bulk of the forthcoming part.
He spoke of the perplexities attendant upon the accurate defini-
tion of generic divisions in this order, and especially of properly
discriminating the species of such genera as Aster and Solidogo.
He had no idea that he had really solved the difficulties of this
kind, or that any one would entirely solve them; but he had done
his best. He could himself name the species of Solidago^ and he
could name a good many Asters ; but he doubted whether he
had enabled other botanists to name them. Being asked whether
his views respecting the limitation of species had not under-
gone some change, in the direction of admitting more species now
than formerly, he admitted that this was probably the case. He
still held to what might be termed the Linnsean conception ot
species, that they were to be taken in a broad sense and expected
to comprise various forms, which might or might not be classi-
fied into varieties. But whereas, in his younger days, species
were thought to be independent creations, and the real diff'erences.

14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884,

if we could find them, supposed to be absolute, we now look upon
allied species as haA'ing descended from a common ancient stock,
of which intermediate forms have died out, and therefore do not
expect that allied forms, on the whole distinct and definable,
should be completely unconnected by certain links or vestiges of
links. Moreover, it used to be thought that hybrids were neces-
sarily sterile, but it is now known that some hj'brids are fertile,
and that their offspring, fertilized b}'^ either parent, are generally
fertile ; that in this way intermediate forms between two species
may originate ; and it is clear that the two species ought not to
be reduced to one on account of such intermediate forms. Dr.
Gray referred to Rosa, Biibus and Hieraciwrn , in the Old World,
as genera in which no two botanists who had studied them could
agree as to what were species ; one school reducing them to very
few, which they can define only by disregarding certain interme-
diate forms ; the other multiplying them by hundreds, and char-
acterizing them by distinctions which might serve for the speci-
mens in hand, but which failed with every new collection. This
necessitated either the formation of a still finer-drawn set of species,
or the falling back to the broader Linnsean conception of a species.
The latter alternative had been generally followed in this country,
and Dr. Gray hoped that the coming American botanists would
incline to this view in the treatment of our critical genera.

Relation of Iledidlary Rays to the Strength of Timbei\ — Dr.
RoTHROCK called attention to some experiments made by Mr.
Frank Day, in the laboratoiy of the University of Penna.,on the
relation of the medullary ray to the strength of timber. Mr.
Day had found that it required just about twice as much force
(say 1130 pounds) to pull apart a square inch of live oak, if
the force ran parallel to these ra3's as if the force were applied
at right-angles to them.

What is true of the live oak was also largely true of other
timbers. The buttonwood (Platanvs occidentalis) was remark-
able for the development of its medullary rays, and also for the
difficulty in splitting that wood at right-angles to them.

Mr. Day's experiments also proved that there existed great
differences in the quality of the material of the woody fibre ; for
in timber where the relative proportion of wood and ducts could
well be compared, and where the fibres were of equal size through-
out, differences in strength were to be found.

Botanical Notes. Double Floicers in Gelsemium nitidum;
Euonymus Japonicvs ; Development of Fruit of Opuntia ; Helian-
thus tuberosus; Garya glabra. — Mr. Meehan exhibited two speci-
mens of double flowers of Gelsemium nitidum, one found wild
in Georgia, the other in Alabama. One was straw-colored, the
other deep yellow. He remarked that many double flowers in

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15

gardens, credited to the florists' skill, were wildlings which had
been taken into cultivation.

Mr. Meehan also remarked that Euonymus radicans, under
culture from Japan, is believed by some modern botanists to be
but a variety of £. Japonicus. He exhibited branches of the
latter which had been produced b}^ the former. They were not
varieties, but simply frutescent and radicant forms of each other.

The speaker exhibited specimens of Opuntia frutescens, var.
longinpina, in which fruit had formed, though no flowers had
appeared, the scarcely developed sepals and petals having been
thrown off the apex in infanc}' . A regular gradation from perfect
branches to these fruits was exhibited, some of those most
closely related to perfectl}^ formed fruit having a tendency to the
red coloring which marked the fruits. Occasion was taken to
emphasize the morphological doctrine, that fruits like apples
and pears are but arrested branches.

In continuation, Mr. Meehan reintroduced specimens exhibited
at a former meeting, showing that the roots of a supposed
Jerusalem artichoke, wild near Philadelphia, and supposed
to have been in some past time an escape from gardens, had
characteristics somewhat different from the form now under
culture in the vicinity, and inquired whether this might be what
has been hitherto known as Helianthus doronocoides^ which Dr.
Gray had demonstrated some years ago in Silliman's Journal, to
be the parent of H. tnberosns. If so, it might prove that this
species was indigenous to Eastern Pennsylvania.

Dr. Asa Gray did not think the species was indigenous here.
He rather suspected that the form now^ wild had once been the
cultivated one, and that the ones now in use had been introduced
since. He remarked that he had been working among the roots
of different species of the genus, during the past autumn, some
of which he found had merely fleshy roots, like those of Dahlia^
making no runners; others had runners developed into true tubers.

Mr. Meehan also exhibited some nuts of Carya glabra Torr.
(C. porcina Nutt.) which had been brought in by one of his
seed collectors from a tree in the woods in the vicinity of
Philadelphia. They had two or sometimes three nuts in a single
exoc.-np, as in the manner of Castanea vesca, the common
chestnut. The collector was under the impression that all the
nuts borne by the tree were of a similar character.

Dr. Asa Gray remarked that this occurrence of two or three
nuts of Carya within the same husk, either separate or partly
coherent, was of much morphological significance. Specimens
like these had been sent to him several years ago, said to have
been collected in Montgomery Co., Penna., with the remark that
the tree bore a good "many such abnormal fruits ; Dr. Gray
believed that the conclusion to which they inevitably pointed had

16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

not yet been published. It was, however, communicated to Dr.
Engelmann, along with a portion of his specimens, at least five
years ago. The conclusion drawn was the following : The husk,
or so-called exocarp, of Garya, is an involucre^ usually containing
a single female flower, and connate with its ovary ; its ti'ue mor-
phology is revealed when, as in this case, it contains two or three
flowers. The stone or shell of the nut is the whole pericarp in
Garya as much as in Gorylus. In the former genus it becomes
free from the four-valved involucre at maturity ; in Juglans the
congenital union is more permanent, forming a drupaceous acces-
sory fruit, of which the fleshy part is involucre, the bony part is
pericarp. This view directly homologizes the Juglandaceae with
the Gupuliferse.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 1*7

SOME PHENOMENA IN THE LIFE-HISTORY OF CLATHRULINA ELEGANS.
BY SARA GWENDOLEN FOULKE,

While collecting infusoria among Lemna and the leaves of
the yellow pond-lily, in a ditch on Brandywine Creek, Chester
county, Pennsjdvania, the writer was so fortunate as to secure
large numbers of that beautiful Heliozoan, Clathrulina elegans.

This rhizopod was attached in myriads to the roots of the
Lemna^ the groups in many cases being composed of above
twenty-five colony-stocks, so matted together by the twisting of
the pedicels, and so surrounded by waste matter, as completely
to conceal at that point the supporting root-fibre.

The animals were in a most active condition, feeding by means
of their characteristic pseudopodial rays, and multiplying so
freely by self-division, that the water was full of the Actinophrys-
like bodies, and almost eveiy capsule supported from one to ten
young individuals.

After being kept in captivity for two weeks, the large social
groups had decreased in number, although solitary individuals
were much more numerous. Reproduction was still going on,
but not so freely, and by more varied methods. The phenomena
exhibited during the act of reproduction are the subject of this
communication.

The modes of reproduction are four in number, two of these
being slightly similar, while the others essentially difl'er in char-
acter. These four modes are : Jirst, by division ; second, by the
instantaneous throwing off of a small mass of sarcode ; third, by
the transformation of the body into flagellate monads ; and
fourth, by the formation and liberation of minute germs. By the
Jirst mode, and this is the most common, the sarcode mass within
the capsule withdraws its rays, constricts, and divides into from
two to four granular masses, which, after a varying period of
rest, pass out from the capsule and instantly shoot forth pseudo-
podial rays on all sides, thus assuming the appearance of an
Actinophrys sol. These Actinophrys-like bodies after a time
develop a protoplasmic stalk, or pedicel, by which they attach
themselves, usually to the parent capsule. A thin film of proto-
plasm is then thrown out and subtended by the rays, at a short
distance from the body, and this, by development and secretion,

18 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

becomes the latticed siliceous capsule. The pedicel also becomes
more rigid, though always retaining a degree of flexibleness.
This manner of reproduction was first described by Cienkowski,
the great Russian observer, and discoverer of Glathrulina elegans
(see Leidy's Rhizopods of North America).

In the second mode of reproduction, the rays are not withdrawn,
nor does the body divide, but the sarcode becomes finally vacu-
olate, presenting knob-like projections. Suddenly a small mass of
sarcode, usually one of the knob-like projections, detaches itself,
and, passing out of the capsule, shoots out rays and develops,
though more slowly, in the manner described above. This con-
tinues until the parent body is much redi;ced in size, when the
rays again protrude and the animal returns to its normal condition.

The third mode of reproduction is by the formation and liber-
ation of minute germs. In this state, also, the rays are not
withdrawn, but the body of the Glathrulina becomes filled with
minute green particles, which, even before liberation, exhibit
active motion. A number of these are expelled, enclosed in a
thin protoplasmic film or globular sac, which bursts shortly, and
the liberated germs swim away. The development of these germs,
after this point, is yet to be followed.

The fourth mode is still more remarkable, and is also signifi-
cant in bringing to light a new phase in the life-history of the
Heliozoa. The Glathrulina in which these phenomena were first
observed, withdrew its rays and divided into four parts, as in the
ordinary inethod ; but the sarcode, instead of becoming granular
and of a rough surface, grew smoother and more transparent.
Then followed a period of quiescence ; — in this case of five or six
hours duration, although in other instances lasting three daj's
and nights ; after which one of the four parts began slowly to
emerge from the capsule, a second following a few moments later.

While passing through the capsule, these masses of sarcode
seemed to be of a thicker consistence than the similar bodies,
which, in the ordinary method, instantly assume the Actino-
phrys form. After both had passed completel}^ through, for
nearly a minute they lay quiet, gradually' elongating meanwhile.
Then a tremor became visible at one end, and a short prolonga-
tion of the sarcode appeared waving to and fro. This elongated
at the same time into a flagellum, the vibrations becoming more
rapid, until at the same moment both the liberated-monads darted
away through the water. Thej^ were followed for about ten

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19

minutes, when both were lost to sight among a mass of sediment,
and the fear of mistaking one of the common monads for them
led the observer to abandon the search. Returning to the parent
capsule, a third monad was found to have escaped in the mean-
time. After twenty-four minutes quiescence, the fourth body in
its turn approached the wall of the capsule, emerged, developed
a flagellum, and swam away, a free monad. With a one-half
inch objective this one was closely watched, and the following
details noted: bod3'^ oval, transparent; nucleus present, dark-
colored and situated near the centre ; a pulsating pink vesicle,
situated posteriorly ; and a flagellum slightly longer than the body.

For one hour and fifty-eight minutes the monad swam in all
directions, usually in concentric, ever widening circles, then
suddenly darting off at a tangent to begin again in a new spot.
At the end of this time, in its course it touched one of the free
young Clathrulina, and, to prevent it being used as food by its
cannibal relation, the glass cover of the live-box was tapped, so
that the current produced carried the monad a short distance
away, where it remained almost motionless several seconds.

B}' a change to a power of three hundred and fifty diameters,
the monad was shown to attach the top of its flagellum to the
glass and revolve swiftly for a few moments, when instantly the
whole body became spherical, rays were shot out, and the trans-
formed monad was in no point, except that of size, to be distin-
guished from its Actinophrys-like cousin, whose career had been
so diff'erent. In some cases the monads remained attached by
the flagellum, using it as a pedicel. The whole development, from
the time when the monad began its free life, occupied two hours
and some seconds.

This mode of reproduction secures a more widespread distri-
bution of the young than would be possible did this depend on
the sluggish Actinophrys form. It seems reasonable to suppose
that this is a wise provision for the perpetuation of the species,
should adverse conditions of life arise;. and also to prevent an
undue accumulation of the animals within a circumscribed space.

The tendency of these rhizopods to attach themselves to the
parent capsule, a result of the inertness of the Actinophrj^s form
of young; together with the fact that this mode of reproduction
was apparentl}' induced by a lengthened captivity, necessarily
the source of adverse conditions, would point to the reasonable-
ness of the above conclusions.

20 proceedings of the academy of [1884.

January 22.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-eight persons present.

The death of James C. Hand, a member, was announced.
A paper entitled " On Semper's Method of Making Dried
Preparations," by Dr. Benj. Sharp, was presented for publication.

Indian Mounds on the Miami River. — Mr. P. W. Putnam, Curator
of the Peabody Museum of American Archaeology and Ethnology,
Cambridge, Mass., gave an account of the explorations now in
progress by himself and Dr. C. L. Metz, of an interesting group
of earthworks in the Little Miami valley. It consists of twelve
mounds enclosed by an embankment of earth which runs across
the lowland and connects by a graded way with a circular embank-
ment on a hill thirty feet high, within which are two other
mounds. The mounds have pi'oved to be very important, as
several are constructed in a peculiar manner. In two of the
mounds circular stone walls were found, and from these walls
stones have been laid, covering in the central portions of the
mounds. Several of the mounds were sti'atified, and contained
basins, or " altars," of burnt clay, upon which were thousands of
objects more or less injured b^^ fire. Burnt human remains were
found in several of the mounds, and in others were skeletons,
showing that both methods of disposing of the dead wei'e resorted
to. Many interesting objects were found with the skeletons.
The most important discoveries were made on the " altars," which
contained, among other things, many works of art, including small
terra-cotta figures representing men and women, carved stone
dishes in the form of animals, and various objects cut from mica,
among them a serpent and a grotesque human face.

There were also found a large number of objects made of native
copper, and several of native or meteoric iron. This is the first
time that native iron has been found in the mounds. Several
copper ornaments were covered with silver, and a few fragments
of a thin sheet of hammered native gold were also obtained.
Over fifty thousand pearls were found on one of the altars, with
thousands of other ornaments made of bone, shell, and the teeth
of animals. Among the latter were large canine teeth of bears,
which may prove to be those of the grizzly bear, or some species
larger than the black bear. Several chipped points of obsidian
and a number of singular pendants made in a peculiar manner
from a micaceous schist, were on one of the altars.

Another important discovery was mentioned as having just
been made, but not yet worked out. This consisted of a series

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21

of large pits, six or seven feet deep, in the natural clay below the
burnt clay layer of one of the moui ds. These pits had long clay
tubes, or flues, extending from them, and there is some evidence
that these pits were used as places of cremation, but this must
be determined by further and careful study. A number of photo-
graphs were exhibited, illustrating the structure of the mounds
and the objects found in them.

Note on Manayunkia speciosa. — Mr. Edw. Potts reported
having found specimens of Manayunkia speciosa Leidy, amongst
material collected in the Schuylkill River, above Fairmount dam ;
thus determining what had previously admitted of a shade of
doubt, the strictly fresh-water habitat of this species. In contin-
uation he narrated some points within his own observation,
supplementary to Dr. Leidy's description.

The branchial organs (tentacles) appeared to him to be grouped
upon two processes on each of the lateral lophophores, eight each
in the upper or more dorsal groups, and six or possibly more in
each of the others. Beside these, there is a single pair placed
centrally upon the dorsal portion of the head, and a similar pair
opposite, which do not seem to be connected with either of these
groups. The whole number is therefore .32-36. The alternating
contractions and dilatations of the vessels conveying the green
blood through the dorsal pair above mentioned are very conspic-
uous.

While the general appearance of this crown of tentacles, when
expanded, is somewhat similar to that of a poly zoan, there is a
noticeable difl"erence in the effect produced by the motion of their
cilia. In the latter a powerful incurrent bears food particles,
etc.. towards the mouth as a vortex ; in the former case, while
the motion draws these particles from without or behind the
circle towards the tentacles, the moment the}' pass between them
they are influenced by an excurrent bearing them forcibl}' away.

This outflowing current is further shown by the fact that
excrementitious matters are drawn rapidly forward through the
tube, and ejected at its anterior extremity.

As food, therefore, cannot be sucked into the mouth of the
worm, we find that it is carried in. Acceptable particles which
touch the tentacles are grasped by the cilia, and rapidly passed
down amongst tiiem in near contact with the tentacle into grooves
at the base of the above-mentioned processes, and thence into the
digestive tract.

Beside the specimens above mentioned from the Schu^'lkill
River, Mr. Potts has had recently under observation a consider-
able number, say fifteen or twenty, from the pond near Absecom.
One of these, to which most of his time had been devoted, had
been kept for many days isolated in a microscopic stage tank.
While in this situation it, for some reason, left its old tube and
formed another, giving him the opportunity to observe the

22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

character of the latter, and the method of its construction. In
its earliest stages it is a transparent, smooth, and homogeneous
slime-like excretion, within which the worm may be very clearly
seen, as it works its way forward or drags itself backward by means
of its podal hooks and* spines. Later on, the anterior extremity
thickens and becomes more and more opaque, and, as Dr. Leidy
has observed, " feebly annulated," presumably from the adherence
of effete particles, and their compression by the repeated with-
drawal of the ciliated tentacles into the mouth of the tube. This
method of prolongation must continue during the residence of
the worm, and in consequence, if supported, it may sometimes
reach a length which is several times that of its inhabitant.

January 29.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-three persons present.

Fossil Bones from Louisiana. — Prof Leidy directed attention
to a collection of fossil bones, which have been submitted to his
examination by the Smithsonian Institution. They were obtained
by Mr, William Crooks, at the mine of the American Salt Com-
pany, near New Iberia, La. They chiefly consist of remains of
Mastodon americanus, of Equus major, of Equus, not distinguish-
able from those of the domestic horse, and of Mijlodon harlani.
Of Mastodon the collection contained well preserved molar teeth,
and characteristic fragments of bones. Of the Equus major,
there are vertebrae, fragments of long bones, and a number of
teeth. The molars are characterized by their comparatively large
size and complexity of arrangement in the enamel folding, espe-
cially of the upper molars. Of 3Ii/lodon there are several molar
teeth, vertebrae and other bones, mostly fragments. Among the
bones are two mature and well-preserved tibiae, the best specimens
yet discovered of the species. They are identical in form and
size with those of M. rohudus ; indicating M. harlani to have
been a species of the same size as the former. The extreme
length of the tibia internally is nine inches ; breadth across the
head, seven inches ; across the distal extremity, five and one-half
inches. Further collections were anticipated from the same
locality.

Foraminifera in the Drift of Minnesota. — Prof Leidy stated
that he had recently received for examination, from Mr. B. W.
Thomas, of Chicago, several glass slips with mounted specimens
of sand. These were obtained by washing clay from the boulder
drift of Meeker Co., Minnesota. In the specimens, Prof. Leidy

1884.] NATURAfi SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23

recognized some well-preserA-ed and characteristic foraminifera,
of which two forms appeared identical with Textularia globulosa
and Rotalia globulosa, now living in the Atlantic Ocean, The
fossils Mr. Thomas supposes to be derived from a soft yellow
rock, cretaceous shale and lignite, forming part of the drift. He
also reports the finding of fragments of marine diatomes in the
clay.

The following were elected members : — •

Benjamin R. Smith, Rev. Wayland Hoyt, Wm. Thomson, M.D.,
H. W. Stelwagon, M. D., John Struthers, D. G. Brinton, M. D.,
Thomas H. Fenton, M. D., and Miss Helen Abbott.

The following were elected correspondents : —

Karl A. Zittel, of Munich ; Marquis de Gaston de Saporto, of
Aix ; Quintino Sella, of Rome ; August Daubrie, of Paris ; and
Albert Gaudr.y, of Paris.

The following was ordered to be printed :— -

24 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

ON SEMPERS METHOD OF MAKING DRIED PREPARATIONS.
BY DR. BEN J AM UN SHARP.

Although this admirable method has been known and published
for a number of years, it does not seem to have met with general
acceptance. Man}' persons, indeed, with whom I have spoken
do not seem to know of it at all, and for that reason I do not
think it amiss to give an account of it here.

I have had the pleasure of working under Professor C. Semper,
the discoverer of this method, for two years, and have seen, as
well as prepared, many specimens. I have seen some specimens
that have been prepared b}-^ this method over ten years ago, and
not the slightest change has taken place in them, and they look
as beautiful as those just finished.

The method requires close attention at certain stages, and the
result depends upon the amount of care bestowed ; the end, when
successful, fully repays any amount of care that has been taken.

Nearly any animal or animal tissue may be prepared by this
method ; some require naturally more care than others — 'Of fish,
where there is a large quantity of fatty substance present, the
greatest care is to be taken.

Dissections of animals are especially adapted for this method,
and most of Prof. Semper's preparations are in this form. If
desirable, when finished, the different systems of organs may be
colored and thus serve as beautiful specimens for demonstration.

The object to be prepared is first placed in a solution of
chromic acid of about ^ to ^ per cent., or even 1 per cent.
In the case of dissections, these are to be prepared after the
animal is killed and then placed in a dissecting tray, the bottom
of which is filled with wax, so that diff"erent parts may be pinned
out and thus better exposed to view ; the tray may be then filled
with the chromic acid solution.

The size and consistency of the object determines the length
of time that it should remain in the solution ; Annelides, small
Gastropoda or Lamellibranchiata, small organs, as kidneys, etc.,
or small vertebrates, as frogs, mice, birds, etc., should remain in
from six to eight hours ; larger animals or organs from eight to
twenty-four.

The chromic acid is merely to kill the tissues, and at the same

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25

time hardens them somewhat. Any other of the hardening fluids
may be used, and for these I can refer the reader to Dr. C. O.
Whitman's paper on this subject, which appeared in the Amer-
ican NaturalUt^ (vol. xvi, 1882, pp. 697, 772). Chromic acid,
however, is the reagent that Prof. Semper always uses, and it
seems to answer ever3'^ purpose.

After the object has been left a sufficient length of time in the
fluid, this is poured oflJ" and the vessel filled with water, which
should be constantly' changed until there is no yellow color either
in tlie object or in the water. In other words, as much of the acid
must be withdrawn as possible. This part of the process is
considerably shortened by allowing a current of water to flow
through the vessel. This stage takes from ten to twenty hours,
or even more.

After this is completed the object is placed in weak alcohol,
from 30 to 40 per cent., for at least a day ; when the specimen is
quite small, ten or fifteen hours are sufficient. Then the alcohol
may be strengthened to 60 or 70 per cent., and the object remain
in this for two or thi'ee days (with larger objects, a week).

The object may now be placed in strong alcohol, from 90 to
95 per cent., for about the same length of time as with the 70
per cent. It may, indeed, remain here for weeks or months.
I have often taken specimens that had been well preserved,
after having been for a year in 90 per cent, alcohol, with as
good a result as if freshly prepared.

In cases of dissections where parts have been pinned apart,
after passing through the 70 per cent alcohol stage, they may be
taken carefully out of the traj's, and the rest of the process gone
through with in closely stopped bottles, for they are at this point
quite stitf.

When objects have remained a sufficient length of time in the
strong alcohol, they are placed in absolute alcohol. If the strong
alcohol be changed once or twice, it will necessaril}'^ save the
absolute alcohol to some extent.

This stage of absolute alcohol is the most critical part of the
whole process. Absolutely every particle of the water must be
removed, and the secret of the whole success depends on this one
point. If an}^ water be left in the tissue, it will become spotted
and eventually spoil. I feel positive that those who have tried
this method and have failed to produce satisfactory results, have

26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

not been careful enough to remove every particle of water, I
always take the precaution of changing the absolute alcohol once
or twice, especially in moist climates.

After all the water has been withdrawn by the absolute alcohol,
by remaining in it for three daj's to a week, the object is placed
in turpentine, the best that can be procured. In this it is allowed
to remain until it becomes thoroughly saturated — with large
objects it is best to change the turpentine once. Two or three
days are required for this stage. When saturated the object is
quite stiff, and when the process is successful little or no contrac-
tion has taken place. The object is then placed in the air and
protected carefully from the dust, and the turpentine allowed to
evajjorate. The object then soon presents a very beautiful
appearance ; it becomes white, resembling the whitest kid. It is
light, stiff and, on account of the resin it contains, is perfectly
insect-proof.

In annelides the iridescence is perfectly kept ; hair and feathers
retain their original colors.

If hollow organs, as the stomach, bladders, lungs, etc, are to
be prepared, they may be blown up after they have been a short
time in the turpentine ; by so doing much space, and consequently
much alcohol, are saved.

This is the practical part of the method, and I may add in a
few words the whole principle. The object is to earefull}'^ and
slowly harden the tissue and to remove every particle of luater,
the place of which is taken by the resin.

If the process be hurried contractions are apt to occur, and
consequently bad-looking specimens result.

The advantages of this method are great. We have a perfectly
dry object, with the perfect form kept ; it is far preferable to
handle than alcoholic dissections or preparations. It will last
indefinitely and is insect-proof.

Prof, Semper keeps his preparations in glass boxes which are
perfectly dust-proof, and by this both sides of the preparation
can be distinctly seen.

An addition to this process was discovered by Prof, Semper
about two years ago, which I do not think has yet been published.
It is to place the prepared object in a solution of glycerine and
sugar. In some objects this brings back almost entirely the
original color of the animal ; one disadvantage of this is, however,

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27

that unless kept in dust-proof cases they would become spoiled
by the dust collecting on them.

As absolute alcohol is so expensive in this country, the cost of
a large specimen would be considerable, and therefore the process
is better adapted for smaller objects.

A cheap method of making absolute alcohol, from the strong
(95 per cent.) spirit, used in Prof. L. Rauvier's laboratory in
Paris, would not, I think, be out of place to be mentioned here.

The details of this process were given me by my friend, Dr.
W. Yignal, the assistant of Prof. Rauvier. A wide-mouthed
bottle is takeji, holding about a litre, and a three-quarters filled
with the strong alcohol.

A mass of pulverized cupric sulphate (CuSO^ + 5 Aq.) is
heated to a red heat in order to drive off the water of crystalliza-
tion. This is poured, when cool, into the alcohol, the mouth of
the bottle quicklj^ closed, and the whole shaken. The cupric
sulphate is insoluble in alcohol, but has an affinity for the water
contained in it, and the water is consequently taken up, and the
cupric sulphate becomes bluish. When this has stood — with
occasional shakings — for a day or so, decant, and repeat the
operation, especially if there is very much of a blue color in the
sediment.

When finished a drop of alcohol can be mixed with a drop of
turpentine on an object-glass, and if there be no particles of water
to be seen under the microscope, the alcohol is absolute enough
for all practical purposes.

28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

February 5.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-seven persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —

" Notes on a Collection of Anchovies from Havana and Key
West, with an account of a new species, Stolephorus eurystole,
from Wood's Holl, Mass.," by Jos. Swain and Seth E. Meek.

" On a new species of Rotifer, of the Genus Apsilus," by
Sara Gwendolen Foulke.

The death of Wm. T. Haines, a member, was announced.

February 12.

Rev. H. C. McCooK, D. D., in the chair.

Thirty persons present.

A paper entitled " List of Fishes from Egmont Key, Florida,
in the museum of Yale College, with descriptions of two new
species," by David S. Jordan, was presented for publication.

Fresh-water Sponges as improbable causes of the pollution of
river-water. — Mr. Potts reported that on the 9th of February
he had visited and partiallj'^ examined the forebay at Fairmount
Water-works, on the Schuylkill River, from which the water had
been temporarily withdrawn, with a view to discover the winter
condition of the fresh-water sponges and the other inhabitants
of that locality. He found far the larger part of the wall surface
below the water-line inaccessible on account of a thick deposit
of mud upon the bottom, and much water remaining in the fore-
bay. Wherever reached, however, and so far as the eye could
detect in other places, it was covered by a mud-colored incrusta-
tion of considerable thickness, which a more minute examination
showed to be composed almost wholly of the statoblasts and
spicules of tlie sponge Meyenia Leidyi. Some few fragments
of Meyenia fluviatilis and Spongiila fragilis were seen, but the
first-named was clearly the prevailing species.

A sluiceway which formerly supplied the last of the old " breast
wheels " used in pumping into the reservoir, but from which the
water had been for many months excluded, was entered and
examined. Here the remaining incrustation (much having doubt-
less crumbled and fallen away) was from one-fourth to one-half

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29

an inch thick, of the appearance of crumbling plaster, and, as in
the other cases, it consisted of the sponge before named, with
but a small proportion of intruded material.

While considering the effect of the presence of so large a
sponge-growth at the very inlet to the supply-pumps, Mr. Potts
stated that this particular species was conspicuous among the
known North American sponges by its great relative density
and the small proportion of its sarcode or flesh. Its decay, there-
fore, at the termination of its period of summer growth would
be a less cause of pollution to the water-supply than that of any
other sponge

Moreover, from recent investigations into the life-history of
these low organisms, he was inclined to believe that decay was
not the normal or necessary result of the close of each season's
growth. The fragile branches of some species inhabiting exposed
situations toa}', of course, be broken off and destroyed while the
sarcode still covers them; but in the sessile portions, and in all
when sufficiently protected, the cells of the sarcode at the period
of full maturity, forsaking their places along the lines of the
skeleton framework, gather together by simultaneous amoeboid
movements into dense groups, where thej^ are soon covered by
a tough chitinous " coat," which, in time, generalh' becomes
surrounded by a " crust " of minute granular cells, and armor-
plated by a series of protective spicules. These groups are now
recognized as the statoblasts, gemmules or winter-eggs of the
sponge — eggs only in appearance — in reality the resting spores
or protected germs which conserve the life of the individual
through the cold and storms of winter, and awake very early iri
the springtime into new life — yet a continuance only of the
same existence which was seen a few months before nestling into
this winter's sleep.

If this is the ordinary course with these organisms there seems
no reason to regard them as serious causes of the pollution of
our streams, though violent freshets before this resting period is
reached may tear them to pieces, and their decay may give a
temporary taint to the water.

Continuing the narrative of his exploration, Mr. Potts described
the iron pipes which had lain for many years upon the bottom of
the fore-bay, as covered in some places to the depth of an inch
or more, with a crust richly colored by iron-oxide, but principally
composed, as were the others, of the spicules and statoblasts of
M. Leidyi. Upon the surface of this crust in places, he found
the remains of large colonies of Urnatella gracilis Leidy. In
the absence of a\-\y positive knowledge of the winter condition of
this curious polyp, Mr. Potts had examined with much interest
a novel form of statoblast, which was frequent upon the same
pieces of sponge ; but he was unsuccessful in associating it with
the polyzoan. It is most probable that the life is continued as
suggested by Dr. Leid}', within the urn-like joints of this crea-

30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

ture, and that they put out buds and a new growth in the spring.
To discover if this be the ease he had placed some fragments in
water, and while awaiting results he had been surprised at the
appearance within a few daj^s amongst the fragments of Urnatelta,
of numbers of the recently described chsetobranch-worm, Mana-
yunkia speciosa, of Leidy, as well as several living cells of a
species of Faludicella, probably F. elongata, of the same author.
The persistence and tenacity of life in these apparently delicate
creatures, overcoming not only the severity of a hard winter,, but
an exposure of several days in the open air, were further com-
mented upon.

February 19.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Thirty-seven members present.

The deaths of Dr. Geo. Engelmann and Prof. Arnold Guyot,
correspondents, were announced.

Indian use of Apocynum cannabinum as a textile fibre. — At
the meeting of the Botanical Section held on the 18th inst., Mr.
Thomas Meehan stated that while it was well known that the
fibre of Apocynum canaahinum was used by the Eastern Indians
in the manufacture of baskets, mats and other articles, he had
heard it doubted whether the same plant was used by the Indians
in the West. He had interested a ladj- in Washoe Valley, West-
ern Nevada, to get direct from the Indians of that section stems
of the plant used by them. She had done so, and he now exhib-
ited them. They proved to be the same plant, Apocynum can-
nabinum,.

The Longevity of Trees. — Professor Sheafer, of Pottsville, Pa,,
i-eading an abstract of Mr. Meehan's remarks, in Proceedings of
the Academy , had cut and sent for the inspection of members some
specimens from Schuylkill county, remarkable for slow growth,
of a black oak, Quercus tinctoria, in which the annual growths
showed in a little over two inches from the centre an average of
36 circles to an inch ; one of hemlock spruce, Abies Canadensis,
51 to an inch; and one of the common chestnut, Castanea vesca
Americana, 24 to an inch. Though only four inches in diameter,
the oak stem was seventy-six years old ; the hemlock one hun-
dred and four years and in diameter four inches ; and the chestnut
four and a half inches in diameter in sixty years.

With a struggle for life either from poverty of the soil, eleva-
tion, or close growth of trees, which the small annual growths

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31

indicated, Mr. Meehan believed the atmospheric conditions, as
regards shelter from wind or from drying atmospheric currents,
must be very favorable to induce longevity under such circum-
stances. There seemed to be no reason why these trees might
not reach the full average duration of two hundred years, which
he had before named as about the duration of most trees of the
Eastern United States.

Prof. Sheafer gave some instances indicating th-at the average
might be higher than the figures he had offered.

Parasitism in Boschniakia glabra, E. Meyer. — Mr. Meehan
exhibited a specimen of this Orobanchiaceous plant collected by
him last summer, growing among alders in the track of the
retreating Davidson Glacier, near Pyramid Harbor, lat. 59°, in
Alaska, and remarked that the life-histories of this class
of parasitic plants were but imperfectly known, and every
new fact of interest. In the Yosemite Valley last year, with Mr.
John M. Hutchings and Dr. Charles Shaffer, of the Academy,
they had carefully dug out masses of eai'th with the snow plant
of the Sierras. Sarcodes sanguinea, and then tenderly washed
out ever}' particle of earth in a stream near by. There was not
the slightest sign of attachment to any root, and no root of any-
thing to be found in the mass of earth. There were not even the
slightest remains of any dead vegetation which could suggest
that the plant was even a saprophyte, as was generally found in
the case of Monotropa unifiora. There was nothing but a huge
mass of coralline fleshy matter, out of which the inflorescence
rose. The origin of this fleshy mass was yet the unsolved mys-
tery. From analogy with the behavior of other plants, he
was inclined to believe that there was some parasitic attachment
in the early life of the plant, and that it stored up in this coralline
mass enough nutrition in one season to support the inflorescence
of another, and, after this was done, severed the connection,
leaving no trace by the time the mass was large enough to
support the heavy drain of the large and juicy inflorescence. In
BoschMiakia, something of this sort had evidently taken place.
The plants were in an early flowering stage, and all, when drawn
out of the ground, had a single thread-like root depending from
the centre of the pseudo-bulbous base of the plant, as in the speci-
men exhibited. These threads, now hard and wood-like, broke off
very easily at the time, and it did not occur to the collector that
they might be alder roots, as the densit}' of the substance might
now suggest. The desire to botanize over as large a tract as
possible in the six hours given by the commander of the ship,
did not admit of time to dig down and ascertain directly whether
these threads were alder roots, and in direct connection with the
living alder plants ; but it would be remarkable, if the^^ should be
alder roots-, and the Boschniakia sessile on them, that the plants
should all select roots of the same slender size, and so nearly

32

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

exactly alike as the twelve or eighteen specimens examined in this
way indicated. Mr. Meehan stated that he had, in his Flower a
ami Ferns of the United States, series ii. vol. ii, p. 95, noted the
existence of a similar thready attachment at the base of Epiphe-
gns Virginiana, evidently connecting the plant with a foster-
parent in early life — a fact since confirmed by Mr. Fergus, of
West Chester, Pa. ; and a fuller examination of these cases might
afibrd the clue to all.

Variation in Halesia. — Mr. Meehan exhibited dry leaves and
fruit of Halesia diptera, H. tetrajjtera, and of a remarkable
departure raised from the last-named species some years ago.
This appeared in a bed of seedlings all raised from seed gathered

from one tree growing in a garden
in Germantown. It attracted atten-
tion when one year old by the leaves
bearing a resemblance to those of an
apple-tree. The parent tree had
leaves narrowl}' lanceolate and acu.
minate, rather thin,
pale green on the upper
surface, and with no
particularly prominent
veins. The plant in
question had broadly
ovate leaves, scarcely
pointed, very dark
green and rugose on
the upper surface, and
strongly veined and
hirsute below. It was
planted to see what it
would come to.

The flowers were open cup-shaped,
instead of being drawn into a narrow
tube at the base, as in the parent
plant and the pistil was wholly
enclosed and not exserted. For
several years the plant was sterile,
and many good botanists, whose attention was called to it,
regarded the plant as a hybrid, and the sterility as a proof
thereof. It seemed of no avail to point out that there was no
other species with which the parent could have obtained pollen
within many miles, nor to show that hybrids were not neces-
sarily^ sterile. This season the plant produced fruit for the first
time, some of which were now exhibited to the Academy.
They are very small, not much over a quarter of an inch in diam-
eter, and the four equal wings were comparatively large and of a
strongly coriaceous character. The fruit which had been cut

1(7. H. tetraptera.

1. H. tetraptera.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 33

open were found to have perfect seeds. If the plant with these
leaves, flowers and fruit had been found-in a state of nature, the
botanist would surely have made a new species of it, if indeed he
would not have had some doubts of a new genus.

Mr. Meehan then referred to his contributions in the past,
tending to show that there was an innate tendency in plants to
varv; that this natural tendency was at the foundation of all
theories of evolution, and that environment had not near the
influence on variation some good botanists claimed for it. If we
were to take environment as a serious element of change, there
would be no certainty in the direction of change ; but a glance at
the palaeontological and other evidences showed that change had
been always in the direction of certain uni-
form lines, and evidently in accord with a pre-
determined plan, which the accidents of envi-
ronment hacl not been able to override. At
any rate, such illustrations as this of
the HaUsia showed a remarkable
change with which certainly environ-
ment had nothing to do. The seeds
were all from one tree, with not even
another individual of its own species
near it. The seedlings all came up jj fetrap-
in one bed together, and yet out of 'era, var.
many hundred seedlings, all with the same
exact conditions of environment, there was
n. tetraptera, var. j^^^^ Qj^g with even an approach to the
singular peculiarities of this.

In regard to the sterility or fertility of plants, what we would
call environment had evidently' much to do, and this also he had
endeavored to point out in former botanical contributions. In
his paper before the American Association for the Advancement
of Science, at Detroit, in 1875, he had shown that Mr, Darwin's
experiments in keeping bees from clover, and which in England
led to sterility, did not so prove in Philadelphia, the protected
plants there being fertile; and he there made the suggestion that
the diflTerent conditions of environment led to the different results.
He had also since then shown that Linwm perenne in Philadelphia
was self-fertile, though in England Mr. Darwin had found that
one might as well apply so much inorganic dust to a pistil as the
flower's own pollen. Here we have another illustration. The
exuberance of vegetative growth being checked by age, or some
other circumstance of climate or season, acting against the vege-
tative and in favor of the reproductive principles —principles we
know by many illustrations were antagonistic — gave us this
season an environment for the first time favorable to fertility.
The figures are two-thirds the actual size.

The following were ordered to be published : —

34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

NOTES ON A COLLECTION OF ANCHOVIES FROM HAVANA AND KEY WEST,
WITH AN ACCOUNT OF A NEW SPECIES (STOLEPHOEUS EUEYSTOLE)
FBOM WOOD'S HOLL, MASS.

BY JOSEPH SWAIN AND SETH E. MEEK.

The present paper is based on a large collection of Anchovies,
made by Professor Jordan at Havana, Cuba, and at Key West,
Fla. We recognize two species of Stolephorus in this collection
from Havana. Both of these species occur in the collection from
Key West, as also Stolephorus miarchus, a species hitherto re-
corded only from Mazatlan and Panama on the Pacific Coast.

We are indebted to Professor Jordan for the use of his library
and for valuable suggestions.

1. Stolephorus perfasciatus (Poey^ Swain and Meek.

Engraulis perfasciatus Poey, Memorias Cuba, ii, 313, 1858 (Havana);
Poey, Syn. Pise. Cuba, 421, 1868 (Havana) (not of Poey, Synopsis,
p. 460); Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., vii, 391 (Cuba) (not of
Swain, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1882, 55, nor of Jor. and Gilb., Syn.
Fish. N. A., 273).

Head 4 to 4^ in length to base of caudal. Depth 5f to 6^.
Dorsal 12 to 13. Anal 14 to 16.

Body oblong, somewhat compressed. Snout shorter than eye,
compressed and painted. Top of head with a slight keel. Eye
about 3^ in head. Mouth slightly oblique. Maxillary and lower
jaw finely toothed. The posterior end of maxillary rounded, not
extending quite to margin of preopercle. Gill-rakers numerous,
rather weak and toothed on under side, the longest about 1^ in
eye. Pectoral fins about If in head, their tips not reaching
ventrals by about diameter of eye. Yentrals short, their tips not
reaching anal b}' length of fin. Caudal forked. Origin of anal
below last ray of dorsal. Origin of dorsal midway between root
of caudal and pupil. Scales deciduous. Color as in Stolephorus
broioni, without dark punctulations except on base of caudal
and often on base of anal. Sides with a well-defined silvery
band, its width about | eye, being rather narrower than usual in
S. browni.

This description is taken from numerous well-preserved speci-
mens, about 2 J inches in length, obtained by Prof. Jordan with

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 35

a seine at Key West. Five specimens, the largest about 3 inches
in length, were also obtained at Havana.

Stolephorus perfasciatus Jordan and Gilbert, Sj'n. Fishes North
America, p. 273, and Swain, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1882, p. 55,
is a different species, apparently without a name. It diflfers
chiefly in a greater number of anal rays, and in having a wider
and less silvery lateral band. No specimen of the true perfas-
ciatus is known to reach the size of the specimen from Wood's
Holl, Mass. This species from Wood's Holl may stand as
Stolephorus eurystole Swain and Meek. Specimens of this species,
perhaps mixed with others, have been distributed by the U. S.
National Museum under the following numbers, 19,003 to 19.017.
The one originally described by Mr. Swain and by Jordan and
Gilbert- was destroyed in the burning of the Museum of the
Indiana University, but others like it exist in the U. S. National
Museum.

2. Stolephorus browai (Gmelin^ Jordan and Gilbert.

This species is by far the most common of the Anchovies, both
at Key West and Havana. For synonymy and description see
Swain, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1882, 56. Engraulis perfasciatus
Poey, Syn. Pise. Cuba, 1868, 460, is apparently' not a true
perfasciatus, and is probably this species.

3. Stolephorus miarohus Jordan and Gilbert.

Stolephorus miarclius Jordan and Gilbert, Proceed. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1881, 334 (Mazatlan).

Four specimens from Key West. We are unable to detect any
discrepancy between these specimens and the descriptions pub-
lished by Jordan and Gilbert of the types of this species from
Mazatlan.

4. Cetengraulis brevis (P'ey) Swain and Meek.

Engraulis brevis Poey, Repert. Fis. Nat. Cuba, i, 879, 1866 (Cuba) ;
Poey, Syn. Pise. Cuba, 422, 1868 (Cuba) ; Giinther, Cat. Fishes
Brit. Mus., vii, 383, 1868 (no specimen).

Head in length to base of caudal, 3^ (4^ in total) ; greatest
depth 3 (3|) ; about 40 scales in lateral line, and 11 scales in a
transverse series beginning at origin of anal fin. Anal 33 to 25.
Dorsal 15.

Body deep, compressed ; belly compressed, not serrate. Head
rather short. Snout short and sharply pointed, If in eye, which

36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

equals the width of interorbital area and is contained 4 times in
the length of head.

Mouth somewhat oblique ; mandible extending little in front
of anterior part of orbit. Maxillar}'^ slender, very finely toothed
on posterior two-thirds only, not quite reaching root of mandible.
Lower jaw toothless. Gill-rakers close-set, longer than diameter
of eye, 3^ in head. Cheeks triangular, longer than high.

Scales rather firm, not caducous. Pectoral fin not reaching
base of ventral, 2 in head. Yentrals short, 3 in head. Caudal
deeply forked, minutely scaled, l^ in head. Base of anal contained
If times in head. Dorsal and anal fins with dense basal sheaths,
which entirely hide the fin when depressed.

Color in spirits plain silvery on sides, darker above. A dark
band beneath the scales about as broad as eye, extending from
upper angle of opercle to caudal.

This description is based on specimens about 4^ inches in
length, obtained by Prof. Jordan in the Havana Market.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37

ON A NEW SPECIES OF BOTIFER, OF THE GENUS AFSILUS.
BY SARA GWENDOLEN FOULKE.

Among Spirogyra and Anacharis, gathered in Fairmount Park,
were noticed numbers of large rotifers, attached to filaments and
leaves of the plants. Though resembling in some respects the
forms, Dictyophora, of Leidy ; Apsilus^ of Meczinchow, and
Cupelopngus, of Forbes, this rotifer still possesses sufflcientl}^
striking differences to warrant its being regarded as a distinct
species. The size of the specimens examined varied greatly,
the maximum size being one-fiftieth of an inch, from the top of
the extended net to the end of the body.

The ventral outline of the body is ovoid ; the lateral outline is
crescent-shaped ; while the dorsal outline is similar to the ventral.
Instead of rotatory organs, this rotifer possesses a membraneous
cup or net, near the base of which, on the ventral side, are two
lateral antennae, as in Apsiliis lentiformis.

When the net is retracted, the antennae are also withdrawn into
the body, and concealed from view. This is an unusual habit
among the Rotatoria, the antennae being usually situated upon
the body, and remaining exposed so as to act as sentinels
when the rotatory organs are retracted. This net is used for
the capture of food, consisting of the larger infusoria closino-
over an}' organism which is attracted into it. After capture, the
food passes through the oral aperture into a large, sac-like
passage-way, and thence into a second pouch, which extends across
the bod}' in the form of a much-wrinkled bag. The two ends of
this bag widen into sacculated pouches, which are used as store-
houses for the food while softening. This organ may be reo-arded
as the stomach proper, being filled with a greenish granular fluid
which performs the office of a true gastric juice, softenino- the
tissues of the contained food, in preparation for the action of the
mastax. When this maceration has been sufficiently prolonged,
the food is forced, by muscular contraction, out of its recess,
along the narrow central portion, past the mastax and into the
opposite pouch. As the stream of food passes, the mastax,
which is situated centrally at the bottom of the stomach, turns,
so as to face the stream of mingled food and gastric fluid ; and
works actively, chopping and bruising such portions as come

38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

within reach. The raastax exactly resembles that of the three
other known species, being composed of two cftrved major unci,
near the base of each of which are situated four minor unci. After
beinor acted upon by the mastax, the food passes between the
unci into the oesophagus whence it is absorbed or thrown off by
the system. The ventral view of these organs is usually obscured
by large numbers of embryo, in various stages of development.
In front of the digestive sac, and apparently connected with it,
are two curved, pear-shaped sacs, of a transparent greenish hue.

This rotifer, in common with all members of its genus, has
an unarticulated body, which is incapable of contraction.

The net, which takes the place of rotatory organs, is shaped
like a hood, the ventral portion being elevated into an obtuse
lobe. In order to strengthen and support the long, curved, dorsal
outline of the net, there is, covering about two-thirds of it, a
membraneous shield, made doubly strong by two wide, arched,
muscular bands running around it. At the base of this shield is
a pointed projection, which is of still firmer composition. The
necessity for such an arrangement is obvious, when it is remem-
bered that the normal position of the animal is a semi-recumbent
one ; so that the weight of the net, which is about three-quarters
the area of the body, would be very considerable at these care-
fully strengthened points.

The whole muscular system of this species is strongly marked
and powerful. Focussing downwards from the outside of the
dorsal view of the net, two gradually narrowing ridges or flaps
are seen extending up the inside of the hood. These flaps are
fringed with quite long cilia, and there are also shorter diagonal
lines of more minute cilia, the exact number of which lines could
not be accurately determined. This is the first instance in which
cilia have been discovered in any member of the genus, all
those species previously described, being stated to be totally des-
titute of these organs. In this case, their presence was first
detected while focussing through the dorsal side of the net,
although they could afterwards be plainly seen in a ventral view.
It was only by careful placing of the mirror that the cilia were
visible.

Attached to the inside walls of the rotifer were the enigmatical
transparent bodies common in the Rotatoria ; and also a number

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39

of purplish brown bodies, varying in intensity of tint, whose
character is as yet unknown.

The rotifer, in the adult state, is tailless, eyeless, and attached
in a semi-recumbent position, from which it is incapable of
detaching itself, and without the power of re-attaching itself
when displaced.

In the young state it has two red eye-spots ; a clums}' telescopic
tail, terminating in a broad, cup-shaped sucker ; and is so actively
free swimming that no accurate drawing could be obtained. In
this undeveloped state the rudimentary^ net is a thick fleshy
triangle, the truncated apex of which is inserted into the body,
while the base is surrounded by a wreath of cilia, on the closed
space within which the eye-spots are set. There is in this stage
no opening to admit nourishment.

The development of this form into that of the very dissimilar
adult state is most interesting, and well worth the time and
patience necessaiy to observe it.

It is proposed to unite the three forms, Dictyophora voracc,
Apsilus lentiformis, Gupelopagus bucinedax, and the form
described above, in one genus under the name Apsilus. The name
Dictyophora would have the first claim for adoption, but it is
already in use in two other branches of science, so that the choice
must fall upon the next in order of priorit3\ The specific names
given to the forms by their discoverers are retained. The history
of the genus is as follows: In 1857, Dr. Jos. Leidy discovered
and described a form which he named Dictyophora vorax. In
1866, Meczinchow described and named a similar form which he
named Apsilus lentiformis, the diflferenees from Dictyophora
being as follows : shape of the cup ; presence of two lateral
antennas ; and presence of a conspicuous ganglion of the pouch.

In 1882, S. A. Forbes described a form which he named Gupel-
opagus bucinedax, designating it as a new genus. The differences
between this and the two forms previously described are as
follows: Gupelopagus differs from Dictyophora in the shape
of the net, and in the general shape of the body, the difference
in these particulars being very marked. It differs from Apsilus
in the absence of the ganglion of the pouch, in the absence of the
lateral antennae, and in other minor particulars.
• The species described by the author varies from the foregoing
in the following respects: it differs from Dictyophora in the

40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

shape of the cup, as well as that of the body ; in the presence
of two lateral antennae ; in the possession of a second crop or
stomach situated below the ordinary crop ; in the marked muscu-
lar system, and in the ciliation of the net.

The points of dissimilarity between this form and Apsilus
are as follows : The shape of the cup ; the absence of the gan-
glion ; the presence of a second stomach, and in the ciliation
of the cup. It differs from Gupelopagus: in the shape of
the cup ; in the construction of the cup ; in the two lateral
antennae ; in the presence of a secondary stomach ; and in the
ciliation of the net.

The presence of the secondary stomach distinguishes this
species from the rest of the genus. The presence of cilia is not
so certain a distinction, as by dexterous management of illumi-
nation their presence might possibly be detected in some other
of the species.

From the presence of the secondary stomach or pouch, it is
proposed to name this new species Apsilus bipera — pera meaning
" a little pouch to carry food."

The reasons for uniting the three forms heretofore considered
separate genera, are, of course, founded on the strong points of
resemblance; these being, briefly, the presence of two ej^e-spots,
of a membraneous cup, of a mastax exactly similar in all four
forms, of the absence of tail or footstalk, of the absence of cara-
pace, and of the similar habits.

The characteristics heretofore used in the classification of the
Rotatoria, as denoting members of the same genus, are : charac-
ter of rotatory organs ; number of e\'e-spots ; absence or presence
of carapace, and habits.

In selecting the name for this new division, Dictyophora, of
Leidy, has the right of priority', but, owing to its having been
already many years in use, in two other branches of science, the
choice must fall upon that next in order of priority, which is
Apsilus, of Meczinchow.

Tlie genus Aj^silus, then, will consist of four species — Apsilus
vorax Leid}'^ ; Apsilus lentiformis Meczinchow ; Apsilus buci-
nedax Forbes ; and Apsilus bipera Foulke.

As there is no family in the class Rotatoria, in which the above
genus may be placed, a new family, to be named Apsilidse, is pro-

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPmA. 41

posed ; characteristic, the substitution of a membraneous cup or
net, destitute of external ciliation, in the place of the ordinary
rotatory organs.

Bibliog. — Leidy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1857, 204; Meczinchow, Zeits.f.
wis. Zoologie, 1866, 346, Taf. XIX; Forbes, Am. Month. Micros. Jour.,
1882, 102, 151.

REFERENCES TO PLATE I.

Fig. 1. Apsilus vorax (Dictyop7wra vorax of Leidy). a. Membraneous net.
6. Crop, c, c. Embryo, d. Mastax. e. CEsophagus. /. Oral aper-
ture, g. Vent. h. Muscular system of net. Seduced from drawing
by Leidy. The body is slightly wider in proportion to the net than in
original drawing.

Fig. 2. Apsilus lentiformis Meczinchow. a, a. Antennae, b. Muscular
system of net. c. Crop. d. Mastax. e, e. Embryo. /. CEsophagus.
g. Purplish brown bodies. Beducedfrom drawing by Meczinchow.

Fig. 3. Apsilus bucinedax (Cupelopagus bucinedax of Forbes), a. Net.
b. Oral aperture, c. Crop. d. Mastax. e, e. Embryo. /. (Esopha-
gus. Reduced from drawing by Forbes.

Fig. 4. Apsilus bipera Foulke. a, a. Antennae, b. Muscular system of
net. c. Oral aperture, d. Crop. e. Secondary sacculated stomach.
/. Mastax. g. ffisophagus. h, h: Embryo, i. Enigmatical pur-
plish brown bodies attached to walls of body.

Fig. 5. Apsilus lentiformis Meczinchow. a, a. Ganglion of the pouch.
Superficial view when closed.

Fig. 6. Dorsal view of net of Apsilus lentiformis. a, a, a, a. Muscular
system.

Fig. 7. Dorsal view of net of Apsilus bipera. a. Shield, b. Pointed
support, c. Portion of net above shield, d. Muscular system of
shield, e. Ciliated flaps extending up inside of net.

42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

LIST OF FISHES FBOM EGMONT KEY, FLORIDA, IN THE MUSEUM OF
YALE COLLEGE, WITH DESCRIPTION OF TWO NEW SPECIES.

BY DAVID S. JORDAN.

A small collection of fishes from Egmont Key, in Tampa Bay,
Southern Florida, belonging to the Museum of Yale College, has
been sent to me for identification by Professor A. E. Verrill.
The fishes were collected some years ago, a part by Mr. William
F. Coons, the remainder by Mr. E. Jewett. In the following list
the species collected by Mr. Jewett are marked with the initial
"J". Those not thus marked were obtained by Mr. Coons. The
numbers given are those on the register of the Museum of Yale
College. Those marked with a star (*) have been presented to
the Museum of Indiana University.

1. Rhinobatus lentiginosus Garmau. (805, 821*.)
An adult specimen and a f(etus.

2. Opiethonema oglinum (Le Sueur) Bean. (809.)

(Opisthonema thrissa Auct., not Clupea thrissa L.)
The original type of Glupea thrissa L. was a fish brought from
China by Lagerstrom and described by Linnaeus' pupil Odhel, in
the Amoen. Academ., v, 251, under the name (prebinomial) of
Glupea thryza. Lagerstrom 's fish was a species of Dorosoma.
The Glupea thrissa of Osbeck was also a Dorosoma. In the
synonymy given by Linnagus, of Glupea thrissa, in the tenth
edition of the Systema Naturge, are included, among others, some
references to our Opisthonema. In this twelfth edition of the
same work is a description of a Glupea thrissa received from Dr.
Garden of Charleston. This ^Hhrissa^^ is Doroson i cepedianum.
The species called Glupea thrissa by Broussonet, Cuvier and
most later authors, is our Opisthonema, but the specific name
thrissa can be properly used only for the Chinese Dorosoma, for
which it was at first intended. The oldest name belonging to
our species (as already noted by Dr. Bean, Mss.) is that of
Megalops oglina Le Sueur.

3. Sidera ooellata (Agafsiz) J. and G. (804; 824* [.T]; 840.)

4. Coecula soaticaris (Goode and Bean) J. and G. (800*; 801.)

Head 9^ in distance to vent ; trunk very slightly shorter than
tail; cleft of mouth 3^ in head, in a specimen 16i inches long.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 43

Pectorals very minute. This specimen agrees equally well with
the description of Coecula scuticaris and Coecula teres^ nor is it
evident, from the published accounts, how the two are to be dis-
tinguished from each other.

5. Coeoula bascanium s-p. nov. (S26 [J.].)

This species belongs to the same group as Coecula scuticaris
and C teres^ but is distinguished from either by the shorter head
and better developed pectoral fin. The type is 31 inches long, in
fair condition.

Body extremely slender, subterete, its greatest depth little
more than two-fifths length of head; head short; snout short,
7 times in head; mouth very small; lower jaw thin, included, ,
not extending forward to the anterior nostril, which is in a short
tube ; teeth short, subconic, bluntish, a little unequal ; their points
directed backward ; lower teeth nearly in one series ; upper teeth
uniserial laterally, partly biserial anteriorly ; vomerine teeth in
a rhombic patch, some of them a little enlarged. Eye moderate,
its length rather more than half snout, its centre scarcely behind
middle of upper jaw. Cleft of mouth 3| in length of head. Gill-
opening vertical, about as wide as isthmus, its upper edge about
on level of upper edge of pectoral ; pectoral small, but larger
than in related species, a little broader than long and about as
long as snout. Dorsal fin very low, beginning at a point about
midway between front of eye and gill-opening ; anal similar to
dorsal. Head 11^ times in distance from snout to vent. Trunk
a little longer than tail. Total length 31 inches ; head If inches;
trunk 14| ; tail 14^. Color in spirits, dark-brown, nearly or quite
uniform ; fins paler.

6. Ophichthys intertinotus (R cbardsou) Giiather. (803»,- 825 [J].)

Dark brown above, paler below ; sides and back with about
three rows of large, ovate, brown spots, somewhat irregular in
size and position, those of the upper row smallest, the large and
small ones of the lower row somewhat alternating; spots on head
small and numerous. Dorsal with an interrupted dark margin ;
anal with a darker edge ; pectorals blackish. Head 3^ in trunk ;
cleft of mouth nearly half length of head ; pectoral about 5 in
head. Dorsal commencing a little behind end of pectoi'aT. Tail
rather longer than rest of bod3\ The dentition is well described
by Dr. Giinther (viii, 5t).

44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Two large specimens. This species has not been previously
recorded from the waters of the United States.

7. Myrophis egmontis sp. nov. (802; 827* [J.]-)

Two specimens in fair condition.

Head small, slender, moderately pointed ; anterior nostril in a
short tube ; posterior nostril large, with a raised rim, placed
directly behind the anterior ; cleft of mouth rather short, extend-
ing to beyond the rather large eye, which is more than half the
length of the snout ; cleft of mouth 3J in head ; teeth in both
jaws subequal, pointed, slightly compressed, arranged in single
series, those of both jaws directed backward, the lower teeth
being more oblique than the upper ; upper jaw with about 4 small
fixed canines. No teeth on vomer in either of the typical speci-
mens. Tongue not free. Lower jaw considerably shorter than
upper, its edge considerabl}- curved, concave in profile. Nape
somewhat elevated. Top of head with large pores.

Head 5^ times in distance from snout to vent ; head and trunk
a little shorter than tail. Body slender, its greatest depth a little
more than length of gape. Pectoral fin short and broad, slightly
longer than snout ; gill-opening short, oblique, extending down-
ward and backward from near the middle of the base of the
pectoral. Dorsal fin beginning behind vent, in one specimen at a
distance about equal to length of gape; in the other specimen, a
little farther forward ; dorsal fin very low in front, becoming
gradually higher toward the tip of tail ; anal fin low, but well
developed, considerably higher than dorsal, highest anteriorl}'^.
Uniting with the dorsal around the tail.

Color in spirits, dark-brown, apparently uniform, somewhat
paler below.

Length of specimen about 15 inches.

We refer this species to Myrophis, although its dorsal is
inserted very much farther back than in any of the known
species of that genus. The absence of vomerine teeth, if normal,
still farther separates it from the other species, and it is not
unlikely that it should be regarded as the type of a distinct
genus.

One of the types {S2^) has been presented to the U. S. National
Museum.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 45

8. Siphostoma aflBne (GUnther) Jordan. (839* [^].)

9. Stromateus alepidotns (L.) Jor. and flilb. (812.)

The adoption of the earlier name, Stromateus paru L,, for this
species is perhaps premature, until West Indian specimens are
examined.

10. Traohynotus carolinas (L.) Gill. (810.)

11. Lutjanus campechianus Poey. (842* [2].)

12. Cbaetodipteras faber (Bronssooet) J. and G. (811.)
\?>. Batrachus pardus Goode and Bean. (823 [J].)

One specimen, with the typical coloration of this form.

\A. Gobiesox yirgatulus Jordan and Gilbert. (838 [3].)

Three specimens ; the largest rather more than three inches
long, thus much larger than the original types. Caudal dusky ;
a dusky blotch on front of dorsal, D. 11, A. 8. Eyes very small,
barely one-fourth interorbital width. Head 3; its width 2|.
Lower teeth moderate, entire ; upper bluntish, in two or three
rows, two of the outer a little enlarged. This is probably identical
with Gobiesox nudus Giinther, but it cannot be the original
Cyclopterus nudus of L.

15. Scorpaena stearnsi Goode and Bean. (806.)

16. Achirus brachialis Bean. (843 )

A very young example, brown with a few irregular large
whitish spots.

17. Aphoristia plagiusa (L.) Jor. and Gilb. (843.)
A very young specimen.

18. Malthe vespertilio L., var. raiiotn Mitch. (795.)

A short-nosed individual of the type which has been called
Malthe cubifrons Rich, and Lophiiis radiatus Mitchill.

19. Antennarius ooellatus (Bloch and Schneider) Pcey. (796*; 797; 822 [J].)

Pescador Parra, Feces de Cuba, PI. 1, 1787.

Lophius vespertilio, var. d, ocellatus Bloch and Schneider, Ichth.,

1801, 142.
Antennarius pleurophthalmus Gill., Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1863, 93.

Color in spirits, brown; pale on the head and belly, darker
posteriorly ; anterior region covered with small, sharply defined
black spots ; the spots posteriorly larger, and more vague in out^
line, some of them diffuse shades; fins spotted like the body;
vertical fins with some paler spots also, and a pale edge;

46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

sides of body also with irregular gray leprous blotches (perhaps
pink in life), the largest between last dorsal spine and first dorsal
ra}', forming a saddle ; numerous smaller areas below this to base
of pectoral; some on head; a small saddle between second and
third dorsal spines ; a large ring of the same grayish color, behind
dorsal, forming a ring about caudal peduncle ; some other blotches
between soft dorsal and anal ; a ring of black dots about eye; a
large oblong black spot on middle of base of soft dorsal, sur-
rounded by a light brownish ring ; a similar ocellus below and a
little before this on side of body, and a third on caudal fin a little
before and above its centre ; a few whitish dermal flaps on soft
dorsal ; inside of mouth black, with broad whitish longitudinal
stripes, these most distinct on the tongue. Third dorsal spine
much longer than second, its length equal to its distance from
tip of snout ; length of maxillary 4:^ in body. Upper part of head
with some coarse, four-rooted stellar tubercles.

Our specimens agree very closely with the description of Dr.
Gill. There can, however, be little doubt of their identity with
with the Pescador of Parra, on which the Lophius ocellatus of
Bloch and Schneider was based. The characteristic position of
the ocellated spots is precisely the same in the two. I therefore
adopt for it the name ocellatus. It is not improbable that Anten-
narius annulatus Gill, from Garden Key, will be found identical
with A. multiocellatus (Cuv. and Val.).

20. Balistes oarolinensis Gmelin. (805.)

21. Alutera schoepfi (Walbaum) Qoode and Bean. (8.34.)

22. Diodon liturosus Shaw. (815.)

A young specimen, apparently corresponding to Dr. Gunther's
vsLT. a, of Diodon. viaculatus.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 41

February 26.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty persons present.

The following were presented for publication : —

" On an Ammonite from the Carboniferous formation of Texas,"
by Prof. Angelo Heilprin.

'' The Tertiary Geology of Eastern and Southern United
States," by Prof. Angelo Heilprin.

Messrs. Geo. W. Fiss and Francis E. Emory were elected
members.

Distoma and Filarise. — Prof. Leidy directed attention to some
parasitic worms presented this evening. Some of these were
supposed to be leeches from the mouth of the alligator. Hero-
dotus states that the crocodile of the Nile has the inside of its
mouth always beset with leeches. The existence of the leech has
been confirmed, and is known as the Bdella nilotica. The present
specimens, however, do not belong to a leech, but pertain to a
species of Z'ls/o/^ia, apparently not previously described. It may
be named and be distinguished by the characters as follows : —

Distoma oricola. Body elongated elliptical, moderately wider
and thicker posteriorly, and ending in a blunt, angular extremity,
convex dorsally and flat ventrally, unarmed, smooth or minutely
wrinkled transversely. Mouth subterminal, and enclosed with a
reniform lip succeeded by a linear annulus. Acetabulum large,
globular, included at the anterior fourth of the body, and openino-
ventrally by a conspicuous central aperture. Generative orifice
ventral, at the posterior fourth of the body. Length, 15 to 20
mm. ; breadth, 3 mm. Eight specimens obtained from the mouth
of the alligator, A. mississippiensis, in Florida, by Mr. Stua'-t
Wood.

Accompanying the specimens is a fragment of the tongue
marked with circular scars, apparently due to the worms. The
alcoholic specimens in their present condition are incurved, with
the lateral margins inverted, and the included acetabulum pro-
duces a conspicuous dorsal eminence.

Of several Filariie exhibited, two, a female and a male, pertair^
to the species Filaria horrida, Diesing. The former is 28 inclies
long, the latter 11 inches. They were obtained by Dr. He my C.
Chapman, from the thorax of the American ostrich, Bhea ameri-
cana. The other specimens were obtained by Mr. P. L. Jouy,
from the abdomen of Strix brachi/otus. They consist of fou;-.
females from 12 to 14 inches long and a half a line thick,
and two males 2^ inches long and one-fourth of a line thick.

48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

They are thicker anteriorly with the head end obtusely
rounded, and with the mouth minute and bounded by a
minute pair of conical lips. Tlie tail end of the female is straight
and blunt ; that of the male is more tapering, and is included in
an elliptical alary appendage, supported on each side by a row
of five curving ribs. A pair of similar, but shorter and straight
papillae is situated near the anal aperture ; and a pair of pointed
processes diverge from the end of the tail into the alary expanse.
Two species of Filaria have been previously observed in Strix
brachyotus, F. attenuata Rud., and F. foveata Schn., to neither of
which the specimens under examination appear to belong. These,
however, so closely accord with the descriptions of F. lahiata
Creplin, from the black stork, Giconia nigra, that, notwithstand-
ing the remote relationship in the host, the speaker believed them
to belong to that species. In the construction of the caudal
extremity of the male, they closely approximate the condition of
F. lahiata and F. horrida,as represented in the figures of Schnei-
der (Monographic der Nematoden), while they are widely differ-
ent from that of F. attenuata and F. foveata, as represented in
similar figures of the same work.

Some notes on Manayunkia speciosa. — Prof. H. Carvill Lewis
read a communication from Miss S. G. Foulke, in which the
following statements were made : —

In the worm Manayunkia speciosa, described and figured by
Prof. Leidy (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883), the tentacular
crown, or branchial organ, is the feature of special interest.

According to Dr. Leidy, the tentacles present in an adult are
eighteen in number, besides two larger and longer tentacles
situated midway between the two lophophores. These larger
tentacles are conspicuous by their bright green color, and are, in
fact, external continuations of the blood-vessels. extending length-
wise throughout the body. In shape, these tentacles taper from
base to apex, are convex on tiie outside, but concave on the side
which faces the centre of the tentacular crown ; so that a trans-
verse section would present the shape of a crescent. The two
edges thus formed are fringed with cilia. When closely watched,
the green tentacles are seen to pulsate with a rhythmical motion,
contracting and expanding longitudinally. The pulsation takes
place in each tentacle alternately.

At the moment of contraction the tentacle turns slightly on its
axis, outwards and towards the end of the lophophore on that
side, at the same time giving a backward jerk, returning to its
former position at the moment of expansion.

By force of the contraction, the gi-een blood filling the tentacle
is forced downwards out. of the tentacle, and flows along the
blood-vessel on that side of the body. On the expandiug of the
tentacle, the blood instantly returns and suffuses it, and thus
the process goes on.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 49

The contraction and expansion occur at exact intervals,
together occupying the space of two seconds. It is in this way
that the blood is purified and its circulation controlled. These
observations were made with a sfeven-eighths inch objective.

To ascertain how long the cilia upon the tentacles would con-
tinue their motion after separation from the body of the worm,
both lophophores of an adult were put off above their junction.

At first the tentacles remained closed from the shock, but
soon they were expanded, the cilia displaying active motion,
and presently the two separated lophophores began to move
about in the zoophyte-trough. This motion was produced by
the action of the tentacles, which bent in all directions, the tips
touching the glass, and was not a result of the currents produced
by the cilia. In a few minutes one lophophore had crawled in
this manner quite across the trough, while the other remained
floating in the water near its first position. In the case of this
latter the motion was produced by the ciliary currents, and was
entirely distinct from the crawling above noted.

During this time the decapitated worm had sunk to the bottom,
and, though turning and twisting a good deal, did not attempt to
protrude the mutilated support of the lophophores. Its body
was so much contracted that the segments were not above one-
third their usual size.

At the end of five hours the worm was apparentlj^ dead, num-
bers of infusoria had collected to prey upon it, and the surface
of the body presented a roughened appearance as though covered
with tubercles. The lophophores were still crawling and swim-
ming about.

At the end of the eighth hour the lophophores had ceased to crawl,
but the ciliary action, though feeble and uncertain, still continued.
The body of the worm was then covered with a thick fungoid
growth, consisting of transparent rod-like filaments three-six-
teenths of an inch in length ; some of the filaments presented a
beaded appearance. All motion of the cilia upon the tentacles
had ceased, and these also were being devoured by infusoria.

The above experiment shows that the motion of the cilia con-
tinued about twice as long as the mutilated worm gave evidence
of life.

Several individuals of Mana,yunkia were observed to be preyed
upon, while still living, by large monads, embedded in one or more
of the segments, which were sometimes excavated to a consider-
able degree.

50 proceedings op the academy op [1884.

March 4.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-seven persons present.

A paper entitled " The Rufous or Thatching Ant of Dakota
and Colorado," by Henry C. McCook, D. D., was presented for
publication.

Dictyophora as Apsilus vorax. — Prof. Leidy stated that Mr.
Uselma C. Smith, last week, had afforded him the opportunity of
examining a wheelless rotifer, attributed to ^psiZws, which he had
found abundantly, last autumn, in a pond at Fairmount Park,
attached to ^nac/? art's, and likewise in the Schuylkill River, near
by, on Potamogeton. A number of specimens were observed
attached to the sides of the jar, as well as to both the plants con-
tained tlierein. The specimens being more readily detached from
the latter than from the glass vessel, they were seen under more
favorable circumstances than previously. They were recognized
as Dictyophora^ first described in 1857 ; and as a result of the last
examinations, Prof. Leidy was led to the opinion that this, the
Apsilus lentiformis Meczinchow, the Cupelopagus hucinedax
Forbes, and the Apsilus bipera, recently communicated to the
Academy by Miss Foulke, all pertain to the same species. In the
recent specimens he had recognized the lateral antenna3 ending in
exceedingly delicate and motionless cils, as indicated by Meczin-
chow, and which previously, from the wrinkled condition of the
specimens detached from hard objects, had escaped his attention.
The structure described by Meczinchow as a ganglion, he could
not satisfactorily distinguish as such ; nor had he been able to
detect the arrangement of the excretory canals, as represented
by the same author. The lateral view of the animal accords with
the figure of Cupelopagus as given by, Forbes; the body being
ovoid, with the mouth of the prehensile cup oblique, and appearing
more or less unequally two-lipped. In this view the antenna? are
undistinguishable. In all the forms described, the prehensile cup,
in the same manner, is projected from and withdrawn within the
mouth of a compressed oval or nearly spherical carapace, dotted
with minute tubercles. The prehensile cnp, substituting the
usual rotary organs of rotifers, communicates with a capacious,
variably sacculated and dilatable stomach, followed by the ordi-
nary gizzard with its mastax,and then a second sacculated stomach.
The ovoidal cloacal pouch opens by an aperture, with radiated
folds, externally, some distance in advance of the fundus of the
carapace.

The size of the different specimens described varies greatly,

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 51

but nevertheless appears to gradate between the extremes. The
specimens recently examined were the smallest observed ; and in
the closed condition measured 0'32 to 0"35 mm. long by 0*3 to
0*32 mm. broad. Former ones described were from 0'35 to 0*6
mm. long by 0*28 to 0"5 mm. broad. For Ciipelopagus, Forbes
gives 0*64 mm. long by 0*56 broad ; and for Apsilus lentiformis,
Meczinchow gives 0*8 mm. long by 0*7 mm. broad.

Miss FouLKE enquired whether Dr. Leidy had noticed the
secondary sacculated stomach.

The President answered in the affirmative, and stated that the
secondary stomach was present in all the forms.

Miss Foulke replied that none of the forms previously dis-
covered had been either fisured or described as possessing this
organ; that Dr. Leidy 's description coincided exactly with that
of Apsilus bipera, as given by the speaker ; and that, in any case,
should this form, though differing in every particular save the
structure of the mastax, prove to be identical with the Dictyo-
phora vorax of 1857, still the differences between Apsilus hipera^
the Apsilus lentiformis of Meczinchow and the Gupelopagus of
Forbes — viz. : the difference in shape, the presence or absence of
antennae, of the secondary stomach, and of the ciliation of the
cup — remain the same, and must separate the forms until proof
of their identity can be given.

A New Species of Trachelius. — Prof. H. Carvill Lewis, on
behalf of Miss S. Q. Foulke, made the following communication :

Having poured some Schuylkill water, freshly drawn from the
spigot, into a tube, a white speck was noticed swimming freely
about. On being placed in a live-box, and examined with a power
of thirty-eight diameters, this speck proved to be a member of the
family Trachelidae, of Ehrciberg.

The family Trachelid^e includes three genera: — Trachelius,
Amphileptus^ and Loxophyllum.

The genus Trachelius consists of but one species, Trachelius
ovum (Ehr.), from which the form found in the Schuylkill water
differs considerably in shape.

Trachelius ovum was described by Ehrenberg as possessing a
complex and profusely ramified oesophagus canal, and this opinion
was endorsed by Lieberkuhn, also b}' Claparede and Lachmann ;
but W. Saville Kent disputed the point, and believes the appear-
ance of the above structure to be given by the extreme vacuola-
tion of the protoplasm, which would lend a branched intestine-like
appearance to the intervening granular sarcode. The observations
of the writer, in this respect, entirely coincide with those of Mr.
Kent.

Ehrenberg also placed in the genus Trachelius two other
species, A'iz., T. tricophora and T. dendropholus, but these forms,
being true flagellates, have been relegated to the genus Astasia.

52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

In appearance, the form now to be described is markedly convex
on the dorsal side, but is deeply indented longitudinally on the
ventral side. The sarcode is highly vacuolate, the vacuoles nar-
rowing towards the centre of the body. The fluid sarcode is
granular, and the surface of the body is covered with a network of
circles of various sizes, which, when enlarged three hundred
and fifty diameters, are seen to be minute globular vacuoles.
The snout-like prolongation, at the base of which is situated the
oral aperture, is shorter than is usually represented in Trachelius
ovum.

The principal difference has regard to shape, Trachelius ovum,
being egg-shaped, as indicated by the name, while the form just
described is globosely convex dorsally, but flattened with a deep
indentation A'entrall3\

It is a curious fact, and one whose import is not very compli-
mentar}'^ to our water-supply, that the habitat of Trachelius is
universally given as bog-water.

It is proposed to name this new species Trachelius Leidyi'm

The following was ordered to be printed : — •

1884.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

53

aaajjpij

ON A CABBONIFEBOUS AMMONITE FBOM TEXAS.
BY PROFESSOR ANGELO HEILPRIN.

Among a limited number of carboniferous fossils obtained
from the border of Wise County, Texas, and submitted to me
for examination by my friend, Mr. G. Howard Parker > a form
occurs which can unhesitatingly be referred to the family Am-
monitidse, and to the old genus Ammonites. Only a fragment of
a single individual of the form in question is to be found, and
this, unfortunately, has lost the shell, so that no external orna-
mentation, if any such existed, can now be detected. What
there is of the speci-
men, however, suflB- -^
ciently indicates that
it was smooth, or des-
titute of ribs, and that
the decidedly globose
form was marked by
a strong involution of
the whorls, which ap-
pearalmost completely
embracing. The um-
bilical region cannot
be clearly made out.
The sutural lines of the
septa are very clearly
defined, and exhibit the ammonitic foliations in very nearly their
simplest expression. The lobes and saddles are numerous and
closely packed, the general appearance presented by them to the
unassisted eye being that of tessellation.

The siphonal lobe is considerably' the largest, and is split into
two prominent tongues by the extension inwards of a deep sinus
having approximately the same width as the lateral prongs ; the
lateral prongs terminate each in two teeth, the inner one of which,
counting from the siphonal line, is somewhat longer than the
external ; the base of the lobal sinus produced anteriorly into
two acute sulci. The first lateral lobe terminates in two teeth,
the inner or siphonal one the shorter, truncated at the extrem-
ity, and sometimes exhibiting indications of apical division ;

1. Fragments, natural size.
fled.

2. Septal sutures, magnl-

54 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

the second lateral lobes with three teeth, the median one of
which is the longest. The saddles are simply rounded, and
exhibit, as far as can be seen in the specimen, no traces of crenu-
lation or denticulation along the anterior margin.

This is the first Ammonite, as far as I am aware, that has been
detected in any American formation below the mesozoic series.
The association with it of characteristic palaeozoic forms of life,
such as Zaphrentis, Phillipsia, Bellerojjhon, Gonularia, Chonetes,
and Productus, leaves no doubt as to its position, and hence we
must conclude that here, as well as in India, where Waagen first
announced the occurrence of true carboniferous ammonitic forms,
the distribution of this highly characteristic group of organisms
was not so rigidly defined by the mesozoic line as geologists had
been led to conclude. That pre-mesozoic Ammonites will be
discovered elsewhere besides in India and Texas there is no
reason to doubt ; indeed, no assumption could be more illogical
than the contrary — and, therefore, the present discovery is in no
way specially surprising, and only rather interesting than impor-
tant. Special interest, however, attaches to this form, as through
it and the individuals or fragments of individuals that have been
found in the Tejon (Tertiary) rocks of California,' we have
established in this country the extreme range of the group
which it represents.

As to the relationship of the species which I propose to desig-
nate Ammonites Farkeri, it may be stated that, judged by such
characters as the fragment presents, a position must be assigned
to it near to A. antiquus, Waag., from the Productus-limestone
(Salt-Range), of Kufri, India, described and figured in the Palee-
ontologia Indica (ser. xiii, pp. 28-9, 1879), of the Geological
Survey, and which Waagen refers to the genus Arcestes of Suess.
A comparison between the septal sutures of our specimen and the
Indian one shows a remarkable similarity, indeed, one might
almost saj'' identit}', existing between the two, the type of struc-
ture being practically the same. The principal difference seems
to be some very slight and unimportant modification in the lobal
dcnticulations, and the emargination or depression which exists
in the saddle, or rather in some of the saddles of the Indian

^ Heilprin, " On the Age of the Tejon Kocks of California, and the Occur-
rence of Ammonitic Remans in Tertiary Deposits." Proc. Acad. Nat,
Sciences of Philadelphia, July, 1882.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADLLPHIA. 55

species. The acicular sulci which terminate the sinus in the
siphonal or median lobe do not appear in Waagen's drawing, but
as this is done on a small scale, the feature in question may have
been overlooked. In either case the septal plication is about
equally simple or primitive, and indicates a passage by which a
transition is effected from the more complicated forms to the still
simpler Goniatite. The discussion of the relationship existing
between the A. antiquus and certain Goniatitic forms described
by De Verneuil and Karpinsky from the sandstone of Artinsk,
equally applicable in its reference to the American species, is
fully set forth by Waagen {loc. cit.).

56 rroceedings of the academy of [1884.

March 11.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Thirty-nine persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —

"A Review of the Amei*ican Species of the Genus Sphyrsena,"
by Seth E. Meek and Robert Newland.

" Catalogue of Plants collected in July, 1883, during an
Excursion along the Pacific Coast in Southeastern Alaska," by
Thomas Meehan.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 51

THE RUFOUS OR TH ITCHING AWT OF DAKOTA AND COLORADO.
By Henry C. McCook, D. D.

During the autumn of 1883, I had a series of conversations
with Mr. B. S. Russell, an intelligent business man, resident at
Jamestown, Dakota, concerning a species of ant which inhabits
that Territory. At first I was inclined to think that the insect
which Mr. Russell described was the Occident ant, especially as
the popular name which it bears among the pioneers is the
" stinging ant," but further details caused me to suspect that the
habits described must be those of Formica rufa^ whose nests I
had observed in various parts of Colorado. I accordingly entered
into correspondence with Dr. R. G. De Puy, of Jamestown, who
forwarded me specimens which proved to be Formica rufa. I
also gave him a number of points to be noted, and directions as to
how to proceed in studying these points ; all of which were fol-
lowed up with accuracy and intelligence, that covered all my
inquiries. The notes which follow I have written out from the
observations of the two gentlemen above named, and those made
by myself in Colorado.

Locality and Site. — The entire rolling prairie country lying
between the Cheyenne and James Rivers (Dakota), is dotted with
a vast number of ant-hills, which extend westwardly as far as the
Missouri River. Mr. Russell could not say whether they are to
be seen in the Red River Valley, which, however, is frequentl}''
overflowed. I first met the hills of Rufa on the "Divide," north-
eastwardly from Colorado Springs. Subsequently I saw them in
South Park, and afterward in the vicinity of Leadville. They
were scattered here and there throughout the woods and clear-
ings, along the trails and near the diggings, within the limits and
suburbs of the " Camp," as the place was then (1879) called, and
were struggling with the miners, with varying success, to main-
tain their little " claims." I was struck by the fact that these
persistent creatures had been able to push up their domiciles to
such high sites, and to hold them against the rigors of the winter
frosts.

Specimens sent me from Iowa Gulch, near Leadville, by Mr. C.
O. Shields, were taken from an elevation of 11,300 feet above the
level of the sea.
5

58 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

This characteristu; the Americaa Riifas have in common
with their European congeners; the F. rufa of Switzerland, for
example, is found as far up the Alps as the line of vegetation,
further progress being apparently limited by the lack of vege-
table growth rather than by the temperature.^ They may, there-
fore, be reckoned, both on this continent and Europe, as among
the most hardy of the ant fauna, best adapted to contend with
severities of cold.

Extei~ior Architecture of Mounds. — The ant-hills in Dakota are
for the most part conical elevations, somewhat flattened at the
top (fig. 1). Some present the peculiarity of a square base, giving
the hill the shape of a pyramid, whose apex is rounded (fig. 2 ). Dr.
De Puy's measurements show heights varying from one foot and

a half, to eight inches.
,u^&Mi^^J^i^-W-'^.^:.y^kOHf, The slopes of the

'WK/^?*'^:li^-';/.Js^^'i'^^^ sides in two cases are

twenty-one and twen-
ty-three inches re-
spectively; two diam-
eters measured are
two feet, and one foot
six inches, respec-
tively; and one mound
gave a measurement
of ten feet around the
Fig. 1. Conical Mound. -Dakota. base. The mounds,

according to Mr. Russell, average from twelve to fifteen inches
in height, and about eighteen inches in base diameter. They
are separated from each other by interspaces of from twenty to
sixty feet, and are scattered over the prairie in groups or " villages."
Dr. De Puy says that one may travel miles without seeing ant-hills,
and then come upon clusters of them.

The mounds which I observed in Colorado were chiefly circular
elevations of earth, very much flattened at the top (fig. 3). They
varied greatly in size, but rarely rose to a greater height than
eight inches. One mound observed in South Park and figured,
was shaped like a stocking (fig. 4), an odd form certainl}^ and

' Catalogue des Formicides d'' Europe, by Emory and Forel, p. 450, Mit-
theilungen der Schweizerischen entomologischen Gesellschaft.

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 69

probably caused by the colon}'^ pushing up the earth from two
independent centres, which in the course of time united. Future
labors might possibly correct this, and round the outlines to their
normal shape. I saw one formicary in South Park, which was
established under a large stone, along the edges of which the
gates or openings were placed. Another was seen on the Divide
beyond Colorado Springs, domiciled under an old log in a grove.
Here several ant-lions (Myrmeleon) had established themselves,
cannily digging their pits near the very gates of the formicary,
quite in the route of the outcoming and ingoing emmets. The
largest mound seen by me, and larger than any reported to me,
was found near the summit of the Ute Pass. It was a conical
heap, four feet long and about one foot high, and looked like a
small haycock.

Thatching the Hoofs. —
This Ute Pass ant-hill was
thickly covered or thatched
with bits of wood, fallen
needles and broken sprigs of
pine, which had been gath- '"'-'-SSS^iil^lv.^^^^

ered from the forest debris, "'" -'-^^■'^^:^■"'^'^'-'^^■■''

1 • \ J J.1 • j.\ • FiQ.2. Mound with Square Base. —Dakota.

lying abundantly in the vi- ^

cinit3\ All other mounds in South Park and around Leadville
were covered in a like manner, with stalks of grass, twigs, and
similar rubbish.

The Dakota ant-hills are thatched in precisely the same way,
so that one can easily see the propriet}^ of giving the little artisan
the popular title of the Thatching ant. As the colony increases its
numbers, and the necessity of internal domestic economy requires
enlargement of the nurseries, rooms and galleries, the excavated
soil is brought up and naturally is laid upon the thatching. In
course of time a new roof of chips and clipped grass is overlaid,
and thus in the ordinary growth of a mound there would be an
alternation of layers of earth and vegetable substance, the latter
falling into decay in due season. This theory of the growth of
a hill is confirmed by samples of material taken by Dr. De Puy
from the interior of the Dakota mounds, which consists of partly
decomposed straw, mixed in smaller proportion with soil. The
mound-making ants of the Alleghenies {Formica exsectdides)

60

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

have a similar habit of thatching their hills, but this is not as
decidedl}^ developed and characteristic as with the Rufous ant ;
indeed, so far as my observation extends, it is the exception rather
than the rule. The thatching habit is possessed by the European
representatives of the species (F. rufa), in equal degree with
those of our Western plains.

Interior Architecture. — I requested Dr. De Puy to open the
hills by sawing down through the middle to the surface of the
ground, and shoveling away one of the halves. This exposed a
section view of the interior, and presented the remarkable feature

shown at fig. 5.^ The
central part of the
mound, on or about
the level of the sur-
face, was found to be
occupied by a ball of
twigs (B, fig. 5), about
eight inches in diam-
eter ; the sticks are
longer and thicker
than those used upon
the roof, some of them
being two aiid a half and three inches long. They were found
unmixed with soil or any other substance. Several galleries,
about one-fourth of an inch in diameter, led upward from tins
billet-globe to the surface, having their outlet by circular open-
ings (G) through the thatch. The openings, as seen by Dr.
De Puj^, were usuall^'^ near the summit and never more than three
in number. In Colorado mounds the openings were spread over
the top, and were more numerous. Beneath the faggot-ball a
series of galleries, seven in number, extended downward to at
least the distance of four and a half feet, the extent of the
excavation made by Dr. De Puy. For several inches, immediately
below the ball, the galleries were united into a network (n, fig.

Fig. 3. Flat Circular Mound.— Colorado.

^ I was unfortunately so situated in the South Park and elsewhere in
Colorado, in part by the presence of a sick companion, that I could not delay
to open the hills there seen, and make a study of the interior. But I have
no doubt that they are arranged like those in Dakota. Will not some
observer on that field test the matter by opening a few hills ?

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61

5) of communicating ways, by galleries running crosswise. Be-
yond this, they descended separately, having no connection at
all, so far as could be observed. At the time that Dr. De Puy
opened this nest the ground was already frozen, making the dig-
ging quite difficult. No ants wei'e found except a few stragglers
who were encamped within the faggot-ball, the mass of the com-
munity having evidently taken up their winter-quarters in
regions further underground than the point reached, and not
improbably below the reach of frost. The purpose of the faggot-
ball can now only be conjectured. I can think of nothing quite
analogous to it in any formicary known to me ; it suggests the
globe of curled rootlets and dry grass which I have found within
the cavern of that hymenopterous all^^ of the ant, the humble-bee
(Bombus virginicus), and perhaps may serve the san^e purpose,
viz. : that of a general nurser^^ and common living-barracks for
the family. At least, I have no better conjecture to venture at
this time. It is curious to note such resemblances in habit
between distantly removed members of an order of insects ; but
the fact is no more, indeed not so much of a surprise, as to find
in the caves of the Texas Cutting ant (AUafervens) a leaf-paper
rudely-celled nest, the product of a habit which exists in perfec-
tion in those other hymenopterous allies, the paper-rqaking
wasps.

Marriage Flight of the Sexes. — :Mr. Russell informed me that
the ants appear in the spring with the first vegetation, and by the
time of hay-harvest, the latter part of July, nunierous swarms pf
" flying ants " are seen. These, of course, are the yoijng males
and females who, being matured, abandon or are pushed out of
the home-nest for the marriage flight to meet and pair in the air.
At this period the swarms are very annoying to the inhabitants.
A person driving or riding over the prairie will find himself sudT
denly in the midst of one of these hosts. The insects settle upon
the body, creep into the openings of the clothes, and produce a
disagreeable sensation. Such a swarm settled upon the first
house which Mr. Russell built, and the carpenters were compelled
to abandon it while in the act of shingling the roof. In the hay-
field, the harvesters are often obliged to stop to fight off" the
winged hosts, and those in charge of the hay-wagon to abandon
for the time the stack which is being hauled to the barn, on

62

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

[1884.

account of the annoying creatures. The same is true of the
grain harvest which comes later, the appearance of the swarms
continuing throughout August and into September. The ants,
however, do not sting, my informant averred, notwithstanding
their popular title of " the stinging ants." The nervous irrita-
tion produced by contact with such numbers is the chief annoy-
ance. Some horses show great excitement under the visits of

;i->/::;::H;?

W§r

ZJh

IK

.("':'• .-,

^-:-^;

;^^;v>;.

■'!'^^/

.ir.

•■■.^■:i:;j-

M

,-^:i-y-;V:

isf'i^:.

/i--

■■;.•;'■ •^'J/,■■.■j.

■:'^j

• ..:#^

OW'

¥^

Fig. 4. Stocking-Shaped Mound.— Colorado.

the swarms, to which the more stolid mule is quite indifferent.
These flying ants do not get angry when beaten off, and rush at
and follow after the parties attacking them as bees do; they
whirl round and round in dense masses^ alight upon an object
within their path, but show no sign of hostility or wish to pursue
human or other animals who approach them. The family of ants
to which this genus {Formica) belongs, has no members possessed
of true aculeate organs. The so-called "sting" is reallj^ pro-
duced by the insect " biting " or abrading the skin with its
mandibles, and then ejecting formic acid from its undeveloped
stinging organs into the wound. The smart of the acid is quite
severe.

A Useful Insectivorous Habit. — Over against this annoyance

1.884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 63

Mr. Russell placed an odd advantage, which he had often
observed to be of some importance. When a grain-farm is to be
opened, and the prairie sod " broken," a large number of men
will be employed to manage the plows. These laborers are provided
with barracks or a " camp outfit," and by reason both of pei'sonal
uncleanliness, and the abundance of certain objectionable insects
in the prairie grass, soon become infested with parasites. Flannel
clothes and blankets are populous by the middle of June. The
manner in which the ants are turned in as scavengers may be
illustrated by one instance recited.

" One of my camp cooks," said Mr. Russell, " came one day to
borrow a horse. ' What for?' I asked. ' I want to go out on the
prairie,' was the answer. ' Number Seven (the name of the camp)
is in a pretty lively condition ; and, to tell the truth, m3^ clothes
ai-e full of lice, and I want to go out to the ant-hills and get rid
of them.'

" I gave the man the horse ; off he drove, stripped piece by
piece, and spread his duds and wraps upon the hills. In a few
moments they were fairly covered with ants who thoroughly
explored and cleaned every fibre, removing both insects and eggs.
The cook came back happj'' and clean. That was a constant
custom then (1880), and is continued by the camp people to this
day. The ' cleaning up ' takes the greater part of a day."

The Dakotans have thus only discovered a formicarian habit
which the Indians of the plains, and old pioneers and campers,
utilized many years ago.

Enemies and Destructive Agents. — In the " breaking season,"
many of the ant-hills are torn up by the plows. At such times
flocks of blackbirds, both black and yellow-winged species, follow
in the furrows, and feed upon the ants. There seems to be no
end to the capacit}^ of these birds for this sort of food. The
tender larvae, exposed by the plowshare, are probably also
attractive morsels, but Mr. Russell could not say as to that; to
him the birds simply seemed to be picking up ants.

In this connection a fact was related which may well excite
surprise. The prairie-fires often completel}^ destroy" the hills, burn
them quite up, and penetrate far enough beneath the surface to
leave a hole that would contain a bushel-basket ! This statement,
made early in the conversation and while I supposed that I was

64

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

[1884.

t

listening to some observations upon the Occident ant — for Mr.
Russell spoke of the insects by their popular name of " stinging

ants " — awakened my
suspicion. I knew that
amass of gravel-covered
dirt, such as the genuine
stinging ants — the Occi-
dents— heap up, would
not melt away in such
wise before a prairie-flre.
A few questions satisfied
me that I was on the
wrong trail, and that no
other ant than Formica
rvfa could build a nest
' ' 1 i ' ^ liable to such an acci-

' '^ dent, and that even she

could do so I confess I
seriously doubted.
\ I had no reason to dis-

pute the veracity of my
, ' informant, but I thought

5 • «' > < ' it quite as well to test

J' ,^ I 5 h \\ his statements. Accord-

I'l ''^. , '^ » = ^^ ' J' ^ ]]■• ingly I had Dr. De Puy
{^ '1 ^ '< ' '' send me samples of the

' I ' ^ material of the mounds

^ „ ^ at points below the sur-

FiQ. 5. Half section of mound of F. rufa, 4 ft. 4 in.
below surface. B, central ball of sticks and straws; face. The rCSultS I have
SigiSi galleries; n, network of crossing galleries just

below the ball ; G, gates. already mentioned, and

they show that Mr. Russell's statement is entirely credible. The
heavy thatch of dried grass upon the roof, the mixture of soil
and decayed straw which composes the cone, the faggot-ball at
the heart of the hill, together make up a highly inflammable
mass. This freely feeds the flames that eat into the subsoil of
the prairie, which is decomposed clay and lime. Thus the story
of a casual lay observer, which might have been rejected with
apparent reason, was confirmed by careful examination.

The mounds exposed to these prairie-fires are frequently pre-
served from destruction in a rather remarkable way. A narrow

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 65

belt of smooth soil generally surrounds the base of a hill (see
figures above), on the outer margin of which (in old formicaries
especially) springs up a circle of a tall, stiff, thick-stalked grass,
such as always grows upon the heaps which the badger throws
up when burrowing after gophers. This grass remains green
until late in the fall, and when the dry prairie is swept by the
flames, it stands as a breastwork around about the mounds, often
deflecting the fire or greatly modifying its destructive effects. In
this way the formicaries are kept safe within the girdling ranks
of the friendly plant.

Concerning the effects upon the ants of the severe winters of
Dakota, I could get no information ; but as the frost is said to
penetrate to the distance of seven feet, I conjecture that the
insects must carry their galleries below that depth, though they
are doubtless capable of enduring a very low temperature. The
surface is thickly covered with snow during winter months, and
it is probable that the ants then are in a semi-torpid state. They
reappear in the spring with vegetation. It is a difficult matter to
exterminate a colony by artificial means.

The saying is current among the people of this section, reported
both by Dr. De Puy and Mr. Russell, that if one wants to dig a
well he will find water by going down through an ant-hill. I
heard the same proverb in Texas applied to the Agricultural and
especially to the Cutting ants. My experience is that these
popular traditions often have some basis of truth, but in this case
I give little credit to the notion. As these Dakota ant-hills are
scattered over the whole rolling prairie country at not very great
intervals, tbere certainly can be no likelihood that the people will
ever lack water, as a well might be successfully sunk anywhere,
according to emmet indications. A rule of this sort could not be
worth much in such a country. In Texas the notion is based
upon a supposed necessity for the ants to have access to under-
ground sources of water.

66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

March 18.
The Rev. Dr. McCook, Vice-President, in the chair.

Fifty-three persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —

" Notes on Species of Fishes improperly ascribed to the Fauna
of North America." By David S. Jordan,

" Notes on Tertiary Shells." By Otto Meyer.

The deaths of Dr. A. L. Elwyn, a member, and of Dr. S. B.
Buckley, a correspondent, were announced.

Dr. Benjamin Sharp delivered a lecture on the study of biology
in Germany introductory to his spring course of lectures on
Invertebrate Zoolog3^

March 25.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-nine persons present.
The death of J. T. Audenried, a member, was announced.

On Eiimeces chalcides. — Prof. Leidy remarked that the little
lizard presented this evening had been sent to him by a former
pupil, Dr. E. A. Sturge, of Petchaburi, Siam. It appears to be a
young individual of Eumeces chalcides Gunther, the Lacerta
chalcides of Lin., and Lygosoma hrachypoda of Dum. et Bib. It
is remarkable for its diminutive limbs, provided with five minute
toes. Dr. Sturge says the natives regard it as a snake ; and, as
is common in such cases, consider it to be venomous.

The following were elected members : Albert S. Bolles,Ph. D.,
R. W. Fitzell, and Jos. W. Grisoom,

The following were elected correspondents : Ludwig von
Graff, of AschafFenberg ; G. Dewalque, of Liege ; Hans Bruno
Geinitz, of Dresden ; E. Renevier, of Geneva ; Henry N. Moseley,
of Oxford ; and J. T. Burdon Sanderson, of London.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67

A REVIEW OF THE AMERICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS SPHYR^NA.
BY SETH E, MEEK AND ROBERT G. NEWLAND.

The object of this paper is to give a review of the American
species of Sphyraena, with detailed descriptions of the four
species found on the Atlantic Coasts of America. The specimens
examined by us belong, in part, to the Museum of Indiana Uni-
versity ; the rest to the U. S. National Museum. All were collected
by Professor Jordan at Havana, Cuba; Key West, Fla., and
Wood's Holl, Mass.

The two Pacific species have been full}^ described by Dr.
Steindachner (Ichthyol. Beitrage, vii, 18T8, 1-4). The remaining
species here mentioned, Sphyraena sphyraena, we have not seen.

We are under obligations to Professor Jordan, for use of his
library and for valuable suggestions.

Analysis of American species of Sphyraena.

a. Scales large, t5 to 85 in lat. line ; origin of first dorsal behind

root of A^entrals, over last third or fourth of pectorals ;

body compressed ; lower jaw with fleshy tip ; maxillaiy

reaching past front of orbit ; teeth large. picuda. 1.

aa. Scales moderate, 110 to 130 in lat. line ; body subterete.

h. Pectorals reaching the front of spinous dorsal ; maxillary

reaching front of orbit ; origin of spinous dorsal behind

root of ventrals.

c. Lower jaw with fleshy tip ; teeth very strong ; scales

in lat. line 110. ensis. 2.

cc. Lower jaw without fleshy tip ; teeth strong ; lat.

line 130. guaguanche. 3.

hh. Pectorals not reaching front of first dorsal ; maxillary not

reaching front of orbit.

d. Eye large ; teeth small ; interorbital area convex;
median ridge of frontal grove not well de-
veloped, picudilla. 4.
dd. Eye small ; teeth larger ; interorbital space
flattish ; median ridge of frontal grove prom-
inent, borealis. .5.

68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884,

aaa. Scales very small, 150 to 170 in lat. line ; origin of spinous
dorsal well behind tip of pectorals, before the vertical
from root of ventrals ; lower jaw with fleshy tip.

e. Body very slender, depth 9 or 10 in length;

scales in lat. line 150. sphyrsena. 6.

ee. Body less slender; depth H in length; scales

in lat. line IfiO to 170. argentea. 7.

1. Sphyrsena picuda (Bloch and Schneider) Poey, G eot Barmcuda : Picuda.

JJmhla minor marina (the Barracuda) Catesby, Fishes Carolina, ttc,
1731, tab. i.

Picuda Parra, Feces y Crustaceos de Cuba, 1787, 90, tab. 35, f. 2.

Sphyrmna sphyrana, var. pictida, Bloch and Schneider, Systemalchth.,
1801, 110 (after Farra).

Spliynena picuda J? oej, Memorias Cuba, i', 1860, 164 (Havana); Gvint'ier,
Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., ii, 1860, 836 (San Domingo, Fuerto Cabello,
Jamaica, West Indies, River Niger); Poey, Froc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
1863, 179, 187 ("dentification of Paira's figure); Poey, Syn. I^isc.
Cub., 1868, 359 (Havana); Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 1875, 95 (Havana);
Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., v, 1876,62 (Bermudas); Goode and
Bean, Froc. U. S. Nat. Mus., i, 1878, 381 (name only); Goode, Froc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., ii, 1879, 116 (South Florida); GoodeandBean, Froc.
TJ. S. Nat. Mus., h, 1879, 342 (West Florida, no description) ; Goode
and Bean, Froc. U. S. Nat. Mus., ii, 1879, 146 (Cuba, Bermuda?,
W. Fla. and S. Fla.); Poey, Anal. Soc. Hist. Nat. Esp., 1881, 210
(Fuerto Rico); Goode and Bean, Froc. U. S. Nat. Mus., v, 1882, 239
(Gulf of Mexico, no description); Jordan and Gilbert, Froc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., V, 1882, 589 (Charleston, S. C); Swain, Froc. Ac. Nat.
Sci. Phla., 1882, 307 (identification of Bsox barracuda, Shaw);
Jordan and Gilbert, BuU. U. S. Nat. Mus., 16, 1882, 412 (West
Indies).
? Sphyrana becuna Lac^p^de, Hist. Nat. Poiss,, v, PI. 9, f. 3, 1803, from
a drawing by Plumier made at Martinique); ? Cuv, and Val., Hist.
Nat. Poiss., iii, 1829, 340 (after Lacepede); Guichenot, Ramon de la
Sagra, Hist. Cuba (Havana); Poey, Memorias Cuba, ii, 1860, 164
(Havana); Poey, op. cit., ii, 1860, 398 (identification with S. picuda;
species repvidianda).

£!sox barracuda Shaw, Gen. Zool., v, 1804, 105 (based on Catesby).

Sphyrcsna barracuda Cuv. and Val., op. cit., iii, 1829, 343 (Brazil);
Poey, Memorias Cuba, ii, 1860, 398 (species repudianda); Cope,
Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. PhUa., 1871, 472 (St, Martins).

Habitat. — West Indies and Brazil ; north to Pensacola, Charles-
ton and the Bermudas.

Head 3 in length ; depth 2 in head. D. V-1, 9 ; A. 1-9.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69

Scales 10-15 to 85-10 (the cross series counted from lateral
line to front of dorsal and anal fins respectively).

Body oblong, slightly compressed, covered with large scales.
Head large, maxillary large, nearly ^ length of head, its posterior
margin reaching past front of orbit. Lower jaw, with fleshy tip,
bluntly conical. Eye rather small, about 6 in head, equals width
of interorbital area. Interorbital area concave, with a shallow
median groove (as wide a pupil, at posterior edge of orbit),
divided by a ridge in front and behind. Supraocular ridge bony
and striate. Preocular ridge present.

Teeth large ; premaxillary teeth small, little compressed, ir-
regularly set, nearly uniform in size, somewhat thicker and
shorter posteriorly ; premaxillary with two pairs of very large
compressed teeth, their length more than half width of pupil;
anterior ones directed downwards, posterior ones downwaixls and
backwards ; teeth in lateral series of lower jaw small anteriorly,
increasing gradually backwards, when they nearly equal those on
palatines ; palatine teeth similar to those on lower jaw, arranged
in reversed order.

Distance from tip of snout to front of first dorsal 2f in body ;
second dorsal spine longest, H in snout; second dorsal and anal
equal ; anal inserted under first third of soft dorsal ; caudal
forked, upper lobe the longest ; pectorals reaching beyond front
of dorsal, 2j in head ; origin of first dorsal slightl}' behind the
ventrals ; cheeks and opercles scaly, about twelve rows of scales
on cheeks ; ui)per part of head with small imbedded scales.

Color silvery, darker above; sides in young with about ten
dark blotches, which break up and disappear with age. Some
inkj^ spots, usually on posterior part of body, are very conspicuous
in both old and young specimens. Soft dorsal, anal and ventral
fins black, except on margins. Pectorals plain, exce[)t upper
part of its margin, which is black. Fins of very 3'oung specimens
nearly plain.

This description is made from an examination of some forty
specimens, varying in length from two and three-fourths inches
to twenty-eight inches. Nearly all were collected by Professor
Jordan, at Key West, Florida ; a few at Havana, Cuba.

This appears to be the largest of the Barracudas, reaching a
length of at least five or six feet. Its mouth is larger and armed
with larger teeth than in any other of our species.

70

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

Below is given a table of measurements of six specimens from
Key West. Tlie proportions are given in hundredtlis of tbie
length from tip of snout to end of last vertebra.

Extreme length of fish, in inches,

14.75

10.5

7.5

4.125

4.1

2.6

Length of fish from end of snout

to last caudal vertebra, in

inches,

12.5

8.5

6.2

3.5

3.5

2.3

Greatest depth of body (hun-

dredths of above), ....

16.

16.

16.

16.

14.

10.

Len^^th of bead,

30.5

33.5

34.

37.

36.

36.

Diameter of eye,

5.

6.

6.5

7.

6.5

7.

Length of maxillary, ....

14.5

16.

15.

15.5

15.

14.5

Width of interoibital area, . .

5.5

5.

4.5

4.75

5.

5.

With of base of pectorals, . .

3.5

3.25

3.

3.

2.25

3.

Length of pectorals, ....

11.5

11.5

11.

11.

11.

10.25

Distance from end of snout, to

origin of spinous dorsal, . .

42.5

44.

45.

49.

49.

53.

Distance from end of snout to

root of ventrals,

38.

41.5

42.

44.

48.

53.

Distance between dorsal fins, .

20.

19.

18.

16.

18.

23.

2. Sphyrsena ensis .Jordan arid Gilbert.

Sphyrcena forsteri Steindachner, Ichth. Beitriige vii, 1878, 4 [Cape San
Lucas to Monterey (not of Cuv. and Val., an East Indian species, as
yet not certainly recognized)].
Sphyrmna ensis Jordan and Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1882,
106 (Mazatlan) ; Jordan and Gilbeit, op. cit., ii, 1882, 109 (Panama,
no description); Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., v, 1882,
624 (Panama ; no description).
Habitat. — Pacific Coast of America from Cape San Lucas to
Panama (East Indies ?).

3. Sphyraena guaguanche Cuv. and Val. Gnngnfinche : (luarju'^nche Pelon.

Sphyrmna guacJiancho Cuv. and Val., Hist. Nat. Poiss., iii, 1829, 342
(Havana ; on a drawing by Poey; lapsus iov guaguanche); Guichenot,
Ramon de la Sagra, Hist. Cuba, 165 (Havana).
Sphyrcena guaguanche Poey, Memorias Cuba, ii, 1860, 166 (Havana);

Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 1875, 96 (Havana),
SphyroRTia gtiaguancho Goode and Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., ii, 1879,
146 (Wood's HoU, Mass^.; Ptnsacola, Fla.; Cuba); Goode and Bean,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., v, 1882, 239 (Gulf of Mexico ; no description);
Jordan and Gilbert, Synopsis Fish. N. A., 1883, 411; Jordan, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884 (Pensacola, Fla.).
? Sphyraina guntJieri Haly, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser, iv, vol. xv,
p. 270 (Colon; fide Steind.); Steindachner, Ichtliyol. Beitriige, vii,
1878, 6 (after Haly).
Habitat. — West Indies, north to Wood's Holl, Mass., and
Pensacola, Florida.

Head 3j in length ; depth 2 in head, D. V-1, 9 ; A. 1-8 ; scales
in lateral line 120 to 130.

1884.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

71

Body rather slender, subterete, covered with moderate-sized
scales; head large; maxillary small, less than ^ head, scarcely
reaching orbit ; lower jaw bluntly conical, without fleshy tip ;
Eye rather large, 5| in head, a little exceeding interorbital area ;
interorbital area flat ; median groove very shallow, the median
longitudinal ridge very small, anterior ; supraocular ridge bony,
striate ; preocular ridge large.

Premaxillary teeth small, 35-40 in number ; premaxillar}"^
teeth present ; anterior palatine teeth larger and more compressed
than those on premaxillary, widely set, decreasing in length
gradually ; teeth in lateral series of lower jaw small and closely-
set anteriorly, larger and wide-set posteriorly, about 10 in number ;
a large compressed tooth at symphysis.

Origin of first dorsal over above tip of pectoral, slightly behind
the ventrals ; distance between dorsals 5j in body ; distance from
tip of snout to spinous dorsal 2^11 body; scales moderate, almost
uniform in size ; cheeks and opercles scaly ; upper part of head
with small imbedded scales.

Color light olive, yellowish on soft dorsal; anal and ventral tips
of caudal rays black ; top of head dark ; dark punctulations oh
upper part of body ; spinous dorsal with some dark punctulations.

The description of this species is taken from three specimens
from Havana, Cuba, varying in length from six and one-half to
eight inches, and from one specimen collected by Mr. Stearns,
from Pensacola, Fla., nineteen inches in length.

Below is given a table of measurements of specimens we have
examined. The proportions are given in hundredths of length
from tip of snout to the end of last vertebra.

Pen-
sacola,
Fla.

Havana, Cuba.

Extreme length in inches,

Length of fish from end of snout to last caudal

vertebra in inches,

Greatest depth of body (hundredths of length),

Ltnyth of head,

Diameter of eye,

Lngth of maxillary,

Width of interorbital area,

Width of bas3 of pectorals,

Length of pectorals,

Distance from origin of s-pinous djrsal to end

of snout,

Distance from end of snout to root of ventrals,
Distance between dorsal fins, . . . . . .

19.

7.5 6.75

15.75

16.5

30.

5.

15.5
4.5
2.5

42.5

38.5
20.

6.12
17.
35.

6.
15.

5.

8.
13.

46.
43.
Id.

5.5
14.75
32.

6.
14.5

5.

3.
13.

44.5
40.5
17.

6.5

4.9
14.
83.

6.
15.

5.

8.
12.

47.
42.

18.5

72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

We have not seen the original description of Sphijrsena
guntheri Haly, from Colon (Aspinwall), The abridged descrip-
tion given by Steindachner agrees fully with S. guaguanche.
We follow Poey in restoring the correct orthography of the
name, Guaguanche.

4. Sphyraena picudilla Po°y. Picudilla.

Sphyrmna barracuda Guichenot, Ramon de la Sagra, Hist. Cuba, 165

(Cuba ; fide Poey).
Sphyroina picudilla Poey, Memorias Cuba, ii, 1860, 163, 163, 398

(Havana); Poey, Syn. Pise. Cuba, 1868, 359 (Havana); Poey, Enum.

Pise. Cub., 1875, 96 (Havana).

Habitat. — Coasts of Cuba.

Head 3^ in body ; depth 2| in head, D. Y-1, 9 ; A. 1-9 ; scales
in lateral line 110.

Body rather robust, subterete, covered with scales of moderate
size ; head rather large ; maxillary rather small, about 2| in head,
not reaching orbit.

Jaw with fleshy tip, bluntly conical ; e3'e large, about 5 in
head, 1^ times interorbital space ; interorbital area flattish ;
median groove shallow, divided by a very indistinct median
ridge; supraocular ridge bony, striate; preocular ridge rather
prominent.

Premaxillary teeth small, subconical ; dentition as in Sphyraena
horealis^ but slightly weaker ; position of spinous dorsal, in com-
parison to ventrals, variable ; distance from tip of snout to origin
of spinous dorsal about 2^^^ in body ; pectorals not reaching spinous
dorsal ; space separating dorsals about 5^ in body ; second dorsal
equal to and somewhat in advance of anal ; cheeks and opercles
scaly ; small imbedded scales on upper part of head ; scales on body
moderate, uniform in size. Color light olive, darker abo^'^e ; soft
dorsal, anal and ventral fins yellowish ; spinous dorsal and pec-
torals darker ; upper parts of preoperele and opercle each with a
dark spot ; top of head and tip of snout blackish.

S. picudilla is very closely allied to Si borealis. Its eye is,
however, much larger (when specimens similar in size are com-
pared), and the frontal groove is somewhat different.

The description of this species is taken from four specimens
collected by Professor Jordan in Havana, Cuba.

1884.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

73

Below is given a table of measurements of the specimens we
have examined. The proportions are given in hundredths of the
length from the tip of snout to end of last vertebra.

Extreme length of fish in inches,

Length of fish from end of snout to last caudal

vertebra in inches,

Greatest depth of body (hundredths of length),

Length of head,

Diameter of eye,

Length of maxillary,

Width of interorbital area,

Width of base of pectorals,

Length of pectorals,

Distance from end of snout to origin of spinous

dorsal, .

Distance from end of snout to root of ventrals,
Distance between dorsal fins,

Havana, Cuba.

11.75

9.85
14.
32.5

6.25
12.25

4.5

3.
10.

47..
47.
17.25

11.5

9.66
14.50
31.

6.
12.

4.5

3.

9.5

47.
47.
17.50

11.25

9.4
14.25
32.

6.
12.

4.5

3.

9.

47.
48.
17.75

9.5

7.85
14.
32.25

6.75
12.

4.5

3.

46.25

46.

17.25

6. Sphyraena borealis De Kay. Northern Barractida.

Sphyrcena borealis De Kay, N. Y. Fauna, Fishes,1842, 37, pi. 60,f 196 (New
York); Storer, Synopsis Fish. N. A., 1846 (48); Baird, Ninth Smith-
sonian Kept., 1854, 12 (Beasley's Point, N. J.); Gill, Kep. U. S. Fish
Com., 1872, 808 (no description) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., i, 1878, 381 (Beaufort, N. C, no description); Goode and Bean,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., ii, 1879, 146 (Wood's Holl, Mass.); Bean, Proc.
r. S. Nat. Mus., iii, 1880, 102 (Wood's Holl, Mass., no description).

Sphyrcena spet Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., i, 1878, 381
(Wood's Holl, Mass.); Jordan and Gilbert, Synopsis Fish. N. A., 1883,
411 (in part ; not of Lacepede).

Habitat. — Atlantic Coast of U. S. from Cape Cod to North
Carolina.

Head 3 in length ; depth 2§ ; D. V-1, 9 ; A. 1-9 ; scales in lateral
line 115-130.

Body rather slender, subterete, covered with moderate-sized
scales ; head large, maxillary small, less than ^ head, not reaching
front of orbit by i diameter of eye ; lower jaw with fleshy tip,
bluntly conical ; eye rather small, about 6 in head, scarcely ex-
ceeding width of interorbital area; interorbital area convex;
median groove very shallow, divided by a distinct longitudinal
ridge, especially well-defined immediately before nostrils ; supra-
ocular ridge striate ; preocular ridge moderate.

Premaxillary teeth small, about 40 in number; front of pre-
maxillary with two pairs of large teeth (sometimes accom-
6

Y4

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

panied by smaller ones), canine-like ; anterior smallest, directed
downwards, posterior ones downwards and backwards; anterior
palatines larger than premaxillary teeth, and more compressed
and widelj^-set ; posterior ones small and closely-set ; order of teeth
on lower jaw reversed, but similar to those on the palatines, and
smaller, about 10 in series ; large tooth near tip of lower jaw present.

Origin of dorsal over or slightly in advance of ventrals, well
behind point of pectorals ; distance between dorsal fins 5^ in
length of body ; distance from tip of snout to spinous dorsal 2tV
in body ; scales moderate, somewhat larger behind soft dorsal and
anal ; cheeks and opercles scaly ; small imbedded scales on upper
parts of head.

Color olivaceous, silvery below ; young with dusky blotches
across the back and along the lateral line.

This description is made from eight specimens collected by
Professor Jordan at Wood's Holl, Mass., which vary in length
from six and one-fourth to eight and one-half inches. The species
does not appear to reach a length of much more than a foot.
This species shows several points of similarity to Sphyrsena
splujrsena. It is, however, unlikely that the two are specifically
•identical.

Below is given a table of four specimens. The proportions are
given in hundredths of length from tip of snout to end of last
vertebra.

Extreme length of fish in inches,

Length of fish from end of snout to last caudal

vertebra in inches,

Greatest depth of body (himdredths of length),

Length of head,

Diameter of eye,

Length of maxillary,

Width of interorbital area,

Distance from end of snout to origin of spinous

dorsal,

Distance from end of snout to root of ventrals.

Wood's Holl.

6.5

5.5
13.
34.

5.
14.5

4.5

47.5
48.

5.5
12.
33.5

6.
13.75

5.

49.
49.

5.2

13.
32.

5.5

12.5

4.

46.
46.

5.3
12.
35.

6.
15.

5.

49.
49.

6. Sphyrsena sphyrsena (Linnseus) Bloch. Spet. Barracuda. Sennet.

Sphyrcena et SucUs auctorum Artedi, Gen. Pise, 1738, 84 (Coasts of

Italy).
Esox dorso dipterygio Linnaeus, Mus. Ad. Fried., ii, 1754, 100.
Esoxspnyr(P.nah\m\si\\s, Syst. Nat, Ed. 10, i, 1758, 313; Ed. 12, i, 1766,

515 (based on Artedi); Gmelin, Syst. Nat., i, 1788, 1389.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 75

Sphyrmna sphyrana Bloch, Ichth., 1797, taf. ccclxxxix; Schneider,
Bloch, Syst. Ichth., 1801, 109; Risso, Ichth. Nice, 1810, 333 (Nice).

Esox spet Haiiy, Encyclopedie Methodique, iii, Poissons, 1787.

Sphyr<ena spet Lacepede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., v, 1803, 326-8; Bonaparte,
Iconografia della Fauna Italica, iii, Pesci plate with part 152 (Medi-
terranean); Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., v, 1876, 61 (Bermudas).

Sphyrmna, vulgaris Cuv. and Val., Hist. Nat. Poiss., iii, 1829, 327
(Mediterranean); Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., ii, 1861, 334
(Med terranean and Lanzarote); Giinther, Shore Fishes, Challenger,
1880, 3 (St. Jago) ; no description.

Sphyroena viridensis Cuv. and Val., op. cit.; iii, 1829, 339 (St. Jago,
Cape Verde Islands).
Habitat. — Coasts of Southern Europe and Northern Africa.
Islands of Atlantic (Cape Yerde ; Madeiras; Bermudas).

7. Sphyraena argentea Qirard. California Barracuda.

Sphyrena argentea Girard, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., vii, 1854, 144
(San Diego); Girard, Pac. R. R. Survey, 1859, 59, pi. xiv, 1 (San
Diego); Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., 1860, 338 (San Diego); Stein-
dachner, Ichthol. Beitrage, vii, 1 (Cape San Lucas to Monterey);
Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, iii, 29 (San Diego);
Jordan and Gilbert, op. cit., 1880, iii, 456 (San Francisco, Monterey,
Santa Barbara, San Pedro and San Diego; no description); Jordan
and Jouy, op. cit., iv, 1881, 13 (San Pedro and Santa Barbara);
Jordan and Gilbert, op. cit., iv, 1881, 44 (Monterey to Santa Barbara);
Jordan and Gilbert, op. cit., v, 1883, 358 (identification of Sphyrcena
lucasana Gill; Cape San Lucas).

Spliyroena lucasana Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1863, 86 (Cape
San Lucas).

Habitat. — Pacific Coast of America from San Francisco to Cape
San Lucas.

This species reaches a length of about three feet. We are not able
to positively distinguish this species from the published accounts
of S. sphyraena. We have, however, no doubt that differences
will appear on the actual comparison of specimens.

76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

CATALOGUE OF PLANTS COLLECTED IN JULY, 1883, DURING AN EXCUE-
SION ALONG THE PACIFIC COAST IN SOUTHEASTERN ALASKA.

BY THOMAS MEEHAN.

Few new plants have been discovered along the northern
Pacific coast, since its examination by the naturalists who accom-
panied the navigators and explorers of the earlier part of the
century ; and the results of their labors, as given in Rothrock's
Flora of Alaska^ the Geological Survey of Canada^ and other
lists, seem scarcely to warrant any addition to the botanical
literature of this part of the continent. The local histories of
these plants are, however, yet not well known ; and it seems to
me I may add a little to this knowledge b}^ some account of the
collection made during July, 1883, in a short trip on the " Idaho,"
a mail steamer from Portland to Sitka, and trading at vari-
ous points along the coast at many Indian-fishing settlements.

My object in the journey was simply to get a glance at this
interesting country, and the price demanded by the company for
my wife, son, and myself, $315, for first-class accommodations for
a month, not seeming unreasonable, we took the journey. The
only opportunity for collecting was during the few hours spent
in taking out and re-shipping stores at the stopping places ; and
the fact that in this short time and hurried gathering, I was able
to collect 275 species, indicates a greater richness of the flora
than I expected before starting on the journey. In a number of
places, also, the botanizing had to be done under an umbrella in
pouring rain, which wholly forbade entrance into the forests, and
led to an examination of the shore-lines alone. Rothrock's list
embraces but 590 species, including grasses and carices, which,
fearing I should not have time in my rapid journey, I seldom
touched. My impression is that when we shall have had better
opportunities of examining the interior of the territory, the list of
Alaskan plants will be still more largely increased. It is true mj'list
embraces the contiguous territory ; but probably all north of the
Columbia River — of the Straits of Fuca at least — may be regarded
as one geographical area up and down which plants may be
expected to travel.

Since the publication of Rothrock's Catalogue, other collectors
have added to our kno^-ledge of localities, though their work has

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 7t

not been published. The Herbft,rium of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia is rich through the labors of Harrington,
Kellogg and Davidson, and the author is indebted in a great
measure to their specimens for assistance in the identification of
his own.

The collection made at Bartlett (sometimes called Hood's)
Bay, is probably the first made at that point ; and it is the interest
attached to this that, chiefly, leads the author to publish the
paper.

On our return from Chilcat (written Tchillcat in some
charts) down the Lynn Channel, we ran up Icy Straits into Gla-
cier Bay, to the fifth or Muir Great Glacier ; and on our return,
passed in between the Beardslee Islands to the mainland at a
point opposite Cross or Icy Sound in about lat. 58.30, called on
our chart Bartlett Bay. This is on a peninsula formed by the
junction of Icy Sound with the Lynn Channel, and nothing seems
to be known of this immense tract of land, except what can be
gathered from the not over-friendly Indians who live along the
coast in the fishing season. An Indian trader, Mr. Richai'd Wil-
loughby, told the author that at a point about twenty-five miles
above this he had traveled northwest across the peninsula for
some forty miles to Pyramid Harbor, near the mouth of the Chil-
cat, as he was understood to sa3^ wholly on ice. It is quite
probable that at about a hundred miles north from Bartlett Bay
the country is a vast ice-sheet, and there were circumstances
which seemed clearly to show that at no great distance of time
in the past the whole of the western portion of this peninsula was
covered by ice ; while on the eastern shore, on Lynn Channel,
the forest trees showed the mixture of trees of various ages
common to old forests ; the forests of the western slope were all
comparatively young, and none were evidently over fifty years
of age. The earth to fifty feet or more in depth in many places
was composed wholly of glacial drift, and on this were the young
forest trees. Some remarks on these features more in detail are
given at page 187, 1883, of the Proceedings of the Academy. Since
they were published, Mr. Dall has kindly informed the author
that there is historical evidence to show that this part was
covered by ice at about the end of the past century. This being
so, it becomes a matter of considerable interest to ascertain how
so many plants have maintained an existence here — whether they

•78 • PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

have appeared since the recession of the ice, or whether they
managed to retain their hold during the whole continuance of
the ice-sheet.

At our landing place a small stream entered the ocean, and
this stream came through a swampy vallej^ a few hundred feet
wide, extending into the land for an unknown distance. The
hills of drift were on each side of this valley. All the planfcs were
collected within a quarter of a mile of the mouth of this stream,
and there is every reason to believe that a larger number of
species might have been collected had there been time or oppor-
tunity for more inland research along its line. By the margin of
the swamp were rocks from five to ten or twenty feet above its
ground level, and not covered by drift ; but on the more level
rocks often with a few feet of sand, which had evidently blown
in during the course of years. Yet with every opportunity to
do so had there been time for the work, very few of the plants
along the line of the stream had extended to the drift deposits
close by. These plants were not brought there by the drift. We
may say almost with certainty that they were there during the
period when the land was covered by ice. How did they manage
to maintain themselves under these circumstances ? Were they
wholly covered by ice ? or were there rifts and clefts in the ice-
sheet deep enough to allow plants a summer of recuperation?

I think we need not regard the last consideration as one of
necessity. There is reason to believe that under a low tempera-
ture plants will retain vital power for an indefinite period. Mr.
Douglas, of Waukegan, Illinois, once sent to me young trees of
Gatalpa speciosa, that had been placed in sand in a cool cellar and
forgotten a year, and that remained the whole twelve months
dormant, and grew the next year when planted out. Dr. Max-
well T. Masters, of London, has called attention to the case of
aii orchid which, as I remember, remained under ground a whole
season without growing, and this has been adduced as a probable
explanation of the non-appearance in some seasons of plants
which are plentiful in others. If a plant will remain dormant
one, two or three years under unfavorable conditions for growth,
who shall say how much longer a period the}' ma}' not live,
under conditions favorable to dormancy onl}' ? I have a strong
suspicion that just at or below the freezing-point roots may live
for an unlimited number of years ; and that a district might be

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Y9

covered b}' an ice-sheet for a quarter of a century or more, and
the plants beneath retain full vital powers.

By referring again to my remarks on some geological features
of this part of Alaska (page 183, Proc. Ac, as cited), it will be seen
by a sunken forest of apparently modern trees there is reason to
believe that in comparatively recent times this peninsula was
clothed with a rich vegetation — that it was of a sudden partially
submerged and perhaps as suddenly elevated again a little — and
that all these changes have been the work of but a few hundred
years. The plants in question have probably survived through
all these changes, though perhaps wholly ice-covered at times,
and have not been brought here by modern agencies ; and if these
suggestions, which are offered only as great probabilities, should
get fuller confirmation from any one in the future who may have
opportunities of going more fully into an investigation of the
spot, it will give additional interest to the study of botany in
connection with the great changes which have been going on over
the surface of our globe.

From other botanical evidences which southeastern Alaska
afl[brds, I am inclined to believe that geological changes in this
section have not required the long periods to effect which geolo-
gists usually demand. In the vicinity of the Davidson Glacier,
a little below Pyramid Harbor, layers of ice maybe seen covered
by sand and earth, and prevented from rapid thawing — only an
occasional spot showing the icy bed beneath — and yet alder and
other plants grow within a few hundred yards. On the other
hand, near the Muir Glacier, at the point where the river-bed
beneath the ice diverges from the glacier's direct course, the
only sign of arborescent vegetation is from a few score of willow-
bushes, scattered on the mountain-side. Beneath the drift, hun-
dreds of feet below, is a forest buried as it grew. Pines, alders,
and similar plants spread so readily in this region, that these
bare hill-sides would assuredly be clothed thickly with a forest
vegetation, thus replacing the forests which have been swept away,
if there had been time enough for the purpose. The immense
area and great depth of these treeless drift formations would
surely be regarded as requiring perhaps many centuries for
deposit, but for the evidence which the botanical observations
afford that the whole change must have taken place within very
I'ecent times.

80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

• In making the catalogue I have followed the example set by
Mr. Watson, in the Bibliographical Index ; a general view of the
relation of the species to each other is furnished by the natural
orders in systematic sequence — all the rest is alphabetical. In
a sj'stematic work on botany, an alphabetical index appears at
the end. A catalogue should be itself an index, as its chief use
is for reference and not for systematic study.

RANUNCULACE^.
Aconitum napellus Linn, Harrisburg, Alask^.
Actsea spicata, var. arguta Watson. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.
Aquilegia formosa Fiscb. Harrisburg, Alaska.
Caltha palustris L. Pyramid Harbor, Harrisburg, Alaska.
Coptis asplenifolia Salisb, Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

Seen also at Sitka and many places through Alaska, but
very seldom could I find fruit. The fine specimens from Fort
Wrangel were the only good ones found, and I had to look a
long time there among the plants before any were seen.

Sanuncalas flammula, var. reptans Meyer. Departure Bay, B. C, in summer-
dried, muddy places.
S. orthorhynchus Hook. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

Some of the flowers were of a deep orange-brown, but mostl}^

of an ordinary butter-cup yellow. Plant three to four feet high.

B. recurvatus Poir. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

B. repens L. Harrisburg, Alaska.

CRUCIFBR^.

Arabis alpina L. Killisnow Island, Alaska.

A. hirsuta Scop. Chilcat Inlet, Harrisburg, Alaska.

A. petrsea, var. ambigua Kegel. Cbilcat Inlet, Harrisburg, Killisnow Island.

Common on rocks in Alaska.
Cochlearia Anglica L. Harrisburg, Alaska.

C. officinalis L. Idaho Inlet, a newly explored arm of Cross Sound, by our s' earner

" Idaho."

A small form growing in mud, covered at high tide. Plants
from half inch to one and one-half inches in length, in full flower,
but no mature fruit.
Erysimum cheiranthoides L. Killisnow i Island, Alaska.

But common through the territory, growing from one foot
high to sometimes five feet.
Hasturtinm amphibium R. Br. Harrisburg, Alaska.

' Kenasnow on some maps.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 81

VIOLACE^.

Viola sarmentosa Dougl. Harrisburg, Alaska. Perfect flowering.

V. sarmentosa. In open gravelly places. Departure Bay, Alaska. Cleistogamous.

Arenaria lateriflora L. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

Cerastium alpinum L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

Honkenya peploides Ehrb. Killisnotr Island, Alaska.

I did not see Indians eating this, but I saw it in their
canoes, brought from places where it grew ; and often saw pieces
lying around where their camp-fires had been. I believe they
cook and eat it.

Spergula arvensis L. Harrisburg, Alaska; clefts of rocks by the seaside.

Stellaria borealis Bigel. Harrisburg, Sitka, Alaska.

S. crispa Ch. and Sch. Pyramid Harbor, Harrisburg, Alaska. Common.

S. longifolia Muhl. Harrisburg, Alaska.

Sagina prooumbens L. Sitka, Alaska.

PORTULACACEiE.

Claytonia sarmentosa C. A. Mey. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

This is evidently the plant intended by Pursh as G. lanceolata,
but I believe my plant is what is regarded as above. It is com-
mon along the coast, and is extremely variable. Eaten by
Indians.

Montia fontana L. Sitka, Alaska.

I saw only some half dozen small plants under a cabin set on
logs, and suspected it was an introduced plant.

HYPERICACE-ai.

Hypericum Soouleri Hook. Departure Bay, B. C.

MALVACE.ZE3.

Eidaloea malvseflora Gray. Victoria, B. C.

This appears to me somewhat different from the plant of the
more southern portion of the continent ; but Mr. Serano Watson
decides it to be this species. Two to three feet high,

GERANIACE^.

Geraniam erianthum D. C. Killisnow Island, Alaska.
G. pusillum Lin. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Victoria, B. C.
Impatiens falva Nutt.* Harrisburg, Alaska.

SAPINDACEiE.

Acer rubrum L. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884,

LEGUMINOS^.

Astragalus alpinus L. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

A. hypoglottis L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

Lathyrus maritimus Bigl. Pyramid Harbor, A'aska.

Lupinus Nookatensis Don. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

L, micrantlius Doug. Victoria, B. C.

Oxytropis Lambe''ti Pursh. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska,

Fsoralea physodes Dougl. Port Townsend, W. T.

More capitate than I have before seen- it.

Trifolium involuoratum Willd. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Victoria, B. C.

T microdon Hook. Port Townsend, W. T.; Victoria, B. C.

Vicia gigantea Hook. Sitka; Killisnow Island, and other places in Alaska.

ROSACEA.

Amelanchia alnifolia Nutt. Astoria, Or.

A dwarf variety, with large bhick, and excellent fruit.

Dryas octopetela L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

Plants without inflorescence. Glacier Ba3% near Muir Glacier,
a single large plant with fruit, on a moraine deposit.

Fragaria chilensis Duch. Chilcat Inlet, Alaska, also in Bartlett Bay.

This species interested me by the dark color of the upper sur-
face of the leaves as contrasted with the lower ; the deeply
incised first (autumn) leaves; the enormous runners, often two
feet long before bearing a plant ; the very long — often over a
foot — and slender common peduncles of the later flowers, and
very short, often nearl}' sessile common peduncles of the earliest
flowers ; the very large flowers; and pale, scarcely red fruit. The
Indian boys and girls go out and collect them, as our boys and
girls do. At Killisnow Island, I did not see them growing, but
Indian women bi'ought them to our landing, and knew enough of
our language to ask " ten cents " for small measures of them.

F. vesca L. Departure Bay, B. C.

I believe I saw it in Alaska, but have no specimen.

6eum macrophyllum Willd. Pyramid Harbor. Common in Alaska.

Neillia opulifolia B. & H. Departure Bay, B. C.

Nuttallia cerasiformia T. & U. Astoria, Or.

Fyrus rivularis Doug. Astoria, Or. ; Victoria, B. C. ; Sitka, Alaska.

P. sambucifolia Ch. & S. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

I saw but one plant, on an Indian trail so steep and slimj', it
was impossible to climb. It had no fruit ; but on the trail were

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83

several red fruit, evidently of this species, but not one-fourth the
ordinary size, about the size of an elderberr3\ At Sitlia I saw
the plant with the full-sized fruit, half mature, that we see further
south.

Fotentilla fragiformis Willd., var. villosa. Chilcac Inlet, Sitka, Alaska.
Varj'ing in habit.

Prunus emarginata Walp., var. mollis. Astoria, Or.
Eosa gymnocarpa Nutt. Departure Bay, B. C.

In open places a shrub two to three feet, but along the trail
through woods not too dense, it would rise six to eight feet
high ; and the red fruit, one to three on a common peduncle,
made a very ornamental shrub.

E. Nutkana Presl. (E. cinnamomea Hook). Pyramid Harbor, Alaska; Victoria,
and some forms everywhere.

Varies very mueli in size and form of fruit, sometimes having
them as large as Damson plums ; seems generally characterized
by very large stipules, especially on the upper part of the flower-
ing stem.

Eubus leucodermis Dougl. Departure Bay, B. C. ; Astoria, Or.

Leaves commonly pinnate, with fi\e leaflets. Fruit better than
the Eastern Black Cap, which it resembles.

E. natkanus Mofino. Killisnow Island; but very common throughout the coast.
E. spectabilis Pursh. Killisnow Island; but everywhere throughout Alaska.

The fruit is most prevalently of an amber-yellow, but often
scarlet or red. The flavor is wholly that of a blackberry, rather
than of a raspberry, and they vary very much in size. The
Indian women of Sitka have ver}- large ones, which they sell on
the road-side. At Killisnow Island I saw two Indian women,
whom I encountered in the woods, gathering the soft green tops
of the summer shoots in large bunches. They made signs to me
that they ate them ; I suppose cooked.

E. stellatus Smith. Sitka.

Though the plants seemed abundant, many flowers were
abortive, and a large number had but a single red carpel, or two
or three only. I had trouble to find a few with perfect berries.

E. ursinus Ch. & S. Departure Bay, B. C.

Spiraea Aruncus L. Harrisburg, Alaska; Departure Bay, B. C.

8. discolor Pursh. Victoria, B. C; Harrisburg, and common along the Alaskan
coast.

I am not able to decide to which of the varieties these northern

84 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

forms should be referred, but they strike one differently from the
plant I have collected in the Rocky Mountains, S. dumosa.
Sanguisorba canadensis C. & S. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

SAXIFRAQACEJE.

Heuchera glabra Willd. Harrisburg, Alaska.

H. micrantha Dougl. Harrisburg, Alaska.

Parnassia palustris L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

Bibes bracteosam Dougl. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska, and common along the coast.

Very striking by the stems as thick as one's finger, and very
stout annual shoots, enormous maple-like leaves, long leaf-stalks,
and racemes eight to ten inches long. The berries are called by
the Indians " Shaum," as I understood them. They are gathered
and preserved in fat for winter use.

B. divaricatom Dougl. Port Townsend, W. T.

B. lacustre Pois. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Harrisburg, Alaska.

B. Hudsonianum Richard. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

This seems to grow onlj"^ about stumps or dead logs. I believe
the berries are used by Indians, as are those of B. b/'acteosum,

B. sanguineum Pur. Departure Bay, B. C.
B. subvestita Hook.?

Fruit very large — as large as the English gooseberry', which
even the foliage somewhat resembles. The berry is covered by
viscid hairs, by which even a large berry will adhere to the finger.
The color of the fruit is scarlet, but the flavor is insipid. The
shrub grows about four to five feet high.

Saxifraga leucanthemifolia Mx. Harrisburg, Alaska.

S. tricuspidata Retz. Chilcat Inlet, Alaska.

Tellima grandiflora R. Br. Harrisburg, Alaska.

Tiarella trifoliata L. Port Townsend, W. T., and northwards.

CRASSULACEiE.

Sednm spathnlsefoliam Hook. Victoria, B. C.
8. Bhodiola D. C. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

DROSERACEiE.

Drosera rotundifolia L. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

ONAGRACE^.

Circeea alpina L. Harrisburg, Alaska.

Epilobium affine Bong. Fort Wrangel, Sitka, Alaska.

E. alpiaum L. Pyramid Harbor, Killisnow Island, Alaska.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85

E. latifolium L. Pyramid Harbor, Muir Glacier, Alaska. *

E. minutum Lindl. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.
E. panicnlatam Nutt. Departure Bay, B. C.
£. spicatum, Lam. Port Townsend, W. T.

About eighteen inches or two feet, with narrow leaves Q inch),
tapering gradually at both ends. Yictoria, B. C, two to three
feet, leaves broader ; Killisnow Island, Alaska, four to five feet
high, leaves one to one and one-half inches broad, spike leafy,
and inclined to be paniculate.

CUCURBITACEiE.

Echinocysiis lobata T. & G. Columbia River, above Astoria, Or.

UMBELLIPER-53

Arohangelioa Gmeleni D. C. Harrisburg, Kaigan, and other places in Alaska.

The few whites we met called it "celery." In many Indian
lodges I saw bundles of fresh flower stems, and in some cases
Indians peeling or stringing them as we do rhubarb stalks, and
eating them raw with apparent relish.

It is interesting to note that Linnaeus, in his tour in Lapland,
notes that the Laplanders use this plant in the same way.

Crantzia lineata Nutt. Columbia River, above Astoria, Or.
Heracleum lanatum Mx. Harrisburg and many other places in Alaska.

Geological survey of Canada says Indians eat the leaf-stalks ;
but I saw no evidence of this in Alaska.

Ligasticum sooticum L. Idaho Inlet, Killisnow, Harrisburg, Alaska.

Common along the Alaskan coast.
(Enanthe sarmentosa Presl. Departure Bay, B. C.
Sanicala Menziesii Hook & Am. Port Townsend, W. T., Victoria, B. C.
Slum cicatsefolium Gmel. Astoria, Or.

ARALIACE^.

Fatzia horrida B. & H. Pyramid Harbor, Harrisburg, and other places in Alaska.

Often forming dense underbrush in forests, growing four to
eight feet high, and making traveling impossible unless with
great labor. An Indian explained to me that it was in common
use with them as a medicine.

COHNACE-S3.

Cornus stolonifera Mx. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.
C. canadensis L. Sitka, Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

86 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

CAPRIFOLIACEJE.

Lonicera hispidula Dougl.

I see no difference between the yellow and red forms, though
they strike one as distinct when growing. The red form, Port
Townsend, W. T.

L. involucrata Banks. Kaigan, Alaska.

Seemingly different from the Colorado plant, but chiefly in
size and habit. The plant has a sarmentose or half-climbing char-
acter. It grows up the hemlock trees as they grow ; and, when
the lower branches of the hemlock die, the stems of the Lonicera
remind one of grap6vines. But the plant travels along the
lower living or dead branches of the hemlock, outwards to the
light. Away from trees they are self-supporting, but yet the
branches are somewhat pendulous. In such cases eight to ten
feet high.

Linnsea borealis Gion. Port Townsend, W. T.
Sambucus racemosa Mx. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

Familiar as I am with the var. piihens of the Allegheny and
Rocky Mountains, I could hardly believe the forms deserved to
be regarded as identical after seeing the Alaska plants, especially
those about Fort Wrangel. The inflorescence was strictl}^ race-
mose, which the more eastern form is not. Shrubs six to ten
feet, and as wide, covered with brilliant scarlet berries, were
extremely attractive.

Symphoricarpus racemosuB Ms. Victoria, B. C.
Vibamam ellipticum Hook. Pj'ramid Harbor, Alaska.

RUBIACEJE.

Galium asprellum Mx. Victoria, B. C.

Slender habit. ' Harrisburg and Sitka, coarse and straggling.

G. triflorum Mx. Port Townsend, W. T.; Victoria, B. C; Harrisburg, Sitka, Alaska.

Leaves getting broader from each location northwards.
COMPOSITJE.

Adenocaulon bioolor Hook. Port Townsend, W. T.

Acbillea miUefolium L. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Victoria, B. C; Harrisburg,
Alaska.

Much more vigorous and hairy than the eastern plant, and
generally with deep rosy, occasionally with pinky white, but
rarely, if ever, with pure white flowers.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 8T

Anaphalis margaritacea Benth. Bartlett Bay, Chilcat Inlet, Alaska..

Antennaria alpina Gaert. Chilcat Inlet, Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

Arnica Chamissonis Less. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

Aster Souglasii Hook. Columbia River, Astoria, Or.

Bahia lanata Nutt. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Victoria, B. C.

Cnicus ednlis Gray. Columbia River, above Astoria, Or. ; Departure Bay, B, C.

Erigeron acre L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

E. alpinum L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska,

E. FMladelphicum. Victoria, B. C.

E. speciosam D. C. Port Townsend, W. T.

Gnaphalium purpuremn Lin. Port Townsend, W. T,

Hieracium albiflorum Hook. Port Townsend, W. T.

H. cynoglossoides Amt. Touv. Port Townsend, W. T.

H. Scouleri Hook. Departure Bay, B. C.

Leontodon hirstltum Hook. Port Townsend, W. T.

Densely hairy ; Victoria, B. C, slightly hairy and more slen-
der than the Port Townsend plant.

Madia filipes Gray. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Victoria, B. C.
M. Nuttalliana Gray. Port Townsend, W. T.; Victoria, B. C.
Mioromeris Bigelowii Gray. Victoria, B, C.
Nabalus alatns Hook. Harrisburg, Fort Wrangel, Sitka, Alaska.
Pyrethrum Parthenium L.

A single plant on the Columbia River, four miles above Astoria,
most likely introduced, but worth recording as noting the com-
mencement of naturalization.

Senecio pseud-arnica Hook. Killisnow Island, Alaska.

Solidago elongata Nutt. Victoria, B. C,

S. multiradiata Ait. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

Sonchus oleraceus L. Astoria, Or. ; Departure Bay, B. C.

Quite common, but I suppose introduced in some way.

Taraxacum palustre Lin. Departure Bay, B. C. ; Port Townsend, W. T.
Campanula rotundifolia L. Chilcat Inlet,' Alaska.

In the crevices of rocks ; the flowers very large, and the stems
very stout. Indian name " narl," and represented as " good for
medicine. "

C. Scouleri Hook. Departure Bay, B. C.

About four inches high, densely leafy, and leaves narrow in
open rocky places ; a foot high, slender, leaves broad and scat-
tered in somewhat shady places.

88 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

ERICACE^.

Arbutus Meaziesii Pursh. Departure Bay, B. C.
Bryanthus glanduliferus Gray. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
Cassiope Mertensiana Don. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
C. tetragona Don. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
Gaultheria Shallon Pursh. Port Townsend, W. T.

One to two feet high ; Kaigan and other places in Alaska, two
to four feet or more, and forming a dense undergrowth rendering
the forest almost impassable.

Kalmia glauca L. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.
Ledum palustre L. Fort Wrangel, Sitka, Alaska.

Leaves broader as the plant extends northwards.

Uenziesia ferruginia Smith. Fort Wrangel, Sitka, and Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

Moneses unifiora Gray. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

Pyrola ohlorantha Swartz. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

P. rotundifolia Lin. Port Townsend, W. T.

P. seounda Lin. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

Vacoinium ovalifolium Sm. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

V. ovatum Pursh. Columbia River, above Astoria, Or. *"

v. parvifolium Sm. Columbia River, above Astoria, Or.

V. uliginosum L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

V. Vitis-Idsea L. Sitka, Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

PLUMBAGINACEJE.

Armeria vulgaris Willd. Victoria, B. C.

PRIMULACEiE.

Dodeoatheon Ueadia L. Killisnow Tsland, Alaska.

Var. macrocarpum probably. Clefts of rocks along the shore.

Glaux maritima L. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.
Primula borealis Duby. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
Trientalis Europsea Linn. Sitka, Alaska.
T. Europaea, var, arctica Fisch. Harrisburg, Alaska.

OLEACE^.

Frazinas Oregana Nutt. Victoria, B. C.
But perhaps introduced.

GENTIANACEiE.
Oentiana amarella L., var. acuta Engel. Departure Bay.

1884.J NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 89

POLEMONIACEiE.

CoUomia heterophylla Hook. Columbia River, above Astoria.

There is in the Herbarium of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia, a specimen of this, and perhaps from the same
locality, simply marked " Gilia, Columbia River." In the same
paper is a specimen marked Navarretia heterophylla Benth.,
" from Durand's Herbarium," which is almost smooth, not viscous
as this is, and accords with the figure in Hook. Bot. Mag.,t. 2895,
which this and Nuttall's specimen scarcely do.

BORRAGINACE^.

Mertensia maritima Dun. Killisnow Island, Alaska.

SCROPHULARIACEJE.

Boscbniakia glabra C. H. Meyer. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

Among alders, apparently in the track of a receding glacier.
A long woody thread descends from the base of the scaly flower
stem, but in the haste of collecting I did not find to what
the thread was attached, if it were attached at all. The Indians
make no use of the plant, but class it with plants which are
" cultash " (no good). Their name for this is " Asquakali."

Castillija hispida Bentb. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

C. miniata Dougl. Victoria, B. C.

C pallida Kunth. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

Common through Alaska, and varying very much, especially
in the colors of the bracts and flowers.

Euphrasia officinalis L. Bartlett Bay, A'aska.
Mimulus dentatus Nutt. Astoria, Or.

Though from the numerous variations oi M. luteus L. this might
be regarded as but a variety of that species, it has a ver}' distinct
appearance when seen growing. The dark, blue-green, thick
leaves are particularl}^ striking. This might be owing to the
sub-saline locality — so many maritime plants having foliage of
this character ; but the normal M. luteus may be often seen i^
similar situations, and without these characters. Dr. Gray, in
Botanical Gazette^ now regards it as a good species.

Mimulus luteus L. Harrisburg, Alaska.

Common along the coast.

Fedicalaris palustris, var. Wlaxsovinna Bunge. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
Scrophularia Californica Cham. Astoria, Or.
Veronica scutellata L. Departure Bay, B. C.
V. alpina L. ? Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

7

90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

LENTIBULARIACE^.
Finguicnla vulgaris L. Bartlett Baj-, Alaska.

LABIATJE.

Brunella vulgaris L. Victoria, B. C.

This does not strike me quite like the introduced form of the
Eastern States, and is most likely indigenous.

Galeopsis Tetrahit L. Sitka, Alaska.

A patch of a few yards in extent, but seemingly many years
established, on the shore, near the old city, was the only
locality noted on the journey, and suggests that the plant may
have been a Russian introduction.

Mentha canadensis L. Departure Bay, B. C.
Micromeria Douglasii Benth. Port Town send, W. T.
Stachys ciliata Doug. Victoria, B. C.

Damp, grassy places. A very ornamental plant.

PLANTAGINACE^.

Flantago major, var. Asiatica D. C. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.
P. major, var. minima Dee. Departure Bay, B. fJ.

Both these forms grow in saline soil, and the location can have
no influence on their very distinct appearances.

POLYGONACEiE.
Polygonum viviparum L. Killisnow Island, Alaska.
Rumez domesticus Hart. Hoona (Bartlett Bay).

Petioles a foot long, and half an inch wide. Leaf-blade about
a foot long and nine inches wide at the base, tapering towards
the obtuse apex. My specimens moulded in drying too badly to
determine properly. I have followed other collectors in naming
the plant, though I am inclined to regard it rather as B. Patienta
L. The petioles are eaten by the Indians as we use the garden
rhubarb.

B. salicifolias Wienm. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

CHENOPODIACE^.

Atripex patula, var. Uttoralis Gray. Harrisburg, Sitka, Fort Wrangel, and other
places along the coast.

EMPETRACEiE.
Empetrnm nigrum L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91

BETULACE^.

Alnus rubra Bong. Pyramid Harbor, Kaigan, Alaska.
A. viridis D. C. Harrisburg, Alaska.

I have identified these with much hesitation, regretting on my
return home to find my material confined to a single branch of
each — the alders of Alaska being worthy, as I now believe, of
closer investigation. My botanizing at Harrisburg, and at Kai-
gan, had to be done beneath an umbrella and in pouring rain —
unfavorable for the close study of arborescent growth. If the
identifications are correct, the names would deserve to be trans-
posed. The " Harrisburg " species is the one prevalent from
there south through British Columbia to the Columbia River,
often making a tree I should judge from thirty to forty feet
high, and with a trunk occasionally say five to six feet in
circumference. The bark of the trunk is a dark reddish brown.
The finely serrulate leaves, however, seem precisely like the
leaves of A. viridis, as I have collected it on the mountains of
New Hampshire, and North Carolina, though it is difficult to
believe so small a shrub there, should be so fine a tree here.

The alder of Kaigan and Pyramid Harbor is a much larger
tree, with a gray and rather smooth bark, even when quite aged.
At Pyramid Harbor, a summer settlement for salmon-fishing,
Indians had cut some down, and were making canoes — dug-outs—
of them. From memory I am sure some of these logs must have
been near three feet thick, and thirty feet long — the original
height of the tree being probably more than double this. These
were on rich bottom lands, near but not on the retreating
glacier's track. On the track the same plant apparently made a
dense shrubby growth, not taking on at all a tree-like character.

Betula papyracea Ait. Chilcat Inlet, Alaska.

Probably this species ; but the leaves seem all cordate and
densely woolly. Only a single tree was seen, not mature appar-
ently ; but there might have been more, for when found it was
approaching midnight and getting almost too dark for further

explorations,

SALICACEJE.

Saliz Pallasii And. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

S. reticulata L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

S. Sitchensis Sanson, var. denudata And. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

S. Barclay! And. Bartlett Bay, Alaska,

92 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

CUPULIPERJE.

Quercus Kellogii Newb. Victoria, B. C.

Where exposed to the sea-breezes this seemed but a small
" chinquapin "-like bush two or three feet ; but only a short
distance in the island it becomes a fine timber tree. I believe
this is as far north as I saw any species of oak growing.

TAXACE^.
Taxus brevifolia Nutt. Victoria, B. C, and Port Townsend, W. T.

A few trees in the vicinity of Victoria, quite as large as some
seen in the Calaveras grove of Sequoias, and probabl}?^ growing
further north, though not seen.

CONIFERJE.

Abies grandis Lindl. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Victoria, B. C.
Chamaecyparis Nutkaensis Spach.

Is said by authors to be very abundant from the Columbia
River northward through British Columbia and southeastern
Alaska. I could not find a single specimen, though continually
on the lookout for it, and the owner of a saw-mill at Killisnow
Island informed us that the " yellow cedar " Was an extremely
rare tree in that region.

Ficea Sitcfaensis Carriere (Aliea Menziesii, of sf'me modern authors).

Common everj^where through British Columbia to the head of
Glacier Bay, Alaska, at the latter place forming buried forests
near the Muir Glacier and Bartlett Bay. At Kaigan some trees
measured twenty-one feet round. It evidently loves atmospheric
moisture, and grows on barren rocks, when it is under these
atmospheric conditions, quite vigorously; and in this way assists
in forming a covering of earth over the rocks. At Kaigan there
were trees of many years old, growing from the top of the Indian
"totem poles," half as tall as the poles' at times.

Finns contorta Dougl. Chilcat Inlet.

A tree about twenty or thirty feet high, with a rather flattish,
spreading head ; short ovoid cones, and which are not at all
oblique, growing among rocks along the coast.

Also at Bartlett Bay, where it is a stout, very vigorous shrub,
branching from the base, without any attempt to make a leader,
and much resembling the habit of Pinus montana of Europe. The
plants were very fertile, the cones being freely scattered among
the branches, and cylindrical, without any tendency to obliquity.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 93

Following the Botany of California this would probably be referred
to the true P. contorta, of Douglas, and the first named to P.
contorta, var. Murray ana ^ though the characters, as I find them,
do not quite agree. I have thought best to leave the determina-
tion indefinite.

Tsuga Mertensiana Carriere. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Victoria, B. C, and common
along the coast. Specimens from Fort Wrangel.

This is the "hemlock" of these parts, and some of the trees at
Sitka and Fort Wrangel were as large, at least, as the best spec-
imens of the hemlock found at the East.

Tseudtsuga Douglasii Carriere. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Victoria, B. C. ; Sitka,

Alaska.
Thuja gigantea Nutt. Port Townsend, W. T.; Victoria, B. C. ; Kaigan, Alaska.

Common along the coast. •

This, Tsuga Mertensiana, and alders, form most of the arbor-
escent vegetation of the southeastern Alaskan coast.

OBCHIDACEJE.

Habenaria dilitata Gray. Port Townsend, W. T.

As it seems to me, though it may be a form Qf .S. leucostachys,
Wat.

H. hyperborea Bartlett Bay, in glacial drift.
Spiranthes Bomanzoffiana Cham. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

IRIDACE^.

Sisyrincbium anceps L. Sitka

Not abundant, but probably indigenous.

LILIACE^,

Allium acuminatum Hook. Victoria, B. C.

Brodiaea lactea Watson. Port Townsend, W. T. ; Victoria, B. C.

B, grandiflora Watson. Victoria, B. C.

An imperfect specimen ; probably belongs here.

Frosartes Oregana Watson. Victoria, B. C.

Smilacina bifolia, var. dilitata Wood. Sitka, Fort Wrangel, and many places along
the coast, but seldom found in fruit.

The fruiting specimens here from Sitka, have also three, and
sometimes four, leaves on the scape.

Streptopus amplexifolius D. C. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.
Tofieldia glutinosa Willd. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

94 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

ARACE^,

Lysichiton Camtschatcense Schott. Fort "Wrangel, and throughout the coast.

Leaves larger, narrower and much more glaucous than its ana-
logue, the skunk cabbage of the Eastern States.

Two 3'ouug deer, about a j^ear old, were captured while
attempting to swim across a four-mile stretch of an arm of the
sea, and brought on board the steamer, the captain intending to
take them to San Francisco. They took well to their imprison-
ment ; but after some time, the ship's boat brought back a lot of
these leaves. I remarked to the captain that the acrid leaves
would probably be fatal to the animals, but he remarked that
they would not eat them so freely if injurious, and they were fed
continuously for several days on them, when one died. The cap-
tain's idea was that il^ died of sea-sickness. It had been very
rough the night it died. The other one finally recovered,

NAIDACE^.

Triglochin maritimum L. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.
T. palustre L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

JUNCACE^.

Juncus arcticus Willd. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
J. Balticus Dethard. Fort Wrangel.

Varies in size in different localities.

J. bufonius L. Sitka, Alaska.

J. filiformis I.. Astoria, Or.

J. xiphioides Meyer. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

Luzula campestris D. C. Sitka, Alaska.

L. spadicea, var pnrvijiora Meyer. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

CYPERACEJE.

Carex cryptocarpa. Alaska.

C. muricata Linn. Alaska.

C. undetermined. Alaska.

C. undetermined. Alaska.

Eriophorum gracile Koch. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

Scirpus puflgens Vahl. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

GRAMINEiE.

(Identified by F. Lamson Scribner.)
Agrostis alba var. scaherrima. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
A. canina, var, Sitka, Alaska.
A. exarata Trin. Sitka, Alaska.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 95

A vulgaris Nutt. Sitka, Alaska.

Aira caryopliyllea L. Victoria, B. C.

Alopecurus aristulatus Mx. Departure Bay, B. C.

Atropus angustata Ledeb. Sitka, Alaska.

Deschampsia elongata. Departure Bay, B. C.

Deyeuxia Langsdorffii Kunth. Fort Wrangel, Ala&ka.

Elymus Sibiricus L. Departure Bay, B. C.

This seemed so great a favorite with the birds that it was with
difficulty I got a few complete spikes for herbarium.

Elymas mollis Trin. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.

This is a broad-leaved, strong-growing kind, growing along
sandy shores as E. arenarius does in other places ; and not
uncommon along the coast.

Festaoa ovina, var. duriuseula. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
Festnca ovina, var. duriuseula. Sitka, Alaska.
The last spike much more decompound.

Glyceria angnstata Griesb. Idaho Inlet, Cross Sound, Alaska.

Mr. Scribner refers it to Griesbach's species without deciding
whether or not it should be united with G. distans G. The
plant was growing in mud overflowed at high-tide, and formed a
dense carpet of green grass on the mud. The growth is about
lour to six inches.

G. distans Gr. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.
6. pauciflora Presl. Sitka, Alaska.
Hierochlce borealis L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
Holcus lanatus L. Astoria, Or.

Only one plant noted, on the hills along the river, about four
miles above Astoria. Pyrethrum Parthenium was also collected
within a few feet of it.

Hordeum nodosum L. Bartlett Bay, Fort Wrangel, Alaska.
Phleum alpinum L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
F. pratense L Sitka, Alaska.

Common in grassy places ; but possibly introduced.

Poa pratensis L. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

Both the green and the bronzy forms.

Trisetum spicatum, var. moUe, Gray. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.

EQUISETACE^.
Eqnisetum variegatum Scb. Bartlett Bay, Alaska,

96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

FILICES.

Adiantum pedatum L. Ilarrisburg, Killisnow Island, Alaska.

Pinnules more deeply lobed, and the divisions of the stipe more
elongated and slender than the Eastern form.

Aspidium munitum Kaul. Departure Bay, B. C.

Very variable in size ; but always seeming very fertile.

A. aculeatum Swartz. Harrisburg, Alaska.
Cryptogramme acrostichoides R. Br. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
Yery vigorous, fronds 9 to 10 inches.

Cystopteris bulbifera. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.
Cystopteris fragilis. Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.
Lomaria Spicant Desveaux. Sitka, Alaska.
Phegopteris Dryopteris, Fee. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.
Phegopteris polypoides Fee. Bartlett Bay, Alaska.
Polypodium falcatum Kellogg. Killisnow Island, Alaska.
Polypodium vulgare L. Killisnow Island.
Pteris aquilina L. Victoria, B. C. Fort Wrangel, Alaska.

LYCOPODIACEJE.

Lycopodium aunotinnm L. Killisnow Island, Alaska.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 91

NOTES ON SPECIES OF FISHES IMPROPERLY ASCRIBED TO THE FAUNA
OF NORTH AMERICA.

BY DAVID S. JORDAN.

The study of the geographical description of species is impos-
sible without a correct knowledge of the species themselves and
of the localities whence specimens have been obtained. Every
attempt at generalization in this field has been more or less
vitiated by errors of identification or errors as to locality. No
accident, unfortunately, is more common in museums, or in private
collections,' than the mixing of specimens from difierent localities,
and the false records arising from such confusion have a wonder-
ful vitality. The early writers in S3'stematic zoology had no con-
ception of the problems of geographical distribution, and many
modern writers have a very low estimate of the importance of
accuracy in that regard.

It is certain that numerous species of fishes have been ascribed
on erroneous information to the waters of the United States, by
writers of authority. Such species should of course be dropped
from the lists. Nor should any species be retained in regard to
which any serious doubt exists. It is manifestly better that a
chance visitor to our shores should be erroneously omitted, than
that a species which has never been taken should be improperly
inserted.

I give here the names of 35 species which should, in my opinion,
be dropped from our lists of species inhabiting the waters of
North America, north of the Tropic of Cancer. Most of these
are admitted in Jordan and Gilbert's Sjmopsis of the Fishes of
North America, but many of them are repudiated in the addenda
to this work. I omit sevei'al species already expunged by earlier
writei'S, and include only those which have lately had some degree
6f currency. I divide these into two series, as to whether the
error is one as to locality or as to identification.

a. Species erroneously recorded as to locality.

1. Carcliaiias isodon Mtiller and Henle.

Originally described from a specimen from unknown localitj'
collected by Milbert. As Milbertmade some collections in New
York, it has been assumed that this specimen came from New
York, and that Mitchill's Squalus punctatus is the same species.

98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

But Mitchill's shark was probably the Garcharias terrse-ncvse of
Richardson, and no recent collector has found C. isodon on our
coasts.

2 Carcharias punctatus (Mitch. )•

Described by Richardson as C. terrse-novae, from a specimen
brought by Audubon from Newfoundland. Scor]Dsena bufo C. and
V. (=; S. plumieri Bloch) and Maltlie cubifrons Rich. (= M.
vespertilio, var. radiata Mitch.) were in the same collection.
Audubon collected in Southern Florida also : his accuracy in
regard to localities is not above suspicion, and the three species
in question belong to the fauna of the Florida Coast. There is
not the slightest probability that ^ny of the three came from the
northern coast.

S. Dules auTiga Cuv. and Val.

A South American fish, introduced in our lists by De Ka5^,from
a specimen seen " several years ago in the collection of Mr.
Hamilton, who informed me that it had been taken in the harbor
of New Yoik." This is not probable.

4. Paranthias furcifer (Cu^. and Val.).

iBrachyrhinus creolus [C. and V.] Gill.)
Described by De Kay under the name of Corvina oxyptera,
from an old specimen in the cabinet of the New York Lyceum,
" obtained from the adjacent coast." The specimen was probably
from the West Indies, where the species is not uncommon.

5. Epiaephelus niveatus Cu". and Val.

A young specimen belonging (according to Goode and Bean)
to this species, was described by Professor Gill (Proc. Ac. Nat.
Sci. Phila., 1861, 98) under the name of Hyporthodus fiavicauda.
This specimen belonged to a collection sent to the Academy at
Philadelphia by Mr. Samuel Powell, of Newport, Rhode Island.
A list of this collection is given by Professor Cope (Proc. Ac.
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1870, 118). Eleven species are included in it.
All are represented by young specimens, which had probably
not strayed far from the place where they were hatched. All of
them are of tropical types ; six of them have not since been found
in the United States, and onl}^ two {Garanx setipinnis Mitch. =
Vomer curtus Cope, and Pseudojjriacanthus altus Gill) have since
been seen on the New England Coast ; while three others (Eemi-

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 99

rhamphus unifasciatus Ranz., Glyphidodon saxatilis L., and
Tetrodon testudineus L.) are found on our Florida Coast.

Certainly it is very improbable that this collection was made
at Newport, and I think that until good evidence appears that
such was the case, the entire list should be erased.

6. Polyprion americanus (Blnch and Schneider).

(Polyprion cernium Val. )
Dr. Day says (Fish. Gt. Britain, etc., p. 11) of this species:
" Forster recorded it from Queen Charlotte's Island on the
Western shore of North America." The " Queen Charlotte's
Island " referred to by Forster, lies, if I am not mistaken, in the
neighborhood of New Zealand, and his Perca pr'ognatha or
Epinephelus oxygenios Bloch and Schneider is probably a species
of Stereohpis ; at any rate, not a Polyprion ; P. americanus^\ioY[-
ever, has been taken in deep water off our Atlantic Coast.

7. Ehypticus nigripinnis (5ill.

{ Promicropterus decorattis Gill.)
A species belonging to the Pacific Coast of Tropical America.
A specimen in the Powell collection above noticed, was identified
with it ]ry Professor Cope.

P. Apcgon americanus (Cnstelnau).

A specimen in the Powell collection was identified with this
species by Pi'ofessor Cope. Castelnau's type came from South
America. It was very imperfectly described and is in bad con-
dition. Yaillant and Bocourt have identified the specimen some-
what doubtfully with A])ogon dovii, a Panama species ; what
Professor Cope had is therefore veiy doubtful.

9. Chsetodon maoulocinctus (Gill).

Described from a very young fish in the Powell collection, and
not since recognized.

10. Scorpaena porcus L.

A specimen in the Museum at Paris, said to have been brought
by Milbert from New York, which is verj- improbable.

11. Trigla cuculus L.

A specimen in Paris, collected b}'^ Milbert with the preceding
species. Both belong to the fauna of Southern Europe.

12. BalistPS powelli Cope.

Described from the Powell collection ; perhaps a young specimen
of Balistes oarolinensis Gmelin (= B. capriscus Gmelin).

100 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

13. Tetrodon trichocephalus Cope.

Described from the Powell collection ; not since recognized.

14. Sanzania truncata (Retz).

Given in Jordan and Gilbert's Synopsis Fish. N. A. as " occa-
sional off our Atlantic Coast." The specimen in question came
from the Bermudas.

b. Species admitted through erroneous identifications.

1. Galeus galeus (L.).

Recorded from California by Dr. Giinther and later by Jordan
and Gilbert. Our specimens are since recognized as belonging to
a distinct species, G. zyopterus J. and G.

2. Carcharias plumbeus Nard >.

( Carcharias milberti Val. )
One of the types of Carcharias milherti Yal. came from
Milbert's collection, " New York." The others were from the
Mediterranean and belongs to the previously described G. plum-
beus. Milbert's specimen was probably either C. coerideus.i or
else from some other locality. In any event, G. milberti Yal.
should not have a place in our lists.

3. Carcharias lam'a Ri.=so.

First ascribed to our fauna by Putnam, from a tooth found on
St. George's Banks ; afterwards by Jordan and Gilbert from
specimens taken at San Diego, California. The latter belong to
distinct species (G. lamiella J. and G.). The species, however,
occurs in abundance about the Florida Keys, and it should be
retained in our lists.

4. Isurus glaucus Mttller and Henle.

Our fish does not agree well with Miiller and Henle's account
of the East Indian glaucus. It is probably distinct and should
stand as I. dekayi Gill.

5. Isarus spollanzani Raf.

Certainly not yet positively known from our coast. De Kay's
Lamna punctata is Isurus dekayi. Storer's Lamna punctata is
Lamna cornubica.

6. Heptranchias indicus (Cuvicr).

The Californian species, H. maculatus Ayres, has been erro-
neously confounded with this East Indian shark.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101

7. Pristis pristis (L.).

There is no evideuce of the occurrence of this species (P. anti-
quorum Latham) in American waters. All Atlantic specimens
studied belong to P. 2?ec^wa^ws Latham ; those from Panama to
P. perroteti Val.

8. Lepidosteus tristoechus (Bloch).

Our Alligator Gar appears to be somewhat different from this
Cuban species. Its oldest name is Lepidosteus spatula Lac.

9. Mursena afra Blocfa.

The American species thus called by Giinther and by Jordan
and Gilbert does not appear to be identical with the African
species called Gymnothorax o,fer by Bloch, which is described as
" brnnneo alboque marmorato." Our species should apparently
stand as 3Iurse7ia funehris (Ranzani). Ilureena infernalis Poey
is the same species.

10. Ophichthys punctifer Kaup.

The specimens from Pensacola recorded as 0. punctifer or
mordax Poey, belong to the species called Ophichthys schneideri
by Steindachner. Possibl}^ all three are identical.

11. Sphyraena sphyrena (L.).

Our small Northern Barracuda has been identified with this
European species (Sphyraena spet Lac.) by Giinther and later b}^
Jordan and Gilbert. It is, however, I think, specifically distinct
and should stand as Sphyrsena borealis De Kay, as has been
already indicated by Goode and Bean, and by Meek and New-
land.

12. Trachynotus goreensis Cuv. and Val.

The large pompano or " permit " of the Florida Keys and West
Indies has been identified by Goode and Bean, following Pr.
Giinther, with the African fish indicated as Trachynotus gorehisis^
by Cuvier and Valenciennes. Thei-e is, however, little reason for
thinking this identification correct. On the other hand the young
of the American " Permit " have been described by Professor
Gill under the names Trachynotus rhodopus and Trachynotus
nasutus. It should therefore stand as Trachynotus rhodopus,
as lately noted by Meek and Goss. Trachynotus carolinus of
Poey's memoirs is T. rhodopus. T. kennedyi Steindachner is a
different species.

102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

13. Coryphsena equisetis L.

All the dolphins thus far definitely known from our coast,
under whatever names described, belong to Goryphsena hippurus
L. The occurrence of C. equisetis is j'et to be proven, although
not improbable.

14. Epinephelus acutirostris (Cuv. and Val.).

It is probable that the specimen of this species, mentioned
by Cuvier and Valenciennes as having been sent to Paris from
Charleston by Holbrook, belongs to Epinephelus microlepis
(Goode and Bean). This species differs from E. acutirostris in
the much smaller scales, as well as in other respects. The speci-
mens in the National Museum called Trisotropis brunneiis Poey,
by Goode and Bean, and afterwards made the types of Trisotropis
stomias Goode and Bean, belong also to E. microlepis. The real
Trisotropis brunneus Poey abounds, however, about the Florida
reefs.

15. Sciaena stellifera (Bloch).

Scisena lanceolata (Holbrook), the species found on our Cai-olina
coast, is not identical with either the Sc. stellifera (or trispinosa)
of Gunther or of Steindachner. What species is the original of
Bloch is certainly doubtful, as at least nine species of this type
(" Stelliferus ") occur in the waters of Tropical America, and
Bloch's specimen was said to have come from Africa.

16. Holacanthus tricolor Bloch.

Inserted by Jordan and Gilbert (Synopsis, p. 941) as from the

Florida Keys, on the statement of a collector. The specimens in

question belong to Pomacanthus aureus.

»

17. Pomacanthus arcuatus L.

The specimen in the National Museum from Garden Key
Florida, referred to this species, belong to Pomacanthus aureus
(Bloch). The latter species is abundant about the Florida Keys,
but P. arcuatus is yet to be taken in our waters.

18. Acanthurus'phlebotomus Cuv. and Val.

This is another species sent from New York to Paris, by that
remarkable collector, Milbert. It is a West Indian species, not
yet known from our coasts, unless it be identical with A. chirur-
gus, which is probable. The original Chsetodon nigricans of
L. was based on an old world specimen, and neither this nor any
other American species should be called Acanthurus nigricans.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 108

The only species of Acanthu7'us yet definitely known from the
American coasts are A. chirurgus^ A. tractus and A. cceruleus.

19. Cottus bubalis L.

This species has been ascribed to the fauna of Greenland, but,
according to Liitken, it has not yet been found in that region.

20. Agonus cataphractus L.

Erroneously ascribed to Greenland,^, decagonus Bloch having
been mistaken for it.

21. Prionotus punctatus (Bloch).

A common West Indian species, appearing in nearly all of our
catalogues as a fish of our South Atlantic Coast. But I have
seen no specimens from any point north of Cuba. It is probable
that the very different species, Prionotus scitulus Jor. and Gilb.,
has been repeatedly recorded as P. punctatus.

22. Anoplarchus alectrolophus (Pallas).

Described from the Gulf of Penshin, and therefore not yet
definitely known from Alaska.

2.3. Blennius fucorum Cuv. and Val.

Specimens of a Blenny found in the fucus in the open sea, out-
side of NewYork harbor, were referred bj'^ De Kay to this species.
De Kay's description is taken from Cuvier and Valenciennes, and
no evidence of the correctness of this identification appears In
local lists, Isesthes punctatus Wood has appeared occasionally as
Blennius fucorum.

24. Hippocampus hippocampus L.

(H. Jieptagonus Raf . ; II. antiquorum Leach. )
A sea- horse from St. George's Bank has been identified with
this European species by Mr. Goode. His description does not
agree well with my European specimens, and I think that his fish
must belong either to H. hudsonius or to some species as yet
undescribed.

104 , PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

NOTES ON TERTIARY SHELLS.
BY OTTO MEYER.

In the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Phila.,
1879, pp. 217-225, A. Heilprin gave in an essay, well worthy of
perusal, a review of those species of the American Tertiary which
had been hitherto compared and identified with European ones,
and then identifies the following : ^ —

Cardita imbricata Lam, = Cardita rotunda Lea.

Gardita planicosta Lam. = Cardita planicosta Lam. (Conr.).

Gorbis lamellosa Lam. = Gorbis lirata Conr,

Trochita trochiformis Lam, = Trochita trochiformis Lea.

Gyprsea elegans Defr. = Gyprsedia fenestralis Conr.

Actseon simulatus Sow. = Tornatella bella Conr.

Niso terebellatus Lam. = Pasithea umbilicata Lea.

I have seen and examined man^^ American species in the
museums of New York and New Haven, but my observations are
chiefly derived from material of my own collection, consisting of
several hundred German Oligocene species in addition to numerous

^ Here are omitted all identifications, where Heilpriu has any doubt, or
which are not obtained by a direct comparison of specimens ; of such are
the following: —

Ostrea divaricata Lea, compared with Ostrea flabellula Lam.
Pecten JDeshayesi Lea,, " " Pecten opercularis Jjam.

Gar dium Nicolleti Conr., " *' Cardium semigranulatum Sow.

Corbula oniscus Conr., " " Corhula rugosa Lam.

Cylichna galba Conr., " " Bulla BroccM Bronn.

Tornatella pomilia Conv., " " Tornatella inflaia Feruss.

Pyrula penita Conr., " " Pyrula nexilis Lam.

Cancellaria tortipUca Conr., compared with Gancellaria evulsa Brand.
Sigaretus decUvus Conr., ) ( Sigaretus canaliculatus

Sigaretus bilix Conr., < i Sow

Solarium ornatum Lea, compared with Solarium canaliculatum Lara.
Pleurotoma nodo carinata Gabb, compared with Pleurotoma denticula

Bast.
Mesostoma rugosa Heilpr., compared with Mesostoma grata Desh.
Melania Claibornensis Heilpr., " " Melania mixta Desh.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 105

American ones. From these examinations I have been able to
identify the following additional species : — -

1. Cfirithium trilineatum Phil.
?1833. Cerithium turellum Grat.

Grateloup, Tabl. des Coq. foss. du bassiu de I'Ad. Act. Linn., v, 5.
p. 277.
1836. Cerithium trilineatum Phil.

R. A. Philippi, Enumeratio moUuscorum Sicilise, etc., vol. i, p. 195,
tab. 11, tig. IB.

1840. Cerithium tenbralia Ad.

C. B. Adams, Desci'. of thirteen new spec, of New England shells.
Boston Journ. Nat. Hist., vol. iii, p. 330, tab. 3, fig. 7.

1841. Terebra constricia H. C. Lea.

H. C. Lea, Descr. of some new spec, of foss. shells from the Eocene of
Claiborne, Ala.; Am. Journ. Sc a. Arts, vol. xi, p. 100, tab. 1, fig.
18, read Oct. 1840, publ. 1841.
1843. Cerithium trilineatum Phil.

Philippi, Beitr. z. Kenntu. d. Tertiaerverstein. d. nordwestl. Deutsch-
lands, p. 23, p. 56, p. 75.
1848 Cerithium trilineatum Phil.

Wood, Crag Mollusca, vol. i, p. 70, tab. 8, fig. 4 a.
1856. Cei'ithium trilineatum Phil.

Hcernes, fossil. Moll. d. Tertiaerbeck. v. Wien, vol. i, p. 413, tab. 43,
fig. 19.
1864. Cerithium trilineatum Phil.

Speyer, Tertiaerfaiina v. Soelilngen, Palceontographica, vol- ix, p. 33.

1866. Cerithium mundulum Desh.

Deshayes, Anim. s. verteb. du bassin de Paris, vol. iii, p. 233, tab. 79,
fig. 31, 33.

1867. Cerithium Sandbergeri (y Koenen non Desh. );

v. Koenen, Marine Mitteloligocsen v. Norddeutschland, Palseontogr.,
xvi, p. 104.
1883. Cerithium Sandbergeri (Meyer non Desh.).

O Meyer. Beitr. z. Kenntn. der Maerk. Rupelthons, Ber. d. Senckenb.
Naturforsch. Ges., Frankfurt a. M., 1883-1883, p. 261.
1883. Cerithium Meyeri (Boettg. ; [no description given].

Lepsius, Mainzer Becken, p. 50.
1883. Cerithiopsis Meyeri Boettg. ; n. »p,

Archiv des Vereins der Freunde der Naturgeschichte in Mecklenburg,
1883, p. 347.
Terebra trilirata Conrad. When and where ?

Having seen Cerithium trilineatum Phil, occurring in the
European and American older and newer Tertiar^y, as well as in
the Mediterranean, I sought for it among the recent shells of the
American Eastern coast, and have received, through the kindness

106 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

of Professor Yerrill, specimens of Cer. terebralis Ad., which
species was the looked-for identical one.

The description and figure of Terehra constyHcta H. C. Lea are
poor, but there is no doubt about this determination of my
specimens from . Claiborne, which are quite identical with the
German ones.

Among the synonyma, Ger.mundulum'DQ?,\\. is given, although
I have no specimens of this species ; but I cannot find any differ-
ence to distinguish it from the figure and description given by
Deshayes of Cer. trilineatum^ and, as such a competent observer
as Speyer has said the same, I do not think I have made a
mistake.

Cer. trilineatum, occui's in the American Miocene. I received
one specimen of it labeled : " Terehra trilirata Conr.," but I
could not find this name in any of Conrad's papers. Professor
Heilprin writes to me : "Possibly it is one of the numerous forms
that Conrad named without description."

If Cer. trilineatum Phil, should be identical with Cer. turellum
Grat., of which I have no specimens, the latter name would have
the priority.

Cer. trilineatum Phil, is generally distributed in the older and
later Tertiary and also at the present time on both sides of the
Atlantic.

2. Pleurotoma denticala Bast.

1835. Basterot, Descr. Geol. du bassin tert. sud-ouest de la France, p. 63,

tab. 3, fig. 12.
1833. Pleurotoma Bmimonti Lea.

I. Lea, Contrib. to Geology, p. 134, tab. 4, fig. 127.
1844. Pleurotoma denticula Bast.

Nyst. Descr. des. Coq. foss. de la Be1g., p. 526, tab. 44, fig. 3.

1860. Turris nodo-carinata Gabb, fide Heilpr.

Gabb, Descr. of new spec, of Am. Tert. a. Cret. foss. ; Journ. Ac. Nat.
Sc. Philad., vol. iv, 2d series, p. 379, tab. 67, fig. 13.

1861. Pleurotoma denticula Bast.

Edwards, Monogr. of Brit. Eocene, p. 286, tab. 30, fig. 7 a-h,
1867. Pleurotoma denticula Bast.

V. Koeuen, Mar. Mitteloligocsen, p. 89.
1879. Pleurotoma denticula Bast.

•Heilprin, Proc. Ac. INat. Sc. Philad., p. 214, tab. 13, fig. 10.

The last named author writes that he found Pleur. denticula Bast,
in Claiborne sand. He figures a specimen without the upper part

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 10 Y

of the spire and determined this species from descriptions and
figures of European specimens. It is here only necessary to say
that I concur in Heilprin's determination after liaving compared
perfect shells from Claiborne with perfect German ones (Stern-
berger Oligocene). In my opinion a direct comparison of specimens
is conditio sine qua non in the identification of species from both
sides of the Atlantic.

The Claiborne specimens are apparently Pleur. Baumonti Lea,
but the name of Basterot has the priority.

Pleur. denticula Bast., which occurs also in Italy, seems to be
widely spread in the Tertiary.

3. Pleurotoma Volgeri Phil.

? 1804. Pleurotoma terebralis Lamarck.

Deshayes, Coq. foss. 1824-37, vol. 11, p. 455, tab. 62, flg. 14-16.

1846. Pleurotoma Volgeri Phil.

Phillppi,Verzeich. d. In d. Geg. v. Magdeburg aufgef. Tertlaerverstein.,
Palseontographica, 1, Aug. 1846, p. 69, tab. 10 a, fig. 2.

1847. Pleurotoma cristata Conr.

Com-ad, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sc. Phllad., ill, p. 284 (no figure).

1848. Pleurotoma cristata Cdnr.

Conrad, Journ. Ac. Nat. Sc. Phllad., 1, 2d series, p. 115, tab. 11,
fig. 20.
1860. Turris cristata Conr.

Gabb, Journ. Ac. Nat. Sc. Phllad., vol. Ix, 2d series, p. 378, tab. 67,
fig. 12, non fig. 8.
? 1861. Pleurotoma Volgeri Phil.

Edwards, Monogr. of the Eocene Moll, of England, p. 275, tab. 30,
fig. 15 a, b, non fig. 13. (Publ. Paleontogr. Soc. London, issued as
volume for 1858, publ. 1861.)
? 1861. Pleurotoma terebralis Lam.

Edwards, ibid., p. 233, tab. 27, fig. 10 a-k.
1865. Cochlespira engonata Conr.

Conrad, Am. Journ. of Couchology, 1, p. 142, figm-e in the same volume,
tab. 21, fig. 12.
1865. Cochlespira bella Conr.

Conrad, ibid., p. 210, tab. 21, fig. 6.
1867. Pleurotom,a. Volgeri Phil.

V. Koenen, Mar. Mlttelollgocsen, Palaentogr., xvl, p. 92.
1867. Pleurotoma Volgeri Phil.

Speyer, Conch yl. d. Casseler Tertlaers, Palseontogr., xvl, p. 193, tab.
19, fig. 12 a, b.
1872. Pleurotoma terebralis Lam.

Koch und Wiechmann, Die Molluskenfauna des Sternberger Gesteins
in Mecklenburg, p. 66.

108 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

With the German specimens of the Maerkische Rupelthon and
the Sternberger Oligocene, two specimens from Ashley, S. C,
one from the upper strata of Claiborne (which are apparently
Oligocene), and one specimen of typical Pleurot. cristata Conr.
from Vicksbnrg were compared. The latter was obtained for
comparison through the kindness of Professor Heilprin of Phila-
delphia.

Both German and American forms vary in slenderness ; Coch-
lespira engonata Conr. is apparently one of the shorter speci-
mens. In the Ameiican forms the number and sculpture of the
revolving lines seem to be generally more developed, but these
vary too. Conrad says : " Cochlesp. bella differs from G. cristata
in having fewer and coarser lines and a more prominent carina."

What Edwards figures as Pleur. Volgeri Phil, looks quite
different. Much more like seems to be his PL terehralis Lam.,
of which he describes six varieties. The opinions of the German
authors as to the identity of P. Volgeri Phila. and P. terehralis
Lam. are varying. I am greatly inclined toward uniting them,
but for want of sufficient material prefer withholding a positive
opinion on this point.

4. Saxicava arctica L.

1766. Mya arctica L.

Linn., Syst. Nat. ed. 13, p. 1113.
1836. Saxicava arctica L.

Philippi, Enum. Mollusc. Sicil., etc., i, p. 20j tab. 3, fig. 3.
1838. Saxicava biUneata Conr.

Conrad, Medial Tertiary or Miocene fossils of the U. Si, p. 18, tab. 10,
flg. 4.
1844. Saxicava arctica L,

Nyst., Coq. foss. Belg., p/ 95, tab. 3, fig. 15 a-c.

1846. Saxicava arctica L.

Loven, Ind. moll. Scand., p. 40.

1848. Saxicava arctica L.

S. V. Wood, Crag. Moll., ii, p. 287, tab, 29, fig. 4 a, b.
1856. Saxicava arctica L.

Hoernes, Wiener Becken, p. 24, tab. 3, fig. 1, 3, 4.
? 1860. Saxicava Jeurensis Desh.

Deshayes, Anim. s. verteb., i, p. 170, tab. 10, fig. 18, 19, 20.
1863. Saxicava bicristata Sandb.

Sandberger, Concbyl. d. Mainzer Beckens, p. 277, tab. 21, fig. 6.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 109

1864. Saxicava bicrisfata Sandb.

Speyer, Tertiaerfauiia v. Soellingen, Palaeontogr., ix, p. 48.

1867. Saxicava arctica L.

Weinkauff, Conch yl. d. Mifctelmeeres, i, p. 20.,

1868. Saxicava arctica L.

V. Koenen, Marin. Mitteloligocaen, 2d part, Palseontogr., xvi, p. 266.

Two specimens of Saxicava hilineata Conr. from the American
Miocene prove to be the same variety as S. hicristata Sandb.

Wood has alread}- said in 1848 (Crag. Moll. p. 288) : ^^ Saxicava
bilineata Conr. is probably another variety of this species "
(S. arctica).

I cannot see in tlie fignre of S. Jeurensis Desh. any difference
from our species. Y. Koenen seems to be of the same opinion.

Saxicava arctica L. seems to be generally distributed in the
older and later Tertiary and in the present time on both sides of
tlie Atlantic.

New species were found bj^ me in Claiborne snnd, belonging to
the American Museum of Natural History in New York, and
which had been examined several times before. Afterwards I re-
ceived sand from Claiborne myself and found most of these species
again, as well as others that are new. Onlj- the three following
species, however, are published here, chiefl}^ because the state of
the literature on North American Tertiary invertebrates makes
it almost impossible to determine with certainty new species and
to find and to describe the differences from similar forms, already
named.*

* In White's Bibliography there are given nearly seventy papers of the
main author of this literature, T, A. Conrad, containing notes on American
Tertiary niollusks ; and even this list is not complete. Conrad's description
and figures are mostly poor or very poor. He published a great many
fossils without figures, many without localities, and not a few without
giving even the formation ; I have also found one without a name (Proc.
Ac. Phil., 1862, p. 288). In his two check lists of the older Tertiary
(1865 and 1866) he ignores the species of H. C. Lea, and does not
give an account even of all his own. Having a tendency to describe a
variety as a new species and a species as a new genus, he found, of course,
that not only the Miocene species are all diftercnt from the Eocene ones,
but that even the groups of tl^c Am. Eocene "hold few, if any, species in
common."

110

PROCEEKISQS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

PTEROPODA.

Tibiella Marshi (nov. gen. et nov. spec.)*

Shell thin, tubular. The closed end little convex. The lower
part, about one third of the whole length, of
a circular section, then by tapering a little
forming a kind of a neck, above which the
shell is of a rounded trigonal section. Aper-
ture dilated.
Length, 3^ mm.

Locality. — Eocene sand from Claiborne,
Ala.

Remarks. — If the figured specimen is adult,
in the young ones the apex ma}^ be perhaps
acute and afterwards partitioned off, as in the genus Tripter-a
Quo}^ et Gaimard ( Guviera Rang).

This genus is allied to Tibiella, and the latter is perhaps a sub-
genus of the former.

Pteropoda are described from the Miocene and Oligocene, but
as far as I am acquainted with the litei'ature this is the first
Pteropod from the Eocene.

OPISTHOBRANCHIAT^.

Balla biumlilicata (nov. sp.).

Shell small, moderately thick, oval, the upper end obliquely
truncated and umbilicated, the lower end somewhat tapering.
Last whorl most prominent at about one-
third of the whole length. Outer lip? Inner
lip below with a large trigonal thin callus,
which covers a minute umbilicus. Surface
with revolving lines, disappearing at both
ends and generally' most distant from each
other at about the middle of the shell. A
strong magnifying glass shows that these
lines are furrows, looking like pearl-ribbons,
which structure causes the surface to look
at some places as if it were minutely longitudinally costated.
Length, 2i mm.

* Genus name from the resemblance to the tibia of mammals. This
species is dedicated to Professor Marsh, who enabled me to work by sup-
plying me from his library with a large part of the necessary literature,
which I could uot get elsewhere.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Ill

Locality. — Eocene sand from Claiborne, Ala.

Remarks. — One specimen, the outer lip of which is not quite
perfect.

An allied form seems to be Bulla Horyii Gabb, of Fort Tejon,
Cal. (Gabb, Paleontology of California, vol. i, 1864, p. 143 [non
p. 140], tab. 29, fig. 235), but this species is larger, thin, has no
callus and seems to differ besides in form and sculpture. Gabb
says : " Surface marked by numerous, very fine, impressed re-
volving lines."

Very similar is Bulla omdata Lam. (Deshayes, Coq. foss. des
env. de Paris, vol. ii, p. 39, tab. 5, fig. 13, 14, 15), but without
callus.

Bulla siibspissa Conr. (Proe. Ac. Philad., vol. iii, 1846, p. 20,
tab. 1, fig. 29) from the Miocene of Calvert CliflTs, Md., seems to
be of smootli surface; at least Conrad does not say anything
about sculpture.

I cannot give the differences from Bulla petrosa Conr. {Am.
Journ. Sc. a. Arts, vol. ii, 2d series, 1846, p. 399), as Conrad's full
.description of this shell is the following : —

" Bulla jyetrosa.—^Oyal, destitute of striae ?, summit oblique."

GASTEROPODA.

Cadalus depressue (nov. sp.).

Smooth, shining, gently curved, inflation not very prominent.
Section everywhere an oval, one side of
which is a little flatter than the otlier.
Both ends oblique.

Length, 7 mm.

Locality. — Eocene sand from Claiborne,
Ala. ■ I I O

Remarks. — The aperture of the figured
specimen is not pei'fect, but I know that
it is of the form indicated in the figure,
from other specimens. I have seen alto-
gether about a dozen specimens, and all
are everywhere of the same oval section.

There are to be compared three North
American species of Cadulus : —

1. Gadus pusillus Gabb, of the Tejon group, Martinez, Cal.
[Cretaceous or Tertiary ?] (Gabb, Paleont. of Cal., vol. i, 1864,
p. 139, tab. 21, fig. 99). Gabb says : " section circular."

112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

2. Dentalium thallus Conr., of the Miocene of the Southern States
(Journ. Ac. Nat. Sc. Philarl., vol. vii, 1st series, 1834, p. 142). The
specimens of this species in my possession have a circular section,
except at the aperture, where they are oval. It is the opinion of
ProfessorVerrill and of myself, that Cadulus Pandionis Verrill and
Smith (A. E. Verrill, Catal. of Mar. Moll., Transact. Connect. Ac,
vol. V, part. 2, 1882, p. 558, tab. 58, fig. 30 a) of the western part
of the Atlantic is identical with this Cadulus thallus Conr.,
• although the latter form has the aperture generallj'^ a little more
oval. If Jeffreys is right (J. G. Jeffreys, " On the Moll, of the
Lightning and Porcupine expedition," part v) in uniting Cadulus
Pandionis Verrill and Smith, with Cadulus Olivi Scacchi from
the Pliocene of Sicily, it would result that both late Tertiarj"-
species are also identical, and this would be one more instance
of a Tertiary species occurring on both sides of the Atlantic.

3.' Ditrupa suhcoarcuata Gabb, Eocene of Texas (Journ. Ac.
Nat. Sc. Philad., vol. ix, 2d series, 1860, p. 386, tab. 6T, fig. 47).
The description of Gabb is the following : " Arcuate, widened in
advance of tlie middle; aperture contracted, circular; surface
polished." As Gabb does not say anything about an oval section,
but on the contrary writes "aperture circular," it is apparently a
different species.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 113

April 1.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Thirty-one persons present.

A paper entitled " A Review of the American species of the
Genus Trachynotus," by Seth E. Meek and David K. Goss, was
presented for publication.

April 8.

Rev. IIenry C. McCook, D. D., Yice-President, in the chair.

Seventy -three persons present.

A pn]Hr entitled " Descriptions of new species of Terrestrial
Mollusca of Cuba," by Rafael Arango, was presented for publica-
tion.

Dr. Daniel G. Brinton wns inaugurated as Professor of Eth-
nology and Archeology, and delivered a lecture on " Prehistoric
Man in America."

April 15.

Mr. Chas. p. Perot in the chair.

Twenty-four persons present.

A paper entitled "A Review of the American species of the
Genus Synodus," by Seth E. Meek, was presented for publication.

On the Process of Digestion in Salpa. — Dr. Ch. S. Dolley
remarked that preliminary to giving the full results of a some-
what extended study of the histology of Salpa, he desired to make
a few remarks in reference to certain statements recentl}'^ made
by Dr. A. Korotneff of Moscow,^ which he considered erroneous
in so far as they indicate the presence of a huge amoeboid cell or
Plasmodium, in the oesophagus and stomach of Salpa, functioning
as a digestive organ. Dr. KorotneflF describes this cell as arising
from the repeated division of a single cell which earl}' in the life-
history of the animal is separated from the intestinal wall. This
giant-cell or plasmodium, acting like a huge rhizopod, carries on

^ Ueber die Knospung der Anchinia in Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zoologie. Bd. 40,
Hft. i, 1884.

114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884-.

a form of parencli3^matous digestion of the food taken by the
animal, passing the resulting chyle into the walls of the intestine
by means of its pseudopodia. Now by reference to an article by
MetschnikofT " On Intracellular Digestion in Invertebrates " (in
tlie Quarterl3^ Journal of Microscopical Science for Januar}^, 1884),
it will be seen that such a form as Korotneff describes has never
been met with, and his description stands alone and anomalous,
both as regards the situation and size of the digestive plasmodium,
and as to the method of its formation, for in all cases in which
such structures have been found in invertebrates, they have
always arisen by the fusion of separate cells, not from the
repeated division of one cell. In a large number of series
of sections made by the new " ribbon " method, the speaker was
not only unable to find " the lumen obliterated " by the peculiar
structure of the wall of the intestine described by Korotneff, but
in a model of the visceral nucleus made after Born's " platten-
modillir method" the lumen of the entire intestinal canal is shown
to be completely tree throughout. He did, however, get sections
which gave pictures almost identical with those portrayed by
Korotneff, i. e. the lumen filled with what he describes as a large
nucleated granular cell, containing various food particles, and he
could trace this so-called " cell," not only back into " the portion
of the intestine lying next to the stomach," but through the
rectum into the cloacal chamber, and through the oesophagus
into the branchial sac. He accounts for it as follows : The endo-
style of Salpa has been very carefully studied by Hermann Fol,
wiio demonstrated, by means of carmine suspended in water, that
it threw out a constant stream of mucus when excited by the
presence of nutritive material in the same water, with a reflex
action like a salivary gland. The mucus is, by an arrangement
of cilia, spread out like a curtain over the inner surface of the
branchial sac, when it acts as a means for catching the food
particles from the ingurgitated water. B3' the action of ciliary
bands bordering the groove of the endostyle, the mucus is swept
towards the oesophagus, and as it approaches this, it is, by means
of the stiff cilia on the sides of the gill, twisted into a thread, and
carried by a continuation of the aforesaid bordering bands,
through the oesophagus, into the stomach. Now in studying a
series of sections of a Salpa which had had abundant food, we
find as we approach the oesophagus a mass of material answering
to the description of Korotneff's " rhizopod." It takes staining
readily and may be traced backward into and through the oesoph-
agus, stomach and intestine. As the sections approach the
rectum, however, the mass graduall}^ ceases to take staining, and
is much more distinctly marked out from the intestinal wall,
having had all the organic matter digested out, and consisting
only of the inorganic remains, which do not stain. The alimen-
tary matter of Salpai is composed of animal and vegetal elements
in nearly equal proportions, and the microscope reveals the cal-

1884.] NATUEAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 115

careous shells of Foraminifera, the beautifully sculptured frustules
of Diatomacese,keen siliceous needles, and the sharp armatures of
minute Crustacea.

In the fore-part of the intestinal canal, the food mass, staining
almost as readily as the wall of the gut itself, seems to merge into
the ill-defined epithelium of the latter, and it is scarcel}'^ possible
to say where the food-bearing mucous thread ceases and the
intestinal epithelium begins, especially as this latter has a rugous
arrangement. That we have here to do with a form of digestion
entirel}^ anomalous and unprecedented, he could not believe, and
must beg leave to differ from Dr. Korotneff on this point. Foland
others have recognized the endostyle as a sort of salivary gland,
and have traced its food-laden mucous thread into the stomach of
the living animal, while the speaker had been able to trace the
same thing in well-preserved specimens. He had also several
series of sections from animals which must have been without
food for some time previous to death, in which the lumen of tlie
intestine is not only free of food, but of any obliterating mass of
cells, or Plasmodium. The only protoplasmic bodies not food,
are certain Gregarina-like organisms adhering to the walls of
various parts of the intestine, and which he took to be parasites.
These give on section the appearance of the large "scattered cells,
entirely free from their surroundings " which Korotneff figures
and regards as " analogous to the great stomach-cell of Anchinia.''^
The first opportunity would be taken to examine these structures
in living Salpse, but he was now forced to conclude that Dr.
Korotneff has endowed the food-bearing mucous thread with a
power it does not possess, that Salpa does not exhibit any
unusual form of intracellular digestion, and that there is no im-
mediate cause on its account for questioning the high genetic
place occupied by the Tunicates.

A Preliminary Note on a Reaction common to Peptone and Bile-
salts. — Dr. N. A. Randolph stated that if the acid nitrate of
mercury (Millon's reagent) be added to a cold aqueous solution
of potassium iodide, a red precipitate of mercuric iodide always
appeal's. When, however, either peptones or the biliary salts are
present in noteworthy amount, the precipitate of nascent mercuric
iodide assumes the yellow phase. As practicallj^ applied, the
red may vary from salmon to scarlet, the yellow from pale
lemon to orange.

In order to render the test sensitive to the presence of minute
quantities of the substances in question, he had found it necessary
to limit the amount of potassium iodide employed. Thus to each
five cubic centimetres of the suspected fluid — which must be cold
and either neutral or faintly acid — are added two drops of a
saturated solution of potassium iodide, the two liquids being well
mixed. Four ox fiv« drops of Millon's reagent are now added, the
contents of the vessel thoroughly stirred or shaken. Under these

116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

circumstances the presence of peptone in amounts of less than
one part in five thousand is readily shown. By the exercise of
great care in the performance of this test he had been enabled to
demonstrate the ])resi-nce of peptone in a solution containing
but one part of that body in seventeen thousand parts of water.

The condititjus interfering with this reaction are : alkalinity of
the fluid examined (readily overcome. by neutralization); heat,
"which has the same influence upon the nascent mercuric iodide as
have peptone and the bile-salts ; and the presence of certain com-
pounds, as potassium ferrocj'anide, which chemically prevent the
production of the mercuric iodide.

The reaction just described presents certain advantage from the
fact that it is uninfluenced by the bodies usuall}^ found in the
various organic fluids. It is efficient in the presence of a twenty
percent, solution of serum ; the presence of considerable amounts
of coagulated albumen and of acid-albumen does not interfere with
the test. The following bodies in moderate amount do not affect
the reaction : Saliva, S^'utonin, Am3^gdalin, Para-Albumen, Dias-
tase, Kreatin, Leucin, Pyrosin, Mucic Acid, Glucose, Urea, Uric
Acid, Nitric, Hydrochloric, Sulphuric and Picric Acids, Gl3'c-
erine, Alcohol, Atropia Sulphate, Pilocarpin Nitrate, Caff'eine,
Sodium Carbonate, Ammonium Oxalate, Sodium Phosphate, and
Manganese Chloride and Ferric Chloride.

It is obvious that this reaction is useless to the student as an
isolated test, inasmuch as it responds to two entirely distinct
compounds, but its simplicity and striking colorations give it
very considerable value when employed in cori'oboration of other
tests.

Botanical Notes. — At the meeting of the Botanical Section on
April 14, Mr. Thomas Meehan made some observations on the
following topics : —

Evolution of Heat in Plants. — Referring to some observations
of Kerner respecting the thawing out of chambers in ice by living
plants in the Alps of Europe, he confirmed them by observations
on Erartthis hyemalis made during the past, winter. At the end
of January the plant was in flower after a few warm days, when a
driving snow-storm prostrated the little stems, and covered them
nearly a foot deep, in which condition they remained till earl}' in
March. After they had been three weeks in this condition, the
snow was carefully removed, when it was found that the stems
had become perfectly erect, and a little chamber in the snow had
been thawed out about each flower-stem. There was, however, no
other evidence of growth. The few buds which were unopened
when the snow came, were still unopened when the snow thawed
away, after five weeks' imprisonment; and the idea conveyed was
that plants would retain life, without growth, for an indefinite time,
when under a low temperature, such as a covering of ice or snow
afforded.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 117

Relation of Heat to the Sexes of Flowers. — He referred to his
former communications to the Academy regarding his discovery
that the male flowers or male organs of flowers entered on active
growth at a much lower temperature than excited tlie female, and
exhibited catkins and female flowers of the European hazel-nut,
Gorylus Avellana,}ViSt matured April 15, and which, for the first
time in several years past, had perfected themselves coterapora-
neously. This was the first winter for some time that there had
been a uniform low temperature the whole season. In other years
a few warm da3's in winter would advance the male flowers so that
they would mature weeks before the female flowers opened, hence
the females were generally unfertilized, and there were few or no
nuts. Under this law it was evident amentaceous plants could
not abound to any great extent in countries or in localities favor-
able to bringing forward the male flowers before there was steady
warmth enough to advance the female. He thought this was
likely to be the reason whj^ so many coniferous trees under culture
in the vicinity of Philadelphia bore scarcely any fertile seed in
their cones — a fact which had often been remarked in connection
especially with the Norway spruce. The male flowers would
mature before the female had advanced far enough to be receptive
of the pollen.

Specif c Differences in Picea nigra — It was regarded as some-
what diflftcult to distinguish between the red and black spruces,
Mr. Meehan exhibited authentic specimens of these and the white
spruce, and pointed out the persistent character of the cones in
Picea nigra, to which his attention had been called b}^ Mr. Robt.
Douglas, of Waukegan, Illinois. They were still attached to the
branches exhibited.

The Flowers of Platanus. — Having an opportunit}^ to examine
a large tree of Platanus occidentalism no exception could be found
to the rule that the pedicel proceeded from the third node in the
season's growth. It appeared also that in the formation of the
pedicel, the growth of the branch was always almost arrested —
but not sufflcientl3^ so but that it seemed to recover and make a
second growth. In many cases the annual growth was completely
suppressed, and only a terminal bud was formed just above the
axis of the pedicel ; but in most cases, another or secondary
growth followed the first temporary check and a shoot of several
nodes would be formed bej^ond the point of departure of the
pedicel. The same rule prevailed in Platanus orientalis.

Variation in Symjolocos foetidus. — Mr. Meehan had made it a
point for some years to take, as opportunit}' ottered, some genus
of only a single species within a large range of territory, and note
the variation therein. In this wa}' we could often see a vast
amount of variation, which could not be started by an}^ hybridi-
zation with other forms, but which must have been produced by
some law of evolution within itself. p]ven though one might
believe himself to be quite familiar with the skunk cabbage,

118 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Symplocos fcetidus, he would be surprised at the great amount
of variation it presented, even in a small area, when the variations
were looked for by comparison. He had himself seen a plant
bearing spathes four inches long, with its next neighbor having
one a little over an inch — no larger than a walnut. Some would
be globular, some ovate, some linear, some terminating in an
abrupt point, others lengthened into a long straight or curved
beak. The variations in color were too well known to need more
than this bare reference. It was not uncommon to hear variation
attributed to environment, by which we are to understand external,
and in a measure accidental circumstances. Environment might
be led to include some external influence operating on the primary
cell, giving birth to the subsequent individual exemplifying the
variation.

But in this sense, change by environment would be the
merest guess, as no evidence had been offered in support of any
special influence then not exerted. At other times no great varia-
tion followed, and possibly no one would want to embrace this
point in a definition of environment.

Sugar in Cladastris tincio->ia. — In Mr. Meehan's garden at
Germantown, there were few ti-ees but which exuded sap from
wounds made in winter or earlj^ spring, but among them all, few
bled, as it was termed by horticulturists, more profusely than
Cladastris tincloria ( Virgilia lutea Mx.). The icicles formed from
this exuding sap afforded a good opportunity to test the saccha-
rine character of the liquid. During congelation by frost all
foreign substances are rejected, and in the formation of the
icicle the sugar is pushecl forward to the extreme point. The
end of an icicle of a sugar maple is its only sweet part, and this
was very sweet from the accumulation of the saccharine matter.
The end of the icicle from the Cladastris was also sweet, though
less so than in any other sugar-bearing trees he had observed.

April 22.
The President, Dr. Jos. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.

Vertebrate Fossils from Florida. — Prof. Leidy directed atten-
tion to some fossils, part of a. collection recently referred to him
for examination by the Smithsonian Institution. They consist
of remains mostly of large terrestrial mammals, especially related
with forms which now live in the intertropical portions of the
old world. Obtained in Florida, they are of additional interest
as evidences of the existence in this region of a formation of
tertiary age not previously known. An accompanying letter from
Dr. J. C. Neal, of Archer, Florida, informs. us that the fossils.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 119

were discovered in a bed of clay, occupying a ridge in the pine
forest. They occurred over an irregular area of one hundred feet
long by thirty feet wide, and were dug from variable depths
of seven feet to the bed-rock, the character of which is not
stated. The fossils, consisting of bones and a few teeth, are
mostly in fragments, but exhibit no appearance of being water-
worn, or abraded by friction among gravel. In the collection,
for the present hastily examined, there may be observed the fol-
lowing more conspicuous remains : —

1. Those of a young mastodon, consisting of bone fragments
and detached epiphyses. The epiphysial head of a femur meas-
ures 6^ inches in diameter. In the clay adherent to the rough
under surface, the vertebra of a teleost fish is imbedded. An
astragalus measures i^ inches fore and aft, and 5i inches trans-
versely.

2. Remains, apparently of several individuals of a rhinoceros,
rather smaller than the Indian rhinoceros. Among them are
small fragments of a mandible, and portions of lower molar teeth.
The nearly complete crown of one of the latter measures 2^
inches fore and aft, with 1| inches width in front. The limb
bones indicate an animal of shorter stature, but equallj^ robust
proportions to those of the Indian rhinoceros. There are two
nearly entire radii, 9 inches long, by 3^ inches width at the prox-
imal, and 3| inches width at the distal end. The distal exti'emity
of a femur measures (i inches at the epicondyles. The head of a
tibia is 5^ inches wide and 3j inches fore and aft. A calcaneum
is 5 inches long. Three middle metacarpels exhibit the following
measurements : —

Length, ... 4^ inches, 4 inches, 3| inches.
Width, proximal end, 2| " 2^ " 2| "
Width, distal end, . 2^ " 2i " 2| "

3. Small fragments of the maxillae of a tapir; one with an
entire molar tooth, which differs neither in form nor size from the
corresponding tooth of the living Tapirus aviericanus. The
tooth measures 11 lines fore and aft by 13 lines transversely.

4. Remains, apparently of a llama, as large as the camel.
The distal end of a metacarpel is about 4 inches in breadth. A
first phalanx is 4^ inches long by 2^ inches wide at the proximal
end and 1| inches at the distal end.

5. A calcaneum of a ruminant, not quite so long as that of the
Irish elk, but of more robust proportions. Its reference is un-
certain, and it is doubtful whether it pertains to the extinct
Cervus americanus.

6. The vertebral centrum of a small crocodile.

T. Remains of several other animals undetermined.

120 proceedings op the academy op [1884.

April 29.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twent^-^-seven persons present.

A paper entitled " New Fossils from ihe four groups of the
Niagara Period of Western New York," by Eugene N. S. Ringue-
berg, was presented for publication.

On the Digestion of Raw and of Boiled 3Iilk. — Dr. N. A. Ran-
dolph referred to certain profound changes produced in milk by
boiling. In this opei-ation the casein is not coagulated, but there
is an evolution of sulphuretted h^^drogen (Schreiner), a diminu-
tion in the gaseous constituents of the fluid and a change in the
amount of ozone present.

The most striking difference between raw and boiled milk lay
in their respective responses to rennet, acids and alkalies.

At the body-temperature the Arm coagulation of raw milk
occurred almost immediately upon the addition of a neutral
rennet solution, whereas boiled milk, under the same conditions,
did not clot for a far longer period, and the coagula were not
firm. On the other hand, dilute or strong acids were tenfold as
active upon boiled as upon raw milk. Some time after making
these experiments Dr. Randolph found that so far as acids and
rennet were concerned, similar results had been obtained by
Sohreiner (Chem. Centralbl., III. Folge, IX. Jahrg.), and lie
desired to present his observations in these particulars simply- as
confirmatory of those of that observer.

Upon the addition of dilute alkalies to boiled milk, the rise
of cream was much more rapid and complete than in raw milk
under the same conditions.

Artificial digestions showed that milk was more readily digested
when raw than when boiled. This was further coufirmetl by a
comparative examination and weighing (in over fifty cases, and
in which he was aided by Dr. Roussel) of the contents of the
stomach after rawand boiled milk had been, in different individuals,
undergoing actual gastric digestion. In these cases the residue
found in the stomachs of those persons receiving boiled milk
was greater than the similar residue found in the stomachs where
raw milk had been undergoing digestion for the same length of
time.

The following were elected members : Messrs. J. L. Forwood,
L. Woolman, John Eyerman, Edw. Jackson, E. J. Wheelock and
Miss S. D. Atkinson,

Ernest Andre, of Gra}^, Haute Saone, France, was elected a
correspondent.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 121

A EEVIEW OF THE AMERICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS TRACHYNOTUS.
BY SETH E. MEEK AND DAVID K. GOSS.

In the present paper we give the synonymy of the species
of Trachynotus found in American waters, with brief de-
scriptions of those known to us found on the Atlantic Coast.
The latter are here all described from specimens obtained by
Professor Jordan at Havana and Key West. We are very much
indebted to Professor Jordan for use of his library and for
valuable aid.

In the following analysis of species, Trachynotus marginatus is
omitted, the original description being too insufficient for com-
parison. Of the remaining seven species, two (rhomboides,
glaucus) appear to be confined to the Atlantic ; two others {ken-
nedyi, fasciatus) represent those on the Pacific Coast, while the
others (rhodopus, carolinus, cayennensis) appear to be found on
both sides, although in the case of rhodopus and carolinus being
far more abundant in the Atlantic.

Analysis of Species of Trachynotus.
a. Dorsal with 19 to 20 soft rays ; anal with It to 19 soft rays.
b. Body very much compressed ; sides with narrow black cross-
bars ; lobes of vertical fins elongate, reaching past middle
of caudal fin in adult.
c. Snout subtruncate or nearly vertical ; profile from supra-
orbital to front of dorsal fin convex. glaucus. 1.
cc. Snout low, very oblique ; profile from supraorbital region
to the dorsal scarcely convex. fasciatus. 2.
bb. Body moderately compressed ; sides without narrow black
cross-bars ; lobes of vertical fins shorter, rarely reaching
base of caudal ; lobes of dorsal and anal usually
blackish.
d. Body broad, ovate ; the greatest depth at all ages more
than half length of bod}^ ; lobes of the vertical fins
reaching in the adult beyond the middle of their
fins.
e. Axil with a large black spot (in the adult) ; profile
strongl}' convex anteriorly. kennedyi. 3,
ee. Axil without dark spot ; profile from nostril to dorsal
everywhierp about equally convex.
9 rhomboides. 4.

122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

dd. Body oblong ; the dej)th in young and old about |
length of body. rhodopus. 5.

aa. Dorsal with 25 to 21 soft ra3'S ; anal with 22 to 26 soft rays ;
body oblong, rather robust ; greatest thickness 3 in greatest
depth of body ; depth less than half length ; lobes of
vertical fins short, not black ; sides without dark cross-
bars.

/. Dorsal with 25 soft rays ; anal with 22 soft rays ;
profile from snout to procumbent spine evenly
convex. carolinus. 6.

^. Dorsal with 21 ; anal with 26 soft rays,

cayennensis. *l.

Trachynotus glaucus. Gaff-top-nail Pompano. Old loife.

ChoBtodon glaucus Bloch, Ichthyologia, PI. ccx, about 1783 (oij a figure
by Plumier).

AcantMnion glaucus Lacdpede, iv, 1803, 500 (copied).

Trachinotus glaucus Cuvier & Yalencieuues, Hist. Nat. Poiss., viii, 1831,
400 (Brazil, Havana, Mexico, San Domingo, Martinique and Gua-
deloupe) ; Guichenot, "Poiss. Ramon de la Sagra, Hist, Cuba, 107,
1845" (Cuba).

Trachynotus glaucus Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mns., ii, 1860, 483
(Antilles, Jamaica and Rio Janeiro) ; Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., 1862, 438 (Charleston, S. C.) ; Gill, Rep. U. S. Fish Com.,
1871-2, 803 (name only) ; Goode, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,' 1879, 112
(name only) ; Goode, Bull. U. S. Fish Com.. 1881, 37, 40 (Ber-
mudas) ; Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 237 (name
only) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S Nat. Mus., 1882, 270 (Pensa-
cola) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 443 ; Jordan &
Gilbert, op. cit, 912.

Habitat. — Atlantic Coasts of America : Charleston, Pensaeola,
Key West, Bermudas, Jamaica, Antilles, Guadaloupe, Martinique
and Rio Janeiro. Also erroneously ascribed (by confusion with
Trachynotus fasciatua) to Lower California and Panama.

Head 4 in length of body ; depth 2 ; D. VI-I, 19 ; A. II-I, 18 ;
length (No. 440, I. U. Key West) 13 inches.

Body elliptical, much compressed ; snout blunt, subtruncate,
vertical from mouth to horizontal from upper edge of eye ; the
profile from supraorbital to front of dorsal fin convex ; eye Z% in
head ; mouth nearly horizontal ; maxillary nearly reaches ver-
tical from middle of ej'e, its length 3 in head ; jaws without
teeth in the adult ; dorsal spines separate, in the adult ; dorsal
and anal fins falcate, the anterior soft rays reaching middle of

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PUILADELPHIA. 123

caudal fin; dorsal lobe U, anal If in length of body; ventrals
reaching | distance to vent, their length 2f in head ; caudal
very deeply forked, their lobes nearly half length of body.
Color bluish above, golden below ; lobes of dorsal and anal
very dark, rest of the fins pale, with bluish edges ; caudal bluish;
Pectorals golden and bluish ; ventrals whitish. Body crossed
by four black vertical bands ; the first is under the procumbent
spine, the second under the third dorsal spine, the third and
fourth under the soft dorsal. A black spot, representing a fifth
band, on latter line between the last rays of dorsal anal; this is
sometimes obsolete ; the position of these bands appears to be
subject to slight variation. The young of this species has not yet
been described.

Trachynotus fasciatus.

Trachynotus fasciatus Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1863, 86 (Cape
San Lucas) ; Giinther, Fishes Cent. America, 1869, 434 (Panama,
San Jose and Nicaragua) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1881, 232 (Porto Escondido, Mexico) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S.
Fish Com., 1882, 106 (Mazatlan, no description) ; Jordan* Gilbert,
Proc, U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 359 (Cape San Lucas, no description\
Trachynotus glaucoides Giinther, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1864, 150 (San Jose ;
Nicaragua).
Habitat. — Pacific Coast of Tiopical America : Cape San Lucas,
Mazatlan, Porto Escondido, San Jose, Nicaragua, and Panama.

This species is the Pacific representative of Trachynotus
glaucus, which species it strongly resembles. The diflTerence in
the profile is, however, constant and characteristic.

Trachynotus kennedyi.

Trachynotus kennedyi Steindachner, Icht' yol., Beitrage, ii', 1875, 47, PI.

v;i, (Magdalena Bay) ; Giinther, Fish, Cent. Amer., 1869, 388 (in

part, Panama).
Trachynotus ovatus Lockington, Proc. Cal. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1876, 4

(Lower California) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882,

375 (Panama, not of Cuv. & Val.).
Trachynotus rhomboides Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882,

625 (Panama, young).
Trachynotus rhodopus Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. 8. F.sh Com., 1882,

106 (Mazatlan, not of Gill).

Habitat. — Pacific Coast of Tropical America : Magdalena Baj',
Mazatlan, Panama.

This species is the Pacific Coast representative of Trachynotus
rhomboides, from which it differs in the presence of a black axil-

124 PROOBEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

lary spot, and slightly in form of the profile. The j^oung lack
this spot, and cannot readily be distinguished from the young of
Traehynotus rhomboides. It is therefore probable that all the
references made by authors lo the occurrence of T. rhomboides
(ovatus) on the Pacific Coast of Tropical America refer to this
species. A series brought b}^ Professor Gilbert from Panama
(now unfortunately destroyed) is said to render this view very
probable. We are informed by Professor Jordan that the specimens
brought by Professor Gilbert from Mazatlan, recorded as T,
rhodopus, belong to this species, of which the latter cannot be the
young, as was at first supposed.

Traehynotus rhomboides. Round Pompano ; Palometa.

Chmtodon rhomboides Bloch, Iclithyologia, ccix, about 1783 Con a draw-
ing by Plumier) ; Gmelin, Syst. Nat., 1788, 1259 (copied).

Acanthinion rhoniboides Lacepede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., iv, 1803, 500
(copied).

Trachinotus rhoiriboides Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., viii,
1831, 407 (Martinique) ; Gi^ichenot "Poiss. Ramon delaSagra, Hist.
Cuba, 1845, 108" (Cuba).

Traehynotus rhoviboides Liitken, Spolia Atlantica, 1880, 602 (West In-
dies) ; .Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 974.

Spinous dory Mitchill, Trans. Lit. and Ph 1. Soc, 1815, PI. vi, f. 10 (no
dtscr'ption).

Trachinotus fusctts Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., viii, 1831,
410 (Brazil).

Trachinotus spinosus De Kay, N. Y. Fauna Fisbes, 1842, 117, PI. xix,
fig. 53 (New Yoik Harbor) ; Siorer, "Syn. Fish. N. A., 1846, 98."

Lichia spinosus Baird, Ninth Smithsonian Rep., 1854, 22 (Beesley's
Point, New Jersey).

Doliodon spinosus Girard, U. S. and Mex. Bd. Surv., 1859, 22 (St. Jo-
seph's Island, Texas) ; Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 1861, 37
(name only).

Traehynotus ovatus Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus,, ii, 1860, 481 (in part,
West Indian specimens, apparently not Oasterosteus ovatus, which is
the Asiatic species) ; Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, 438 ;
Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1863, 332 ; Gill, Rep. U. S. Fish
Com., 1871-2, 803 ; Baird, Rep. U. S. Fish Com., 1871-2, 825 (Wood's
Holl, Mass.) ; Goode, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 112 (name only) ;
Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1878, 376 (Beaufort, N. C,
no description) ; Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 339.
(Marquesas Keys, Fla.) ; Goode, Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1880, 24
(name only) ; Goode, Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1881, 36-39 ; Goode &
Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 237 (name only) ; Jordan &
Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 442.
Habitat. — Atlantic Coast of America : Wood's Holl, New York,

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 125

Beesley's Point, Beaufort, Marquesas Keys, Key West, St.
Joseph's Island, Martinique, and Brazil.

Head 3f in length ; depth 1| ; D. VI-1, 19 ; A. Il-I, 18 ; length
(No. 486, I. XJ. Havana) 18 inches.

Body broadl}-^ ovate, moderately compressed ; profile very
evenly convex from procumbent spine to horizontal from upper
edge of eye, where it descends almost vertical. The vertical
portion is about H times the eye ; length of snout nearly equals
the eye ; mouth nearly horizontal ; maxillary reaching to the
vertical from middle of eye, its length 21 in head ; jaws without
teeth in adult ; dorsal spines short and thick, not connected by
membrane in adult; ventrals short, their tips scarcely reaching
half way to anterior anal spine ; 3 in head ; caudal widely
forked ; lobes about 2t in length of body ; dorsal and anal fins
falcate ; anterior rays reaching almost to posterior end of fins ; in
adults, dorsal lobe 2f , anal lobe 4^, in length of body. Color
bluish above, silvei-y below ; lobes of dorsal black in young ; in
adults the fins are all bluish with lighter tips.

The young differ from the adult as above described in the
following respects : The profile is scarcely convex ; snout shorter
and less vertical ; spines much longer and connected by membranes ;
lobes of vertical fins shorter ; dorsal lobe with black ; fins all much
paler ; jaws with bands of villiform teeth; eye larger; color much
paler.

We have had no opportunity of comparing the American
Trachynotus rhomboides with the East Indian Trachynotus
ovatus with which it has been identified by Dr. Giinther. We
have been led to consider them as distinct by the following ob-
servation of Dr. Liitken: " I will only remark that the Trachy-
notus rhomboides of the Antilles has already its rhomboidal
physiognomy and the falcations of its fins strongly prolonged
at an age at which, in the Trachynotus ovatus of the seas of the
Indies, these prolongations of the fins are quite short. I am of
the opinion (with Mr. Gill) that these two species ought, at least
provisionally, to be considered as distinct."

As the antecedent probabilities are against the identity of these
species in such widely separated faunre, there is less danger of
confusion in regarding the two as different.

Trachynotus rhodopus. Permit. Great Pompann.

Trachynotus goreensis Giinther. Cat. Fish, Brit. Mus., 1860, 483
(specimens from Caribbean Sea ; in part, not of Cuvier & Valenci-

126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

ennes) ; Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 129 (West
Florida, Jupiter's Inlet) ; Goode & Bean, Proc. tJ. S. Nat. Mus., 1879,
339 ("West Florida, Marquesas Keys) ; Goode, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1879, 112 (name only) ; Goode, Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1881, 36, 40
(Key West and Jupiter's Inlet) ; Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880,
24 (name only) ; Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 237
(name only) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 442 ; Jor-
dan & Gilbert, op. cit., 1882, 974.

Trachynotus rhodopus Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1863, 85 (Cape
San Lucas ; young).

Trachynotus nasutus Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1863, 85 (Cape San
Lucas ; very young).

Trachynotus CaroUnus, Poey, Syn. Pise. Cubensium, 1808, 371 (Cuba) ;
Poey, Eilumeratio Pise. Cubensium, 1875, 86.

Habitat. — Both coasts of Tropical America : West Florida,
Jupiter's Inlet, Marquesas Keys, Key West, Cuba, Caribbean
Sea, Cape San Lucas.

Head 3 in length ; depth 2f : D. VI-I, 19 ; A. II-I, U ; length
of specimen described (Key West), 2^ inches.

Body oblong, elliptical, moderately compressed ; profile nearly
straight from procumbent spine to nostril, where it descends
nearly vertical, forming an angle ; vertical portion from angle to
snout nearly equals the eye ; maxillary reaches slightly behind
vertical from middle of eye, its length 2f in head ; jaws with bands
of villiform teeth (these disappearing with age) ; ventrals reaching
I distance to vent, their length 2 in head ; tips of pectorals reach-
ing slightly past tips of ventrals ; dorsal spines connected by a
membrane, which is only characteristic of the young. Dorsal
and anal fins falcate, their anterior soft rays less elevated than in
Trachynotus rhomboides, but extending beyond middle of fins
when depressed. Length in the young 4 in length of bod}' ; caudal
forked, lobes about 3 in bc*ly ; lateral line nearly straight, slightly
curved upwards above the pectorals ; color bluish silvery above,
silvery below; dorsal, caudal and anal lobes blackish; no cross-
bars.

This species grows to a much larger size than any other of the
genus found in our waters ; specimens of 2 to 3 feet in length
being not uncommon in Florida and Cuba. It has been identified
with the Trachynotus goreenais of Cuvier & Valenciennes, by
most American autliors, this being a species from the West Coast
of Africa. The basis of this identification appears to be insuf-
ficient. According to Cuvier & Valenciennes this Trachynotus

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 12t

goreensis is a deeper flsh than ours is at any age. Its outline and
coloration are also different.

Trachynotus maxillosus Cuvier & Valenciennes, also from
Africa, comes much nearer our fish, but this differs too much to
be safely identified with it.

On the other hand, our young specimens col'respond exactly to
the two descriptions of little Trachynoti taken by Xantus at Cape
San Lucas, published by Professor Gill; the larger one (2^^ inches
in length) corresponds entirely to the T. rhodopus, the smaller
one (IyV inches in length) to T. nasutus. There is, however, no
other record of the occurrence of our species in the Pacific.

The drawings and notes made by Professor Poey, of the species
called by him T. carolinus, have been examined by Professor
Jordan. They belong to T. rhodopus. T. carolinus is therefore
as yet not known from Cuba.

Trachynotus carolinus.

Gasterosteus caroUntis Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., ed. 13, 1766, 490 (Carolina).

Doliodon carolinus Girard, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1858, 168;
Girard, U. S. & Mex. Bd. Surv., 1839, 23, PI. xi, fig. 4 (St. Joseph's
Island, Texas) ; Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 1861, 37 (name
only).

Trachynotus cafoUnus Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1863, 438 ;
Gill, op. cit., 1863, 84 (Cape San Lucas) ; Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., 1863, 333 (name only) ; Gill, Kep. U. S. Fish Com., 1871-8,
803 (name only) ; Baird, Rep. U: S. Fish Com., 1871-3, 835 (Wood's
Holl) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1878, 377 (Beau^
fort, N. C, no description) ; Godde & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1879, 139 (Pensacola, Fla;) ; Gddde & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1879, 113 (name only) ; Bean, Proc; U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 90
(Wood's Holl, New York and Newport, R. I.) ; Goode, Bull. U. S.
Fish Com., 1881, 36 ; Goode & Bean^ Pro?. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883,
337 ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, 596 (Charleston,
S. C, no description) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1883, 359 (Cape San Lucas) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1883, 370 (Pensacola, Fla., no description) ; Goode, Bull. 21,
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 34 (name only) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish.
N. A., 1883, 443 ; Jordan, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1884, 45 (Eg-
mont Key;.

TracMnotus cupreus Cuvier & Valencieniies, Hist. Nat. Poiss., viii,
1831, 414 (Martinique).

TracMnotus argenteus Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1831,
413 (Martinique) ; Storer, Syn. Fishes N. A., 1846, 98.

128 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Trachynotus argenteus Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 1861, 37

(name only).
Trachynotus pampanus Ouv. & Val., op. cit. (Charleston, S. C.) ; Storer,

Syn. Fish. N. A., 1846, 99.
Trachynotus pampanus Giinther, Cat. Fi.sh. Brit. Mus., ii, 1860, 484

(Jamaica) ; Gill, Proc, Acad. Kat. Sci. Phila., 1862, 262 (Cape San

Lucas).

Bothrolmmus pampanus Holbrook, Ich. S. Cav., 1860 (Charleston) ;

Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 1861, 37 (name only).
IdcMa Carolina DeKay, N. Y. Fauna, iv, 1842, 114, PI. x, f. 3 (Sandy

Hook) ; Storer, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1846, 96 ; Baird, Ninth Rep,

Smith. Inst., 1854, 21 (Beesley's Point, N. J.).

Habitat. — Atlantic (and Pacific) Coasts of America: Wood's
Holl, Newport, Sandy Hook, Beesley's Point, Beaufort, Charles-
ton, Pensacola, St. Joseph's Island, Egmont Key, Key West, Mar-
tinique and Cape San Lucas.

Head 4 in length ; depth 2f ; D. YI-I, 25 ; A. II-I, 22. Length
(No. 434, L U., Key West) 15i inches.

Body oblong, comparatively robust ; greatest thickness 3 in
greatest depth. Snout from mouth to horizontal from upper
edge of eye nearly vertical, somewhat bluntly rounded ; profile
from upper edge of snout to procumbent spine evenly convex.
Mouth nearly horizontal, maxillary reaching to vertical from
middle of eye, its length 2| in head ; eye 4^ in head, about as
long as snout. Jaws without teeth in adult. Ventrals reach |
distance to vent, about 2 in pectorals, 2^ in liead. Dorsal and
anal fins falcate ; anterior rays nearly reach middle of fins when
depressed; dorsal lobe 4^; anal 5| in length of body. Color
bluish above, silvery or slightly golden below ; pectorals and
anal light orange shaded with bluish ; caudal and upper portion
of caudal peduncle with bluish reflections'.

On our South Atlantic and Gulf Coasts this is by far the most
abundant species of the genus, and it is the one most esteemed
as food. Its distribution in the West Indies is little known, the
only positive record from points south of Kej^ West being that
of " Trachynotus cupreus " from Martinique. The only specimens
known from the West Coast are those taken by Xantus at Cape
San Lucas. While we have no good reason to doubt that the
specimens now in the National Museum really came from Xantus,
it is strange that no later collectors in Lower California and
Sinaloa have found either this species or Trachynotus rhodopus.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 129

Trachynotus cayennensis.

Trachinotus cayennensis Cuvier & Valenciennes, H;st. Nat. Poiss., viii,
1831, 417 (Cayenne) ; Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit, Mus., ii, 1860, 485
(copied).

? Trachinotus paitensis Cuv. & Val., op. cit., viii, 1831, 438 (Peru).

Nothing is known of this species except what is contained in
the two meagre descriptions noticed above. No difference is
indicated by which the Pacific Coast fish (paitensis) is to be
known from the Atlantic one. Both appear to diflfer from T.
carolinus in the still longer vertical fins. •

Trachynotas marginatus.

Trachinotus marginatus Cuvier & Valefiiciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., viii,
1831, 411 (Montevideo),

This species appears to be allied to Trachynotus rhodopus and
T. goreensis, but the description is too brief to give much idea of
its relations.

Becapitulation,

We have in this paper admitted eight species of Trachynotus,
as found in American waters. Some doubt is attached to the
nomenclature of some of them. We give in the following list a
brief indication of the questions remaining to be solved in each
case : —

Genus TBACHTNOTUS Lac^pfede.

1. T. glaucus Bloch.

2. T. fasciatus Gill.

3. T. kennedyi Steindachner (possibly to be considered as a geographical variety of

T. rhomhoides or of T. ovatus).

4. T. rhomboides Bloch (possibly identical with the East Indian T. ovatus Linnaeus ;

if so, to take the latter name).

5. T rhodopns Gill, Very impt-obably identical with T. g'treentis Cuv. & Val.; pos-

sibly identical with 7". maxillosuB Cuv. & Val., both of them being African
species of prior date. Possibly not really found in the Pacific).

6. T. carolinus Linnseus (possibly not occurring in the West Indies or in the

Pacific).

7. T. cayennensis Cuv. &, Val. (imperfectly described; possibly the Pacific form of

T. paitensis is distinct).

8. T. marginatus Cuv. & Val. (imperfectly described and doubtful).

130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

A EEVIEW OF THE AMERICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS SYNODTJS.
BY SETH E. MEEK.

I have attempted in this paper to give a review of the American
species of Synodus^ with a detailed description of certain species
imperfectly described elsewhere. The paper is based on speci-
mens collected by Professor Jordan at Cedar Kej-s and Kej^ West,
Florida, and Havana, Cuba, belonging to the United States
National Museum and the Museum of the Indiana University.
All the Atlantic species here recognized, except Synodus saurus,
are contained in this collection.

I am very much indebted to Professor Jordan for use of his
library and for other aids.

Analysis of American Species of Synodus.

a. Snout short, obtuse, S^ in length of premaxillary ; head sorne-»
what compressed, much deeper than broad ; anal fin com*
paratively long, its rays about 14 ; head 31 in length ; origin
of dorsal midway between snout and adipose fin ; scales
4-55-6 ( Trachinocephalus Gill). myops. 1.

aa. Snout long, pointed, about 2^ in premaxillar} ; head depressed ,
little if any deeper than broad ; anal comparatively short,
rays 10 to 12 ; head 4 to 4§ in length (Syiiodus).
b. Scales large, 43 to 50 in lateral line; origin of dorsal midway
between tip of snout and adipose fin ; lateral line with a
blunt keel posteriorly,
c. First and last rays of dorsal coterminous when the fin is
depressed ; black blotch of scapula very small or obso-
lete ; D. I-IO ; A. I--11 to 12 ; scales 4-45-5.

intermedius. 2,

cc. Tips of first dorsal rays not reaching last when the fin is

depressed ; scapula with a large black blotch ; D. I-ll

to 12 ; i^. I-IO to 11 ; scales 4-48-6. anolis. 3.

hb. Scales small, 55 to 70 in lateral line.

d. Dorsal fin much higher than long ; tips of first rays
extending beyond tips of last when the fin is
depressed ; length of fin 1 1 in length of longest ray,
and 2^ in head; teeth large; D. 1-9; A. I-ll;
scales 4-57-6. spixianus. 4.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 131

dd. Dorsal fin slightly higher than long ; tips of first rays
not extending beyond tips of last when the fin is
depressed ; teeth small,
e. Snout broader than long, the jaws subeqiial ; tail with
a slight keel ; scales 3|-60-6. saurus. 5.

ee. Snout longer than broad, the lower jaw included ;
tail without keel.
/. Four rows of scales between lateral line and adipose
fin (6 in an oblique row); origin of dorsal fin
nearer adipose fin than tip of snout ; scales on
cheeks in about 4 to 7 rows, on opercles in 4 to
6 rows.

g. Head very small, 4f in length ; first rays of dorsal
coterminous with last ray when the fin is
depressed ; cheeks with about 4 rows of large
scales, opercles with about 4 ; ventrals 1| in
head ; pectoral 2 in head ; D. I-IO ; A. 1-12 ;
scales 6-61-6. scituliceps. 6.

gg. Head 4 in length ; tips of first rays of dorsal not
reaching tips of last when the fin is depressed ;
scales on cheeks in about T rows, on opercles
in about 6 rows ; ventrals 2^ in head ; D. I-IO
to 11 ; A. I-IO to 11 ; scales 4-64-6.

foetens. 7.

ff. Six rows of scales between adipose fin and lateral

line ; cheeks with about 9 rows of scales, opercles

with about 8 rows; D. I-IO; A. I-ll; scales

13-66-16. lucioceps. 8.

Synodus myops.

Salmo myops Bloch & Schneider, Systema Ichthyol., 1801, 431 (St.

Helena).
iSawMS m2/<?psCuv!er& Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., xxii, 1849, 485

(South Caiolina, Martinique, Bahia, St. Helena) ; Giinther, Cat.

Fish. Brit. Mu-*., v, 1864, 398 (Cuba, Jamaica) ; Jordan & Gilbert,

Syn. F:sh. N. A., 1882, 281.
TracMnoceplialus myops Poey, Syn. Pisc. Cub., 1868, 415 (Cuba).
Salmo fcetens Bloch., Ichthyologia, about 1790, taf. 384, fig. 2 ; Bloch &

Scluie'der, Systema Ichthyol., 1801, 404 (not Linnaeus).
Osmenis lemniscatus Lacepede, Hi&t. Nat. Poiss., v, 1803, 236 (on a

drawing by Pluniier).

132 PEOCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Saurns truncatus Agassiz, Spix, Pise. Bras., 1829, 82, tab. 45 (Brazil).
Saurus hrevirostris Poey, Memorias Cuba, ii, 1860, 305 (Cuba).
Trac7dnocephalus hrevirostris Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 1868, 415 (Cuba) ;
''anal rays 10 ;" Poey, Enum., 1875, 144.

Habitat. — Tropical Atlantic; Cuba; Jamaica; Martinique;
Bahia ; St. Helena ; Brazil and South Carolina.

Head 3f in length of body ; depth 5^ ; D. I-IO ; A. 1-14 ; scales
4_55_.6 (transverse series counted vertically from dorsal fin to
vent respectively).

Body little compressed; snout short, obtuse,3Mnpremaxillary ;
mouth large, premaxillary If in head ; interorbital area concave,
about 6^ in head, upper surface of head rugose. Dorsal slightly
higher than long, its length H in head ; origin of dorsal fin mid-
Way between tip of snout and adipose fin, slightly behind last
fays of ventrals. Anal fin long, its base nearly equal to head ;
pectorals reaching root of ventrals, 2 in head ; tips of ventrals
almost reaching vent, ventrals 4^ in length of body ; caudal
forked ; teeth comparatively small ; lower jaw slightly projecting.
Color grayish, mottled with darker above ; body with eleven
cross-bars ; a black blotch on scapula ; a black streak extending
from eyes around s^^mphysis, forming a quadrated blotch on the
side of each jaw, and one on the median line of each jaw ; dorsal
fin faintly barred ; pectorals, ventrals and anal plain.

This description is taken from a very young specimen, twenty
three inches in length, collected by Professor Jordan in Havana.
In the above synonymy we have omitted references from the
Pacific Ocean, thinking it not impossible that the Asiatic species
(limbatus) is a species distinct from S. myops. Trachinocephalus
hrevirostris Poey, known only from a drawing made in 185T,
seems to differ only in the presence of ten .instead of fifteen anal
rays. This is probably an error, or perhaps an accidental muti-
lation. I have little doubt that it is a synonym of S. myops.

Synodus intermedius.

? ? ? Synodus Gronov., Mus. Ichth., ii, 1765, No. 151, tab. 7, fig. 1.

? ? ? Esox synodus Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., i, 1766, 516 (America).

? ? ? Synodus synodus Bloch & Schneider, Systema Ichtliyol., 1801,

396.
? Saurus synodus Cuv. & Val., Hist. Nat. Poiss., xxii, 1849 (jMar-

tinique ; Guadeloupe ; Bahia ; St. Helena).
? ? ? Synodus fasciatus Lacepede, v, 1804, 321.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 133

Saurus intermedius Agassiz, "Spix, Pise. Brazil, 1829, 81, tab. 44

(Brazil)."
Synodus intermedius Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 1875, 14S (Cuba, not of

Synopsis).

Habitat. — Cuba ; Brazil.

Head 4 in length of body; depth 6|; D. I-IO; A. I -10; scales 4-
44-4 (transverse series counted from dorsal.and vent respectively).

Body terete, rather robust ; snout comparatively long and
pointed, about 3| in head; mouth large; premaxillar}'' about 1|
in head ; intei-orbital area concave, about 6^ in head ; supra-
orbital ridge present, terminating anteriorly before the nostrils.

Origin of dorsal fin midway between tip of snout and adipose
fin ; anterior rays of dorsal coterminous with posterior ones when
the fin is deflexed ; fin higher than long, its length about 2 in
head, lower jaw slightly projecting; teeth moderate, anterior
palatine teeth largest, becoming smaller posteriorly.

Lateral line with a blunt keel posteriori}^, tips of ventrals reach-
ing I distance to vent, their length about 1^ in head ; tips of
pectorals extending to roots of ventrals, If in head ; caudal forked,
lobes equal, scales large. Color yellowish above, lighter below,
scales above lateral line punctulate with dark ; breast flesh-colored ;
sides with a row of irregular black markings ; scapula occasion-
ally with a small black spot, faintly barred with black ; caudal
not barred, dusky ; tips of middle rays darkest ; other fins plain.

This description is taken from several specimens, the largest 5
inches in length, collected by Professor Jordan at Havana.

This is evidently the Synodus intermedius of Poey's Enumer-
atio. I have been unable to examine the figure of Agassiz and
Spix, but from the account given of it by Poey, we infer that it is
taken from specimens of the present species rather than of S.
cuhanus. According to Poey, the species figured by Spix lacks
the scapular spot.

Synodus anolis.

^ Saurus anolis Cuvier & Valeneiennes, Hist. Nat, Poiss., xxii, 1849,
438 (Babia ; Martinique).

1 Since tbe above was in type tlie following notes have been received by
Prof. Jordan from Dr. H. E. Sauvage, of the jVIuseum of Paris : ^'■Saurus
anolis C. & V. Bahia. Type. Length of body 245 m. Lateral line
with 54 scales ; 10 in a transverse series. A well-marked black spot on
the scapular part of the gill-openings." There seems to be no doubt of the
identity of anolis and cuhanus.

134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEj^Y OF [1884.

Saurus intermedius Griinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., v, 1864, 396 (Ja-
maica ; Demarara ; Bahia ; not of Agassiz).

Synodus intermedius Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 1868, 414 (Cuba) ; Jordan
& Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 889 ; Goods & Bean, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1882, 239 (name only) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1882, 249 (Pensacola, Fla.).

Synodus cubanus Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 1875, 143 (Cuba).

Habitat. — Atlantic shores of Tropical America ; Pensacola ;
Key West ; Cuba ; Jamaica ; Martinique ; Demarara and Bahia.

The description of Saurus anolis is so insufficient, that no
certain identification can he made.

This species has been sufficiently described by Jordan &
Gilbert (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 249). The large specimens
from Key West, examined by me, agree well with this account.

Synodus spixianus.

Saurus spixianus Poey, Memorias Cuba, ii, 1860, 304 (Cuba).
Synodus spixianus Poey, Syn. Pise. Cuba, 1868, 413 (Cuba) ; Poey,
Enum. Pise. Cub., 1875, 397 (Cuba).

Habitat. — Cuba ; Key West.

Head 4^ in length of body ; D. 1-9 ; A. I-ll ; scales 4-5 "7-6
(transverse series counted from dorsal and vent respectively).

Body oblong, nearly terete ; snout compai'atively long and
pointed, 3^ in head and about 2^ in premaxillary. Interorbital
area concave, 6 in head. Eye 5 in head. Supraorbital striate.
Branchiostegals 16. Origin of dorsal fin nearer adipose fin than
tip of snout by length of dorsal fin ; tips of anterior rays reaching
beyond tips of posterior ones when the fin is deflexed ; the fin is
therefore much higher than long. Length of fin 1 1 in length of
longest ray and 2^ in head. Yentrals moderate, reaching about
I distance to vent, 1^ in head. Tips of pectorals not reaching to
roots of ventrals, about 2 in head. Adipose fin situated over
middle of anal. Caudal forked, its lobes equal. Teeth larger than
in the other species. Palatine teeth becoming smaller posteriorly.
Color light sandy gray, much mottled above with darker olive.
Branchiostegals A'ery pale, 5rellowish. Ventrals and anal pale and
plain, lower lobe of caudal dusky, neither barred. Dorsal faintly
barred with darker olive.

Tliis description taken from one specimen 8j inches long, col-
lected by Professor Jordan in Havana. Numerous smaller ones
from Key West have also beeu exanained.

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 135

Synodus sanius.

Osmerus radiis pinnce ani undedm Artccli, Descript. Spec. Pise, 1738,

23 (Mediterranean).
Salmo saurus Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., i, ed. 12, 1766, 511 (Europe).
Saurus lacerta Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. N^it. Poiss., xxii, 1849, 463

(Europe, not of Risso).
Synodus lacerta Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1876, 68 (Bermudas).
Saurus griseus Lowe, Trans. Zool. Soc, ii, 1841, 188 (Madeiia) ;

Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., v, 1864, 394 (Madeira, St. Vincent,

Naples, MediteFranean).

I have not seen this species. Professor Goode (Bull. U. S. Nat,
Mus., 18T6, 68) makes the following reference to its occurrence
in the Bermudas : —

"A specimen seventeen inches long was taken oft' the ' ducking-
stool ' in March, by a line fisherman. Its occurrence in this part
of the Atlantic is very novel, but it agrees closely with a specimen
of Saurus griseus sent to the United States National Museum by
Dr. Giinther. Its color was dusky gray above, yellow below. Its

formulse are as follows: Branchiostegals, 16-17 (on opposite

31

sides); D, 12: A. 12 ; lateral line, 60; transverse line, -r-."

6

Synodus scituliceps.

Synodus 'scituliceps Jordan »& Gilbert, Proc, U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 344
(Mazatlan) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 354
(Cape San Lucas) ; Jordan & Gilbtrr, Bull. U. S. Fish. Com.,
1882, 106 (Mazatlan); Jordan & Gilbtrt, Bull. U. S. F sh. Com.,
1882, 109 (Panama,.

Saurus fcetens GiintliLr, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus,, 1864, 396 (in part; speci-
men from Panama).

Habitat. — Mazatlan, Panama,

Synodus fcetens.

Salmo fmtens L'nnseus, Syst, Nat., i, ed. 12, 1766, 513 (Carolina),
Saurus fastens Cuvier «& Vakncitnnes, Hist, Nat. Pofes., xxii, 1849, 471
(Martinique, St. DoniinjiO, Chaileston, S. C; Bahia, Rio Janeiro) ;
Holbrook, Ichth, S. C, 1860, 187.
Synodus foitens Gill, Rept. U, S, Fish. Com., 1871-2, 810 (name only) ;
Joidan & Gilbeit, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1878, 384 (Beaufort, N. C,
no description) ; Goode, Pioc. U, S, Nat, Mus,, 1879, 119 fname
only) ; Goode & Bean, Prcc. U, S, Nat, Mus , 1879, 342 (Key West) ;
Bean, Proc, U. S, Nat, Mus., 1880, 105 (B.auforr, N, C, ; no descrp-
tion) ; Goode & Bean, Proc, U. S, Nat, Mus,, 1882, 239 (Gulf of
Mexico) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U, S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 585 (Charles-
ton, S. C.) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish, N. A., 1882, 280.

136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

? Coregonus ruber Lacepede, v, 1804, 263 (on a drawing by Plumier).
? Saurus longirostris Agassiz, "Si)ix, Pise, Bras., tab. 43, 1839"
(Brazil).

Habitat. — Atlantic shores of America : Beaufort, Charleston,
Cedar Keys, Key West, Martinique, St. Domingo, Rio Janeiro.

This is the most common species of the genus on the United
States Coast. It is well described by Jordan &, Gilbert, Syn.
Fish N. A., 1882, 280.

Synodus luoioceps

Saurus lucioceps Ayres, Proc. Cal. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1855, 66 (San
Francisco) ; Giintlier, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., v, 1864, 397 (copied).

Synodus lucioceps Jordan & Gilbert., Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 457
(San Francisco, Monterey Bay, Santa Barbara) ; Jordan & Jouy,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 13 (San Francisco, Monterey, Santa
Barbara) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 42 ; Jordan
& Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. A., 1882, 281.

Sauries fmtens Lockington, Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist., about 1878 (errone-
ously identified with the Atlantic species).

Habitat. — West Coast of U. S. : San Francisco, Monterey, Santa
Barbara.

This species resembles Synodus f ceteris^ but has much smaller
scales. This is shown especially when the number in vertical
series is counted. The only accurate description is that of Jordan
& Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 281,

PROC, A, N, S, PHILA, \m.

PL I.

r-^-

.>^'

•/"

N.

/

V

/

V

3 ^^

^

/\.

. _.^-,--^N

5 Gf mflite.del.

GENUS APSILUS,

1884.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 137

May 6.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Sixteen persons present.

A Bare Human Tapeworm. — Dr. Leidy directed attention to
some little tapeworms, which had recently been submitted to his
examination by Prof. William Pepper. They were expelled, by
the use of santonin, from a child of three years. The specimens,
consisting of a dozen fragments, appear to be portions of three
worms, which reached a length of from twelve to fifteen inches,
or more. Unfortunately the head is lost. The joints or proglot-
tides are more than several times the breadth of the length. In
a specimen of thirteen inches, comprising nearly a complete
worm, the joints of the anterior attenuated extremity are about
the one-fifth of a millimetre long by nearly two-thirds of a milli-
metre wide, while the posterior joints are half a millimetre long
and two and a quarter milli-iietres wide. Ripe joints at the
posterior part of the body are pale brown, the color being due to
the eggs. These occupy a simple uterus defined by the walls of
the joints, and not divided into pouches diverging laterally from
a main stem as is usual in most taeniae. A singular feature of
the worm is the interruption of the series of ripe joints, here and
there, by one or more completely sterile ones. The generative
apertures open in the usual wa}^ on the lateral margin of one
side. The mature eggs are spherical, measure 0"072 mm.
diameter, and contain, fully developed, six hooked embryos.

While differing greatly from the ordinary tapeworms infesting
man, they approximate nearlj^ the description of Tsenise fiavo-
punctata, and probably pertain to this species. This has been
but once previously observed, and was described in 1858 bv Dr.
Weinland (An Essay on Tapeworms of Man^, from specimens in
the Museum of the Medical Improvement Society of Boston.
These were also discharged by a child. The worm was estimated
to be from eight to twelve inches. The joints were marked by a
yellow spot, from which the species was named. The eggs
measure from 0-054 to 0*06 mm.

Our specimens indicate a worm almost the same size as the T.
Jlavopunctata^ but the joints are shorter and wider, and exhibit
no yellow spot, and the eggs are larger. In other characters the
worms sufficiently accord to render it probable that they may
pertain to the same species. It is probable that the worm is
more common than would be su|)posed from the instances of its
observation, and has perhaps escaped notice from its small size,
and from the general ignorance of the distinction, not only of
this, but of the ordinary species of tapeworms.

A more complete account of the subject of this communication
will, shortly appear in the American Journal of Medical Sciences.
10

138 proceedings of the academy of [1884.

May 13.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Fifteen persons present.

How Lycosa fabricates her Round Cocoon. — Dr. H. C. McCooK.
said that while walking in the suburbs of Philadelphia lately, he
found under a stone a female Lycosa (probably L. riparia
Hentz), which he placed in a jar partly filled with dry earth.
For two days the spider remained on the surface of the soil,
nearly inactive. The earth was then moistened, whereupon (May
2) she immediately began to dig, continuing until she had made
a cavity about one inch in depth and height. The top was then
carefully covered over with a tolerably closely woven sheet of
white spinning work, so that the spider was entirely shut in.
This cavity was made against the glass side of the jar, and the
movements of the inmate were thus exposed to view. Shortly
after the cave was covered, the spider was seen working upon a
circular cushion of beautiful white silk, about three-fourths of an
inch in diameter, which was spun upwards in a nearly perpen-
dicular position against the earthen wall of the cave. The
cushion looked so much like the cocoon of the common tube-
weaver, Agalena ntevia, and the whole operations of the Lycosa
were so like those of that species when cocooning, that the
speaker was momentarily possessed with the thought that he had
mistaken the creature's identity altogether, and again examined
her carefully, only to be assured that she was indeed a Lycosa.
After an absence of half an hour. Dr. McCook returned to find
that in the interval the spider had oviposited against the central
part of the silken cushion and was then engaged in enclosing the
hemispherical egg-mass with a silken envelope. The mode of
spinning was as follows : the feet clasped the circumference of
the cushion, and the body of the animal was slowly revolved ; the
abdomen — now greatly reduced in size by the extrusion of the
eggs — was lifted up, thus drawing out short loops of silk from
the expanded spinnerets, which, when the abdomen was dropped
again, contracted and left a flossy curl of silk at the point of
attachment. The abdomen was also swayed back and forwards,
the filaments from the spinnerets following the motion as the
spider turned, and thus an even thickness of silk was laid upon
the eggs. The same behavior marked the spinning of the
silken button or cushion, in the middle of which the eggs had
been deposited.

At this stage, Dr. McCook left for an evening engagement, with
his ideas as to the cocooning habits of Lycosa very much con-
fused, indeed, by an observation so opposed to the universal

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 139

experience. Returning to his desk in an hour and a half, he was
once more assured by the sight of a round silken ball dangling
from the apex of the spider's abdomen, held fast by short threads
to the spinnerets. The cushion, however, had disappeared.

The mystery (as it had seemed to him) was solved : the Lycosa
after having placed her eggs in the centre of the silken cushion,
and covered them over, had gathered up the edges and so united
them and rolled them as to make the normal globular cocoon of
her genus, which she at once tucked under her abdomen in the
usual way. This v/as a most interesting observation, and Dr.
McCook thought had not before been made ; at least Lycosa's
manner of fabricating a cocoon had been heretofore unknown to
him ; and by reason of her subterranean habit the opportunity to
observe it was rare. He had often wondered how the round egg-
ball was put together, and the mechanical ingenuity and simplicity
of the method were now apparent. The period consumed in the
whole act of cocooning was less than four hours ; the act of ovi-
positing took less than half an hour. Shortly after the egg-sac
was finished, the mother cut her way out of the silken cover. She
had evidently thus secluded herself for the purpose of spinning
her cocoon. While feeding the spider some flies, the cave was
accidentally filled up, and no effort had been made to dig another,
although it is the custom of this genus, in natural environment,
to remain pretty closely within such a habitation while carrying
the cocoon.

One month after the above date (June 4), the spider was
found with the young hatched, and massed upon her body from
the caput to the apex of the abdomen. The empty egg-sac still
clung to the spinnerets, and the younglings were grouped over
the upper part of the same. The abdomens of the little spiders
were of a light yellow color, the legs a greenish brown or slate-
color, and the whole brood were tightly compacted upon and
around each other, the lower layers apparently holding on to the
mother's body, and the upper upon those beneath. Twenty-four
hours thereafter, the cocoon-case was dropped, and the spiderlings
clung to the mother alone. An examination of the cocoon showed
that the young had escaped through the thin seam or joint
formed by the union of the egg-cover with the circular cushion,
when the latter was pulled up at the circumference into globular
shape. There was no flossy wadding within — as is common with
orb-weaving spiders, for example — nothing but the pinkish shells
of the escaped young. On June 11, about one hundred of the
spiderlings had abandoned the maternal perch, and were dispersed
over the inner surface of the jar, and upon a series of lines
stretching from side to side. About half as many more remained
upon the mother's back; but by the 13th, all had dismounted.
Meantime, they had increased in size at least one-half, apparently
without food.

140 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Note on the Amphibious Habit of Lycosa. — Dr. McCooK
alluded to another interesting fact in the life-history of Lycosa,
brought to his attention by Mr. Alan Gentry, This gentle-
man, during the winter, visited a pond in the vicinity of Phila-
delphia (Germantown) which was frozen over. He cut a slab
from the ice about eight to ten feet from the bank, and was sur-
prised to see several spiders running about in the water. They
were passing from point to point by silken lines stretched under-
neath the surface between certain water-plants. Several were
captured, but unfortunatelj'^the specimens were not preserved. Mr.
Thomas G. Gentr}'^, who saw them, says that they were Lycosids,
and from his description of the eyes he is evidently correct. It
is a remarkable and novel fact to find these creatures thus living
in full health and activity in mid-winter within the waters of a
frozen pond, and so far from the bank in which the burrows of
their congeners are so common]}^ found. It has been believed,
heretofore, and doubtless it is generally true, that the Lycosids
winter in deep burrows in the ground, sealed up tightly to main-
tain a higher temperature. But the above observation opens up
a new and very strange chapter in the winter behavior of these
spiders, as well as in the amphibious nature of their habits.

Pentastomum proboscideum. — Prof. Leidy exhibited specimens
of this parasite, presented to him by Mr. Norman Spang, of Etna,
Pa., who recently obtained them in Florida, from the lung of a
large rattlesnake, Crotalus adamanteus.. They are cylindrical
incurved, annulated, largest and rovmded at the head, tapering
behind, and becoming again larger and rounded at the end ;
and terminating ventrally in a short conical point. There are
six of them, with the following measurements : — 9 lines long by
1^ lines at the head; 13 lines by 1^ lines; 24 by 2h', 28 by 2i;
30 by 3, and 31 by 3. The species was first found by Humboldt
in Crotalus horridus. It is common in the Boa constrictor, in
which Professor Leidy had also observed it several times. It has
likewise been found in a number of other serpents. Other species
occur in diflferent mammals, including man, reptiles and fishes.
These singular parasites are regarded as the most degraded form
of arachnida, in the mature stage being reduced to a worm-like,
limbless body.

May 20.
Mr. Thomas Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Eighteen persons present.

The Nature of a Fasciated Branch. — At the meeting of the
Botanical Section on the 12th, Mr. Thomas Meehan called atten-
tion to a paper contributed by him to the Proceedings of the

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141

American Association for the Advancement of Science^ p. 27 Y,
vol. xix, 1870, in which, contrary to the accepted hypothesis that
a fasciated branch was due to " over-luxuriance," or a high con-
dition of vitality, he showed that the result was due to a degra-
dation of vital power. A number of phenomena conceded to
result from low vital conditions, were shown to be inseparably
connected with fasciation, the essential feature of which is the
production of an extraordinary number of buds, with a corre-
sponding suppression of the normal internodal spaces.

This is precisely the condition of a flowering branch ; and all
its attendant phenomena find their analogue in a fasciated stem.
Taking a composite flower in illustration — a sunflower, for
instance — we find on the receptacle a coil of many hundred florets,
each floret with a chafl"y scale at the base. Each of these florets
in morpholog}^ represents a branch, and the scale a leaf or bract,
from the axil of which the branch would have sprung. If we
imagine the head uncoiled, and everything in a normal vege-
tative condition, as distinct from the condition of inflorescence,
we might have a sunflower plant a hundred feet high or more.
But with the approach to the flowering stage we have a suppres-
sion of vegetative development, with a highly accelerated develop-
ment of buds, out of which are morphologized the floral parts.

The receptacle on which the involucral scales and other parts
of inflorescence in a compound flower, had also its analogue in
the thickened stems which bore the buds in a fasciated branch.

The phenomena which indicated low vital power in the fasciated
branch, were all manifested in a flower. Taking the test of vital
power as the ability to retain life under equal circumstances, we
find the leaves on a fasciated branch dying before those on the
rest of the tree. On the balsam fir, an evergreen, the leaves are
wholly deciduous ; or a deciduous ally, the larch, the leaves mature
before the others. On other trees we find always the leaves
enduring longer than those on the fasciated. We sa}' the leaves
on the latter have a lower vital power. In severe winters the
branches in the fasciation wholly die, in many cases, while those
on other portions of the tree survive, and again we say, because
they have a lower vital power. Precisely^ the same circumstances
attend inflorescence. The leaves in their procession from a
normal condition to petals lose this evidence of vitality in pro-
portion to the degree of transformation. The petal dies before
the sepal, the sepal before the bract, and the bract before the
leaves, in the general order of anthesia, in a compound flower,
though there are cases where, secondary causes coming into play,
this rule would be reversed, but, in a general way, the soundness
of the point would not be disputed.

From all these facts in analog}- it might be said in addition to
the points brought out in the paper of 1870, above cited, that
a fasciated branch is an imperfect and precocious attempt to enter
on the flowering or reproductive stage.

142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

On Rapid Changes in the History of Species. — Mr. Thomas
Meehan exhibited flowers of the remarkable Halesia noted at page
32, and remarked on the wide divergence reached without any
intervening modifications from the original, and observed that it
was another illustration of what he thought must now be gener-
ally accepted, that the maxim of Ray " Natura non facit
saltum " itself needed modification. He had called attention to
this particular departure, among others, in a paper before the
American Association for the Advancement of Science., in 1874 ;^
what he desired to do now was to emphasize a few of the points
brought out prominently in that paper, that " Variations in
species, as in morphological changes in individuals, are b}- no
means by gradual modifications ; that suddenly formed and
marked variations perpetuate themselves from seeds, and behave
in all respects as acknowledged species ; and that variations of
similar characters would appear at times in widely separated
localities."

In addition to the illustrations given in that paper, a remark-
able one was aflbrded by the Richardia sethiopica^ the common
" calla " of gardens, the present season. Some four inches below
the perfect flower a mere spathe was developed, partially green,
but mostly white, as usual, but in this case we do not call it a
spathe, but a huge bract. In other words, the usually naked
flower-scape of the Richardia had borne a bract. Flowers with
a pair of more or less imperfect spathes were not uncommon in
some seasons ; the peculiarity of the present season was the
interval of several inches on the stem, which justified the term
of bract to the lower spathe. From the vicinit}^ of Philadelphia
numbers had been brought to him, and others had been sent
from Ohio, Indiana and Illinois — some hundreds of miles apart.
What was the peculiarity in this season over others which
induced the production of this bract, was one question. What-
ever it may have been, it operated in bringing about a change of
character, without the intervention of seed, directly on the plant,
and in Tn&ny widely separated places at the same time. What is
to prevent a law which operates exceptionally in one season,
operating again and in a regular and continuous way ? So far as
we can understand there can be no reason ; and, if it should, we
have a new species, not springing from a seed, or one individual
plant — constituting one geographical centre of creation from
which all subsequent descendants emigrated and spread them-
selves— but a whole brood of new individuals already widely
distributed over the earth's surface, and entirely freed from the
" struggle for existence " which the development of a species
from a solitary individual presupposes.

Aside from the great value of this illustration of how the
whole character of a species might be modified simultaneously

1 See Proc. Amer. Assoc. Ad. Science, vol. xxiii, p. B. 9.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 143

over a wide extent of country, it afforded a lesson in environ-
ment. External circumstances may influence modification, but
only in a line already prepared for modification. This must
necessarily be so, or change would be but blind accident, whereas
paleontology teaches us that change has always been in regular
lines, and in co-ordinate directions which no accident has been
able to permanently turn aside. Just as in the birth of animals,
we find, that however powerful may be some external law of
nutrition, which, acting on the primary cell of the individual
decides the sex, yet we see that no accident has been able to
disturb the proportion of the sexes born, which has alwaj'S been,
so far as we know, nearly equal. So in the birth of species,
making all allowance for the operation of environment, the
primary plan has been in no serious way disturbed ; we have to
grant something to environment in the production of new forms,
but only as it may aid an innate power of change, ready to expend
itself on action as soon as the circumstances favor such develop-
ment— circumstances which after all have very little ability to
determine what direction such change shall take.

We know that distinct forms do spring through single indi-
viduals from seed, and that, after battling successfully with all
the vicissitudes of its surroundings, a new form may succeed in
spreading, through the lapse of years or ages, over a considerable
district of country. But the idea that always and in all cases
species have originated in this manner, presents, occasionally,
difficulties which seem insurmountable. In the case of the simi-
larity between the flora of Japan and that of the eastern portion
of the United States, we have to assume the existence of a much
closer connection between the land over what is now the Pacific
Ocean, in comparatively modern times, in order to get a satisfac-
tory idea of the departure of the species from one central spot ;
and to demand a great number of years for some plants to travel
from one central birthplace before the land subsided, carrying
back species in geological time further, perhaps, than mere geo-
logical facts would be willing to allow. But if we can see our wa}'^
to a belief that plants may change in a wide district of country
simultaneously in one direction, and that these changes once
introduced, be able to perpetuate themselves till a new birth-time
should arrive, we have a great advancement towards sinaplifying
things.

May 27.

Mr. J. H. Redfield in the chair.

Twenty-three persons present.

Mr. Henry N. Rittenhouse was elected a member.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

144 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

NEW FOSSILS FROM THE FOUR GROUPS OF THE NIAGARA PERIOD OF
WESTERN NEW YORK.

by eugfne n. s. eingueberg.

Medina Group.
Sphirophyton arohimedes (n. sp.). PL II, fig. 1.

Frond large, thick ; growing in loose spirals that gradually
decrease in size from below upwards ; about two coils occur in
the space of the diameter.

Surface on both sides crossed by broad, irregular, gently
undulose, wavy plications, which radiate from the centre out
towards the obtuse rounded margins in subspiral curves, which
traverse about one-fourth of the coil, following the general
spiral growth, which is sinistral.

This fucoid is specially remarkable for its thickness and loose
spiral growth. It differs from those figured by Hall by growing
in decreasing spirals instead of expanding from below up.

From the upper friable bands of the Medina sandstone at
Lockport.

Clinton Group.

TRIACRINUS (n. gen.).

Calyx symmetrical, subelongate, ovoid to pyriform.

Basals five, arranged in a bilaterally symmetrical series, the
median of which is placed to the right of the anal, and is pen-
tagonal ; the two next on either side are low quadrangular, and
the outer adjoining two, which are wider than the others, are pen-
tagonal and have their superior apices directed away from each
other.

The second ring is tripartite and comprised of the large anal
and the lower elongated and expanded portion of the two lateral
anterior radials.

Anal very large, forming nearly one-third of the circumference
of the calyx ; equilaterally heptagonal ; it rests on one of the
quadrangular radials and laterally against the sloping sides of
two adjacent pentangular ones.

The third or true radial ring is equally quinquepartite and has
with the second ring — which is really but a modified portion of
the third — a bilateral symmetry, but differing from that of the

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145

basals in its axis, which is governed by the anal. Plates five,
three small and two large, of subequal sizes ; upper portion
incurved so as to form part of the brim of the dome ; deeply ex-
cavated above in the incurved portion, with dove-tailed notches
to receive the brachials; first two radials on the posterior side
small, resting on the sloping sides of the anal and the posteriorly
expanded portion of the next radials ; lateral radials much elon-
gated, so as to rest upon the basals ; and have the elongated
portion much expanded, especially anterioi'ly, where they meet
under the anterior radial : anterior radial small, supported by the
lateral radials upon their expanded portion, which in the dextral
one is supported by three basals like the anal, while the other
rests on the two wider pentagonal basals and consequently has
an acute inferior angle instead of a truncate one.

This anomalous genus should probably be placed next to
Eyhocrinus with which it has some slight affinity.

So far found only in the Clinton Group.

Triacrinus pyriformis (n. sp.). PI. Ill, fig. 1.

Calyx small, subpyriform.

Base broad, truncate, with a slight, flat, wide depression to
receive the column which was here evidently about as broad ;
leaving only a fine sharp projecting marginal ring.

Height to width as three to two.

Basals medium; first to the right of anal; acutely pentagonal,
height and width about equal ; the quadrangular plates are about
one-half as high as the pentagonal ones ; height to width as one
to two ; the two adjoining pentagonal plates are as high as the
other, and are wider than high ; extending nearly half way around
the basal ring.

Second ring equally triehotomous. Anal large, slightly wider
than high.

First two posterior radials medium, obversely equiform with
their lower and external lateral sides curving outwards ; lateral
large radials slightly expanded posteriorly and widely anteriorly ;
anterior radial equilateral, with lateral angles fitting into the
expanded radials upon which it rests. The wide dove-tailed
incisions to receive the brachials are about two-thirds as wide as
the upper part of the plates, at their lower expanded portion ;
above which point the upper part of the plate is rather abruptly

146 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

incurved. Height three-eighths inch. From the limestone of the
upper portion of the Clinton Group at Lockport.
Triacrinus globosus (n. sp.) PI. Ill, fig. 2.

Calyx small, globosely subovoid ; base large, deeply excavated
with rounding margins ; sides evenly rounding from the base to
the lateral apices of the incurved projections of the radials.

Basals incurved to receive the column, low at the sutures ;
quadrangular basals very low, height to width as one to three ;
about one-half of their height is incurved into the excavated base.

Anal large, almost as high as wide.

Expanded portion of the lateral radials wide, forming more
than two-thirds of the second ring.

Anterior radial evenly rounding from the lateral sides to an
acute inferior angle.

Expanded portion of the brachial notches about one-half as
wide as the plate at that point.

The specific features of this species in comparison with the
other, are the ovoid calyx, much more deeply excavated and
rounded base, narrower brachial notches in the radials, and the
evenly rounded sides of the small anterior radial. Height same
as last species ; width nearly equal to the height. The specimen
from which the description is taken is slightly distorted by
pressure.

Locality and group the same as T. pyriforniis.

Stictopora obliqua (n. sp.) PI. II, fig. 2.

Flat, large, broad and long, of equal width ; with a central band
of upward-curving rounding lines of growth, which are irregular
in distance from each other, and as regards strength ; they occupy
from one-third to one-half of the surface, and are sometimes
deflected slightly to one side or the other ; the outer ends of these
striae of growth gradually disappear as they curve downwards
and approach each other upon the flat, unstriated margins ; but
occasionally one or two striae are more prominent than the rest,
and extend further downwards and outwards.

Cells arranged in longitudinal and rectangular transverse rows
on the unstriated marginal thirds ; from which point the trans-
verse rows are deflected downwards, and meet with a rounding
curve in the central portion.

The cells of the outer portions are sub-rhombic, with an out-
ward inclination of their outer upper corners ; deflected rows of

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 147

cells rhomboid, becoming gradually quadrangular towards the
centre.

FUNGISPONGIA (n. gen.)

Flattened ; spreading from a fixed point ; thinning out at the
margin.

From the attached portions, numerous perforations, with
smooth walls, radiate and branch out with many bifurcations
and anastomoses in all directions towards the periphery, having
numerous communications with the outer surface, which is quite
smooth.

Fungispongia irregularis (n. sp.) PI. Ill, fig. 3.

Flat, rather thin, irregularly spreading from a lateral or excen-
tric point of growth. Surface moderately convex ; rather abruptly
beveled off to a sharp margin, which is somewhat irregular in
contour. Internal structure consisting of small, closely arranged
radiating perforations, which, though apparently of a quite regular
circular form separately, are very irregular in section, in conse-
quence of the frequent bifurcations and intercommunications
occurring in their outward course. They do not always open
directly upon the rather smooth surface, but are directed outwards
towards the margin and frequently' end in furrows on the outside.

The specimen from which this description is taken, is some-
what weathered in the central part, so as to well show its struc-
ture. From the siliceous bands of the Clinton at Lockport.

Niagara Transition Group.

Stictopora graminifolia (n. sp.). Pi. ITT, fig. 4.

Very long and narrow, ribbon-like ; width one-eighth inch,
even throughout, flat on the noncellular and slightly convex on
the cellular side.

The striae of the lines of growth are abruptly arched in the
centre, where they are accompanied by undulations of the surface
having the same general curve, but which are confined to the
central portion ; the stride grow more crowded as they gradually
approach the margin, which they continue to do for a distance
about equal to the width of the flat surface, where they become
lost just before reaching it by being merged with others in
common longitudinal strise, which extend some distance down the
side before they become finally lost.

148 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Central thii'd occupied by five or six longitudinal rows of cells,
which continue throughout its entire length ; from these the
lateral cells are directed in nearly straight lines obliquely out-
wards and upwards towards the margins, at an acute angle. Cells
twice as long or longer than their width and are arranged irregu-
larly in the rows, without any apparent order.

The length of the specimen is two and one-fourth inches,
which was not its entire length, several fragments having been
lost off either end.

From the compact, fine-grained Niagara Transition Group
limestone, which was described by me in the American Naturalist,
Sept., 1882, at Gasport.

Niagara Group.

Eucalyptocrinus inconspectus (n. sp.). PI. Ill, fig. 5.

Calyx large, cup-shaped, wide, upper part with perpendicular
sides ; base rounding, obconical with a small excavation to
receive the column.

Column and arms unknown.

Surface finely rugose ; rugse giving evidence of irregular radia-
tions from the centre of the larger plates.

Basals concealed within the depression to receive the column.
First radials medium, rapidly expanding. Second radials large,
as high as wide. The rest of the plates, excepting the elongate
interradials and interbrachials, wider than high. Radial plates,
with the exception of the second, flattened or even slightly
depressed, slightly wider than high.

This species may be distinguished from E. a-assus by the,
comparatively, very shallow basal excavation which receives the
column ; also by the finely rugose surface-markings, the rounding
base and nearly parallel sides at the upper part of the calyx.
And from £J. decorus by the longer calyx and surface-markings.

From the Niagara limestone at Lockport.

Cornulites contractus (n. sp.). PI. Ill, fig. 6.

Shell much elongated, cylindrical or subcylindrical, very
gradually tapering ; regularly sharply annulate ; longitudinally
finely striate.

Growing attached to foreign bodies or in groups when young.

Annulations very sharply defined, equidistant ; about five to

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 149

one-fourth inch in the larger specimens ; they rise bj^ an even
curve from the rounded, contracted, inter-annular spaces and
form sharp angular annulations.

Longitudinal striations prominent, closely arranged, and are
strongest at the bottom of the trough-like depressions, having
there the appearance of being minute plications produced by the
contraction ; they grow fainter at the apex of the annulations,
but continue over them to the next. The sloping sides of the
annulations sometimes bear one or two inconspicuous annulations
which do not interfere with the contour of the shell.

The prominence and regularity of the annulations in the older
portions of the shell will serve to distinguish it from G. proprius,
with which it is associated, and to which it sometimes bears a
superficial resemblance in the younger attached part.

From the Niagara shale at Lockport.

Cornulites nodosus (n. sp.). PI. Ill, fig. 7.

Shell small, elongate, tapering graduallj^ to an attenuate, very
sharp apex.

Growing on small foreign bodies ; attached throughout. Sur-
face smooth, ornamented by numerous closely arranged nodes,
which increase in size as the shell enlarges, and are placed in
regular rows across it ; the terminal ones being somewhat elon-
gate and attached to the surface upon which it grows.

The largest specimen found measures five thirty-seconds of an
inch in length.

From the Niagara shale at Lockport.

Lingula bicariaata (n. sp.) PI. Ill, fig. 8.

Shell small, ovoid in outline ; beak very acute ; transverse
diameter widest half way from the beak ; valves evenly rounding,
convex ; with two hardly perceptible parallel median ridges com-
mencing at the beak and extending to the outer margin, widening
regularly as the shell increases in size.

Concentric striae fine, even, increasing regularly by several
bifurcations.

From the Niagara Shale at Lockport.

The specimens described were all collected by myself, and the
types are in my collection.

150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate II.

1. Spirophpton archimedes (n. sp.)

Two -whorls of a large specimen, natural size,
1 a. Lower side of a pait of a smaller fiond, showing more plainly the
suhspiral undulat'ons.

2. Stictopora obliqua (n. sp.)

Natuial size.
3 a. A small portion of it enlarged, showing the oblique downward curve
of the transverse rows ; three diameters.

Plate IIL

1. Triacrinus pyriformis (n. gen. et sp.) ; natural size.

a. Poster or side ; enlarged three diameters.
h. Anterior side ; enlarged thiee diameters.

c. Basal view ; enlarged three diameters.

d. Upper side ; enlarged three diameters.

e. Diagram of plates.

2. Triacrinus globosus (n. sp.)

The lettering of the figures same as last.

3. Fungispongia irregularis (n. gen. et sp.)

a. Section ; enlarged three diameters.

4. Stictopora graminifolia (n. sp. )

a. Portion ; enlarged three diameters.

5. Eucalyptocrinus inconspectus (n. sp.)

6. Cornulites contractus (n. sp.)

a. A group of three individuals growing together.
6. Surface of 6 ; enlarged three diameters.

7. Cornulites nodosus (n. sp.)

a. Same individual ; enlarged three diameters.

8. lAngula hicarinata (n. sp. )

Interior of valve.

1884.J NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 151

June 3.
Mr. Edward Potts in the chair.
Fifteen persons present.

A paper, entitled " On the Mutual Relations of the Hemi-
branchiate Fishes," by Theodore Gill, was presented for publica-
tion.

Opposite Leaves in Salix nigra. — At the meeting of the Botanical
Section on June 2, Mr. Thomas Meehan remarked that few
botanists would expect to find opposite leaves in Salix; but in S.
nigra Marshall, they appear at a certain stage of growth, which
has much significance. This species is of that section which has
the flower cotetaneous with the leaves ; that is to sa3', instead of
the aments being sessile they terminate short branches. They
are, however, not absolutely terminal, but appear so by the sup-
pression for a time of the terminal bud. In the case of the female
ament this terminal bud usually starts to grow very soon after
the flowers mature, and forms a second growth, when the fertile
catkin or raceme of fruit, becomes lateral. It is the first pair of
leaves on this second growth that is opposite — all the rest are
alternate as in the normal character of the genus. The leaves are
so uniformly opposite under these circumstances, that there must
be some general law determining the condition, which has not yet
been developed.

June 10.
Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., in the chair.
Fourteen persons present.

A paper, entitled " On the Anacanthine Fishes," by Theodore
Gill, was presented for publication.

June 17.
Rev. H. C. McCooK, D. D., "Vice-President, in the chair.
Thirteen persons present.

A Spider that makes a spherical Mud-daub Cocoon. — The Rev.
Dr. H. C. McCooK said that in November, 1883, he received from
Mr. F. M. Webster, Assistant State Entomologist of Illinois, two
globular nodules of earth, about the size of a grape, which were
thought to be the cocoons of a spider. Similar balls had often
been found attached, by a slender thread or cord of silk, to the
underside of boards laid down on the ground. From some of

152 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884,

these Mr. Webster had bred a parasitic ichneumon-fly. One box,
in which mud-balls had been placed the preceding summer, was
found by him in the autumn (November) to contain such para-
sites together with a number of young spiders, all dead. The
spiders were not preserved, but the mud-balls were sent to the
S|jeaker for determination. One of these had an opening in the
side about one millimetre in diameter from which evidently an
ichneumon parasite had escaped. It contained the stiff, white
cell commonly spun by the larva of this insect. The other
resembled closely the spherical mud egg-nest of the wasp
Eumenes, there being even a small nozzle at one pole, from which,
however, unlike the mud-daub of the wasp, a slight silken cord
protruded. Dr. McCook was much puzzled to decide upon the
nature of these objects, but on the wliole believed them to be the
work of some hymenopterous insect, and not of a spider. Two
ichneumons, which emerged from similar cells, were determined
by Mr. E. T. Cresson to be Pezomachus meabilis Cresson.

Subsequently Mr. Webster sent other specimens, some of which
were opened. They contained silken sacks imbedded in the centre
of the mud-ball, apparently of spider spinning-work, and within
these were fifteen or tv/enty yellowish eggs, evidently of a spider.
This, of course, modified the speaker's view, and he set aside the
specimens, of which he had now a number, in the hope of hatching
out the contents. The disjecta membra of two adult spiders
taken near the balls, though much broken, enabled him to deter-
mine them as Drassids (Drassoidas, a family of the Tubeweavers),
and probably of the genus 3Iico,ria. Mr. Webster simply found
these near the mud-balls, but did not know that they had anj'^
connection with them. Dr. McCook moistened the cocoons in
order to give a natural condition more favorable for the escape
of the spiderlings. should they hatch, and May 30, 1884, on
opening a box, he found about thirty lively young spiders
therein. On the bottom of the box was a dead ichneumon, wliich
had cut its way out of the side of one of the balls, by a round
hole. The spiderlings seemed to have escaped from their ball
along the slight duct left at the point where the bit of silken
cord was imbedded in the hard earth, and thence protruded,
forming the cocoon-stalk by which the ball was attached to an
undersurface. • The appearance of the spiderlings indicated that
they had been hatched two or three days when first seen. They
were Drassids, evidently the same species as the broken speci-
mens above alluded to. Thus the interesting habit of concealing
her future progeny within a globular cradle of mud was demon-
strated to belong to a spider, as well, as to a wasp. That this
particular species is much subject to the attacks of hj^menopterous
parasites is already proved ; but that it is more exposed than
many other species which spin silken cocoons otherwise unpro-
tected in the very same locality, does not appear. There is no
evidence that so strange a habit has developed from necessity,

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 153

and none that it proves more protective than the ordinary
araneal cocoonery.

Mr. Webster has found these mud-cocoons throughout the
whole range of Illinois, a State of great longitudinal extent.
Two balls from Southern Illinois are larger than the others, and
composed of yellowish earth, but Dr. McCook had not yet suc-
ceeded in breeding anything from them. The balls from Central
Illinois are made out of the rich black soil common to the prairies ;
the spiderlings hatched were from this section. He had named
the species provisionally Micaria limnicunae {limnus^ mud;
curiae, a cradle), but thought it possible that Hentz may have
described the species among some one of his genus Herpyllus.
The young have pale yellow abdomens, of uniform color, and legs
and cephalothorax of a uniform livid or stone-color. The adults
(females) are of a uniform dark amber color ; the cephalothorax
glossy, leathery and smooth. The cephalic part is depressed
below the thoracic part, sloping forward and downward. The
body length is about one-fourth inch.

The only spider cocoons known to the speaker at all resem-
bling those of Limnicunae he had collected in a field at Alexandria
Bay, New York, on the St. Lawrence River, 1882. They were
attached by very loose spinning-work to the underside of stones.
But the external case instead of being mud, was a mass of agglom-
erated particles of old wood, bark, leaves, blossoms, the shells
and wings of insects, etc. These were evidently gnawed off,
gathered and placed together, and then held in position by deli-
cate and sparsely-spun filaments of silk. Two of these chip-balls
were opened, and contained whitish cocoons similar to those in
the mud-balls of Limnicunae ; another had within it the charac-
teristic cell of some hymenopterous parasite, containing a dried-
up pupa. A very thin veneering of yellow soil enclosed the
silken case, but otherwise no mud was used. He put aside three
specimens which remained, in the hope of hatching out and thus
determining the species of the maker, but nothing ever appeared,
and he had not wished to destroy such interesting specimens for
the sake of knowing the condition of the interior. But on com-
paring these specimens with those of Mr. Webster as now before
him. Dr. McCook believed that they were the work of closely
related, or perhaps even the same species.

It is quite common for spiders of various and widely separated
families to give their cocoons a protective upholstering of
scraped bark, old wood, etc., and not unusual to find species
that cover their egg-nests wholly or in part with mud. But the
speaker was not aware that an}^ species had yet been published
as making cocoons like either of the above-described forms. He
believed, therefore, that the facts were wholly new to science —
certainly they were new to the field of American Araneology.

The following were ordered to be printed : —
11

154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

ON THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF THE HEMIBRANCHIATE FISHES,
BY THEODORE GILL.

§ 1. Introductory.

In my "Arrangement of the Families of Fishes," (1872, p. 13, 14)
before I was aware of the peculiarities of the shoulder girdle, and
only knowing the characters assigned to the order by Cope, I
retained the Hemibranchii in the order Teleocephali, but in the
introductory commentary (p, xxxix) I raised the group to ordinal
rank, to which it seems entitled. Prof. Cope, however, is entitled
to the credit of having first appreciated the distinctness of the
group as a whole, although the characters assigned to it were not,
perhaps, of the highest systematic value. As now understood,
the order seems to be definable as follows : —

HEMIBRANCHII.

= Hemibranchii, Cope, Pfoc. Am. Ass. Adv. Science, v. 20, p. 338, 1872.
= Hemibranchii, Gill, Arrangement Families Fishes, p, xxxix, 1873 (Based

on shoulder girdle).
= Hemibranchii, Cope, Proc. Am. Phil, Soc, v. 13, p. 25, 1873.
= Hemibranchii, Gill, Johnson's New Universal Cyclopasdia, v. 2, p. 872,

1877 (defined).
= Hemibranchii, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 387, 1882.
Acanthopterygii, fam., auct. plur.

In the " Arrangement of the Families of Fishes " (1872, pp.
13, 14), six families were recognized for the Hemibranchs, whose
combinations and correspondence with the families of previous
authors are shown in the following abstract : —

" (H. Gasterosteiformes.)

( Gasterosteoidea. )
183. OasterosteidcB O aster osteidce, Gthr., i, 1-7,

134. Aulorhynchidm AulorhynchoidcB, Gill, P. A, N. S. Phil., 1862, 233,

(Aulostomoidea.)

135. AulostomidcB Fistulariida, Gthr., iii, 529, 535-538.

136. MstulariidcB Fistnila/riidm, Gthr., iii, 529-534.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 155

(H. Centrisciformes.)

137. Centriscidm Centriscidm, Gthr., iii, 518-524.

138. Amphisilidm Centriscidm, Gthr., iii, 518, 524-527."

In the " Introduction to the Study of Fishes " (1880, p. 50T),
Dr. Giinther has referred the Aulorhynchoid fishes to the family
Fistulariidse.

In the " Synopsis of theFishes of North America " (1 882, p. 387),
five families were recognized for American species by Messrs.
Jordan & Gilbert, and grouped as follows : —

" * Bones of head produced into a long tube, which bears the
short jaws at its end.
a. Body short, compressed, scaly ; no teeth ; spinous dorsal
present. ..... Centriscidae, 60.

aa. Body elongate ; teeth present.
6. Dorsal spines none ; a long caudal filament ; no scales.

Fistulariidae , 61
bb. Dorsal spines present, disconnected ; no caudal filament,
c. Body covered with ctenoid scales. Aulostomatidae, 62.
cc. Body scaleless, with bony shields.

Aulorhynchidae^ 63.

** Bones of head moderately produced ; ventrals 1,1; dorsal

preceded by free spines ; body scaleless, naked or mailed.

Gasterosteidae, 64."

On a recent review of the forms of the order, I am more than
ever convinced of the aptness of the classification proposed by
myself in 1872 and submit the following table and characters
which will, I think, amply justify that confidence. Far from
being able to see any close affinity between the Aulorhynchidae
and Aulostomidse, I am Unable to appreciate any very distinctive
differences from the Gasterosteidae, and the close affinity between
Aulorhynchus and Spinachia is such that I regard the family
Aulorhynchidae simply as a convenient one at the most, and as
expressing the culmination in one direction of the tendency
characteristic of the order. I should be scarcely disinclined to
dissent from any who should combine the Gasterosteidae and
Aulorhynchidae in one family.

156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

§ 2. Synopsis of Families.

I. Dermal armature absent or developed only as plates on sides or

back; vertebrae numerous (30 to 86) ; pubic bones connected
with scapular arch ; spinous dorsal represented by isolated
spines.

1. Vertebrae anteriorly little enlarged ; ventrals subthoracic,

with enlarged spines {G aster osteoidea).

a. Branchiostegal rays three ; ventrals with one ray each ;

snout conic or but slightly tubiform. Gasterosteidse.

b. Branchiostegal rays four ; ventrals with four rays each ;

snout tubiform. .... Aulorhynchidae.

2. Vertebrae anteriorly (first four) elongate ; ventrals sub-

abdominal or near middle, without spines, but with 6 (or 5)
rays (Aulostomoidea).

c. Dorsal spines developed, weak ; body compressed, moder-

ately long, with ctenoid scales. . . Aulostomidse.

d. Dorsal spines undeveloped ; body depressed or sub-

cylindrical, very long, without scales (caudal with the
two middle rays produced into a long filament).

Fistulariidae.

II. Dermal armature superficial, developed anteriorly and espe-

cially about the back; four anterior vertebrae much elongate ;
tail with its axis continuous with that of the abdomen ;
branchihj^als and pharyngeals mostly present (fourth
superior branchihyal and first and fourth superior pharyn-
geals only wanting) ; pubic bones not connected with the
scapular arch; a spinous dorsal fin developed (Macrorham-
phosoidea). . . . . , Macrorhamphosidae.

III. Dermal armature connate with the internal skeleton, and

developed as (1) a dorsal cuirass in connection with the
neuropophyses and (2) lateral shields connected with the
ribs ; vertebrae reduced ; six or more anterior vertebrae
extremely elongate, with normal articulations of centra ;
tail with its axis deflected from that of the abdomen by
encroachment of a dorsal cuirass over the dorsal fin ;
branchial system feebly developed (fourth superior bran-
chihyal and all the superior pharyngeals wanting) ; pubic
bones not connected with the scapular arch ; a spinous
dorsal feebly developed under the posterior projection of
the dorsal buckler. (Amphisiloidea) . . Amphisilidee.

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 157

§ 3. Diagnoses of Groups.

GASTEROSTEID^.

Synonyms as families.

< Atractosomes, Dumeril, Zool. Anal., 14e fam., p. 124, 1806.

■< Acanti, Jlafinesque, Indice d'lttiolog. Siciliana, 15. oid., p. 18, 1810.
■< Atractomia ( Garanxia), Rafinesque, Analyse de la Nature, 8e fam., p.
— , 1815.

< Scomberoides, Cuvier, Regne Animal [1. ed.], t. 2, p. 311 (319), 1817.

< Percoides? Latreille, Fam. Nat. du Regne Animal, p. 135, 1825.

< Centronotides, Risso, Hist. Nat. de I'Europe Merid., t. 3, p. 426, 1826.

< Zeid'P, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc. v. 2, p. 241, 1839.
<^ Tnglidm {Qasterosteini), Bonaparte, Giorn. Accad. di Scienze, v. 52

(Saggio Distrib. Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 32),

1832.
= Qasterosteida, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 133, 1838;

t. 4, p. 275, 1840.
= Gasterosieidce, Girard, Expl. and Surv. for R. R. Route to Pacific Oc,

V. 10, Fishes, p. 84, 1858.
=: Gasterosteoidei, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Pise. Archip. Ind., p. xxiii, 1859.
= Gasterosteidm, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 1, p. 1, 1859.
= Gasterosteoida', Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. A., p. 39, 1861.
=r Gasterosteidce, Cope, Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., v. 20, p. 338, 1872.
= Gasierostei, Fitzinger, Sitzungsber. K. Akad. der Wissensch, (Wien),

B. 67, 1. Abth., p. 34, 1873.
= Gasterosteidce, Giinther, Int. to Study of Fishes, p. 504, 1880.
= GasterosteidiF, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., pp. 387, 393, 1833.
Percoides [?], Latreille, 1825.
Triglidnp, Subf. Gasterosteini, Bonaparte, 1832.

Hemibranchs with the anterior vertebrae little enlarged, a more
or less fusiform body, conic or moderately produced snout, sides
naked, or with a row of bony shields, and ventrals subthoraclc,
each with a large spine, and one or two rays.

Apeltinse.

Gasterosteids with post-thoracic ventrals, pubic bones widely
separated behind and extending on the sides, a moderately
projecting snout, and a moderate caudal peduncle.

APELTES.

= Apeltes (Brevoort), Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. A., p. 39, 1861 ; Canad.

Nat., n. s., V. 2, p. 8.
= Apeltes, Jordan, Man. Vertebrates Northern U. S., p. 249, 1876.

< Gasterosteus, Sauvage, Nouv. Arch. Mus. d'Hist. Nat. Paris, t. 10, pp.

7, 29, 1874. (Subgenus).

158 PEOCEEDINQS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Apeltines with the branchial apertures restricted and three free
dorsal spines.

Type, A quadracus = Gasterosteus quadracus Mitch.

Gasterosteinse.

Synonyms as subfamilies.

< Q aster osteini, Bonaparte, Giom. Accad. di Scienze, v. 52 (Saggio Dis-

trib. Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 32), 1832 ; Nuovi
Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 133, 1838 ; t. 4, p. 275, 1840.

< Gasterosteinm, Gill, Cat, Fishes E. Coast N. A., p. 39, 1861 ; Canad.

Nat., n. s., V. 2, p. 8, 1865.

Gasterosteids with post-thoracic ventrals, pubic bones con-
nected and constituting a triangular median plate, a moderately
projecting snout, and a moderate caudal peduncle.

EUCALIA. Jordan.
^Eucalia, Jordan, Man. Vertebrates Northern U. S., p. 248, 1876.
Gasterosteus sp., Kirtland, Agassiz, et al.

Gasterosteines with the branchial apertures confluent, and four
or five non-divergent and equally reclinable free dorsal spines.
Type, E. inconstans = Gasterosteus inconstans Kirtland.

PYGOSTEUS.

<C Leiurus, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 175, 242

(subgenus).
= Pygosteus (Brevoort), Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. A., p. 39, 1861 ;

Canad. Nat., n. s., v. 2, p. 8.
= Pygosteus, Jordan, Man. Vertebrates Northern U. S., p. 249, 1876.
=: Gasterostea, Sauvage, Nouv. Arch. Mus. d'Hist. Nat. Paris, t. 10, pp.

7, 29, 1874. (Subgenus).
Gasterosteus sp., Artedi, Linnaeus, Lacepede, Cuvier, Fleming, Cuv. &

Val., Girard, Giinther, etc.
Gasteracanthus sp., Pallas.

Gasterosteines with the branchial apertures confluent (the
branchiostegal membrane having a free inferior margin), and
seven to eleven generally divergent spines.

Type, P. pungitius = Gasterosteus pungitius L.

GASTEROSTEUS.

< Gasterosteus, Artedi, Genera Piscium, p. 52, 1738.

< Gasterosteus, Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., ed. x, t. 1, p, 295, 1758.
<; Gasterosteus, Lacepede, Hist, des Poissons, t. 3, p. — , 1802.

<; Gasteracanthus, Pallas, Zoographia Ross- o- Asia tica, t. 3, p. 228 (1811),
1831,

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 159

<C Gasterosteus, Cuvier, Regne Animal, Ire 6d., t. 2, p. 300, 1817.
(Subgenus).

< Gasterosteus, Fleming, Hist. Brit. Animals, p. 219, 1828.

<^ Gasterosteus, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 4, p.

479, 1829. -
X Gasterosteus, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 175,

242, 1839.
X Leiurus, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 175, 242.

(Subgenus).
<; Gasterosteus, Girard, Expl. and Surv. for R. R. Route to Pacific Oc, v.

10, Fishes, p. 85, 185 S.

< Gasterosteus, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 1, p. 2, 1859.

= Gasterosteus, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. A., p. 39, 1861 ; Canad. Nat.,

n. s., V. 2, p. 8, 1865.
<^ Gasterosteus, Sauvage, Nouv. Arch. Mus. d'Hist, Nat. Paris, t. 10, pp.

7, 9, 1874. (Subgenus.)
= Gasterosteus, Jordan, Man. Vertebrates Northern U. S., p, 248, 1876.

Gasterosteines with the branchial apertures restricted (the
branehiostegal membrane being attached below), and two free
divergent spines.

Type, G. aculeatus L.

Spinachiinse.
Synonymy.
SpinacManm, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., v. 14, p. 233, 1862.
SpinachiincB, Gill, Johnson's New Universal Cycl., v. 4, p. 558 (under
"Stickle-back"), 1878.

Gasterosteids with a very projecting subtubiform snout, sub-
abdominal ventrals, and elongated caudal peduncle.

SPINACHIA.

= Les Gastres (Spinachia), Cuvier, Regne Animal, t. 2, p. 320, 1817.

= Spinachia, Fleming, Hist. Brit. Animals, p. 219, 1828.

=^ Polycanthus, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 175,

242.
^ Gastrma, Sauvage, Nouv. Arch, Mus. d'Hist. Nat. Paris, t. 10, pp. 7,

29, 1874. (Subgenus).
Gasterosteus sp., Linn., et al,

Spinachiines of unique type.

Type, S. vulgaris = Gasterosteus spinachia Linn.

AULORHYNCHIDiE3.

Synonyms as family names.
= Aulorhynehoidce, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 14], p. 233, 1862.
= AulorhynchidcB, Gill, Arrangement Families Fishes, p. 14, 1872.

160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

= Aulorhynchidm, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes, N. Am., pp. 387, 391,

1883.
MstulariidcB, gen., Giinther.

Synonym as subfamily name.
= AulorhyncUnm, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Phila. [v. 13], p. 169, 1861,

Hemibranclis with the anterior vertebrae little enlarged, an
elongated . subcylindrical body, elongated tubiform snout ; sides
with a row of bony shields, and ventrals subthoracic, with a
spine and four rays each.

AULORHYNCHTIS.

= Aulorhynchus, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. So. Phila. [v. 13], p. 169, 1861.
= Auliscops, Peters, Monatsber. K. Preuss. Akad. Wiss., 1866, p. 510,
1866.

Aulorhynchids with a smooth-skinned crown and tube, lateral
plates unarmed and hidden in the skin, dorsal spines (25-26)
moderately short, and naked back.

Type, A. flavidus Gill.

AULICHTHYS.

— AuUchthys (Brevoort), Gill, Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 14], p. 234,

1863.
Aulorhynchus sp., Steindachner,

Aulorhynchids with a corrugated crown and rostral tube, lateral
plates each armed with a longitudinal posteriorly spinous ridge,
dorsal spines (about 25) very short and transversely triangular,
and reclining in grooves, behind each of which is a small plate.

Tj^pe, A. Japonicus (Brev.) Gill,

AULOSTOMID-ffil.

Synonymy.
<^ Aulostomides, Latreille, Fam. Nat. du Regne Animal, p. 129, 1825.
<^ AulostomatidcB, Cantor, Cat. Malayan Fishes, p. 211, 1850.
= Aulostomatoidei, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archip. Ind., p. xxiii,

1859.
< Aulosiomatoids, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 13], p. 168, 1861.
= AulostomidcB, Gill. Arrangement Families Fishes, p. 14, 1872.
<; Aulostomateidce, Cantor, Day, Fi.shes of India, v. 1, p. 360, 1878.
= AulostomatidcB, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., pp. 387, 390,

1883.
Bouches en flute, gen., Cuvier.
MstularidcB, gen., Giinther, et al.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161

Hemibranchs with the first four vertebrae elongated, the form
elongated compressed, with an elongated tubiform mouth ; the
body covered with cycloid scales, with subabdominal ventrals
composed of six rays but without spines, and with a series of
dorsal spines.

AULOSTOMA.

= Aulostoma, Lacepede, Hist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 5, p. 357, 1803.

< Polppterichthys, Bleeker, Natuurk. Tijdschr. Nederlandsch Indie, v. 4,

p. 608.
Fistularia sp., Linn.
Solenostomus sp., Gronow.

Aulostomids with a much compressed bod}', rudimentary teeth,
8-12 dorsal spines, opposite oblong dorsal and anal (with 23-28
rays each), and a cuneiform caudal.

Type, A. chinensis = Fistularia chinensis Linn.

PISTULARIID^,

Synonyms as family names.

< Siphonostomes, Dumeril, Zool. Anal., 23e fam., p. 138, 1806.
CentriscMni? Rafinesque, Indice d'lttiologia Siciliana, p. 34, 1810.

< Siphostomia (Aulostomia), Rafinesque, Aualyse de la Nature, 20e fam.,

p. — , 1815.

< Bouchea en flute, Cuvier, Regne Animal [Ire ed.], t. 2, p. 348, 1817; 2e

ed., t. 2, p. 267, 1829.

< Aulostomides, Latreille, Fam. Nat. du Regne Animal, p. 129, 1825.

< Centrisecides, Risso, Hist. Nat. de I'Europe Merid., t. 3, p. 47(5, 1826.

< Fistularidm, Bonaparte, Giom. Accad. di Scienze, v. 52 (Saggio Distrib.

Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 35), 1832; Isis, 1833,
col. 1200.

< Scomberidce (FistularincB), Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc.,

V. 2, pp. 175, 240, 1839.

< Fistularidm, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 132, 1838 ;

t. 4, p. 190, 1840.

< Fistularioidei^ Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel. Indico, fam. 133,

p. xxvi, 1859.

< FistulariidoB, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 3, p. 529, 1861.

< Fistulariidw, Cope, Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sc, v. 20, p. 339, 1872.

= Fistulariidm, Gill, Arrangement Families Fishes, p. 14, 1872. (Named
only.)

< Fistularia, Fitzingcr, Sitzungsber. K. Akad. der Wissensch. (Wien),

B. 67, 1. Abth., p. 35, 1873.

< Fistulariidm, Giinther, Int. to Study of Fishes, p. 507, 1880.

— Fistulariidm, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., pp. 387, 388, 1882.

162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Synonyms as subfamily names.
<^ Fistularini, Bonaparte, Giorii. Accad. di Scienze, v. 53 (Saggio Distrib.

Metod. Animal Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 35), 1833 ; Isis, 1833,

col. 1200.
<; Fistularini, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annale delle Sc. Nat., t. 2, p. 133, 1838 ;

t. 4, p. 190, 1840.
= Mstularinm, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 3, pp. 175,

240, 1839.

Hemibranchs with the first four vertebrae very long; a very
elongated and somewhat depressed body ; a long tubiform
snout ; without scales, with the ventrals near the middle, and
having five or six ra3'^s each, but no spines, and without dorsal
spines (the two middle rays of the caudal produced and united
into a long filament).

FISTaLAEIA.
<; Solenostomus, Klein.

< Fistularia, Linn., Syst. Nat., 10. ed., v. 1.

= Fistularia, Lac, Hst. Nat. des Poissons, t. 5, p. 349.
:= Channorhynehus, Cantor, Cat. Malayan Fish., p. 311. (Proposed on
account of preoccupation of Fistularia by Donati.)

Fistulariids of unique genus.
Type, F. tabaccaria Linn.

MACRORHAMPHOSIDJE.

Synonyms as family names.
<C Aphyostomes, Dumeril, Zool. Anal., 5. fam., p. 108, 1806.
^ Centrischini, Rafinesque, Indice d'lttiologia Siciliana, p. 34 (33. ord.^),
1810.

< Siphostomia (Aulostomia), Rafinesque, Analyse de la Nature, 30. fam.,

p. — , 1815.

< Bouches en flute, Cuvier, Regne Animal, t. 2, p. 348, 1817.

< Aulostomides, Latre'lle, Fam. Nat. du Regne Animal, p. 139, 1835.

< Centriscides, Rsso, Hist. Nat. de I'Europe Merid., t. 3, p. 476, 1836.

< Fistularidce (Cei'tiiscini), Bonaparte, Giom. Accad. di Scienze, v. 53

(Saggio. Distrib. Metod. Animal. Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 35),
1833 ; Isis, 1833, col. 1200.

< Fistularidm, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sc. Nat., t. 3, p. 133, 1838 ;

t. 4, p. 190, 1840.

< Fistularidce, Bonaparte, Cat. Metod. dei Pesci Europei, pp. 7, 70, 1846.
= Centriscoidei, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. PisciUm Archipel. Indico, p. xxiii,

1859.

< CentriicidcB, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 3, p. 518, 1861.

Macroramphosus is included in the 35. ord. Siluridi (p. 35.)

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163

= Centriscidm, Gill, Arrangement Fam. Fishes, p. 25, 1873.

< Centrisci, Fitznger, Sitzungsber. K. Akad. der Wissensch. (Wien), B,

67, 1. Abth.. p. 35, 1873,
= Centriscidoe, Joidan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. A., p. 387, 1882.

Subfamily synonyms.

<l Centriscini, Bonaparte, Giorn. Accad. di Scienze, v. 53 (Saggio Distrib.

Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 35), 1833 ; Isis, 1833,

p. 1200.
<^ Centriscini, Bonaparte, 1850.
= CentriscincB, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc, Phila., 1862, p. 234, 1862,

< Orthichthyinm, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila,, 1863, p. 334, 1862,

Heroibranchs with the four anterior vertebrae much lengthened;
bony plates anteriorly and especialh^ about the back ; an elongated
tubiform mouth ; abdominal ventrals with a spine and several
rays ; a small distinct spinous dorsal about the middle of the
body ; with the branchihyals and pharangeals mostly present, the
fourth superior branchihyal, and first and fourth superior pharyn-
geals only wanting.

MACKORHAMPHOSUS.

= Macrorhamphosus, Lacepede, Hist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 5, p. 136,

= Ceniriscus, Cuvier, Regne Animal, 1. ed., t. 3, p. 350, 1817.

> Orthichthys, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, p. 234, 1863.

Macrorhamphosids with an oblong body, graduating into the
caudal peduncle, straight back, and about seven dorsal spines.

Type, M. scolopax = Gentriscus scolopax Linn., 1766.

As Messrs. Jordan & Gilbert have recently shown (Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., V. 5, p. 575, 1883), the only species referred by Linnaeus
at first to the genus Gentriscus, was the G. scutatus (afterwards
taken as the type of Amphisile) , a.nd consequently Gentriscus can-
not be properly used as the designation of the present genus. The
name Macrorhamphosus, being the first applicable, although
imposed by mistake, may be used for it. It is unfortunate that
the change should have to be made, and, although fully con-
versant with the status years ago, I hesitated to propose it.
Nevertheless with such excellent authorities as Messrs. Jordan
& Gilbert to recognize its necessity, I no longer refuse to
accede to the change.

CENTBISCOfS.

= Centriscops, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat, Sci. Phila. 1862, p, 234, 1862.
Centrisctis sp., Richardson, et al.

164 PROCEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Macrorhamphosids with a deep body, abruptly contracted
caudal peduncle, an excurrent peaked back, and about four to five
dorsal spines.

Type, G. humerosus = Centriscus humerosus Richardson.

AMPHISILID^.

Family Synonyms.

= AmpMsiloidei, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Arcliip. Ind., p, xvi, 1859 ;

Atlas Ich. des Indes Neerland., t. 5, p. xv, 1865.
:= AmphisiUdcB, Cope, Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., v, 20, p. 338, 1873.
= AmphisilidcB, Gill, Arrangement Families Fishes, p. 25, 1872.

Subfamily Synonym.
= AmpMsilinm, Gill, Proc. Acad, Nat. Sci, Phila, (v. 14). p. 284, 1862.

< CentriscidcB, pt., Giinther, 1861,

< Oentrisci, pt., Fitzinger, 1873.

Hemibranchs with six or more anterior vertebrae extremely
elongated, the caudal much abbreviated, paired selliform dorsal
plates connected with the neuropophyses of the dorsal vertebrae,
and lateral ones developed in connection with the ribs, an elon-
gated tubiform mouth, abdominal ventrals, two dorsals, and with
the entire caudal portion of the body deflected downwards by the
encroachment of the dorsal cuirass over the dorsal fins ; and with
the " fourth supra-branchihyal, and all the superior pharyngeals
wanting " (Cope).

CENTRISCTIS.

=^ Centriscus, Linn., Syst. Nat., 10, ed., v. 1.

< Centriscus, Linn., Syst. Nat., 12. ed., v. 1.

< Amphisile (Klein), Cuvier, Regne Animal, t. 2, p. 350, 1817.

= Acentrachme, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Phila. (v. 14), p. 234, 1862.
= Amphisile, s, g, Acentrachme, Liitken, Vid. JVIedd. Naturhist. Foren,
Kjobenhavn, 1865, p. 215, 1866.

Amphisilids without a movable spine connected with the pos-
terior process of the dorsal cuirass.
Type, G. scutatus.

AMPHISILE.

< Amphisile, Klein, Hist. Piscium Nat. promov. Miss., p. 28, 1744 (not

binomial),

< Amphisile, Cuvier, Regne Animal, t. 2. p. 350, 1817.

= Amp7dsile, Gill, Proc, Acad. Nat, Sci, Phila. (v, 14), p, 234, 1862,
=^ Amphisile. s. g. Amphisile, Liitken, Vid. Mcdd. Naturhist. Ftireu. Kjo-
benhavn, 1865, p. 215, 1866.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 165

AmpWsilids with a spine at the posterior process of the dorsal
cuirass.

Type, A. strigata = Amphisile sp., Klein.

§ 4. Extinct Families.

In addition to these types, all represented in the existing
faunas, there are two fishes no longer living, which cannot be
referred to any of the families as now restricted, but appear to be
types of peculiar ones. They are the Urosphen fistularis and Bham-
phosus aculeatus of Agassiz ; both have been found in the cele-
brated fish-beds of Mount Bolca. These have been referred to the
family Fistulariidae by Dr. Giinther, but one of them is more nearly
related to the Macrorhamphosidee and Gasterosteidae. They are
imperfectly known, but appear to be distinguishable as family
t3'pes by the following characters, which will doubtless be sup-
plemented by others when well-preserved specimens or character-
istic parts shall be critically examined.

UROSPHENIDiE.

Hemibranchs with the first four vertebrae much elongate, a
moderately elongated body, a long tubiform mouth (ventrals
abdominal? dorsal unknown), and a very large cuneiform caudal.

RHAMPHOSID^.

Hemibranchs with the anterior vertebra normal (not elongated)
and separate, about 22 (8 abdominal and 14 caudal) vertebrae
in all, plates on the nape and shoulders only, with a tubiform
mouth, subthoracic ventrals, a dorsal spine behind the nuchal
armature, and the second dorsal and anal far behind and opposite.

§ 5. The Pegasidse.
Finallj', there is a family which has been shifted from place to
place in the system, and which has been referred by Prof. Cope
to the order Hemibranchii. Its type was regarded as a chon-
dropterygian by Linnaeus and the elders, as a syngnathoid fish
by Cuvier ; first isolated in a family by Latreille ; received the
family name Pegasidae from H. Adams in 1854 ; was pronounced
to be related to the Agonidae by Steenstrup in 1866 ; placed next
to them by Giinther (Int., p. 482, 1880), and relegated to the
Hemibranchii by Cope. It has also been regarded as the repre-
sentative of a peculiar order (" ordo 12. Pegasi "), of the " sub-

166 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

legio " Lophobranchii by Bleeker, and as a suborder (Hyposto-
mides) of the order Lophobranchii by A. Dumeril. Having no
skeleton to examine, I retain it in the present order solely on the
authority of Prof. Cope, and with some doubt as to its right
herein.

PEGASIDJE.

Family SynonymSi
<C Spherionidi? Rafinesque, Indice d'lttiolog. Siciliana, p. 40, 1810.

< Pomanchia, Rafinesque, Analyse de la Nature, 25. fam., 1815.

= Bypostomides, Latie He, Fam. Nat. du Regne Animal, p. 117, 1825.

<^ SyngnathidcB, Bonaparte, Giorn. Accad. di Scienze, v. 52 (Saggio Distrib.

Metod, Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 39), 1832 ; Isis, 1833,

c. 97, 119.

< Syngnathidm, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 195,

831, 1839,

< Syngnathidce, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 130, 1838 ;

t. 4, p. 185, 1840.
<[ Sippocampidce, Nardo, Atti Congressi Scienz. Ital. rac. et ord., v. 1, p.

70 (1842), 1845.
= PegasidcB, Kaup, Archiv fur Naturg., 19. Jahrg., B. 1, p^ 227, 1853 ; also

Cat. Lophobr. Fishes Brit. Mus., p. 3, 1856.
= PegasidcB, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 94, 1854.

= Pegasoidei, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel. Indico, p. xv, 1859.
— Pegasidoe, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 8, p. 146, 1870.
= Pegasidce, Cope, Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., v. 20, p. 339, 1872.
= Pegasi, Fitzinger, Sitzungsber. K. Akad. der Wissensch. (Wien), B. 67,

1. Abth., p. 49, 1873.
= PegasidcB, Cope, Proc. Am. Phil. Soc, v. 13, p» 25, 1873.

Subfamily Synonyms.
= Pegasini, Bonaparte, Giom. Accad. di Scienze, v. 52 (Saggio Distrib.

Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 39), 1832.
= Pegasini, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, x, p. 130, 1838 ;

t. 4, p. 186, 1840.
= Pegasini, Nardo, Atti Congressi Scienz. Ital. rac. et ord., v. 1, p. 70

(1842), 1844.
= Pegasini, Bonaparte, Catal. Metod. Pesci Europe!, pp. 9, 89, 1846.*

Hemibranchs? with the snout projecting and the mouth
inferior.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OE PHILADELPmA. 167

ON THE ANACANTHINE FISHES.
BY THEODORE GILL.

Under the name Anacanthini have been grouped those Teleost
fishes which have " vertical and ventral fins without spinous
rays; the ventral fins, if present, are jugular or thoracic; air-
bladder, if present, without pneumatic duct " (Giinther, Int. to
Study of Fishes, p. 537, 1880). These characters are not re-
inforced by any others, but nevertheless the fishes so character-
ized have been segregated by most ichthyologists into an "order."
The propriety of such valuation was disputed by the present
writer in 1861 (Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. Am., p. 7 ), and the group
degraded to the rank of a suborder, and subsequently (Proc.
Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1863, p. 255), the genus Zoarces was trans-
ferred to it and associated with the Lycodinse and Gymnelinae in
the same family. The American ichth3-ologists have generally
acceded to the propriety of this degradation of the Anacanthini
to subordinal rank. Most have also conceded the propriety of
the association of Zoarces with the forms indicated, as has also
Prof. Collett of Norway (Den Norske Nordhavs Expedition
1876-1878; Ficke, p. 78-79, 1880), although Prof. Cope has still
retained Zoarces among the Blenniidae. The subordinate rank
of the Anacanthini appears indeed to be too evident to need
further emphasis in this place, and its value as a suborder, or
even as a natural and homogeneous group,may be justly questionad
and denied. Nevertheless, for the sake of convenience at least,
the collection ma}'^ be provisionally (and only provisionally) pre-
served. The group under various names has been adopted by
European authors, and the following are synonyms, exclusive of
those pertaining to the Heterosomatous types.

JUGULARES OR ANACANTHINI.

Synonymy.

X [Holobranches'\ Jngulaires, Bumeril, Zoologie Analytique, p. Ill, 1806.
X [Solobranches] Apodes, Dumeril, Zoologie Analytique, p. 117, 1806.
X Chorizopia, Rafine:-que, Analyse de la Nature, p. — , 1815. (Suborder.)
X [.Tetr apodes] Jugulaires, De Blainville, Journal de Physique, t. 83, p.

255, 1816. (Suborder.)
X [Apodes] De Blainville, Journal de Physique, t. 83, p. 255, 1816.

168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884,

X iMalacoptery glens'] Subbranchiens, Cuvier, Regne Animal, Ire ed., t. 2,

p. 211, 1817. (Tribe.)
X Jugulaires Malacopterygiens, Risso, Hist. Nat. de I'Europe, t. 3, p. 214,

1827. (Tribe.)
X Apodes, Risso, Hist. Nat. de I'Europe, t. 3, p. 189, 1827. (Order.)
X Lotes, Oken, Lehrbuch der Naturgeschichte, 1816.
X Malacopterygii, Bonaparte, Giom. Accad. di Sci., v. 52 (Saggio Distrib.

Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 36), 1832 ; Isis, 1833,

col. 1202.
X SubbracJiiani {Sternopygii). Bonaparte, Giorn. Accad. di Scienze, v. 52,

(Saggio Distrib. Method. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 37),

1832 ; Isis, 1833, col. 1202.

< Malacopteryges, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp.

167,197,1839. (As order.)

< Anacanthini, Miiller, Abhand, K. Akad. Wissensch. Berlin, 1844, p. 199,

1846. (As order. )

< Oadi, Bonaparte, Catalogo Metodico del Pesci Europei, pp. 5, 22, 1846,

(As order. )

< Physodysti, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. Am., p. 7, 1861. (As suborder

of Teleocephali) .

< Anacanthini, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 4, p. 317, 1862. (As

order. )

<; Anacanthini, Hackel, Generelle Morphologic der Organismen, B. 2, p.
cxxvii, 1866, (As suborder. )

= Anacanthini, Gill, Arrangement Families Fishes, p. 31, 1872. (As sub-
order of Teleocephali. )

> Anacanthini, Cope, Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Science, v. 20, p. 341, 1872.

> Scyphohranchii, Cope, Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Science, v. 20, p. 341,

1872.
^ Anacanthini or Jugulares, Jordan «fc Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p,
783, 1882, (As group or suborder,)

Two open questions affect the constituency of the group.

Prof, Cope, in his memorable "Observations on the systematic
relations of the Fishes", defined the group, which he referred to
his " order " Percamorphi, in the following terms : —

1, "Anacanthini. Basis cranii simple, no tube; post-temporal
bifurcate ; scapular foramen between scapula and coracoid ;
superior pharyngeals three, horizontal, third little larger; dorsal
fin rays flexible, jointed. Includes the families Gadidse and
Macruridae^ both with isocercal caudal vertebrae,"

This definition is quite applicable to the typical Gadidae and
Macruridae, but there are several forms which have generally
been associated with them (and which have even been usually
considered to be more nearly allied to the Gadidse than are the

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169

Macruridae) which do not exhibit the combination of characters
signalized. Such fishes have been designated as the families
Brotulidae, Ophidiidse, Fierasferidae, and Congrogadidee. These
have the characters assigned by Prof Cope to his Scyphobranchii,
at least as much as the genus Zoarces (referred to that group as
a genus of Blenniidae), but none of the genera are mentioned
under either title. Probably Prof. Cope had no skeletons of any
of the families in question. We are therefore left in doubt (1)
whether he would associate them with the Gadidse and Macruridae
and modify the characters of the including group Anacanthini,or
(2) whether he would refer them to the Scyphobranchii, next to
Zoarces and the Blenniidse generally.

Messrs. Jordan & Gilbert, in their excellent " Synopsis of the
Fishes of North America," incidentally (p. 783, in a foot-note)
refer to the "Anacanthini or Jugulares " as a " group or suborder"
of Acanthopteri, and conclude the " order Acanthopteri " with
the series of families generally combined under the former name.
After having first admitted the family Brotulidse (p. 79), they
finally referred its constituents to the family Gadidse (p. 794),
admitting, however, the families Gongrogadidde (p. 790), Fieras-
feridse (p. 791), Ophidiidse (p. 792), and Macruridae (p. 810).
The question now arises whether the last thought of the eminent
ichthyologists is an advance on their first thought.

A preliminary investigation into the structure of the Jugular
or Anacanthine fishes, leads us to different conclusions from those
enunciated by the several great authorities, whose views we have
mentioned. That lamentable inattention to anatomy, and poverty
of the museums in anatomical preparations and skeletons, which
is the opprobrium of the institutions of this country, has pre-
vented anything like an exhaustive examination, and will forbid
the rapid progress here of scientific ichthyology till the want is
supplied. My own small private collection, supplemented by the
data published by others, has alone rendered even the present
outline of the system of the Anacanthini possible. The details
will therefore have to be filled in when science shall have estab-
lished itself more thoroughly here, or when a citizen of a more
fortunate land shall take up the subject. Enough is now known,
however, to almost assure us that the present outline cannot be
far out of the way.

13

no PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Thanks to the kindness of my venerable friend, Prof. Poey, of
Havana, I obtained, many years ago, the cranium of the West
Indian Brotula (B. harhata) and briefly indicated the most salient
characteristics of the type in a foot-note to an article " Qn the
Affinities of several doubtful British Fishes " (Proc. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Phila., 1864, p. 200). The note, published in this rather
irregular manner, has doubtless escaped the attention of Messrs.
Cope, Jordan and Gilbert, for otherwise they would certainly have
recognized the validity of the family Brotuliidse. The type in
question, indeed, has but little affinity with the Gadidae, and it
gives me a pleasure, the greater because it is so rare, to find my-
self in accord with Dr. Giinther in combining it rather with the
Ophidiina, Fierasferina and Congrogadina, in contradistinction to
the Gadidae. I must, however, entirely dissent from that gentle-
man in considering the combination as of simply family value, in
associating with them the Ammodytina, and also as to the suf-
ficiency of the diagnosis.

The several groups are distinguishable as follows : —

SUPERFAMILY GADOIDEA.

Synonymy.

> Oadoidea, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. Am., p. 7. 1873. (Named only.)

> Macruroidea, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. CoastN. Am., p. 7, 1873. (Named only.)

Jugulares with the orbito-rostral portion of the cranium longer
than the posterior portion, the cranial cavity widely open in front ;
the supraoccipital well developed, horizontal and cariniform
behind, with the exoccipitals contracted forwards and overhung
by the supraoccipital, the exoccipital condyles distant and feebly
developed, with the hypercoracoid entire, the hypocoracoid
with its inferior process convergent towards the proscapula, and
the fenestra between the hypercoracoid and hypocoracoid.

GADIDJE.

Family Synonyms.

< Jugulaires on Auchenopteres, Dumeril, Zoologie Analytique, p. 118, 1806.

< Qadinia, Rafinesque, Analyse de la Nature, p. — , 3e fam., 1815.

< Metrotomes, De Blainville, Journal de Physique, t. 83, p. 255, 1816.
X Gadini, Rafinesque, Indice d'lttiolog. Siciliana, p. 11, 1810.

< Gadoides, Risso, Hist. Nat. de I'Europe Merid., t. 3, pp. 104, 214, 1826.

< Gadoides, Cuvier, Regne Animal, Ire ed,, 2, p. 211, 1817 ; 2e 6d., t. 2, p.

330, 1829.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. HI

< Oadites, Latreille, Fam. Nat. du Regne Animal, p. 125, 1825.

< Gadites, Stark, Elements of Nat. Hist., v. 1, p. 423, 1828.

< Oadites, McMurtrie, Cuv. Animal Kingdom, v. 2, p. 243, 1831.

<^ OadidcB, Bonaparte, Gioin. Acead. di Scienze, v. 52 (Saggio Distrib.
Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 37), 1833.

< Oadoidem, Rich, Fauna B., Americana, v. 3, p. 241, 1836.

< Oadidm, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 188, 299,

1839.

< GadidcB, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 132, 1838 ; t.

4, p. 194, 1840.

> BrosmiidcB, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 104, 1854.

> Phycidm, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 104, 1854.
X MerluciidcB, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 104, 1854.

> Gadidce, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 104, 1854.

< GadtdcB, Kaup, Archiv. fiir Naturgeschichte, Jahr. 1858, B. 1, p. 86, 1858.

< Gadidce, Girard, Expl. and Surv. for R. R. Route to Pac. Oc, v. 10,

Fishes, p. 140, 1858.
X Gadoidei, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel. Indico, p. xxvi, 1859.

< Gadidce, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 4, p. 326, 1862.

< Gadidce, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phlla., v. 15, p. 247, 1863.

< Gadidce, Cope, Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., v. 20, p. 341, 1872.
= Gadidce, Gill, Arrangement Families of Fishes, p. 3, 1872.

< Gadi, Fitzinger, Sitzungsber. K. Akad. der Wissensch. (Wien), B. 67, 1.

Abth., p. 43. 1873.

< Gadidce, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 400, 794, 1882.

Subfamily Synonyms.

X Merluccia, Rafinesque, Analyse de la Nature, p. — , Ire S. fam., 1815.

< Gadini, Bonaparte, Giom. Accad. di Scienze, v. 52 (Saggio Distrib.

Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 37), 1832.

> Gadince, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 188, 299,

1839.
X Merluccince, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 188,
800, 1839.

> Phycince, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 188, 301,

1839.
X Brosminm, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 188,

301, 1839.
X Gadini, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 1832, 138; t. 4.

p. 194, 1840.

> Lotini, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 132, 1838 ; t. 4.

p. 194, 1840.

< GadincB, Kaup, Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, Jahrg. 1858, B. 1, p. 86,

1858.
X Oadiformes, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel. Indico, p. xxvi, 1859.

> Gadince, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., v. 15, pp. 229, 243, 248, 1863.

> LotincB, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., v. 15, p. 230, 1863.

112 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

> PhycincB, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., v. 15, p. 230, 1863.

> CiliatincB, Gill, Proc. Aead. Nat. Sci. Phila., v. 15, p. 230, 1863.

> Brosmince, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliila., v. 15, p. 230, 1863.
= Gadince, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 794, 1883.

Gadoidea with a moderate caudal region coniform behind, and
with the caudal rays procurrent above and below ; submedian
anus, moderate suborbital bones, terminal mouth, jugular ven-
trals, dorsal furniture commencing nearly above the pectoral
region, variously developed, and anal confined mostly to the
posterior half of the length.

This group is, perhaps, still a composite one, and all the forms
retained in it, otherwise called Gadinae by Messrs. Jordan & Gil-
bert, do not have the " frontal bone single, normal." The Gadiiiae,
Phycinse and Brosminse (Gill, op. cit.) are thus characterized, and
are typical constituents, but the Lotinae, and apparently Ciliatinse
or Oninse, have doubled or paired frontals. Unfortunately the
only skeletons of these types accessible to me are articulated, and
cannot be critically examined. It seems probable, however, that
they may be segregated in a peculiar family.

MERLUCIID^.

Family Synonyms.

<^ Merluciidce, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 104, 1864.

= Merludida,, Gill, Arrangement Families of Fishes, p. 3, 1872.

Jugulaires, gen., Dumeril.

Oadinia, gen., Rafinesque.

Metrosomes, gen., Blainville.

Qadoides, gen., Risso.

Gadidcp, gen., Bon., Swains., Adams, Giinther, Girard.

Qadoidei, gen., Bleeker.

Qadi, gen., Fitzinger.

Subfamily Synonyms.

< Merluccia, Rafinesque, Analyse de la Nature, Ire S. fam., 1815.

<< Merluccinm, Swainson, Natural History of Fishes, Amphibians and

Reptiles, v. 2, pp. 118, 300, 1839.
= Merluciinm, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., v. 14, pp. 243, 244, 1863.
= Merluciinm, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 795, 1882.
Oadini, pt., Bon.
GadincB, pt.

Gadoidea with a moderate caudal region coniform behind and
with the caudal rays procurrent forwards, the anus submedian,
moderate suborbital bones, terminal mouth, subjugular ventrals ;

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 173

dorsal double, a short anterior and long posterior one, a long
anal corresponding to the second dorsal ; ribs wide^ approximated,
and channeled below or with infiected sides, and paired excavated
frontal bones with divergent crests continuous from the forked
occipital crest.

BEEGMACEROTID^.
Synonymy.

= Bregmacerotidm, Gill, Arrangement Families of Fishes, p. 3, 1873.
Blenniidos, gen., Richardson.
Oadidm, gen., Giinther, Day.

Gradoidea? with a robust caudal portion truncate or convex
behind, almost without procurrent caudal rays above or below,
with an antemedian anus, moderate suborbitals, terminal mouth,
jugular ventrals abnormally developed ; an occipital ray, and
behind a continuous dorsal fin, confined to the caudal portion,
and an anal nearly similar to the long dorsal.

RANICEPITID^.

Family Synonyms.

= New Family, Pamell, Mag. of Zool. and Bot., v. 1, p. — , 1837. (Not

named, but indicated. )
■= Ranicepitidm, Gill, Arrangement of Fam. of Fishes, p. 3, 1873.
Jugulaires, gen., Dumeril.
Oadinea, gen., Rafinesque.
Oadoides, gen., Cuvier.
OadidcRf gen., Bonaparte, et al.
Gadoidea, gen., Bleeker.
Oadi, gen., Fitzinger.

Subfamily Synonym.
= Banicepini, Bonaimite.

Gadoidea? with a moderate caudal portion, coniform behind,
and with caudal rays procurrent, submedian anus, moderate sub-
orbital bones, terminal mouth, jugular ventrals, dorsal (typically)
double, an anterior small and posterior long one, anal corre-
sponding to second dorsal, and rudimentary pyloric caeca in
reduced number {2).

MACRURID^.

Family Synonyms.

< LopMonotes, Dumeril, Zoologie Analytique, p. 129, 1806.

< Trachinidi, Rafinesque, Indice d'lttiolog. Siciliana, p. 12, 1810.

< Cephalosomes, Blainville, Journal de Physique, t. 83, p, — , 1818.

174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

= LepidoUprides, Risso, Hist. Nat. cles Poissons de I'Europe Merid., t. 3,
p. 242, 1826.

< Gadoides, Cuvier, Regne Animal, Ire ed., t. 2, p. 211, 1817 ; 2e ed., t. 2,

p. 330, 1829.
^= Lepidolepridm, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp.

179, 261, 1839.
= Macru7'idcB, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 132, 1838 ;

t. 4, p. 194, 1840.
^= Lepidosomatidce, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 101, 1854.

< Oadoidei, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel, Indico, p. xxvi, 1859.
= MacruridcB, Giintlier, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v., 4, p. 390, 1862.

= Macruridm, Cope, Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., v. 20, p. 341, 1872.

= MacruridoR, Gill, Arrangement Families of Fishes, p. 3, 1872.

^ Macrouri, Fitzinger, Sitzungsber. K. Akad. der Wissensch. (Wien), B.

67, 1. Abth., p. 43, 1873.
= MacruridcB, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 400, 810, 1882.
Oadinia, gen., Rafinesque, 1815.
Oadidw, s. fam., Bonaparte, 1832.
Gadoidei, s. fam., Bleeker.

Subfamily Synonyms.

< TracMnia, Rafinesque, Analyse de la Nature, p. — , 2e s. fam., 1815.

= Macrourini, Bonaparte, Giom. Accad. di Scienze, v. 52 (Saggio Distrib.

Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Sangue Freddo, p. 37), 1832.
= Macrurini, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 132, 1838 ;

t. 4, p. 194, 1840.
= Macrurini, Kaup, Archiv fiir Naturgescbichte, Jahrg. 1858, B. 1, p. 86,

1858.
= Macrouriformes, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel. Indico, p. xxvi,

1859.

Gadoidea with an elongated tail tapering backwards and
destitute of a caudal fin, postpectoral anus, enlarged suborbital
bones, inferior mouth, subbrachial ventrals, a distinct anterior
dorsal, and a long second dorsal and anal converging on end of
tail.

The several families thus defined are certainly, or in the case
of the Ranicepitids and Bregmacerotids, presumably typical Ana-
canthines, and exhibit the cranial and scapular characteristics
signalized for the superfamily Gadoidea. The group thus defined
is quite a natural one and perhaps may be deemed worthy of
continued isolation under the name Anacanthini or Jugulares,
although the propriety of assigning to it subordinal rank is very
doubtful.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 1*75

How very different the other forms approximated to the group
are, may be appreciated from the following diagnoses.

SUPERPAMILY OPHIDIOIDEA.

Synonymy.

> Brotuloidea, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. Am., p. 7, 1873. (Named

only.)

> OpMdioidea, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. Am., p. 7, 1873. (Named

only.)

Jugulares with the orbito-rostral portion of the cranium con-
tracted and shorter than the posterior, the cranial cavity closed
in part by the expansion and junction of the parasphenoid and
frontals, the supraoccipital horizontal and cariniform poste-
riorly, the exoccipitals expanded backwards and upwards behind
the supraoccipital, the exoccipital condyles contiguous, and with
the hypercoracoid (scapula, Parker) fenestrate (or foraminate)
about its centre, and the hypocoraeoid with its inferior process
divergent from the proscapula.

These characters are exhibited in the Brotula barbata (specimen
in coll. T. G.), Brosmojyfiycis marginatus (MSS. note), Pteridium
ater (cranium behind, Emery, ^ f. 21), Ophidium barbatum
(cranium above, E., f. 26 ; scapular arch, E., f. 44), Fierasfer acus
(cranium, E., f. 18-22; scapular arch, E., f. 35-36), Echiodon
dentatus (cranium, E., f. 23-25 ; scapular arch, E., f 37-38), and
Encheliophis vei'micularis (scapular arch, E.,^ f. 39). The
osteology of the Congrogadidae and Brotulophididse is entirely
unknown and it is only assumed that they belong to this group
on account of general agreement in superficial characters.

BROTULTD^.

Synonyms as Family Names.

= Brotulidm, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 104, 1854.

< Brotuloidei, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel. Indico, p. xxv, 1859,

= Brotuloidm, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 15], p. 253, 1863.

1 The references indicated by "E.," are to Prof. Emery's excellent memoir
on "Fierasfer" in the Atti della R. Accademia dei Lincei " 1879-80 (pp.
167-254, pi. la-9a,. How useful and indeed indispensable this memoir
has been may be judged from the references.

176 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

= Brotuloids, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliila. [v. 16], p. 200, 1864 (cra-
nial characters indicated).
-^ BrotulidcB, Gill, Arrangement Families of Fishes, p. 3, 1872.

Gadoides, gen., Cuvier,
OadidcB, gen., Bonaparte.
Ophidiidm, s. fam., Giinther.
Gadi, gen., Fitzinger,
Gadidm, s. fam., Jordan & Gilbert.

Synonyms as Subfamily Ncemes.

= Brotulinm, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 188,
301, 1839.

< BrotuUna, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 4, p. 371, 1862. (Defined.)

> Brotulince, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 14], p. 280, 1863 ; [v.

15], p. 252. (Defined.)

> Brosmophycince, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 14, ] p. 280, 1868 ;

[v, 15], pp. 252, 253, 1863.

> BythitincB, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 14], p. 280, 1863; [v.

15], p. 253, 1863.

> SirembincB, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 14], p. 280, 1863; [v.

15], p. 253, 1863.
<< Brotulini, Emery, Atti R. Accad. dei Lincei (3), v. 7, p. 168, 1880.

< Brotulinm, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am. , p. 794, 1882.

Ophidoidea with jugular ventrals reduced to one or two rays,
and the anus in the anterior half of the length.

This family is quite rich in deep-sea types, and may be divided
into various subfamilies, four of which (Brotulinse, Brosmophy-
cinae, Bythitinse, and Sirembina^) have already been indicated and
defined (see sj^nonymy). The deep-sea forms chiefly belong to
the subfamily Brosmophycinse, and perhaps one or two still undif-
ferentiated ones whose definition is not at present possible.

BROTULOPHIDID^.

Synonymy.

= Brotulophididm, Gill, Arrangement Families of Fishes, p. 3, 1872.
Ophidiidm {BrotuUna), gen., Giinther.

Ophidioidea with subbrachial (or thoracic) ventrals reduced to
simple filaments, and anus in the anterior half of the length.

The single genus Brotulophis, for which this family has been
distinguished, is still very imperfectly known, and its aflSnities
are doubtful.

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ITT

OPHIDIID^.

Family Synonyms.

< Pantopteres, Dum^ril, Zoologie Analytique, p. 115, 1806.
<^ Ofidini, Rafinesque, Indice d'lttiolog. Siciliana, p. 38, 1810.

< Ophididw, Bonaparte, Giom. Accad. di Scienze, v. 53 (Saggio Distrib.

Metod. Animali Vertebr. a Saiigue Freddo, p. 38), 1832.
■< OpMdiidm, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p. 133, 1838 ;

t. 4, p. 276, 1840.
<l OphidontdcB, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, pp. 49,

259,1 1839.

< OphidiidcB, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 105, 1854.

< OpMdinoB, Kaup, Cat. Apodal Fish. B. M., p. 153, 1856.

< Ophididw, Rich, Encycl. Brit., 8th ed., v. 12, p. 268, 1856.

< Ophididce, Girard, Expl. and Surv. for R. R. Route to Pacific Oc, v. 10,

Fishes, p. 137, 1858.
<^ Ophidioidei, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Pisciuni Aichipel. Indico, p. xxv, 1859.

< Ophidiidce, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 4, p. 370, 1862.
= Ophidiidce, Gill, Arrangement Fam. of Fishes, p. 3, 1872.

= Ophidiidce, Putnam, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., v. 16. p. 339, 1874,

< Ofidiidei, Emery, Atti R. Accad. dei Lincei (3), Fis.Mem., v. 3, p. 168,

1880.
•-= Ophididce, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., pp. 400, 792, 1882.

Anguilliformes, gen., Cuvier.
Xiphoides, gen., Risso, 1826.

Subfamily Synonyms.

< Ophidiini, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t, 2, p. 133, 1838 ;

t. 4, p. 276, 1840.

< Ophidince, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 2, p. 260, 1839.
<C Ophidiiformes, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel. Indico, p. xxv,

1859.
= Ophidiina, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 4, p. 376, 1863.
= Ofidiina, Emery, Atti R. Accad. dei Lincei (3), v. 7, p. 168, 1873.

Ophidioidea with chin ventrals, represented by bifid barbel-
like filaments, and the anus in the anterior half of the length.

This family is well-marked by- the encroachment of the ventrals
forwards under the chin and between the rami of the mandible,
on which account the species were supposed to have barbels

' At p. 49, regarded as one of the "Families of the Gymnetres ; at p. 159
as the 4. subfamily ^^Ophidoninae " of the "tribe Gymnetres" (family not
differentiated), and at p. 259, mentioned as "3. subf^m. Ophidonidae."

1*78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

analogous to those of the Mullids and to be destitute of ventrals.
Their homology was not even recognized by those who studied
their anatomy. Prof. Agassiz, for instance, in his Recherches sur
les Poissons fossiles, representing them as apodal.

There are three or four genera, Ophidium, Genypterus, and
Leptophidium.

Leptophidium^ although recognized as a mere subgenus by
Messrs. Jordan & Gilbert, is very distinct.

FIERASFERID^E.

Family Synonyms.

<^ Oinnotini, Rafincsque, Indice, d'lttiolog. Siciliani, p. 37, 1810.
= FierasferidoE, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1864, p. 203, 1864.
^ Fierasferidm, Gill, Arrangement Fam. of Fishes, p. 3, 1873.

> Fierasferi, Fitzinger, Sitzungsber. K. Akad. der Wissensch., v. 67,

1. Abth., p. 43, 1873.

> Fnchelyophes, Fitzinger, Sitzimgsber. K. Akad. der Wissenscli., v. 67,

1. Abth., p. 4:!, 1873.
= Flerasferidoe, Putnam, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., v. 16, p. 339, 1874.
= Merasferidos, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., pp. 400, 791, 1883,

Ophidiidw, gen., Bon.

OpMdioidei ophidiiformes, gen., Blkr.

Ophidiidm, s.-fam., Giintber.

Subfamily Synonyms.
= Fierasferina, Giintber, Cat. Fishes in Brit. Mus., v.- 4, pp. 370, 381,

1863.
= Fierasferini, Emery, Atti R. Accad. dei Lincei (3), v. 7, p. 168, 1873.

Ophidioidea without ventrals, and with the anus thoracic or
jugular.

CONGROGADID^.

Family Synonyms.

= CongrogadidoB, Gill, Arrangement Families of Fishes, p. 3, 1872.

< CongrogadidiP, .Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes of N. Am., p. 790, 1883

Subfamily Synonyms.

< Gongrogadime, Giintber, Cat. Fishes in Brit. Mus., v. 4, pp. 370, 388,

1862.

< Congrogadini, Emery, Atti R. Accad. dei Lincei (3), v. 7, p. 168, 1873.

Ophidioidea without ventrals, the anus in the anterior half of
the length, and branchial membranes imited beneath but free
from the throat.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179

The family is perhaps composite and lias been constituted or
retained for three genera ( Congrogadus = Machserium, Halio-
phis, and Scytalina) which may prove to have little or no affinity
to each other. It is entirely provisional and must remain of very
uncertain value till the forms can be anatomically investigated.
It is only by an assumption, perhaps, if not probably illegitimate,
that Haliophis has been referred to the group. " Riippell says
'Apertura branehialis parva,' " but Dr. GUnther, "by a comparison
of the figure " was " induced to suppose that, as in Congrogadus,
the gill-opening is of moderate width, the gill-membranes being
united below the throat, and not attached to the isthmus."^
I should not have been induced, b^^ the figure to make any such
assumption, for the likeness to Congrogadus is very slight. The
single specimen of Scytalina in the National Museum cannot be
dissected.

SuPERPAMii.Y LYCODOIDEA.
Synonymy.

= Lycodoidea, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. Am,, p. 7, 1873. (Named
only.)

Jugulares with the orbito-rostral portion of the cranium con-
tracted and shorter than the posterior, the cranial cavity open in
front, but bounded laterally by expansions of the annectant
parasphenoid and frontals, with the supraoccipital declivous and
tectiform behind, the occipitals above inclined forward along the
sides of the supraoccipital, and the exoccipital condyles distant,
with the hypercoracoid foraminate about its centre and the hypo-
coracoid with an inferior process convergent to the proscapula.^

These characters are formulated from a skeleton of Zoarces
anguillaris in the possession of the writer.

LYCODID^.

Family Synonyms.

X ZoarcMdce, Swainson, Nat. Hist, and Class. Fishes, etc., v. 3, pp. 184,

283, 1839.
> Lycodidw, Giintlier, Cat. Fishes Biit. Mus., v. 4, p. 319, 1862.
= Lycodoidce, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci Phila., v. 15, p. 2.15, 1863 (De-
fined) ; V. 16, p. 203, 1864. (Cranial characters indicated.)

1 Giinther, Cat. Fishes in Brit. Mus., v. 4, p. 389.

"^ The nostrils are single on each side as in many Blennioidea.

180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

^ LycodidcE, Gill, Arrangement Fara. of Fishes, p. 3, 1872.

> Zoarcce., Fitzinger, Sitzungsber. k. Akad. der Wissensch. (Wien), B. 67,

1. Abth., p. 43, 1873.
OacUdce and Ophidini, pt., Reinhardt.
Blennioidei and OpMdoidei, pt., Bleeker.
Blennioidce, pt., Gill, Kroyer.
Lycodidm and BlenniidoB, gen., Giinther.

Subfamily Synonyms.

> QymneUncB, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., v. 15, pp. 256, 261, 1863.

> Zoardnce, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N, Am., p. 783, 1882.

> Lycodinm, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 783, 1882.

= Lycodidti', Collett, Norske Nordhavs-Exped. 1876-78 ; Fiske, p. 77, 1880.
= ZoarcidcB, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 400, 1882.
= Lycodidcf, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 783, 1882.

Lycodoidea of a more or less anguilliform shape, tapering back-
wards ; dorsal and anal elongated and confluent with caudal,
invested in a thick skin; ventrals jugular and rudimentary or
suppressed, and branchial apertures lateral and not confluent.

The chief group of this family, or the subfamily Lycodinae, is
a chai"acteristic deep-sea type, and represented by many species
varying greatly in elongation, and with the extreme terms tolerably
well connected by graduated representatives. Nevertheless, the
two sections of Lycodes, defined by Prof. Collett (op. cit., p. 84),
seem to be entitled to generic rank, and corroborated by other
species obtained by the TJ, S. Commission of Fish and Fishei-ies.
The name Ly codes must be retained for the robust species, while
Lycenchelys may be used as a designation for Collett's second
group which have " the body elongate ;" height of the body con-
tained from twelve to twenty -four times in the total length. The
genera would then be Lycodes, Lycenchelys, Lycodopsis, Lyco-
donus, and Lycocara (= Uronectes, Gthr.).

In the preceding diagnoses of the superfamilies Gadoidea,
Ophidioidea and Lycodoidea, little more is given than what may
serve to neatly differentiate the several groups, but the charac-
ters given are reinforced by many others, such as the cranial
foramina, details in the relations of the bones, and characters of
the vertebrae. The relations of the Brotuloidea appear to be
almost as intimate, if not indeed more so, with the Lycodoidea
than with the Gadoidea. But a comparison of the cranium of a
Lycodid with that of a Blenniid, must convince the ichthyotomist

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181

that there is a close affinity between the two. Indeed, it is quite
possible, at least, that Prof. Cope might retain his diagnosis of
the Anacanthini, and refer the Brotuloid families to his Scj^pho-
branchii by the side of Zoarces and his other Blenniidse. Prof.
Emery has also perceived the great differences exhibited in
cranial characters by the Ophidioidea from the Gadoidea and has
even contended that they should be approximated to the Gobioi-
dea.^ In view of these facts, it is evident that the group of
Anacanthini not only has a very uncertain tenure, but it may
have either to be entirelj' abolished as being an unnatural combi-
nation of different types, or to be limited to the Gadoidea.

But it is possible that the group as retained by the most recent
ichthyologists may be even more heterogeneous than has been
supposed. Several other types have been generally associated
with the forms already indicated, but the pertinence of the Amrao-
dytidae,^ Ateleopodidae and Xenocephalidse to it is doubtful,
and it is almost certain that the Gadopsidas are not at all
related to any of the families already discussed ; nevertheless, to
complete the summary of the families generally referred to the
Anacanthini, their synonymy and characteristics are here given : —

AMMODYTID^.

Family Synonyms,

= Ammodytidm, Bonaparte, Catal. Metod. Pesci Europei, pp. 7, 40, 1846.

= Ammodytidm, Gill, Arrangement of Famines of Fishes, p. 8, ]872.

= Ammodytm, Fitzinger, Sitzungsber. K. Akad. der Wissensch. (Wien),

B. 67, 1. Abth., p. 43, 1873.
= Ammodytidm, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 414, 1883.

Oadidce, s. fam., Bonaparte.
Coryphienidie, gen., Swainson.
Ophidioidei, s. fam., Bleeker,
s. fam., Giinther.

' "Attenendomi ai risultati delle mie ricerche anatomiche, io debbo, tra
le due opinion!, adottare quella del Canestrini e considerare gli Ofidiidei
come aflfini di Gobioidi, coi quali hanno caratteri comuni assai importanti,
in ispecie nella struttura del cranio." Emery, op. cit., p. 169 ; see also p.
187.

^ The only skeleton at present accessible to me, has been so badly pre-
pared that I do not venture to base any opinion upon it. I hope soon to
have a clean disarticulated one.

182 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Subfamily Synonyms.

= Ammodytini, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., p. 133, 1838 ; t,

4, p. 276, 1840.
= Ammodyteiformes, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel, Indico, p. xxvj

1859.
=: Ammodytina, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 4, p. 384, 1862 r
= Ammodytince, Gill, Cat. Fishes E, Coast N. A., p. 40, 1861.
> Argyrotcenince, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. A., p. 40, 1861.

Anacanthini ? with an elongated, almost parallelogram mic body,
with a dorsal lateral line, postmedian anus, narrow suborbitals,
terminal mouth with protractile jaws, enlarged suboperculum,
widely cleft branchial apertures, lamelliform pseudobranchise, a
long dorsal and long but postmedian anal with articulated rays,
low pectorals and no ventrals.

ATELEOPODIDiE.

Synonyms as Family Names.

= Ateleoiyodoidei, Bleeker, Envim. Sp. Piscium Archipel. Indico, p. xxvi,
1859. (Not defined ; made the type of a distinct order — "Ateleopodi —
au forte cum Siluris adjungendi.")

= Ateleopodid(e, Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., v. 4, pp. 318, 398, 1862.

= Ateleopodidce, Gill, Arrangement Families of Fishes, p. 3, 1872.

Synonym as Subfamily Name.
= Ateleopodini) Bonaparte, 1850.

Anacanthini ? with an elongated tail tapering backwards, but
provided with a narow caudal, antemedian anus, moderate subor-
bitals, inferior mouth, thoracic ventrals reduced to double or
simple filaments, a short anterior dorsal only, and a long oval
continuous with the caudal.

XENOCEPHALID^.

Synonyms.

= Xenocephaliformes, Bleeker, Enum. Sp. Piscium Archipel. Indico, p.

xxvi, 1859.
= Appendix to the Anacanthini Gadoidei, Giinther, Cat. Fishes in Brit.

Mus., V. 4, pp. 318, 399, 1862.
Gadoidei, s. fam., Bleeker.

Anacanthini? with a "small body," a distinct caudal, post-
median anus ; head very large, truncated, cuirassed with plates

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183

and armed with spines; jugular? ventrals of five rays and one
short dorsal, and a short anal, both near the caudal.

Two other types referred by Dr. Giinther to the Anacanthini
certainly do not belong to the group and are true Acanthopter}'-
gian fishes. They are the Gadopsidge and Chiasmodontidae.

GADOPSIDJE.

Synonymy.

= Oadopsida, Giinther, Cat. Pishes Brit. Mus., v. 4, pp. 317, 318, 1862.
< OadopsidcB, Cope, Proc. Am. Philos. Soc. Phila., v. 13, p. 31, 1873.
BlenniidcB, gen., Steindachner.

CHIASMODONTID^.

Family Synonyms.

= Chiasmodontidae, Gill, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 964

1882. (Defined.)
QadidcB, gen., Giintlier.

Subfamily Synonym.

= OMasmodontincB, Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N Am., p. 795, 1882.

184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

June 24.

Dr. W. S. W. RuscHENBERQER in the chair.

Fifteen persons present.

A paper entitled " Notes on the Geology and Natural History
of the West Coast of Florida," by Jos. Willcox, was presented
for publication.

Some Modifications observed in the Form of Sponge Spicules. —
Mr. Edw. Potts remarked that whatever view we may prefer to take
as to the position which sponges occupy in the animal kingdom
— whether they are regarded as colonial flagellate monads with
Saville Kent, or with Haekel take a much higher place among the
metazoa, or perhaps, with still greater probabilit}', fill an inter-
mediate place between these, the formation and development
of the spiculas in both the Calearea and Silicea seem likely to
remain for a long time one of the most perplexing problems.
Many terms of this conundrum will readily occur to the mind of
any one who has worked in this field and observed the spiculae
from their earliest appearance to full maturity, and it is not the
design of the present communication to refer to them now more
particularly.

An instance, however, in which a singular modification of
character has apparently been effected by the chemical condition
of the environment seems deserving of mention. Amongst the
sponges to which he had alluded in former communications as
encrusting certain old pipes, recently removed from the water-
works on the Schuylkill River, in Philadelphia, some portions
were much more deeply colored with rust than the others ; the
statoblasts, particularly, seeming to be mere pseudoraorphs of
their originals in iron oxide. Fragments of this character were
boiled in nitric acid, washed out and mounted for comparison
with other matter similarh' treated, but free from such dis-
coloration.

The mature normal skeleton spicule of this sponge, Meyenia
Leidyi, is smooth, robust and shorter than that of any other
American species. Yer}'' rarely the fine line of the axial channel
is visible, but in the specimen under examination the size and
exterior appearance of the spiculse remaining as before, the hardly
noticeable channel has become a wide canal, open at both ends,
and occupying more than one-half the breadth of the spicule.
This does not occur merely in occasional instances, but universally
throughout the fragment of sponge so aflfected. (See fig. 5,
Plate IV.)

The birotulate spicules of this sponge also arc short and of a

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 185

peculiarly substantial appearance, with entire reflexed margins,
yet in the present preparation they could with difficulty be
detected as mere ghosts of their normal shapes. The two discs
rarely remained together, their characteristic entire margins were
gone, the rotules being represented merely by a line of very fine
rays. The speaker ventured no suggestion as to the influences or
the method by which these changes had been efiected, but referred
the fact to the consideration of students more competent to deal
with the mechanical and chemical constitution of these bodies.

Lieut. Thos. L. Casey, Eng. Corps, U. S. A., was elected a
member.

July 1.

Mr. Thos. Meehan, Yice-President, in the chair.

Thirteen persons present.

A paper entitled " On a supposed new species of Cristatella,"
by Edw. Potts, was presented for publication.

Volcanic Dust from Krakatoa. — Prof. H. Carvill Lewis
remarked that in connection with the cause of the beautiful red
sunsets of last autumn and winter, which had been recently the
subject of much discussion in the scientific periodicals, he had
been interested in examining some volcanic dust which had been
ejected from the volcano of Krakatoa, and which he had received
through the kindness of Rev. Wayland Hoyt,D. D., of this city.

This dust, which, on August 27, 1883, fell thickly upon the
decks, rigging and masts of the bark William H. Besse, bound
from Batavia to Boston, is of a light gi'ay color and harsh to the
touch. It is essentially a pulverized pumice, by far the greater
part of it consisting of fragments of volcanic glass. These
fragments are sometimes twisted, but generally in flat angular
transparent scales, which are filled with minute bubbles, and, of
course, are isotropic. Angular fragments and crystals of trans-
parent plagioclase, occasionally showing the hemitropic striations,
and giving bright colors in the polai'iscope, together with more
irregular and rounded fragments of dark green and brown
pyroxenic minerals, probably augite and h^persthene, are scat-
tered very occasionally among the glass particles. Grains of
magnetite, often well rounded, also occur, and may be picked
out and examined separately by a magnet covered with tissue-
paper.

As it is this dust which is regarded as tlie cause of the uni-
versal red skies wliich followed so soon after the eruption,
attempts have been made, both in Europe and America, to dis-
cover traces of it in snow or elsewhere,

13

186 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

In the suburbs of Philadelphia, some dust was collected by
Mr. Joseph Wharton,^ this winter, from melted snow, and from
the presence in it of certain rounded and filamentous glass par-
ticles supposed by him to be volcanic. Some of it had been
submitted by him to the speaker for examination. It appeared
to be composed of particles of quartz, coal, cinders, vegetable
matter, etc., among which are certain glassy hairs and rounded
globules. These bear no resemblance to the angular glass frag-
ments composing the Krakatoa dust, which is remarkably free
from either filaments or globules ; and the supposed volcanic
glass particles in the Philadelphia dust are most probably of local
origin — from blast-furnaces, foundries, or the like.

Accompanying the specimens of dust from Krakatoa, were
extracts from the log of the bark, which present several points
of interest. A point of special importance is the record of a
sudden barometric fluctuation, due to a great atmospheric wave,
which, starting from the volcano at the time of the eruption, has
been shown to have " traveled no less than three and a quarter
times round the whole circumference of the earth." ^

Extracts from log of hark William H. Besse, from B ataxia
towards Boston.

'■'■Aug. 26. This day commences with light airs and calms.
Light airs throughout the day. At 5.30 P. M., wind hauling
ahead, let go starboard anchor with thirty fathoms chain, clewed
up and furled all sail. Adam light bore W. 1-4 S. and E. by S.
Throughout the afternoon and night heard heavy reports, like
the discharge of heavy artillerj^, sounding in the direction of
Java Island. Yery dark and cloudy throughout the night, with
continual flashes of lightning. Barometer 30.15.

"■Aug. 27. Commences with strong breezes, and thick, cloudy
weather. Barometer 30.12. At 9.30 A. M., pilot left ship. Hove
the lead every fifteen minutes. At daylight noticed a heavy bank
to the westward which continued to rise ; and, the sun becoming
obscured, it commenced to grow dark. The barometer fell sud-
denly to 29.50, and suddenly rose to 30.60. Called all hands,
furled everything securely, and let go the port anchor with all
the chain in the locker. By this time the squall struck us with
terrific force, and we let go starboard anchor with eighty fathoms
chain. With the squall came a heavy shower of sand and ashes,
and it had become by this time darker than the darkest night.
The barometer continued to rise and fall an inch at a, time. The
wind was blowing a hurricane, but the water kept very smooth.
A heavy rumbling, with reports like thunder, was heard con-
tinually ; and the sky was lit up with fork lightning running in
all directions, while a strong smell of sulphur pervaded the air,

^ See his letter in Public Ledger, Jan. 23, 1884.
^ Nature, vol. xxx, p. 12.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 187

making it difficult to breathe. Altogether, it formed one of the
wildest and most awful scenes imaginable.

The tide was setting strong to the westward throughout the
gale, at the rate of ten knots per hour. At 3 P. M. the sky
commenced to grow lighter, although the ashes continued to fall.
The barometer rose to 30.30, and dropped graduall}^ to 30.14,
when it became stationary. The whole ship, rigging and masts,
were covered with sand and ashes to the depth of several inches.

^'■Aug. 28. Commences with light airs and thick, smoky weather.
Hove up starboard anchor, and hove short on port anchor. Dead
calm throughout the day and night. Saw large quantities of
trees and dead fishes floating by with the tide ; the water having
a whitish appearance, and covered with ashes. This day ends
with a dead calm, and thick, smoky weather.

'''•Aug. 29. This day commences with calms, and thick, smoky
weather. Made all sail throughout the day. Moderate winds,
and thick, smoky weather. Passed large quantities of driftwood,
cocoanuts, and dead fishes. At 8 P. M., passed Anjier, and could
see no light in the lighthouse, and no signs of life on shore.
Furled all light sails, and stood under easy sail throughout the
night. Day ends with moderate winds and cloudy weather.
Barometer 30.14.

'■''Aug. SO. Commences with moderate winds and cloudy
weather. At daylight made all sail with a fresh breeze from the
westward. Found the water for miles filled with large trees and
driftwood, it being almost impossible to steer clear of them.
Also passed large numbers of dead bodies and fish. Kept a
sharp lookout on the forecastle throughout the day. At 10 A. M.,
sighted Java Head lighthouse ; but the wind hauling ahead, we
kept away, and went round Prince Island. Latter part, fresh
breezes and thick, smoky weather. Frida}^ and Saturday, passed
large quantities of ashes in the water. Saturday, crew employed
in cleaning ashes off masts and rigging. Water had a green
color."

July 8.
Mr. Thomas Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.

Eleven persons present.

A paper entitled " Catalogue of Sponges collected by Mr. Jos.
Willcox on the West Coast of Florida," by Henry J. Carter, was
presented for publication.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

188 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY AND NATUKAL HISTORY OF THE WEST COAST

OF FLORIDA.

BY JOSEPH WILLCOX.

The following notes apply especially to the Counties of Levy
and Hernando in Florida. That portion of the Peninsula consists
of a fine grained limestone composed largely of foraminifera,
several species of which have been determined by Prof. Heilprin.
The limestone is covered with sand, in some places with a thin
layer only, while, at other localities, wells sunk to the depth of
25 or 30 feet have failed to indicate the presence of rocks. In
many places the rocks are exposed above the surface of the
ground. They are hard and compact when dry ; but, when they
are permanently wet, they are comparatively soft, and are eroded
with facility. In fact, throughout a large portion of the State
numerous and long subterranean caverns abound, that serve as
aqueducts to convey the water supplying the many large springs,
for which this territory is noted.

The subsidence of the surface ground into these caverns has
caused many sink-holes. Three miles south of Gainesville, within
a space of less than 100 acres, nearly fifty funnel-shaped sink-
holes exist, from 20 to 200 feet in diameter at the top, and from
10 to 50 feet deep.

These are near to Payne's Prairie, a lake covering a space of
about forty square miles. This lake has no outlet, and its surface
rises and falls, as is usual in such cases, according to the
abundance or scarcity of rain.

It covers an area that was dry land a few years ago. The
creek, which now supplies water to it, formerly flowed into a sink
hole near those mentioned above. This creek undoubtedly was
the active agent in eroding the caverns into which the material
formerly occupying the space where the sink-holes now exist
was precipitated. Some sink-holes are large and the subsidence
moderate. Examples of the latter case may be seen in numerous
shallow ponds and cypress swamps. Many large lakes probably
owe their existence to the same cause.

The limestone is, in some localities, replaced by a chert rock,
in which the casts of shells are still visible. This rock forms the

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189

only material suitable for the manufacture of stone implements,
that the writer has seen in Florida.

The coast is fringed with a strip of land four to six miles wide
that is low, level and rocky, from Cedar Keys to Anclote Key,
seventy-five miles farther south.

A large portion of this land is swampy ; and much of it is
covered with water, when the tide is unusually high ; while the
highest portion of it is only 3 or 4 feet above the level of high
water.

It is covered with a shallow, rich soil, which sustains a dense
growth of hard wood, in addition to many palmetto and red
cedar trees.

At a distance of from eight to twelve miles apart small rivers
empty into the Gulf. They have their sources chiefly in large
springs, which are supplied by long, subterranean caverns. They
have cut crooked channels through the limestone rocks, not only
on the mainland, but through the shoals to the deep water of the
Gulf.

These rocks, the foundation of the mainland, extend westward
under the water of the Gulf of Mexico ; and for the distance of
several miles from the shore great shoals exist ; making navigation
impracticable, except for small vessels. At low tide the rocks
are exposed to view in numerous instances, far from shore. In
fact such a great number of low islands exist along the coast,
separated from each other by shallow bays and creeks, that it is
difficult to determine what should be classed as the shore line.

Many of these islands are overflown with water at high tide.
In such cases they are covered with mud : those nearest to the
sea usually sustaining a dense growth of mangrove trees ; while
others nearer the mainland are covered with saw-grass and bull-
rushes.

A soft and unctious mud covers the bottom to the depth of a
few inches in the shoal water ; and an abundance of sea weeds
thrives there. These afl"ord shelter to vast numbers of mollusks,
crustaceans and worms, to the life of which those waters are well
adapted.

The coast undoubtedly extended much farther into the Gulf, at
a time not very remote. On the bottom of the shoals and rivers,
and along the shores, the limestone rocks are eroded in a very
rough and uneven manner. No smooth surfaces are to be seen :

190 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

nothing but sharp, unsightly projections, depressions and deep
holes. Along the rivers the waves make mam'- small caverns
xmder the shore.

East of the narrow, rocky belt, lining the shore, the land is
sandy and rises to the height of about 200 feet at a distance of
from twelve to twenty miles from the coast. The highest land
near the coast is at Moiint Lee, in Hernando Co., twelve miles from
the Gulf, and four miles east of the source of the Homosassa River.

The summit of this hill is 200 feet above the sea, and it
terminates abruptly, on the west side, in a rocky bluff 100 feet
high. From the top an extensive view may be obtained of the
surrounding country, an opportunity seldom afforded in middle
and southern Florida. Under this hill are several caverns which
have not been opened for exploration ; but the noise from falling
stones indicates a considerable depth in them. A rib of a manatee
has latel}^ been dug from the soil in a small cave in the side of
the hill. The limestone at this place is hard and fine grained ;
and if found to be free from fissures, it will prove to be a desirable
building stone. The surface of this rock is rugged and unsightly ;
having been eroded in the usual, uneven manner.

About five miles northeast of Mount Lee the writer discovered a
second locality of Nummulites Willcoxi^ at an altitude of nearly
200 feet above the sea. They are associated with Orbitoides and
Heterostegina and Pecten, as determined by Prof. Heilprin.

The shore of the Gulf of Mexico abounds with multitudes of
shells of king-crabs, suggestive of a great mortality among them.
At low tide the writer found one king-crab lying upon its back
with Fasciolaria tulipa on top of it, eating its vitals. Near by
was found another lying on its back, upon which were 25 mollusks
(Melongena corona) eating it.

In Clearwater Harbor, north of Tampa Bay, the sea-urchins,
during the first week in April, are covered with shells arranged
upon them with system and dexterity, so that they are obscured
from view.

Prof. Leidy, when informed of this habit, suggested that it
might have some connection with the process of spawning. This
suggestion is plausible, as in the same waters in January, though
abundant, none of them were found to be covered with any
material. Prof. A. Agassiz ^ states that " the sea-ui'chins, in

' Sec Seaside Studies in Nat. History, page 101.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 191

Boston Harbor, have a habit of covering themselves with sea-
weeds, packing it down snugly above them, as if to avoid observa-
tion : and this habit makes them difficult to find." In Clearwater
Harbor the white shells, with which the sea-urchins cover them-
selves, make a conspicuous object, so that the animal underneath
can easily be found. They evidently do not seek concealment
from an enemy, as the seaweeds would more effectually accom-
plish that object.

The shell mounds of the west coast are very numerous ; and
they indicate the former favorite camping grounds of the Indians.

The largest accumulation of shells is at Cedar Keys. A portion
of that town is built upon the mound ; and great quantities of the
material, consisting almost exclusively of oyster shells, have been
used in grading the streets.

Oysters are very abundant and of good size in the vicinity of
Cedar Keys, and along the coast as far as forty-five miles farther
south. The following small rivers flow into the Gulf of Mexico
near the oyster beds : — Wakasassa, Withlacooche, Crystal River,
Little Homosassa, Homosassa and Cheeshowiska.

Near the outlets of these rivers are numerous small islands,
too low to be habitable, except when elevated by artificial means.
At each river the Indians selected an island for their camping
ground, to which they carried oysters ; the shells, in the course of
a long time, making large mounds. Human bones, stone imple-
ments and fragments of pottery are frequently found among the
shells.

Prof. Wyman, having examined many fresh-water shell mounds,
on and near the St. John's River, states in the Memoirs of the
Peabody Academy of Science, vol. i, No. 4, 1875, on page 49,
that " Stone chips are not common, and were generally found
separately, or only a few together ; but in no instance in collec-
tions indicating a place for the manufacture of arrow heads or
other implements." Such a place for the manufacture of stone
implements may be seen on John's Island at the mouth of the
Cheeshowiska River. Having visited this island mound several
times, the writer has found there at least a half bushel of stone
implements, in the various stages of manufacture ; and at the
present time many bushels of the stone chips may be seen there,
all made of the chert rock referred to above.

192 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

On this island may also be found shell implements of several
patterns, made from the shells of Busy con pyrum.

The stone implements found there are similar to those figured
on Plate II, in the Memoir referred to, and the shell implements
are similar to those on Plate VII of the same. Near Dwight's
Landing, on the shore of Clearwater Harbor, is an Indian mound
composed chiefly of the shells of Busycon pyrum and Fasciolaria
tulipa; the former greatly predominating in numbers. Nearly
all of these shells have a hole in the side near the top, about
three-quarters of an inch in diameter, all neatly and uniformly
made.

It is presumed that the animal was detached from the shell by
the Indians, by means of an instrument inserted through this
hole.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193

ON A SUPPOSED NEW SP CIES OF CRISTATELLA.
BY EDW. POTTS.

I wish to announce the discovery in October last, within the
waters of Harvey's Lake, Luzerne Co., Pa., of vast colonies, or,
technically speaking, of aggregations of colonies of a species of
Gristatella, exhibiting some peculiarities that seem to distinguish
it from C. mucedo of Europe and from both the known American
forms.

Harvey's Lake is a beautiful sheet of water, Ijang at an altitude
of about 1200 feet above sea-level, amongst partially wooded hills
of no great height, and taking rudely the shape of the capital
letter T. Its greatest length is about two miles. The depth
throughout the larger part of this extent is said to be very great,
increasing rapidly a few feet from the shore. The first groups of
this beautiful polyp were found upon a large inclined log or stump
in deep water, within one or two feet of the surface. Here the
colonies appeared as scattered vermiform masses much longer
than those of C. Idse of Leidy, and nearly rivaling in length
those of G. ophidioidia of Hyatt. The longest were estimated
at about six inches. Instead, however of following the sinuous
lines, described by the latter author as characteristic of his
species, these assumed, generally, single or continuous curves,
like a parted letter O or rude C. Afterwards, in three or four
instances, we found them occupying entirely novel situations.

The tops of fallen trees or large branches lying 20 or 30 feet
from the shore, and spreading to a diameter of 10 or 12 feet, were
covered by hundreds or thousands of these colonies, clinging to
or twining around every branch and twig, yet with so slight an
attachment that the motion of raising a twig above water caused
them to drop ofi" by dozens. While hanging temporarily by one
end they assumed a spiral form, closely twisting upon themselves.
Their gelatinous common ectocyst, nearly a line in thickness,
lined the branches as far as we could reach or see. Its persist-
ence upon those twigs brought away with us is rather remarkable,
as after remaining seven months in water it is still easily recog-
nizable. It exhibits under the microscope a plexus of fine lines
like a very delicate mycelium, which indeed may now have
replaced the normal structure.

194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

The pocket lens of the collector was of course insufficient to
reveal any distinctive characters in the individuals composing
these colonies, and we failed in the attempt to bring any of them
alive within reach of our microscopes, so that a full determination
of the species has awaited the recent germination of some of the
numerous statoblasts then secured. Their death in the glass jar,
in which some of the colonies were carried, made it necessary
several times during the past winter to change the water and
wash out the corrupt matter. On these occasions the statoblasts
were saved by pouring the water through a sieve. The winter
months passed, and April and May came, but still they did not
germinate, and I was on the point of discarding the whole as life-
less when a number of embryo colonies were fortunately discovered
upon the sides of the jar.

These consisted of from one to eight polypides and exhibited
this constant peculiarity. The coenoecium, in a lateral view, might
be compared in shape to a shoe ; the coencecial cells, whether few
or many, occupying solely the elevated or ankle portion ; the
other extremity was always prolonged into one of the many forms
which fashion has dictated for our foot-covering, from the cylin-
drical pointed toes of some hundrds of years ago to the abbrevi-
ated stumps which still form the Chinese ideal of beauty. This
feature was very conspicuous, but as I am unable to compare
these young colonies with other species at a similar stage, I hesi-
tate to assume its novelty. In the later hatchings it is far less
noticeable, and in the most advanced stages which any of the
healthy colonies have reached, the prolongation has ceased to be
a prominent feature.

An ounce phial contained a quantity of the statoblasts which
were supposed to have lost their vitality by " fouling." These
were now washed thoroughly in a sieve and placed in a half-gallon
jar of water. In about ten days I was rewarded by finding that
they had germinated by scores, and the surface of the water was
dotted with tiny groups floating with the disc side upward ; the
polyp heads and their beautiful plumes of tentacles depending
and spreading below.

On removing a number of the statoblasts, firmly held together
by their marginal hooks, for moi'e minute examination under the
microscope, I found them in all the primary stages of develop-
ment ; from the as yet unaltered condition in which whatever of

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 195

life may have quickened their long dormant cells, was hidden
from sight by the opaque chitin of theii' valves, to that in which
these had been pushed off to right and left and the neophite had
reached forth to discover the nature and limitation of the new
scene into which he had entered.

The statoblasts, as in the other species of this genus, are orbic-
ular, reddish brown in color, relatively thick, with rounded
marginal annulus and a double series of retentive hooks. The
latter spring from circular membranous lines on each side, near
the circumference of the chitinous body, and on one side are
reflexed from the margin, while those pertaining to the other
curve abruptly, partly around the annulus and then become radial
in the equatorial plane ; their surfaces are i-oughened or minutely
tuberculated. Little difference is noticeable between the diameters
or the degrees of convexity of the exposed sides of the statoblast ;
that, however, to which the longer bent booklets are attached, is
generally the larger, with a single sweeping curve, while the other
has often a higher convexit}' at its centre. The chiton is com-
posed of minute hexagonal cells whose outer surfaces appear to
be concave^ or depressed, but their margins are elevated here and
there at the angles, into spinous papillae, with rounded apices,
more numerous near the circumference of the statoblast.

As the germination of the enclosed embryo progresses the sides
or valves are forced apart, separating always at the same portion
of the margin ; the whole annulus remaining attached as before
described, while the chitinous rim of the other is drawn out from
under it, as a pill-box is separated from its lid. This is in marked
contrast with the process by which the valves of Pectinatella are
separated, as shown in the accompanjang diagram.

The rounded edge of the semitransparent coenoecium now
appears and slowl}^ protrudes itself so that it is some hours before
the first polypide projects his immature tentacles. In the begin-
ning, and sometimes for several days, the coenoecium is nearly
filled with granular particles of 3^olk-like matter, opaque b}^ trans-
mitted light and of a light waxen yellow ^ when reflected light is

^ Prof. Alhnan describes the chiton cells of C. macedo as convex upon
their outer surface which thus become "elegantly mammillatecl." A trans-
verse section of the statoblast shows that the annulus is firmly attached to
that side on which the hooks are reflexed, and spreads broadly over the rim
or margin pertaining to the opposite valve.

'^ These are white in Pectinatella.

196 PROCEEDINGS Or THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

used. These are frequently collected into spherical groups, and
one or more may occasionally be seen in the act of circulation
or of violent revolution — the result probably of ciliary currents
within the coenoecium. These granular masses adhere to the
stomach and other internal organs, obscuring their outlines and
making it nearly impossible to detect the appearance of the
secondary polypides ; they follow, however, so soon after the first,
that it is believed that several heads are considerably advanced
before the separation of the valves of the statoblasts. The ten-
tacles of the first polypide, however, are generally much better
developed when it appears, than are those of the succeeding
forms, indicating a nearer approach to maturity. The efi'ect of
ciliary action is quite evident in this immature condition, but the
cilia themselves are minute and difficult of definition. The gran-
ular bodies and groups which obscured the body of the coenoecium
become gradually absorbed, or in someway eliminated, remaining
latest in the caudal projection and finally entirely disappearing.

The whole coenoecium then becomes beautifully transparent,
disclosing not merely the structure of the individual polypides
even when retracted, but the fine lines of the numerous retractor
muscles may be readily traced from their connection with the
stomach branchia, to their insertion in the disc or opposite
portion of the endocyst. The fact that the insertion of these
muscles occur in nearly parallel or radial lines upon the disc of
the coenoecium may account for the term used by writers who speak
of the cells of the coenoecium ; but there are no cell walls, and,
when entirely retracted, the stomachs of the individual polypides
pass through the lines of muscular filaments and lie wherever the}^
can find room. This " finding room " for their several personalities
is often a matter of considerable difficulty to them, and of no little
amusement to the observer, who, when a colony is disturbed will
seethe first few polypides retire with some appearance of graceful
ease, but the laggards must struggle to tuck themselves into a
bed where six or eight are already lying, and repeated jerks and
jostles are necessary before they can finally hide themselves, as
they seem to think, by drawing the transparent coverlid of the
endocyst together over their heads.

The cells of the outer layer of the endocyst are in this genus
larger and of greater depth than the corresponding series in
Pectinatella ; and in both genera appear to be of the same char-

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 191

acter over the whole surface of the coenajcium, there being no
such arrangement of locomotory apparatus upon the lower surface
in Cristatella as Prof. Allman describes and figures in the case
of C. mucedo.^ In both genera, also, by a delicate manipulation
of the light under a high power of the microscope may be
detected the fine lines of transverse and longitudinal muscular
tissue which form the third and fourth layers of Prof. Hyatt's
series, and are visible also under the thinner cell structure of the
evaginated polypide.

As generally accepted, the ectocyst, which, in Pectinatella^
forms a solid and constantly thickening mass of gelatinoid
matter, is in this genus thrown off" as a fugitive film, or, more
generally, a pavement layer of eflTete matter that supports the
colonies and upon which their locomotion is eff'ected. When the
young colonies have been liberated from the floating statoblasts
in my jars, they float, as has been already described, with their
discs at the surface of the water, and this delicate, invisible film
spreads upon the surface, uniting the neighboring colonies and
forming a common basis of support from which they do not
appear voluntarily to remove. In a natural situation on a stream
or pond the wind or currents would probably soon waft them
against some solid substance which they • would afterwards
colonize and inhabit. As has been said, no especial contrivance
appears to exist for facilitating the locomotion of these colonies,
and, while their power in this respect is, of course, unquestion-
able, the writer is inclined to doubt whether it is exercised
voluntarily and with a purpose, or is not rather an accidental
result of the frequent contractions and expansions of the retractor
muscles disturbing the position of alternate portions of the
disc. This seems the more plausible, as we do not find in this
species any method of prehension in the colonies, but merely a
gelatinous or slimy cohesion to the ectocyst.

At maturity the evagination of the polypide in the species
under consideration is complete, leaving not only no " invaginated
fold " but exhibiting the whole digestive system of the polyp

^ " In the middle of the flattened under surface is an oval disc resembling
the foot of a gasteropodous moUusk. On this disc, which is contractile
and admits of frequent changes of shape, the colony adheres to neighboring
objects or creeps about on submerged leaves and stems of aquatic plants,

etc."

198 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

some distance beyond the surface of the coenoecium. The total
length of the digestive tract is rather less than that of the
lophophoric arms and about equal to that of the outer rows of
tentacles. These are fewer in number than in any other described
species, ranging from 52-60.^ In the great majority of the
polyp heads which have been examined the number was 54 ; far
less frequently they range upward through 56 and 58 to 60, in
only one instance passing that number. On the other hand the
tentacular hooks of the statoblasts are more numerous than in
G. ophidioidea, and about the same as in the other species.

Three species of the genus have been already described, G.
mucedo, Cuvier, in Europe, and G. Idee, Leidy, and G. ophidioidea,
Hyatt, in America, The differences existing amongst them are
not considerable, and it admits of question whether all should
not be merged under the prior title. In the present condition of
the subject it would seem that the species now brought forward
is at least as clearly differentiated from any of the former ones
as they are from each other. I will therefore name it, provision-
ally, Gristatella lacustris.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV.

Fig 1 represents a transverse section through the centre of a statoblast of
this species, Gristatella lacustris ; a, a, the exposed chitinous surfaces
of the valves ; b, b, the reflexed ; c, c, the bent, incurved retentive
hooks ; d, d, section of the annuhis, or ring of air cells surrounding
the chitinous body of the statoblast ; e, e, the part of the rim at
which the valves separate at the time of germination, as is shown on a
larger scale in

Fig. 2, which represents one end of the section of a similar statoblast in
the act of separation, the parts indicated by letters corresponding to
those on fig. 1, with the addition of /, a delicate film which is being
stripped from the under siirface of the annulus, and g, (/, which suggest
the relative sizes and frequency of the papillae upon the exposed
surface of the valves.

Fig. 3 exhibits for comparison a corresponding section of the statoblast of
Pectinatella magnifica, Leidy, lettered as before ; a, a, the exposed
surface of the valves ; b, b, the single series of anchorate hooks ;
d, d, sections of the annulus, itself divided by the line e, e, along

^ In C. mucedo and C. Idee these are said' to be "about 80." In C
ophidioidea, "not above 90."

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 199

which the separation of the valves in this genus is effected, as
shown in

Fig. 4, much the larger portion of the annulus with all the hooks (which
are formed by expansions of its dermal surface) remaining upon one
side, and a smaller part, composed of coarser air cells upon the other.
It will be noticed that in Pectinatella the annulus is formed of two
distinct series of cylindrical cells, short upon one side of the separating
line, several times this length upon the other. The corresponding
cells of Cristatella are much more complicated, being formed about
numerous transverse lines upon the internal surface. The figures have
been carefully drawn by the aid of the camera lucida.

Fig. 5. Outline views of the skeleton and statoblast spicules of the sponge
Meyenia Leidyi : A, the normal skeleton spicule ; B and C, side and
end views of the normal birotulate ; a, b, c, the corresponding features
as modified by their environment upon the iron pipes as described.

200

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

[1884.

July 15.

Mr, Thomas Meehan, Yice-President, in the chair.

Fifteen persons present.

A paper entitled " The Geology of Delaware," by F. D. Chester,
was presented for publication.

On Elasticity in the Filaments of Helianthus. — Mr. Thomas
Meehan remarked that in many composite flowers the pollen is
ejected from the apex of the staminal tube, and it became a matter
of interest to ascertain the mechanism by which this is accom-
plished. The flowers of compositse ai-e much frequented by pollen-
collecting insects. Honey-gatherers seldom resort to them. It
is difficult on this account to watch the flow of pollen in the open
air, as it is collected by the insects as fast as it appears. Some
flowers of Helianthus lenticularis^ Dougl., were gathered, and for
the purpose of study placed in saucers of
water in a room where insects could not dis-
turb them. In this way it was observed that
after the corolla tube had reached its full
length, very early the following morning the
staminal tube commenced to grow beyond
the mouth of the corolla, and by about 9
A. M. had extended to a distance of about one-
fourth the whole length of the corolla. The
pollen then commences to emerge through the
upper portion of the staminal tube, which,
the stamens narrowing, has the apices free.
During the day the pollen continues to pour
out, till by nightfall a large amount has
accumulated at the apex of the tube. A
floret at this stage of growth is represented
by fig. 1. The morning of the second day
the arms of the pistil emerge and commence
to expand, and at onqe the staminal tube
begins to descend, exhibiting at the end of
the second day the appeai'ance indicated by
fig. 2. By the end of the third da}^, the
staminal tube has retired entirely within the
tube of the corolla, and with the pistil, commences to wither. A.
careful examiuation shows that through the whole course the
column of united anthers remains entirel}' of the same length.
It is the filaments only which are elastic. These stretch fully
one-half their length. Thej^ ai-e attached to the tube of the
corolla at the inflated portion a short distance above the achene,
and extend to about midway between this point and the end of
the tubular portion at the base of the limb; but when the anther
tube is extended as described in fig. 1, tlie filaments occupy the

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 201

whole of this space. This pollen could fall onthestigmaof theflower
of the previous day, but as the stigma is already covered by pollen
of its own, other pollen is hardly likely to be of much service ; and
even if this outer circle did profit by the pollen of the inner, it would
not be cross-fertilization in an}^ legitimate sense of the word. We
may say emphatically that the arrangements favor self-fertilization.

An interesting feature is the change in the form of the floret
on the second day of expansion. At the point where the stamens
are inserted on the corolla, the tube is somewhat inflated and
covered by short hair. On the first day this inflated portion is
elongated, and the whole tube luiiformly cylindrical, as in fig. 1.
On the second day the inflation is depressed, and the corolla
hypocrateriform as in fig. 2, This is probably owing to the
partial withering of the corolla, but it is worth noting as a guide
in the study of the florets of compositte — the normal form is that
exhibited before the anthers mature.

The extension of the staminal tube is evidently mechanical,
and is due solely to the upward growth of the stigma, which,
partlj' it seems by the incurved points of the stameus, and
partl}^ perhaps b^'^ the expansion of the arras of the pistil, is able
to carry the tube up with it. This force being removed as soon
as the arms emerge, the elastic stamens draw the tube down
again to its normal location. This portion of the observation
was made by Mr. Alois Lunzer, the artist of the Flowers and
Ferns of the United States, then engaged in making a painting of
the flower for that work.

The eflect of this process is to render the plant strictly a self-
fertilizer. The arms of the pistil are covered with rigid hair
having an upward direction. By the pushing upwards of the
pistil in its endeavor to escape from the embrace of the stamens,
these hairs brush the pollen upwards, and it is in this way that
the pollen is forced through the fissures at the apex as already
described. When the arms emerge, they are completely covered
with own-pollen, which remains till the stigmas mature.

Helianthus lenticularis is the common annual sunflower of the
Western plains, and believed by Professor Asa Gray to be the
parent of the garden sunflower. This is not in bloom at the
present date. One species, Helianthus hirsutus, is in bloom, and
exhibits similar features, and the}^ are probably characteristic of
the whole genus, and perhaps of other composite plants. In
Centaurea the apex of the anther tube is closely united, and is
taken up with the development of the pistil, which finally escapes
through a rupture at the side. But in this case there seems to be
a cotemporaneous growth of the filaments. At any rate there is
no elasticity, and the staminal tube is not drawn back to the tube
of the corolla. Pollen is, however, brushed out b}^ the stigmatie
hair, and each floret receives own-pollen as in Helianthus.

The following was ordered to be printed : —
14

202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

CATALOGITE OF MAKTNE SPONGES, COLLECTED BY MR. JOS. WILLCOX,
ON THE WEST COAST OF FLORIDA.

BY HENRY J. CARTER, F. R. S., ETC.

The fragments of the sponges collected by Mr. Willcox which
reached me from Philadelphia on June 12, 1884, are all numbered,
1-59, and have been taken from specimens which, bearing the
same numbers, have been retained at Philadelphia for identifica-
tion, when the result of my examination shall have been received ;
hence the numbers in the catalogue will be found to correspond
with those on the specimens at Philadelphia,

It should be remembered that they are all dry specimens, and
that what I have to examine are only " fragments," hence there
is very little to be said of each beyond name, form, consistence
and color, together with the form and dimension of the spicule
respectively, while they are arranged in accordance with the class-
ification that I have proposed in ray " Notes Introductory to the
Study and Classification of the Spongida," published in the
Annals and Magazine of Natural History, for 1875, vol xvi,
p. 1, etc.^

Catalogue.

Ord. II. CERATINA.
Fam. 2. APLYSINIDA.

No, 19, Aplysina cauliformis, Crtr. ("Annals and Mag. Nat.
History," 1882, vol. ix, p. 270).

Ord. III. PSAMMONEMATA.

Fam, 1, BIBTJLIDA.

Group 2, Parasponqiosa.

No. 41. Paraspongia ? sp. Allied to the officinal sponge,

but with more arenaceous (sand-bearing) fibre.

' Abbreviations.— "Ann." for Annals and Mag. of Nat. Hist.

"Bk." for Bowerbank, monograph of British Spon-

giada, vol. iii.
"Sdt." for Schmidt.
Measurements of the spicules those of the largest present, showing their
dimensions across and longitudinally.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203

Fam. 2. HIRCINIDA.
Group 3. HiRCiNiosA.

No. 23. Hircinia? sp. Massive, erect, lobate. Surface

even, minutely reticulated ; projecting arenaceous tags ; con-
sistence resilient. Color now brown.

No. 26. Hircinia ? sp. Fragment too insignificant for de-
scription.

No. 31. Hircinia tubulosa, Crtr. Consisting of a conical mass
of erect tubular processes. Consistence resilient. Color light
sponge. Fibre scantily cored with arenaceous substance (named
after its form).

No. 36. Hircinia ? sp. Sessile, with solid cylindrical erect

branches or processes interunited. (>onsistence resilient. Color
now sponge-brown. ? = No. 23. (Note. — As the fibre of these
Hircinide was invested with sarcode diflferent from the color of the
fibre itself, there is no saying what color the latter was in its
natural state.)

No. 52. Hircinia ? sp. Sarcode destroyed by Spongio-

phaga communis^ Crtr. (See " Parasites of the Spongida," Ann.,
1878, vol. ii, p. 168.) Look at the white substance under a micro-
scope, to see the filaments of the parasite.

No. 53. Hircinia? sp. Branched; branches solid, cylin-
drical.

No. 54. Hircinia ? sp. Has grown over sedgy leaves.

No. 55. Hircinia ? sp. Sessile, composed of erect conical

tubes.

Group 16. Arenosa.

No. 59. Spongelia, Sdt., ?avara, Sdt.

No. 57. Spongelia avara, Sdt. Red sarcode (Sp. Adriat. Meeres,
p. 29, taf. 3, fig. 6).

No. 51. Spongelia^ Sdt. ? sp. := Dysidea, Bk. Fragment

much worn.

No. 44. Spongelia, Sdt. ? sp.

No. 43. Dysidea, Bk. Like No. 39, but fibrous. ? Spongelia,
Sdt.

No. 24. Spongelia, Sdt., ? pallescens, Sdt. (Sp. Adriat. Meeres,
p. 28). Dysidea, Bk.

No. 39. Dysidea tenerrima, Crtr. Merely sarcode and sand
producing " columnar " structure. No fibre ; thus bearing much
the same relation to the Hirciniosa that the Holorhaphidota do

204 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

to the Rhaphidonemata, viz., a minimum of Kerasine (named
after its structure).

Ord. iy. rhaphidonemata.

. Fam. 1. CHALINIDA.

Group 1. DiGITATA.

No. 13. Ghalina oculata, Bk. A delicate growth.

No. 25. Ghalina oculata, Bk. A form of.

No. 28. Ghalina oculata, Bk. Has grown over woody stems.

No. 29. Ghalina oculata, Bk. Short-branched delicate growth.

No. 42. Ghalina oculata, Bk. Form of.

Fam. 2. CAVOCHALINIDA.

Group 6. ACULEATA.

No. 22. Tuba sororia, Duchass. de Fonb. et Michel. (Spongiares
de la mer Caraibe, PI. 8, fig 2. Harlem, 1864. Also see "Ann."
1882, vol. ix, p. 277, under " Cavochalinida," W. Indian Sponges).

No number. Tuba sororia (D. et M., PI. 8, fig. 2). Covered,
with empty holes, formerly the abodes of a parasitic polyp.

Ord. Y. ECHINONEMATA.

Fam. 1.

Group 4. ECHINOGLATHRATA.

No. 16. Echinoclathria ? sp. Dense mass of erect, small,

round, short-jointed branches, polychotomously dividing and
ending in short processes with rounded terminations ; knotty on
the surface, chiefly from the presence of a small parasitic polj-p.
Consistence hard. Color now gray. Texture dense. Spicule of
one form only, viz. : acute, short, robust, sub-capitate, the shortest
internally and the longest echinating the fibre. Size, about 14
by 1 — 1800 in. (Like Glathria coralloides, Sdt., Sp. Adriat. Meeres,
taf. V, figs. 10 and 11.)

No. 27. Echinoclathria ? sp. The same as No. 16, but with

compressed interuniting branches ending in pointed terminations,
but no parasitic polyp. Spicule about 18 by 2 — 1800 in.

No. 30. Echinoclathria? sj?. Fragment too insignificant

for general description. Compressed, interuniting branches,
ending in pointed divisions. Consistence firm. Color light
sponge-yellow. Fibre short-jointed, bearing internally and exter-
nally capitate acuates, the latter the longest and projecting in

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205

tufts, mixed with a small echinating, spinous acuate (? Dictyo-
cylindrus, Bk.).

No. 37. Echinoclafhria? sp. Dense mass of compressed,

proliferous, interuniting branches arising from a contracted base,
growing on the valve of an Area, terminating in compressed,
somewhat expanded divisions. Surface subhispid. Consistence
hard, tough. Color now brown. Bearing a parasitic polyp
(Palythoa). Fibre short-jointed, amber-colored, bearing three
forms of spicules, viz. : 1, robust, acuate with globular tubercu-
lated head, about 23 by 2 — 1800 in. in its greatest dimensions ; 2,
long smooth acuate, 20 by ^—1800 in.; 3, echinating spicule,
clavate, spined, small, 6 by i— 1800 in. (Note.— If the " tubercu-
lated head " is not an accidental form, it is a markedly distin-
guishing character.)

No. 38. The same as No. 21.

No. 46. Echinoclathria? sp. Fragment useless for general

form. Flimsy branched, interuniting, ridged. Consistence firm.
Color now whitish gray. Fibre tough, short-jointed, amber-
colored, bearing two forms of spicule, viz. : 1 , large, long and short
robust acuates, less in diameter at the large end than in the
middle of the shaft; 2, echinating, short spinous acuate.

Fam. 2. AXINELLIDA.

Group 6. MULTIFORMTA.

No. 6. Reniera digitata, Sdt. (Spong. Adriat. Meeres, p. 15, taf.
7, fig. 11.) Massive, sessile lobate. Surface cellular, roughened
by ridges and small processes. Consistence firm. Color orange.
Structure cellular. (? A species of the genus Higginsia, Higgin,
"Ann.," 1877, vol. 19, p. 291 ; vol. xiv, fig. 1.)

No. 7. Higginsia coralloides, Higgin ("Ann.," 1. c).

No. 15. Axinellid,? gen. et sp. Fragment shreddy, branching,
tough, brown color. Fibre short-jointed, very tough and amber-
colored, hispid, bearing three forms of spicules, viz. : 1, robust,
simple, acuate, long and short; 2, fine, long, setaceous, acuate ;
3, small, navicular anchorate, flesh-spicule. The acuates are
situated partly in and partly projecting from the fibre echin-
atingly, with the anchorate plentifully scattered about their base
of attachment. (? Glathria Sdt., Sp. Adriat. Meeres).

No. 35. Axinella polypoides, Sdt. (Sp. Adriat. Meeres, p. 3,
taf. 6, fig. 4).

No. 45. Higginsia coralloides, Higgin ("Ann.," 1. c). Erect

206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

branches, compressed interuniting, roughened by small projecting
processes. Consistence now hard. Color whitish gray, spicules
of two forms, viz. : 1, large acerate, smooth, 40 by 2 — 1800 in. ; 2,
small acerate, spinous, partly in and partly out of the fibre, pro-
jecting echinatingly from the surface.

Ord. YI. HOLORHAPHIDOTA.
Fam. 1. RENIERIDA.
Group 1. Amorphozoa,
No. 5. Halichondria panicea, Bk., attached to sea-weed, covered
with white Melobesia.

No. 12. Halichondria panicea, Bk.
No. 34. Halichondria panicea, Bk.
No. 58. Halichondria panicea, Bk., much worn.

Fam. 2. ISODICTYOSA.
No. IT. Isodictya, Bk. ? sp. Fragment of a branch. Con-
sistence crumbly. Color white. Spicule acerate, 11 by | — 1800
in. (Where the spicule is acerate, which is generally the case,
the species ai'e ill-defined, as yet.)

Group 3. Thalyosa.

No. 48. Reniera? sp. Fragmentofacylindrical, solid branch,

in which the fibre is entirely composed of small acerate spicules,
about 13-1800 in. long. (These species, for the foregoing reason,
are, as yet, ill-defined , except where their general form is peculiar.)

No. 49. The same.

Group 6. Halichondrina.

No. 32. Halichondria incrustans, Mihi. Yariety with "angu-
lated " (Bk.) anchorate and smooth acuate. Consistence crumbly.
Color white. Fragment massive, attached to a dark green, dry,
gelatinous, now hardened mass, which, if not one of the " Carnosa,"
is probably the remains of a compound tunicated ascidian.

Suberites par excellence. Groups 10, 11 and 12. Cavernosa,
Compacta, Laxa.

10. Cavernosa.

No. 3. Suberites? sp. Fragment useless for general form, as

the whole is broken down into a mass of spicular pulp and fibre.
Color yellowish. Spicule of one form onl}^, viz., pin-like; shaft
smooth, slightly fusiform and curved ; head oval ; size, 30 by
1—1800 in. (? = No. 18.)

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 20V

No. 10. Raphyrus Griffithsii, Bk. Branched tubular variety,
therefore might he designated " ramotubulata," Crtr. (The
first instance of this form that I have seen.)

No. 11. The same, but the usual massive, solid form. N. B. —
It is Gliona celata, which, after having destroyed the oyster-shell
in which it generally burrows, grows into the free form called
by Dr. Bowerbank " Raphyrus Griffithsii " (Mon., vol. iii, pi. 64).

No. 18. Suberites ? sp. Fragment branched and interuniting

most irregularly. Surface covered with short warty and digiti-
form processes. Consistence light corky. Color ochre-yellow.
Structure cellulo-cavernous. Spicule of one form only, viz., pin-
like ; shaft smooth, slightly fusiform and curved ; head oval, often
followed towards the shaft, by an annular inflation ; size, 30 by
1_1800 in.

No. 33. Suberites ? sp. Fragment useless for general form ;

further than that it is verj^ irregular and interuniting, suberite-
like. Consistence firm. Color white. Structure cancello-cavern-
ous. Spicule of one form only, viz., pin-like ; shaft smooth,
slightly fusiform and curved ; head globo-conical ; about 65 by
1—1800 in.

No. 1. Suberites? sp. Massive, erect, sessile, terminating

in small, conical processes. Consistence now firm. Color gray
outside, yellowish inside. Structure cancello-cavernous. Spicule
of one form only, viz., pin-like ; shaft smooth, slightly fusiform
and curved ; head nearly oval ; point obtusely rounded ; size 25
by 1 — 1800 in. in its greatest dimensions. (If the obtuseness of
the point is not accidental, this is a good character.)

11. Compact A.

No. 4. Suberites ? sp. Taking the form of the Serpula-

tubes over which it has grown, interuniting and enclosing shells.
Consistence hard now and compact. Surface villous. Color
yellowish gray. Spicule of one form only, viz., pin-like ; shaft
smooth, slightly fusiform and curved; head oval, often prolonged
posteriorly ; size 50 by 1 — 1800 in.

No. 8. Suberites ? sp. Taking its form from the sedgy

leaves over which it has grown. Consistence cheesy, now hard.
Color greenish outside (adventitious ?), yellowish within. Like
Hymeniacedon carnosa, Bk., in consistence and structure, if not
in the forjn of the head of the spicule.

208 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

No. 40. Suberites? sp. Irregularly branched, interuniting,

ending in round-topped processes. Consistence compact. Color
reddish yellow. Spicule of one form onl^', viz., pin-like ; head
globular with posterior projection, tricuspid like in profile.
(? Suberites marsa, Sdt., Sp. Adriat. Meeres, p. 6*1, taf. T, fig. 2.)

12. Laxa.

No. 20. Halichondria sanguinea, Bk. (Mon., vol. iii, pi. 32,

fig. 5).

Fam. 13. DONATINA.

No. 47. Tethya lyncurium^Ws.. (pi. 15, fig. 17, op. cit.). Robust

form with large cavernous excavations on the surface, and bundles

of spicules sunk in the dry, dark, chondroid tissue.

Fam. 14. GEODINA.
No. 21. Geodia tuberculosa, Bk. (Proc. Zool. Soc, 1872, p. 676,
pi. 46).

No. 50. The same. Cylindrical fragment.

Ord. YIII. CALCAREA.

No. 9. Ascaltis Lamarckii, Haeckel (Die Kalkschwarame, vol. 2,
p. 60, Atlas, taf. 9, fig. 5). Massive, growing among sand and
round the stems of sea-weed. Enveloping sand. {Clathrina,
Gray.)

Numbers absent, viz., 2, 14 and 56.

Observations.

Lest it should be thought that it is only necessary to present
a fragment of a sponge to have its name and description pointed
out as readily as this might be done with a plant in botany, the
former being expected from the accumulated product of a few
years, while the latter is one of centuries, I would append the
following remarks on the above " Catalogue ^^ : —

The family of Hircinida requires to be generally reviewed, but
the time for this has not arrived, since if not by actual specimens
preserved when fresh in a wet state, it must be done by a review
of all the illustrated descriptions of this kind that have been
published ; while considering that the specimens of Hircinida
are exceedingly numerous and very much alike, nothing but an
opportunity of this kind holds out any hope of their e\QY being
collated, divided and finally arranged in such a manner as would
be useful to the student. In the spiculiferous sponges the form
of the spicule often facilitates this, but in the Hircinida generally.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 209

when divested of the sarcode, which often has a particular color,
there is absolutely nothing left but the horny fibre covered with a
heterogeneous assemblage of foreign objects, viz., sand, frag-
mentary sponge-spicules and other microscopic bodies, which
vary in amount and kind with those which are most plentiful in
the locality where the sponge may be growing, if we except the
general form which the skeletons composed of this fibre may
retain.

The Suberites par escellence, too, like the Hircinias, require a
similar treatment, for here the skeletal spicule, being for the most
part simply pin-like, is so similar and so slightly varied in form,
that, in most instances, this alone would be insufiicient for dis-
tinction. However, the skeletal spicule is often accompanied by a
flesh-spicule of a spini-spirular or other form, which lessens the
difficulty; but they can seldom be seen without mounting a
microscopic fragment in balsam, when the transparency renders
them (if there are any) plain, which the wet sarcode previously
rendered obscure. This should be done with all the specimens
above mentioned, as it involves an amount of time which I now
have not at my disposal ; hence can only recommend the student
to consult my initiatory attempt to do this in the " Annals " of
1882 ("West Indian Sponges," etc., vol. 9, p. 349, etc., pi. xii, figs.
25-30).

See also, for the group Donatina and species Donatia lyncurium,
"General observations " (lb. ib., p. 358, etc.).

In m}' division of the Echinonemata, the first groups of the
families Ectyonida and Axinellida respectivelj', viz., " 1 " and
" 6 " i. e. " Pluriformia " and " Multiformia " are merely pro-
visional terms for including a vast number of species which here-
after will have to undergo description, illustration and division,
when they shall have been usefully collated, etc., after the manner
already mentioned, but so much time, taste, labor and opportunity
will be required for this, that many years must pass before it even
approaches completion.

The number of species of sponges that exist and have still to
be discovered has been chiefly foreshadowed to me by the dry
specimens in the British Museum, upon which m}^ proposed
" Classification " has been based, but cannot be put forthwith
any certainty under such circumstances, more especially the sub-
division of the orders.

210 proceedings of the academy of [1884.

July 22.
Mr. Thomas Meeeian, Yiee-President, in the chair.
Eleven persons present.

July 29.
Mr. Thomas Meehan, Yice-President, in the chair.
Eight persons present.

Sexual Characteristics in Zinnia. — Mr. Thomas Meehan,
referi'ino; to some so-called double Zinnias on the table, remarked
on the change of sexual character which followed the change of
a tubular to a ligulate floret This was not confined to Zinnia,
but occurred in Dahlia, and, he believed, all composite flowers.
It must be a well-known fact, but had not, so far as he knew,
been placed on record. It was well worthy of study by those
interested in the laws of sex. In Zinnia a single ligulate floret
would often be surrounded by tubular and hermaphrodite ones;
but it would have the purely pistillate character of the ray florets.
In like manner, when, in the double Dahlia, the tubular florets
became ligulate, the neutral character of the ray florets followed
with them. It was evident that in these cases there was an
intimate connection between the form of the floret and its sexual
character. There was even a diff"erence in the form of the akene
in the diff'erent florets of Zinnia. The ligulate female floret had
a broad akene, tapering at the summit, and with the apex very
hairy ; while the akene of the tubular hermaphrodite floret was
truncate, and entirely smooth.

He made some further remarks on the growth of the floret in
connection with that of the staminal tube. In many compositae
the growth of the pistil continued for a day or two after the
corolla had ceased to grow, pushing up often to a length double
that of the corolla. In Zinnia the growth of the floret was
enormous on the last day, often doubling its previous length in
twenty-four hours. It always remained longer than the pistil,
until it withered away, when the expanded arms of the pistil were
exposed. The anther cells burst before tiie floret opened, and,
though the arms could not expand, enough pollen entered by the
stigmatic fissure to ensure self-fertilization.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES Of PHILADELPHIA, 211

DESCRIPTION OF NEW SPECIES OF TERRESTRIAL MOLLTJSCA OF CUBA.

BY RAFAEL ARANGO.
Choanopoma uncinatum Arango (fig. 1).

Testa subperforata, oblongo pupseformis, teniuscula, truncata,
filoso costata, furcescenti-albida, seriebus macularum
rufarum longitudinaliter ornata ; sutura profunda, costis
excurrentibus incrassatis albido-dentata ; anfr, siiperst.
4-5 convexiiisculi, ultimus antice solutus, dorso cari-
natus ; apertara verticalis, ovalis ; peritreraa duplex,
internum breve, externum dilatatum, lateri dextro latiore,
undulato, in angulo supero uncinate reflexum. Operculum
normale.

Long. 16 mill.; diam. t mill.; apert. 4 mill.

Habitat. — San Juan de las Lleras, prope Villaclara.

Siraillimura Tudorse Moreletianse, differt operculo Choanopo-
matum et forma altera peritrematis.

Cylindrella assimiJis Arango (fig. 2).

Testa simillima Cyl. arcustriatse. Differt statura magis cylin-
drica, costis minus confeitis, fortioribus ; fasciis spadicea
suturam anfractus sequentis tangente et prope peri
trema expansum terminante (magis conspieua quam in
arcv striata). Anfractus 12 testae integrse.

Long. 23-26 mill.; diam. 6 mill.; apert. 4 mill.

Habitat. — La lagua, prope La Palma in provincia
Pinar del Rio.

Cylindrella contentiosa Arang'^.

Testa vix rimata, fusiformi-turrita, fusco-cornea, pallidee pauce
variegata ; spira sursum sensim attenuata ; truncata ; sutura
subcrenulata ; anfr. superst. 14-15 planulati, ultimus adnatus,
basi filoso-carinatus ; apertura subcircularis ; peritrema undique
jequaliter expansum, album.

Long, testae truncatae 14-16 mill. ; diam. 3 mill.

Columna interna lamina unica acuta oblique circumvoluta.

Habitat. — San Juan de las Lleras, prope Villaclara.

212 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Cylindrella Lajoncherei Aiango.

Testa fiisiformi-elongata, gracilis, subtruncata, tenuis, sub-
oblique costata, diaphana, albicla ; anfr. superst. 15-17, ultimus
solutus, deorsum protractus ; sutura simplex ; apertura oblique
circularis, peritrema undique breviter expansum.

Long. 15-17 mill. ; diam. 2^ mill.

Columna interna filoso-torta.

Habitat. — San Juan de las Lleras, prope Yillaclara.

Similis Cyl. Philippianse, differt forma longiori, eostis remo-
tioribus et colore albido (nee fusculo-variegato).

Cylindrella Thomsoni Arango (fig. 3).

Testa similis Cyl. coloratse (vide descriptionem) sed
differt statura magis cylindrica, colore corneo, testa pellu-
cida, fascia spadicea solummodo in anfractu ultimo visible.
Anfractus 14 testse integrae.

Habitat. — " La lagua^'' prope La Palma in provincia
Pinar del Rio.

Cylindrella infortunata Arango (fig 4).

Pruc. Acad. Nat. Sc. of Phila., 1882, p. 106.

Testa non rimata, subfusiformi-turrita, tenuis, diaphana,
chordato-eostata, albido-cornea ; spira breviter truncata ;
sutura profunda, non crenulata; anfr. superstites 12, plani-
usculi, ultimus breviter solutus; basi obsolete carinatus;
apertura subovalis ; peritrema expansiusculum, album.

Longitud. testse truncatae 13 mill. ; diam. 3 mill.

Columna interna 3-plicata, plica superiori ampliori.

Habitat. — Prsedium '■'■La Chorera^'' municipium Yifiales,
in provincia Pinar del Rio.

Cylindrella colorata Arango (fig. 5).

Proc. Ac^d. Nat. Sciences, 1882, p. 106.

A figure of this species is now given from a t3^pe
specimen.

1884.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 213

August 5.
Mr. Edw. Potts in the chair.
Eleven persons present.

On Paludicella erecta. — Mr. Edward Potts desired to have a
preliminary record made of his recent discovery or identification
of a new species of Paludicella^ for which he proposes the name
Paludicella erecta.

This genus of fresh-water polyps has heretofore contained only
the single clearly defined species P. Ehrenhergi^ Van Beneden
(Alcyonella articulata, Ehrenberg"), the other two names, P. pro-
cumbens and P. elongata, suggested by Mr. Albany Hancock and
Prof. Leidy, being considered by Prof. Allman as identical with
the original type. The present form is strikingly diff"erent from
the old one, both in the number of its ciliated tentacles and in
the character of the coenoecial cells. The doubt which has lin-
gered in the mind of the speaker has not been as to the species,
but whether, in view of the difficult determination of the char-
acteristic septae between the cells, amounting in fact to an
apparent absence of them, a new genus might not be required to
accommodate it.

It was first noticed in Tacon}^ Creek, a small stream in Mont-
gomery County, Pennsylvania, at that place perhaps fifty feet
above tide-water. A few days after it was also gathered within
tidal limits in both the Delaware and Schuylkill Rivers, near
Philadelphia. In the first-named locality it was found most
abundantly in the pools amongst the rapids of the stream, fre-
quently covering the upper surface of stones, at the depth of a
foot or more, to the extent of many square inches. The erect
portions of the coenoecial cells in the denser parts of the colonies
are about a line in height and, standing very closely, suggest a
comparison with the surface of a chestnut-burr. In the rivers
they were found penetrating the mass of encrusting sponges,
particularly Meyenia Leidyi.

These upright tubules are chitinous prolongations of very
irregularly inflated cells, resting in compact disorder upon the
supporting surface, crossed and connected in some manner not
yet intelligible, by meandering cylindrical rhizomes, sometimes of
great relative length. These are mostly terminal and simple, but
are sometimes branched and frequently originate in an indif-
ferent lateral portion of a cell. The tubular prolongations
are, of course, always single ; the invaginated polyp retiring
within the inflated portion of the cell. Septae were, in a few
instances, discovered in the rhizomes near their insertion or
connection with the inflated portion of the cells. The upright

214 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

portions of those cells which seemed to be least matured were
longer than those of their older neighbors, subclavate or spindle-
shaped and rounded at the extremities. The otliers are cylin-
drical or slightly widening downwai'ds and shorter tlian the
former bj^ the invagination of the terminal portion of the
ectocyst. This has the effect of producing the angular appear-
ance of the orifice, so familiar in the older species ; but while
that is generally quadrangular, this has frequently five or more
sides. The younger cells are nearly transparent, but they darken
with age and become somewhat encrusted with adherent particles
and overgrown by commensal parasites, Limnias, Pi/xicola, and
the like.

The polypides are shy, but fond of the light, and when other-
wise undisturbed will remain for a long time protruded in the
full glare of microscopic illumination. It can then be seen
that the lophophore is circular, without epistome, supporting
ordinarily twenty tentacles, taking the shape of a claret glass and
opening upwards. (Nineteen and twenty-one tentacles have
been doubtfully counted, while the above-mentioned number is
frequent; F. Ehrenbergiis universally stated to have but sixteen).
A peculiarity of the tentacles is the presence upon the outer
median line of each, of a ratlier sparsely filled series of quiescent
setae, in strong contrast with the rapidly moving cilia around
them.

The development of this polyp from the ovum, of which
interesting hints have been obtained, and its internal structural
peculiarities, are reserved for further study, and if satisfactory
results shall have been attained, they will be treated of in a later
paper. The nearly simultaneous observation of this species in
three distinct localities, and its abundance in each, indicates that
it is probably not uncommon, and excites surprise that it does
not appear to have been previously noticed.

August 12.
Mr. Thomas Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Fifteen persons present.

A Large Zircon. — Dr. A. E. Foote recorded the discovery of
the largest crystal of zircon ever known. It is dj inches high,
4 inches on one face and 3| inches on the other. It undoubtedly
originally weighed twelve pounds, but owing to a small portion
being lost by fracturing it now weighs but eleven and three-quarter
pounds. The largest cr3^stal ever known before weighed less
than three pounds. The crystal is doubly terminated, and,
though somewhat broken in taking out nearly all the pieces were
saved. At one end there are two terminations and one of these

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 215

was broken off in some great convulsion of the earth's surface.
This had been separated from the main cr3'stal by a piece of
orthoclase that had unmistakably been formed since the rupture
of the crystal. Such a fact is of great importance in studying
the geological history of the formation. The locality is Brudi-
nelle, Renfrew Co., Ontario, Canada, and the rock is a vein of
pink feldspar in a Laurentian gneiss. It is associated with sphene
and crystals of peristerite (?). Some of the faces of the latter
show tiie moonstone reflections very plainly. Cavities once filled
with calcite (now mostly dissolved away) occur in the vein.
There are also some small crystals that need further examination.

August 19.
Mr. J. H. Redfield in the chair.
Fifteen persons present.
The death of W. L. Schaeffer, a member, was announced.

August 26.

Mr, J. H. Redfield in the chair.

Fourteen persons present.

The death of James L. Claghorn, a member, was announced.
Edward P. Bliss and Ralph W. Seiss, M.D., were elected
members.

September 2.
Rev. H. C. McCoOK, D. D., Yice-President, in the chair.
Twent3'-one persons present.

On the wide Distribution of some American Sponges. — Allusion
having been made to the wide distribution of certain species of
spiders over the North American continent, Mr. E. Potts, refer-
ring to the fresh-water sponge fauna of this country, said, that
Spongilla fragilis, the first sjtecies named in America, described
by Dr. Leidy in 1851 from specimens collected near Philadelphia,
bad since been found abundantly along the Atlantic coast from
Florida to Nova Scotia. It had been gathered at several points
along the St. Lawrence and in the great lakes, through the middle
continent, and in the far west had been described by Dr. Bower-
bank, in 1863, under the name of S. Lordii, as found in the lakes
and streams flowing from the Cascade Range in British Columbia,

216 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

affluents of the majestic Columbia River. The species ma^^, there-
fore, be regarded as strictly continental in its range, and until
very recently it has been distinctively American. It is a little
singular that the only other place in which it has been noticed is
in the neighborhood of Charkow, in Russia, where it was dis-
covered, a few months since, by Dr. L. Dybowski.

The specimens of this species from Nova Scotia had been
collected by Mr. A. H. Mackay, B. A.,B. S., of Pictou Academy,
Pictou, N. S., from whom the speaker had recently received a
collection of sponges, phenomenal in its character, both as regards
the number of genera and species represented, and the excellent
judgment that had attached to most of them their proper names,
from apparently very insufficient data. The collection was the
result of few days' search within a limited district, " from lakes
in and near the water shed of Nova Scotia, near the borders
of the three counties of Pictou, Guysboro and Antigonish," at
elevations of from 100 to 700 feet above sea level. Of the genus
Spongilla^ it contains three species, S. lacustris^ S.fragilis, and
S. iglooiformis ; of the genus J^fej/ema, two species, M. fiuviatilis
and M. Everetti; of the genus Heteromei/enia, two, H. argy-
rosperma and H. Byderi, and of the genus TiibeUa, one species, T.
Pennayivanica — eight species, representing four genera. Besides
these there were small specimens of another species, evidently
new, but whose genus relations could not be determined on account
of the absence of statoblasts.

In some respects the most important find in the collection is
Meyenia Everetti Mills ; this being only the second instance in
which the species has been discovered. The original locality was
Gilder Pond upon Mt. Everett, in Berkshire Co., Mass., at an
elevation of 1800 or 2000 feet above the sea. It was there col-
lected by Dr. F. Wolle and Mr. H. S. Kitchel of Bethlehem, Pa.,
well known for their invaluable work among the desmids and
diatoms ; and examined simultaneously by Mr. H. Mills of Buf-
falo, N. Y., and the speaker. Its most striking peculiarity is the
presence, all through the dermal tissues, of very minute birot-
ulate spicules, the only instance in which these have been observed
as characteristic features of the dermal surface in any fresh-water
sponges ; unless the complicated forms found in Mtyenia plumosa
Carter, may be considered an exception.

These birotulates in the present collection average one-third
longer than those before examined, and are in every way more
robust. The si)eaker was gratified in finding this confirmation of a
rule which he has long since observed to hold amongst the infinite
variations of size and form noticeable in collections of the same
species from various localities ; viz , that the spicules of all species
increase regularly in size and solidity as we descend from high
altitudes towards the sea-level, where is found the exti'eme limit
of the series. He does not attribute this gradation to a change
of climatic conditions, but more probably to a gradual and con-

18S4.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211

stant improvement in the food-supply or in the siliceous constit-
uent of the water. He has traced the workings of the rule more
particularly through the very variable species, Spongilla lacustris
and S.fragilis; in Meyenia fluviatilis^ in Heteromeyenia argyro-
sperma and H. Kyderi, and lastly and most conspicuously in
Tuhella Fenvsylvanica. The extremes in this last series differ so
widely that they wJbld hardly be taken to belong to the same
species, but the intermediate grades have all been collected, largely
from the same stream ; and as a result several species named in this
and other cases, have relapsed into synonyms.

September 9.

Dr. W. S. W. RuscHENBEEGER, in the chair.

Eleven persons present.

The death of R. E. Rogers, M. D., a member, was announced.

September 16.
Rev. H. C. McCooK, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Seventeen persons present.

On the Minute Fauna of Fairmount Beservoir. — Mr. E. Potts
alluded to the difficulties that ordinarily prevent a thorough study
of the fixed aquatic fiiuna, which he described as thereby generally
limited to collections from the shallow water near the margins of
lakes and streams, or of such forms as may adhere to the few
timbers or stones that can be dragged from a greater depth. He
therefore urged the importance of making use of such opportuni-
ties as are furnished by the temporary drainage of reservoirs,
canals, etc., to examine thoroughly the incrustations upon exposed
walls and timbers, or on the bed of the stream.

Such an occasion was affoixled a few days since, when the acci-
dental breaking of a valve necessitated the drawing ofi' of the
water from tlie Fairmount reservoirs. These are divided by per-
pendicular walls, eight or ten feet in height, and, unfortunately,
facilities were not at hand in the shape of ladders, planks, etc., to
enable him to make a minute examination of them. From the
margin, however, could be seen at many places patches of the
s\do\)ges, Spongilla fragilis and Meyenia Jiuviatilis^whila the cages
over the outlet ])ipes, and, more strikingly, the walls surrounding
the main outlet at the southeast corner, were thickly encrusted with
Meyenia Leidyi. The last-named sponge is very compact and
little liable to crumble during the winter season, so that it is prob-
able that the large masses, some of them nearly an inch in thick-

15

318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

ness, and a foot or two in diameter, represent the aggregation of
several ^^ears. In a few places, at tlie base of the walls, the pale
green branches of Spongilla lacuatris could be seen, and occa-
sionall}', to the speaker's surprise, slender waving processes of the
same species, totally colorless, could be seen reaching up through
the mud in little groups upon the bottom. He was surprised,
because he had always held that it was impotsible for sponges to
live upon a muddy bottom, and theoretic reasoning would still
suggest that probably only this species, which can thus hold itself
up out of the suffocating silt, can survive the constant deposition
of siliceous particles. The total amount of sponge growth was
relatively small, and the probability of an aqueous taint from it,
very remote.

The commensal habit of many of the lower animals who feed by
the creation of ciliary whirlpool currents, has been frequently
referred to ; the weaker current-makers, such as vorticell0e,stentors,
and the errant and tubicolous rotifers, planting themselves about
the heads of the stronger pol^'zoa to supply their own nets with
what may have escaped from the others. The same instinctive
principle which leads all these to locate themselves most plenti-
fully amongst the stones in the rapids of streams, was particularly
noticeable in promoting their aggregation upon and in the neigh-
borhood of the inlet and outlet gates of tiie reservoirs. The feeble
currents produced b}' each can only bring within its reach the
floating provision from a! very limited area; the volume of water
poured through these gates brings to them a rich supply, and the
numbers and variety of these organisms increase in proportion.
Of the fixed forms were seen amongst the bryozoa, beside one or
more undetermined species of Flumatella — Pectinatella magnifica
and Urnatella gracilis of Leidy, and the newly described Palu-
dicella erecta. Attached to these were Yorticellae, Epistilis and
Stentors innumerable; Pyxicola SLud Acineta; rotifers of various
names, including prominently Limnias and other, probably unde-
scribed forms among the Melicertidse. Very abundant among these
was the interesting chsetobranch annelid, Manayunkia speciosa
Leidy, which has of late been frequently noticed in this vicinity,
and the wonderfully marine-looking hydroid Cordylophora lacus-
tris. This last was particularly abundant around the southeast
outlet ; its stems forming a complete matting over many yards
of surface, commingled with br3'ozoa and sponges in intricate
confusion.

A large valve had been removed from a discharging main on the
southern side of the reservoir hill, a hundred yards or more from
the opening in the bottom of one of the basins, and where all light
was consequently absent. An incrustation, averaging perhaps
three-eighths of an inch in thickness, upon the inner surface of this
valve, was found to be largely composed of the gemmuhe and
spicules of Meyenia Leidyi ; mingled with which were stems of

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219

Plumatella, Urnatella, and Cordylophora lacusfris. The fact that
all these can thus thrive in absolute darkness throws some doubt
upon the supposed sensitiveness of these forms to the presence or
absence of light, as does also the fact that while Faludicella
Ehrenbergi is said to seek the darkest corners, the speaker
found his new species, P. erecta, apparently rejoicing in the
glare of the full sunlight.

Of course mau}^ other creatures than those above named were
casually seen in this connection, including chiefly amoebae, free-
swimming protozoans and entomostracans, planarian worms,
hydras and aquatic insect-larvae ; but the former are particularly
mentioned as among the most interesting and beautiful of those
that freely and innocently drink of the same cup with ourselves.

September 23.
Mr. Edw. Potts, in the chair.

Nine persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —

"A Review of the American Species of the Genus Hemi-
ramphus," b}' Seth E. Meek and David K. Goss,

"A Review of the American Species of the Genus Teuthis," by
Seth E. Meek and Martin L. Hoffman.

"A Review of the American Species of Scomberomorus," by
Seth E. Meek and Robert G. Newland.

Tunisian Flints. — Dr. D. G. Brinton remarked that the flints
presented through him this evening had been received from the
eminent archaeologist, the Marquis de Nadaillac, whose son, an
officer in the French arm}^, obtained them at the station of Ras-
el-Oued, near Biban, on the southeastern coast of Tunis. The speci-
mens consist of flint chips, arrow-points, and a semi-lunar shaped
implement of small size, which resembles the " stemmed scrapers "
found in America. This form was obtained from the lower levels,
and is characteristic, in France, of the later productions of the
stone age, especially of that epoch called by French archae-
ologists "'the epoch of Robenhausen," from the locality of that
name in Switzerland. Chronologicall}', this is the first epoch of
the appearance of man on the globe, the previous implement-
using animals being more properly anthropoids. Those made
use of stone onl}', not having learned the dressing of bone or
horn. This view adds to the interest of the query as to the
purpose of these scrapers, as they are called in default of a better
name. That they were an important tool to the primitive man is
evident from their wide distribution. They have been found in

220 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

France, in the Crimea, in India, in America, in strata of great
antiquity (both North and South America), and here we have
them in Africa.

The archaeology of the North African Coast has special claims
to attention, as from there apparently a very ancient migration
advanced northward, passing in one direction through Spain, and
in another by way of Malta, Sicily and Italy. This was cotem-
porary with the appearance of the Elephas Africanus in Europe,
whose bones have been found in intimate association with those
of man in various localities. It was long anterior to the immi-
gration of the Iberians or Basques, who by some are traced
to North Africa. Another point of interest may be added. The
only locality in the Old World where animal or effigy mounds
have been reported is in North Africa, in Algiers, near the forest
of Tenrit-el-Sad, south of Miliana. As these peculiar structures
are so frequent in the Mississippi Valley, the coincidence is worth
noting.

Prof. Heilprtn contended, that while on the hj^pothesis of
evolution no objection could be raised to an assumption which
made an animal intermediate between man and the anthropoid
apes sufficiently intelligent to understand the full value and
manufacture of stone implements such as were exhibited, yet, as
a matter of fact, paleontological evidence had thus far failed to
prove that any such use or manufacture had been made of them,
as was here claimed. Indeed, no evidence was forthcoming to
show that the implements were not the work of man himself,
despite the fact that no traces of human remains were found
associated with the fragments. The assumption that the advent
of man dates only to a given period of the so-called " stone age,"
was considered to be purely gratuitous, and to rest solely on
negative evidence. Many archaeologists concur in the belief that
his remains may yet be found in deposits of strictly Tertiary
age, and some, even in the early part of this period. The speaker
discussed the theory of the migration of races, and the succes-
sive introduction, into different regions, at different periods of
time, of the various epochs marking the development of the
human race.

September 30.

Mr. Edw. Potts in the chair.

Twenty-four persons present.

Henry F. Osborn, John Wanamaker, and Miss Adele M. Fielde
were elected members.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 221

A EEVIEW OF THE AMEBICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS HEMIKHAMPHUS.
BY SETH E. MEEK AND DAVID K. GOSS.

The American species of the genus Hemirhamphus are in a
condition of great confusion. In this paper we have endeavored
to give the synon3^ms of those species which seem to be valid,
with an analysis of their specific characters. The paper is based
on specimens belonging to the Indiana University, and to the
United States National Museum, all of them collected by Professor
David S. Jordan on the coast of Florida and at Havana.

This collection comprises three of the four Atlantic species
admitted by us, the published descriptions indicating the exist-
ence of another {H. balao), as yet unknown to us.

Euleptorhamphus longirostris is not here mentioned, as we
regard it as the type of a genus distinct from Hemirhamphus.

We are very much indebted to Professor Jordan for use of his
library and for valuable aid.

Analysis of American species of the genus Hemirhamphus.

a. Anal fin about as long as dorsal and opposite it, its rays 14 to
16 ; sides with a distinct silvery band ; last ray of dorsal not
produced in a filament.

h. Ventrals inserted about midway between base of caudal and
posterior margin of eye ; dorsal and anal fins scaly ; lat.
1. 53 to 56.

c. Length of mandible (from tip of upper jaw) not longer
than rest of head ; body and head comparatively
robust; D. 15; A. 16. unifasciatus. 1.

cc. Length of mandible (from tip of upper jaw) not shorter
than rest of head ; body comparatively slender. D. 14 ;
A. 15. roherti. 2.

hb. Ventrals inserted midway between base of caudal and gill
openings ; dorsal and anal fins not scaly ; lat. 1. 63 ; D.
14 : A. 14. rosse. 3.

222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

aa. Anal fin about f length of dorsal, its insertion behind that of
dorsal, its rays 11 or 12; sides without distinct silvery
band ; last ray of dorsal produced in a short filament.

d. Scales comparatively large, about 53 in lateral line ;
upper lobe of caudal bright orange in life. D. 14 ;
A. 12. pleii. 4.

dd. Scales comparatively small, about 63 in lateral line
( Valenciennes) ; upper lobe of caudal dirty violet
(Poey); D. 11-14; A. 11-12 (Poey). balao. 5-

1. Hemirhamphus unifasciatus.

Hemirhamphus unifasciatus Raiizani, Nov. Comm. Acad. Sci. Inst.,

Bonon, v, 1842, 3.6, Taf. 25 (Brazil) ; Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit.

Mus., vi, 1866, 262 (in'part ; West Indies ; Rio Janeiro) ; Cope, Tians.

Amer. Phil. Soc, 1871, 481 (St. Martin's) ; Jo: dan & Gilbert, Proc.

U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 924 (Panama; no description). (Not H.

unifasciatus of most American writers.)
f HcmirhampJms picarti Cuv. & Val., Hist. Nat. Poiss., xix, 1846, 25

(Africa).

HemirliamjiJius richardi Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., xix,

1846, 26 (Antilles ; Cayenne ; Bahia ; Rio Janeiro).
HyporhampTius tricuspidatus Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1859,

131 (Barbadoes).

Hemirhamphus fasciatus Poey, Memorias, ii, 1860, 299 (Cuba ; not of
Bleeker).

Hemirhamphus poeyi Gimiher, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., vi, 1866, 262 (on
H.fasciotus Foey) ; Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 1868, f.83 (Cuba) ; Poey,
Enumeration Pise. Cub., 1875, 121 (Cuba) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 273, 381 (Panama).

Habitat. — Both coasts of tropical America and West Indies ;
Panama ; Cuba ; West Indies ; Antilles ; St. Martin's ; Rio Janeiro ;
Cayenne ; Bahia.

This species is known to us from many specimens collected by
Professor Jordan at Havana and Key West. Young examples
are more slender than the old ones, and have the lower jaw pro-
portionately shorter. Both young and old are, however, more
robust, shorter and thicker in every part than specimens of II.
roberti of the same size. Except this diiierence of form, we are
unable to detect any distinction whatever. We have no doubt,
however, that the two are reallv different.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 223

The figure and description of Ranzani represents this species
much better than H. roherti. We therefore retain for it his
original name. H. richardi Cuvier & Valenciennes is evidently
the same, and H. picorti is at least very similar. Gill's Hypo-
rhamphus tricufipidatus is not very satisfactoril}' described, but
as its author afterwards refers to it as probably identical with H.
richardi^ and as the description and locality" best fit that species,
we have so considered it.

Our Havana specimens leave no doubt that H. fasciatus and its
synonym, H. poeyi, are based on this species. Its lower jaw is,
however, longer than Poey describes, and but for this Dr. Giinther
would evidently have referred Poey's description to H. unifas-
ciatus. Specimens collected by Captain Dow, at Havana, show
that this is one of the species found on both sides of the isthmus.

2. Hemirhamplius roberti.

HemirhampTius roberti Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., xix,
1846, 24 (Cayenne) ; Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., vi, 1866, 363
(New Orleans).

HemirhampJius unifasciatus Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1870,
119 (Newport, R. I. ; Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1878, 383 (Beaufort, N. C), no description; Goode, Pioc. U.
S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 116 (Name only) ; .Jordan, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 188D, 20 (San Sebastian River, Fla.) ; Jordan, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mvis., 1880, 22 (St. John's River, Fla.), no descriition ; Jordan and
Gilbert, Pioc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 274 (Guaymas) ; Jordan and
Gilbert, BuU. U. S. Fish Comm., 1882, 106 (Mazatlan) ; Joidan
and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 588 (CharLston, S. C.J ;
Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 356 (Cape San
Lucas) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 262
(Ptnsacola, Fla.); Goode and Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882,
389 (Gulf of Mexico), no description ; Jordan and Gilbert, Syn.
Fish. N. A., 1882, 376.

HaMtat.—Eoih. coasts of America, chiefly north of the tropics :
Beaufort ; Charleston ; Pensacola, San Sebastian River ; Cedar
Keys ; New Orleans ; Cayenne ; Mazatlan ; Guaymas ; Cape San
Lucas.

All the specimens of Hemirhamphiis thus far taken on the
Atlantic Coast of the United States, north of the Florida Keys
(except one of H. pleii), belong to a species differing from the
West Indian unifasciatus, in the slenderness of body and in the
greater length of the lower jaw. This is evidently the H. roberti

224 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

of Giinther and the H. unifasciatus of all the American local
lists. The H. roherti of Cuvier and Valenciennes is very scantily
described. It is, however, related to H. unifasciatus, and is said
to have the lower jaw longer than in H. richardi or H. picarti.
We therefore identify it with this species, with this element of
doubt, that there is no other record of the slender form
south of Central Florida. This species occurs also in the Gulf
of California. Specimens from Charleston and from Mazatlan
are described by Jordan and Gilbert, as having the anterior rays
of dorsal and anal, and the upper and lower rays of caudal jet-
black, but no other difference from the usual form was noted.

3. Hemirhamphus rosae.

Hemirhamplius, sp. incert., Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1880, 29 (San Diego).

Hemirhamphus rosce Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880,
335 (San Diego, Cal.) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1880, 457 (San Pedro, San Diego) ; Jordan and Jouy, Pioc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1881, 13 (San Diego); Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1881, 43 (San Diego) ; Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 316
(name only) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 376.

Habitat. — Pacific Coast of United States ; San Diego ; San
Pedro.

We have nothing to add to the account of this species.

4. Hemirhamphus pleii.

Hemirhamphus marginatus Le Sueur, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., ii,

1823, 135 (Lesser Antilles ; not of Forskal).
Hemirhamphus pleii Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., xix,

1846, 29 (Antilles ; Martinique ; San Domingo) ; Giinther, Cat. Fish.

Brit. Mus., vi, 1866, 269 (Jamaica; Dominica; Bahia ; West Indies);

Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 103 (Bermudas).
Hemirhamphus filamentosus Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 1868, 382 (Cuba) ;

Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 1875, 121 (Cuba).
Hemirhamphus bj-qsiliensis Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882,

902 (Hunger's Wharf, Virginia ; not of Giinther).

Habitat. — Atlantic Coasts of America and West Indies, Vir-
ginia to Brazil. Virginia ; Martinique ; San Domingo ; Jamaica ;
Dominica ; Bermudas ; Bahia.

This species is very abundant at Key West, where it is known
as Balao, and at Havana, where it is called Escribano. It occa-

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 225

sionally ranges northward, a specimen from Virginia being in
the National Museum. This is evidently Hemirhamphvs fila-
mentosvs of Poey. The scanty description of H. pleii of Cuvier
and Valenciennes seems to refer to it, at least in large part, as
this is the only species so far as known that has the upper lobe
of the caudal red or yellow in life. This is also the H. marginatus
of Le Sueur, but not the original H. marginatus of Forskal.

5. Hemirhamphus balao.

? Eso.r maxilla inferiore producta Brown, Jamaica, 1756, 443, t. 45, f. 2
(Jamaica).

Esox brasiliensis Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, 1758, 314 (in part ; refer-
ence to Brown ; not Timucu Marcgrave, which should be regarded
as the Linnsean type, as having given rise to the name brasiliensis).

Hemirhamphus brasiliensis Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., vi, 1866,
270 (based on Hemirhnmphus broicni Cuv. and Val.) ; ? Jordan and
Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 109 (Panama ; name only) ;
? Jordan .and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 624 (Panama).

Hemirhamphus balao Le Sueur, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., ii, 1823.
135 (Lesser Antilles).

Hemirhamphus broicni Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., xix,
1846, 13 (Guadalonpe ; Martinique).

Hemirhamphus macrochirus Poey, Memorias, ii, 1858, 299 (Cuba) ;
Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 1875, 121 (Cuba).

Habitat. — Coasts of tropical America and West Indies ;
Jamaica; Lesser Antilles; Guadaloupe ; Martinique; Cuba;
Panama.

We have not seen this species and are not entirely certain of
its distinction from H. pleii. In Hemirhamphus pleii the upper
lobe of the caudal is always bright orange-red and the number of
scales in a longitudinal series is about 56. The description of
H. balao, H. browni and H. macrochirus all refer to a fish with
smaller scales, with both lobes of the caudal bluish, and H.
browni and H. macrochirus have smaller scales than H. pleii.
The specimens obtained by Professor Gilbert at Mazatlan,
Panama, we refer provisionally to this species, but they may
prove different on actual comparison. The oldest tenable name
for this species seems to be H. balao Le Sueur.

Esox brasiliensis Linnaeus is based on Brown's description of
a Hemirhamphus from Jamaica, and Marcgrave 's account of a

226

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

Tylosurus from Brazil. The name brasiliensis is evidently sug-
gested by the latter, which should therefore retain it as specific
name. It does not appear also certain as to which species of
Hemirhamphus is described by Brown.

TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS.
(In hundredths of length to base of caudal.)

H. unifasciatus.

H. roberti.

H. ros(e.

H. pleii.

w*

>>

>.

>>

0

^

,

liOCALITIKS,

1

01

a

0

0
^

0
^

1

1

1

>,

>»

>.

>,

^

c3

•a

e3
•0

c3

^3

a

>.

tf

5?

>>

>»

o

O

0)

o

©

©

V

tt

Q>

_J_

•0

fl>

0

0)

0

ui

M

M

M

M

o

O

0

0

bd

M

M

w

«

Length of speci-i 1

men, in inches. 7 45 8 05 7 56 545 5 2 6 75

615 85; 5-2

4

8 8 8-4 10-3 11-2 8 55

Head, fiom tip of

1

upper jaw toglU

1

1

opening. (Hun-

1

1

dredths ) . .211^21^22

23

22K 22>^ 23

23

23K

20

\%\i 18K 1934 18}^ 19

Head, from tip of i

II

lower jiiw to gill' 1

|i

openings. . .423^401^42

43

433^47

47K«X48K

50

43

4414

413442

41M

Distance of ven-1

trals from tip of

snout. . . .57

59

67

59

57

67

60

68

59

63

533454

54y2

52

52J4

Distanceof dorsal'

from tip of snout 78

78

77>^78

78

77

79

78

79

76

6134 62

603459

60

Length of pec-

-

1

torais.

13

131^14

14

14

14

14

14

14^

UK

14

14

13^14

14

Deptli of flsh at

1

. 1 _

ventrals. .

14

143^14

131^14

13

13

12

13

11%

12

1134 12-^18^4 1234

Thickness of flsh

at ventrals.

10

11

1034

9

9X

m

S'A 8%

8M

8

6

6

6

6

6

Least depth of,

1

caudal peduncle 5}^

6

6

6

6

5

5

5

5

4M

Length of base of

dcrsil.

14^14

14

14

14

14

14

133^ 143^

16

11

12

12

11

12

Diameter of eye.

5^ 5>^

5>4

5M 5>i

5

by^

6

5>|

5

^'A

4'4

5 '

4^

4>i

Width of inter-

orbital.

6

6

e

6

6

5K

514 by^

6

6

^M

4>$

6

4M

4M

Breadth of head

at postei-ior end

of maxillary. .

i>}4

(,%

5%

5K

6%

4K

5

5

bX

Breadth of beak

at tip of upper

jaw. .

3K

3J4

3K

zy^ 3K

1

3

3

3

Z%

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 22T

A BEVIEW OF THE AMEKICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS TEUTHIS.
BY SETH E. MEEK AND MARTIN L. HOFFMAN.

In the present paper is given the s^monymy of tlie American
species of Teuthis L. (^= Acanthurus Forskalj witli an anal^'sis
of their most important specific characters.

Specimens of eacli of three species, which seem to us valid, were
obtained by Professor David S. Jordan, at Havana and at Key West.
On this material, belonging to the Indiana University and the
United States National Museum, the present paper is based. It
is possible that other species exist in American waters, but there
is certainly nothing in any published description which suggests
the probability that such is the case.

We are indebted to Professor Jordan for use of his library and
for valuable aid.

Analysis of American Species of Teuthis,

a. Outline rhomboid , the depth 1^ in length to base of caudal ;
anterior profile subvertical, nearly straight, making an
angle of about 60° with axis of body ; color brown, washed
with bright blue ; body marked with undulating longitu-
dinal light streaks ; no dark crossbars ; vertical fins with
oblique bronze streaks ; lips and caudal spine yellow ;
caudal deeply emarginate, its lobes about equal in length ;
middle rays about f length of outer rays ; head 3 j in length
to base of caudal. D. lX-27 ; A. III-24. cceruleus. 1

aa. Outline ovate ; the depth 2 in length to base of caudal ; ante-
rior profile moderatel}^ convex, making angle of about 45°
with axis of body.

b. Caudal deeply emarginate, its upper lobe longer than lower,
slender and produced into a filament, the inner rays |
length of the outer rays (in the adult) ; margin of caudal
fin whitish ; color dark brown, no transverse bars ; brown
wavy longitudinal streaks on sides of body ; eight dark
lines running parallel with edge of dorsal fin for its whole
length, and separated by interspaces of the same width ;
anal fin bluish, with a violet base ; head 3^ in length of
body. D. IX-24 ; A. III-22. tractus. 2

228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

66. Caudal simply lunate, its inner rays about | length outer
ra^'S ; caudal lobes subequal, the upper never filamentous ;
color olive-brown, more or less distinctly greenish ;
middle of sides paler; sides with about twelve distinct
blaclvish vertical bars, ratlier narrower than the inter-
spaces, most distinct over front of anal ; a brownish
stripe along base of dorsal ; spinous dorsal with alternate
stripes running upward and backward, of dark blue and
bronze olive, the two colors of about equal width ; soft
dorsal with a bluish streak on the anterior side of each
ray, and a bronze stripe behind it ; head 3^ in length of
body. D, IX-26 ; A. 111-24. hepatus. 3.

1. Teathis cceruleus.

Turdus rhomboidalts (The Tang), Catesby, Nat. Hist. Carolina, etc., ii,

1743, pi. 10, fig. 1 (Bahamas).
Teuthis fusca caruleo nitens Brown, Jamaica, 1756, 454 (Jamaica).
Barbero Parra, Descr. Dif. Piezas, Hist. Nat,, 1787, 45, Taf. 21, fig. 2

(Cuba),
Acanthurus cceruleus Bloch & Schneider, Systema Ichthyoi., 1801, 214

(after Catesby, Parra & Brown) ; Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat.

Poiss., X, 1835, 179 (Martinique ; Porto Rico ; San Domingo) ; Giinther,

Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., 1861, 336 (Caribbean Sea ; West Indies ; Bahia) ;

Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 1868, 355 (Cuba) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Syn.

Fish. N. A., 1882, 617,

Acanthurus broussonnetii Desmarest, Prem, Dec, Ichthyoi., 1823, 26,

pi. 4, fig. 2 (Cuba).
Acanthurus brevis Poey, Memorias, ii, 1860, 207 (Cuba ; young) ; Poey,

Syn, Pise. Cub,, 1868, 355 (Cuba) ; Poey, Enum. Pise, Cub,, 1875,

66 (Cuba).

Acronurus cceruleatus Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 1875, 69 (Cuba ; larval
form).

Acanthurus nigricans Goode, Bull. U, S. Nat, Mus., 1876, 41 (Bermu-
das) (probably not of Linnaeus, a species of unknown oiigin, as yet
unrecognized).

Habitat. — Atlantic shores of tropical America; Cuba; Key
West ; Martinique ; Porto Rico ; San Domingo ; Bahia,

The synonymy and nomenclature of this beautiful species
seem to be subject to no doubts of importance. It is rather
less abundant at Key West or at Havana than either of the
Other species. One specimen corresponding to A. brevis Poey,

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 229

"Was taken at Key "West. This is precisely like the adult, but shows
very little blue.

The species called Acronurus are, as shown by Giinther and
Liitken, the young of Teuthis. The three species mentioned by
Poey (cceruleatus, nigriculus, carneus) seem to be the young
respectively of three species of Acanthurus. One of these, Acro-
nurus carneus, was obtained by Prof. Jordan ; we regard it as
unquestionably the young of Teuthis hepatus.

2. Teuthis tractus.

Acantkurr/s tracfusToej, Memorias, ii, 1860, 208 (Cuba) ; Poey, Rept.,
186G, 356 (Cuba) ; Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 1868, 356 (Cuba) ; Poey,
Anales Soc. Hist. Nat. Madrid, 1880, 246 (Cuba) ; Poey, Enum. Pise.
Cub., 1875, 67 (Cuba) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm.,
1882, 108 (Mazatlan ; no descrii tion) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Bu'l. U. S.
Fish Comm., 18S2, HI (Panama ; no description) ; Jordan& Gilbert,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 377 (Panama ; no description) ; Jordan
& Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 941.

Acronurus nigriculus Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 1875, 69 (Cuba ; larval
form) .

Acanthurus mafoides Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882,
626 (Panama ; no description ; not of Cuvier & Valenciennes).

Habitat. — Coasts of tropical America ; Cuba ; Panama. Key
West ; Mazatlan ; Panama.

This species may at all ages be known by the form of its caudal.
Although in all species the caudal lobes grow longer with age,
still very young specimens, as well as old of this species have the
caudal more deeply furcate than any of T. hepatus.

There are also some color differences between the two.

The single species of Teuthis found on the Pacific coast of
tropical America seems to be identical with T. tractus. It is
close to A. matoides Cuvier & Yalenciennes, but Prof. Jordan,
who has examined the type of the latter in Paris, thinks it
different.

3. Teuthis hepatus.

Hepatus mucrone reflexo utrinque prope caudam Gronow, Zoophyl, No.

353.
Teuthis hepatus Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., ed. 12, 1766, 507 (not as

restricted by Cuvier & Valenciennes ; is based principally on Hepatus

of Gronow).
Acanthurus hepatus Bloch & Schneider, Systema Ichthyol., 1801, 211

(in part; not of Cuv. & Val. and later authors).

230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Chaodon chirurgus Bloch, Ausl. Fish., 1784, 99, sp. n. 24, taf. 208
(on a drawing by Plumier) ; Gmelin, Syst. Nat., 17S9, 1259 (copied).

Acanthiirus cJdrurgus Bloch & Schneider, Systema Ichth., l':01, 214
(co; ied) ; Cavitr & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., x, 1835, 16S,
(Martinique; Brazil; Cuba); Gimther, Cat. Fish. B:if. Mus., iii,
1861, 329 (Bahia; Puerto Cabello ; Caribbean Sea ; West Indies) ;
Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 1868, 355 (Cuba) ; Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1876, 42 (Bermudas) ; Poey, Anal. Soc. Nat. Hist., Madrid,
18:0, 245, pi. 6 (Cuba) ; Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883,
237 (name only) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 617.

Acanthurus pJdebotomus Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., x,
1835, 176 (Martinique ; Brazil ; Havana ; New York) ; Dekay, New
York Fauna Fish, 1842, 139, pi. 73, fig. 234 (copied) ; Poey, Repor-
torio, 1867, i, 256 (Cuba) ; Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 1868, 245, fig. 7
(Cuba) ; Poey, Soc. Hist. Madrid, 18S0, 245 (Cuba).

Acronunis fuscus Gronow, Cat. Fish., ed. Gray, 1858, 191.

Acanthurus nigricans Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 941
(copied).

Habitat. — Atlantic Coast of America. Key West; Cuba;
West Indies ; Puerto Cabello ; Martinique ; Caribbean Sea ;
Brazil ; Bahia.

This is the most abundant species of the genus, being appar-
ently common throughout the West Indies, and certainly so at
Cuba and Key West, and ranging northward occasionally on our
South Atlantic Coast, perhaps as far as Charleston, but certainly
not to New York, where it is reported on the authority of the
confused collection of Milbert,

Two questions arise in the synon3'my of this species ; first, as
to the identity of phlebotomus with chirurgus ; second, as to the
availability of the Liuuiiean name hepatus and nigricans for it.
As to the first point, the description and figure of Cuvier and
Valenciennes agree too well with our specimens for us to doubt
their identity. Poey recognizes a species, A. phlebotomus^ as
distinct from A. chirurgus Poe}^ but . on characters of slight
importance and variable with age. The Linnaean name nigricans
has been used both for this species and for T. cseruleus. The
name is based on a deserii)tion of Artedi, which has been con-
sidered b}^ Cuvier and Valenciennes as probably belonging to an
Asiatic species. The locality of the original specimen is uncer-
tain, and the species cannot be positivelj^ made out. No
American species should therefore be called nigricans.

The name hepatus has been used by Cuvier and Valenciennes

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 231

for an Asiatic species. The original Teidhis hepatus of Linnaeus
is based on various references, including caeruleiis, chirvrgus and
the Asiatic species in question. Tiie original type is, however,
evidently the Hepatus mucrone rejiexo iitrivqve prope < andam
of Gronow, and part of the confusion has come from Gronow's
attempt to identify with his specimen the Asiatic references of
Yalentyn and others. Gronow's specimen, however, is the type
of his Hepatus, and consequently the proper type of Teuthis
hepatus Linnseus. This same specimen, Hepatus, became the
Acronurus fuscus of Gronow's Systema (Gray), and it is still in
the British Museum. Giinther identifies it with Acanthurus
chirurgus ; we do not, therefore, see how the substitution of
hepatus for chirurgus is to be avoided, if the rules of nomencla-
ture are strictly carried out. The same line of argument is used
by Cuvier and Valenciennes, but they erroneously supposed
Gronow's specimen to be an Asiatic fish.

Poey has referred the Chsetodon chirurgus of Cuvier and Valen-
ciennes to Acanthurus tractus, because of this expression in
their description : "La caudale echancree en croissant jusqu'au
tiers peu pres de sa longueur ; ses lobes sont arguises en pointe
et le superieur est plus long que Tinferieur." This does not
indicate the tractus, which has the caudal still more deeply
divided, and it is true of the average example of T. hepatus.
Acronurus carneas seems to be the young of this species.

232 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

A KEVIEW OF THE AMERICAN SPECIES OF SCOMBEROMORUS.
BY SETH E. MEEK AND ROBERT G. NEWLAND.

In the present paper we have given the synonymy of the four
American species of the genus Scomberomorus Lacepede (= Cy-
brum Cuvier), and an analytical key, by which the species may be
distinguished.

The specimens upon which the paper is based, belong to the
Museum of the Indiana University. The}^ have been collected
by Professor Jordan at Key West, Havana, and Monterey.

We acknowledge our indebtedness to Professor Jordan for the
use of his library and for valuable aid.

Analysis of the American Species of Scomberomorus.

a. Dorsal spines 11 or 18; lateral line descending obliquely; gill
rakers comparatively long, more than half diameter of eye.

b. Teeth slender, subcorneal, their length more than twice their
width at base ; gill rakers long and slender, about f
diameter of eye, about 18 below the angle; maxillary
reaching to opposite posterior margin of eye. Color of
male dark steel-blue, without streaks or spots ; female
with two rows of alternating round bronze spots of about
the size of pupil; fins nearly plain, dark; head 5^ in
length; depth 5|. D. XVII-16-VIII ; A. I-IG-YIII.

concolor. 1.

bb. Teeth large, triangular, compressed, their length not twice
their breadth at base ; gill rakers rather slender, their
length about f diameter of eye; about 12 below the
angle.

c. Color bluish silvery above, with bright reflections ; sides
in both sexes, with numerous bronze spots about as
large as pupil, no longitudinal stripes ; maxillary
reaching to opposite posterior part of orbit; angle of
preopercle not produced backwards ; pectoral scaly at
base only ; caudal peduncle rather robust, its least
depth 4§ in head, caudal widely forked ; head 4| in
length ; depth 5^. D. XVIII-18-IX ; A. II-U-VIII.

maculatus. 2.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233

cc. Color silvery ; sides with a brownish, broken, longitudinal
band, above and below which are numerous brownish
spots ; angle of preopercle produced backwards ; pec-
torals scaly ; anterior part of spinous dorsal black ;
caudal peduncle rather slender, its least depth 5 ^ in
head; caudal less widely forked ; head 4^ in length;
depth 5i. D. XVIII-15-YIII ; A. II-15-VIII.

regalis. 3

aa. Dorsal spines 14 or 15, lateral line descending abruptly under
second dorsal ; teeth comparatively large ; gill rakers very
short, less than ^ diameter of eye, about 8 below the angle ;
pectorals scaly at base only ; young, with bronze spots ;
adult immaculate. cavalla. 4.

1. Scomberomorus ooncolor. Monterey Mackerel.

Ohriomitra concolor Lockington, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1879,
134 (Monterey) ; Lockington, Rep. Cal. Fish Comm. (1878-9), 1881,
34 (Monterey).

Scomberomorus concolor Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1880, 4o6 (Monterey, no description) ; Jordan and Joiiy, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 4, 1881, 13 (Soquel, Cal., no description) ; Jordan and
Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 45 (Monterey Bay) ; Jordan
and Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 426.

Habitat. — Pacific Coast of United States ; Monterey Bay,
all the known specimens having been taken about Soquel and
Santa Cruz, whither it resorts every summer for a short time, for
the purpose of spawning. Some 15 to 40 specimens only are
taken each year.

2. Scomberomorus maculatus. Spanish Mackerel.

Scomber maculatus Mitchill, Trans. L(it. and Phil. Soc, i, 1815, 426, pi.
6, f. 8 (New York).

Cybium maculatum Cuvier, Reg, Anim., ed. 2, 1829 (after Mitchill) ;
Agassiz, Spix. Pise. Brazil, 1829, p. 103, tab. 60 (Atlantic) ; Cuvier
and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., viii, 1831, 181 (New York) ;
Stoier, Bost. Jour., iv, 1842, 179 (Lynn, Mass.) ; Ayres, Bost. Jour.
Nat. Hist., iv, 1842, 261 (Brookhaven) ; De Kay, N. Y. Fauna,
Fsh, 1842, 103, pi. 73, f. 232 (Long Island) ; Storer, Synopsis, 1846,
92; Baird, Fish N. J. Coast, Itr'SS, 21 (Beaseleys Point) ; Gunher,
Cat. Fish. Biit. Mus., ii, 1860, 372; Stonr, Hist. Fish. Mass., 1867,
68, pi. 13, f. 1 (Lynn, Mass. ; Proviucetown) ; Gill, Rept. U. S. Fish
Comm., 1871-72, 802 (name only) ; Baird, Rept. U. S. Fish Comm.,
1871-72, 825 (Wqod's Holl), no description; Gill, Cat. Fish. E.
X6

234

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Coast N. A., 1873, 24 (name only) ; Poey, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,

1878, 4 (after Cuvier and Valenciennes) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1878, 375 (Alb^rmarle Sound) ; Goode, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1879, 3 (East, Florida), no descript on ; Goode and Bean,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 128 (Pensacola) ; Goode and Bean,
Fish. Essex Co., Mass., 1879, 15 (no description) ; Bean, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1880, 89 (Washington Market), no description.

Scomberomorus maculatus Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm.,
1882, 106 (Mazatlan, no description) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Bull. U. S.
Fish Comm., 1882, 110 (Panama, no description) ; Jordan and
Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1883, 426 ; Goode and Bean, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1882, 237 (Gulf of Mexico, no description) ; Jordan and
Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 268 (Pensacola, no descrip-
tion) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 594
(Charleston, no description) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1882, 625 (Panama, no description) ; Bean, Cat Fish. Exhibi-
tion, London, 1883, 51 (Charlotte Harbor, Fla., no description).

Habitat. — Both coasts of America ; from Lj^nn, Mass., to Key-
West ; Mazatlan ; Panama. Not recorded from Cuba or any of
the lesser Antilles.

3. Scomberomorus regalis. Pintado.

Scomber regalis Bloch, Ausl. Fische, 1795, Taf. 335 (after a drawing
by Plumier) ; Bloch and Schneider, Systema. Nat., 1801, 22 (after
Bloch).

Gybium regale Cuvier, Regne Animal, ed. ii, 1829 (name only ; after
Bloch) ; Cuvier ar.d Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., viii, 1831, 184
(San Domingo) ; Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., ii, 1868, 326 (Cuba) ; Gill,
Kept. U. S. Fish Comm., 1871-72, 802 .(name only) ; Baird, Kept.
U. S. Fish Comm., 1871-72, 825 (Wood's Holl ; no description) ;
Gill, Cat. Fish East Coast N. A., 1873, 24 (name only) ; Poey, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1878, 4 (Cuba) ; Goode, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,

1879, 3 (East Florida, no description).

Scomheromorns regahs Goode and Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882,
237 ; Jordan and Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 426.

Scomberomorus plumieri, Lacepede, iii, 1801, 292 (after Aubriet's copy
of Plumier's drawing).

Gybium aeer^-ira Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., viii, 1831,
186 (in part; type); Poey, Rcpertorio, i, 1867, 322; ii, 13 (Cuba);
Poey, Proc. U S Nat. Mus., 1878, 4 (no description).

Habitat. — Atlantic Coast of America; Wood's Holl, Mass.;
Key West ; Cuba ; San Domingo. More abundant southward ;
rare north of Key West.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 235

4. Soomberomoras oavalla.

Guarapucu Marcgrave, Hist. Brasil. 1648, 178 (Brazil).

Cyhium cavalla Cuvier, Regne Animal, 1829, ed, 2d (after Marcgrave).

Cybium caballa Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., viii, 1831,
187 (Brazil I ; Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., 1860, 373 (San
Domingo); Poey, Report, i, 1867, 323; ii, 13 (Cuba); Guichenot,
Sagra, Hist. Cuba Poiss., 1850, 103 (Cuba); Poey, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1879, 3 (East Florida; no description); Poey, Bull. U. S.
Fish Comm.. 1882, 118 (no description).

Scomberomorus caballa Goode & Bean, Proc, TJ. S. Nat. Mus., 1882,
237 (no description); Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1882, 268 (Pensacola); Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1882, 549 (Charleston; no description); Jordan and Gilbert, Syn.
Fish., 1883, 437 (copied).

Habitat. — Atlantic Coast of America ; Charleston ; Brazil. A
food fish of great importance in the West Indies and Southern
Florida. It reaches a much larger size than any other.

The name cavalla, first used by Cuvier, has priority over
caballa.

236 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

October t.
Mr. Thomas Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-three persons present.

A paper entitled " The Geology of Delaware — Laurentian,
Palaeozoic and Cretaceous Areas," by Frederick D. Chester, was
presented for publication.

The death of Geo. Bentham, a correspondent, was announced.

October 14.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-five persons present.

The death of Charles W. Poultney, a member, was announced.
The following were ordered to be printed : —

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 23t

PRELIMINAKY NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF DELAWARE— LAURENTI AN,
PAL2:0Z0IC AND CRETACEOUS AREAS.

by frederick d. chester.

Introduction.

During the years 1837 and 1838, Professor James C. Booth, in
accordance with an act of the State Legislature, made a geolog-
ical surA'^ey of Delaware, the results of which were published in
a report that appeared in 1841. This old memoir is of great
value, both from the accuracy of the author's observations and his
minute attention to detail ; I cannot, therefore, expect to supplant
it, my aim being an entirely different one, i. e., to so completely
reconstruct our geology as to bring it into sympathy with the
results of adjacent States. Professor Booth's great and only
fault as a geologist lay in his entire indifference to stratigraphical
order ; and his classification of deposits according to mineralog-
ical and physical characters, leaves one in utter confusion.

My main object, therefore, is to endeavor to undo the tangles
which Professor Booth has unconsciously made, by stating the
facts in the briefest and clearest manner possible.

The results, as embodied in the following paper, are preliminary
to what is hoped will be a full report upon the State.

Geological Outline.
The formations represented within the bounds of the State
are Laurentian (?), Cambro-Silurian, Silurian-Devonian (?), Creta-
ceous, Tertiary and Quarternary. The relations and positions
of the several divisions of the chronological scale can be best
represented by the accompanying table (I), also the thickness of
each formation. Column 2, with which the Delaware series is
compared, is constructed according to what seem the best results,
combining home and foreign equivalents. The accompanying
map (PL V) is drawn upon a scale of four miles to the inch,
and is sufficiently large to show all necessary details. A word
is here necessary in regard to the boundaries as shown by
the map. The lenticular areas which indicate the magnesian
marble, can only serve to represent the position of outcrops.
Owing to the fact that these calcareous deposits are entirely
covered by the micaceous rocks, surface indications offer no
means of determining the entire area covered by the former.

238

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF
I.

[1884.

Pebiods.

General Series.

Delaware Series.

QUAKTERNARY.

Modem

Post-Glacial. ^
Glacial. )

Bog Clay or Alluvium.

Delaware Gravels and Estuary
Sands— 10-40'.

Tertiary.

Pliocene. . . <

Miocene. . . .
Eocene.

Blue Clay— 3-10'.
Glass Sand.— 40'.

White, Potters' Clay— 10-20'.

Upper.

Middle.

Lower.

(Wealden.)

Middle Marl— 139'.

Indurated Marl— 149'.

Cretaceous.

Lower Marl Bed— 60'.

Sand Marl— 90'.

Plastic Clays— 250'.

Mica Schists and Gneisses.

Cambro-Silurian.

Calciferous.
Potsdam.

Magnesian Marbles.
Quartzite.

Laurentian (?)

Laurentian (?)

Syenitic Rocks.

Owing also to the fewness of the outcrops of the several
divisions of the Cretaceous, the boundaries had to be drawn from
such data as were accessible, which were in some cases abundant,
and in others entirely absent. Sufficient is known, however, to
make the writer confident of their general accuracy ; while the
missing links of knowledge could only be supplied by expensive
borings.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA, 239

The Laurentian. — To this belongs the belt of hornblendic
rocks above the line of the Pennsjdvania R. R., which to the
west is narrow but which, rapidly bi-oadens to the east, as it
extends into Delaware county, Pa., and contracting again to a
narrow neck at Chester Creek, there connects with another
irregular area occupying all the northwestern portion of Delaware
county. This area connects with still another to the north, and
to the east of West Chester. This rock is a dark hornblendic
gneiss or amphibolite schist, dipping usually to the northwest,
rarely in the opposite direction. With it is associated a grayish
to bluish gray rock, usually finely crystalline, which has been
designated as diorite and syenitic granite by the Pennsylvania
geologists. Owing to the absence of petrographical facts con-
cerning this rock, however, nothing definite can be said concern-
ing it. It shades by indistinct degrees into the amphibolite
schists, the two varieties probably forming the same eruptive
series.

The Gambro-Silurian. — This formation, so largely developed
through the counties of southeastern Pennsylvania, has one area
in the northwestern part of Delaware, and two smaller expo-
sures. In the northwestern area, a coarse quartzitic rock is
found to underlie a highly crystalline magnesian marble. These,
as we shall more clearly perceive further on, must be referred
respectively to the Potsdam and Calciferous, the latter of which
is equivalent to the Lower Magnesian limestone of the West.

The Mica Schists and Gneisses. — To the north of the belt of
Laurentian gneisses, and resting upon the latter, is a series of
mica schists and granitic gneisses, with which are associated
bedded granites, serpentine, and hornblende rocks. They have
commonly been referred to the Mont-Alban, which, together
with the older hornblendic rocks, were called Azoic, the two
forming a part of the southern gneiss area as known by the
Pennsylvania geologists. It will be my aim, shortly, to show that
the hornblendic rocks and mica schists do not make two succes-
sive formations, within the Azoic, but that, while the former is
either Laurentian or Huronian, the latter must be placed above
the Trenton, and possibly above the Hudson River, slates. Their
exact position in the Palaeozoic scale, however, will probably
never be determined, owing to the complete absence of fossil-
iferous remains, due to the extreme metamorphism. The rocks
have been subjected to great contortion, the strata having been

240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

pressed either into close folds, or into broad or contracted
anticlinal or synclinal flexures.

The Cretaceous. — Resting upon the eroded edge of the Azoic
rocks are successive series of plastic clays, sand marls and green-
sand, which foi'in quite uniform strata, dipping at a low angle to
the southeast. This belt, having a width of 18 miles, extends
from the hills to the latitude of Noxontown mill pond, just south
of Middletown.

The Tertiary. — The Cretaceous is succeeded by a stratum of
white or lead-colored clay, having a thickness of 10 to 20 feet.
This continues as far south as Murderkill Creek, and from fossil-
iferous evidence, must be referred to the Miocene.

South of Murderkill Creek, the Miocene is succeeded by 3 to
10 feet of light or dark blue clay, beneath which is a uniform
stratum of fine glass sand, of at least 40 feet in thickness. That,
all the State south of Murderkill is later Pliocene, I shall
endeavor to prove in a future paper upon the younger formation.

All the beds of the Tertiary lie in a nearly horizontal posi-
tion, dipping at a still lower angle than the Cretaceous, and
probably unconformable to the same.

The Quarternary. — Covering most of the foregoing formations,
and reaching up the flanks of the Azoic hills to the height of 200
feet or more above tide, is a layer of sand and gravel, which to
the north is of a coarse, red nature, and to the south is fine and
white. They are called the Delaware Gravels and Estuary Sands,
respectively. Along the river and bay shores is also the belt of
bog-clay, which is modern, and of more recent origin than the
gravels. Also upon the summits of the highest hills in the State
are solitary patches of gravel which are evidently older than the
continuous stratum to the south. This high-level gravel, in the
absence of proper data, has been problematically referred to the
Tertiary, and is known as Bryn Mawr gravel.

The Crystalline Rocks.
Geographical Position. — Generally speaking, the southern line
of the Azoic rocks is the limit of the highlands, but in certain
places they extend well into more level regions. Beginning with
a point upon the Mar3^1and boundar}^, a little north of where the
latter is cut by the Mason and Dixon line, the limit of the rocks
runs in a northeast direction, cutting through the western end of
Newark, and following the northern boundary of the town.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241

Thence it runs close to the south shore of White Clay Creek to
a distance of two miles beyond Roseville, where it makes an
abrupt bend to the north, until at Stanton the rocks cease
to be found. A mile back of the railroad station, they again
appear, continuing to a point about a mile back of Newport,
where their course turns slightly to the southeast, crossing
the Wilmington turnpike just before it is intersected by the
Wilmington Northern R. R., thence it follows the turnpike
through the southern half of the city, keeping just north of the
Pennsylvania R. R., to a point south of Bellevue, where the
line cuts the river. From there the Delaware River marks the
southenj boundary. The area as above indicated may be divided
into two pretty distinct belts : (1 ) the southern belt of horn-
blendic rocks, and (2) the northern belt of micaceous rocks,
with which are associated interstratified beds of coarse-grained
orthoclase granite, feldspar, quartz and quartzite.

The boundary line between these two belts can be traced very
accurately, and is found to correspond pretty closely with the
lines of strike. Beginning with the western boundary of the
State, the line follows approximately the coui'se previously
traced out, but one-half a mile to the north of the same. It
continues thus to a point south of Milltown, when an abrupt
turn to the northeast is taken, the line crossing the Brandj^wine
only a few miles from the head of the State. It is owing to the
northerly course of this line, as compared with the southern
limit of the Azoic area, that the northeastern portion of the
State is covered more largely with the hornblende, and the'
northwestern with the micaceous rocks.

The Lithology of the Crystalline Rocks.
The rocks which cover the crystalline area may be classed as

follows : —

( Granite,

Micaceous < Granitic gneiss,

l Mica schist.

Amphibolite schist.

Hornblendic \ T^^ ^

Blue to gray trap.

/ Marble,
Calcareous < r, , • i i t

[ baccharoidal limestone.

Serpentine.
Quartzite.
Vitreous quartz.

242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Granite. — This rock, as known in the State, is divided into two
clashes: (1) that which forms intrusive beds, being a coarsely
crystalline orthoclase granite, and (2) that which is nothing more
than a highly metamorphosed granitic gneiss, or mica schist, it
being a very compact, fine-grained rock. The former variety may
be described as an intimate mixture of flesh-colored orthoclase,
quartz and muscovite mica, with which are often associated albite
and biotite. It occurs as veins, usually bedded, which vary in
width from 6 inches to 25 feet, and which, though often continuing
in length for several miles, are known to pinch out entirely.
The great difference in lithological character between the enclosing
rocks and these beds would imply that the latter are veins of
plastic injection from aqueo-igneous fusion. That the intrusion
of the semi-molten magma was subsequent to the uplifting and
crystallizing of the enclosing rocks, is proven by the fact that the
latter have, in the vicinity of such veins, suffered considerable
disturbance and undue metamorphism at the planes of contact
with the intruded mass. The granite is often so highly feld-
spathic as to be worked exclusively for this mineral, and when
the upper portions of such veins are greatly decomposed, dig-
gings have in a few cases been made for kaolin.

One of the most noticeable of these veins of coarse granite is
found to cut across the road leading up the Brandywine, about
one and a half miles from the head of the State. A large quarry
has been opened in this vicinity, where the rock has been worked
for feldspar. The vein is not less than 20 feet wide, on the one
side of which is a highly metamorphosed mica schist, and on the
other hornblendic gneiss. The rock is a mixture of red ortho-
clase, albite, blue quartz, and muscovite, the crystals being some-
times so large that perfect specimens of feldspar several i inches
square, can be obtained. Large hexagonal plates of mica, many
of them 6 inches across, are also found in abundance. The same
feldspar is worked three miles to the northeast, probably from the
same vein, as near as could be determined ; while in the other
direction the intrusive mass seems to lose itself.

Another equally wide vein cuts across the Newark and Avon-
dale R. R., at Tweed's mill, two miles north of Newark. A
faulting plane cuts through this intrusive bed, possibly due to its
disturbing action.

The same rock is found to continue two miles and a half to the

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 243

northeast, outcropping upon the run to the south of Pleasant Hill
P. 0. Many other instances of granite veins might be cited, but
with nothing new regarding them. All of the large veins men-
tioned above are exclusive of the smaller seams, which vary in
width from a few inches to a foot, and which are liable to be found
anywhere, and frequently, within the micaceous belt.

The second class of granite — a highly changed gneiss or schist —
is a fine-grained rock containing quartz, plagioclase and biotite,
with the quartz subject to considerable variation.

It occurs as massive beds, the planes of the stratification being
so completely obliterated that the rock resembles a true trap.
That it is not trappean, however, is shown by the fact that it is
seen to run, by indistinct degrees, into mica schist. Such rocks ai'e
usually much broken up, thus testifying to an undue mechanical
activity, itself the cause of the extreme metamorphism.

Granitic Gneiss and Mica Schist. — These two species represent
the extremes of variation in what is the characteristic rock of the
micaceous belt, which has gone by the generally applicable name
of gneiss. These two rocks so merge into each other that specific
designation is often difficult. The typical mica schist may be
described as a very schistose biotite rock, usually highly garnet-
iferous, and containing a variable proportion of quartz. Some-
times this highly micaceous rock contains a very small proportion
of feldspar, which can often only be seen as a kaoline substance
in the decomposed product ; and if the absence of feldspar be
characteristic of mica schist, then with the presence of feldspar
the true schists begin to run into gneiss.

Hornblende Bocks. — The hornblende rocks, as a class, may be
divided into the basic and acidic, or into those rocks of which the
predominating constituent is either hornblende or feldspar. To
the former belong the dark varieties of amphibolite schist and
syenitic gneiss, and to the latter belongs the light, highly acidic
bluish gray trap so characteristic of the northeastern part of the
State. Between these two extremes there is every shade of
gradation, showing some petrographical relation between them.
The dark varieties of amphibolite schist vary in color from a blue
to a dull black, from coarsely crystalline to compact. The pre-
dominating element is hornblende, with which is associated a
small proportion of plagioclase, and sometimes blue quartz. This
rock, which shows a more or less eminent lamination, is found

244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

to merge into a massive rock of the same composition. When
the proportion of hornblende increases, it becomes so great as
to make up, apparently, the entire composition, in which case the
syenitic gneiss runs into the hornblende schist or into massive
hornblende rock. The bluish gray trap may be described as
follows : in color it A^aries from a light to a dark bluish gray ; in
texture, from a coarsely crystalline to one fine-grained, homo-
geneous and trappean in character.

Lithologically, the rock is composed of plagioclase, feldspar
and hornblende, with frequently a small proportion of blue
quartz and biotite.

Massive hypersthene has often been found in fine orthorhombic
crystals, entirely replacing the hornblende, and is associated with
a plagioclase showing the most eminent striation. Thus, from
microscopical examination, the rock seems to range from a quartz
diorite to a true hyperite^ although no true knowledge of the
rock can be had until a thorough microscopical stud}^ is made.
Professor G. H. Williams,^ of Johns Hopkins University, has
proven a similar rock, in the vicinity of Baltimore, to be a
hypersthene gra66ro, which also runs by indistinct stages into a true
amphiholite schist. He has also shown that the amphibolite is the
result of a paragenesis taking place in the gabbro, the hypersthene
and pyroxene found in the latter being altered to hornblende, and
thus producing the gradual passage of gabbro into amphibolite.
Whether some such alteration as this can account for the passage
of the bluish gray trap into amphibolite schist is quite within the
range of possibility. This question has already become a subject
of iuA^estigation by the writer, and it is hoped that much light
will be thrown upon it.

Calcareous Bocks. — To this class belong those rocks generally
called crystalline limestone, of which there are two varieties,
namely, saccharoidal limestone and marble. They are found at
three known localities, one near Pleasant Hill, one at Hockessin
and another near CenJ^eville, both varieties occurring together.

The marble may be described as very coarsely crystalline. It
is very compact in texture, of superior hardness, and is always
heavily and closely bedded. The variet}" called saccharoidal
limestone is more granular and extremely friable. It is also

^ Am. Jour, of Sci., October, 1884, and Johns Hopkins Univ. Circular,
April, 1884.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245

less pure, being often colored by oxide of iron or organic matter,
and is much more thinly bedded, the thinner seams being inter-
stratified with the heavily bedded marble.

Scrientine. — About six miles northeast of Wilmington a huge
dike of serpentine runs with the micaceous schists. Its length
can be traced by outcropping boulders for a distance of a mile,
with a width of a quarter of a mile. The rock varies from one
tough and massive to one soft and highly decomposed, with
which are associated talc and magnesite.

Vitreous Quartz and Quartzite. — The former rock occurs as
regular thin or massive seams interstratified with the micaceous
rocks. It varies from a glassy colorless variety to one of milky
and opaque whiteness. The quartzite, which is found in the
northwest corner of the State, underlying the limestone, is
probably of Potsdam age. It is a very coarse quartzite rock,
which contains, frequently, crystals of tourmaline, Jibrolite and
actinolite.

Structural Relations of the Crystalline Rocks.

Strike and Dip. — The rocks of this formation, except in a very
few cases, are all stratified with variations of bedding, from that
as thin as slate in the mica schists to that so heavy as to resemble
massive trap intrusions. Both strike and dip are subject to
great variation. A dip to the southeast for a long distance, with
an opposite dip along a section only two miles and a half to the
northeast, can be accounted for only by supposing an unequal
thrust from the direction of the contorting force. In fact, out of
five different sections made across the Azoic belt at various
points of its length, no two showed the same arrangement of
strata — from which we conclude that the thrusting force must
have acted very unequally along the entire length of the belt,
sometimes merely tilting the strata ; again, standing them on
edge, and j-et again, completely overturning them ; in some
places pressing them into close folds for a part or the entire
length of the section, in others leaving gentle or abrupt anti-
clinal and synclinal folds.

Both strike and dip are also found to be subject to variations
from the disturbing action of granitic intrusions. At Dixon's
spar quarry the change is from N. 55° E. to N. 22° E. At Pleasant
Hill a granitic rein cuts through the limestone, which causes a

246 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884,

disturbance from N. 55° E. to N. 10° E. Excluding cases of local
distortion, however, the crystalline rocks range in strike between
N. 45° E. to N. 60° E., and in dip from nearly vertical to nearly
horizontal.

Dikes. — We have already spoken of the granite and serpentine
as intrusive, forming in certain cases true beds, and again, show-
ing genuine vein structure with numerous branchings. Regard-
ing the structural relations of the bluish gray trap, there are as
yet some doubts. The geologists of the Second Pennsylvania
Survey have spoken of it as forming massive trap intrusions
between hornblende gneiss — of which the latter is metamorphic.

This theory, I am inclined to think, will prove to be a mistaken
one. In Delaware, as we have said, the gray acided rock runs by
indistinct gradations into true araphibolite schist, the many
stages of variations being sometimes witnessed in a single quarry,
without the slightest structural distinctions. Seams of the gray
trap have been seen running through the black hornblende gneiss,
but without the least signs of intrusion. That the bluish gray
trap may occupy irregular patches more or less lenticular, is no
doubt true, but the latter can in no sense be regarded as forming
dikes between a metamorphic schist ; on the other hand, all the
rocks of the hornblendic belt, from the most acidic gray trap to
the true amphibolite schist, belong to a single series of eruptive
rocks, having wide lithological variations. That these variations
may be the result of a subsequent paramorphosis taking place in
the bluish gray trap is quite possible ; it is therefore to be hoped
that present petrographical studies of the hornblendic rocks of
the State will throw more light on this important question.

Contortion of Strata. — The crystalline rocks offer the most
complicated and striking examples of contortion, presenting
nothing, however, which is not characteristic of all metamorphic
areas. Close folding is the form generally seen, the line of
bedding being either straight, gently or violently contorted.
Abrupt anticlinal and synclinal folding is also common, these
complex folds being, however, very irregular and much twisted.

Age and Stratigraphical Order. — ^^The crystalline rocks may be
divided into four groups, which have a fixed stratigraphical
relation to each other, namely, the hornblendic, the micaceous,
the calcareous and the quartzitic.

The normal order of arrangement of these strata, and thereby

1884.1 NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 24t

their relative age, is a point upon which there has been mnch
difference of opinion, owing to the confusing arrangement of the
strata throughout some of the counties of southeastern Pennsyl-
vania. Notwithstanding such difficulties, the geologists who have
discaided broad generalizations, and devoted themselves to the
study of local details, find the way gradually opening to a better
understanding of the truth ; and the early presumption that the
mica schists and gneisses are of Paleozoic age, is rapidly becoming
a matter of general acceptation. The latest results of geological
study in Pennsylvania, together with the observations of the
writer throughout Northern Delaware, tend to show quite con-
clusively that the crystalline rocks represent the following ages :
(1) The Laurentian (?) including the rocks of the hornblendic
belt ; (2) the Potsdam, to which the quartzitic and sand rocks
belong; (3) the Calciferous, including the magnesian marbles,
and (4) the age of the mica schists, which must be placed some-
where above the Trenton, and, according to Mr. Charles E. Hall,
above the Hudson River, slates. With these points in view, we
shall proceed with the demonstration.

The Laui'entian (?) — The so-called Laurentian area of Delaware
is but a continuation of identical areas in southeastern Pennsyl-
vania, within the Philadelphia belt, which, according to Mr. Hall,
are three in number, each connected with the other by a narrow
neck, and each situated successively to the northeast. The
southernmost of these areas is of lenticular shape, reaching from
Chester Creek, and spreading out over the southern part of Dela-
ware County, whence it extends into the State of Delaware, as
shown upon the map. Northeast of this patch, and to the north-
west of Media, is another area of irregular form, while a third — a
long east and west belt — runs from West Chester, south of Con-
shohocken, eastward to the Delaware River, near Trenton. Thus
the Delaware Laurentian forms the southernmost tongue of the
one Laurentian area of the Philadelphia belt, the upper portion
of which has been for a long time known as the Third Belt of
Rogers. As regards the age of the Third Belt, Mr. Hall says,
" The rocks of the Third Belt are identical with the granitoid and
syenitic rocks of the Welsh Mountain, north of the Chester
County limestone valley. These rocks of the Welsh Mountain
are similar in all respects to the crystalline rocks extending into

248 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884. ,

Pennsylvania from New Jersey. In New Jersey they are iden-
tified as belonging to the Laurentian."

With these points in view, I have followed Mr. Hall, and placed
the syenitic rocks of Delaware in the Laurentian, although I feel
that it is, at best, but a problematical designation. Any positive
declaration upon this point would be premature, until a more
thorough structural and petrographical study has been finished,
together with a comparison of results from diverse localities.
Throughout southeastern Pennsj^lvania the hornblendic rocks are
always stratigraphicall}'- the lowest, and such is the case in
northern Delaware.

The general dip of the syenitic rocks, upon the flanks of which
rest the strata of the micaceous belt, is, in the latter locality, to
the northwest. In the western part of the State, however, the
hornblendic rocks have experienced an overthrow, whereby they
dip to the southeast, in which case the hornblendic rocks are
apparently the younger. This peculiarity need not, however, be
misleading as to true stratigraphical order. Putting aside all
questions of position of strata, one must note the decidedly
primitive aspect of these rocks, which, in lithological characters,
are identical with the rocks of more northern portions of the
Laurentian area.

The Potsdam. — In the northwestern part of Mill Creek Hundred,
a triangular area of Potsdam sandstone is seen upon the map,
which, rising from beneath a patch of Brj^n Mawr gravel, extends
into Pennsjdvania, and is best exposed beyond the State line. At
Kivin's limestone quarry, a mass of quartzite forms what is clearly
an anticlinal fold, over which is a corresponding anticlinal of
magnesian limestone. The anticlinal structure of the quartzite is
further shown at a few other points, where dips both to the north-
west and southeast are noted.

The Galciferous — Mr. Hall divided the limestone of south-
eastern Pennsylvania into two groups, namely, the Galciferous
magnesia limestones and marbles, and the possible Trenton lime-
stones and slates, the former comprising the rocks of the Chester
County limestone valley, and several outlying troughs to the
south, the latter those alternations of slate and limestone which
form the outer border of the Calciferous belt.

The limestone areas of Delaware belong to the lower of the
above groups, or to the Calciferous of Mr. Hall, the equivalent of

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 249

the Lower Magnesian limestone of the West. The magnesian
marble which outcrops beyond the State line, at Nivin's, runs into
Delaware, and appears at the surface in the Jackson quarry at
Hockessin. Here the rock forms a clearly defined anticlinal fold.
The bending, both to the northwest and southeast, being observed
within the cutting. The limestone is overlaid by the mica schists
which, to the north of the pit, dip to the northwest, and to the
south, southeast, forming an anticlinal fold capping the limestone.

To the southeast of Centreville, the limestone occupies the
same stratigraphical position as in the case just mentioned. At
Pleasant Hill the bending of the schists over a saddle of limestone
is beautifully shown in the quarry cutting, furnishing clear proof
as to the superior position of the mica schists.

The Mica Schist and Gneiss. — The inference that these rocks
were primal, was based largely upon their lithological similarity
to many of the older crystalline schists. They were hence referred
to the White Mountain, or the Rocky Mountain, series. But litho-
logical similarities must invariably bend to higher statigraphical
evidence. In Delaware the micaceous rocks overlie the limestone,
and no readjustment of position can make the arrangement other-
wise. They are, therefore, younger than the limestone, which, in
its turn, is younger than the underlying Potsdam.

The Calciferous limestone can hardly be referred to any other
position, and, invariably underlying the schists, the latter must
begin somewhere in the Silurian, and, possibly, mount as high up
as the Devonian.

The Cretaceous.

Geographical Extent. — The Cretaceous of Delaware, a continu-
ation of the same formation as developed in New Jersey, extends
across the State as a northeast and southwest belt, with a
breadth of 18, and a length of from 15 to 20 miles, covering a
total area of about 250 square miles. The northern limit of the
belt, laid down on the map, has already been traced out as marking
the southern boundary of the Laurentian. The southern limit
runs a little to the south of, and parallel with, Appoquinimink
Creek, cutting through the centre of Noxontown mill-pond, and
thence proceeds in a straight southeasterly direction.

Subdivisions. — The formation may be divided into a number ot
subdivisions, based upon lithological grounds, the period ot
sedimentation extending through the whole Cretaceous ; i. e.,
17

250

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

[1884.

Lower, Middle and Upper, of the English geologists. The divi-
sions can be best represented by the following table, which is also

n.

TJppEK Cretaceous
(Chalk).

Middle Marl Bed.

Yellow Sand.
Shell Layer."

Pure Green Sand.

Indurated Marl
Bed. . . .

Middle Cretaceous
(Upper Green Sand,Gaiilt).

Lower Cretaceous
(Wealden?).

Lower Marl Bed,

Indurated Marl.

Red Sand.

Black Argillo-Micaceous

Marl,

Shell Marl,
Cretoidal Marl.

Sand Marl,

Plastic Clays.

Sand and Clay Marls.

Red Clay.

Fire-Clays and Sands.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 251

constructed with a view of showing the relative thickness of each
of the groups. In the classification the plastic clays have been
placed in the Lower Cretaceous, and are probably the exact
equivalent of the Wealden, while the marl deposits, ranging from
the Lower to the Middle Beds, can, upon palseontological
grounds, be referred with considerable confidence to the Upper
Cretaceous, or Chalk. The Sand Marl formation can at best be
placed in but an intermediate position, but is probably nearly
akin to the marls, all of the . fossils ever found within the sand
marls of New Jersey having been the characteristic species of the
marl beds proper.

Structure. — The different subdivisions of the Cretaceous foi-m
uniform beds, dipping at a low angle to the southeast. Having
been successively deposited upon a gently sloping bed, they
have remained in the same position, with no subsequent disturb-
ance. The general direction of strike can be seen from the
trend of the various belts. A line joining the point of contact
between the Cretaceous, at Newark, with a similar point back of
Newport, upon nearly the same level, ran N. 72° E., which
course, being approximately parallel with the lines of the lower
belts, may fairly represent the strike of the formation. The dip
was determined with great accuracy at Summit Bridge, about
midway of the width of the Cretaceous. At this place the canal
excavation has reached a depth of 10 feet, and continues several
miles to the westward, with gradually lowering banks. Upon
both sides of this wide cutting, the marl outcrops as a well-
defined laji-er, and as any number of lines in the direction of the
dip can be obtained, the amount of pitch can be accurately deter-
mined. As the transit could always be placed upon either bank
in front of the escarpment of marl, and the other side could be
easily seen, the operation of determining the difference in level
between the two outcrops, on a line running S. 30° E., was not
difficult. This difference in level, combined with the angle of
depression, as determined by the vernier, would give the data for
ascertaining the distance between the outcrops, the latter of
which varied from 300 to 400 feet. The results of the observa-
tions give a dip of 45 feet to the mile.

Plastic Clays.

This formation is the thickest member of the Cretaceous. Its
southern line begins a few miles south of New Castle, and extends

252 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

in a southeasterly direction to just below Red Lion, crossing the
railroad between Porter's and Kirkwood, and cutting the State
line two miles north of Chesapeake Cit3\ Although of so much
importance, it is, owing to the great thickness of the overlying
gravels, rarely exposed, and even when more favorable opportu-
nities are offered, but a few feet of the characteristic Red Clay
appear above the surface. The formation is divided into the
uppermost Red Clays, and the lowermost White Clays, of which
the former is the deposit commonly exposed.

Red Clay. — This is a highly plastic clay, of a vermilion-red
color, remarkably free from grit, and cutting with great smooth-
ness. It is identical with the red terra-cotta clays of Perth
Amboy, N. J., and may prove to be their equal in quality. The
Red Clay forms uniform beds, with which are sometimes inter-
stratified thin seams of fire-clay, making a total thickness of at
least .50 feet. White Clays. — The series of white clays and sands
lying beneath the stratum of red, reach to a great depth below the
surface, and have not yet been wholly penetrated by the deepest
boring made. The outcrop is upon the lowest ground, of which
the only locality discovered lay a little to the south of New Castle,
on the river shore. Here the white clay outcrops for a depth of
from 10 to 15 feet, giving the following section :

1. Sandy fire-clay, . . .3 feet.

2. Mottled clay, .... 3 feet.

3. A very pure fat fire-clay at water-level.

The lowermost clay of this section is of an unusually fine
quality, and has in past years been worked below water-level,
and shipped to Trenton potteries. From this exposure we are
enabled to see that the White Clay series, outcropping as it does
at water-level, covered by a red stratum, and again by some 30
feet of gravel, is entirely out of the reach of study ; yet the pre-
sumption that it does lie deeply buried is beyond controvers3\
Our only means of studying the White Clay series is by means of
borings, which are very rare, and in no cases have accurate
records of the deposits passed through been preserved. We only
know that the borings yielded alternate layers of white clays and
sands to a depth of 200 feet. We therefore judge that this series
presents strong analogies to the white clays of New Jersey.

1884.] natural sciences op philadelphia. 253

Sand Marl.
The belt of sand marl runs from the river course to the south
of New Castle, gradually tapering in breadth as the Maryland
boundary line is reached. The southern limit of the belt, starting
at Delaware City, cuts the north corner of St. George's, and
keeps about a mile above the canal for the remaining distance
across the State. It may be described as a j^ellow sand, of a
greenish tinge, comprising a yellow siliceous sand mixed with
some green sand and a variable proportion of argillaceous matter.
No data are at hand for determining its thickness, except the
imperfect method of using width of outcrop and angle of dip,
according to which we find the sand marl stratum to have a
depth of 90 feet.

Marl Beds.

The marl beds cover a comparatively small area in the State,
and are practically limited to that division of New Castle county
called St. George's Hundred.

The first important outcrops of green sand occur along the
Delaware and Chesapeake Canal, the channel of which cuts
deep into the formation. Its northern limit, as determined by
old marl pits, runs approximately parallel with the canal, keeping
a distance of from a quarter of a mile to a mile. From this line
the marl extends southward to another boundary parallel with,
and about one mile south of, Appoquinimink Creek, where it
gives place to the Tertiary clays.

Subdivisions. — The divisions of the green sand formation are
found, with two exceptions, to correspond with those made by
the New Jersey Surve3^ In the first place, what is called by
Professor Cook the Upper Marl bed, is in Delaware, entirely
absent, and in the second place, the so-called Bed sand is either
entirely absent, or represented, as in the eastern part of the
State, by a much thinner stratum than is found in New Jersey.
This scanty development of the Bed sand is, however, compen-
sated for by a greater thickness of the Indurated green marl,
which, in Delaware, becomes the prominent parting laj'er between
the middle and lower marl beds. The chronological chart of
the Cretaceous (II), will show the divisions of the marl beds as
found in the State.

Lower Marl Bed.

This stratum, which extends as a narrow belt on each side of
the canal, is found to outcrop along the entire length of the

254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

same, rising about a foot above the surface of the water, and,
farther west, to a height of 20 feet. The several subdivisions of
the lower marl will be treated in the order of their age.

Gretoidal Marl. — This lowest layer is a tough, bluish black
marl, which, upon drying, turns to a lighter ashen or earthen
color, when it is found to be made of a large amount of green
sand, siliceous sand and argillaceous matter. The solid particles
are coated with chalky carbonate of lime, which, under the
microscope, appears as a fine white powder of a granular char-
acter, but often light and flocculent.

Shell Layer. — The cretoidal marl is always found beneath a
layer of shells or shell marl, having a thickness of about 3 feet.
In fact, the shells are usually mixed with a greater or less
quantity of the black earthy marl having the characters of the
cretoidal variety. The shells are usually the characteristic
species of the New Jersey equivalents, the most abundant being
the clumsy Exogyra costata with Pychnodonta vesicularis and
Ostrea larva.

Black Argillaceous and Micaceous Marl. — This layer, over-
lying the shells, in its lower part possesses somewhat the charac-
ters of the cretoidal marl. To the west of the Delaware railroad,
however, it rises well out of the water of the canal, and assumes
a distinctly argillaceous nature, becoming a black micaceous clay.
It also shows an entire absence of calcareous matter, and pos-
sesses a decidedly styptic taste, due to the large quantity of
sulphate of iron in the percolating waters. This argillaceous
marl, when examined in the dry state by a glass, is found to be
composed of minute sharp glassy particles of quartz, coated with
a grayish dust, and associated with a few green sand particles of
unusual fineness, together with a considerable quantity of minute
scales of muscovite.

Thickness. — Fortunately we have sufficient evidence for meas-
uring accurp,tely the thickness of the lower marl bed. The belt
has an average breadth of 1^ miles, which, with a dip of 40 feet
to the mile, would give a thickness of 60 feet for the stratum.
At Summit Bridge, the black marl outcrops to a height of 42 to
47 feet. ^Calling it 40, and adding this to 15 feet of marl in
Higgin's pit, on much lower ground between St. George's and
Delaware City, we get a total of 55 feet. Since the 15 feet
excavation at the latter place f?iiled to entirely peijetrate the

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255

marl, we may call 60 feet a safe estimate for the thickness of the
lower marl bed. Of this total, more than one-half is represented
by the argillo-micaceous layer, and the remainder by the thin
shell layer, and the lowest cretoidal marl. There is one reason
why the thickness of the lower marl stratum, as developed at
Summit Bridge, should be employed in a calculation of the
thickness, rather than the smaller figures obtained farther to the
east or west. Summit Bridge is on the dividing ridge. From
this meridional line, the land slopes to the east and west. The
marl, therefore, offers a diminishing thickness of outcrop as the
river is approached, owing to the erosion of the upper argillo-
micaceous stratum, which, in the neighborhood of St. George's,
and thence to Delaware City, has been thinned down to a thick-
ness of only a few feet. It is for this reason that the upper
portion of the lower marl bed is so extensively developed at the
western end of the belt, while the lower portion of the same for-
mation is confined to the eastern portion of the belt. Since the
upper argillo-micaceous stratum is a poor, and even objectionable,
material for fertilizing purposes, while the contrary may be said
of the lower cretoidal variety, the locality for marl diggings
must lie east of the railroad bridge.

Induratep Marl Bed.

The northern limit of this belt, which is also the southern
limit of the lower marl bed, starts near the mouth of Scott's run,
and thence keeps parallel with the canal to the railroad, when it
begins slightly to diverge, cutting the headwaters of the northern
branch of the Bohemia River. The southern limit of the belt
can only be approximately outlined, but as can best be determined
runs from Port Penn through the headwaters of Drawyer's
Ureek, and crosses the Maryland line four miles below the head
of Bohemia River. The indurated marl stratum is divided into
two layers, the lower red sand, and the upper indurated marl.

Bed Sand. — The formation which has been called the indurated
marl bed is the equivalent of the red sands of the New Jersey
geologists, it being, in both cases, the prominent parting layer
between the lower and middle marl. Along the south side of the
canal, between the railroad bridge and St. George's, a soft reddish
yellow sand of uniform character rests upon a stratum of black
marl, It is deyeloped to a considerable thickness in the neigh-

256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

borhood of the latter town, and is characterized b3' the numerous
particles of green sand contained in it. The thickness could not,
however, be accurately determined, running as it does, indistinctly
into the overlying gravels. West of the railroad, the deposit
thins out entirely, and does not again appear. Along the ravine
made by Scott's Run the red sand has been found Ijing upon the
shell marl, running to the south into a black decomposed green
sand. Notwithstanding the deposit of red sand, which outcrops
along the south shore of the canal, the shell marl is dug by several
parties on a strip along the same side, and for this reason, I have
extended the southern limit of the lower marl belt slightly to the
south of the southern shore of the canal.

Considering the foregoing facts, the writer with some trouble
that cannot well be removed, has referred the reddish yellow sand
stratum to the red sand of Prof. Cook. This red sand occupies
a narrow strip along the south side of the canal, to the east of
the railroad, and runs to the south beneath the overlying stratum
of decomposed marl, by which nearly the whole area of the bed
as previously marked out, is covered. From this we see that the
true red sand, which is so extensively developed in New Jersey
has a less thickness in Delaware, but is replaced by the indurated
marl, which in New Jersey is found more thickly exposed, but
occupying the same stratigraphical position above the red sand.

Indurated Oreen Sand. — This marl attracts from the observer
more attention than any other, coming to the surface as it does
in numerous localities, and having been extensively worked for
its pre-eminent qualities as a fertilizer.

Already in a state of partial decomposition, the decay rapidly
progresses by the removal of the potash, and the oxidation of the
ferous salt of iron, or its direct solution by carbonated water.
Generall}^ speaking, the marl in the bed is of a black, loamy
nature which, when dry, assumes a brownish or grayish tinge. It
is made of a variable quantity of green sand, with a large pro-
portion of siliceous sand. In some places the marl is found to
contain a large amount of argillaceous matter, while again it is
extremely clean and dry. It differs entirely from the lower marl,
by containing no carbonate of lime in the pulverent state ; but
in certain places the deposit abounds in shells, which renders it
comparable with the shell marl of the former formation.

Examined with a glass, the grains of indurated marl prove of

1884.J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25t

a brownish color, and very rough and irregular, apparently the
effect of weathering. The grains can easily be crushed by the
finger-nail, thus exposing the internal green color. The granules
are coated with a laj'er of brown oxide of iron, within which shell
exists the unchanged nucleus of glauconite.

The Indurated Marl, unless finely pulverized, has a lumpy ten-
dency, caused by numerous grains of green sand cemented by
the brown oxide of iron. In fact, the marl has, at certain points,
been almost entirely changed to brown oxide of iron, while in
other cases, seams of the latter penetrate the mass of the green
sand. Prof. Cook is of the opinion that the red sand of New
Jersey is due to the decomposition of green sand, whereby the
soluble salts have been carried away, leaving the insoluble siliceous
sand and red oxide of iron. We may, therefore, regard the belt,
which in New Jersey is called the red sand, and in Delaware the
indurated marl, as a true marl belt in a greater or less degree of
decomposition ; and while a slightly indurated green sand may
entirely differ mineralogically from a red siliceous sand, the dif-
ference is after all only one of degree of decomposition.

Middle Marl Bed.

This belt crosses the State with a uniform breadth of three and
a half miles, the northern line running from Port Penn, a little
north of Draw3'er's creek, and crossing the State line four miles
south of the Bohemia River. The southern line crosses the centre
of Noxontown mill-pond, keeping parallel with and a little south
of Appoquinimink creek. The middle marl bed (see II) is
divided into three very distinct layers: (1) A lowermost pure
green sand ; (2) an intermediate layer of friable shells, and (3)
an upper yellow or reddish 3ellow sand. The characters of these
several strata will be considered as follows : —

Green Sand Layer. — This lowermost subdivision of the middle
marl bed occupies the main width of the belt to the north of
Appoquinimink Creek, and exhibits its principal exposures along
Drawyer's Creek and Silver Run, where its characters may be well
studied. It differs entirely from any of the foregoing varieties,
in that it is entire!}- free from calcareous matter, and shows none
of the general induration so characteristic of the previous forma-
tion. On the contrary, it is a very dry, pure green sand, which
varies in color from a deep bluish to a yellowish green, the latter
shade being due to a considerable admixture of siliceous sand.

258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

The extreme dryness of this marl, compared with the preceding
varieties, is owing to the complete absence of argillaceous matter.
The grains, when examined, are smooth and well rounded, and
although frequently so soft as to be easily crushed by the nail,
show no evidence of chemical decomposition.

Shell Layer. — This intermediate, well-defined layer, is best
exposed at the head of Noxontown mill-pond, and along the south
side of Appoquinimink Creek. In thickness it varies from 3 to 10
feet, being entirely made up of white friable shells, tightly packed
together, the most common of which are Terehratula fragalis and
T. Harlani^i with Pychnodonta vesicularis.

Very often the upper part of the shell layer has lost its carbo-
nate of lime, which is replaced by brown oxide of iron. At the
head of Noxontown milLpond, the white shell layer, of which the
upper part is ferruginous, rises 5 to 6 feet out of the water,
capped by a yellow sand marl.

Yellow Sand. — This is the uppermost laj-er of the Middle
Marl Bed, and is alwaj^s found associated with and overlying the
shells. It may be described as a yellowish or reddish sand, con-
taining a small and variable proportion of glauconite, the latter
often becoming so predominant as to give the deposit a decidedly
greenish tinge.

DiORiTic Trap.

Three miles to the south of Newark, Delaware, Iron Hill rises
from the Cretaceous plane, the one conspicuous object for 10
miles or more. Running in a generally northwest and southeast
direction, it has a length of over 3 miles, a width varying from
1 mile to 1^, and a height of 225 feet. The flanks and summits
of this hill are covered with boulders of diorite and cellular
quartz. On the south side, about half way up, is seen the
outcrop of a bedded mass of serpentine rook, with a strike
following the trend of the hill. An examination of the loose frag-
ments of gTcen rock lying upon the surface showed them to be
composed of a number of indefinite chloritic and serpentine
materials in a state of partial decomposition. As the greenish
fragments were also observed to run into unchanged trap,
occurring as huge outcropping boulders, the proof appeared
conclus^ive that the serpentine rock had been due to the alteration
of the hornblende in the dioritic trap. Following the hill in its
northwest course, we find the same rock crossing the railroad,
along the cutting of which the nature of the dike is revealed.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 259

Here we first pass some 200 feet of a soft greenish clay, which
rises as walls 20 feet high. Fragments of the serpentine rock, on
the surface above the railroad cutting, showed it running into
unchanged diorite. .Lying next to the serpentine rock was 50
feet or more of both compact and cellular quartz, standing upon
edge, and striking to the northwest. It was completely impreg-
nated with minute specks and octahedrons of magnetite, which
exhibited their decomposition by numerous minute cells filled
with iron oxide. The cellular quartz, associated indiscriminately
with the compact, was literally honeycombed, the great cells
being partially filled with ochrey powder. West of the quartz
occurred a thinner development of the serpentine, offering the
same features as before. With these facts, we are led to regard
the exposure before us as a highly changed dioritic dike, in the
centre of which is a huge mass of ferruginous jaspery quartz, from
which we interpret the structure of the whole hill. Attaining the
sumniit, we find several large pits worked for iron ore. One of
them, wrought by George Whitaker, has walls of soft greenish
serpentine earth rising some 40 feet, in which are imbedded
bouUlers and fragments of cellular ferruginous quartz and iron-
stone, together with a considerable admixture of ochrey powder
and granular limonite. The economic value of the workings con-
sists in washing the serpentine earth, and extracting the limonitic
materials. Near the wash-house the yellowish green rock is seen
to outcrop with a strike to the northwest. Several of the pits on
the hill offer much the same features, while some of them contain
a greater abundance of the boulders of cellular quartz. The
method of formation of the crusts of iron-stone may be deter-
mined by an examination of the numerous quartzose boulders. It
consists in the segregation of iron oxide as tortuous veins
within the substance of the rock, set free by the complete disin-
tegration of the latter ; while the powdery and granular limonite
has resulted from an oxidation of the magnetite which so com-
pletely impregnates the jaspery quartz. Associated with the
boulders of trap, are certain foreign materials belonging to the
drift. Imbedded within the serpentine earth of Whitaker's pit,
are several large decomposed boulders of granite. Upon the
summit of the hill, a large boulder of dark limestone was also
found, besides various other materials belonging to th,e boulder
drift so universally scattered over the State,

260 proceedings of the academy of [1884.

October 21.
Mr. Thomas Meehan, Yiee-President, in the chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —
" On the Cuspidiform Petrogl^^phs, or so-called Bird-track
Rock-Sculptures, of Ohio," by D. G. Brinton, M. D.

" Preliminary Observations on the Brain of Menopoma," by
Henry F. Osborn.

October 28.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-nine persons present.

Organisms in Ice. — Prof, Letdy stated that a member had
placed in his hands, for examination, a vial of water obtained from
melting ice which is used for cooling drinking-water. From
time to time, among some sediment taken from a water-cooler,
the gentleman had observed what he supposed to be living worms,
which he suspected were introduced with the water into the
cooler, and not with the ice. Upon melting some of the ice alone,
the worms were still observed, and the water submitted for
examination was some that was thus obtained. Prof. Leidy was
surprised to find a number of worms among some flocculent
sediment, mainly consisting of vegetal hairs and other debris.
Besides the worms, there were also immature Anguillulas, and a
number of Rotifer vulgar^is, all living. It would appear that
these animals had all been contained in the ice, and had been
liberated on melting. It was an unexpected source of contami-
nation of our drinking-water, that Prof. Leidy had previously
supposed to be very improbable. The little worms he was not
familiar with.

They belong to the family of Lumbricidse, and probably may
be an undescribed species of Lumbriculus. They are white, or
colorless, from 4 to 6 millimeters long, by a third of a millimeter
in thickness. The body is divided into thirty segments, bearing
podal spines, which form four rows, with three in each fas-
ciculus, and divergeut. The spines are curved at the root,
pointed at the free end, and measure 0*05 to 0-06 mm. long.
The upper lip is blunt conical; the terminal segment truncate.
Tliere appears to be no distinct girdle, but the tliird, fourth,
and fifth f^egments contain capsuligenous glands and other organs
pertaining to the sexual appaiatus.

Several dead worms swarmed in the interior with large, ovate,
beaked, ciliated infusorians measuring from 0-05 to 0*06 mm. long
by 0-04 to 0-048 mm. broad.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261

Chapter I, Article 6, of the By-Laws was amended by the addi-
tion of the following : — " Neither the building occupied by the
society, nor any part of the site or ground pertaining thereto, shall
be sold, leased, encumbered or charged in any manner whatever,
nor shall any apartment or space in the Academy or adjacent
ground be assigned or appropriated permanently to the exclusive
use of any person or to the accommodation of any special collection
or collections, unless the proposition in this connection be in
writing, signed by at least five members, presented at a stated
meeting of the Academy, referred to the Council for examination
and report — which report shall be considered as special business,
to be acted upon at a subsequent stated meeting, to be held at
least twenty-six da3'^s after that at which the report of the Council
has been read, the date to be fixed by resolution ; but no action shall
be taken thereon until after full notice thereof and of said date shall
be given to the members by advertisement once a week, for three
weeks in two daily newspapers of general circulation in Phila-
delphia, and by written or printed notice by mail or otherwise to
all the members whose residences or places of business shall
be known to the Recording Secretar}'. At such meeting the
measure proposed may be considered and adopted b^^ two-thirds
of the members present at that meeting, or at any subsequent
adjourned meeting for that purpose, provided that at least eighty
members be present and vote ; and provided also that nothing in
this article shall be so construed as to change, alter or repeal
Art. 5, Chapter XI, or release the curators from the charge and
care of collections, as provided for in these by-laws."

Chapter XVI, Article 4, of the By-Laws was amended as
follows : — In the third line, after the word " inclusive," insert the
words " except Article 6, Chap. I " and add the followings words
or paragraph : — "Article 6, Chap. I, may be amended, altered or
repealed by two-thirds, upon a yea, and nay vote of not less than
eighty members, at a meeting called to consider that special
business, after advertisement and individual notification of the
members, in manner and form specified in said article, but not
otherwise."

The following were elected members : — George Fales Baker,
W. B. Scott, Edmund J. James, and H. LaBarre Jayne.

The following were elected correspondents : — G. Yom Rath,
of Bonn, and Geo. E. Dobson, of London.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

PEELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS UPON THE BRAIN OF MENOPOMA.
BY HENRY F. OSBORN, SC. D.

This is the second of a series of papers ^ upon the brains of
the American TJrodela. In tlie stud}^ of llenopoma, I have
detected numerous errors in the first paper upon Amphiuma,^
and my attention has kindly been called to others by Prof.
Wilder and Dr. E. C. Spitzka.

The brains of Amphiuma and Menopoma are even more alike
in their internal than in their external structure ; while the reverse
is the case in the comparison of Menopoma and 3Ienobranchus,
which resemble each other very closely externally, but in longi-
tudinal section present impoi'tant diflferences.

The greater accuracy of the Menopoma work is due to changes
in technical methods. Before hardening, the brains were inflated
with Miiller's fluid, so as to preserve the natural proportion of
the cavities. After treatment with alcohol, they were placed for
a week in dilute carmine. Calberla's egg-mass was emploj'ed as
before, except that the A'-entricles were injected with the mass
before hardening. The delicate parts of the brain-roof were thus
retained. It appears now that celloidin may be used for this purpose
to equal, if not to greater, advantage in results, and with consid-
erable economy of time. The sections were cut in absolute
alcohol, were then floated upon a slide in consecutive order, from
twenty to fifty at a time, and were covered with a delicate slip of
blotting-paper during treatment with oil of cloves. These
changes greatly improved the three series, which were obtained
in as' many planes — horizontal, transverse and vertical to the long
axis of the brain.

External Structure (PI. YI, figs. 1, 2, 3).

With a single exception, and that an important one, the brain
of Menopoma approaches closely the typical brain. The seg-

^ Many of these results were presented in the Biological Section of the
American Association, September, 1884.

2 Preliminary Observations upon the Brain of Ampliiuma. Proc. Phila.
Acad. Nat. Sc, July, 1883.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 263

mental ^ parts are clearlj^ differentiated from each other in
regular succession, beginning with the olfactory lobes or Rhinen-
cephalon, the Prosencephalon, the Diencephalon, the Mesen-
cephalon, the Epencephalon and Metencephalon. This was
not found to be the case in Amphiuma, where the Rhinen- and
Prosencephala and Dien- and Mesencephala are barely distin-
guishable. The exception above noted is that, the epiphysis
does not appear upon the external surface, but, as we shall see, is
altogether wanting, while a vascular plexus lying between the
hemispheres offers a very deceptive imitation of this important
structure. The hypophysis and infundibulum, however, have a
striking development.

A careful study of the surface of the diencephalon discloses
a minute transparent area lying between two whitish streaks.
The latter are transverse commissures in the roof of the third
ventricle ; the former is the cavity of the epiphysial tube, or
recessus pinealis, the brain-cavity being separated from the pia
mater only by a single layer of cells. This transparent area has
already been pointed out by Goette^ in the frog, where it is
somewhat less conspicuous. In front of the foremost commissure
is a triangular transparent space ; at the sides of this are two horn-
like forward continuations of the diencephalon. These processes
I consider homologous with the habenulae of the mammalian
brain, and with the " Schnabelformiger Fortsatz " described by
Muller in the lamprey's brain. In the lamprey they coalesce in

^ The nomenclature proposed by Prof. Burt G. "Wilder has been adopted,
with few exceptions. It proceeds upon the consistent plan of naming the
segments, and then- various parts, as far as possible, after the segmental
names which now meet with general acceptance among anatomists ; also of
using abbreviated forms of the longer terms now in use. For the sake of
clearness the new terms, and their synonyms, which are employed in this
paper are given below. The Prosencephalon, including: the procoilim, lateral
ventricles ; the proj)lexi, lateral plexuses ; the prosoccelia, ventriculus com-
munis laborum ; the supraplexus, plexus in the roof of the prosocoelia ; the
porta, foramen of Munro ; the terma, lamina terminalis ; the prcecommis-
sura, anterior commissure. The Diencephalon, including : the supra-
commissura, commissura habenarum ; the processus and recessvs pinealis,
the postcommissura, posterior commissure ; the diacodia, third ventricle.
The Mesencephalon, including : the mesoccelia, iter, etc. A system of this
kind must undergo modification, from time to time, but in the end it will
be far superior to the present cumbersome multinomial system.

^ Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke, 1875.

264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

the median line, but here they are separate, as vaay be seen
by a close external examination, and verified by transverse
sections. This homology is confirmed by the stud}- oi the fore-
most of the transverse commissures. In front of this space
rises the reddish body, which has been generally mistaken for
the epipliysis. In the natural state this body is not very promi-
nent, but as soon as the ventricles collapse, it is thrust conspicu-
ously upwards. The ventricular collapse is also the occasion of
an artificial dorsal furrow in the optic lobe, which is here abso-
lutely unpaired. Upon the ventral aspect of the brain we again
observe two transparent areas. One resembles a long slit in
front of the optic chiasma, and is found to be a portion of the
lamina terminalis. The other is due to a thinning of the floor of
the infundibulum, and is seen immediately in front of the
hypoph3'sis. The hemispheres are closely applied to each other,
but have no structural union. The cerebellum is slightly over-
hung by the optic lobe.

The proportions of the various segmental parts are very
similar to those of Menobranchus, and this seems to accord with
the similarity'' of the proportions in the head, body and limbs of
these animals.

Internal Structure.

A natural introduction to the internal structure would be
a description of the walls and cavities of the various segments,
but it happens that the boundaries of these segments can only
be determined after we settle upon the relations of the parts
which compose them, so, until some of the details have been
investigated, this description must be postponed. In general,
the brain is a tube forking in front into the paired lobes and
cavities of the hemispheres.

The Ependyma and Pia Mater. — The pia mater closely invests
all the brain surfaces and sends numerous nutrient vessels into
its walls. It envelops all parts of the brain, with the exception
of the hypophysis, which lies external to it (fig. 4), so that the
pia actually separates the h3rpoph3'sis from the floor of the
infundibulum and sends in numerous smaller vessels between
the epithelial tubes which constitute this body. This relation is
not true of the posterior lobe of the hypophysis which is a
development of the brain-wall and is surrounded by the pia, the
anterior lobe as is well known, arising from the oral epithelium.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 265

At several points the pia and ependyma unite to form the sole
elements of the brain-wall, giving the transparent effect, in
external view, which has been mentioned. A striking instance of
this is seen in the dorsal wall of the infundibular cavity, which
is extremely delicate, the ependyma consisting of a single row
of cells. The vascular plexuses above the medulla and between
the hemispheres are instances of such union, elaborated by the
introduction of vascular plexuses from the pia. Three varieties
of the cells of the ependyma can be distinguished. The cells of
the first variety form a general investment of the inner brain-
wall ; they are from one to three deep, cylindrical or much
elongated, crowded between them are yellowish oily granules,
and many of the cells remotely resemble ordinary fat cells in the
possession of a proto-plasmic nucleated centre, lying between
yellowish, unstained terminations. It is the innermost of these
cells which give rise to thread-like processes which radiate out-
wards in the brain-wall, but the latter never make such beautiful
displays as are seen in the frog's brain, and figured by Stieda.^
The cells of the second variety lack the fatty granules ; they are
found coating the prsecommissura, but are principally observed
wherever the brain-wall is reduced to a single row of cells as in
the roof of the infundibulum, and in that part of the floor to
which the hypophysis is attached; they are small, rounded cells,
at one point becoming very much elongated, namely, in the sides
of the processus pineahs. The transition from this to the third
variety is beautifully shown in the forward portion of the roof of
the third ventricle. Here the rounded passes into the beaded
character of the single cell layer which follows the elaborate
foldings of the diaplexus.

The consecutive series of sections in three planes afford fine
material for the study of the nerve-fibre courses, and much has
already been ascertained that throws light upon the relations of
the brain segments. I will here describe only the fibre courses
which have a transverse direction, considering under this head
the relations of the cerebellum,^ the origin of the optic nerves,
and the various commissures.

^ Zeitschrift fiir wiss. Zool., Band xx.

* Compare E. C. Spitzka. The relations of the Cerebellum, Alienist
and Neurologist. New York, January, 1884.

18

266 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

The Cerebellum (figs. 6, t). — Numerous as are the errors
which at present prevail in the literature of the amphibian brain,
none are more striking than those relating to the cerebellum.^
It is said to retain its embryonic condition of a small band-like
structure stretching over the fourth ventricle. Now it happens
that the amphibian cerebellum is a flat structure, and if viewed
on edge, as is the case in looking down upon the frog's brain, it
does appear very small ; if, on the other hand, it is seen in ver-
tical longitudinal section, its large bulk, relatively to other parts,
is at once apparent. If, further, as will be done in another
paper, a corresponding section of an amphiuma brain be super-
posed upon the frog section, we find that the former barely covers
one-twenty-fourth of the diameter of the latter, although the
Amphiuma is a very much larger animal. The description
referred to above, then, is as exaggerated when applied to the
frog as it is true of such forms as Amphiuma, Menopoma and
Menohranchus.

In Amphiuma, the cerebellum is reduced to its simplest pos-
sible expression. It seems doubtful whether it contains any
nerve cells whatever. In Menopoma, however, a few cells similar
to those in the optic lobes, can be observed on either side of the
transverse fibres which make up the larger part of this body ; it
is difficult to distinguish these cells from those of the ependyma.
Notwithstanding the character of this bod}', its main relations to
the adjoining parts are precisely similar to those of the higher
vei'tebrates. These relations have already been indefinitely
indicated \>y Stieda. (1.) From the lateral tips of the medulla
arises a column of fibres on either side, which arches forward ;
here the columns are reinforced by fibres apparently arising from
lateral cell-masses, these columns turn back and enter the cere-
bellum. (2.) Passing beneath these columns is another pair,
which diverge and then converge as the}' enter the pars peduncu-
laris of the mesencephalon ; they can be followed some distance
forwards upon either side of the mesocoelia. (^3.) Passing
directly forward from the ventral surface of the cerebellum, a
few scattering fibres enter the valvula and with some doubt can
be followed into the cells of the roof of the optic lobe. In one
and two we recognize the post- and pme-pedunculi or inferior

^ Mihalkovics, loc. cit., p. 56 ; also, Wiedersheim, Lehrbuch der Ver-
gleicheuden Anatomic, 1883, p. 397.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 26T

and superior (processus ad cerebrum) peduncles of the higher
vertebrate brain.

The scarcit}-, if not absence, of nerve cells in the Amphiuma
or Menopoma cerebellum, renders it difficult to understand the
meaning of tliese peduncles, unless we regard the cerebellum here
as in large part a decussational system, composed of fibres
crossing from one side of the brain to the other. It may be
added that the frog's cerebellum is richly cellular.

The Optic Nerves (fig. 8). — No fibres have as yet been followed
from the optic lobe (Mesencephalon) to enter the optic tracts,
although there can be little doubt that they are present ; but the
fibres in the thalami arise in a manner which points, almost with
certainty, to the important fact that in the Amphibia the decus-
sation of the optic tracts is incomplete. In other words, part of
the fibres of each optic nerve enter from the chiasma, i. e., from
the opposite side of the brain, part enter from the same side of the
brain. (1.) The fibres supplj'ing the chiasma, arise from cell
masses in the upper lateral portions of the thalami, and sweep
around the sides of the thalami, partly encircling the main longi-
tudinal fibre system (crura cerebri) ; they pass downwards and
obliquely forwards, enter the chiasma, and apparently pass to the
nerve of the opposite side. (2.) In the floor and lower lateral cell
masses of the thalami arise smaller bundles of fibres, which pass
beneath the longitudinal system, above and then in front of the
chiasma to enter the optic nerve of the same side. They can be
traced by following successive sections forwards, but do not
interdigitate with the fibres of the chiasma, as in the figure which
combines the results of a series of sections. If this fact is con-
firmed by other observers, it will show that the partial decussation
of the optic tracts is an early, if not a primitive condition, instead
of being peculiar to the higher mammals, as has been generally
maintained.

The Commissures.

TJie Prsecommissura (fig. 9). — In the frog's brain ^ it has been
found that there are two divisions of this commissure : a posterior,
connecting the lower portions of the hemispheres, and an anterior,
connecting the upper median walls. Both have been found in
Menopoma^ the latter arching upwards at the sides, and, as is
clear in fig. 4, it forms on either side the posterior boundary'' of

1 Stieda, Iqc, qU., p, 308,

268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

the porta, or passage from the single to the lateral cavities of the
Prosencephalon. In Menopoma, however, the posterior division
is immediately below the anterior, and it is found in the horizontal
sections to be not a true commissural, but a decussational system.
At this point, a large number of the fibres composing each of the
longitudinal tracts, just mentioned in connection with the optic
chiasma, cross each other and pass to or from the base of the
opposite hemisphere. In Menohranchus these two tracts are
completely separated, the upper division passing independently
across the ventricle.

The Postcomviissura. — Although this commissure is part of a
conspicuous fold of the brain-roof separating the Dien- from the
Mesencephalon, it really contains in the Amphibia but few fibres.
Another interesting fact is that these fibres do not enter into the
thalami, but pass obliquely backwards into the region of the
longitudinal tracts composing the pars peduncularis of the Mesen-
cephalon. This accords with Mihalkovics' ^ observations upon the
chick, and tends to confirm Pawlowsky's ^ view that this is not a
commissure in the strict application of the word, but is rather a
side connection of the longitudinal fibre system. This view
accords also with Ahlborn's recent observations upon the
lamprey.

TJie Supracommissura (fig. 8). — In the forward portion of the
roof of the diacoelia, and immediately above the optic chiasma is
a commissure, which, as far as I can ascertain, has been hereto-
fore entirely overlooked in the Amphibia. In Menopoma and
AmpMuma it is very large ; in the frog it is much reduced, and
lies further forward ; in Menohranchus it is represented by a
slender band of fibres immediately in front of the recessus
pinealis. In all these forms it lies in front of the epiphysial
process, and completely separates this tube from the dia- and
supraplexus. It occupies the same relative position as the
variously named Commissura habenarum,^ or the commissure of
the pineal stalk (Mihalkovics)^ of the mammalian brain, as well

1 Loe. cit., p. 73.

2 Pawlowsky, Ueber den Faserverlauf in der hinteren Gehimcommissur.
Zeits. fiir wiss. Zool., Band xxiv, 1874,

3 Wilder, Anatomical Technology, 1882, p. 463.

* Loc. cit., p. 100. This comparison is sonae^hat doubtful.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269

as the commissure figured by Professor Balfour ^ in the Elasmo-
branch brain. It passes across the posterior ends of the hook-like
processes of the thalami, which I have compared with the habenulae,
and the most satisfactory interpretation of this commissure is
afforded by a comparison with Ahlborn's figures of the lamprey
brain. 2 At the sides and to the front of the recessus pinealis^ I
find in Menopoma two compact masses of nerve cells, which I
think we may compare with the ganglia habenarum. These
masses form the posterior, and to some extent the inferior,
boundary of the supracommissura. Following the fibres of this
commissure downwards and forwards, we find that they partly
enter the thalami, while the greater part pass directly into the
hemispheres. Their distribution, then, is similar to that of the
fibres of the teenia thalami optici, while the commissural portion
may be compared with a slender commissure, the commissura ten-
uissima^ traversing the habenulae in the lamprey's brain. The
relations to the hemispheres are especially interesting, as they
indicate, between the posterior parts of these bodies, a commis-
sural union of considerable extent and importance.

Infundibular Commissures. — The lobes of the infundibulum
are united dorsally and ventrally by two commissures, the
uppermost being quite distinct and extensive (fig. 4) and forming
the thin fold which divides the iter from the infundibular cavity.

The Hypophysis and Epiphysis.

The backward extension of the hypophysis, together with its
great development, and the unusual size of the infundibular cavity
and lateral lobes, lend this portion of the brain especial interest.
I will, however, only remark here upon the clear separation of
the anterior and posterior lobes of the hypophysis, by the turning
in of the pia mater over the forward face of the anterior lobe (fig.
4). The vessels of the pia ramify between the columnar epithe-
lial cells, which compose the tubes forming this lobe. In vertical
section the lumen of one of these tubes is occasionally seen. The
ependj'ma is much convoluted in the posterior lobe, and these
foldings may readily be mistaken for tubes.

Our knowledge of the epiphysis in the Amphibia is in a far from
satisfactory state. There can be little doubt as to the correctness

* Elasmobranch Fishes, plate xv. * Loc. cit., p. 285.

2*10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

of Goette's important observation ^ that in the batrachia the
epiphysis proper loses its primitive connection with the brain,
and lies external to the skull, while its primitive union with the
brain is indicated by the more or less degenerate walls of the
epiphysial tube. Yet Goette's figures do not give such a clear
history of these changes, as the importance of the subject demands,
and so far as we know, there have been no embryological investi-
gations on this subject among the urodela.

In the meantime, since the publication of Goette's discovery,
many general works ^ by different writers upon comparative
anatomy have appeared, all of which figure the epiphysis as a
conspicuous object lying between the cerebral hemispheres. There
can be little doubt that these, as well as all the earlier writers
upon the Amphibian brain, such as Wyman, Ecker, Leidig, Rathke
and Stieda have mistaken the remarkable upgrowth of the vascular
plexus above the prosocoelia for the epiphysis, and that this bod3^
in the urodela, as well as in the batrachia, is represented upon the
brain surface merely- by a portion of its primitive stalk. The
grounds for this statement, so far as it concerns the urodela, are
that in Amphiuma, Menobranchus and Menopoma portions of this
primitive stalk can be seen in vertical section, in different stages
of arrest, and retaining to a greater or less extent the primitive
condition of a glovefinger-like upfolding of the brain roof.

In the discovery of the supracommissura and the invariable
position of the recessus pinealis, between this and the post-
commissura, we find unmistakable anatomical evidence for Goette's
conclusions, although we are not thereby warranted in assuming
that the development of the epiphysis is the same in the urodela as
in the batrachia. All doubt is also removed as to the connection
between the stalk of the epiphysis and the supraplexus, as the
latter is clearly distinct from the former, and does not establish
such close relations with the stalk as in the birds.

In Menopoma (fig. 4) the ependyma cells upon either side of
the recessus become much enlarged and elongated ; upon the
upper surface of the brain they lose this character, becoming

^ Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke, 1875, p. 283.

' Huxley and Martin's Practical Biology, Wiedersheim's Lehrbuch der
vergleichenden Anatomic and Wilder' s Anatomical Technology may be
cited as examples.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 2*ll

small and spherical, and folding over, form a single-layered much
flattened sac, the lumen of which retains its connection with the
diacoelia by a narrow slit. This is the only adult trace of the
processus pinealis in Menopoma. In Rana (fig. 5) I find the
same elongation of the ependyma cells, and similar cells forming
the processus, but in a double row. Here the supracommissura
is much smaller, and more widely separated from the postcom-
missura, this interval is bridged b}'^ a delicate single row of cells
which appear to turn up and form the anterior border of the re-
cessus, although this point is not very clear. There is also some
doubt whether the lumen of the processus retains its communi-
cation with the diacoelia. The processus itself is a long, flattened,
two-layered sac, circular in section, extending anteriorly so as to
overlap the supracommissura. The pia mater overlaps the pro-
cessus upon all sides, indicating that it primitively was directed
upwards. Extending from above the postcommissura, forwards
to the base of the epiphysial stalk, are numerous fibres, which
appear to enter into relations with the cells of the stalk. In
Menobranchus and Amphiuma we find a nearer approach to the
frog than to the Menopoma condition, the processus forming an
elongated flattened sac, completely constricted off from the brain
cavity.

The Flexi choroidei. — There is a singularly simple and beau-
tiful display of the relations of the intra-ventricular blood-vessels
in the brain of Menopoma (fig. 4). The thrusting in of the
ependj^ma extends from the supracommissura to the upper por-
tion of the terma. The arterial supply is apparently derived
from the median arteria carotis cerebralis, and the venous return
is at the sides of the supraplexus. The division into supra-, dia-
and proplexus is a somewhat artificial one here, but is not so
when applied to the Amphiuma brain, where the supraplexus
is very prominent, and the diaplexus extends well back into
the Mesencephalon. The lateral wings of the diaplexus are shown
passing through the porta in fig. 9. The nature of the ependyma
cell-lining of these vessels is very constant ; small and large, the
cells have the same elongated, bead-like appearance.

The Encephalic Segments. — Stieda,^ following general usage,
considers that portion of the median brain-floor lying behind the

Loc. cit.

272 PEOCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

chiasma as the lamina cinerea ; that lying in front, as the lamina
terminalis. This construction cannot be applied here with
accuracy, owing to the unusual position of the praecommissura,
in the brain-floor, instead of in the anterior median wall. Yet
for comparative purposes it is best to retain this interpretation.
It gives us an unusually extended prosocoelia, or ventriculus
communis loborum, which we find is a distinctive feature also of
the Amphiuma and Menobranchus brain. The supracommissura
may be considered as the upper posterior boundary of the proso-
coelia, separating it arbitrarily from the diacoelia, as the post-
commissura does the dia- from the mesocoelia. At all events, the
supraplexus clearly belongs to this cavity rather than to the
diacoelia.

The general subject must be discontinued here, to be resumed
in connection with the brain of the Menobranchus, in a subse-
quent paper.

Morphological Laboratory, Princeton, Oct. 20, I884.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI.

Illustrating the Brains of Menopoma and Rana.

Encephalic segments Eh. — Rhinencephalon ; Pr. — Prosencephalon ; Di. —
Diencephalon ; Me. — Mesencephalon ; Up. — Epencephalon ; Met. —
Metencephalon.

General Abbreviations.

a. — ^Prosocoelia, cavity of the primitive prosencephalon.

a. hph. — Anterior lobe of hypophysis.

a c c— Branch oi Arteria carotis cerebralis.

cbl. — Cerebellum.

ch. — Optic chiasma.

en. ce. — Canalis centralis.

dc. — Diacoelia, third ventricle.

dpx. — Diaplexus, choroid plexus of the third ventricle.

end. — Ependyma.

h. — Habenulse.

hem. and hem'. — Section and external surface of right hemisphere.

hph. — Hypophysis.

i. cm. — Inferior commissure of infundibulum.

I. — Longitudinal fibre courses, cut transversely.

med. — Medulla oblongata.

mse. — Mesocoelia, iter.

mtc. — Metacoelia, fourth ventricle,

mtpx. — Metaplexus, tela vasculosa of the fourth ventricle.

my. — Myelon, spinal cord.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PmLADELPHIA. 213

opt. — Optic lobe.

p. — ^Porta, Foramen of Munro.

pes. — Postcommissura, posterior commissure.

p. 7iph. — Posterior lobe of hypophysis.

pi. — Pia, pia mater.

ppd. — Post-pedunculus, posterior peduncle of cerebellum.

pp. — Pars peduncularis of Mesencephalon.

pre. — ^Procoelia, lateral ventricle,

pr. cs. and pr. cs'. — Prsecommissura, anterior commissure, lower and upper

divisions.
pr. eph. — Processus pinealis, the epiphysial stalk.
pr. px. — Proplexus, the choroid plexus of the lateral ventricle.
pr. pd. — Pi sepedunculus, anterior peduncle of cerebellum.
r. eph. — Recessus infra-pinealis, the opening of the epiphysial cavity into

the diacoelia.
rhen. — Section of olfactory lobe.
rst. — Restiform tract.

8C8. — Supracommissura, commissure of the habenulge.
scm. — Superior commissure of the infundibulum.
spx. — Supraplexus (formerly considered the epiphysis), the upper portion

of the vascular plexus of the prosocoelia.
spd. — Supra-pedun cuius, fibres passing from the cerebellum into the optic

lobe.
t. — Terma, lamina terminalis.

Figures 1, 2, 3. Dorsal, ventral and lateral aspects of the brain of Meno-
poma AUeghense, enlarged five diameters. The whitish band stretching
across the infundibulum, in front of the hypophysis, probably consists of
the inferior infundibular commissure. In the dorsal aspect of the fresh
brain, the position of the epiphysial process, is marked by an oval
transparent area, in front and behind which, the supra- and post-
commissurse shine through. This area is undoubtedly contracted by
reagents. The natural backward direction of the cerebellum is also
altered, so that it hangs beneath the optic lobe.

Figure 4. Longitudinal vertical section of the brain of Menopoma, in
a median plane as far forwards as the terma, and in front of this through
the centre of the right hemisphere ; enlarged sixteen diameters. The
dotted ellipse indicates the position of the porta, or foramen of Munro.

Figure 5. The diatela, or roof of the third ventricle of the brain of Rana
Mugiens. This figure represents the long tubular epiphysial process,
composed of two or three rows of cells, mostly enveloped by the pia
and extending forwards above the supracommissura. The inner layer
cells send short processes into the persistent cavity of the epiphysis,
and the cavity is filled by a highly transparent meshwork, which may
simply consist of coagulated fluid. The opening into tlie diacoelia,
r. eph., is doubtful. The lines {fi.), indicate a number of nerve
fibres, which apparently extend to the base of the epiphysial process.

2T4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Figures 6-9 are of Menopoma.

Figure 6, A composite of three transverse sections through the cerebellum
and medulla.

Figure 7. Diagrammatic representation of the nerve fibre courses spring-
ing from the cerebellum.

Figure 8. A composite of six sections through the diencephalon, showing
the course of the fibres of the supracommissura, and piobable origin
of the optic tracts, a-a', supposed course of fibres passing from
upper parts of thalamus to optic nerve of opposite side, h-b', course
of fibns from lower parts of thalamus to optic nerve of same side.

Figure 9. An oblique section through the region of the prsecommissura,
showing the distributions of the fibres of this commissure, also the
supraplexus, the proplexus, and porta. The right side is cut anterior
to the left.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 275

ON THE CUSPIDIFORM PETEOGLYPHS, OR SO-CALLED BIRD-TRACZ
ROCK-SCULPIUBES, OF OHIO.

BY DR. D. G. BRINTON.

In the study of American rock-sculptures, the attention
of archaeologists has several times been drawn to a peculiar
character which appears frequently on the inscribed rocks of
central and northern Ohio, and rarely, or not at all, outside of
this region.

It has been called a bird-track or specifically, a turkey-track,
and has been supposed to be a conventional representation of the
impression of the foot of this or some other bird. A recent study
of one of the best examples of it, near Newark, Ohio, has led me
to a different opinion as to its significance, and I take the occa-
sion to explain this, and also to offer some suggestions as to the
distribution and purport of this design.

In Ohio, rocks bearing this figure are found near Barnes-
ville, Belmont Co. ; near Amherst, Lorain Co. ; at Independence,
Cuyahoga Co. ; in Licking Co., and elsewhere. It does not occur
in the rather numerous inscriptions upon the Ohio River, nor in
those south of that stream. Nor has it been reported in the
various petroglyphs existing in the Susquehanna Valley and in
New England. In fact, it seems confined pretty closely to that
area which was occupied by that people whom we call, for want
of a better name, the mound-builders. This adds interest to the
investigation of the character and its meaning.

That it possessed some definite signification would seem to
be demonstrated b}^ the frequency of its recurrence and the regu-
larity shown in its tracings ; this indicating that it was a familiar
figure, and that constant repetition had conferred on the designer
a certain technical skill in forming it. This would not be the
case were it merely the product of an idle hand, and of no
import.

As I have said, this peculiar figure does not occur in other
American rock-inscriptions. It is, indeed, very rare in any other
locality. Dr. Richard Andree, in his " Ethnographische ParaU
lelen?'' (Stuttgart, 1878), gives drawings of fifty-nine rock inscrip-
tions from various parts of the world, but on examining them I
find only one which presents any analogy to that under considera-

2T6 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

tion ; that one is from Somal Land, in Africa, ten degrees north
of the equator.

There are, however, some very ancient Chinese inscriptions,
dating from about the fourth century before our era, which show
a similar device. For this reason. Dr. J. F. Salisbury, of Ohio,
has maintained that some connection existed between the mound-
builders and the ancient Chinese,

My own opinion, based on a close inspection of the inscribed
rock in Licking Co., Ohio, is that the so-called bird-tracks were
never intended to represent the footprints of any species of birds,
but are conventional signs for arrows or arrow-heads. My reasons
are the following :

In no case are there representations of toes or claws. The
centre line is fi*equently prolonged, passing be^'ond the junction
of the lateral lines, thus giving to the figure a cruciform appear
ance. More often it is prolonged in the other direction — some-
times to three or four times the length of the lateral lines —
presenting an unmistakable picture of a barbed arrow-head on a
shaft.

The lateral lines are usually three or four inches in length,
while the median line is always longer. The incisions are clean
and clear, the edges sharp and singularly firm, betraying a
practiced hand and a powerful instrument.

On the supposition that these are intended for arrow-points, I
propose for them the name of " cuspidiform petrogl^'phs." This
is descriptive of their actual appearance, and also indicates what
they were doubtless designed to represent.

Granting this, we do not have to go far to ascertain the idea
which this sign was intended to convey. There can be little doubt
but that the arrow signifies a warrior, or some related military
conception.

This, in turn, throws light on other points in the archaeology of
the Ohio region. The inscribed rock at Newark is within about
eight miles of a very remarkable series of works between the
north fork of Licking River and Raccoon Creek. One of these
works is a mighty circular embankment, enclosing an area of
thirty acres, now used as the fair grounds of Licking Co. In the
midst of this area, headed toward the only entrance, is an effigy
mound, of large size, commonly supposed to represent an eagle.
At present, however, the alleged eagle has no head, and I could

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 271

not see signs that it ever had had one. The figure is, indeed,
nothing else than one of these cuspidiform symbols on a gigantic
scale. It measures along the central elevation 210 feet, while the
lateral lines, called the "wings," branch off about 100 feet from
the limits of the central ridge. The point of the arrow is directed
precisely to the single gateway or opening of the enclosure.
, The inference which the presence of this gigantic delineation ot
an arrow-head seems to justify, is that this enclosure was once
dedicated to militar}- ceremonies of some kind.

The inscribed rock on which my observations were made, is
located about six miles from Newark, close to the bank of the
Licking River. It is a moderately hard sandstone, much eroded
where fully exposed to the weather. The bluff is about thirty
feet high, and the summit overhangs the base to such an extent
that it furnishes a natural shelter. Many of the inscriptions have
thus been preserved with great freshness of outline.

This rock shelter was also extensively used by generations
of primitive hunters. Excavations which I made, turned up
numerous examples of their work in pottery and stone, and the
fragments of the bones of animals used in their repasts.

The only previous examination of this inscription, for archae-
ological purposes, which I have heard of, is one by Dr. Salisbury,
in 1859, the notes of which are in MS., in the library of the
American Antiquarian Society. A brief memorandum by him,
on the subject, was also published in the Report of the Ohio
centennial managers in 18T6.

2t8 proceedings of the academy of [1884.

November 4.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in tlie chair.

Twenty-one persons present.

A paper entitled " On the Behavior of Petrolatum in the Dij
gestive Tract," by N. A. Randolph, M. D., was presented for
publication.

Impression of the Figures on a " Meday Stick.'" — Dr. D. G.
Brinton exhibited a full-sized impression of the figures on a
" Meday Stick," obtained from the Pottawattomies, by the emi-
nent antiquary, Dr. E. H. Davis.

These sticks are used as mnemonic aids in repeating the chants
in the '' Great Medicine Lodge." the principal religious rite of
the Algonkins. The present stick is 19 inches long, 2| inches
wide, and of hard wood. The figures engraved upon it are over
500 in number, chiefly representing plants. These figures are
engraved with a knife, but the native name of such sticks points
to a more primitive method. It is massinahican, literally " a
piece of wood marked with fire." The characters inscribed are
called kekitvin, which means marks or signs, and from which root
are derived the words " to know," " to learn," and " to teach," in
many Algonkin dialects.

The characters areof two kinds, notches, and drawings of objects.
The notclies are believed to indicate the musical time or rhythm
of the chant, while the drawings suggest its words. The text of
several such songs has been printed. They are usually to obtain
success in the chase or restoration to health. The latter appears
to be the nature of the present song, judging from the numerous
plants depicted.

This Meday stick illustrates an instructive fact constantly lost
sight of by antiquaries. The so-called, picture-writing of the
Algonkin Indians never presented pictures. There is no group-
ing, shading or pictorial arrangement of the figures. There is
no attempt at esthetic eflfect. The single figures are not con-
nected so as to evoke any artistic sentiment. The intention was
wholly apart from this, and where such appears, it is not true
Algonkin art.

November 11.

Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.

Thirty-two persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 279

" Descriptions of New Species of North American Heterocera,"
by Herman Strecker.

" Some Notes on the Movements of the Androecium in Sun-
flowers," by Dr. Asa Gray.

" Observations on Cinna, with Description of a New Species,"
by F. Lamson Seribner.

Fired Stones and Prehistoric Implements. — Dr. D. G. Brinton
exhibited specimens of quartzite, sandstone and jasper, which had
been subjected to the action of fire, and spoke of their bearing on
certain archaological questions.

The most ancient evidence of a knowledge of fire is not the
charcoal and ashes of primeval hearths, but stones showing the
action of the element. In France they have been found in con-
siderable numbers in the tertiary deposits of Thenay, near Pont-
levoy, belonging to the late miocene or early pliocene. In South
America, the brothers Jose and Fiorentino Ameghino have dis-
covered them in a low stratum of the Pampas formation, believed
to be referable to the interglacial epoch of the pleistocene.

The effects of fire on stones are quite distinct from those of
other agents. They are shown in discoloration, scaling, and
peculiar forms of fracture. Quartz becomes cloudy and opaque ;
jasper loses its fresh yellow hue to turn a dull red, while sand-
stone forfeits the fresh lustre of its fracture, and shows brown
and blackish.

Stones broken by fire present one of two characteristic ap-
pearances ; the one is called by French archaeologists Craquel-
lage, the other Etonnement. Quartzite illustrates the former,
jasper the latter. Graquellage presents a plane usually at about
right-angles to the plane of cleavage; its surface rough, friable,
and full of little pits and rounded eminences — like a face pitted
with small-pox, to borrow the simile of Mortillet. Etonnement
is a splitting by flakes in the lines of percussion cleavage, but
distinguishable from the latter by the absence of the bulb of per-
cussion, and the splintering which often attends a blow. The
flake and its matrix are perfectly clean at all points of their
edges.

Scaling is seen on the surface of sandstones subjected to fire.
Small scales are loosened and are detached by exposure, revealing
the discolored layers beneath.

It is claimed by some of the French archaeologists that the
very oldest implements used by man were stones thus fractured
by fire. This plan of bringing them to an edge, they saj^, pre-
ceded that of percussion. This does not appear to be the case in
America. The implements of the Trenton gravels are of sand-
stone chiefly ; those of the interglacial of the upper Mississippi
are of quartzite, neither of which fractures by Etonnement.
Whether the later residents of our soil ever used fire to aid their

280 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

art-production in flint and jasper is uncertain. The speaker had
seen no specimens that conclusively showed that they did.

Cutaneous Absorption of Nicotine. — Dr. N. A. Randolph de-
scribed the results of a series of experiments performed by Mr.
Samuel G. Dixon and himself, relative to the absorption of nico-
tine by the uninjured healthy skin of the living rabbit. In these
experiments only rabbits of ascertained good health were used.
The fur of the abdomen was carefully clipped (not shaved); suffi-
cient time, usually seven days, being allowed to intervene between
this operation and the application of the drug to the skin ; thus
permitting any slight scratch made at this time to fully heal.
The absence of cutaneous lesion was further confirmed by close
examination under a strong hand-magnifier. The drug was then
applied to the skin, no friction being used. In order to preclude
the possibility of its vaporization and subsequent absorption by the
lung surface, the nicotine was placed upon an adhesive plaster,
the backing of which was made of sheet rubber. The plaster,
with the drug in its centre, was then applied in the open air, on a
windy day. Difi"erent doses were applied ; thus, in one case, one
drop of nicotine applied to the skin, caused death in five hours
and eleven minutes. In each of three cases a similar application
of ten drops was fatal in respectivelj' one hundred and nine
minutes, twenty-eight minutes, and thirty-six minutes. In the
fifth case, a similar application of fifteen drops of nicotine caused
death in twenty-eight minutes.

Of the ante-mortem symptoms, contraction of the pupil was
constant, and often appeared very quickly. Other prominent
symptoms were great trembling, with subsequent loss of muscular
power in the extremities. In one case, actual convulsions were
noted, and in others, coldness of the skin and increased lachrymal
and nasal secretion. Immediately upon the death of two of the
animals (after the ten- and fifteen-drop doses respectively), blood
was removed, defibrinated, and tested with mercuric chloride for
the presence of nicotine in the manner detailed by Wormley
(" Micro-Chemistry of Poisons"). In each, of these two instances,
characteristic groups of crystals were found upon microscopic
examination of the extract from the blood.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

PROC, A, N.S, PHILA

E.RS.R'TEL.

RINGUEBERG, FOSSILS OF NIAGARA PERIOD.

PROC, A, N, S, PHILA, 1884.

PL III.

7*

/ u

/--.'•^

4*

'fey

go/

ENS K.DEL.

RINGUEBERG, FOSSILS OF NIAGARA PERIOD.

PROG, A, N, S. PHILA

EFotte Del.

POTTS ON CRISTATELLA. &c

)C, A. N. S, PHILA.

PL. V

GEOLOGICAL MAP OF NORTHERN DELAWAI^E.

)F MENOPOMA^

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF nilLADELPUIA. 281

ON THE BEHAVIOR OF PETROLATUM IN THE DIGESTIVE TBACT.

BY N. A. RANDOLPH, M. D.

The mixture of hydrocarbons, recognized by tiie pharmacist
under the name of petrolatum, and popularly used under the
commercial names of cosmoline or vaseline, presents on super-
ficial inspection few points of difference from some of the organic
fats of the same consistency. Close examination reveals differ-
ences, both in physical properties and in chemical constitution,
between the bodies just compared. One point of difference, which
I have as yet been unable to find recorded, lies in the respective
behavior of these two groups, when in contact with the absorbent
surfaces of the digestive tract. Thus, while the organic fats, as
ordinarily taken in food, are readil}' and almost completely ab-
sorl)ed,this soft paraffin is entirely rejected, and found unchanged
in tlie feces.

During eight days, I took daily one-half ounce of commercial
viiseline, in addition to m^^ regular diet. Digestion was in no
wise altered, and no appreciable results ensued. Later, two
healthy adults each received, in the course of forty -eight hours,
one ounce of vaseline. Their alvine dejections for three days from
the beginning of this observation were collected and dried, and,
at the suggestion of Dr. John Marshall, of the University of
Pennsylvania, extracted with petroleum ether. Making a slight
allowance for incompleteness in extraction, the vaseline ingested
was, in each case, recovered in its totality, showing that it had
passed through the economy unchanged and unabsorbed.

There are some important medical applications of these facts,
the discussion of which would be out of place here, and which I
reserve for further experiment ; but the following deductions ap-
pear permissible, and are of strictly biological interest.

I. Pure petrolatum, while entirely unirritating to the digestive
tract, is valueless as a food-stuff*.

II. The results of the experiments here described lend support
to the theory that oleaginous matters are dependent, for their
absorption, not upon mechanical, but upon vital activities, and
that in such absorption the selective power of the protoplasm of
the intestinal epithelium is manifested.

19

282 proceedings of the academy of [1884.

November 18.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the ch:\ir.
Thirtj^-seven persons present.

The deaths of Eli K. Price, C. P. Bayard and J. Edwards
Fai'nuBi, members, were announced.

Urnatella gracilis. — Prof. Leidy remarked that Mr. E. Potts
had given to him, in October, 1883, a fragment of a tree-branch on
which were many groups of Urnatella. The fragment, tlii'ee inches
by one-third of an inch, was obtained in the fore-bay at Fairmount.
Around its middle, for about an inch in length, there were thirty
separate groups of Urnatella., in nearl}' all consisting each of two
stems, of unequal length, and devoid of terminal polyps. The
stems diverged and curved downward and were quiescent, but
were evidently liAing,as they exhibited slight sensitiveness to dis-
turbance. The specimen was placed in an aqnarium, exposed to
the north light of a window, and in this position, at the moderate
temi)erature of usual living-rooms, was kept during the winter.
In March the stems were observed all to have developed polyps
at the distal end, in which condition they continue at the present
time (April). Most stems are terminated by a single polyp, but
a few exhibit a smaller polyp, supported on a cylindrical joint
springing from the antepenultimate joint of the stem, including
the terminal polyp. The stems are quite irritable and bend in
graceful curves from each other on the slightest disturbance.
The longer stems even hang their heads in a single spiral turn.
The longest stems consist of a dozen joints and measure about the
one-eighth of an inch. The shortest stems exhibit one-third the
number of joints. The stems appear alternately white and black,
the former color corresponding with the thicker portion of the
joints, the latter with the constricted portions. Many of the
mature joints exhibit traces of the cup-like remains of attach-
ment of branches, in most cases on one side only.

These specimens appear to indicate that, as in the other fresh-
water polyzoa, the polyps die on the approach of winter, but the
headless stems appear to remain, securely anchored, and ready
to reproduce the polyps in the spring. If portions of the stems
are destroyed, the remaining joints are capable of reproducing the
pol3'ps, commonly from the summit of the terminal joint.
Branches usually spring from the last one or two joints, newl}' pro-
duced from that which immediately supports the terminal polyp.
Specimens also show that heads may start laterally from old or
mature joints. Thus the latter appear to serve as the statoblasts
of other fresh-water polyzoa, but ordinaril^^ they do not become
isolated from one another. As no specimens have been seen
with stems consisting of more than a dozen joints, perhaps after
reaching this condition, the pol3'ps become detached, to establish
new groups.

The following were ordered to be printed ; —

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 283

DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES OF NORTH AMERICAN HETEROCEEA.

BY HERMAN STRECKER.
Smerinthus astarte.

S expands 3 inches; head brown; thorax above dark brown,
patagije whitish gra}^ ; abdomen grayish brown above, more ashen
beneath.

Primaries dentated exteriorly, but not as deeply notched as in
Gerysii, but more so than Opthalmicus. Pointed apical!}' more
as in the latter, not so squarely cut off as in Geryaii. Secon-
daries larger in proportion and more evenly cut on outer edge.

Upper surface. Ground-color whitish gray, variegated with
brownish shades and bands as in Cerysii and Opihalmicus, not
as much broken and zigzag as in the first, neither as cleai'ly
defined as in the last ; the white discal lune and accompanying-
line, extending half way along the median nervure, are boldly de-
fined, as in Gerysii.

Secondaries ros}- with white at inner margin, grayish at costa
and inclined to brownish at exterior margin. An anal ocellus
black, with a bisected blue ring enclosing large black centre.
Fringe white.

Under surface resembles closely that of the two allied species
alluded to.

Taken, in several examples, by Mr. David Bruce, near Denver,
Colorado.

This remarkable insect, whether a good species or a variety of
Opthalmicus or Gerysii, it seems impossible to determine; geo-
graphically considered one might be led to the conclusion that it
was a link between the two, and to compare it placed aside of
examples of either it is an impossibility to decide to which it
belongs ; the strongest point (and not a very strong one either)
is the bisected blue ring of the anal ocellus, which would denote
a closer affinity to Gerysii. Were it a h^'brid, the product of the
aforementioned two species it could not be more difficult to draw
the line of separation, or to say to which species (or form?) it
was most closely allied. Future captures in various localities
may eventually lead to the knowledge that all three, Opthalmi-
cus, Astarte and Gerysii are but forms of one species : to which
belief I am most strongly inclined at the present writing.
Ecpantheria caeca.

$ expands If inches ; head white above, black in front and

284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

beneath ; collar white, with two black lines or marks ; patagi:e
white, with a black band ; thorax above white with a black central
band from collar to abdomen ; abdomen above whitish near the
thorax, rest blackish, beneath white, a row of four or five (body
a little abraded at sides) black spots laterally, and five ventrally ;
legs black, furred inwardly with white.

Primaries, upper surface, white with black spots, arranged much
in the same order and number as in Scribonia, but instead of
being circular or oval as in that species, they are parallelogrammic,
square or wedge-shaped, and are not black rings encircling a white
spot, but are all black blind eyes.

Secondaries white with some scattered brown marks at outer
margin, heaviest near apical angle, and a brown discal spot.

Hab. — Colorado.

There is on this species none of the blue sheen so conspicuous
on Scribonia, but the marks are all black or brownish black, and
the whole insect calls up the idea very strongly of Arctia Specta-
bilis Tausch., from Russia.

Spilosoma niobe.

Expands l^ inches ; head white, palpi j'ellow, terminally black ;
thorax white ; abdomen above white, with a row of five large
dorsal spots, sides yellowish, with two rows of black spots ; some
allowance must be made for the description of the abdomen, as it
was compressed and somewhat rubbed. Legs yellow, tarsi ringed
with l)lack and white. Antennje wanting on the single example
whence this description is drawn.

Upper surface. Primaries white, with all nervures and nervules
heavily bordered on both sides with brown ; this brown is not
dark and is much of the color of cotfee with a somewhat undue
amount of milk in it, in some lights it has a slight bronzj' ap-
pearance.

Secondaries white, the nervules on costal half of wing towards
apex shaded with same brown as superiors, but not as heavil}^

Under surface nearly as above.

One example taken in Florida, some years since, by Mr. A.
Bolter, from whom 1 obtained it.

Harpyia albicoma.

$ 9 size and form of Borealis, Bicuspis, Bifida, etc. Head
and collar pure white ; thorax above dark gray and white ; abdo-
men above gray heavily clothed with white hair. Body beneath
white.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285

Primaries, upper surface white with a dark steel-gray band
crossing the wing about one-third from base, this band is chevron-
shaped, narrowest in the middle and widening to double its width
towards the costal and interior margins ; in some examples di-
vided entirely in the middle. Interior to this band is a transverse
row of four dots of same color, and a single dot on costal nervure
near the shoulder. Between the outer and median space of wing
are three irregular broken gray lines, the outermost of which on
the costal half joined by a broad wedge-shaped gray mark. A
dark discal dot and dark point at termination of nervules.

Secondaries white, dark discal mark and dai'k dot at end of
each nervule.

Under surface white, with markings of upper side more or less
faintly reproduced, and the addition of a gray transverse line
across the middle of secondaries.

Described from examples taken, in summer of 1883, by Mr.
David Bruce, in mountains of Colorado.

This species comes nearest to the European Bicusjns Bkh., in
the latter the dark band and marks are much heavier and more
decided, but their arrangement is nearly the same.

Mr. Bruce took, this last season, also in Colorado, examples of
Ginerea Wlk., which do not differ from those taken in Pennsyl-
vania, New Jerse}^ and New York.

Lophopteryx elegans.

$. Form of Garmelita^ which appears to be its nearest ?i\\y.
Expands 2 inches. Head fawn-color ; thorax above slate-gray,
abdomen fawn, shading into brown towards the thorax, beneath
whitish.

Primaries chocolate-brown, darkest towards base and along the
costa, and shading into ashen along the exterior margin, a streak
or line of pure silvery white along submedian nervule, starting at
base and extending one-third the length of the inner margin ; the
narrow space between this line and inner margin paler brown,
inclining to ochre. Two short, dark, subapical longitudinal lines ;
exterior margin with a fine dark lino.

Secondaries white, with dark anal patch cut with a fine white
line, as in other species.

Under surface. Primaries hoary gray, with brownish on costa
and broad indistinct submarginal shade of same color parallel

286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

with the exterior margin. Secondaries white, edged with brown
on costa, and on exterior margin near and at anal angle.

From one S received from Mr. Fish, taken in the vicinity of
Oldtown, in the State of Maine.

In the old collection of Trexler, which came into my possession
about twent}' 3'ears since, was an example, in poor condition, which
I consider identical with the above ; recently I have received
several examples, males, from Mr. David Bruce, who took them
in Colorado. These I can consider nothing more than a variet}'
of the above ; the only difference being in the color of liead and
primaries, which in Trexler's and these Colorado examples is of
a slate-gray, and not biownish as in the Maine examples ; to pre-
vent, however, the misfortune of this variety being described as
a new species, I would designate it as L. EleganH var. Grisea.

Lasiocampa gargamelle.

3 9 in form and general resemblance allied to L. Pini.

$ expands about 'i\ inches. Head and thorax brown, inter-
mixed with gray ; abdomen brown.

Primaries obscure grayish, caused by an admixture of white
and brown hair and scales ; the basal third darker and more
brownish ; there is a tolerably broad outer margin wherein the
brownish shade also prevails, this is separated from the paler,
more ashen median space by an irregular zigzag brown line ; there
are also faint indications of two lines crossing the wing, one
subbasal and grayish, the other half-way between the discal spot
and the brown zigzag line, and scarcely perceptible ; discal spot
small, round and pure white.

Secondaries brown, with a paler, somewhat ochraeeous mesial
band, fringe white.

Under surface. All wings brown, with a common, rather broad
pale, ochraeeous median band.

9 expands 3;^-3^ inches. Color has more of the brownish pre-
vailing. Character of the markings as in male, but less strongly
defined ; the median band of secondaries above, and all bands
beneath, narrower than in the other sex.

Hah — Arizona.

By American authors this insect would be placed in Packard's
genus Gloveria, the type of which was Gloveria Arizonenais ; there
is, however, nothing by which it can be separated from Lasio-
campo Latr. (Gastropacha O.).

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 28T

NOTES ON THE MOVEMENTS OF THE ANDROECIUM IN SUNFLOWERS.

BY DR. ASA (iRAY.

My attention was called to this subject by some observations
made by Professor Meehan, the substance of which is now printed
in the " Proceedings of the Academy' of Natural Sciences," pp. 200,
201, under date of July 15 of this year. My own study of the
subject was necessarily desultory and interrupted, and mainly too
late in the season for the most satisfactory investigation. My
object in sending this communication to the Academy, at this
time, is, in the first place, to thank Mr. Meehan for calling atten-
tion to a very obvious fact, which I had entirely overlooked, and
which those botanists (such as the late Hermann Miiller), who
have particularl}' attended to the adaptations for fertilization in
Compositne, were seemingl}^ not aware of. The fact referred to, is
the retraction of the anther-tube in Helianthus (and so, presum-
ably, in its near allies), somewhat in the manner of Gentaurea and
the Thistle tribe generally. In the second place, I wish to main-
tain-that this retraction in the sunflower is the result of automatic
or irritable shortening of the filaments, and not of the "elasticity
of the filaments." In other words, that those organs act in Sun-
flowers as they have for a long time been known to do in the
Thistle tribe, but with some difference. If I riglitly understand
Professor Meehan's account, he supposes that the antlier-tube is
carried up to its full height by the elongation of the style within,
its stigmatic apex pushing against the conniving anther-appendages
which close the orifice of the tube, and so stretching the filaments ;
and that the elastic shortening of the filaments pulls down the
anther-tube when the style has overcome this obstacle and pro-
truded. If this were so, the stamen-tube should be drawn down
at once upon overcoming the resistance. It is easy to test
this, by snipping off the anther-tips by sharp scissors. But when
I did this, no retraction followed. Moreover, on splitting down
anther-tubes at various stages of their growth, I found that only
at the last, and after the anther-tube had attained its full height,
was the tip of the stjde in contact with the anther-tips. Prof.
Meehan's idea that " the extension of the staminal tube is evi-
dently mechanical, and is due solely to the upward growth of the
stigma, which, partly it seems by the incurved points of the
stamens, and partly perhaps by the expansion of the arms of the

288 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

pistil, is able to carry up the tube with it," so that when the
resistance is removed, " the elastic stamens [filaments] draw the
tube down again," must therefore be given up. The expansion
of the arms of the style is not concerned in the process, for this
does not commence until after complete protrusion.

As the filaments iu the Thistle tribe are sensitive to the touch,
in some Centaureas strikingly so ; as these are not stretched in
Centaurea, biit are usually bowed outwardly, and as they contract
upon the touch of a bristle or of a visiting insect, the first ques-
tion is whether the same may be the case, in some degree, in Sun-
flowers. My essays to determine this were made too late in the
season to be decisive. But in some flowers, on touching two
adjacent filaments with a bristle thrust into one side of the corolla,
the column moved promptly toward that side, moving through
fifteen or twent}' minutes of arc, very much as it will in a Cen-
taurea. I did not succeed in causing the five filaments to act
together, so as to produce any observable retraction. That this
retraction normally takes place without extraneous irritation, is
certain, commencing and commonl}' being completed on the
second day after full anthesis ; and equally in flowers shielded
from the visits of insects.

In Sunflower-heads taken into a room and kept from bees, the
pollen, pushed out of the tube through the chinks betweeu the
anther-tips, or later borne on the brush of the (as yet) unopened
style-branches, is borne aloft, exposed to the bumblebees which
in the garden fi-eely visit them. Prof. Meehan states that
" honey -gatherers seldom resort to them," but I find that in our
grounds these were much the most frequent visitors. These were
passing from head to head and from plant to plant, inserting
their proboscis into the corolla-tubes in succession, beginning at
the circumference with the older flowers having expanded and
receptive stigmas, and proceeding to the pollen-loaded ones
witliin. It is easy to see that pollen is abundantly transported
from one head and one plant to another, and that it is carried
from flowers which could not possibly be self-fertilized until the
next day, and unlikely to be so then, to those the expanded
stigmas of which are only then receptive. Prof. Meehan " may
sa}^ emphatically that these arrangements favor self-fertilization,"
but that is not the conclusion which I should draw from his own
illustrations any more than from my own.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 289

OBSERVATIONS ON THE GENUS CINNA, WITH DESCRIPTION OF A
NEW SPECIES.

BY F. LAMSON SCRIBNER.

Two species of Cinna,^ common to the northern regions of
both the old and the new world, have long been recognized. They
are G. arundinacea L. and C. pendula Trin. The latter, the
more common of the two, has been reduced to a variet}^ of the
first-named, by some authors; but, aside from a marked diversity
in habit, there are important differences in the characters of the
spikelets quite sufficient to warrant a specific distinction. In
G. arundinacea the spikelets are larger, firmer in texture, more
strongly scabrous, more prominently nerved and there is a
decided inequality in the outer or empty glumes, while in G.
pendula these glumes are equal or nearl}' so. In both the floret
is stipitate, or raised on a short stallc above the insertion of the
empty glumes ; in other words, there is a slight elongation of the
axis of the spikelet between the two empty glumes and the flower-
ing glume. Mr. Bentham, in his " Notes on Gramineaj," states
that in G. arundinacea there is frequentl}^ a continuation of the
rhachilla in the form of a short naked pedicel behind the palea :
a character, he adds, that he has never seen in G. pendula. In
my own studies, I have found this prolongation of the rhachilla,
a common, not constant, character in both species, I have
observed it in the spikelets of G. pendula from Maine and from
Oregon ; in fact, my own observations would lead me to say that
it appears more frequently in that species than in G. arun-
dinacea.

In regard to the variations in these two species something may
be said. G. arundinacea exhibits considerable diversity in the
size and diffuseness of its panicle and the spikelets, which range
from a little over two to nearly three lines in length, vary in
color from pale green to dark purple, but those characters men-
tioned above as distinguishing this species from G. pendula,
remain constant. There is greater variation of the panicle in
G. pendula, and also in the size of the spikelets ; these, however,
never reach two lines in length, and, although the empty glumes

' Cinna macroura Kth. and other grasses that have been placed in this
genus, are now referred to Epicampes or Deyetixia.

290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

differ considerably as to width, acuteness and in the presence or
absence of the lateral nerves in the second one, they are always
very nearly equal in length. In the here-proposed new variety —
var. glomerula, from Washington Terr., Frank Tweedy, collector
— the equal, one-nerved empty glumes are very narrow, acuminate-
pointed and scarcely more than a line in length. The spike-
lets in this variety are arranged in dense clusters or glomerules
along the extremities of the branches of the very diffuse panicle.
A species of Cinna — Xo. 6090 Bolander, N. 22 of the small
collection — came into my hands for examination several years
ago, and my note at that time was that it was distinct from Cinna
arimdivacea, var. pendida^ of Gray's Manual, under which name
it was distributed. The past season my attention was again
called to this grass by seeing some notes upon it in Dr. Gray's
Herbarium at Cambridge, made, if I remember rightly, by Mr.
Bentham, suggesting the probability of its being a new species.
After careful comparisons with Cinna arundinacea and C. pen-
dula, I am convinced that this suggestion is correct, and propose
that the species be named Cinna Bolanderi, recognizing the fact
that Mr. Bolander, so far as I know, has alone collected it.

Cinna Bolanderi.

Spikelets two and a half lines long, empty glumes broadly
lanceolate, the upper one three-nerved, subequal, as long as the
floret, which is scarcely, if at all, stipitate ; culm stout, seven feet
high (in Bolander's specimen), smooth ; sheathes strongly striate,
the lower smooth, the upper ones scabrous. Leaves firm in
texture, prominently^ striate and scabrous on both sides, those of
the middle portion of the culm one to two feet long, and three-
quarters of an inch wide, all gradually tapering to a sharp point.
Panicle eighteen inches long, loose and widely spreading.

From the characters above cited, the following synopsis van.y
be made of the species in the genus :

Empty glumes unequal.

Spikelets 'i\ to 3 lines long. C. arundinacea L. 1.

Empty glumes equal or nearly so.

Spikelet less than 2 lines long, floret stipitate.

G. jwndula Trin. 2.
Spikelet more than 2 lines long, floret apparently sessile.

C. Bolanderi Scribn. 3.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 291

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIL

Fifi. 1. — Spikelet of C'/'nna pendula Trm.

Fig. 2. — Same with empty glumes removed, and the elongated rhachilla

behind the palea brought forward into view.
Fir. 3. — Spikelet of C. pendula, var. glomerula.
Fig. 4. — Spikelet of C. Bolanderi Scribn.
Fig. 5. — Same with empty glumes removed.
Fig. 6. — Spikelet of C. anmdinricea L.
Fig. 7. — A. larger spikelet of same.
Fig. 8. -A spikelet of C. arundinacea with empty glumes spread out, and

the continuation of the rhachilla behind the palea brought into

view.
Fig. 9. — Spikelet of C. arnndinaceri. empty glumes removed ; a, the stipe.

292 proceedings op the academy op [1884.

November 25.
Rev. H. C. McCooK, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Fort^'-one persons present.

Embryology of Fulgur, etc. — Mr. John Ford reported the
finding of capsules of Fulgur carica, containing living embryos,
near South Atlantic City, on November 16, 1884.

As he had already secured live specimens in December, 188.3,
and in each of the six months following, this would prove the
deposition of capsules by the species mentioned during the largest
part of the year, instead of in the spring months only, as was
formerly supposed. Living embryos of F. canalicidata were also
obtained monthly', during the same period.

About one-half of the original amount of albumen in those
found on the 16th, had been utilized by the young mollusks ; a
somewhat reasonable indication that they were near the middle
stage of embryotic growth.

In further support of this probability, it was noticed that the
delicate cilia which characterize the animal in its earlier stages,
were much shortened, and the shells less transparent.

On the other hand, the thin circular membranes upon the edges
of the capsules, through which the matured embryos finally
escape, were still unbroken, and in much the same condition as
when first exposed ; thus proving that the young mollusks were
as yet unprepared for a new stage of existence.

Several other strings of capsules, including some of F. canalicu-
lata, were secured on the same occasion, but exposure to the sun
for a day or two, had killed the embryos.

At the same locality were discovered two species of living
Pholades, P. ciHspata Linn, and P. truncata Say, also a fine
colony of living Littorina irrorata Say ; all of these species
being new, it is believed, to that part of the coast.

It is probable that the billet of wood in which the Pholades
were found, had drifted from some distant locality, as there do
not appear to be any conditions favorable to their existence
between Brigantine Lilet and Great Egg Harbor Bay.

In regard to the habitat of the Littorina there could be no
doubt w^hatever, as they were present in large numbers, and in a
flourishing condition, although dwelling literally upon the sand,
instead of on broken rock or pieces of timber, where the species
is usually found. It is southern in distribution, rarely occurring
north of the mouth of Chesapeake Bay.

An Unfainiliar PJiizopod. — Mr. Edw. Potts remarked that he
had observed, upon a scale of mica schist about one square inch
in surface, clipped from a stone picked up near the eastern margin

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293

of the Schuylkill River above the Spring Garden Water Works,
Pliiladelijhia, a dozen or more rhizopods of varying sizes, appar-
ently quite motionless, and, by direct illnmination, resembling
the familiar forms of Actinophrys or Actinosphrerinm.

When removed to a compressorium and examined by trans-
mitted light, however, entirely different characteristics were
discovered. An outer surface or test was composed of infinite
numbers of minute, smooth, curved spicules, gathered somewhat
irregularly into radial, acuminate, conical groups, giving to the
mass very nearly the appearance of the seed-balls of the sweet-
gum tree, Liqiddambe?- atyracifiua. Within the cavity of this
spicular envelope, was seen a spherical protoplasmic body,
perhaps one-third of the diameter of the outer test, composed of
a multitude of granuliferous cells and a single non-central nucleus.
From this " body," many pseudopodal filaments were thrown out
through the interstices amongst the spicules, in direct radial
lines, to a distance exceeding the height of the spicular cones.
They were not constant, however, and at intervals none could be
discovered. To test the character of the spiculae, one individual
was treated with strong nitric acid and afterwards mounted in
balsam. The protoplasmic body was of course destroyed, but
the spicules remained, showing them to be, in all probability,
composed of siliceous material.

The speaker was at first inclined to class this rhizopod with
the genus Acanthocystis^ but further examination convinced him
that it was more probably allied to Baphidiophrys, and a still
further examination of F, E. Schultze's papers on the Rhizopodae
warrants its complete identification with his Raphidiop)hryH
pallida. In his recent monograph upon this subject. Professor
Leidy has referred to this species his sketch of a single individual
likewise collected, some years ago, in the Schuylkill River. These
appear to be the onl}- instances in which it has been identified on
this continent. Its habit of l^nng close against a supporting
surface, seldom or never freely swimming, easilj^ distinguishes it
from other familiar Heliozoans.

Note on the Intelligence of a Cricket parasitised by a Gordius.
— Dr. Henry C. McCook said that some remarks upon the habits
of the cricket published by him, had called forth an interesting
communication from Mrs. C. W. Conger, of Groton, New York
the substance of which is as follows : —

" Some twenty-four years ago, my husband and myself took
possession of a large old frame house on a farm which was a
homestead for the largest, blackest, and most musical of the
cricket kind. Early in the fall, I began to be annoyed b}^ finding
one or more hair snakes in the water-pail. Though I knew that
there positively was nothing of the kind in the pail when it came
in, yet a few minutes or an hour generally provided us with a
more or less lively specimen. I had a horror of them, because

294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

of the dread lest the children should imbibe one with their
frequent nips of the water, so I sat down, one warm afternoon, to
watch the pail, to try to learn how the snakes came. In about
ten minutes I saw a particular!}' plethoric cricket mount upon
the edge of the pail, and, after some uneasy movements, bring
the tip of the abdomen just beneath the water, and, with a few
violent throes, expel a black mass, which fell slowly through the
water, and before it reached the bottom resolved itself into one
of the worms. The cricket seemed exhausted by the horrid
birth, and did not find strength to draw itself up on the edge of
the pail for about eight minutes, and when it finally did so, it
tumbled to the floor and crawled off in a very rheumatic manner.
After this discovery, we used to amuse leisure hours by watching
like operations until fi'ost killed the crickets. I sometimes would
crush large crickets, generallj" with the result that a tightl}'-
coiled snake would be thrust out of a rupture just above the tip
of the abdomen ; but, whether the snake was not sufficiently
developed, or because of its needing water rather than air to
vitalize it, none of the snakes so produced showed any signs of
life."

The water snake alluded to is, of course, a species of our
common Gordins, the same probably as that described, a number
of years ago, by our distinguished President, Prof. Jos. Leidy.
The fact that this animal is parasitic within the grasshopper, the
speaker had himself observed ; it has been said also to be para-
sitic within spiders, and doubtless has for its host many of the
orthopterous genera. The point of greatest interest in the letter.
Dr. McCook thought, is the fact that the crickets had evidently
learned that the parasite infesting them required the water in
order to make its egress, and had deliberately sought the suitable
place and assumed the proper position (by inserting the abdomen
beneath the surface of the water), necessary to insure that egress.
It is a curious physiological question : how did the cricket obtain
this knowledge? And, the knowledge having been obtained, the
cricket's subsequent behavior presents an interesting fact in the
study of insect intelligence.

A New Parasitic Insect upon Spider Eggs. — Dr. McCooK
further stated that he had received, through Mr. F. M. Webster
(October, 1884), from Oxford, Indiana, a parasitised spider
cocoon (evidentl}^ of some saltigrade species), apparentl}' that of
Alius audax. The cocoon contained within the outer flossy case
about eighty cells and a number of mature black hymenopterous
insects, about one-eighth of an inch long. The cells were ovoid,
gray, blackish at the closed end, probably from excretions of the
enclosed larvae. One end was cut open, showing where the insect
had escaped. With the exception of a few hard, dried, yellowish
brown examples, all the eggs of the spider had disappeared.
The specimens were sent to Mr. L. 0. Howard, of the Bureau of

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 295

Entomology, Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C, who
judged them, after a cursory examination, to be Proctotrupids,
belonging to the sub-family Sceliominaj, and seeming to form an
entirel}' new genus. Thus appears to be added one more to the
parasitic enemies of our spider fauna.

Rufus Sargent and W. Henr^^ Grant were elected members.

The following were elected correspondents: — John Ball, of
London ; William Carruthers, of London ; Rud. Leuckart, of
Leipzig; Anton Dohrn, of Naples ; A. Grenadier, of Halle i. S. ;
Alex. Gotte, of Rostock i. M. ; and Ludwig Will, of Rostock i. M.

December 2.
The President, Dr. Jos. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty persons present.

December 9.
Mr. J. H. Redfield in the chair.
Tliirty-one persons present.

On Derivation in Finns edulis and Pinus monophylla — At
the meeting of the Botanical Section, on December 8, Mr. T[iomas
Meeiian called attention to some dried specimens of Finns mono-
phylla on the table, which were received in a fresh condition, a
few months ago, from Mrs. Lewers, of Franktown, Nevada. At
that time the phyllodes which took the place of the real leaves, were
all nionopliyllons. Li drying, several h:id opened in some speci-
mens, and others readily separated by a little aid, showing that the
species might have been two-leaved, but for some inability in the
earl}^ stages of development to separate them. This monophyl-
lous species was closely allied to Finns edulis, which was confined
to the Rocky Mountains; the monophyllous species being the
form that prevailed further west. But in a small tree of P. edulis,
growing in a deep ravine in Queen Canon, in the RockA' Moun-
tains, he had found on the same tree monophyllous, diphyllous,
and triph^dlous phyllodes, and there could not possibly be any
doubt that the species were of one origin. The case was one
worthy of note, because it had been charged that there was no
actual evidence of the truth of the doctrine of derivation. Gener-
ally when such evidences as these were offered, the objector was
prepared to abandon his belief in the specific distinctness of the
forms, rather than to grant that two distinct species had been
developed from one parent, and even in the case of these species

296 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

there were some who regarded one as but a variety of the other.
But there were other distinctions : The cones were not quite the
same, and the seeds being very different in size and outline, so
that one could readily separate the seeds if mixed together.
There was in fact a whole series of distinctions, full3^ as great as
we could find in many well-recognized species, and which fully
entitled the two forms to full specific rank ; though in the face
of the evident facts that they are derivations of one original
parentage. Indeed, it was well known that when a plant changed
its character in one respect, it must do so in others ; plants in
some climates annual, would become perennial or suffrutescent in
others. The cotton-plant w^as a familiar example. In such cases
the foliage and other characters varied from those connected with
the annual form, and from this fact some botanists had regarded
Gossypium herbaceum and Gossypium arboreum as distinct
species. In the case of these two species of Finus, the one which
could not develop its ph3dlodes with two separate individuals,
would of necessity' present some peculiarities in the scales of the
cone, as these were, morphologically, but transformed phyllodes.
Under morphological laws, that which affected the leaves ought
to affect the carpels or other parts of fructification which were
modified from them.

The true position of the species in development is that Pinus
edulis had the highest rank. In raising both species from seed
there was no difference whatever between the seedlings during
the first season. In these young and delicate plants, true leaves
were perfectly developed ; these were flat, linear lanceolate, and
of a deep glaucous hue. Pinus edulis assumed stout vigorous
branches the second year ; then the true leaves were suppressed,
a portion only being adnate with the stem forming a sort of
cushion, or as bud-scales, or bracts under tiie scales of the cone,
from the axis of which the ph3dlodes — secondary leaves, or
bundles of leaves of some authors — spring. In Pinus monophylla
only a few branches made phyllodes the second year, and he had
plants which were ten years old from the seed, wliich continued
to bear branches with true leaves almost equall3^ with those
bearing phyllodia. The monophyllous branches were never as
strong as those from Pinus edulis, and in ten years a plant of
Pinus edulis would be double the size of Pinus monophtjlla.
Assuming, as we might, that the tv/o had one parentage, we saw
that the one had less vigor of growth ; it retained more of its
juvenile characteristics, and retained them longer than the other;
and it never reached the power of development that Pinus edulis
had attained. We may say, with confidence, that Pinus mono-
phylla s\iTiing from the same parentage as Pinus edulis, find became
permanently different thi-oughout, b&ing subjected to condi-
tions unfavorable to a full development. It would appear that
the soil and climate of Nevada were not favorable to the usual
development of Pinus edulis, and hence, through the long course

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES 01 PHILADELPHIA. 297

of ages, the suppressed features that characterized full maturity
in the original, became, under the law of heredity, permanent
ones.

It was not often that we had such clear evidence of the unitj
of origin in two certainly distinct species, and as supporting the
modern ideas of evolution, the case was worthy of being placed
on record.

December 16.

The President, Dr. Jos. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-nine persons present.

A paper, entitled " Homologies of the Vertebrate Crj^stalline

Lens," by Benjamin Sharp, M. D., was presented for publication.

The death of Robt. L. Weber, M. D., a member, was announced.

Immediate Influence of Pollen on Fruit. — Mr. Thomas
Meehan directed attention to an ear of Indian corn on the table,
sent by Mr. Burnett Landreth, which had nearly all one side
with brownish red grain, the other side creamy white, which was
the normal color of the variety. Usually the intermixture of colors
which occasionally occurred in an ear of corn, is attributed to
cross-fertilization. It is apparent that this could not be the case
in this instance. The whole solid block is colored, and, at the
edge of the colored mass only half a grain would be colored in
some instances. The coloring influence had evidently spread
from some central point, quite independent of any single grain,
and had spread from grain to grain through the receptacle, until
the coloring material was exhausted. In cross-fertilization from
the entangled position of the silk-like pistils, no such regularity
of coloring in adjoining grains could occur. On reflection we may
understand that at times color in corn must come from causes
independent of cross-fertilization, as the departure in the first
instance from one color must be from an innate power to vary in
color, independently of any pollinating influence.

The facts are interesting as bearing on many problems as yet not
wholly solved. Much has been said about the changes in nature
being by slow modifications through long ages, but we have fre-
quent instances of sudden leaps. There are no gradations between
the colors of these grains. Again, it is in dispute how far cross-
fertilization influences the seed. Generally, no immediate influ-
ence is conceded ; we have to wait till the seed grows, and we can
examine the new plant to ascertain the potency of the several
parents. So far, corn has been the chief, and almost the only,
evidence that the seed or its surroundings are immediately
affected ; but recently statements have been made that the recep-
tacle in the strawberry — what we know in every-day life as the

SO

298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

strawberry — is similarly influenced. There are some varieties
wholly pistillate, and it is claimed that when pollen is applied from
other varieties, the resultant fruit is that of the male parent. It
is of great practical importance that such a question should be
decided by undoubted facts. Experience in other directions does
not confirm these views.

The Mitchella repens is reall}'^ a diojcious plant. Many years
ago he found one plant with white berries, and removed some
portion to his own grounds, where, isolated from others, it pro-
duces no fruit. In its native location it bears white berries freely,
though the pollen is from the original scarlet-berried forms.
Mr. Jackson Dawson had given him a similar case on Professor
Sargent's grounds, where a white-berried Prinos verticillatus is
produced, though it must have pollen from the original red-
berried form. Other illustrations were referred to. To those
who looked for regularity of rule in these cases, and in the light
of the specimen of corn before the meeting, there might be a
doubt whether the variation in corn, often attributed to cross-
fertilization, msLj not, in some cases, result from an innate
power to vary. It did not really follow that the rule should be
uniform, for those who had experience in hybridizing knew how
variable were the results, even from the seed of a single flower.
Parkman had obtained, in lilies, seedlings so exactly like the female
parent, that only for the remarkable form from the same seed-
vessel, known as Lilium Parkmani^ it might have been doubted if
some mistake as to the use of foreign pollen had not been made.
If so little influence could occasionally be found at a remote end
of the line, we may reasonably look for an immediate influence at
the nearer end in some exceptional cases. But there appeared to
be no carefully conducted experiments on corn recorded any-
where, though the belief in the immediate influence of strange
pollen is a reasonable one so far as general observation goes. It
seemed, however, to him, with the specimen of innate variation
in corn before us, more careful experiments with corn and other
things are desirable.

December 23.

The President, Dr. Joseph Leidy, in the chair.

Thirty-two persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —

" On a Remarkable Exposure of Columnar Trap near Orange,

N. J.," by Prof. Angelo Heilprin.

" Note on Some New Foraminifera from the Nummulitic

Formation," by Prof. Angelo Heilprin,

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 299

"A Review of the American Species of Stromateidae," by
Morton W. Fordice.

A Glacial Pebble. — Dr. Daniel G- Brinton exhibited a sup-
posed stone implement, obtained from the glacial drift in Butler
County, Ohio, sent to him by its finder, for examination. He
observed that, while there is no inherent improbability in such a
discovery — as it is quite likely that man, or at least an implement-
making animal, existed on this continent during the glacial
epoch — this particular specimen does not offer convincing evidence
that it is a work of art. It is a polished stone, resembling an
axe. Both these facts are against it. The axe type appears
late in the stone age, and nowhere, except in California, have
geologists gone so far as to put the age of polished stone so far
back in time as the tertiary period. In that enterprising State,
the men of science claim that, not merely fine, but the very finest,
examples of polished stone ever found in either continent are
exhumed, in situ originali, from gravels of the pliocene and post-
pliocene epochs (Foster, '• Prehistoric Races of America," p. 55).
This is in direct conflict with everything yet known of the older
stone age elsewhere.

The present specimen illustrated anew how natural forces
occasionally simulate in their products the results of hand-work.
The criteria of the latter are, however, well-ascertained, and by
observing them one can scarcely be deceived in examining any
series of examples.

December 30.
Mr. George W. Tryon, Jr., in the chair.
Forty-one persons present.
The following were ordered to be printed : —

300 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

HOMOLOGIES OF THE VERTEBRATE CRYSTALLINE LENS, i
BY BENJAMIN SHARP, M. D., PH. D.

I cannot better introduce my subject than by quoting the
following passage from Chas. Darwin : " To suppose that the
eye, with all its inimitable contrivances for adjusting the focus
to different distances, for admitting different amounts of light,
and for the correction of spherical and chromatic aberration,
could have been formed by natural selection seems, I freely
confess, absurd in the highest possible degree. Yet reason tells
me that, if numerous gradations from a perfect and complex eye
to one very imperfect and simple, each grade being useful to its
possessor, can be shown to exist ; if, further, the eye does vary
ever so slightly, and the variations be inherited, which is certainly
the case ; and, if any variation or modification in the organ be
ever useful to an animal under changing conditions of life, then
the difficulty of believing that a perfect and complex eye could
be formed by natural selection, though insuperable b}' our
imagination, can be hardly considered real. How a nerve comes
to be sensitive to light, hardly concerns us more than how life
itself first originated ; but I ma}^ remark that several facts make
me suspect that any sensitive nerve may be rendered sensitive to
light, and likewise to those coarser vibrations of the air which
produce sound. . . ."^

" If it could be demonstrated that any complex organ existed
which could not possibly have been formed by numerous, succes-
sive, slight modifications, my theory would absolutely break
down. But I can find out no such case. No doubt many organs
exist of which we do not know the transitional grades, more
especially if we look to much-isolated species, round which,
according to my theory, there has been much extinction. . . ."^

" In the cases in which we know of no intermediate or transi-
tional states, we should be very cautious in concluding that none

' Being the principal part of an address delivered before the Biological
Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, December
15, 1884.

''Darwin, Chas., "On the Origin of Species, by Means of Natural
Selection, etc." New lork (Appleton), 1861, p. 167.

^ Darwin, Chas., Orig. of Species, etc., p. 169.

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301

could have existed, for the homologies of many organs, and their
intermediate states, show that wonderful metamorphoses in
function are at least possible." '

It will be my endeavor to sliow the stages of development of
the eye from the simple deposit of pigment in an epithelial cell
to the highest form known to us, that of the vertebrata.

Invagination seems to be the most simple, as well as one of the
commonest, methods by which organs are formed in the animal
series. The formation of the gastrula, of the medullary canal, the
development of glands, etc., etc., by invagination, are cases too
well-known to require further comment. The formation of the
eye, ear, and nose, form no exception to this rule.

In a previous paper ^ I have endeavored to show that the simplest
expression of an organ of sight is found in the Lamellibran-
chiata. These simple organs, however, are not morphologically
the primitive visual organs of the group, but adaptive organs,
the ancestral eyes being present, in a few forms, only for a short
time during the free larval stage of the animal ; it is lost when
the animal becomes fixed and the head excluded from the light.

We will hastil}' review these simple eyes.
One of the simplest cases is found in Ostrea
virginica (fig. 1), in which we have, on the free
edge of the mantle, a number of epithelial cells fig. i.— visual ceiis

... , / \ T -1 j> • y of Ostrea virginica. c,

containing a nucleus (n), a deposit of pigment cuticle; p, pigment;
(p) in their exterior extremities, and on the "''^"°^"^'
outer surface a fine transparent, refractive cuticula (c). There
seems to be no protection for the organ, save the power of with-
drawal of the whole mantle within the valves of the shell.
Experiment conclusively proves that sight exists in these
animals, as shown by Ryder.^

We next find these pigmented visual organs confined to a
certain point of the mantle which has become specialized into
the so-called siphon. In Venus mercenaria we have these cells,
unprotected on the external surface of the siphon, but at the
same time some cells are more or less protected at the base of
the tentacles ; but as this animal is able to retract the entire

^ Darwin, Chas., Orig, of Species, p. 182.

- Sharp, B., On the Visual Organs in Lamellibranchiata. Mittheil. a. d.
Zool. Stat, zu Neapel, Bd. v, 1884, p. 447.

^ Ryder, J. A., Primitive Visual Organs. Science, vol. ii. No. 44, 1883,
]). 739.

302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

siphon within the shell, protection is thus afforded to these
delicate organs.

When we tind forms which are unable to wholly retract the
siphon within the shell, the visual cells are confined to grooves
at the bases of the tentacles. In the rapid withdrawal of the
siphon through the sand, in cases of danger, we can easil}' see
that the sharp particles would irritate any delicate org'an, and
protection must be afforded to them. Now, the possession of
sight at the only exposed portion of the animal, would be of the
highest value, in the struggle of life, to its possessor, if, when a
shadow, like that of a rapacious fish, is thrown upon the organ
of sight, a rapid retraction will save it from being nipped off.

In Solen vagina and S. ensis, the former being
the species on which I first satisfactorily proved
the existence of a visual sense, ^ we find the cells
have become much more developed, as is seen in
fig. 2 (this being drawn to the same scale as that
of fig. 1), but are essentially on the same plan as
those in Ostrea. These cells line deep grooves at
the bases of the tentacles and are found nowhere
visual' ceiT of else, thus being amply protected from any injur3\

Sole7i vaqina. c, mi i • ^.i -in v.

cuticle; p, pig- The nervcs supplying these visual cells are prob-
ment ; n, nucleus. ^^^^ ^j^^ ncrves of general sensibility, perhaps

somewhat specialized.

The remarkable organs of Pecten and Spondylus, I will not
here consider, as they throw no light on our immediate subject,
and have been considered by me elsewhere.^

In passing next to a higher group, the Gastropoda, from which
the Lamellibranchiata have probably degenerated, marked steps
in advancement are to be noted.

In Patella we find that the pigment spots, or visual organs, take
their morphological position, namely in the oral end of the body,
and consist of a single pair in the base of the broad tentacle.
More than a single pair of eyes are not found in the Gastropoda.'

' Sharp, B., On Visual Organs in Soleii. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
Nov. 6, 1883, p. 248 ; also, On the Visual Organs in Lamellibranchiata.

'' Sharp, B., On the Visual Organs in Lamellibranchiata.

■' The adajtive dorsal eyes of Onchidiiim form an exception, but the
normal pair of cephalic eyes are present. See Semper, Carl, Ueber Seh-
organe von Typus der Wirbelthiereaugen am Riicken von Schnecken.
Wiesbaden (Kreid.l), 1877.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303

In Patella^ as shown by Fraisse,^ there is a simple sphere, made
up of pigmented cells, similarly formed as those described for the
Lamellibranchiata. This sphere is open in front and allows the
entrance of the external media.

Haliotis ^ gives us an advance ; here we have an open sphere as
in Patella^ but instead of the refractive cuticula to each cell,
they afe physiologically combined into one mass, forming a
lens. This lens is the product of the cells of the e^-e, and is
purely a secretion — a simple cuticular lens, as is found in all the
eyes of the invertebrata — while the lens of the vertebrata, where
it exists, is always cellular. The cellular lens-like bodies found
in the so-called eyes of Pecten and Spondylvs, and the dorsal eyes
of Onchidium, are exceptional, and will be treated of elsewhere.

Fissurella ^ gives us an eye that goes practically as far as any
gastropod eye, the higher forms merely carry out, a little more
in detail, this plan. This results in a closed eye containing a lens,
the transparent epidermal covering acting as a cornea. The
pigmented layer is as in Haliotis^ namely, the cells composing
it are devoid of a transparent cuticula, the lens and cornea
serving as the refractive bodies.

The phylogenetic development of the moUuscan eye, therefore
(cephalopoda excepted), is as follows: (1), a pigmental surface
of epithelial cells ; (2), pigmented invaginated grooves for pro-
tection, at centralized points of the body, each visual cell having
a cuticular body ; (3), this groove contracting to an open sphere
which closes ; (4), the refractive bodies of each cell being cen-
tralized into a cuticular lens. A distinct nerve, specialized for
sight, is developed {Haliotis and Fissurella), which connects the
eye with the superior cephalic ganglia.

Now, let us see how the ontogenetic development agrees with
the phylogenetic.

Bobretzky^ and Haddon ^ have given us the development of

' Fraisse, Paul, Ueber MoUusken Augen mit embryonalem Typus. Zeit-
schr. f. wis. Zool., Bd. xxxv, 1881.

^ Fraisse, Paul, Ueber Mollusken Augen mit embryonalem Typus.
Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. xxxv, 1881.

^Bobret^ky, N., Studien iiber die embryonale Entwickelung der Gastro-
poden, Arch. f. m'kr. Anat. Bd., xiii, 1877.

* Haddon, A. C, Note on the Development of Mollusca, Quart. Jour.
Mic. Sci., n. s., vol. xxii, 188'i.

304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

the gastropod e^^e, the former in Fusus, and the latter in Murex.
I have carefully investigated the embryological growth of this
same organ in Nassa, and lastl}^ Carriere^ gives an account of
the regenei'ation of the eye after amputation in the Pulmonata.

We find that ontogen}' merely recapitulates phj-logeny, as we
would naturally anticipate. There is first an invagination, which
closing forms a sphere ; in the cells of this invagination there
is a deposit of pigment, and from them a cuticular lens is formed,
which increases in size by the addition of concentric layers. A
nerve is there developed and connects this eye with the superior
cephalic ganglia.

We will now pass to consideration of the eyes of the vertebrata,
which, with a few exceptions, are remarkable for the similarity
in general plan of organization throughout the whole group.

1 will not enter here into a detailed account of the work that
has been done on this subject, nor into a description of the finer
anatomy, except where necessary to illustrate points under con-
sideration. I leave these to a future and more exhaustive work
upon the "Anatomical and Physiological Evolution of the Organ
of Vision," upon which my friend. Dr. Charles A. Oliver, and
myself are now engaged, and which is to appear under our joint
names.

The general structure of the eye of the vertebrata is well known,
and I will here simply draw attention, to some of the cardinal
points.

The eye consists of a more or less spherical body, bounded in
front by a transparent plate, the cornea, which is a continuation
of the white opaque enveloping sheath of the eye-ball, called the
sclerotica. Internal to this sclerotica is a layer of pigment
(choro'idea), passing forward to about the position of the junction
of the cornea and sclerotica, and also extending over the posterior
wall of the iris. Lying on this pigmented layer is the retina, the
sensory portion of which is considered to be a continuation of
the optic nerve, and which passes beyond the equator of the eye
to a point called the ora serrata. The cavity of the e3'e-ball is
divided anterio-posteriorly into two. principal chambers, the
anterior one is again subdivided into two, called the anterior
and the posterior chamber, and includes all the space anterior to

^ Carriere, Jus., Studien iiber die Regenerationseischeinungen bei den
Wiibellosen. I. Die Regeneration bei den Puhnonaten. Wiirzburg, 1880.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. .305

the lens. The anterior chamber is divided from the posterior by
the iris, the latter being a flattened projection of the vascular
layer of the chordidea. The hole in its centre is called the pupil.
These two chambers are filled with a fluid called the humor
aqueus. Back of the lens and iris is the largest chamber of the
eye-ball, called the vitreous chamber, and contains a semi-fluid
mass, known as the corpus vitreum.

The lens is a cellular body, suspended from the process ciliaris
by the suspensory ligament; the process ciliaris of the iris, is an
extension of the vascular layer.

The retina is composed of many layers ; one of the most
external, that which is directed toward the chordidea, is called the
laj'er of the rods and cones. The innermost layer, that next to
the corpus vitreum, is the layer of fibres of
the optic nerve ; between these two are several
ganglionic layers. The whole retina is practi-
cally transparent, and the light passes through
it unchanged to the point of contact of the
rods and cones with the pigmented layer. Here
the light-motion is transferred into a " nerve-
energy," which is transmitted to the perceptive
centres of the brain, ^ no light-motion, of course,
passes beyond the receiving sensory fibres
internally. The optic nerve pierces the retina fig 3'— Diagram rep-
a little on the nasal side of the optic axis. of'S T inTbl
It will thus be seen that the extraneous color- and ''" nenl^ne^r^ "
waves have, in their impinging upon the sen- the°bfiln,%' 'f "cier"
sory tips of the rods and cones, passed through ?eunl ; VS^V';
the entire thickness of the retina, before it has The'r^ina o^tVJ'nervx^.
been put in a position to give a proper sensory ^^^''sy-
impression. In fig. 3, I have given a diagrammatical repre-
sentation. B is a. ray of light passing through the retina, and
impinging on the point of a rod or cone, n representing the
return through the cells of the retina (r) to the nerve-fibres, and
then passing by them to the brain, B.

Now, to consider the development of the eye, we find that in

' For a detailed account of this, see the forthcoming paper of Oliver,
Charles A., "A Correlation Theory of Color Perception," Amer. Jour.
Med. Sci., Jan., 1885. Dr. Oliver has kindly allowed me access to the
manuscript of this article.

R

306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

an early stage of the embryology of a vertebrate, the anterior
end of the medullary groove, or canal, as the case may
be, is divided into three segments, which later form the brain.
The anterior of these is known by the name of fore-brain, or
proencephalon ; the middle one, or mid-brain, is called mesen-
cephalon ; and the posterior, the hind-brain, or metencephalon.

From the fore-brain proceeds outwards and laterally a swelling,
which increases in size, and passes on to the epidermis. Here an
invagination takes place, inward, to meet this outward brain-
growth. This invagination finally closes, and soon becomes cut
off, to form a hollow vesicle, the cavity of which is finally
obliterated, and, becoming transparent, forms the lens of the
adult eye. In the meantime, the growth from the brain has
arched over and above this vesicle, and then folds over laterally
to enclose the lens. This process of the brain is hollow, and
communicates with the ventricular cavities of the brain. ^ This
differentiation which has taken place, to
form the so-called " secondary optic vesi-
cle," is hardly an invagination in the true
sense of the word, but is rather a double-
walled plate, which folds downwards
around the lens, this is indicated in the
i-iG. 4.— Diagram to iiius- diagrammatic representation in fig. 4.

trate the method by which ™, , „,, ^, , . . „

the second»ry optic vesicle The ICUS fills up the anterior Opening 01
encloses the lens which , , . « , i i , . . ,

should fill up the open end. the cavity 01 the Secondary optic vesicle,

yeo ver e ra e. ^^^ ^^ ^j^^ ^^^ edgCS, a and h, close

around the under surface of the lens, a certain amount of meso-
dermic tissue is included, which later forms the transparent
corpus vitreum. After the closure is completed, there is a
double-walled vesicle, the interior wall is the thicker of the two,
and later gives rise to the many-layered retina; the external wall
forms the pigment layer of the chordidea. It not unfrequently
happens that we find incomplete closure of the secondary optic
vesicle, and when this is the. case in the adult eye, the patho-
logical condition known to physicians as coloboma exists. This
may take place in the iris (coloboma iridis^, or in the retina

' It must be borne in mind that the interior of the lens was once a part
of the general surface of the body, and also the interior of the secondary
optic vesicle, proceeding first by the formation of the medullary groove,
and then from that inward.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301

(coloboma retinae) ; in the latter case, on examining the eye
with an ophthalmoscope, we can see a wedge-shaped white patch,
the base downwards, at the inferior part of the background
of the eye, the white is the sclerotica shining through. This is
merely a reversion to a primitive state — a failure in the union,
posteriorly, of the two lateral walls of the secondary optic vesicle.

The optic nerve is formed by the bending over, and union
below, of the connecting portion of the secondary optic vesicle
with the fore-brain. The portion of mesoderm included by this
process is later termed the arteria centralis retinas. The sclerotica
and the vascular laj'er of the choro'idea are formed from the
mesoderm, and are merely organs for the nourishment and the
protection of the nerve-elements within.

It seems to me that the steps taken in ontogenic development
of the eye, point out to us that the course which has been
pursued in its phylogenesis from a simple epithelial pigmentary
deposit, is as follows : The first visual organ primarily consisted
of a deposit of pigment, centralized at that portion of the animal
where it will be of the most use, viz. : at the oral pole. Since
animals as a rule proceed with this extremity forward, they are
developed in this situation ; but in some cases, as in the Lamelli-
branchiata, as pointed out above, they are developed at that
portion of the body which needs their protection. The next step
in advance is to protect these important organs, and as a conse-
quence invaginated grooves result, which graduall}^ shorten to
form a sphere. The refracting media of separate cells soon
coalesce, to produce a cuticular lens. The nerves of general
sensibility, connecting this eye with the brain, soon become
specialized, and form a distinct (primitive) optic nerve. As the
eye increased in importance and usefulness to its possessor, a
corresponding stimulation took place in the brain, where sight is
without doubt seated. Increased activity in any organ causes a
corresponding increase in blood-supply — or better, nutriment-
supply — and an increase of development took place all along the
tract, from the eye to the seat of vision in the brain. As this
increased, that part of the brain nearest the e^'e enlarged, and
proceeded by steps toivard the eye, similar to the process nowtaking
place in the development of the eyes of the Verlebrata, the primi-
tive optic nerve still connecting the two. We then have a stage
in which a part of the brain closes over the superior part of the

308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

eye, being separated by a layer of fibres, which is the much-
shortened and flattened primitive optic nerve. The pedicle
connecting this advanced part of the brain, which may be looked
upon as a ganglion, we will now call the " secondar}^ optic nerve,"
the optic nerve of the eyes of the adult Vertehrala. A similar
state of affairs as this is found to-day in the eyes of the Cephalo-
poda dibranchiata. This ganglion soon becomes the most impor-
tant part of the eye, and receives the light-waves upon its
exterior wall, the primitive eye becoming transparent, and later
forming the lens. This " ganglion opticum,'''' as it may be provi-
sionally called, gradually proceeds downwards about the primi-
tive eye, joining below. As development and importance
advance, we find the hollowing out of the ganglion opticum,
this structure later is filled with the corpus vitreum, which is
included, as was shown in the development of the eyes of the
Vertebrata. Thus, I hold, if this hypothesis be a true one, that
(1) the lens of the eyes of the Vertebrata is homologous with a
primitive invaginated eye, such as we find to-day in the gastro-
poda ; that (2) the layer of optic fibres of the retina is homolo-
gous with the primitive optic nerve. As the retina below has
become the sensory part of the e3'e, the rays of light must
necessarily pass through it, to reach a point where nerve-energy
is developed. The nervus opticus of the eyes of the Vertebrata
is, therefore, according to this view, really a secondary optic
nerve.

We find in the vertebrata, and much more frequently in the
invertebrata, blind animals, the near relatives of which have well-
developed organs of sight. This blindness is due to the peculiar
environments of the animal, such as cave life, where light is
excluded ; parasitism, etc., etc.

The Proteus of the Adelsberg grotto is an animal that is practi-
cally devoid of pigment. The eye of this practically blind animal
is remarkable, inasmuch, that no lens is developed in the adult
state. Our literature is unfortunately deficient in the embryology
of this interesting form, so it is at present a matter of impossi-
bility to state whether there ever exist a lens in the earl}'^
development of the eye. The primitive optic vesicle has the
form of that of the embr3^os of those vertebrates which have
well-developed eyes in the adult state ; the retina is a thick,
many-celled layer, l^'ing on the stratum pigmcntum, which contains

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309

a very meagre deposit of pigment ; the anterior edge of this
double-walled cup, formed by the retina and pigmented layer,
come together, owing to the absence of the lens. It is stated ^
that no corpus vitreum is present. This degenerate eye is of
little use to the animal, and, besides the loss of the lens, it is
covered by the general integument of the body. Now it may
be argued, upon my hypothesis, that the lens should be last to
disappear, being phylogenetically the first to appear ; but as the
secondary optic vesicle has taken up the principal function of the
eye, viz. : the developing of nerve-energy, we would naturally
expect that the accessory organs would be the first to disappear
in the process of degeneration ; hence, the lens modified to an
organ of refraction, although the most primitive part of the eye,
would disappear before the secondary optic vesicle, since it has
lost its function as an eye and acts merely as a refractive agent.

Another objection may be raised, which may be well to insert
here, viz. : Why should the process from the proencephalon
start before the invagination, to form the lens, the former being
a secondary state in the phylogeny of the animal ? I would
explain this by the fact that as the optic vesicle, being now the
most important part of the e^^e, and so established for many gen-
erations, now appears Jirst and disappears last in degeneration.

In Myxena glutinosa, as described by Wm. Miiller,^ we have an
eye consisting of the secondary optic vesicle, as in the case of
Proteus, but open in front and filled with a plug of mesodermal
tissue. The eye is entirely devoid of pigment and lies buried
beneath a layer of muscle underlying the skin. The optic nerve
passes into the vesicle, and terminates in the retina, there being
no layer of optic nerve-fibres present at all. This eye has pro-
ceeded a step further in its degeneration, than the eye of Proteus,
being entirely devoid of pigment, and having become more deeply
imbedded, is covered by a layer of mesodermal tissue, the mus-
cular stratum.

Thus in degeneration, the eye proceeds, step by step, back-
wards towards the brain, after first losing its accessories, such
as the lens, cornea, sclerotica, etc.

' Semper, Carl. Animal life as affected by the natural conditions of exist-
ence. Intern. Sci. Series, vol. xxx, New York (Appleton), 1881, p. 78.

^ Miiller, Wm. Ueber die Stammesentwickelung des Sehorganes der
Wirbelthiere. Festgabe an Carl Ludw;g. Leipzig (Vogel), 1875, p. vii.

310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884,

In Branchiostoma lanceolatum we find the degeneration has
reached its greatest extreme. There exists no trace of the eye,
in form, and we recognize its existence only by a slight deposit
of pigment on the anterior end of the neural canal. The brain
itself has disappeared in this degenerate form, it going hand in
hand with the eye, so that the only remnant of it is a spot of
pigment on the anterior end of the neural canal.

Now this deposit of pigment that we find in Branchiostoma —
and a similar deposit in the nerve-centres of some of the larvae
of the Ascidia, looked upon at one time as the ancestors of the
Yertebrata, while they are if Vertebrata at all, greatly degenerated
ones — led Lankester ' to regard the primitive type of the Verte-
brata as a transparent animal with eyes sessile on the brain,
I am of the opinion that forms so degenerate as Branchiostoma
and the Ascidia should not be taken as a standard, on which to
base our conclusions for the origin of the Vertebrata.

In conclusion I may quote a passage from Tyndall,^ which we
have taken for our motto : " The eye has grown for ages toward
perfection, but ages of perfecting' may still be before it."

* Lankester, E. R., Degeneration, a Chapter in Darwinism. Nature
series. London, 1880.

' Tyndall, Jolin, Six Lectures on Light, London, 1873.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 311

ABEVIEW OF THE AMERICAN SPECIES OF STR01IATEID.S:.
BY MORTON W. FORDICE.

In the present paper I have attempted to collect the synonymy
of the American species of Stromateidee, and to give an analytical
key for the identification of the species.

The specimens studied belong to the Museum of Indiana
University.

Analysis of American Genera of Stromateidee.

a. Ventrals very rudimentary or absent ; preopercle entire ;

anterior rays of dorsal and anal fins more or less produced ;

scales very small and thin ; caudal peduncle slender, not

keeled ; gill-membranes free from isthmus ; caudal fin

forked. Stromateus. I.

aa. Ventrals present, 1,5; edge of preopercle serrate ; anterior

rays of dorsal and anal fins not produced ; scales rather

small, firm ; gill-membranes free from isthmus ; caudal

peduncle rather stout, not keeled ; caudal fin lunate.

Leirus. II.
I. STROMATEUS.

Stromateus Linnaeus, 8yet. Nat., x, 248, 1768 (fia'ola ; paru).

Rhombus Lacepede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ii, .321, 1800 {alepidotua).

Chrysostromus Lacepede, Hisr. Nat. Poiss., iv, 97, 1800 {fiatoloides = fiatola).

Fiatola Risso, Eur. Merid., iii, 289, 1826 (fa-c'iata).

Feprilus Cuvier, Regne Animal, 1828 (crenulatua).

Seserinus Cuvi«r & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ix, 416, pi. 276, 18.53 (micro-

cktrun).
ForonotUS Gill, Cat. Fith. East Coast N. A., 1861, 35 {triacanthuB).

Analysis of American Species of Stromateus.

a. Pelvis ending in a small spine ; ventral fins entirely wanting.
b. Dorsal and anal fins falcate ; the length of their highest
rays greater than that of head ; back elevated ; body
suborbicular ; snout vertical ; height of body 1^ in length ;
D. Ill, 45 ; A. II, 43 ; vertebra, 13+17 ; occipital crest very
high, its vertical height from supraroccipital bone con-
tained 3 in head {Rhombus Lac). paru. 1.
bb. Dorsal and anal fins little falcate ; the length of their
highest rays less than head.

312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [18S4.

c. Region below dorsal fin with a series of pores ; outline

elliptical ; height of body 2^ in length ; D. Ill, 45 ; A.

Ill, 37 ; vertebrae, 14+19 ; occipital crest moderate, the

height from supra-occipital bone 4 in head (Poronotus

Gill). triacanthus. 2.

cc. Region below dorsal fin without conspicuous pores.

d. Form elliptical; height of body 2\ in length; D. Ill,

45 ; A. II, 39 ; vertebrae, 14 + lt ; occipital crest low,

its height from supra-occipital bone 4| in head.

simillimus. 3.
dd. Form broad-ovate ; height of body, lj% in length ;
dorsal with 42 developed rays ; anal with 32.

medius. 4.
aa. Pelvis not ending in a spine (Stromateus) ; no trace of ventral
fins.

e. Upper part of body with numerous round black spots ;
head, 4^; depth, 2^ ; D. YII, 40-43 ; A. Ill, 38.

maculatus. 5.
1. Stromateus paru

Faru Brasiliensi congener Sloan, Jamaica, 2, 285, tab. 250, f. 4, 1727

(Jamaica).
Stromateiis paru Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., ed. x, 248, 1758 (based on
Sloan's description); ibid., ed. xii, 487, 1766; Jordan & Gilbert,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 597 (Charleston, S. C); Jordan & Gilbeit,
Syn. Fish. N. A., 914, 1882.
Ghmtodon alepidotus Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., ed. xii, 460, 1766 (Charles-
ton); Gmelin, Syst. Nat., 1240, 1788 (copied).
Rhombus alepidotus Lacepede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ii, 321, 1800 (copied).
Peprilus alepidotus Goode, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 112 (Fernan-
diiia); Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 130 (Pensacola);
Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 92 (Beaufort, N. C; Norfolk).
Stromateus alepidotus Liitken, Spolia Atlantica, 1880, 521 ; Jordan &
Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 451 ; Bean & Dresel, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1884, 156 (Jamaica); Jordan *& Gilbert, Proc. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Phila., 1884 (Egmont Key).
Sternoptyx gardenii Bloch & Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 494, 1801

(Carolina).
Stromateus gardenii Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., ii, 399, 1860 (New

Orleans; Jamaica; Bahia).
Stromateus longipinnis Mitchill, Trans. Lit. Phil. Soc. New York, i,

366, 1814 (New York Bay).
Rhombus longipinnis Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ix, 401,
pi. 274, 1833 (New York); Dekay, New York Fauna, Fish, 136, pi.
75, f. 239, 1842.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 313

? Seserinus xanthurus Quoy & Gaimard, "Voy. Freyc. Zool., 384,
1824."

? Rhombus xanthurus Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ix, 405
(Brazil).

? Bhomhus argentipinnis Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ix,
405, 1833 (Montevideo).

? Rhombus crenulatus Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ix, 410,
1833 (Cayenne).

? Rhombus orbicularis Guichenot, "Mem. Soc. Imp. So. Natur. Cher-
bourg, xii, 245, 1866" (Cayenne).

Habitat. — New York to Jamaica, also probably southward to
Brazil.

As Dr. Bean has shown the identity of the northern fish with
that found in Jamaica, there seems to be no doubt of the pro-
priety of retaining the name paru for this species.

Possibly the South American species (xanthurus) is different,
the number of fin rays being given as D. lY, 40 ; A. Ill, 39.

2. Stromateus triaoanthas.

Stromateus triacanthus Peck, "Mem. Amer. Acad., ii, pt. 48, pi. 2, f.
2, 1804" (New Hampshire); Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., ii, 398,
1860 (Boston ; New York); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1882, 597 (Charleston, S, C); Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A.,
451, 1882.

Peprilus triacanthus Storer, Fish. Mass., 60, 1839 (Massachusetts).

Rhombiis triacanthus Dekay, New York Fauna, Fish, 137, pi. 26, 1842
(New York Harbor).

Poronotus triacanthus Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 1861, 35 ;
Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1878, 377 (Beaufort, N. C);
Bean, Proc, U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 91 (Wood's Holl, Mass.; Noank,
Conn. ; Eastport, Me. ; Portland, Me. ; Norfolk, Va. ; Tompkinsville,
N. Y.; Banquereau; Vineyard Sound ; Gloucester, Mass.).

Stromateus cryptosus Mitchill, Trans. Lit. Phil. Soc. New York, i, 365,
pi. 1, f. 2, 1814 (New York Bay); Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist.
Poiss., ix, 408, 1833.

Habitat. — Nova Scotia to Charleston.

The nomenclature of this species offers no difficulties. The
generic name Poronotus proposed for it by Dr. Gill, seems unnec-
essary, as the species is evidently very closely related to S.
simillimus^ which lacks the series of pores, on which Poronotus
was based.

21

314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

On examination of the skeletons of the three species, S. paru,
triacanthus, and simillimus, I find the first interhsemal greatly
developed in each of the species. The occipital crest is very
high in S. paru ; it is medium in S. triacanthus^ and low in S.
simillimus. The haemal and neural spines are more developed
in S. paru than in the other species, thus corresponding to the
form of the body. The vertebrae in S. triacanthus are somewhat
more numerous than in the others, as stated in the analytical
key.

3. Stromatens simillimns.

Poronotus simillimus Ayres, Proc. Cal. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1860, 84 (San
Francisco) ; Cooper, Nat. Wealth Cal., 1868, 489.

Stromatevs simillimus Rosa Smith, Fish. San Diego, 1880 (San Diego) ;
Jordan and Jouy, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 13 (San Diego ;
Santa Barbara) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881,
46 ("Entire Pacific Coast, common, but most abundant from Santa
Barbara to San Francisco"); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881,
265 (name only) ; Jordan and Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 451.

Habitat. — Puget Sound to San Diego.

This species is common along the Pacific Coast, where it
replaces S. triacanthus of the Atlantic Coast.

4. Stromateus medius.

Stromateus mediusTeters, Berliner Monatsbericht, 1869, 707 (Mazatlan) ;
Liitken, Spolia Atlantica, 1880, 521 ; Jordan, Proc. Phila. Acad.
Nat. Sci., 1883, 284 (original type).

This species is now only known from the original type in the
Museum at Berlin, erroneously described by Dr. Peters. In
1882 numerous specimens were collected at Panama by Prof. C,
H. Gilbert, but all of these have been since destroyed by fire.

5. Stromatens maculatas.

Stromateus maculatus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ix,
399, 1833 (Valparaiso); Jenyns, "Zool. Beagle, Fishes," 74, 1839;
Gay, "Hist. Chile, Zool.," ii, 248, Atl. Ictiol. lam., 3 bis, f. 1;
Glinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., ii, 398, 1860.

Habitat. — Coast of Chili.

Head ^ 4^ in length of body ; depth 2^ ; D. VII, 43 ; A. Ill, 39.

Scales in lateral line about 160. Body ovate, compressed,

^ The description of Stromateus maculatus was added by Seth E. Meek,
who alone is responsible for it.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 315

dorsal and ventral outlines very similar to each other. Profile
evenly convex (with curve a little shorter at occiput) to snout in
front of nostrils, where it descends almost vertically. A slight
depression on each side of head, above nostrils, which makes the
profile more trenchant at that place.

Mouth not very small ; the tip of maxillary does not quite
reach vertical from front of eye ; its length about 4:^ in head.
The teeth of the lower jaw pass just behind those of the upper
jaw, when the mouth is closed. Eye small, 5:^ in head. Pseudo-
branchiae well developed. Gill-rakers weak and flexible, 12 below
the angle, the longest about | eye. Preopercle entire. Branchi-
ostegals 6. Pelvis not ending in a spine. No trace of ventral
fins. No pores along the base of dorsal fin. The soft dorsal and
anal fins similar to each other, except that the anterior rays
of dorsal are correspondingly higher than those of the anal.

The dorsal spines are distant from each other, and quite
imbedded in the skin. The first spine is on the vertical above,
from upper part of gill-opening. Distance of first ray of soft
dorsal to tip of snout equals the depth of the body. Distance
from first ray to last ray of soft dorsal is contained 1| in length
of body. Distance of first ray of anal to tip of snout about 2
in length of body. Base of anal 2 in length of body.

The mucus-pores on upper anterior part of head form a sort of
irregular network. A main branch arises a little anterior to
upper part of gill-opening, which sends off branches, extending
backwards almost straight, and parallel to each other.

The greatest width of head 2 in its length ; the greatest width
of body (midway on a line from upper part of gill-opening to
base of last anal ray) 2| in head. Cheeks and opercles scaly.

Color in alcohol blue above, with numerous round dark blue
spots, about ^ as large as eye ; below silvery. Below pectorals,
on anterior half of body, ai-e some irregular blue markings.
Pectorals blue ; caudal yellowish, with faint bluish shade on tips
of its rays. The pectoral fins are about as long as head.

The above description was taken from a specimen in very good
condition, from Rio Grande do Sul, South America. The speci-
men is in the Museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia. It was originally sent there from the Museum of
Comparative Zoology. Length of specimen, 14 inches.

316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

II. LEIRUS.
Leirus Lowe, " Proo. Zool. Soc, London," 1839, 82 {betmetii = ovalis).
Falinnrus Dekay, New York Fauna, Fish, 118, 1842 {perci/ormis).
Criu8 Valenciennes, "Webb and Berthelot, Isles Canar. Poiss." (bennetti).
Fammelas GUnther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., ii, 485, 1860 {perci/ormu).
Palinuriohtbys Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1860,20 (perei/ormis).
Falimirichthys Bleeker, about 1860 {perdformis).

Analysis of American Species of Leirus.

a. Body ovate ; the greatest depth, 2^ in length. Head, 3^ ; D.
YIII, 20 ; A. Ill, 16 ; Lat. 1. 15. perdformis. 1,

aa. Body more elongate, its greatest depth 3^ in length. Head,
3; D. VIII-IX, 26-28; A. Ill, 18; Lat. 1. 80-90.

peruanus. 2.

I follow Jordan and Gilbert in regarding Leirus as a genus
distinct from Centrolophus, from which it differs chiefly in the
differentiation of the dorsal spines, and in referring to Leirus,
the Palinurichthys perdformis of American writers, which
appears to be a near relative of Leirus ovalis, although Dr.
Giinther has placed it among the Garangidse.

1. Leirus peroiformis.

Rudder fish or PercJi eoryphene Mitchill, Lit. Phil. Soc, i, pi. vi, f. 7,

1814 (no description).
Coryphene perdformis Mitcliill, Am. Month. Mag., ii, 244, 1818

(New York Harbor).
Palinurus perdformis Dekay, New York Fauna, Fish, 118, pi. xxiv,

f. 25, 1842 (Shrewsbury Inlet).
Pammelas perdformis Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., ii, 485, 1860

(Coast of New York).
Palinurichthys perdformis Gill, Proc. Phila. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1860,

20 (name only); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 91 (Wood's

HoU, Mass. ; Ofif Noman's Land ; New York Market ; Newport,

R. I. ; Gloucester, Mass. ; Fishing banks, off coast of Maine).
Lirus perdformis .Jordan and Gilbert. Syn. Fish. N. A., 452, 1882.
Trachinotus argenteus Storer, Mass. Rep., 55, 1839 (Holme's HoU,

Mass. ; not of Cuvier and Valenciennes).

Habitat. — Maine to New York.

This species has apparently but a limited range on our Atlantic
coast. It is apparently congeneric with Centrolophus ovalis
Cuv. and Val., the type of Lowe's genus Leirus.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHIIiADELPHIA. 31 1

2. Leiras peruaaus.

Centrolophus peruanus Steindachner, Ichthyologische Beitrage, i, 10,
1874 (Callao).

Habitat. — Coast of Peru.

This species is known to me only from Steindachner's descrip-
tion.

318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

017 A BEMABEABLE EXP08TJBE OF COLUMNAB TBAP NEAB OBAVGE,
NEW JEBSEY.

BY PROFESSOR ANQELO HEILPRIN.

The remarkable exposure of trap, near Orange, New Jersey, to
which attention has recently been called by the State Geologist,
Prof. George H. Cook, is in many respects the finest example of
geotechnic architecture to be found in the Eastern United States.
Although a true columnar structure is by no means a rarity in this
State, indeed, rather the contrary, yet strikingly enough, where
any extensive exposure of the trap occurs, there the columnar
structure appears to be in most instances either only partially
developed, or where developed, only of a very indeterminate
character. This is well shown in the case of the Palisades fronting
the Hudson River, where, for the greater part of their extent,
only an approximation to anything like such structure can be
made out. In the case of the locality presently to be described,
however, which is situated on the face of the first interior ridge
trending parallel with the Palisades, whose age probably differs
but little, if at all, from that of the Palisades, we are presented
with the reversed condition of things; the columnar structure is
here developed, not only on a most imposing scale, but in all the
varied conditions under which such structures appear.

The exposure of O'Rourke's quarry (Plate YIII) is located some
one and a half or two miles back of Orange, on the slope of Orange
Mountain, and, consequently, in the line of the first trap ridge.
It measures 750 feet in length, and 98 feet 2 inches greatest
height above the base or working line. The material quarried
(worked now for a considerable number of years) is the familiar
post-Triassic (?) " trap," or " greenstone," the material of the
Palisades quarries, which, until recently, supplied the city of New
York with a great part of the Belgian paving blocks. That which
immediately arrests the attention of the visitor to the quarry is
the magnificent display of the columnar structure, thousands of
basaltic columns of the hexagonal and pentagonal pattern appear-
ing, if not in the absolute perfection of the similar columns of the
Giant's Causeway and Fingal's Cave, in a perfection but very
little inferior to these. The base or lower half of the exposure is

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 319

made up of a vertical palisade of 120 or more columns, measuring
individually from 15 to 40 or 42 feet in height, and from 3 to 5
feet, or even more, in thickness. Towards the middle the height
of this palisade has been greatlv reduced, partly through the
failing of the columns themselves, and partly through the artificial
destruction that has here been effected. Above this line, which
in some parts is sheared off as evenly as though it had been
manipulated b}' the hand of man, the columns suddenly diminish
in size, and instead of retaining the vertical position, now arch
diagonally upward and outward, meeting from opposite sides to
form an apex immediately under the highest point of the exposure.
Many of the columns rest horizontally, or nearly so. Beyond the
horizontal layer, what may be considered as a third series of
columns makes its appearance, and here, again, the vertical posi-
tion is assumed. The material of the glacial drift, as indicated
by a heterogeneous assemblage of pebbles and boulders, rests on
top, forming the subsoil of the region.

The first impression produced upon the casual observer by the
complete exhibit is one indicating disturbance ; the arched or
diagonally inclined, and apparently disturbed, position of the
columns of the upper and inner portion of the mass, would seem
to imply an upheaving thrust from below, just underneath the
apex. In other words, it would appear that we were over the
seat of some subterranean disturbing force, or in the centrum of
volcanic action, and, therefore, in the position of a true vent. But
had there been such a thrust as is here implied, we should expect
to see its effects revealed in a fracture or dislocation below the
top, whereas none such is apparent. On the contrary, the con-
tinuit}'^ of the columnar mass is fully as well marked on top as
anywhere else, and no indications of special disturbance are any-
where manifest. We are hence forced to the conclusion that the
irregular and apparently disturbed position of the columns is not
in reality due to any disturbing agent, but is merely the result of
peculiar conditions of cooling and solidification of the original
molten substance (lava). In other words, while some portions of
this molten lava " crystallized " into vertical prismatic columns,
other portions " crystallized " horizontally, and in all the interme-
diate planes lying between the horizontal and vertical. This
irregular method of columnar formation, a perfect parallel of

320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

which is observed along the River Alignon in the Ardeche, was
first critically discussed by the late Poulett Scrope, who investi-
gated its causes midst the volcanic debris of Central France, and
clearly determined that it was the result of irregular convection
and radiation of heat, and consequent irregular solidification.
The deep la^^ers, where the loss of heat was effected slowly
through conduction with the underlying rock, produced stout
vertical columns; the more superficial layers, where radiation
was most active, frequently produced horizontal columns, while
between the two were found columns occupying all the interme-
diate positions.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 321

NOTES ON SOME NEW FOBAMINIFEBA FROM THE NUMMULITIC
FORMATION OF FLORIDA.

BY PROFESSOR ANGELO HEILPRIN.

Since the publication of my paper on Nummulites Willcoxi
Heilprin (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sciences, July, 1882 ; reprinted in my
" Contributions to the Tertiary Geology and Paleontology of the
United States," Phila., 1884), in which the existence of a true
Nummulite in the rocks of the North American continent was first
indicated, I have had the good fortune to have passed under my
supervision an extensive series of the Florida nummulitic rock.
In these, for which I am indebted to the kindness of Mr. Joseph
Willcox of this city, I have detected a considerable number of
foraminiferal forms which have not hitherto been recognized, I
believe, as occurring in the United States Tertiaries, but which
are usually present in larger or smaller quantities wherever the
nummulitic formation is largely developed. Among these, as
coming from Hernando County, are the genera Heterostegina.
Sphaeroidina, Biloculina (?), Triloculina^ Quinqueloculiiia, and
Spiroloculina. The genus Orbitoides is very abundantly repre-
sented in two or more species, one of which, unmistakably the
0. ephippium (0. sella), so distinctive of the Oligocene portion
of the European Terrain nummulitique, appears pre-eminent for
its lai'ge size. The great development of this species, irrespective
of all other evidence, would almost be sufficient by itself to
determine the age (Oligocene) of the rock formation in which it
occurs.

Associated with these forms are very considerable numbers of
the Nummulites Willcoxi, and also a second species of the same
genus of very much larger size. In it the whorls
expand very rapidly in size, and the septa, in addition
Nummulites to being Comparatively more numerous, are consider-
FioridensM. ^^^^y more flcxcd than in the commoner species. The
test measures between one-third and one-half of an inch in diam-
eter. I propose naming this species Nummulites Floridensis,
although I am by no means satisfied that it may not prove to be
identical with one of the many closely related forms that have

322

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1884.

been described from the south of Europe, the West India Islands,
and elsewhere. Only an actual comparison of specimens can, in
most instances, determine specific identity
or variation in the case of this most diffi-
cult group of organisms. Pending the in-
terval which must of necessity intervene
before such comparison can be made, I
have deemed it the safer plan to describe
and name the species, subject to revision.
A new locality for Nummulites Willcoxi
has been found by Mr. Willcox, situated

Nummnlites Willcoxi.

1. Natural size ; 2. Enlarged, some fifteen milcs to the northeast of the
locality on the Cheeshowiska River, whence the species was orig-
inally obtained. Here the rock masses containing the fossils
lie in situ, and at an elevation of not less than 150 feet above the
sea. The existence of a true nummulitic basement formation in
the State of Florida is thus placed beyond question, and, doubt-
less, the same will be found to have a very considerable extension
inward.

No specimens of the Operculina rotella (= Operculina com-
planata f) have been detected in this newer series of rock frag-
ments.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 323

The following annual reports were read and referred to the
Publication Committee : —

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

The Recording Secretary respectfully reports that during the
year ending November 80, 1884, thirty-two members and twenty-
two correspondents have been elected.

Resignations of membership have been received and accepted,
on the usual conditions, from J. Henry Simes and John Shallcross.

The deaths of eleven members. and six correspondents have
been announced. As these have been duly recorded in the Pro-
ceedings under the date of announcement, the names are not here
repeated.

Thirty -three papers have been presented for publication, as
follows ; N. A. Randolph, 2 ; Miss S. G. Foulke, 2 ; David S. Jordan,
2 ; Angelo Heilprin, 2 ; Theo. Gill, 2 ; Seth E. Meek and Robert
Newland, 2 ; Seth E. Meek and David K. Goss, 2 ; Seth E. Meek,
1 ; Seth E. Meek and Martin L. Hoffman, 1 ; Andrew J. Parker,
1 ; Benjamin Sharp, 1 ; Joseph Swaim and Seth E. Meek, 1 ; Rev.
H. C. McCook, 1 ; Thomas Meehan, 1 ; Otto Meyer, 1 ; Rafael
Arango, 1 ; Eugene N. S. Ringueberg, 1 ; Jos. Willcox, 1 ; Edw.
Potts, 1 ; Henry J. Carter, 1 ; Frederick D. Chester, 1 ; D. G.
Brinton, 1 ; Henry F. Osborn, 1 ; Herman Strecker, 1 ; Asa Gray,
l,and F. Lamson Scribner, 1.

These have all been printed in the Proceedings.

One hundred and twenty-eight pages of the Proceedings for
1888, and two hundred and sixty-four pages of the volume for
1884, have been printed and distributed, the latter being illus-
trated by six plates. Eighty-five pages of the Journal have also
been published, completing the first part of the ninth volume.
These pages contain the conclusion of A. J. Garrett's paper on
Society Island Mollusca, illustrated by two lithographic plates,
containing one hundred and fifty-two figures, and a valuable paper
by Professor Heilprin, on the Tertiary Geology of the Eastern and
Southern United States, illustrated by a colored map. The Pub-
lication Committee has recently been compelled by lack of means
to decline a contribution to the Journal of a valuable paper, not-
withstanding the fact that a series of beautiful illustrative plates
were offered free of expense, except for printing.

324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Twenty-two foreign societies have been added to the exchange
list, making now a total of 335 societies and journals, to which
the numbers of the Proceedings are sent by mail as they are
issued. Fifty-two of these receive also the Journal. Letters
applying for deficiencies, and proposing exchange of publications
as noted in the report of the Librarian, have been productive of
the most gratifying returns.

The average attendance at the meetings during the year has
been twenty-seven. Verbal communications have been made by
twenty-six members ; they have been for the most part published
in the Proceedings.

The most important event in the history of the Academy
during the past year, was the passage of an amendment to the
charter by means of which the Society is empowered to hold a
larger annual income than heretofore. The preliminary step to
the securing of such an amendment was taken by the meeting
held December 4, 1883, when the following preamble and resolu-
tions were adopted by a unanimous vote : —

Whereas, The limit of the yearly income of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, fixed by the charter at eight
thousand dollars, is, in the opinion of the members, insuflScient
for the necessary requirements of the corporation, therefore —

Resolved, That the officers of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia be, and they are hereby authorized and empow-
ered and requested to petition in due form the proper Court in
Philadelphia, under the Act of Assembly of Pennsylvania, enti-
tled "An Act to provide for the incorporation and regulation of
certain corporations," approved the 29th day of April, A. D.
1874, to so amend the charter of said corporation as to enable the
Academy to hold a much larger income, as follows, to wit: By
striking out, in the proviso to Section I of said Charter, after the
word " income," the following words — " of such estate shall not
exceed eight thousand dollars, nor," and insert in lieu thereof the
following words, " from the real estate shall not exceed twenty
thousand dollars ; nor shall the income of the corporation " — so
that the proviso to said Section I, as amended, shall read as fol-
lows : '"'■ Provided, That the annual income from the real estate shall
not exceed twentj^ thousand dollars ; nor shall the income of the
corporation be applied to any other purpose than those for which
this corporation is formed."

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 325

After the required foi-malities had been complied with, the
consent of the Court to the amendment applied for was
announced to the Academy at the meeting held January 22, 1884,
and at the following meeting, the thanks of the society were
tendered, by resolution, to Mr. Uselma C. Smith, its solicitor,
for his services in securing such action.

Chapter I, Article 6, and Chapter XVI, Article 4, of the By-
Laws were amended by the meeting held October 28, as reported
at length under that date on page 261 of the Proceedings.

On January 29, resolutions providing for an increase of the
building fund of the Academy, were adopted, and on February 19
a committee, consisting of Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger, Dr. Chas.
Schaffer, Mr. Geo. W. Trj'^on, Jr., Prof. Angelo Heilprin, and Dr.
Horace F. Jayne, with power to increase the number, was
appointed to carry the resolutions into effect.

Resolutions expressive of the Academy's interest in biological
instruction, and urging the desirability of the endowment of
biological professorships in connection with the Society, were
adopted February 26.

At the meeting held March 18, a communication from Dr.
William Pepper, proposing the establishment of a Biological
Institute, to be under the joint control of the University of
Pennsylvania and the Academy, was referred to the Council for
consideration and report. While the subject was still under con-
sideration, and before the Academy was called upon to take
definite action upon it, a letter was received from Dr. Pepper
acknowledging, on behalf of the Trustees of the University, the
courtesy with which their former communication had been
received, but expressing the belief that " it is, for the present at
least, wiser for the University to pursue independently the
development of the special field of biological work and teaching
devolving upon her." Further consideration of the desirability
of the proposed joint government was thereupon suspended, and
the operations of the Academy's Committee on Instruction were
carried on independently, as set forth in the reports of the
several professors herewith presented.

Dr. Benjamin Sharp was elected Professor of Invertebrate
Zoology January 29, and delivered his inaugural lecture on
February 3.

Dr. D. G. Brinton was elected Professor of Ethnology and

326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Archaeology February 26, and opened his course in a lecture
delivered before the Academy April 4.

The resignation of Dr. J. Gibbons Hunt as Professor of
Microscopic Technology was received and accepted May 2T.
His successor has not yet been appointed.

At the meeting of the Council held November 24, Mr. Jacob
Binder was appointed Curator of the Wm. S. Vaux Collections,
to serve, in compliance with the Articles of Agreement, during
the ensuing twelve months. Mr. Binder accepted the position
and declined receiving a compensation for his services. A reso-
lution expressive of the Academy's appreciation of Mr. Binder's
efficient discharge of the duties of his position during the past
year, was adopted by the meeting held November 25.

During the meeting of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, held in September, the museum and
library of the Academy were visited by many of the attending
members, and by representatives of the British Association.
The Academy is to be congratulated on having been able to add
materially to the interest of the important occasion, both by the
extent of its library and museum, and the receptions and excur-
sions given under the auspices of its Botanical, and Biological
and Microscopical Sections. The generous support given by the
citizens of Philadelphia to the Local Committee, in its endeavor
to provide fittingly for the meeting referred to, is an encouraging
indication of an intelligent interest in science, and consequently
in the welfare of the Academy and kindred institutions.

All of which is respectfully submitted,

Edw. J. Nolan,

Recording Secretary.

REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.

The duties of the Corresponding Secretary, as defined by our
laws, show very little variety from year to year. It is, however,
gratifying to note that the number of societies with which we
are in correspondence shows a notable increase. The trans-
mission of our publications by mail, begun last 3'ear, places us
in closer relation with foreign societies ; many of them have
agreed to^reciprocate, while a few prefer the old method of trans-
mission, for reasons which have been read at various times.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 32t

It being the duty of the Corresponding Secretary to
acknowledge all gifts to the Museum, the usual circulars have
been signed, and the Curator-in-charge, to whom tlie addresses
are generally known, has sent them to the donors. A full
account of the donations will appear in the Curator's report.

During the year ending November 30, there have been twenty-
two correspondents elected, to all of whom notification has been
promptly forwarded, and, excepting to those very recently
elected, the diploma has also been sent. Of the correspondents
elected during the present and past j^ear, seventeen have
acknowledged their election, many having at the same time
transmitted valuable publications.

Official notification has been received of the death of Joachim
Barrande, Quintino Sella and Sven Nilsson, correspondents.

While the number of letters from societies, etc., does not indi-
cate the entire number receiving our publications, it may be inter-
esting to note that nineteen are from societies, libraries, etc., in
North America and Mexico, two from South America, and fifty-
three from the Eastern Hemisphere. The entire number of
letters, announcing the receipt of our publications, during the
year is one hundred and nineteen.

Letters of transmission, with which foreign societies usually
accompany their publications, have diminished during the year,
owing probably to the transmission of the publications by mail.
These letters number forty-four.

The activity of our Librarian, in endeavoring to supply defi-
ciencies in our library, usually induces a corresponding demand
on us from our corresponding societies. Letters of this
character are noted to the number of nine.

Letters of a miscellaneous nature — in response to our invita-
tion to exchange by mail, regarding deficiencies for which we
have applied, announcing anniversary festivities — have been
received from foreign societies, numbering nineteen.

In addition to the above, a considerable number of trivial
letters have been received, and, where necessar}'', replied to,
mostly entirel}' unimportant, and often of a purely personal nature.
Respectfully submitted,

Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Corresponding Secretary.

328

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.

During the twelve months ending November 30, 1884, 3422
additions have been made to the library', an increase of 419 over
the growth of 1883. These additions have consisted of 480 vol-
umes, 2760 pamphlets and parts of periodicals, and 182 maps,
sheets, photographs, etc.

They have been derived from the following sources : —

Societies, 1356

Editors, 866

I. V. "Williamson Fund, . . 520

Authors 280

Dr. G. E. Abbot, 145

"Wilson Fund, 37

Department of the Interior, . 29

Geological Survey of India, . 19

Geological Survey of Sweden, 17
Russian Geological Commission, 16

Dr. F. V. Hayden, .... 15
Northern Transcontinental

Survey, 14

Geoldgical Survey of Belgium, 12

Geological Survey of Kentucky, 10
Min ster of Public "Works,

France, 8

Department of Agriculture, . 8

H. B. M. Government, ... 8

Treasury Department, ... 7

Prof. Angelo Heilprin, ... 6
Second Geological Survey of

Pennsylvania, 6

Dr. R. J. Dunglison, ... 5

Geological Survey of Canada, 4

~ H. Redfield, 4

Engineer Department, U. S. A.
U. S. Fish Commission, . .
Navy Department, ....
Geological Survey of New

Zealand,

"War Department, ....
Trustees of British Museum, .
Smithsonian Institution, . .
Ex. of Wm. S. "Vaux, . . .
Commissioners of Inland Fish-
eries,

F. G. Schaupp,

East Indian Government, . .

Geological Survey of Rouma-
nia,

Census Commission of Buenos
A'res

"W. H. Dougherty, ....

Depaitment of Mines, Nova
Scotia,

Royal College of Surgeons, .

Justin "Winsor

Trustees of Indian Museum, .

Brazilian Museum, ....

Dr. A. E. Foote,

Chas. E. Smith,

J

The departments of the library, to which these additions were
disti-ibuted, and the proportions of such distribution, are as
follows : —

Journals, 2382

Geology 250

Anthropology, 166

General Natural History, . . 103

Conchology, 82

Botany, 55

Anatomy and Physiology, . . 53

Entomology, 51

Med cine 45

Chemistry, . 40

Physical Science, 23

Ornithology, 21

Helminthology, 20

Education, 20

Voyages and Travels, ... 14

Mammalogy, 13

Agriculture, 12

Encyclopedias, 12

Bibliography, 12

Ichthyology, 11

Mineralogy, 10

Geography, 3

History, 1

Miscellaneous, 23

In consequence of the necessary curtailment of appropriations,
no binding has been done during the year. It is to be hoped

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 329

that a permanent Binding Fund, may be soon placed at the dis-
posal of the Library Committee. While the estimate for binding
is, properly enough, one of the first to be curtailed when expenses
have to be reduced, yet our rapidly increasing sets of journals
and the many valuable illustrated books which reach us in parts
as issued, are in danger of being injured or rendered incomplete
while used in the unbound form.

The card catalogue of periodicals has been completed, and will
be transcribed in the form of a hand catalogue for the greater
convenience of those consulting this, perhaps the most important,
department of the library. Occasion was taken as the catalogue
progressed to make careful memoranda of deficiencies. 243
letters have been written applying for lacking parts and volumes
of incomplete sets of journals now in our possession, and 59
proposing exchange with societies, the publications of which are
not represented on our shelves at all. The responses to these
letters have been of such a satisfactory character as to account,
perhaps entirel}', for the excess of additions over the number
reported at the last annual meeting.

In recording the completion of the important work noted, it
gives me pleasure to acknowledge the efficient service of Mr.
Emanuele Fronani, of whose assistance I have again been enabled
to avail myself during the summer months.

The catalogue of the library, may be now said, for the first
time in many j^ears, to be complete. Care is, of course, taken
to add the titles of accessions immediatel}" on their presentation.

The portrait of the late Dr. Robert Bridges, which was
approaching completion when my last report was presented, has
been placed in its proper position in the gallery of Presidents,
and is considered an unusually satisfactory likeness. The
Academy is indebted for it to Messrs. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., W. S.
W. Ruschenberger, Thos. Meehan, Jos. P. Hazard, J. H. Redfield,
Jacob Binder, C. S. Bement, Harrison Allen, John Ashhurst, Jr.,
Edw. S. Whelen, Chas. Schaeffer, Aubrey H. Smith, John S.
Haines, Samuel Lewis, Geo. H. Horn, John Welsh, Chas. E.
Smith, Jos. Wharton, Isaac Lea, and George Vaux.

In view of the amount of work accomplished and the results
thereof, the past year, in this department of the Academy, may
be regarded as an uriusually prosperous one.

All of which is respectfully submitted,

Edw. J. Nolan,
22 Librarian.

330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

REPORT OF THE CURATORS.

The Curators present the following statement of the Curator-
in-charge, Professor Angelo Heilprin, as their report for the
year ending November 30 :

Work in the various departments of the Museum, has during
the past year, as in previous years, been largely of a volunteer
nature, but, for this reason, none the less systematic, nor less
valuable to the Academy.

The Conchological, Entomological and Botanical departments,
under direct control of the Conchological, Entomological and
Botanical Sections of the Academy, have benefited almost
exclusively from services of this kind, and the same is true of
the Mineralogical department covered bj' the Wm. S. Yaux
trust. The Academy feels itself under deep obligation to the
special conservators who have so generously contributed their
time and labor to the interests of the institution.

In departments other than those here indicated work has not
been neglected, but, unfortunately, because of the limited means at
the disposal of the Curators, and for general want of space, which
together constitute an almost insuperable obstacle to the proper
care and exposition of the vast, and still rapidly increasing,
collections of the institution, not so much has been accomplished
as might have been desired.

The entire series of alcoholics has been carefully overhauled,
and the necessary disposition of alcohol toward the preservation
of these perishable objects made. The collection may be said to
be in a fairly good condition. The recent mammalia have all
been redetermined and relabeled, and arranged according to the
most approved S3'stems of classification. In this . department,
the Academy is seriously deficient, and it is to be hoped that at
no very distant day the numerous gaps that everywhere occur
may be filled in. A complete catalogue has been prepared,
showing the Academy to possess just 400 species and varieties,
represented in all by 904 specimens.

In the department of Ornithology comparatively little has
been accomplished ; the accessions have been very limited, as,
indeed, they have been for a number of years past. Although the
collection of birds still ranks as one of the most complete, and
in some respects, the most complete of any in the world, following

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA, 331

immediately after the collections of the British Museum, the
National Museum of Vienna, and the University of Leyden, it
has of recent years attracted but few students or specialists to
its cases, a deplorable condition, doubtless due in great part to
imperfect arrangement (incident to the want of a special curator)
and the circumstance of the 85,000 or more specimens being
mounted, instead of in the far more serviceable form of skins.
The absolute necessity of having a specialist, whose services
should meet with fit pecuniary compensation, in this, as in all
other departments, cannot be too strongly insisted upon. Long
neglect of a department means, practically, its collapse, at least
so far as the advantages to be derived from it by special students
are concerned, and unless it can be adequately supported, must
ultimately, by its occupancy of space and the use of time in its
preservation, become a drag rather than a spur to the institution
of which it forms a part. Despite the general richness of the
ornithological collection, it has, through want of adequate means
for its support, suffered to such an extent that at the present
time it lacks no less than about 170 species or varieties of North
American birds alone I

The Conchological department, on the other hand, which has
for two decades enjoyed a constant supervision from the part of
a distinguished conchologist, is singularly complete, and both in
the number and variety of its forms, stands unsurpassed by any
similar collection, whether in this country or Europe. It com-
prises no less than 150,000 specimens, mounted on upwards of
42,000 tablets, and it alone, of all the various departments, rep-
resents the actual state of a zoological science as we now know it.

During the year a selection of birds from the general collection
has been laid aside to complete a special collection illustrative of
North American ornithology.

The work of re-arranging and classifying the geological and
paleontological specimens has made considerable progress.

The " local collection," intended for the illustration of the
natural products of the States of Pennsylvania and New Jersey,
is, as far as the resources of the general collection woujd permit,
complete, except in the department of entomology, for which no
suitable cases have as yet been provided. A cabinet of the
minerals belonging to the same geographical area has recently
been placed in the Museum for the benefit of students. It is

332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

intended to further complete this department by a serial exposi-
tion of the rock masses about Philadelphia, and by the prepara-
tion of a relief map illustrative of the geology of the city and
its immediate surroundings.

The work of labeling and mounting the Wm. S. Yaux collec-
tion of minerals, comprising upwards of 6412 specimens, has
been completed ; a report of progress in this department, pre-
pared by the special Curator, Mr. Jacob Binder, is herewith
appended.

One of the most striking accessions made to the Museum
during the past year, is the collection of insect and aranead archi-
tecture, deposited by one of the Yice-Presidents of the Academy,
Dr. H. C. McCook. It is, doubtless, the most complete of its
kind in this country, and may be considered to be, in many
respects, unique. A valuable collection of fishes from the
southern and western waters of the TJ. S., made by Prof. D. S.
Jordan and Mr. Seth E. Meek, has been added to the Ichthyolo-
gical department.

Various alterations have been made during the current year in
the ground floor of the Academy building, but these require no
special consideration. Specimens from the Museum have been
loaned for study to the Smithsonian Institution, to Prof. James
Hall, of Albany, Prof. R. P. Whitfield, of New York, Prof.
W. B. Scott, of Princeton, and Mr. Dobson, of London, who
have severally rendered service to the Academy by the redeter-
mination or description of the forms that passed through their
hands.

The Academy has during the year benefited through the
services of five Jessup Fund beneficiaries, who, apart from
their studies, have in various ways cooperated with, or assisted,
the Curator-in-charge, who hereby acknowledges his thanks. The
Curator-in- charge also takes this opportunitj^ of acknowledging
his special indebtedness to Mr. Alan F. Gentry, who, during
the greater part of the year, has most efficiently acted as his
assistant.

Very respectfully,

Angelo Heilprin,

Gurator-in-charge A. N. S.
Joseph Leidt,

Chairman Board of Curators.

1884.] NATUEAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 333

SUMMARY OF THE REPORT OF WM. C. HENSZEY,
TREASURER,

For the Year ending Nov. 30, 1884.

Cr.

Salaries, Janitors, etc $3319 93

Freight 42 70

Repairs 271 71

Insurance 55 00

Coal 551 00

Printing and Binding Proceedings 838 59

Mounting Plants 4 40

Printing and Stationery 114 42

Vials 6 00

Plates and Engravings 378 00

Postage 158 94

Water Rents 28 35

Newspaper Reports 70 00

Gas Ill 92

Books 276 79

Miscellaneous 472 38

A. Heilprin, Receipts Committee of Instruction 64 00

H. C. Lewis, Receipts, Committee of Instruction 235 00

Uselma C. Smith, Solicitor, Expenses securing Amend-
ment to Charter Acad. Nat. Sciences 25 10

G. D. Camden, Professional fee, Opinion in regard to

lands in Tyler Co., W. Va 50 00

Instruction and Lecture Fund, transferred to this Fund. 150 00
Life Memberships transferred to Life Membership

Fund 500 00

$7724 33

Dr.

To Balance from last account $ 226 59

" Initiation Fees 290 00

" Contributions (semi-annual contributions) 1602 48

•' Life Memberships 500 00

" Admissions to Museum 368 35

" Sale of Guide to Museum 30 00

" Publication Committee 617 92

".Fees, Lectures on Palaeontology 64 00

" " " " Mineralogy 235 00

" Miscellaneous 32 17

" Interest from Mortgage investment, Joshua T.Jeanes'

Legacy 1000 00

" "Wilson Fund. Towards Salary of Librarian 300 00

" Publication Fund. Interest on Investments 355 00

" Barton Fund. " " " 240 00

'' Life Membership Fund." " " 165 00

" Maintenance Fund. " " " 155 00

" Eckfeldt Fund. " " " 125 00

" Stott Legacy Fund. " " " 100 00

" Interest on Money awaiting Investment 79 28

6485 79

Balance overdrawn, General Account $1238 44

334 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

THOMAS B. WILSON LIBRARY FUND.

By Balance per last statement $222 55

For Books 279 73

Transferred to General Account, toward Salary of Librarian 3C0 00

$802 28
Income from Investments 525 00

Balance overdrawn $277 28

LIFE MEMBERSHIP FUND. (For Maintenance.)

Balance per last Statement $ 500 00

Interest on Investments 165 00

Life Memberships transferred to thisaccount 500 00

$1165 00
Transferred to General Account 165 00

X

To Balance for Investment $1000 00

BARTON FUND. (For Printing and Illustrating Publications. )

Interest on Investments $ 240 00

Transferred to Genei-al Account 240 00

JESSUP FUND. (For Support of Students.)

Balance per last Statement $ 595 01

Interest on Investments 560 00

$1155 01
Disbursed 535 00

Balance... $620 01

MAINTENANCE FUND.

Balance per last Statement $ 8 14

Interest on Investments 155 00

Thos. P. Cope, deceased. Legacy 1000 00

R. G. Curtin, M. D. Subscription... 5' 00

$1168 14
Transferre4 to General Account , 155 00

To Balance for Investment $1013 14

PUBLICATION FUND.

Income from Investments $ 355 00

Transferred to General Account 355 00

ECKFELDT FUND.

Income from Investments $ 125 00

Transferred to General Account 125 00

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 335

I. Y. WILLIAMSON LIBRARY FUND.

Balance per last Statement $ 770 41

Rents Collec'ed 1000 00

Ground-rents Collected 936 53

Cash received. Principal of yearly ground-rent for 53/0*^
Dollars. E.S. LinjioSt., 170 feet north of Dickinson St. $875 00

Four Months' Interest on same 17 50 892 55

$3599 44

For Books $1116 66

Taxes and Water-rents 195 51

Repairs to Properties 95 82

Collecting = 96 80

1504 79

Balance $2094 60

$875.00 of the above Balance is to be re-invested,

INSTRUCTION AND LECTURE FUND.

Balance per last Statement $ 56 00

Transferred from General Account 150 00

6 00
Disbursements 63 30

Balance $142 70

MUSEUM FUND.

Interest on Investments $ 50 00

Disbursements for Minerals, etc 45 00

Balance $5 00

VAUX FUND.

Balance per last Statement $428 84

Income from Investments 650 00

Sale of Cabinet 50 00

$1128 84

Minerals $272 71

Cases 222 40

Book 8 00

Models 65 00

Cards 2 75

Furniture, etc., for Room 80 68

651 54

Balance , $477 30

Mrs. STOTT FUND.

Income fi'om Investment $100 00

Transferred to General Account 100 00

BOOK ACCOUNT. (Jos. Jeanes' Donation).
Balance as per last Statement $37 13

336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

REPORT OF THE CURATOR OF THE WILLIAM S.
VAUX COLLECTIONS.

The Curator of the William S. Vaux collections respectfully
reports to the Council of the Academy of Natural Sciences : —

The arrangement and labeling of the minerals are now com-
plete, each of the groups having labels indicating the chemical
properties, the proportions in which the elements combine, the
degree of hardness and specific gravity of each of the species.
They are arranged in thirty-six horizontal and five upright cases.
One of the upright cases has been made use of for the purpose of
illustrating the six systems of crystallography — the forms of
crystallization and the structure of crj'stals being demonstrated
by typical specimens of minerals belonging to each system, and
by six glass models, having the axial lines represented by threads
of different color. In this case will also be found minerals repre-
senting the relative degrees of hardness.

The Archgeological collection has been entirely rearranged.
All implements, such as axes, celts, chisels, gouges, arrow-heads,
pipes, pottery, etc., belonging to the same locality, being
placed together. This method was suggested by Professor
Putnam, o"f Cambridge, and Professor Brinton, of our own
Academy, and is thought to have advantages for ethnological
study. By this method the McBride collection (which is con-
sidered of undoubted authenticity), has been placed in the Ohio
group.

The localities represented are Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Michigan,
Pennsylvania, New Jersey, New York, Massachusetts, Connecti-
cut, Maine, Virginia, North and South Carolina, Geoi'gia, Florida,
Alabama, Mississippi, Arkansas, Texas, Missouri, Wisconsin,
California, and the Pacific Coast, together with Mexico, Costa
Rica, Peru, Switzerland, Denmark and Sweden. There are also
a few Roman,, Carthagenian and Egyptian specimens. They
number in all 2940 pieces.

An alphabetical catalogue of the mineral collection has been
made, indicating the page and number in Dana, and the case con-
taining the particular specimen.

In m}'^ report of November, 1883, the number of minerals was
counted by trays, notwithstanding many of them contained more
than one specimen. I am informed that this is not the practice

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 33Y

in other museums, either in this country or in Europe, nor does
this method do justice to the collection. The same may be said
with regard to the Archaeological part.

The present method is based on the actual number of speci-
mens, without regard to the number of trays, and is as follows : —
Mineral specimens, .... 6,391

Crystallographic models, .... 6

Models of historical diamonds, . . 15

6,412

representing about 500 species.

It may be of interest to members of the Academj'- to know the
whole number of minerals contained in the Museum of the
Academy (though not strictly in the line of this report) ; with the
assistance of Mr. W. W. Jefferis, the specimens were counted as
follows : —

Mineral specimens, Academy proper, . . 9,633
Lithological specimens, Academy proper, . . 1,301

Total, • . 10,934

W. S. Vaux collection, . . . . . 6,412

Total, 17,346

It will be remembered that, according to terms of the agreement
upon which this collection was accepted by the Academy, all
specimens purchased from the fund provided for increase, were
subject to the approval of the Curators of the Academy in con-
junction with the Curator of the collection.

In making purchases, such specimens only have been bought —

1. As represent new species.

2. Species not represented in the collection.

3. Species representing new localities.

4. Such as are superior in character to those already in the
collection.

Sixty specimens have been purchased during the year 1884, as
follows : —

Minerals, 32

Indian relics, 1

Crystallographic models, ... 6

Historical diamond models, , . .15
The collection has been visited by a large number of persons
during the past year, many of them professional mineralogists,

338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

especially during the recent meeting of the American and British
Association for the Advancement of Science. I have been much
gratified to hear expressions of admiration of the collection,
many of the specimens being pronounced unique in their charac-
ter, and not represented in the museums of Europe.

In conclusion, I embrace the opportunity of thanking those of
my friends who have expressed a warm interest in my work, and
have aided me with valuable suggestions. I take the liberty
of making special mention of Dr. Leidy, Mr. W. W. Jefferis,
Clarence S. Bement, and Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.
Yery respectfully submitted,

Jacob Binder,

Curator.

REPORT OF THE MICROSCOPICAL AND BIOLOGICAL

SECTION.

During the past year, eighteen stated meetings and one public
exhibition were held.

The average attendance of members was about fifteen.

At the exhibition given in September to the visiting members
of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, a
very large audience was present, and the display of microscopes
and objects excelled all previous ones, both in number and in
scientific importance.

During the year. Dr. N. A. Randolph, Dr. Benjamin Sharp,
and Joseph Mellor were elected members.

Edward S. Campbell, Hugo Bilgrim, and Sara Gwendolen
Poulke were announced as contributors. ,

Dr. J. H. Simes and Prof. H. C. Lewis resigned membership.

Dr. Robert E. Rogers died.

Among the more important contributions b}' members during
the year, were : —

A lecture, December IT, 1883, by Dr. M. B. Hartzell. Subject
— The Bacteria.

February 4, 1884, by Dr. Benjamin Sharp. Subject — Section
Cutting.

March 11, by Mr. W. N. Lockington. Subject— The Fishes of
North America and the West Coast.

April 21, by Dr. Sharp. Subject— The Eye of the Inverte-
brates.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 339

May 5, by Dr. J. G. Hunt. Subject — Fertilization in Some
Plants.

May 9, by Dr. Hunt. Subject— The Bioplasm of the Cell.
June 2, by Dr. Geo. A. Rex. Subject — The Myxomycetes of
Fairmount Park.

Respectfully submitted,

RoBT. J. Hess, M.D.,

Recorder.

REPORT OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION.

The Recorder of the Conchological Section respectfully reports
that during the past year, the Academy has, as heretofore, con-
tinued to publish such papers upon the subject of the Mollusca
as have been approved by its Publication Committee.

One member and seven correspondents have been elected.
We have no deaths to report ; neither has there been any change
made in the By-Laws governing the Section.

From the eighteenth annual report of Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.,
Conservator, we find that during the year ending December 1,
1884, sixty donations of mollusks and shells have been received
from thirty-one persons. The number of trays and labels thus
added to the collection is 1126, of specimens 5224 ; larger acces-
sions in both cases than for several previous years. The
Conchological Museum now contains 42,448 trays and written
tablets, with 151,015 specimens.

The most important accession of the year is a remarkably fine
suite of shells, collected last winter by Mr. Henrj' Hemphill, on
the West Coast of Florida. Most of the specimens are in much
finer condition than those previously in our Museum, from the
same region ; manj'^ of them, hitherto known as West Indian,
are now first ascertained to inhabit our coast, and not a few are
new species. During the last summer, at the instance of Mr
Wm. G. Binney, Mr. Hemphill explored the mountains of North
Carolina for Helices, collecting a number of rare and fine specimens,
of which, by Mr. Binney's generosity, we have obtained a share.
This winter Mr. Hemphill is again spending on the Florida
Coast, southward of his last year's operations, and arrangements
have been made by which we shall receive a series of his
collections.

A very complete suite of the shells of our national capital
were presented by Mr. F. Lehnert.

340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Three donations of foreign shells are of unusual interest,
namely : From E. Marie, a series of the shells of the island of
Guadeloupe, W. I. ; from Andrew Garrett, eightj'-four species of
land shells of the Society Islands, including all the types figured
in his paper on this molluscan province, recently published by
the Academy ; from Dr. S. Archer and the Conchological Section,
over three hundred species of marine shells, collected by Dr.
Archer at Singapore. Another box, just received from Dr.
Archer (contents not yet presented), will bring up our repre-
sentation of the Singapore mollusks to upwards of five hundred
species.

A detailed list of the additions to the Museum accompanies
this report (see Curator's report).

The re-arrangement of the Conchological Museum steadily
progresses. During the year, the Pleurotomidse, Terebridae and
Cancellariidse of the marine gastropods have been carefully
studied, and, to a considerable extent, re-labeled and mounted.
A commencement has also been made with the series of Pul-
monata, by the re-arrangement of the Testacellidse, Oleacinidae
and Streptaxidse.

Our Museum cases have become so overcrowded that the dis-
play of all the species, under glass, is no longer possible ; in
many instances, the trays of specimens are piled up several tiers
in height, so that the under rows cannot be seen. Unless better
and more ample accommodation for the shell collection is soon
provided, it may become necessary to withdraw portions of it
from exhibition, in order to afford space for the display of the
larger and more important specimens.

At the annual meeting of the Section, held on the 4th inst.,
the following officers were elected : —

Director^ . . . . W. S. W. Ruschenberger.
Vice-Director, . . . John Ford.
Recorder, . . . . S. Raymond Roberts.
Secretary, .... John H. Redfield.
Treasurer, .... Wm. L. Mactier.
Conservator, .... George W. Tryon, Jr.
Librarian, .... Edward J. Nolan.
Respectfully submitted, on behalf of the Section,

S. Raymond Roberts,

Becorder.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341

REPORT OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SECTION.

During the j^ear 1884, the Entomological Section has held
its regular monthly meetings, dispensing as usual with those
of July and August. The attendance has been fair, but by no
means so large as is desirable. It was found that several
members had been prevented from attending the Section,
owing to other engagements. To remedy this, and with a hope
that the change would be beneficial, by accommodating more
persons, the Section, at its meeting held December 8, voted to
change the time of meeting from the second Friday night to the
fourth Monday night of each month, commencing January, 1885.
The failure to secure additions to the membership has been very
discouraging to the members of the Section, and it is earnestly
hoped that the members of the Academy will assist in increasing
the number.

The collections under the supervision of the Section, are at
present in quite good condition. Much work has been done in
the way of disinfecting and arranging the specimens. In an ento-
mological cabinet this requires constant watchfulness, and cannot
be dispensed with. The thanks of the Section are due to Mr. S.
F. Aaron for much of this work.

Additions to the collection during the past year have been
quite small. This has been principally owing to the fact, that
those members generally most active in collecting, have been
compelled by other more pressing calls, to defer such work to
the future.

In connection with the American Entomological Society, there
have been published, during the year, articles upon Entomology,
amounting to 335 pages of printed matter, together with 9 plates.
In addition, there has been printed a biographical sketch of John
L. Le Conte, M. D., late Director of the Section, written by S. H.
Scudder, also posthumous papers of the same gentleman, edited
by Dr. Geo. H. Horn, comprising in all 68 pages, making a total of
403 printed pages. These entomological contributions continue
to maintain the high standard of the journal in which they
appear.

At the meeting held December 8, the following were elected
officers of the Section for the year 1885 : —

342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Director,
Vice-Director,
Recorder,
Treasurer, .
Conservator,

. Geo. H. Horn, M.D.
, Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D.
. James H. Ridings.
. E. T. Cresson.
. Henry Skinner, M. D.
Respectfully submitted,

James H, Ridings,

Becorder.

REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL SECTION.

The Vice-Director of the Botanical Section has to report to
the Academy that the affairs of the Section are in a generally
prosperous condition.

Our Herbarium, already one of which the Academy is justly
proud, has been increased in new species 407 the past year, with-
out including the additions among the lower cryptogams. The
excellent progress made in other matters, under the superinten-
dence of the Conservator, Mr. John H. Redfield, is set forth in
detail in his annual report to the Section, which is submitted
herewith as part of the Section's report.

Meetings have been held regularly every month, except July
and August, the average attendance for the whole year being
slightly larger than last.

The Section is free from debt, and has a considerable balance
in its treasury.

One of the events of the year was the social re-union and enter-
tainment, in the hall of the Academy, of the botanists in attend-
ance on the meeting of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, under the auspices of the Section. The
expense was borne by the mem-bers of the Section, without any
draft on its regular funds, or on the funds of the Local Committee
of the Association. It is believed that the result will be useful
to the Academy, in making the work of the botanical department
better known, reacting in the interest of botany everywhere.

At the meetings of the Section many matters of interest to
botanists have been presented, and some, by Professor Gray,
Professor Rothrock, and Messrs. Meehan and Scribner, deemed
of sufficient general importance to appear in the Proceedings of
the Academy.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343

The officei's elected for the ensuing year are : —

Director, . . . Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.

Vice-Director, . . Thomas Meehan.

Recorder, . . . F. Lamson Scribner.

Cor. Secretary,-) ^ j^^^^ ^ Martindale.

Treasurer, )

Conservator, . . . John H. Redfield.

Respectfully submitted,

Thomas Meehan,

Vice-Director.

Conservator'' s Report for 188^. — The Conservator has, during
the past year, continued to direct his attention to the care and
improvement of the Academy's Herbarium, so far as was com-
patible with the demands on his time and labor occasioned by
receiving, preparing and placing new accessions. With some
assistance from Mr. Scribner, certain portions of the North
American Herbarium have been mounted, mainly of genera more
especially needing this care, such as Viola, Polygala, Lupinus,
Dalea, Astragalus, Oxytropis, Potentilla, Eriogonum, and others.
Mr. Burk is now engaged in the work of re-arranging the North
American Compositse after Gray's New Synoptical Flora. In the
General Herbarium the provisional alphabetical lists of species
have been carried forward as far as Loranthaceas. These lists,
imperfect and defective as they are, will justify the labor expended
upon them, by the time saved to every one consulting the Her-
barium. It is hoped that this merely preliminary work will soon
be completed, and prepare the way for more deliberate and careful
elaboration by expert botanists.

During the latter part of the summer our work had to be tem-
porarily suspended by the necessary preparations for receiving
the members of the American Association for the Advancement
of Science at its September meeting in this city, and the gratifi-
cation expressed by them on the visits to the Academy's library
and herbarium, for the fraternal fellowship extended by our
Section, is a source of satisfaction to us all.

The donations of plants during the past year amount to 3183
species, of which 407 are new to our collection. In these dona-
tions are included three Centuries of Ellis' North American
Fungi, of which a large proportion are probably new to us, and

344 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

should be added to the above 40*7. The North American species
received have been 1792, from tropical America were 3, and from
the old world 1388. Among the additions may be specified 1057
species, mostly European and North African, from the fine
Herbarium of Geo. Curling Joad, presented by Dr. Gray. Though
the most of these duplicated species which we already possessed,
yet being choice specimens, collected and ticketed by eminent
botanists, they greatly add to the value of our working material,
while about one-tenth of them were previously unrepresented on
our shelves. Our fellow-member, Mr, Canby, who, it will be
remembered, was in charge of the Botanical Department of the
Northern Transcontinental Survey, during the years 1882 and
1883, in the interest of the Northern Pacific R. R., has contributed
a very valuable suite of the collections made by himself, and by
Scribner, Brandegee, Tweedy and others under his direction, along
the northern border of Western North America, in the Territories
of Dakota, Montana and Washington. This series comprehends
851 distinct species of which about 90 were new to us. Our Vice-
Director, Mr. Meehan,has also given us the result of his herbori-
zations along the coast of Washington and Alaska Territories,
during the summer of 1883, in a collection of 207 species, which,
however add only five species to our earlier Alaskan collections
received from Kellogg, Harrington, Dall, and others. Other
smaller but valuable donations, will be detailed in the Academy's
Donation List for 1 884.

In large collections, where constant accessions, during a long
period of years, have repeatedly duplicated species, there is
always a tendency to exaggerated estimates of the number of
species represented. In regard to the Academy's Herbarium, the
estimates have been so vague and so evidentl}' excessive, that the
Conservator has been led to undertake an actual enumeration.
This apparently simple task is really attended with many diflB-
culties, one of which, consists in the varying views of botanists
as to the specific validity of forms. In some families this
diversity of opinion is so great as to materially affect total
results. In such cases, the Conservator has endeavored to
follow the authority of the latest leading specialists. Another
difficulty arises from the large amount of un worked and unnamed
material, which has accumulated since the early days of the
Academy, some of it probably duplicating the named species.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 345

The enumeration is not yet complete, but, as it covers about
three-fourths of the collection, a tolerably fair estimate may
be made of the remainder, on the basis of space occupied.
The conclusion is that the phanerogamic species will not exceed
24,000. To these we must add the ferns — 1018, by count - and the
remaining vascular crygtogams, estimated at 120 species, and
we have a total of phanerogams and vascular cryptogams of
a little more than 25,000 species. Of the extent of the collection
of lower cryptogams, embracing mosses, liverworts, lichens,
algae and fungi, the Conservator is at present unable to give any
estimate.

Respectfully submitted,

John H. Redfield,

Conservator.

REPORT OF THE MINERALOGICAL AND GEO-
LOGICAL SECTION.

The meetings of the Section have been held regularly during
the year, but the attendance has not been as large as formerly.
There have been, however, satisfactory" additions to the collec-
tions of minerals and rocks, in part by purchases made with the
funds of the Section.

Respectfully submitted,

Theo. D. Rand,

Director.

REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF INYERTEBRATE
PALEONTOLOGY.

The Professor of Invertebrate Paleontology respectfully
reports, that during the year he has delivered a course of lectures
on paleontology and physiography, which course, as in previous
years, was attended in principal part by teachers from the various
schools of the city. A special course of lectures on geology,
arranged by request of the Teachers' Institute of Philadelphia, was
delivered before the members of that body, with an attendance
ranging from one to two hundred. Six field excursions, em-
28

346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

bracing points of interest in tlie neigliborhood of the cit}^, and
extending to the terminal moraine, on the line of the Delaware
and Lackawanna Railroad in New Jersey, and the " mountain
colonnades " of Orange, were participated in by a fair proportion
of the class.

The condition of the collections of the Academy in the depart-
ment of paleontology has been materially improved during the
year, a complete re-arrangement of the fossils of this country <
having been effected. The work of identifying and labeling has
made considerable progress, and it is hoped that in a short time
proper attention may be given to the rich collections illustrating
European paleontology as well.

The additions during the year, which are recorded elsewhere,
have been neither very numerous nor important. A fine series
of Oligocene fossils from Germany, comprising nearl}^ 200
species, has been obtained from Dr. Otto Meyer, in exchange for
American Tertiary forms. The Academy is also indebted to Mr.
Joseph Willcox for an extensive series of the Nummulitic rock

of Florida.

Very respectfully,

Angelo Heilprin,
ProfesHor of Invertebrate Paleontology.

REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF MINERALOGY.

The Professor of Mineralogy respectfully reports that during
the spring months of 1884, he delivered a course of twenty lec-
tures upon the Geology and Mineralogy of Eastern Pennsylvania.
The alternate lectures were given in the open air, and consisted
of studies in the field at localities of geological and mineralogical
interest in the vicinity of Philadelphia. At the close of the
course a more extended excursion was taken to Mauch Chunk,
Hazleton, and Drifton, where, through the kindness of friends,
unusual facilities were offered for studying the geological struc-
ture and the methods of mining anthracite coal. A description
of the "field lectures," as reported in a daily newspaper, is here-
with presented. The average attendance was nearly forty per-
sons, of whom more than one-half were ladies.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 34Y

The mineralogical collection of the Academy, as shown in the
accompanying Curator's report, has received a number of valuable
additions. The placing of the minerals of Pennsylvania in a
special case will, it is believed, not only be a convenience to
visitors, but, as it becomes more complete, will stimulate a search
for new mineral localities. The mineralogists of the State are
particularly asked to contribute to this local collection.

As in previous annual reports, attention is again called to the
need, in this department, of scientific apparatus, both for the pur-
poses of teaching and for the prosecution of original research. A
lithological microscope, a reflecting goniometer, and a Groth's
universal apparatus for polarized light, are among the instru-
ments most urgently needed.

Respectfully submitted,

H. Carvill Lewis,

Professor of Mineralogy .

REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF INVERTEBRATE
ZOOLOGY.

The Professor of Invertebrate Zoology respectfully reports that
during the past year, since March, when he was placed in office,
he has delivered his inaugural address on " The Study of Biology
in Germany " (March 10), and six lectures on " Elementary His-
tology," with demonstrations.

He further reports that the collections under his charge have
greatly increased, especially by the addition of a superb collection
of marine sponges from the western coast of Florida, presented by
Mr. Joseph Willcox. The collection was described by Henry J.
Carter in the Proceedings.

A course of some twenty lectures is intended to be given in
the early part of the coming year (January, February and March),
the subject being " Some of the Principles of Zoology."

Very respectfully,

Benjamin Sharp,
Professor of Invertebrate Zoology.

348 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF ETHNOLOGY AND
ARCHEOLOGY.

A short course of lectures on some points in general ethnology
was delivered by me, immediately after my appointment as
professor in April last. The subjects were : —

Prehistoric Man in America.

The Origin of the Arj'^an Nations.

The Progress of American Linguistics.

The Civilization of Ancient Mexico and Peru.

These lectures were public and were reasonably well attended.

After the organization of the Bureau of Scientific Information
had been established, I forwarded a circular to a considerable
number of persons interested in my branch, in different parts of
the United States, announcing both the professorship and the
Bureau, and asking them to favor the Academy with such speci-
mens and information as would be of advantage to instruction
in this department. A number of promises to do so have been
received.

There has been but small increase in the collections in my
department since I took charge of it. The arrangement of the
cabinet leaves much to be desired, but I see no remedy for this,
unless considerably more space were at my disposal, and I am
well aware that the Academy is unable at present to supply this.
I can obtain " for deposit " with the Academy, several very fine
local collections of antiquities, were suflEicient space for their
proper display, and the usual guarantees of conservation, offered
their owners.

Very respectfully,

D. G. Brinton, M. D.,
Professor of Ethnology and Archaeology.

1884.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

349

The election of OflScers for 1885 was held, with the following
result : —

President^
Vice-Presidents,

Recording Secretary,

Corresponding Secretary,

Treasurer,

Librarian,

Curators,

Councillors to serve three
years, ....

Finance Committee,

Joseph Leidy, M. D.

Thomas Meehan,

Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D.

Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

George H. Horn, M. D.

Wm. C. Henszey.

Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

Joseph Leidy, M. D.

Jacob Binder,

W. S. W. Ruschenberger, M. D.

Angelo Heilprin.

Chas. P. Perot,
J. H. Redfleld,
S. Fisher Corlies,
Charles Morris.
Isaac C. Martindale,
Clarence S. Bement,
Aubrey H. Smith,
S. Fisher Corlies,
George Y. Shoemaker.

ELECTIONS DURING 1884.

MEMBERS.

January 29. — John Struthers, Thomas M. Fenton, M. D., H.
W. Stelwagen, M.D., D. G. Brinton,M. D., Miss Helen C, D. Abbott,
William Thomson, M. D., Rev. Wayland Hoyt, D. D., Benj. R.
Smith.

February 26. — Eugene W. Fiss, Francis E. Emery.

March ^5.— Albert S. Bolles, Ph. D., R. W. Fitzell, Joseph W.
Griscom.

April 29. — J. L. Forwood, M. D., Lewis Woolman, John
Eyerman, Edward Jackson, M. D., Miss S. D. Atkinson, E. J.
Wheelock.

May 27. — Henry N. Rittenhouse.

June 24. — Lieut. Thos. L. Casey, U. S. A.

350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

August ^5.— Ralph W. Seiss, M. D., Edw. P. Bliss.

September 30. — Miss Adele M. Fielde, Heniy F. Osborn, John
Wanamaker.

October 28. — H. La Barre Jayne, Edmund J. James, Ph. D.,
W. B. Scott, George Pales Baker.

November 25. — W. Henry Grant, Rufus Sargent, M. D.

CORRESPONDENTS.

January 29. — Karl A. Zittel, of Munich ; August Daubr^e, of
Paris ; Marquis de Gaston de Saporta, of Aix ; Quintino Sella,
of Rome ; Albert Gaudry, of Paris.

March 25. — Ludwig von Graff, of Aschaffenburg ; E. Renevier,
of Lausanne ; G. Dewalque, of Liege ; Hans Bruno Geinitz, of
Dresden ; Henry N. Moseley , of Oxford ; J. T. Burdon Sanderson,
M. D., of London.

April 29. — Ernest Andre, of Gray, Haute Saone.

October 28. — G. Yom Rath, of Bonn ; George E. Dobson, of
London.

November 25. — John Ball, of London ; Wm. Carruthers, of
London; Rud. Leuckart, of Leipzig; Anton Dohrn, of Naples;
H. Grenacher, of Halle i. S. ; Alex. Gotte, of Rostock i. M. ;
Ludwig Will, of Rostock i. M.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 351

ADDITIONS TO THE MUSEUM.

Archeology, Antiquities. Implements, etc. — Joseph Leidy. Frag-
ment of Druid stone. Avebury, Eng.
Stuart Wood. Contents of an Indian shell-heap, Indian River, Fla.
Miss A M. Fielde. Earrings of native work, Laos.
H. Beates. Aboriginal urn, C'earfield Co., Pa.
J. Willcox. Indian implements, Hernando Co., Fla.
Marquis de Nadaillac. Paleoliths, Ras-el Oued, Tunis, Africa.

Mammaiia (recent and fossil).— W. P. Buck. Double-headed foetal pig

{Sus scrofa).

Phil. Zool. Society. Macrorhinvs angustirostris (skull). Coast of Cali-
fornia ; Cercopithecus alhogularis, Africa.

J. B. Betts. Condylura cristata, New Castle, Del.

Mr. Kochusperger. 8 mammalian skulls ; antlers of Cariacus Virgini-
anus; horns of Rupicapra tragus, Tamias striutus, Scalops aquaUcua;
skull of Cariacm Virginianus, Ovis aries (2) ; horns of Bos bubalus,
and Ovis aries ; human skull.

Birds. —Stuart Wood. Skeleton and eggs of Pelecanus fuscus, from
Florida; skeleton of Colymbus torquatus ; Tachypetes aquila.

Mr. Kochusperger. 39 bird skulls, Corvus Americanus, Melanerpes erythro-
cephalus, Porzana Carolina, and 12 birds' nests.

G. Cochran. Didunculus strigirostris, Samoa.

H. England. Embryo pigeon showing five toes.

J. Fold. Nest of Vireo olivaceus, Phila., Pa.

Reptiles and Amphibians (recent and fossil). — Capt. Livermore. 20

species of amphibians and reptiles from the valley of the RiO Grande.
Harrison Allen. Anolis principalis, Fla.
E. Reiff. Eutmnia sirtalis, Phila., Pa.
E. A. Sturge. Lygosoma brachypoda, Petchaburi, Siam.
J. Border. Vertebrse of Mosasaurus and crocodile ; tooth of Hyposaurus,

and fragments of turtle bones, Mullica Hill, N. J.
A. F. Gentry. Eutcenia sirtalis, Ophibolus doUatus, Aromochelys odoraius,

Rana clamitans, Rana palustris, Phila., Pa.
Wortman and Gentry. Eutmnia sirtalis, Storeria Dekayi, and Spelerpes

ruber, Phila., Pa.
J. Hazard. Liopeltis vernalis, Peacedale, R. I.
E. W. White. Ceratophrys ornata, pampas of Buenos Ayres, S. A.
H. Skinner. Diemyctilus miniatus, Diemyctilus viridescens, Adirondack

and Catskill Mountains, N. Y.
Unknown. Phrynosoma platyrhina and Phriinosoma Douglassi, Humboldt

River, Nev. ; Phrynosoma Douglassi, locality unknown.

Fishes (recent and fossil). — E. F. Halliwell. Diodon hystrix, Barbadoes.

Halocypselus evolans.
J. Jean *. Xiphotrygon aeutidens. Eocene of Green River, Wyoming.

A. F. Gentry. Pomotis aureus, Rhinichthys atronasus , Boleosoma Olmstedi,
Phila , Pa.

Wortman and Gentry. Prionotis lineatus, Coast of N. J.
N. S. Schuyler. Lagocephalus Icevigatus, Barneizat Bay, N. J.
J. Ford. Siphostoma fusca, Somers' Point, N. J.
Prof. Porter. Fish, sp. ? Warren Co., N. J.

Mr. Kochusperger. Hippocampus Hudsonius, Pristis antiquorum, Sphyrena
zygana, Siphostoma fusca.

B. Sharp. Amphioxus lanceolatus, Bay of Naples, Italy.

352 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Articulates (Crustaceans, insects, arachnids, and myriapods, recent and

fossil). — Joseph Leidy. Eiipagurus pollicaris, Atlantic City, N. J.;

Eupagurus polUcaris in Natica and Fhtlgur, Atlantic City, N. J.; Libinia

canaliculata, Atlantic City, N. J.
J. Ford. Ocypoda arenaria, Atlantic City, N. J.
H. Skinner. Cocoons of Actios Luna, Callosamia angulifera, and Platysa-

niia Columbia ; chrysalids of Papilio Turnus, Papilio troilus, Papilio

asterias, and Saiurnia lo, Phila., Pa.
H. C. Brick. Belostoma grandis, Phila., Pa.

W. Y. Heberton. Limulus polyphemus (3), Cape May Point, N. J.
Mr. Beck. Trap of Tarantula.
H. Kingsbury. Case of insects, Blair Co., Pa.
Purchased. Casts of Asaphus megistos (Trilobite), showing impression of

legs.

MoLLUSCA (recent). — S. F. Aaron. Five species of land shells from Texas.

Rafael Arango. Fifteen species of land, fresh-water and marine shells
from Cuba, New Guinea and New Hebrides ; five marine species from
Cviba ; four species from Cuba (types of descriptions).

8. Archer. One hundred and twenty-five species of marine shells col-
lected by him at Singapore.

W. G. Binney. Six species terrestrial shells from N. Carolina, and five
species from Georgia ; seventeen species from the mountains of Western
N. Carolina.

Mrs. A. E. Bush. Helix ramentosa, Gould, and R. pulehella, Miill. (intro-
duced), from California.

Conchological Section. Sixty-six marine species collected at Singapore by
Dr. S. Archer ; three hundred and five trays of marine, land and fresh-
water shells from Florida, Texas, etc., collected by Henry Hemphill ;
one hundred and twenty-five species marine shells from Singapore ; ten
species of land and fresh water shells (from C. F. Ancey, Marseilles).

John Ford. Littorina irrorata, Say, South Atlantic City, N. J.; egg cases
of Fulgur carica and F. canaliculata, Brigantine Beach, N. J. ; Solen ensis,
L., Cape May, N. J.; Cytherea convexa, Say, Atlantic City, N. J.; Donax
fossor, Say, and Petricola pholadiformis, Lam.; Bulimus, from Syria,
Cingula minuta, Totten, Providence, R. I. ; Mactra soUdissima, Chemn.,
young, So. Atlantic City, N. J.; Oemma Manhattensis, Prime, Narra-
gansett Bay, R. I. ; egg cases of Nassa, and Petricola pholadiformis. Lam.,
Sea Isle City, N. J.; Solen ensis, L., with animals, and nidus of Natica
dupUcata, Say, Somers' Point, N. J. ; fine specimen of Turbinella scoly-
mus, Bahamas; Natica dupUcata, Say, Atlantic City, N. J.; Fulgur
canaliculata, Say, Anglesea, N. J.; Mactra soUdissima, Chemn., and
ZirphcBO crispata, L., from same locality; Area pexata and Natica
dupUcata ; egg cases of Fulgur canaliculata, attached to valve of Mactra;
all from Anglesea.

Isaiah Greegor. Seven marine species from the Bahamas ; Bulima inter-
media, Cantr., Florida ; Nerita peleronta, L. Bahamas. Three marine
species from Florida, and two species from the Bahamas.

Andrew Garrett. Eighty-four species of Terrestrial Mollusca, types
figured in his paper on the Shells of the Society Islands, published in
the Journal of the Academy, vol. ix.

W. D. Hartman. Achatinella Sowerbyana, and two other species of
Achatinella.

F. L. Harvey. Seven species of fresh-water shells, Arkansas.

Henry Hemphill. Six species of Pleurotomidae. from Florida.

Benton Holcomb. Seven species fresh-water shells, Connecticut.

J. A. Holmes. Marginella roseida, Redfield, from an Indian burial mound,
N. Carolina.

Jos. Leidy. Columbella lunata, Say, Atlantic City, N. J.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 35.3

E. Lehnert. One hundred and twelve trays, shells of Washington, D. C.

E. Marie. Forty five species of shells from Guadeloupe, W. I.
Isaac Massey. Banella jmlchra, .Japan.

"Wesley Newcomb. Bythinella Monroensis, Fraunfeld, Florida Springs,
Florida.

C. R. Orcutt. Thirty-four species, California ; three marine species. Lower
California.

G. H. Parker. Ommastrephes sagtttatus, N. Jersey ; ten marine species,
vicinity of Boston, Mass.

W. H. Hush. Wood bored by Xylotrya fimbriata, from Chesapeake Bay.

A. W, Robinson. Helix bucculenta, Gould, Norfolk, Va.

Mi"s. Benj. Sharp. My a arenaria, Linn., Nantucket, Mass.

Benj. Sharp. Mercenaria violacea, Schum., Nantucket; eleven marine
species from the Mediterranean Sea ; Limax agrestis, Linn., German-
town, Pa.

U. C. Smith. Unio complanatus, Solander, from branch of Maurice River,
near Vineland, N. J.

F. E. Spinner. Murex adustus, Linn., from Bahamas ; four species of
Unionidse, from New Hampshire.

L. H. Streng. CeritMum ocellatum, Brug., Panama; Planorhis Mcarinatus,

Say, Salem, Oregon ; two species fresh-water shells from Michigan,
Southwick and Jenks, Gingula minuta, Totten, Naragansett Bay, R. L
Joseph Willcox. Three marine species, and nidimental capsules of Faa-

ciolaria, Ostrea parasitica, on mangrove branch, all from W. Coast of

Florida.
H. C. Wood, Jr. Bulimus alternaius, Say, Valley of the Rio Grande,

Texas ; Ommastrephes sagittatus.

MoLLUscA f fossil). —E. W. Cooper. Belemnitella mucronata, Cretaceous,

N. J.
C. S. Bement. CeritJiium giganieum, Fleury, France.
J. Border. Cast of Area, Mullica Hill, N. J.

J. lieidy. Ostrea Virginica, Buccinum undatum, Atlantic City, N. J.
J. Ford. Pecteii irradians, Fulgur cariea, Fulgur canaliculata, Crepidula

fornicata.
In exchange with Dr. Otto Meyer. 170 species of Oligoeene shells, from

Germany.

Worms, Echinoderms, Ccelenterates and Sponges (recent and fossil).

— J. Ford. Caudina arenaria, Atlantic City, N.J. ; Mellita testudinata,

Holly Head City. N. J. ; Sponge, Somers' Point, N. J. ; Lepas anser-

ifera, Atlantic City, N. J. ; Tuhularia indivisa and Annelid, Sea Isle

City.
J. Leidy. Astrangia Darice, Atlantic City, N. J.
E. Potts. 13 species of American fresh-water sponges, Philadelphia, Pa. ;

Meyenia Leidyi, Philadelphia, Pa.
C. Wistar. Serpula dianthus, Barnegat, N. J.
J. Willcox. Six specimens of Marine Sponges, West Coast of Florida ;

70 trays, containing about 50 (?) species of Marine Sponges, W. Coast

of Florida.
L. Woolman. Scolithus linearis, Valley Forge, Pa.

G. H. Parker. Botryllus Oouldii, Molgula Manhattensis, Dactyloinetra
quinquecirra, Shark River, N. J.

Lieut. Ruschenberger. Sponge, Long Island.

A. H. Smith. Pentremites pynformis, Mammoth Cave, Ky.

Invertebrate Fossils, Unclassified.— G. H. Parker. 26 species of
Cretaceous and Carboniferous fossils, from Texas ; 10 species of Car-
boniferous fossils, Wise Co., Texas.

354 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

G. W. Holstein. 8 species of Cretaceous and Carboniferous fossils, from

Texas.
J. Willcox. 15 trays of Oligocene rocks and fossils, West Coast of Fla»
T. H. Aldrich. 21 species of Tertiary fossils, from Mississippi.
W. Spillmau. 4 species of Eocene fossils and 2 species of Cretaceous

fossils, from Mississippi.

Botany (recent).— Wm. M. Canby, in charge of Division of Economic
Botany of Northern Transcontinental Survey. 1013 species of plants,
collected in 1883, in Dakota, Montana and Washington Territories by
himself, and by F. L. Sciibner, T. S. Brandegee and Frank Tveeedy ; 6
species collt-cted in Maryland and Florida, by J. Donnell Smith.

A. L. Siler, Kane Co., Utah, through Thomas Meehan. 41 species plants,
from Southern Utah.

Wm. H. Jeffries, West Chester, Pa. Specimens of Oentiana campestriSf
from vicinity of Geneva, Switzerland.

John H. Redfield. 130 species plants, from Atlantic and Pacific States,
mostly new to Academy's Herbarium ; specimens of Corema Conradii
Torr., from the chief known localities of the United States.

John H. Redfield and Isaac C. Marrindale. 9 species plaints collected by
C. R. Orentt, on border of Lower California, in 1888, mostly new to the
Herbarium.

Isaac C. Martindale. Ellis' 11th, 12th and 13th Centuries of North
American Fungi ; "Tuckahoe," or "Indian Bread," collected at Kirk-
wood, N. J., by Joel P. Kirkbride.

Thos. Meehan. Sesbania punicea B. and H., cultivated in Southern States;
Cuscuta racemosa Mart., var. Chiliana Engelm., growing on Lucerne, in
California, with European specimens of same, both received from Dr.
Engelmann ; 207 species of plants collected by him in British Columbia

and Alaska, in 1883 ; Aphelandra , from Western Guatemabi ; 16

species plants, collect* d in Arizona, by J. G. Lemmon ; Male Strobilus

of Macrozamia , an Australian Cycad ; Specimens of Halesia tetra-

ptera L., from Mr. Meehan's garden, with specimens of an aberrant
seedling from same plant, to illustrate remarks of Mr. Meehan in Proc.
Acad. Nat. Sci., for 1884, p. 32.

John W. Eckfeldt. 100 species Lichens, mostly from Pennsylvani,
mounted and named by himself; 132 species Licheus, from Hawaiian
Islands, England, Austria, Sweden, etc, mostly new to Academy's
collection.

Asa Gray. 39 species Arctic plants, collected by Dr. John Murdock, at
Signal Service Station, Ooglamie, Pt. Banow, Arctic Sea, lat. 71° ; 19
species plants, collected at Copper I., and Behring's Island, Coast of
Kamtschatka, by L. Stejneger, in 1882 and 1883; 101 species plants,
mostly from China, collected by Ford, David, etc.; Aster nom-Belgii L.,
and variety, ^s^er panicuZa^MS Lam., and Astei' vimineus Lam., all from
Massachusetts ; 1057 species plants, mostly European, from Herbarium
of Geo. Curling Joad.

G. W. Holstein, through Thos. Meehan. 59 species plants, collected in
Texas, Arizona and Southern California, in 1883.

L. J. Wahlstedt, of Christianstad, Sweden, through Robert Nordbloem, of
Philaria. A collection of Scandinavian Characeic, consisting of 31 species
and numerous varieties and forms.

John Donnell Smith, of Baltimore. Md. Hieracium Marianum, Willd.,
from Garrett Co., Md., formerly confounded with H. Gronoviilj., now
restored by Gray ; 26 species plants, collected by him in southern United
States, in 1884.

Thos. C. Porter. 19 s)pecies plants from New Jersey and Pennsylvania.

H. J. Hunt, U. S. N., of the Arctic Relief Search Party for the survivors
of the Jeannette, through Chas. E. Smith, of Philadelphia. 10 species
Arctic plants, collected in 1882, near the mouth of Lena River, Siberia.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 355

Aubrey H. Smith. Fruit of Torreya Oalifornica, California ; Nut o^Areca
Catechu,, from S. China.

G. Howard Parker. Usnea barbata and Batrachospermum moniUforme,
both from Hammonton, N. J.

W. A. Kellerman of Manhattan, Kansas. 23 species plants, collected by
him in western Kansas.

Mrs. Fanny E. Briggs, Le Centre, W. T., through Thos. Meehan. 6 species
plants, from Washington Terr.

Isaac Bulk. Trichinium exaltatum Buth., Cult., native of Australia ; Gor-
donia picbescens, L'Her., and Halesia diptera, Willd., both from Bar-
tram's Garden.

Fossil Botany.— S. E. Paschal. Plant impressions, Triassic shale,

Buckingham Valley, Bucks Co., Pa.
A. H. Smith. Wood, Gold Run Mine, Cal.

Minerals. —Joseph Leidy. White fluorite, locality unknown.

C. S. Bement. Topaz, beryl, clevelandite, apatite, zircon, montmoril-
lonite, columbite, fluorite and orthoclase, Stoneham, Me. ; curved
muscovite, Branchville, Conn.

W. W. Jefferis. Melanite garnets, Frascati, Italy; blende, Santander,
Spain ; pyrite, Laucaster Co., Pa. ; sphalerite, Alston Moor, Cumber-
land, Eng. ; pyrite in calcite, Chester Co., Pa.

J. Binder. 9 specimens of granite, Maine.

W. B. Eltonhead. Corundum, Lehigh Co., Pa. ; graphite and, anthracite
in cast iron ; arsenio-pyrite, blende and quartz, Dakota ; muscovite,
Custer City, Dakota.

J. Hartman. Siderite and hematite, millerite in hematite, Antwerp, N. Y.

G. W. Fiss. Columbite, Amelia Court House, Va.

J. Border. Mica schists, from marl-pit, Mullica Hill, N. J.

J. G. Hiestand. Astrophyllite, celestite, barite and calcite, and zircon,
Colorado.

J. Lea. Cancrinite, Chester Co., Pa.

H. C. Lewis. Calcite with byssolite, Chester Co., Pa.

W. Hoyt. Chalcopyrite, Chester Co., Pa.; volcanic ash, Krakatoa.

W. H. Bates. Magnetite, Marion Co., N. C.

A. R. McHenry. Pumice, Java Sea, near Krakatoa.

H. J. Smith. Cassiterite, Rockbridge Co., Va.

H. H. Fames. Azurite and malachite, Santa Rita Mts., Arizona ; silver
in chrysocola, Quijotoa Mts., Arizona; muscovite and uranite, Ash
Co., N. C.

J. Struthers. A collection of agates, silicified and opalized woods, land-
scape and other marbles, fluoites, calcites, quartz crystals and other
minerals, from various localitrs.

S. Wood. Fossiliferous boulder, Escuminiac River, Bonaventure Co.,
Canada.

Mr. Linn. Limonite (ochre), Montgomery, Ala.

P. F. Brown. Vivianite Mullica Hill, N. J. ; byssolite in calcite, French
Creek, Chester Co., Pa.

D. 8. Martin. Coal, Discoe Island, Greenland ; turba, Bahia, Brazil.
Mineralogical Section A. N. S. Barite, Cumberland, England ; apophyl-

lite and calcite, Chester Co., Pa.; crocidolite. South Africa ; vanadinite,
Arizona ; strengite and cacoxenite, Giessen, Germany ; pseudomorphs
after sarcolite, Canada ; priceite, Oregon ; pseudocotonnite, Vesuvius,
Italy ; vesbite, Vesuvius, Italy ; dietrichite, Hungary ; struvite, Schem-
nitz; clausthalite, Sweden; menacannite, var. washingtonite, Litchfield,
Conn.; euchlorine, Vesuvius, Italy; muscovite, barcenite, Mexico;
bornite, Colorado ; schraufite, Bukowina ; cubanite, Cal. ; kjerulflte and
tschermakit, Norway.

356 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY.

December^ 1883^ to December, 188Jf.

Ackermann, Carl. Beitrage zur physischen Geogi*aphie der Ostsee,

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Albrecht, Paul. Sur Ics elements morphologiqnes du Manubrium du
Sternun) chez les Mammiferes.
Sur les Homodynamies qui existent entre la main et le pied des

Mammiferes.
Erwiderung auf Herrn Prof. Dr. Hermann v. Meyer's Aufsatz : —
" Der Zwischenkieferknochen und seine Beziehungen zur Hasens-
charte und zur schragen Gesichtsspalte."
Ueber die Zahl der Zahne bei den Hasenschartenkieferspalten.
Ueber die morphologische Bedeutung der Kiefer-Lippen- tmd Gesichti

spalten.
Sur la fcssette vermienne du crane des Mammiferes. Bnixelles, 1884.
Sur les copulae intercostoidales.
Sur la fente maxillaire double sous-muqueuse.
Epiphyses osseuses sur les apophyses epinenses des vertebres d'un

reptile.
Note sur le pelvisternum des Edentes.

Sur les spondylocentres epipituitaires du crane, la non-existence de la
poche de Rathke et la presence de la chorde dorsale et de spondylo-
centres dans le cartilage de la cloison du nez des vertetires. 1884.
Sur la valeur morphologique de la trompe d'Eustache et les derives de
I'arc palatin, de I'arc mandibulaire et de I'arc bryoiden des vertebres.
1884. " The Author.

Alcott, Wm. P. Introduced plants found in the vicinity of a wool -scouring
establishment. Essex Institute.

Alert. Report on the Zoological collections made in the IndoPacific
Ocean during the voyage of H. M. S. "Alert." The British Museum.
Allen, Harrison. On a new method of recording the motions of the soft
palate. 1884. The Author.

Allen, J. A. Notes on the Mammals of portions of Kansas, Colorado,
Wyoming and Utah, 1874.
List of Birds collected by Chas. Linden, near Santarem, Brazil, 1876.
A list of Birds of Massachusetts, with annotations, 1878.

Essex Institute.
Anders, J. M. The exhalation of Ozone by flowering plants. The Author.
Anderson, John. Catalogue and hand-book of the archaeological collec-
tions in the Indian Museum. Part II. Gupta and Inscription Gal-
leries, 1883. Trustees of the Indian Museum.
Andr^, Ernest. Species des Hymenopteres composent le groupe des
Formicides. 1881-83. The Author.
Ashburner, Ch. Brief descriptions of the anthracite coal fields of Penn-
sylvania. The Author.
Astor Library. 33d annual report of the trustees, 1881. The Authors.
Bailey, G. E. Wyoming's wealth. Newspaper slip. The Author.
Baillon, H. Traite de Botanique medicale phanerogamique. ler Fasc.
1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Dictionnaire de Botanique, 16me Fasc. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Baker, J . Gilbert. On the present state of oui- knowledge of the geography
of British plants. The Author.
Barral, J. A. Enquete sur le credit agricole faite sur la demaude de M. le
Ministre de I'Agriculture. 1884. The Author.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 351

Bary, A. de. Vergleichende Morphologie et Biologie der Pilze, Mycetozoen
und Bacterien. 1884. I. V. Williamson Fiiud.

Bastian, Adolph. AUgemeine Grundziige der Ethnologie.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Beck, L. Die Geschichte des Eisens in technischer und kulturgeschicht-
licher Beziehung. 1 Abth. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Becker, George F. Monographs of the United States Geological Sur>ey,
Vol. III. Geology of the Comstock Lode and the Washoe District^
with Atlas. Angelo Heilprin.

Beecher, Chas. CeratiocaridsB from the Chemung and Waverly groups at
Warren, Pa. The Author.

Bell, Clark. Madness and crime. The Author.

Benoit, L. Nuovo catalogo delle conchiglie terrestre e fluviatili della
Sicilia. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Berg, Carlos. Notas sinonimicas acerca de algunos Coleopteros y Lepi-
dopteros.
Addenda et emendanda ad Hemiptera Argentina. The Author.

Berge, Ernst. Segmenta lignoium Indiae occidentalis 10 cm. long, quae si
superficies polita erit, lignorum structuram dilucide ostendent.
Ceuturia I and HI. The Author.

Binney, W. G. Notes on the jaw and lingual dentition of pulmonate
mollusks, 1884. The Author.

Blanchard, Raphael. Les coccides utiles, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bliss, Richard. Library of Harvard University. Bibliographical Contri-
butions, No. 10. Classified Index to the Maps iu Petermann's
geographische Mittheilungen, 1855-1881. Prof. Justin Winsor.

Boguslawski, Georg von. Handbuch der Ozeanographie. Bd. I, 1884.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Boehm, Georg. Register zum zweiten Band der pal aeon tologischen Mit-
theilungen aus dem Museum des K. Bayer. Staates, 1884.

Wilson Fund.
Bogdanow, Modesto. Conspectus Avium Imperii Rossici. Fasc. 1.

The Author.
Bohnenseig, G. C. W. Repertorium annuum Literaturse Botanicae Perio-
dicse. VII, 1 and 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Boissier, E. Flora Orientalis. V, 3. I. V. Williamscm Fund.

Bolau, H. Fiihrer durch die Walfisch-Ausstellung im Zoologischen
Garten zu Hamburg.
Die Spatangiden des Hamburger Museums. The Author.

Bombicci, Luigio. Commemorazione di Quintino Sella, promossa dal
Circolo Universitario V. E. II. The Author.

Borre, Preudhomme de. Note sur les Glomerides de la Belgique. 1884.
Tentamen Catalogi Glomeridarum hucusque descriptarum.
Le feuille qui se transforme en insecte.
Liste des Mantides du Musee Royal d'historre naturelle de Belgique,

1883.

Notice necrologique sur Jules Putzeys. The Author.

Bourguignat, J. R. Species novissimae Molluscorum, in Europaeo syste-

mati detectse, notis diagnobticis succinctis breviter descriptae. 1876.

MoUusques fluviatiles du Nyanza Oukerewe (Victoria Nyauza), suivi

d'une note sur les genres Cameronia et Burtonia du Tanganika. 1883.

MoUusques terrestres et fluviatiles i-ecueillis en Afrique dans le pays

^omalis Medjourtin. 1881.
Histoire malacologique de la Colline de Sansan, 1881.
Meteriaux pour servir a 1' histoire des MoUusques Acephales du Systems

Europeen. I. 1881.
Monographies des genres Pechaudia et Hagenmulleria d^couverts en
Algerie. 1881.

358 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

AperQU sur les Unionidse de la Peninsule Italique. 1883.

Paulia, ou description d'une nouveau groupe generique de la Ville

d' Avignon. 1882.
Bythiospeurn, ou description d'un nouveau genre des MoUusques

aveugles. 1883.
Histoire Malacologique de I'Abypsinie. 1883.

Description de di verses especes terrestres et fluviatiles et de different
genre de Mollusques de I'Eoypte, de 1' Abyssinia, de Zanzibar, du
Senegal et du centre de I'Afrique. 1879.
AperQu sur les especes Fran^aises du genre Succinea. 1877.
Miscellanees Italo-Malacologiques.
Monographic du nouveau geiue Filholia. 1881.
Monographic du genre Emmericia. 1880.
Inscrijition Romaines de Venice (Alpes-Maritimes). 1869.
Ouvra^jes de megalithologie, d'epigraphie, d'osteologie et de paleon-
, tologie.
Etude sur les fossiles tertiares et quaternaires de la Vallee de la

Cettina en Dalmatic. 1880.
Recherches sur les ossements de Canidfe constates en France a I'etat

fossiles pendant la periode quaternaire.

Histoire des Felidse fos.siles constates en France dans les depots de la

periode quaternaire. 4to. 1879. The Author.

Brefeld. Oscar. Untersuchungen aus dem Gesammtgebiete der Mykologie.

Fortsetzung der Schimmel und Hefenpilze. VI, H., Myxomyceten,

1 ; Entoraophthoreen, 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Brinton, Daniel G. Abor ginal American Authors. 1883.

Karl Hermann Berendt. The Author.

British Museum. Catalogue of the birds in the. Vol. IX. 1884.

The Trustees.
Broeck, E. van der. Note sur un nouveau mode de classification et de
notation graphique des depots geologiques base sur I'etudt^ des
phenomenes de la sedimentation marine. The Author.

Bronn's Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier-Reichs. ler Bd., Protozoa
(Butschli), 20-25 Lief. • 5er Bd., 11. Abih., 11 and 12 Lief. 6er
Bd., Ill Abth., 41 and 42 Lief; IV Abth , and V Abth., 27 Lief.

Wilson Fund.

Brooks, W. K. Handbook of Invertebrate Zoology, for laboratories and

seaside work. Boston, 1882. Wm. H. Dougherty.

The Law of Heredity. 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Briihl, C. B. Zootomie aller Thierklassen. Lief. 28, 29 and 80.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Bucquoy, E., Ph. Dautzenberg and G. Dollfus. Les moUusques marins

du Roussillon. Fasc 5 and 6. . I. V. Williamson Fund.

Buckingham, B. H., Geo. C. Foulk and Walter McLean. Observations

upon the Korean Coast, Japanese-Koiean ports and Siberia. 1883.

Navy Dei>artment.
Bureau of Education. Circulai-s of Information, No. 5, 1873 ; Nos. 3 and
5, 1883 ; Nos. 1-5, 1884. Preliminary circular respecting the exhi-
bition of education at the World's Industrial and Cotton Centennial.
1884.
Report of American School at Athens.
The Bufalini Prize. 1883.
Education in Italy and Greece. 1883.

The Department of the Interior,

Bureau of Statistics. Quarterly report of the Chief. Nos. 2, 3 and

Sept. 30, 1883-84 ; 1884, No. 4. Treasury Department.

Buenos Ayres, Annuaire Statistique de la Province de. He Ann6e, 1882.

Bureau de Statistique Generale, Bnenos Ayres.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 359

Call, 11. E,, and C. E. Beecher. Notes on a Nevada shell (Pyrgula neva-

densis). The Authors.

Cantoni, Gaetano. Saggio di fisiologia vegetale, 1883. The Author.

Carpmael, Ch. Report of the meteorologi-eal service of the Dominion of

Canada, 1883. The Author.

Casey, Thomas L. Contributions to the descriptive and systematic cole-

opterology of North America. The Author.

Caswell. E. T. Annual address before the American Academy of Medicine.

1881. Dr. R. J. Dunglison.

Censo general de la Provincia de Buenos Aires demografico, agricola,

industrial, comercial, etc. Verificado el 9 de Octubre de 1881.

The Census Commisson.
Certes, A. De I'act-ion des haute pi-essions sur la vitalite des micro-
organisms d'eau douce et d'eau de mer, 1884.
Sur la cu ture, al'abri des germes atmospheriques des eaux et des
segments rapportes par les expeditions du Travailleur et du Talis-
man, 1882-83. The Author.
Challenger, Voyage of. Report of the scientific results. Zoology, Vols.
Ill — VIII ; Narrative, II ; Physics and Chemistry, I.

Her Biitannic Majesty's Government.

Ohamberlin, S C. The bearing of some recent determinations on the

correlation of the eastern and western terminal moraines.

Hillocks of angular gravel and disturbed stratification. The Author.

Chapman, Henry C History of the discovery of the circulation of the

blood, 1884. The Author.

Chief of Engineers, U. S. A. Annual report, 1883. Pts. 1, 2 and 3.

Engineer Department, U. S. A,

Chief of Oi'dnance. Report of. 1883, War Department.

Christian Philosophical Institute. Geometry of the circular plane and

the harmony of the solar courses.

Appendix and corrigenda to the earlier editions of John Hampden's

map of the world as a circular plane.
Common sense on scientific subjects.
What is a Jew ?

A compendium of practical instruction in the laws of nature. London,

1884. The Institute.

City Hospital, Boston. Twentieth annual report of the Ti-ustees, 1883-84.

The Trustees.

Colonial Museum and Geological Survey of New Zealand. 18tti annual

report, together with the 14th annual report on the Colonial Botanic

Garden, 1882-83.

Reports of geological explorations during 1882. The Pui-vey.

Colorado Scientific Society. Artesian wells of Denver, 1884. The Society.

Comite Geologique, Russe. Bulletin 1882, 1883, Nos. 1-9 ; 1884, 1-5 ;

Memoires I, 1, 2. The Survey.

Commissioner of Education. Reports, 1881-83.

Department of the Interior.

Commissioners of Inland Fisheries. 18th annual report, December 31,

1883. The Commissioners.

Cope, Edw. D. On the contents of a bone cave in the Island of Anguilla

(West Indies).

The evidence for evolution in the history of the extinct mammalia.

1883.
Paleontological Bulletins. Nos. 37-39.
The Condylarthra.
On Catagenesis, 1883.
The Creodonta.

The Tertiary Marsupialia, 1884.
The Batrachia of the Permian period of North America. The Author.

360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Corda, A. C. J. Icones fungorum hucusque cognitorum. Vols. 1-6.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Correspondance Botanique. Xe ed. The Author.

Corwin, Cruise of the Kevenue Steamer, in Alaska and the N. W. Arctic

Ocean in 1871. Treasury Department.

Coues, E. Key to the North American Birds. 2d ed., 1884.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Council of the City of Manchester, 31st annual repoit on the working of

the Public Free Libraries, 1882-83. The Council.

Crandale, A. R. Prtlimiuary report on the geology of Morgan, Johnson,

Magoffin and Floyd Counties. Geological Survey of Kentucky

Crudeli, Tomaso. Che cosa si puo fare in tempo di colera? 1884

The Author.
Dall, W. H. A new classification of the Mollusca.

On a collection of shells sent from Florida. The Author.

Dallas, James. On the primary divisions and geographical distribution of

mankind. The Author.

Dames, W. und E. Kayser, Palaeontologische Abhandlungen. ler Bd.

H. 3, 4 ; II, 1-3. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Dana, James D. New text book of geology. 4th edition.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

De Candolle, Alph, Monographise Phanerogamarum Prodromi. Vol. 5,

Pars Prima. Cyrtandrese. Auctore C. B. Clarke. Wilson Fund.

Delogne, C. H. Flore Cryptogamiquede la Belgique. IrePartie, Muscines.

ler Fasc. I. V. Williamson Fund.

De Man, J. G. Die, frei in der reinen Erde und im siissenwasser lebenden

Nematoden der Niederlandischen Fauna, 1884.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Department of Agriculture, Miscellaneous. Special repnrt, Nos. 3 and 5.

Division of Statistics, N. S. Report Nos. 3-7. The Department.

Department of the Interior. Census Office. Report on the productions of

agriculture as returned at the 10th census (June 1, 1880).

Statistics of the population of the United States at the 10th census,

June 1, 1880.
Report of the manufactures of the United States. 2 Vols., 1883.
General Geological map of the area explored and mapped by Dr.
F. V. Hayden and the surveys under his charge. 18(i9-1880,

The Department.
Department of Mines, Nova Scotia. Report for the year 1883.

The Department.
Dewalque, G. Notice explicative sur la Carte geologique de la Belgique
et des Provinces voisines. 1879. Geological Survey of Belgium.

Dobson, G. E. A monograph of the insectivora systematical and anatom-
ical. Pts. 1 and 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Dollo, M. L. Quatrieme note sur les Dinosauriens de Bernissart. The Author.
Drasche, Richard von. Beitrage zur Entwickelung der Polychseten. les H.
1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Drechsler, Adolph. Characteristic der philosophischen Systeme seit Kant.
1863.
Die Philosophic im Cyclus der Naturwissenschaften. 1863.
Die Stellung des Fichte'schen Systems im Entwickelungsgange der

Philosophie. 2e Aufl., 1862.
Die Personlichkeit Gottes und des Menschen begriflfiich bestimmt und

als nothwendige Annahme dargethan. 1856.
Astrologische Voi'trage. 1855.

Scholien zu Christoph Rudolphs Coss. 1851. The Author.

Dunker, W., and K. Zittel. XXX. Bd., I. and II. Th., le Lief.
PalsBontographica. B. XXXI., 3 folge, Vll. B., 1 and 2 Lief.

Wilson Fund.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361

Elliot, D. G. A monoorraph of the Felidae. Part XI. Wilson Fund.

Ellis, John. Deterioration of the Puritan stock and its causes.

The Author.

Encyclopaedia Britannica, Vols. 16 and 17. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Encyklopsedie der Naturwissenschaften. le Abth., 35e-38e Lief., 2e Abth.,

17e und 25e Lief. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Engineer Department, U. S. A. Report on the International Exhibition

of Electricity held at Paris, 1881.

Professional notes by Capt. E. Maguire.

Studies on coast defense applied to the Gulf of Spezia, by C. Guarasci.

Engineer Department U. S. A.
Engler, Edmund A. Time-keeping in Paris. St. Louis, 1882.

Time-keeping iu London. St. Louis, 1882. The Author.

Expedicion al Rio Negro (Patagonia). Informe official de la Comision

cientifica agregarlo al estado mayor general de la. Ent. 1, 2 and 3.

The Academy of Sciences of the Argentine Republic.

Fabre, J. H. Souvenirs entomologiques. Etudes sur 1' instinct et les

moeurs des insectes, 1879.

Nouveaux souvenirs entomologiques, 1882. Harold Wingate.

Farlow, W. G. Notes on the cryptogamic flora of the White Mountains.

Notes on some species in the third and eleventh centuries of Ellis's

North American Fungi.
Notes on some Ustilaginese of the United State*.

Enumeration of the Peionosporse of the United States. The Author.

Fernandez, Leon. Coleccion de documentos para la historia de Costa

Rica. T. III. The Author.

Fewkes, F. W. Contributions to the Myology of Tachyglossa hystrix.

Echidna hystrix. Essex Institute.

Financial Reform Almanack for 1884. Financial Reform Association.

Fischer, Alfred. Untersuchungen iiber das Siebrohren-System der Cucur-

bitaceen. 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Frscher, Paul. Manuel de Conchyliologie. Fasc. 6 and 7. The Author.

Flemming, Walther. Zellsubstanz, Kern und Zelltheilung, 1882.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Florida University. Calendar, 1884-5. The Trustees.

Flower, Wra. Henry, and John G. Garson. Catalogue of the specimens

illustiating the osteology and dentition of vertebrated animals,

recent and extinct, contained in the Museum of the Royal College

of Surgeons of England. Part II, Class Mammalia, other than man.

The Council of the College.
Frazer, Persifor. The Peach-bottom Slates of the Lower Susquehanna.
1884.
Reply to a paper entitled "Notes on the Geology of Chester Valley

and vicinity." 1884.

Geological and mineral studies in Nuevo Leon and Coahuila, Mexico.

1884. The Author.

Fritsch, Ant. Fauna der Gaskohle und der Kalksteine der Permformation

Bohmens I, 4. I. V. Williamson Fuud.

Garman, Samuel. The reptiles and batrachians of North America.

The Author.
Gaudry, Albert. Les Enchainements du monde animal dans les temps
geologiqae. Fossiles primaires. 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Gautier, Lucien Marie. Les Champignons, Paris, 1884.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Geddes, Patk. Re-statement of the cell theory. The Author.

Gegenbauer, C. Lehrbuch der Anatomic des Menschen, 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fand.
Genth, F. A. On Herderite, 1884. The Author.

24

362 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada. Report of Progress
for 1880-81-82, with maps.
Palaeozoic Fossils, III, 1. The Survey.

Geological Survey of India. Records, XV, 4 ; XVI, 1-4 ; XVJI, 1-3.
Memoirs, 8vo, XIX, 2-4 ; XX, 1, 2.

Memoirs, 4to, Palseontologia Indica, ser. X, vol. 2, Pts. 4 and 6 ; vol.

3, Pts. 1-4 ; Ser. XII, Vol. 4, Pt. 1 ; Ser. XIII, I, 4 ; Fasc. 1 and 2;

Ser. XIV, Vol. 1, Pt. 4. The Survey.

Geological Survey of New Jersey. Annual report, 1883. The Survey.

Geological Survey of Peunsylvania. Reports AA, AC, text and atlas, D^,

Vol. II, G'. The Commission,

Gerlach, Leo. Beitrage zur Morphologie und Morphogenie. I, 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Gervais, Henri, et Florentine Ameghino. Les Mammiferes fossiles de

I'Ameiique du Sud. 1880. I. V. Williamstm Fund.

Gilpin, Edwin, Jr. The folding of the carboniferous strata in the maritime

provinces of Canada. The Author.

Godwin-Austin, H. H. Land and freshwater mollusca of India Pts. 1-4.

Text and atlas, 5, atlas. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Goode, G. Brown and Tarleton H. Bean. A list of the fishes of Essex

County, including those of Massachusetts Bay. Essex Institute.

Gould, John. The birds of Asia. Pts. 34 and 35.

Supplement to the Trochilidse or Humming-birds, Pt. 3.

The Birds of New Guinea. Pts. 13 and 14. Wilson Fund.

Graber, Vitus. Grundlinien zur Erfoi schung des Helligkeits- und Farben-

sinnes der Thiere. 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Graff, Ludwigv. Monographic der Turbellarien, I. Rhabdocoelida. Text

and Atlas, 1882. 1. V. Williamson Fund.

Gray, Arthur F. A complete list of the scientific papers of Thomas Bland,

1884. The Author.

Gray, Asa. Synoptical flora of North America. Vol. I, Pt. 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

A i-evision of the North American species of the genus Oxytropis.

Memorials of George Engleman and of Oswald Heer. The Author.

Green, Samuel Abbott. Notes on a copy of Dr. Wm. Douglass's Almanack

for 1743, touching on the subject of medicine in Massachusetts before

his time. The Author.

Green, Traill, Annual address before the American Academy of Medicine.

1882. Dr. R. J.Dunglison.

Greene, C. A. Fertilizers in general, and the greensand marl of King

William County, Virginia, in particular.

An essay on insects injurious to vegetation, and how to get rid of

them. ' The Author.

Grifiiths, G. S. On the evidences of a glacial epoch in Victoria, during

post miocene times. The Author.

Griiber, Wenzel. Beobachtungen aus der menschlichen und vergleichen-

den Anatomie. H. 4. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Guarasci, Csesar. Studies on coast defense, applied to the Gulf I'f Spezia.

Engineer Department, U. S. A.
Giimbel, K. W. von. Grundziige der Geologic. I. Lief.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Guia da ExposiQao anthropologica Braziliera realizada pelo IMuseu
Nacional de Rio de Janeiro. 1882. The Museum.

Guthrie, Malcolm. On Mr. Spencer's Data of Ethics. 1884. The Author.
Haas, H. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der liasrchen Brachiopodenfauna.
Hall, James. Geological Survey of the State of New York. Palaeon-
tology, V, 1. Lamellibranchiata, I. Text. 1884. The Author.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363

Hampden, John. Biblical Science Defense Association. The earth in its

creation, its chronology, its physical features and the one alone

portion of the universe adapted to man's occupation and service.

1884. . The Author.

Hebert, M. Notes sur la geologic du Department de I'Ariege. 1884.

The Author.
Hector, James. Handbook of New Zealand. Wellington, 1883.

The Author.

Heilprin, Angelo. Contributions to the Tertiary Geology and Paleontology

of the United Statts. The Author.

Heraud, A. Nouveau dictionnaire des Plantes meridionales. 2me ed.

1884. 1. V. Williamson Fund.

Hertwig, O. Die Chaetognathen. 1880.

Die 8ymbiose oder das Genossenscbaftsleben im Thierreich. 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hertwig, O. and R. Die Coelomtheorie. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Hertwig, R. Ueber den Bau der Ctenophoren. 1880.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Hicks, Henry. On the Cambrian Conglomerates resting upon and in the

vicinity of some Pre-Cambrian rocks (the so-calkd Intrusive

Masses in Anglesey and Caernarvonshire.

The succession in the Archfean Rocks of America, compared with that

in the Pre-Cambr an Rocks of Europe.

On the Pre-Cambrian Rocks of Pembrokeshire, with especial reference

to the St. David's District. The Author.

Hidalgo, J. G. Catalogo iconografico y descriptive de los moluscos

terrestres de Espana, Portugal y las Baleares. 1884. The Author.

Hobbs, Isaac H. The Mehanism of the Universe. 1883. The Author.

Homes, Rudolf. Elemente der Palaeoutologie (Palaeozoologie). Leipzig,

1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Hooker, Sir J. D. The Flora of British India. Part 11.

East Indian Government.
Hoyle, W. E. On a new species of Octopus (O. maculosus). The Author.
Hunt, T. Sterry The Geological History of the Serpentines, including
studies of pre-Cambrian rocks. 1883.
The Taconic question in Geology. Part I. 1883. The Author.

Hutton, F. W. Notes on some New Zealand Laud Shells, with descriptions
of new species.
Revihion of the recent Rhipidoglossate and Docoglossate moUusca of
New Zealand. The Author.

Indiana. Second Annual Report of the Department of Statistics and
Geology. 1880. The Author.

Department of Geology and Natural History. 11th and 13t,h Annual
Reports. Part I, Geology and Natural Histoiy; Part II, Paleon-
tology. The Survey.
James, Jos. F. Contributions to the Floia of Cincinnati. The Author.
James, U. P Descriptions of four new species of Fossils from the Cincin-
nati group. 1884.
On Conodonts and fossil Annelid jaws. 1884. The Author.
Jannettaz, Ed. Memoires sur la clivages des roches Schistosite, Longrain,
et sur leur reproduction 1884. The Author.
Jeflfieys, J. Gwyn. On the Mollusca prof^ured during the Lightning and
Porcupine Expedition. 1868-70. Paii, VIII. The Author.
Jewish Foster Home and Orphan Asylum of Philadelphia. 29th Annual
Report. The Trustees.
Jijima, I. and C. Sasaki. Okadaira Shell-Mounds at Hitachi. Tokio,
1883. The Author.
Kalender und Statistisches Jahrbuch fiir das Konigreich Sachsen. 1885.

The Minister of the Interior, Saxony.
Keyserling, Eugen, Graf. Neue Spinnen aus Amerika. V. The Author.

364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Kjerulf, Th. Die Dislocationen im Christianiathal. 1884. The Author.

Konigl. Frederiks Universitets Bibliothek, Fortegnelse over den Tilvaett.

18S0-81. The University.

Koren, Johan og D. C Danielssen. Bergens-Museum. Nye Alcyonider,

Gorgouider og Pennatulider tilhoreude Norges Fauna, 1883.

The Museum.

Kobelt, W. Iconographie der schalentragenden europaischen Meerescbn-

chylien. Heft 1 and 2, 1883. ' I. V. Williamson Fund.

Kneeland, Samuel. The subsidence theory of earthquakes. The Author.

Kriechbaumer, Dr. J. Fried. Klugsgesamelte Aufsatze iiber Blattwespen.

1884. The Author.,

Krukenberg. C. F. W, Grundziige einer vergleichenden Physiologic der
Farbstoflfe und der Farben, 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Kunz, Geo. F. Topaz and associated minerals from Stoneham, Maine.
On the Tourmaline and associated minerals of Auburn, Maine.

The Author.
Laache, S. Die Aniimie. Christiania, 1883.

Royal Frederiks University of Christiana.

Latzuia, Francis. The Argentine Republic as a field for European

emigration. 1888. Argentine Scientific Society.

Lawes, John Bennet. Memoranda of the origin, plan and results of the

field and other experiments conducted on the farm and in the

laboratory of, 1884. The Author.

Lawrence, Geo. N, Descriptions of new species of birds of the genera

Chrysotis, Formicivora and Spermophila.

Characters of a new species of pigeon of the genus Engraptila from

the island of Grenada, West Indies. The Author.

Lehmann, Johannes. Untersuchungen iiber die Entstehung der Alt-

crystiiUinischen Scheifergesteine mit besonderer Bezugnahme auf

das siichsische Granulitgebirge, Erzgebirge, Fichtelgebirge und

Bairisch-Bohmische Grenzgebirge I. V. Williamson Fund.

Leitgeb, Hubert. Ueber Bau und Entwicklung der Sporeuhaute und

Verbal ten bei der Keimung. 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Lenhossek, Joseph Edlen von. Die Ausgrabungen zu Szeged-Uthalom in

Ungarn. 1884. The Author.

Lesquereux, Leo and Thos. P. James. Manual of the Mosses of North

America. 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund,

Levi ck, James J. A fairy tale written for and first read to .... at

a dinner given to Prof. Jos. Leidy M. D. The Author.

Lewis, H. C. The Geology, Lithology, and Mineralogy of Philadelphia

and vicinity. Newspaper slips. 1883.

On supposed glaciation in Pennsylvania south of the terminal moraine.

Summary of progress in mineralogy in 1883. The Author.

Leydig, Franz. Untersuchungen zur Anatomic und Histologic der Thiere.

1883.

Die augenahnlichen Organe der Fische, 1881. L V. Williamson Fund.

Library of the Suigeon General's Ofl&ce, United States Army, Index

Catalogue, Vol. V. War Department.

Light-House Board, annual report, June 30, 1883, Tieasury Department.

Linnaeus, framed portrait of. Clias. E. Smith.

Linney, W. M. Notes on the rocks of Central Kentucky, with lists of

fossils.

Report on the botany of Madison, Lincoln, Garrard, Washington and

Marion Counties, Ky.
Report on the geology of Garrard County, Ky.
Report on the geology of Mercer County, Ky.
Report on the geology of Washington County, Ky.
Report on the geology of Lincoln County, Ky.

Geological Survey of Kentucky,

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365

Lippincott's Gazetteer of the Worli. New Edition, Pliilad., 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Liverpool Free Public Library, Catalogue. Reference Department, Part
3. The Trustees.

Locard, A mould. Monographic des Helices du groupe de 1' Helix bolenensis
Locard.
Histoire des mollusques dans I'antiquite.
Les coqnilles sacrees dans les religions Indoues. 1884.
8ur quelques cas d'Albinisrae et de Melanisme ches les mollusques
tenestres et d'eau douce de la faune Fi-an(jaise.
• De la valeur des caracteres specifiques en Malacologie. 1883.

The Author.

Loewe, Ludwig. Beitrage zur Anatomic und zur Entwickelungsgeschichte

desNervensystem der SaugethiereunddesMenschen. 2. Bd. 1. Lief.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Lyman, Benj. i^mith. Geological and topographical sketch maps of the
Hinckley Coal Tracts in Brooklield Township, Trumbull Co., Ohio ;
near Warsaw, Coshocton Co., Ohio, and of the New York and
Westmoreland Gas Coal Company's lands at Manor Station, West-
moreland Co., Pa.
Geological Survey of Japan. Geological and topographical maps of
the oil lands of Japan. 1882. The Author,

McCook, H. C. How Lycosa fabricates her round cocoon.
Note on the amphibious habit of Lycosa.
A Spider that makes a spherical mud-daub cocoon.
The rufous or thatching ant of Dakota and Colorado.
Note on two new California spiders and their nests.
A web-spinning neuropterous insect.
The Occident unt in Dakota.
How a carpenter ant queen founds a formicary.

Restoration of limbs in Tarantula. The Author.

McGill University. Annual calendar of the faculty of medicine. 1884.

The University.

Maclntire, Chas., Jr. The percentage of college-bred men in the medical

profession. Dr. R. J. Dunglison.

McLachlan, Robt. A monographic revision and synopsis of the Trichop-

tera of the European fauna. First additional supplement.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Maguire, Capt. E. Profess-ional notes. Washington, 1884.

Engineer Department, U. S. A.
Marcy, Henry O. Annual address before the American Academy of Medi-
cine. 1883. Dr. R. J. Dunglison.
Marques, Manuel Enfrazio de Azevedo. Apuntamentos historicos, geo-
graphicos, biographicos, estaticos e noticiosas da Prov'iicia de S.
Paulo. Dr. F. V. Hayden.
Martin. H. Newell, and W. A. Moale. Handbook of vertebrate dissection.
Part I, How to dissect a Chelonian ; Part H, How to dissect a bird.

I. "V. Williamson Fund.

Martini und Chemnitz. Systematisches Conchylien-Cabinct. 325e-830e

Lief. Wilson Fund.

Meinert, Fr. Caput Scolopendrje. 1883. L V. Williamson Fund.

Meehan, Thos. Catalogue of plants collected in July, 1883, during an

excursion along the Pacific coast in southeastern Alaska.

The Author.
Mercantile Library Association of the City of New York. (13d annual
report, 1883-84. The Trustees.

Mercantile Library Associate n, San Francisco. Annual report, 1883.

The Association.

366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Mercantile Library Company of Philadelphia. Bulletin I, 6. 61st annual

report. The Directors

Meteoriten-Kreisreichen als Erzeuger der Kometen Sonnenflecke, des

Eidmagnetismus, des Winds uud Regens, des Sonuenlichtes, der

Sonnenhize, u. s, w. The Author.

Meunier, Stanislaus. Les pierres et les terrains. 1881.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Mexico and Central America. A fine collection of Charnay photographs

of antiquities, peoples, stations, etc., consisting of 109 cabinet and

34 large and 2 extra large plates. Dr. G. E. Abbott.

Michael, D. British Oribatoidse. Ray Society, 1884.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Miller, V. The useful minerals of European Russia. Text, pp. 1-244,

and map in two she. ts. 1883. The Author.

Ministerulu Lucrariloru Publice. Anuai'ulu Biurouliu Geologicu Anulii.

1882, 1883. No. 1, Bucuresoi, 1.^84.

The Department of Public Works,
Monterosato, Marchese di. Conchiglie littorali Mediterranee.

The Author.
Mueller, Baron F. von. Western Australia. The plants indigenous
around Sharks Bay and its vicinity. 1883.
Geological survey of Victoria. Observations on new vegetable fo.«sils

of the auriferous drifts. Melbourne, 1883.
Select extra-tropical plants, readily eligible for industiial culture or
naturalization, with indications of their native countries and some
of their uses. 1884.
Eucalyptograpbia, 9th decade.
Additions to the census of the genera of plants hitherto known as

indigenous to Australia.
Excel pts from Prof. Hugo Schulz's treatise on eucalyptus oil.

The Author.
Miiller, Fritz. Facts and arguments for Darwin. 1869.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Musee Royale d'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique. Service de la Carte
geologique du Royaume, Explication de les feuilles de Natoye,
Denant, Bilsen, Clavier und Bruxelles. With five maps.

Geological Survey of Belgium,

Musser, J. H. On paroxysmal fever — not malarial. The Author.

Natural History Society of Toronto. Check list and label list of the

insects of the i ominion of Canada. 1883. The Society.

Naturw. I.andesforschung von Bohmen, Archiv. Ill, 1 ; V, 3, Geol. Abth.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Nederlandsche Dierkundige Vereeniging. Catalogus der Bibliotheek.
1884. The Society.

Newlands, John A. R. On the discovery of the periodic law and on rela-
tions among atomie weights. I'he Auihor.
New South Wales. Australian Museum ; report of the trustees for 1883.

The Tiustees.
Norske Gradmaalingskommission. Vandstandsobservationer. II H. 1883.

The Commission.
Northern Transcontinental Survey. Topographical Bulletin, No. 1, six
sheets of maps. Forest Department, No. 1, one map. Agricultural
Department, Bulletin No. 1, one sheet and three maps. Agricul-
tural Department, Map Bulletin, No. 1, by E. W. Hilgard. Forest
Department, Map Bulletin, No. 1. Yakmia Region, W. T.

The Director.

Oberdieck, Gustav. Ueber Epithel und Driisen der Hamblase und weib-

lichen und mannlichen Uretra, 1884. The Author.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367

Paleontologie Franqaise Terrain Jurassique, Livr. 65-70. Terrain
Cretace. Livr. 30 - 33. Wilson Fund.

Palaeontographical [Society Publications, Vol 37.

I V. Williamson Fund.
Palmen, J. A. Ueber paarige Ausfuhrungsgange der Geschlechtsorgane
bei lusecten. 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Parker, J, A course of instruction in Zootomy. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Peacock, R. A. Saturated steam the motive povper in volcanoes and
earthquakes; great importance of electricity. 1882. The Author.
Peale, A. C The World's Geyser Regions, 1884. The Author.

Peale, Titian R. Plates of Lepidoptera, issued after the publication of
first number. The Author.

Pelzeln, A. v. Zur Ornithologie Braziliens. Resultate von Johann Naterers
Reisen in den Jahren 1817-1835. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Pennsylvania Museum and School of Industrial Art. 8th annual report,
December 31, 1883. The Trustees.

Peter, Robert. Comparative views of the c omposition of the soils, lime-
stones, clays, marls, etc., etc., of the several geological formations.

Geological Survey of Kentucky.
Philadelphia Society for Organizing Charity 5th annual report. October
1, 1883. ^ The Society.

Photographie appliquee au sciences biologiques. Lyon, 1884.

The Author,

Pictet, F. J. Historie Naturelle generale et particuliere des Insectes

neuropteres. Ire Monog., Pereides, texts and plates. 2e Monogr.,

Ephemerines, Ire-lOeLivr. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Pilar, Georgio. Flora fossil is Suscedana. 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Piolti, G. II porfide del Vallone di Roburent (Valle della Stura di Cuneoj

'1884.
Plateau, Felix. Recherches sur la force absolue des muscles des Inver-
tebres. IrePartie. The Author.

Plumer, Mary N. Dissemination of Seeds, 1881. Essex Institute.

Portis, Alex., and Guiseppi Piolti. II Calcare del Monte Tabor. ls83.

The Author.
Powell, J. W. 2d annual report of the U. S. Geological Survey. 1881-81.

Department of the Interior.
Prince, C. L. The summary of a meteorological journal kept by C. L.
Prince, F. R. A. S., at his Observatory, Crowborough, Sussex.

The Author.
Procter, John R. Geological Survey of Kentucky. Resources of the North
Cumberland Valley. Part 4, Vol. VI, 2d Ser.
Information for emigrants. The Survey.

Putnam, F. W. Abstract of an account of recent archaeological excursions
in Wisconsin and Ohio.
On the antiquity of man in America. April 30, 1884.
Abnormal human skulls from stone-graves in Tennessee.
A new stand for skulls. The Author.

Quaterfages, A. de. Hommes fossiles et hommes sauvages.

1. V. Williamson Fund.

Queenstedt, F. A. Die Ammoniten des Schwabischen Jura. Hefts 2 and

3. Text and atlas. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Radekofer, Ludwig. Ueber die Methoden in der botanischen systematik

insbesondei e die anatomische Methode. Royal Academy of Sciences

of Munich. Another copy. The Author.

Randolph, N. A. A. study of the distribution of gluten within the wheat

grain.

A note on the feces of starch-fed infants. The Author.

308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Randolph, N. A., and A. E. Eonssel. An examination of the feces of

twenty persons receiving inunctions of cod-liver oil. By N. A.

Randolph, M. D., and A. E. Roussel, M. D. The Authors.

Rantoul, Robert S. Memoir of Benjamin Peirce, 1881. Essex Institute.

Rathbun, Frank R. A revised list of birds of Central Ne\? York, 1879.

The Author.
Rayet, M. Observations pluviometriques et thermometriques faites dans
le department de la Gironde de Juin 1882 a Mai 1888. The Author.
Renevier, E. Orographic de la partie des Hautes-Alpes calcaires comprise
entre le Rhone et le Rawyl. 1881.
Rapport sur la maiche du musee geologique Vaudois en 1881.
La niusee geologique de Lausanne en 1882.

Rapport (I'expertise sur les eaux thermales de Lavey addresse au

Departement de I'Interieui- du Canton de > and par Messieurs E.

Renevier, T. A Forel, A. Heim^ E. Stockalper and D. Colladon.

, 1883.

Etude geologique sur le nouveau projet de Tunnel Conde traversant le

massif du simplou. 1883.

Tableau des terrains sedimentaires formes pendant les epoques de la

phase organique du globe terrestre avec leurs representants en

Suisse et dans les regions classiques. Tea sheets. The Author.

Report of the Canadian observations on the transit of Venus, 6th Dec. 1882.

Report on the Cotton production of the Indian Territory and the States

of Aikansas, Texas and Georgia. Four pamphlets. Angelo Heilprin.

Report of the Tenth Census of the United States, 1880. Vols. 4-8.

Department of the Interior.
Republica Argentina. Sistema de Medidas y Pesas, 1881.

The Academy of Sci^nces of the Argentine Republic.

Reusch, Hans H. Silurfossiler og pressede Konglomerater i Bergf'ns-

skrifrene. 18^2. Royal Frederiks University of Christiania.

Ridgvray, Robt. Descriptions of some new birds from Lower California,

collected by Mr. L. Belding The Author.

Rivero, Mariano E. de, y Juan Diego de Tschudi. Antigiiedades

V Peiuanas. Ge.>. Vaux.

Robinson, John. Notes on the woody plants of Essex County, 1879.

The Flora of Essex, 1880.

Our trees in winter. Essex Inst.

Rogers, Henry Raymond Force, its origin and philosophy of development.

The Author.
Rosmassler's Iconographie der europaischen land- und slisswasser-Mol-
lusken N. f. ler. Bd. 3e-6e Lief. Wilson Fund.

Rostaflnskiego, Jozefa. Sluzowce (Mycetuzoa) monografia. 1875.

Dodatek 1, do Monogiafii Sluzowcow. 1876^ I. V. Williamson Fund.
Roux, Wilhelm. Der Kampf der Theile im Organismus. 1881.

Uebr die Zeit der Bestimmung der Hauptrichtungen des Froschembryo.

Leipzig 1883.
Ueber die Bedeutung der Kerntheilungsnguren. Leipzig, 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Rumphius, G. E. Herbarium Amboinense. 4 vols., folio. Amstelodami,

1741. John H. Redfield.

Russ, Karl. Die fremdlandischen Stubenvogel. 4er Bd., 3e und 4e Lief.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ryder, John A. On the preservation of embryonic materials and small

organisms, together with hinis upon embedding and mounting

serially.

A contribution to the embryography of the osseous fishes, with special

reference to the development of the cod, Gadus morrhua. 1884.
Rearing oysters fi'om artificially fertilized eggs, together with notes
on pond culture, etc. The Author.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 369

Saranac Exiles. A winter's tale of the Adirondacks. Philada., 1880.

The Author.

Saussure, H. de. La question du Lac (Leman), 2me Partie. Geneve,

1881-82. Dr. F. V. Hayden.

Note sur le Cervus paludosus Desm. et les especes voisines. Geneve,

1883. The Author.
Scheafer, P. W, and C. W. Report on coal lands, Hans Fork ai d Twin

Creek, southwestern Wyoming Territory, 1883. Dr. F. V. Hayden.
Schlesische Blinden-Unterrichts-Anstalt. 56er Jahresbericht, 18^3.

The Institution.
Schmidt, Oscar. Die Saiigethiere in ihrem Verhiiltnisse zur Vorwelt.

1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Schneider, Dr. Zoologische Beitnige, Bd. I. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Schomliurgh, R. Report on the progress and condition of the Botanic

Garden and Government Plantations during the year 1883.

The Director.
Scudder, Samuel H. Triassic insects from the Rocky Mountains 1884.

The Author.
Secretary of the Navy, Report of the, for 1883, vol. 2. The Department.
Seebohm, Henry. A history of British birds. Pts. 3 and 4.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Selenka, Emil. Studien iiber Entwickelungsgeschichte der Thiere. 2es
und 3es Heft. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Semper, C. Reisen im Archipel der Philippinen. 2er Th., 4er Bd. le
Abth., 2es H. Wilson Fund.

Sergi, G. Un cranio della Necropoli di Villanova, presso Bologna
Langolo faciale ed un nuovo gonioraetro.
Liguri e cetti nella valle del Po.
Crani Italici del Piceno.

Polimorfismo e aiiomalie delle tibie e dei femori degli Scheletri

Etruschi di Bologna. The Author.

Servain. Histoire des iiollusques acephales des environs de Frankfurt.

1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Sharp. Benj. Beitriige zur Anatomic von Ancylus fluviatilis O. F. Miiller

und Ancylus lacustris Geoffroy. 1883.

On the anatomy of Ancylus fluviatis O. F. Miiller and Ancylus

lacustris Geof.
On the visual organs in Solen.

On Semper's method of making dried preparations. The Author.

Sbepaid, Charles Upham, .Jr. Meteoric collection of 1884. The Author.
Silliman, Benj. Sketch of the life and sciemific work of

Sketch of the life and scientific work of Dr. John Lawrence Smith.

1884. The Author.

Smith, Eugene Allen. Geological Survey of Alabama. Report for the

years 1881 and 1882. Angelo Heilprin.

Smith, R. Angus. A centenary of science in Manchester. The Author.

Smithsonian Institution. Annual report, 1882. The Institution.

Smucker, Isaac. Mound-builders' work near Newark, Ohio. The Author.

South Afiican Museum. Report of the Trustees for the year ei ding 31

Dec, 1883. The Trustees.

South Carolina. Resources and population, institutions and industries.

Published by the State Board of Agriculture, 1882. Angelo Heilprin.

Sowerby^ G. B. Thesaurus Conchyiiorum. Pts. 41 and 42 Wilson Fund.

Standard Natuial History. Pts. 1-28. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Statistische Mittheilungen iiber den Civilstand der Stadt Frankfurt a. M.

im Jahre 1883.
Stieler, Adolf. Haudatlas iiber alle Theile der Erde und iiber das Welt-
gebaude. Gotha. I. V. Williamson Fund.

370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Stein, Kitter v. Der Organismus der Infusionsthiere. 3e Abth.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Steiner, Lewis H. Annual address before the American Academy of
Medicine, 1879. Dr. R J. Dunglison.

Stockton- Hougli, John. An inquiry concerning the relative influen e of
the sex of the foetus in utero on the mental, physical, pathological
and developmental conditions of the mother during ge^itation, lacta-
tion and subsequently. 1884. The Author.
Stow, J. P. South A.ustralia ; its history, productions and and natural
resources, 1883. The Author.
Sveriges Geologiska Undersokning, 4to, Bb, 3 ; C, 54, 55, 57. Svo, A a, 89,
90 ; A o, 7, 9 ; C, 53, 56, 58, 59, 60. With maps.

Geological Survey of Sweden.
Switzerland. Beitraee zur geologischen Karte der Schweiz. 19er und 27er
Lief. Bern, 1883. Dr. F. V. ilayden.

Taczanowski, Ladislas. Ornithologie du Peron. T. ler, 1884.

L V. Williamson Fund.

Taramelli, Torquato. Delia posizione stratigrafica delle Rocce Utiolitiche

nell' Appennino. 1884. The Author.

Taylor, Thomas. Naphthaline as an Insecticide. The Author.

Thomas, Cha'les Herraon. Downward displacement of the traDsverse

colon ; three cases, with autopsies. Tlie Author.

Trembley, J. B. Report and statistics of the meteorology of the City of

Oakland, Cal., for the yeais 1882 and 1883. The Author.

Tryon, Geo. W.. Jr. Manual of Conchology, structural and systematic.

Parts 21-24. The Author.

Structui-al and Systematic Conchology. III. The Author.

Tschermak, Gustav. Lehrbuch der Minei-alogie. 3e Lief.

I. v. Williamson Fund.
Tschirch, A. Untersuchungen iiber das Chlorophyll.

I. V. WilliauiSon Fund.
United States Coast and Geodetic Survey Report, June, 1882.

Treasury Department.
United States Commission of Fish and Fisheries. Reports of tho Commis-
sioner for 1880 and 1881. The Commission.
United States Entomological Commission, Third Report, 1883.

Department of Agriculture.
United States Geological Survey. Bulletin No. 1, 1883.

Second annual report, 1880-81. Department of the Interior.

University of Kiel. Forty-three philosophical and scientific theses.

The University.
University of Pennsylvania. Catalogue and announcements, 1883-84.

The Trustees.
University of Wiirzburg. Eighteen philosophical and scientific theses.

The University.
Untersuchungen der deutschen Meere in Kiel. Vierter Bericht der Com-
mission. VII. bis Xl. Jahrg , 2. Abth. Berlin, 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Upton, Winslow. The solar eclipse of 1868. Essex Institute.

Vogt, C, and F. Specht. Die Saugethiere in Wort und Bild. Lief. 21-28.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Vogt, Carl, and Emile Yung. Traited'anatpmie comparee pratique. 3e-5e

Livre. I. V. Willi <mson Fund.

Wahlstedt, L. J. Monografi ofver Sveriges och Norges Characeer. 1875.

The Author.

Waldeyer, W. Atla< der menschlichen and thierischen Haare sowie der

S,hnlichen Fasergebild. Lahr, 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.

1884,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 371

Watson, R. Boog. MoUuscaof H. M. S. "Challenger" Expedition. Parts
17, 18 and 20. 1883. The Author.

Weisbach, Albin. Synopsis mineralogica. II. Aufl., 18S4.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Weismann, Aug. Studies in the theory of descent. 2 vols., 1882.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Wesleyan University. 12th annual report of the Curator of the Museum.

1883. The Author.

Whiteaves, J. F. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. of Canada. Mesozoic Fossils

I and III, pp. 1-238. Paleozoic Fossils, III. The Survey.

Wilcox, Jos. Notes on the geology and natural history of the west coast

of Florida, 1884. The Author.

Williams, Albert. Mineral resources of the United States, 1883.

Department of the Interior.
Willson, E. B. Memoir of John Lewis Russell, 1874. Es.>-ex Institute.

WoUe, Francis. Desmids of the United States and list of American
Pediastrums, with 1100 illustrations. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Women's Medical College of the New York Infirmary. Catalogue and
announcement. June, 1884. The College.

Wood, Dr. H. C, and H. F. Formad. Memoir on the nature of diphtheria.

The Authors.
Wood-Mason, J. Report on the tea-mite and the tea-bug of Asam. 1884.

The Author.
Wright, H. Wyoming Historical and Geological Society. Circular of
Inquiry, 1883. The manuscripts of the Earl of Ashburnham.

The Society.
Yale College. Catalogue of the officers and students, 1883-84.

The College.
Yarrell, Wm. A history of British Birds. 4th ed. Parts 18-25,

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zincken, C. F. Die Fortschritte der Geologie der Tertiarkohle, Kreide-
kohle, Jurakohle und Triasekohle oder Erganzungen zu den Physio-
graphic der Braunkohle. Leipzig, 1878. The Author.
Zittel, Karl A. Handbuch der Palaeontologie. 2 Abth., 3 Lief., II, 3.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zoological Society of London. List of the vertebrated animals now or
lately living in the Gardens. 8th edition, 1883. The Society.

Zoologischen Garten zu Hamburg, Fuhrer durch den.

Das Aquarium des Zool. Garten The Zoological Society of Hamburg.

Zoologischen Station zu Neapel. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel

und der Angrenzf nden Meeres Abschnitte. VII, IX and XI Monogr.

1883-84. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Journals and Periodicals.

Altenburg. Mittheilungen aus dem Osterlande, n. f., 2er Bd. Catalog der

Bibliothek. The Society.

Amsterdam. K. Akademie van Wetenschappen. Verslagen en M»dedee-

lingen. Afd. Letterkunde, II R., Deel 1-12. Afd. Naturkunde, II,

R., Deel 18.

Jaarboek, 1882.

Processen-Verbaal, 1882-83.

Verhandlingen. Afd. Naturk. Deel 23. Afd. Naturt . Deel 14. '

The Society.
Angers. Societe d' etudes scientifiques. 12e and 13e Annees.
Societe national d' Agriculture Sciences et Arts.

Memoires. T. 24 and 25. The Society.

Anvers. Societe de Geographic. Bulletin, IX, 1. The Society.

372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Augsburg. Naturhistorischer Verein, 27er Bericht. The Society.

Auxerre. Societe des Sciences historiques et naturelles de rYonne. Bul-
letin, 'die Annee.
Baltimore. American Chemical Journal, V, 6 VI, 4.

Johns Hopkins University.
American Journal of Mathematics, VI, 2— VII, 1.

Johns Hopkins University.
Johns Hopkins University. Studies from the Biological Laboratory,
III, 1. The University.

Maryland Medical Journal, XII, 2. The Editor.

Peabody Institute. 17th annual report. The Institute.

Basel. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, VII, 2 mit Bihang. The Society.
Schweizerische palaontologische Gesellschaft, X.

I. V. Williamson Fund,

Batavia. Naturkundig Vereen in Nederlandsch Indie. Naturkundig

Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch Indie. 8e Ser. Deel III, 1,2; IV,

1-4; V, 1, The Society.

Belfast. Naturalists' Field Club. Annual report. Series 2, Vol. II, Pt. 3,

The Society.
Natural History and Philosophical Society. Proceedings, lw83-83.

The Society.
Berlin. Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, 48er Jahr., 4 H. — 49er Jahr.. 4 H.

The Editor.

Botanischer Jahresbericht, 8er Jahr., le and 2e Abtli., I and II ; 9er

Jahr., I, 1, 2 ; II, 1, I. V. Williamson Fund.

Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft. Zeitschrift, XXXV, 3 — XXXVI, 1.

The Society.
Entomologischer Verein. Berliner entomologische Zeitschrift, 27er
Bd., 1 H.— 28 Bd., 1 H. The Society.

Garten-Zeitung (Wittmack), 1883, 1-12. The Editor.

Gesellschaft Naturforschende Freunde. Sitzungs-Berichte, 1883-84,
1 7. The Society.

Jahrbiicher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik (Pringsheim), XIV, 3 —
XV, 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Naturae Novitates, 1883, 21—1884, 20. ' The Publishers.

Der Naturforscher, XVI, 40 -XVII, 26. The Editor.

K. Preugsische Akademie der Wissenschaften. Bericht, 1836.
Monat^bericht, 1854, 1855, 1856, Dec. 1877.
Sitzungsberichte, 1883, XXXVIII— 1884, XXXIX.
Abhandlungeu, mathematische, 1883 ; physikalisch, 1883 ; Anhang,
1883. The Society.

Bern. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, 1072-1082.

The Society.
Besangon. Academic des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts, 1882, 1883.

The Society.
Beziers. Societe d'etude des sciences naturelles. Bulletin, 6e An.

The Society.
Birmingham. Philosophical Society. Proceedings, III, 1, 2. The Society.
Bislritz. Gevrerbeschule Jahresbericht, ler — 5i>r, lOer. The Society.
Bologna. Accademia delle Scienze. Memoiie 4 Ser., IV. The Society.
Bonn. Archiv fiir Mikro kopische Anatomic, XXII, 2 XXIV, 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Natui'historischer Verein. Verhandlungen, 39er Jahr., le H — 41er

Jahr., le H. The Society.

Boideaux. Academic Natiouale des Sciences, Belles Lettrps et Arts.

Actes, 43e Annee, 1-4 Tr. Tables historiques, etc. The Society.

Societe Linneeune. Actes. T. 36. The Society.

Societe des Sciences pi ysiques et naturelles. Memoires, 2e Ser., V, 3.

The Society.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 373

Boston. American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Proceedings, XTX, 1-3.

The Society.
American Monthly Microscopical Journal, IV, 12. The Editor.

The Auk, I, 1-4. The Editor.

Literary News, V, 4-10. The Editor.

Science Record, II, 2-12. The Editor.

Society of Natural History. Proceedings, XXII, p. 225 — XXIII, p. 32.
Same, X, Nos. 2, 3, 4.

Memoirs, III, 8-10. The Society.

Zoological Society. Quarterly Journal, III, 1. The Society.

Braunschweig. Archiv fiir Anthropologic, 15er Bd., 1-3. The Society.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bremen. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Abhandlungen, VI II, 2.

The Society.
Brescia. Ateneo. Coramentari, 1883. The Society.

Brisbane. Royal Society of Queensland. Proceedings, I, 1. The Society.
Bristol. Naturalists' Society. Pi'oceedings, IV, 2. The Society.

Briiuu. Naturforschender Verein. Verhandlungen, XXI, 1, 2.

The Society.
Bruxf lies. Academic Hoyale des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts
de Belgique. Aunuaire, 1881-84.
Bulletin, 2me Ser., T. 50 ; 3me Ser., T. I -VII, 8.
Memoires. T. 43, 2e Partie, T. 44.
Memoires couronnes, 8vo, T. 31-35.
Memoires couronnes, 4to, T. 44.

Tables, 1867 1830. The Society.

Societe Beige de Microscopic. Bulletin, X, 1-11.

Annales, T. VII and VIII. The Society.

Socieie Entomologlque. Comtes-Rendu, Ser. Ill, Nos. 36, 37, 38, 40,
■ 43, 46, 48, 49.

Annales, T. 27 and 28. The Society.

Societe Malacologique. Annales, XVII.

Proces Verbaux, 4 Aout, 1882—1 Juil., 1883. The Society.

Budapest. Gazette de Hongrie, IV, 6-28. Hungarian National Museum.

Ungarische Akademie der Wissenschaften, mathematische und natur-

wissenschaftliche Berichte aus Ungarn, I. The Society.

Ungarische National Museum. Naturhistorische Hefte, VII.

Buenos Aires. Sociedad Cieutifica Argentina. Anales, XVI, 5— XVIII, 3.

The Society.

Buffalo. Society of Natural Sciences. Bulletin, IV, 4. The Society.

Caen. Acaderaie nationale des Sciences. Arts et Belles- Lettres, Memoires,

1883. The Society.

Calcutta. Asiatic Society of Bengal. Proceedings, 1883, No. 7 — 1884,

No. 5.

Journal, Lll, Pt. 1, Nos. 3 and 4 : Pt. 2, Nos. 1-4, LIII ; Pt. 1, Nos.

1 and 2 ; Pt. 2, Nos. 1 and 3. The Society.

Cambridge. Appalachian Mountain Club. Appalachia, III, 3 and 4.

The Society.
Harvard University. Library Bulletin, Nos. 27, 28 and 29.

The University.
Museum of Comparative Zoology. Memoirs, X, 1-3 ; XI, 3 ; XII, 1.

Bulletin, XC, 5 10. The Director.

Peabody Museum of American Archaeology and Ethnology. 16th and

17th annual reports. The Director.

Cambridge. Science, Nos. 43-94. I. V. Williamt-on Fund.

Cambridge, Eng'd. University, 13th Annual report of the Library

Syndicate. The Authors.

Canada. Royal Society. Proceedings and Transactions, 1882-83.

The Society.

374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Cassel. Malakozoologische Blatter, VII, 1-4. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Verein fiir Naturkunde. Bericht, XXXt. The Society.

Catania. Accademia Gioenia di Scienze Naturali. Atti, 3a Ser., T. 16-17.

The Society.

Cedar Rapids. Iowa Agricultural College. Department of Entomology.

Bulletin, No. 2. The College.

Chicago. Academy of Sciences. Bulletin, I, 1-4. The Society.

American Antiquarian, V, 4 — VI, 5. The Editor.

American Chemical Review, III, 12. The Editor.

Christiania. Archiv for Mathematik og Naturvidenskab, VIII, 3 — IX, 4.

The Editor.
Norwegische Meteorologiske Institut. Jahrbuch 1881. The Director.
Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberue, XXVII, 2 - XXVIII, 1.

The Editor.

Videnskab Selskab. Forhandlinger, 1882. The Society.

Cincinnati. Ohio Mechanics' Institute, Scientific Proceedings, II, 3.

The Institute.

Society of Natural History. Journal. VI, 4— VII, 3. The Society.

Zoological -"^ociety, 10th annual report. The Society.

Columbia. Uiiversity of the State of Missouri. Bulletin of the Museum,

I, 1. The University.

Congres international des Americanistes. Compte-rendu de la 5me

Session. The Congress.

Copenhagen. K. D. Videnskabernes Selskab. Oversigt, 1883, Nos. 2, 3 ;

1884, No. 1.

Skrifier, 6me Ser., II, 4, 5. The Society.

Naturhistoriske Forening. Videnskabelige Meddelelser, 1882, I ; 1883,
I. The Society.

Naturhistoriske Tidsskrift, XIII, 3 ; XIV, 1, 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Societe Royale des Antiquaires du Nord. Memoires, n. s., 1880-81.

The Society.
Cordoba. Academia nacional de Ciencias exactas. Actas, IV, 1 ; V, 1.

Boletin, V, 1-4; VI, 1.
Crawfordsville. Botanical Gazette, VIII, 12 IX, 11. The Editor.

Danzig. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Schriften, n. f., VI, 1.

The Society.
Darmstadt. Verein fiir Erdkunde. Notizblatt, IV, Folge, 4, H.

The Society.
Detroit. American Meteorological Journal I, 1, 2. The Editor.

Dorpat. Naturforscher Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte, VI, 3.

Archiv fiir die Naturkunde Liv.-Ehst- und Kurlands, 2e Ser., IX, 5.

The Society.
Dresden. K. Leop. Carol. -Deutscher Akademie der Naturforscher. Nova
Acta, Vol. 44.

Leopoldina. H. 18. The Society.

Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft Isis. Sitzungsberich e und Ab-
haudlungen, 1883 Jan. - 1884 Juni. The Society.

S. K. Sammlung fiir Kunst und Wissenschaft. Bericht, 1880-81.
Mittheilungen, 1873.

Katalog, 1874. The Director.

Verein fiir Erdkunde. Jahresberichte,. XVIII-XX. The Society.

Dublin. Royal Geological Society of Ireland. Journal, XI (I), 1-XV I, 2.

The Society.

Royal Irish Academy. Proceedings, Science, IV, 1, 2.

Transactions, Science, XXVIIl, 14-16. The Society.

Diirkheim a. d. Haardt. Pollichia. Jahresbericht, 36-42. Beigabe zum

40en. The Society.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 375

Edinburgh. Botanical Society. Transactions and Proceeding's, XV, 1.

The Society.
Eoyal Physical Society. Proceedings, 1883-83. The Society.

Royal Society. Proceedings. XI. XII.

Transactions, XXX, 2— XXXII, 1. The Society.

Scottish Natviralist, n. s. Nos. 3-6. The Editor.

Elberfeld. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Jahresberichte, 6es H.

The Society.
Emden. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, 68er Jahresberichte. The Society.
Erlangen. Physikalisch-Mediciuische Societat, Sitzungsberichte 15es H.

The Society.
Florence. Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano (Caruel), XVI, 1-4.

The Editor.

Societa Italiana di Anthropologia, Etnologia e Psicologia Comparata.

Archivio, XIII. 3 ; XIV, 1. The Society.

Folkestone. Natural History Society. First series, Oct., 1883— Aug., 1884.

The Society.

France. Association Pranqaise pour 1' Advancement des Sciences. Comp-

tps Rendus, Ire-lle Session. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Frankfurt a. M. Aerziliche Verein. Jahresbericht, XXVII. The Society.

Deutsche Malakozoologische Gesellschaft. Jahrbiicher, XI, 1-3.

Nachrichtsblatt, 1884, 3-10. The Society.

Frankfurter Verein fiir Geographic und Statistik. 46er und 47er

Jahresberichte The Society.

Neue Zoologische Gesellschaft. Der Zoologische Garten, XVIII, 5 ;

XX, 3, 4, 11, 13; XXI, 9; XXII, 10; XXIII, 4, 6; XXIV, 1;

XXV, 3. Dr. H. Bolau.

Physikalischer Verein. Jahresbericht, 1882-83. The Society.

Senkenbergisohe Naturfoi scheude Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, X III,

3, 4.

Bericht, 1883-83. The Society.

Frauenfeld. Thurgauische Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen,

H. ler-6er. The Society.

Gand. Archives de Biologie (Van Beneden und Van Bambeke!, IV, 2 —

V, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Geneva. Recueil Zoologique Suisse (Fol. ), I, 1. The Editor.

Revue Geologique Suisse (Faure), XIV. The Editor.

Genoa. Museo civico di Storia Naturale. Annali, 1870, Nos. 1-6.

The Director.

Societa di Letture e Conversazioni Scientifiche. Giornale, VII, 12 —

VIII, 11. The Society.

Geimany. Gesellschaft Deutscher Naturforscherund Aerzte. Festschrift

der 5fier Versammhing. The Society.

Giessen. Jahresbericht iiber die Fortschritte der Chemie (Fittica), 1883,

No. 1 ; 1883, No. 1. The Editor.

Oberhessische Gesellschaft fiir Natur und Heilkunde, 23er Bericht.

The ^ociety.
Glasgow. Natural History Society. Proceedings, V, 2. The Society.
Philosophical Society. Proceedings, XIV. The Society.

GottiLgen. K. Gesellschaft der W issenschaften. Nachrichten. 1883.

The Society.
Gotha. Dr. A. Petermann's Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes' geographi-
scher Anstalt, 1883, H. 11 ; 1884, H. 10. Ergiinzungsheft, 74er.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Graz. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fiir Steiermark. Mittheilungen,
1883, Haiipt-Repertorium. The Society,

Halle. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, XVI, 2.

Bericht, 1883. The Society.

376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Halle a. S. Verein fiir Erdkunde. Mittheilungen, 1881. The Society.
Zeitschrift fiir Wissenschaften, LVI, 6 ; 4te, F. Ill, 1-3.

The Society.
Hamburg. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Jahresbuch, 1883 (Abstracts),

The Society.

Zoologische Gesellschaft. ler-22er Berichte. The Society.

Hanover. Gesellschaft fiir M kroskopie. 2er .Tahresbericht. The Society.

Harlem. HoUaadische Maatschappij der Wetenschappen. Programma,

1883. The Society.

Societe Hollandaise des Sciences. Archives, XVIII, 2— XIX, 1.

The Society.

Heidelberg. Naturhistoricher Verein. Verhandlungen, n. F., 3er Bd.,

3es H. The Society.

Helsingfors. Finska Vetenskaps - Societeten. Observations Meteoro-

logiques, 1880. The Society.

Sallskapet pro Fauna et Flora Fennica. Meddelanden, 9, 10.

The Society.
Hermannstadt. Siebenbiirgischer Verein fur Naturwissenschaften. Ver-
handlungen und Mitttheilunsen, VII XXIX, XXXIV. The Society.
Innsbruck. Ferdinandeum. Zeitschrilt, 27er H. The Society.

Jena. Medicinisch-Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Zeitschrift,
XVI, 4 XVIII, 1. The Society.

Kansas City. The Kansas City Review of Science and Industry, VII, 8—
VIII, 7. • The Editor.

Karlsruhe. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Verhandlungen, les H.,
1864 9es H , 1883. The Society.

Universitat. Verzeichnis-s, 1883, II-IV ; 1884, I. The Society.

Klagenfurt. Landesmuseum von Kiirnten. Jahrbuch, 16er H.
Bericht, 1883.

Diagramme der magn. u. meteor Beobachtungen, 1882-83.

Carinthia, 1882 ; 1883 ; 188t, No. 9. The Editor.

Konigsberg. Physikalisch-okonomische Gesellschaft. Schriften, XXIV,

1, 2. The Society.

Lancaster. Linnean Society. Bulletin, 1-4. The Society.

Lausanne. Societe Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles Bulletin, No. 89.

The Society.
Leeds. Philosophical and Literary Society. Annual report, 1883-84.

The Society.

Yorkshire Naturalists' Union. Transactions, I-VII. The Society.

Leiden Nederlandsche Dierkundige Vereeniging Tijdschrift, I, 1 ;

III ; V ; Suppl. 1), I, 2. The Society.

Leipzig. Archiv fiir Anatomic und Physiologic. Anatomische Abth., 1883,

H. 4—1884, H. 6. Physiologische Abtheiliing, lb83, H. 4—1884, H. 5

and Supplement B. Supplement Band, 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Botanische .lahrbiicher (Engler), V, 1; VI, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.

International Zeitschrift fiir Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft ( Techner),

I, 1. The Editor.

Jahresberichte iiber die Fortschritte der Anatomic und Physiologie

(Hofmann und Schwalbe). XI, 2 H. illfte, 1 Abth.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal fiir Ornithologie. XXXI, 4 ;• XXXII, 1

I. V. Williamson Fund.
K Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen, XII, 9.
Bericht iiber die Verhandlungen, 1882. The Suciety.

Morphologische Jahrbuch, IX, 2— X, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Naturtorschende Gesellschaft. Sitzungsbericht, 1S83. The Society.
Zeitschrift fiir Krystallographie und Miueralogie (Groth), VIII, 4—
IX, 4. I. V. Williamson Fund.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 377

Zoologiscbe Station zu Neapel Mittbeilung, V, 1 und 2.

Zoologische Jahrbericht, 1879, 1880, 1882, I-IV. The Director.

Zooloffisciier Aiizeiger, (Carus). Nos. 153-180. The Editor.

Leyden. Leyden Museum. Notes edited by H. Scblegel, I-VI.

The Museum.

Lille. Societe geologique du Nord. Annales, XI, 3. The Society.

Lisbon. Associagao dos Engenlieiros Civis Portuguezes. Revista de

Obras publicas e Minas. Nos. 16o-17ti. The Society.

Liverpool. Free Public Library, Museum and "Walker Art Gallery. 29th

and 30th Annual Reports. The Directors.

Literary and Philosophical Society. Proceedings, Nos. d^-^7.

The Society.

Naturalists' Field Club. Proceedings, 1879-1884. The Society.

London. The Anglers' Note-Book and Naturalists' Record. 1884, Nos.

2 and 3. The Editor.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 1883, No. 72—1884,

No. 83. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Astronomical Register. Nos. 252-263. I. V. Willarason Fund.

British Association for the Advancement of Science. Report, 53d

Meetinjf. The Society.

Chemical Society. Journal, Nos. 253-264. Supplement, Vols. XLIII

and XLIV. The Society.

Cosmos, No. 3. The Editor.

Crystallological Society. Proceedings, 1877, 1 ; 1882, 1 and 2.

fThe Society.
Curtis's Botanical Magazine, Nos. 1162-1172. I. V. Williamson Fund.
The Electrician. XII, 2— XIII, 26. The Editor.

Entomological Society. 1883, No. 4—1884, No. 2. The Society.

The Gardeners' Chronicle, n. s. Nos. 517-567. The Editor.

Geological Magazine. Nos. 234-245. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Geological Society. Quarterly Journal, Nos. 156-159. The Society.
Hardwicke's Science Gossip. Nos. 2:^8-239. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ibis, 5th Sen, I, 5— II, 8. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Journal of Anatomy and Physiology. XVIII, 2 — XIX, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Botany, British and Foreign. Nos. 252 — 263.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Conchology. IV, 1-6. The Editor.

Journal of Physiology (Foster), IV, 4 — V, 3, and Supplement to V.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Journal of Science. Nos. 120-131. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Knowledge. Nos. 105-157. The Editor.

Linnean Society. Journal, Botany, Nos. 130-1-33 ; Zoology, Nos. 101

and 102.

Transactions, 2d Ser. Zoology, II, 9, 10 ; III, 1 ; Botany, II, 6 and 7.
List, 1883.

Proceedings October, 1883. The Society.

London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine. 1883. No.
102—1884, No. 113. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Mineralogical Society of Great Britain and Ireland, Mineralogical
Magazine and Journal of the. Nos. 25-27. The Society.

The Naturalist. Nos. 109-112. The Editor.

Nature. Nos. 734-785. The Editor.

Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science. Nos. 93-95.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal, XV, 4 —
XVI, 3. The Society.

Royal Geographical Society. Proceedings, n. s., V, 11 — VI, 9.

The Society.
25

378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1884.

Royal Institution of Great Britain. Proceedings, X, 2. The Society.
Royal Microscopical Society. Journal, 2d Ser., Ill, 6 — IV, 5,

The Society.
Royal Society. Proceedings, Nos. 227-231.

Philosophical Transactions, Vol. 174, Nos. 2 and 'S. The Society.
Scottish Naturalist. January, 1884, 2d ser., Nos 4 and 5. The Editor.
Society of Arts. Journal, vol. 31. The Society.

Society for Psychical Research. Proceedings, I, 1-6. The Society.
Triibner's American and Oriental Literary Record, Nos. 191-202.

The Editor.
Zoological Record, 1882 T V. Williamson Fund.

Zoological Society. Proceedings, 1883, 3, 1884, Parts 1 and 2
Transactions, XI, 9-
Catalogue, 1883.

List of Fellows, 1884, The Society.

Zoologist, Nos 84-95 I. V Williamson Fund

London, Ca. The Canadian Entomologist, XV. 10-XVI, 8. The Editor.

Louvain. Universite Catholique. 17 theses. The University.

Liibeck. Naturhistoiische Museum. Jahresbericht, 1853, 1854, 1856,

1857, 1864, 1866, 1868-1870, 1873-1877, 1882, 1883. The Society.

Llineburg. NaturwissenschaftlicLer Verein. Jahreshefte, V. The Society.

Luxembourg. Institute Royal. Publications, XIX. The Society.

Lyon. Academie des Sciences, Belles-Leltres et Arts. Memoires, classes

des sciences, XXVI. The Society.

Societe d'Aj^riculture, Histoire Naturelle et Arts Utiles Annales,

5me Ser., V. The Society.

Madrid. Memorial de Ingenieros y revista cientifico-militar, XXXVIII,

22-24 ; XXXIX, I, 1. The Society.

Mannheim Mannheim Verein fiir Naturkunde. Jahresbericht, 1878-82.

The Society.
Manchester. Literary and Philosophical Society. Proceedings, XX-
XXII.

Memoirs, VII. The Society.

Scientihc Students' Association, Annual Reports, 1862-1865, 1867-
1872, 1874, 1876, 1879, 1881-1883.

Catalogue of Library. The Society.

Marburg. Gesellschaft ztir Befordeiung der gesammten Naturwissen-

schaften. Sitzungsberichte, 1882, 1883. The Society.

Melbourne. Royal Society of Victoria. Transactions and Proceedings,

XIX, XX. The Society.

Metz. S c ete d'Histoire Naturelle. Bulletin, 5me Cahier, 2e Partie.

The Society.

Verein fiir Erdkunde. Ser Jahresbericht. , The Society.

Mexico. Ministerio de Fomento. Anales, VII. The Editor.

Museo Nacional. Anales, III, 5, 6. The Director.

Revista Cientifica Mexicana, If, 1. The Editor.

Socif-dad Mexicana de Hibtoria Natural. La Naturaleza, VI, 18 —

VIL 1. The Society.

Milan. Fondazione Scientifica Cagnola. Atti, VII. The Society.

R. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze e Lettre. Rendiconti, Ser. II, Vol.

XV- XVI I. No. 16.

Memorie, XV, 1, 2, 3 ; XVII, 4. The Society,

R. Istituto technico superiore. Programma, 1883-84. The Society.

Minneapolis. Minnesota Academy of Natural Sciences. Bulletin, II, 4.

The Society.

Modena. R. Accademia di Scienza, Lettere ed Arti. Memorie, Ser. Ill,

Vol. II. . The Society.

Mons. Societe des Sciences, des Arts et des Lettres du Hainaut.

M6moires et Publications, IV Ser., T. 7me. The Society.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379

Montpelier. Academie des Sciences et Lettres, Memoires de la Section
des Sciences, X, 2. The Society.

Montreal. Canadian Record of Natural History and Geology, with Pro-
ceedings of the Natural History Society, I, 1. The Society.
Moscow, Societe Iinperiale des Naturalistes. Bulletin, 1882, Nos. 3 et 4;
1883, Nos. 2 et 3; 1884, Nos. 1 et 4. Beilage T. 57-59. The Society.
Miinchen. Gesellschaft fiir Anthiopologie, Ethnologic und Urgeschichte.
Beitrage, V, 4, VI, 1. The Society.
K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte der math.-
phys. C'lasse, 1883, Nos. 1-3,

Abhanrilungen, mathem.-physikal. Clnsse, XIV, 2, 3. The Society.
Miinster. Westfalischer Provinzial-Verein fiir Wissenschaft und Kunst.
Jahresbericht, I, III, IV, V, XI. XII. The Society.

Nancy. Societe des Sciences. Bulletin, Ser. 2, III, 15. The Society.

Neubrandenburg. Verein der Freunde der Naturgeschichte in Mecklen-
burg. Archiv, 37er Jahrg. The Society.
Neuchatel. Societe des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletin, XIII. The Society.
New Haven. American Journal of Science. 1883, No. 156 ; 1884, No. 167.

The Editor.
Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences. Transactions, VI, 1.

The Society.
New Jersey Pharmaceutical Association. Proceedings, 1884. The Society.
New York. Academy of Sciences. Annals II, 9, 13 ; III, 1-4.

Transacticins, II, 1, 3-8. The Society.

American Bookseller, XV, 3. The Editor.

American Chemical Society. Journal, IV ; V ; VI, 1-4. The Society.
American Geographical Society. Bulletin, 1883, No. 1 — 1884, No. 1.

The Society.
American Museum of Natural History. Annual Report, 15th.

Bulletin, No. 4. The Director.

The Book Buyer, n. s., II, 1. The Editor.

Forest and Stream XXI, 18 -XXIII, 17. The Editor.

Library Journal. VIII, 9— IX, 10. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Linnean Society. Transactions, II. The Society.

Literary News, V, 1-11. The Editor.

New York Medical Journal, XXXVIII, 22— XL, 21. The Editor.

Medico-Legal Journal, II, 1, 2. The Editor.

Popular Science Monthly, Jan. — Dec, 1884. The Editor.

The Sanitarian, No. 172. The Editor.

Torrey Botanical Club. Bulletin, X, 10— XI, 9. The Society.

Normal. Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History. Bulletin, II, 1.

The Director.
Padova. Societa Veneto-Trentina di Scienza Naturali. Atti, VII, 2.

BuUetino, III, 1, 2. The Society.

Palermo. II Naturalista Sicilian©, III, 3— IV, 2. The Editor.

Societa di Scienze Naturali et economiche. Giornale, I-XIV.

The Society.
Paris. Academie des Sciences. Comptes Rendus, Vols. 93, 94, 95 and 96.

The Society.
Annales des Mines, 8me Ser., Ill, 3 — V, 3.

Minister of Public Works, France.
Annales des Sciences Geologiques, XII-XV. The Editor.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles. Zoologie et Paleontologie, XV, 5 —
XVII, 2 ; Botanique, XVI, 6— XVIH, 6. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Archives de Zoologie Experimentale et generale, 1883, No. 3—1884,
^No. 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ecole polytechnique, S. 28m»*, 52e Cab. The Director.

Journal de Conchyliologie, 3e Ser., XXII, 3— XXIV, 2. The Editor.

380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Journal de Micrographie, VIT, 11, 12 ; VIII, 1 and 2. The Editor.

Museum d'Histoire Naturelle, Nouvelles Archives, 2me Ser., V, 2 ;

Vr, 1. The Society.

Le Naturaliste, Nos. 46-69. The Editor.

Revue d' Ethnographic, I; II. 5— III, 3. 1. V. Williamson Fund.

Revue Geographique internationale, Nos. 9G-107. The Editor.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, 1874, No. 6, without plates.

F. G. Schaupp.
Revue Internationale des Sciences, 1883, Nos. 11 and 12. The Editor.
Revue Politique et Literaire, 3e Ser., 3e An., Nos. 23-26. The Editor.
Revue Scientitique de la France et de I'etranger, 3me Ser. Ill, 21 —

IV, 19. The Editor.

Science et Nature, I, 1 50. The Editor.

Societe d'Acclimatation. Bulletin, 3d Ser., X, 10— 4e Ser. I, 7.

The Society.
Societe de Biologic. Compte Rendu des Seances, 7me Ser., Ill ; V,

1-4, 6-35. The Society.

Societe Entomologique de France. Annales, 6me Ser. II, 1-4.
Societe Geologique de France. Jjulletin, 3me Ser., XI, 7 ; XII, 1-7.

The Society.
Societe Malacologique de France. Bulletins I, II, Announcement,

By-Laws, etc.

Annales de Malacologie, T, 4. The Society,

Societe Mineralogique de Fr.uice. Bulletin VI, 7-VII, 7. The Society.
Societe Nationale d' Agriculture de France. Bulletin, 1883, No. 8-

1884, No. 7. The Society.

Societe Zoologique. Bulletin, 8er An., 3— 9e An. 2. The Society.

Philadelphia. Academy of Natural Sciences. Proceedings, 1883, No. 3—

1881, No. 2.

Journal, IX. 1. Publication Committee.

Report of Transactions, 1824. Dr A. E. Foote.

American Entomological Society. Transactions, X, 3, 4. The Society.

American Journal of Medical Science, Jan.-Oct., 1884. The Editor.
American Journal of Pharmacy, 1883, XIII, 12—1884, XIV, 11.

The Editor.
American Naturalist, XVII, 12 -XVIII, 12. The Editor.

American Pharmaceutical Association. Proceedings, 31st annual

mei ting. The Society.

American Philosophical Society. Proceedings, Nos. 114 and 115.
College of Pharmacy. Alumni Association, 20th annual report.

The Society.
The Dental Cosmos, XXV, 12— XXVI, 11. The Editor.

Engineers' Club. Proceedings, III, 5 — IV, 3 and supplement.

The Society.
Franklin Institute. Journal, 3d Ser., Nos. 696-707. The Society.

The Gardenei s' Mon hly, 1883, Dec— 1884, Nov. The Editor.

Historical Society of tennsylvania. Pennsylvania Magazine of His-
tory and Biogiaphy, VII, 4— VHI, 3. The Society.
Library Company of Philadelphia. Bulletin, July, 1884. The Directors.
Literary Era. II, 1-12. The Editor.
Mercantile Library, Bulletin, I, 7, The Directors.
Naturalists' Leisure Hour, Feb. — Dec, 1884. The Editor.
Papilio, IV, 1-6. The Editor.
Verein Kosmos. Jahresbericht, 1883, 1884. The Society.
Zoological Society. 12th annual report. The Society.
Pisa. Societa Malacologica Italiana. Bollettino Malacologico Italiano,

X, Fogli, 1-8. The Society.

Societa Toscana di ScienzeNaturali. Atti, 13 Gen., 1884 — Luglio, 1884.

The Society.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381

Portici. R. Scuola Superiore d'Agricoltura. Annuario IV, 1-3.

The Director.
Poughkeepsie. Vassar Brothers' Institute, Transactions, II. The Society.
Prag. Lotos Verein. Jahrbuch fiir Naturwissenschaften, n. F., V, 1884.

The Society.
Raleigh. Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society. Journal, 1883-84.

The Society.

North Carolina Department of Agriculture. Monthly Bulletin, March,

1884. The Department.

Regensburg. Zoologisch-mineralogischer Verein. Correspondenz-Blatt,

3 . er Jahrg. The Society.

Reichenbach i. V. Vo^tlandis-cher Verein fiir allgemeine und spezielle

Naturkunde. Mittheilungen, 4es H., und wissenschaftliche Beilage.

The Society.
Riga. Naturforscher-Vtrein. Correspondenzblatt, 26er und 27er Jahrg.

The Society.

Rio de Janeiro. Istituto Historico Geographico e Ethnographico do

Brasil. XLIV 2, XLV. The Society.

Observatoire Imperial, Bulletin astronomique et meteorologique, 1883,

Nos. 8-12. The Director.

Rochester. Society of Natural Sciences. Annual report, 1883.

Tlie Society.
Ward's Natural Science Bulletin. Ill, 1. The Editor.

Rome. R. Accadeuiia dei Lincei, Ser. 3a. Atti, VII, 15— VIII, I'i.

The Society.
Soc'eta Geografica Italiana. BoUettiuo, Ser. II, Vol. 9, Ease. 2-9.

The Society,
Societa degli Spettroscopisti Italiana. Memorie, XII, 11 — XIII, 8.

The Society.
Saco. York Institute. Publications, I, 1,2. The Society.

Saint John. Natural Histoiy Society of New Brunswick. Bulletin, 3.

Annual report, 1881.
St. Louis. Academy of Sciences. Transactions, IV, 3. The Society.

St. Petersburg. Societas Entomologica. Horse, XVII. The Society.

Phybikalische Ctntral-Observatorium. Annalen, 1882, 1 and 2.

The Director.

K. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Repertorium fiir Meteorologie,

VIII. The Society.

Hortus Petropolitanus. Acta, "VJII, 2. The Society.

Salem. Essex Institute. Bulletin, XIV, 7— XVI, 3. The Society.

San Francisco. California Academy of Sciences. Bulletin, No. 1.

The Society.
Semur. Societe des Sciences historiques et naturelles. Bulletin, 1881-82.
Siena. R. Accademia de Fisiocritici. Atti, Ser. 2a, II, 1 2 ; V ; VI ; VII.
Ser. 3a, II, 1, 2 ; III, 1-8.
Revista Scientiflca, VI, VII.

Rapporti, I, 1, 2. The Society.

Springfield. Illinois State Museum of Natural History, Bulletin, 1882,

No, 2. The Society,

Staunton, The Virginias, IV, 12— V, 10, The Editor.

Stockholm. Entomologisk Tidskrift, IV, 1 -V, 2. The Editor.

K. Vetenskaps Akademien. Ofversigt 40de Arg. 5 — 41e Arg. 3.

Bihang, VIII, 1, 2. The Society.

Humboldt. II, 12-in. 11. L V. Williamson Fund.

Kosmos. VIII, 7—1884, II, 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Neues Jahrbuch fiir Minoralogie, Geologic und Paleoutologie. 1883,
II, 3—1884, II, 2, and III ; Beilage, Bd. 1. The Editor.

V'lein fiir Vaterlandische Naturkunde in Wiirtemberg. Jahreshefte,
40er Jabresheft. The Society.

382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1884.

Switzerland. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Verbandlungen, 1883-83.

The Society.

Sydney. Linnean Society of New South Wales. Proceedings, VIII, 3 —

IX, 2. The Society.

Royal Society of New South Wales. Journal and Proceedings, XVII.

The Society.
Tasmania. Royal Society. Proceedings and Reports, 1883.

The Society.
Throndhjem. K. N. Videnskabei s Selskab. Skrifter, 1881. The Society.
Topeka. Washburn Laboratory of Natural History, Bulletin, I, 1.

The Director.
Torino. Accademia Reale delle Scienze. Atti, XVIII, 4— XIX, 4,
Memoria, Serie 2a, T. 34 and 35.

II Primo Secolo. 1783-1883. The Society.

Regio Osservatorio della Regia Universita. Bollettino, Anni 17 and 18.

The Director.
Toronto. Canadian Institute. Proceedings, N. S., I, 5 — II, 3.

The Society.

Entomological Society. Annual Report, 1883. The Society.

Toulouse. Academic des Sciences, Inscriptions et Belles-Letties. Me-

moires, 8me Sier. V, 1, 2. The Society.

Revue Mycologique, VI, 22. The Editor.

Trieste. Societa Adriatica di Scienze Naturali. Bollettino, VIII.

The Society.

Truro. Royal Institution of Cornwall. Journal, VIII, 1, 2. The Society.

United States. American Association for the Advancement of Science.

Proceedings, XXXII.

Programme of the 31st and 32d meetings. The Society.

American Society of Microscopists. Proceedings, 6th annual meeting.

The Society.
Upsal. Observatoire de I'Universite. Bulletin Meteorologique, XV.

The Director.
Regia Societas Scientiarum. Nova Acta, 3d Ser., XI, 2. The Society.
Urbana. Central Ohio Scientific Association. Proceedings, I, 2.

The Society.

Venice. L'Ateneo Veneto, Ser. VIII, Vol. I, 4— II, 2. The Society.

R. Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Aiti. Atti, Ser. 6a, T. I,

Disp. 4— II, 2. The Society.

Vienna. Anthropologische Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, XIII, 2 — XIV, 1.

The Society.
Embryologische Institut der K. K. Universitat. Mittheilungen, II, 3.

The Director.
K. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte, mathem.-na-
turw. Classe, 86 Bd., le Abth., I— V ; 2e Abth., II-V ; 3e Abth., III-
V ; 87 Bd., le Abth., I-V ; 2e Abth., IV ; 3e Abth., I-III.
Denkschiiften, 45er and 46er Bd. The Society.

K. K. geologische Reicbsanstalt. Jahrbuch 1884, I-III.
Verhandlungen, 1883, No. 13—1884, No. 14. The Society.

Mineralogische und petrographische Mittheilungen (Tschermak), n. F.,
V, 5 -VI, 3 I. V. Williamson Fund.

Naturwisseuschaftlicher Verein an der jUniversitat. Mittheilungen,
1882-1883. ' The Society.

Wiener Illustrirte Garten Zeitung, 1883, No. 10—1884, No. 9.

The Editor.

K. K. zoologisch botanische Gesellschaft. Veihandlungen, XXVIII,

3;i mit Beiheft. The Society.

Zoologische Institut. Arbeiten, V, 2, 3. The Society.

1884.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 383

Washiugton. American (Monthly) Microscopical Journal, V, 1—11.

The Editor.
Anthropological Society. Abstract of Transactions, II. The Society.
Philosophical Society. Bulletin, VI. The Society.

United States Fish Commission. Bulletin, III, 18— IV, 29 etseq. Also,
III and IV complete. The Director.

United States National Museum. Proceedings, VI, 16 - VII, 30.

Department of the Interior.

Wellington. New Zealand Institute. Transactions, XVI. The Society.

Westerns. Redogorelse for Hogre AUmauna Laroverket i Westeras,

1883-84. The Westeras Gymnasium.

Wiesbaden. Nassauischen Verein fiir Naturkunde. Jahrbuch, 36er

Jahr. The Society.

Wilkes-Barre. Wyoming Historical and Geological Society. Publications

(Proceedings) Nos. 1-8. The Society.

Worcester. American Antiquarian Society. Proceedings, III, 1, 2.

The Society.
Wurzburg. Botanisches Institut. Arbeiten, III, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Physikalisch-medicinische Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, n. F., XVII.
Sitzungsberichte, 1883. The Society.

Zoologisch-zootomischts Institut. Arbeiten, V, 1-4; VI, 1-3 ; VII, 1, 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Yokohama. Asiatic Society of Japan. Transactions, XI, 1, 2 ; XII, 1.

The Society.

York. Natural History Journal (and School Reporter), I, 1877 — VII,

1883 ; VIII, 64-70, The Editor.

INDEX TO GENERA, ETC.

1884.

Abies 30, 93

Acanthinio 167

Acanthinion 122, 124

Acanthocystis 293

Acanthopterygii. 154

Acanthurus." 103, 103, 227-231

Acanti. 157

Acentrachme 164

Acer 81

Achillea 86

Achiius 45

Aciaeta 218

Aconituni 80

Acronurus 229, 230

Actaea 80

Actseon 104

Actinophrys 17, 293

Actinosphsei'ium 293

Adenocaulon 86

Adiantum 90

Agalena 138

Agonus 103

Agrostis 94

Aira 95

Alcyonella 213

Alligator 47

Allium 93

Alnus 91

Alopecurus 95

Alutera 46

Amelanchier 82

Ammodyteiforraes 183

Ammodytidse 181

Ammonites 53, 54

Amphileptus 51

Amphisilidae 155

Amphisile 163, 164

AmphisilidsB 164

Amphisilinae 164

Amphisiloidei 164

Amphiuma 362-273

Auacantini 168

Anacharis 37, 50

Anaphalis 87

Anguiliformes 177

Anoplarchus 103

Antennaria 87

Antennarius 45, 46

Apeltes 157

Apeltinae 157

Aphorisria 45

Aphyostomes 162

Aplysina 202

Aplysinida 202

Apocynum 30

Apodes 167

Apogon 99

Apsilus 37, 39, 40, 50, 51

Aquilegia 80

Arabis 80

Aracese 94

Araliacese ." 85

Arbutus 88

Arcestes 54

Archangelica 85

Arctia 284

Arenaria 81

Arenosa 203

Ai'gyrotaeninae 182

Armeria 88

Ai-nica 87

Ascaltis 208

Ascidia 310

Aspidium 96

Astasia 51

Aster 13, 87

(385)

386

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

PAGE.

Astragalus 82

Ateleipodidse 182

Atiactomia 157

Atractosomes 157

Atripex , . . 90

Atropus 95

Atta 61

Attus 294

Aulichthys 1 00

Auliscops - 160

Aulo hynchidse 154, 159

Aulorliynchinse 160

Aulorhynchoidae 159

AulorhyDchus 155, 1 60

Aulostoraa 161

Aulostomateidje 160

Aulostomatidae 1 55, 1 60

Aulostomatoidei 160

Aulostomia 161

Aulostomidse . 154, l(iO

Aulostomidea 154

Axinella 205

Axinellida 205

Bahia 87

Balistes 46, 99

Barbero 228

Batrachus 45

Bdella 47

Bellerophon 54

Betula 91

Betulacese 91

Bibu'ida 202

Biloculina 321

Blenniidfe 169, 173

Blennioidei. . . 180

Blennius 103

Boa 140

Bombus 61

Borraginacese 89

Boschniakia 31, 89

Bothrolsemus 128

Brachyrhincus 98

Branchiostoma 310

Bregmacei'otidae 173

Brodiaea 93

Brosmiidse 171

Brosminse 171

Bi'osmophycinse 176

Brosmophycis 175

Brotula 169, 175

Brotulidse 169, 175

Biotulina 170

Brotulinse 176

Bi'otuloidca 175

BrotulophididjB 176

Brotulophis 176

PAGB.

Brunella 90

Bryanthus 88

Bulla 104, 110

Busycon 1 92

Bythitinae 176

Cadulus Ill, 112

Calcarea 208

Caltha 80

Campanula 87

Camponotus 9

Cancellaria 104

Caprifoliaceae 86

Caranx 98

Carauxia 157

Oarcharias 97, 98, 100

Cardita 104

Cardium 104

Carex 94

Carya 15

Cas^iope 88

Ca-siter ite 9

Castanea 15, 30

Castillija 89

Catalpa 78

Caudina 13

Cavochalinida , 204

Centaurea 201, 287

Centrischini 161, 162

Centrisci 162, 164

Centivscidse 155, 162, 164

Centriscnae 163

Centriscoidei , 162

Centriscops 163

Centrjscus 163, 164

Centrolophus 817

Centronotides 157

Ceijhalosomes 173

Cerastium 81

Ceratina 202

Cerithium 105

Cervus 119

Cetengraulis 35

Chsetodipterus 45

Chsetodon 99, 102, 122, 124, 312

Chalina 204

Chalinida 204

Chamaecyparis 92

Chamoiliynchus 162

Chenopodiacese 90

Chiasmodontidae 183

Chiasmodontinae , 183

Chonnopoma 211

Chonetes 54

Chorizopia 167

Chriomitra 233

Chrysostromus 811

1884.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

387

PAGB.

Ciconia 48

Ciliatinae 172

Cinua 286, 289

Circsea 84

('ladastris 118

Clathria 204

Clatbrina 208

Clathrulina 17, 18, 19

Claytouia 81

Cliona 207

Clupea 42

Cnicus 87

Coclileaiia 80

Cochlespira. 107

Ccecula 42

Collomia 89

Compositae 86

Congrogadidse 169, 178

Congrogadinae 178

Congrogadus 179

Conifeiae 92

Conularia 54

Coplis 80

Corliis 104

Corbula 104

Cordylophora 218

Coregonus 136

Coruacese 85

Cornulites . 148

Cornus 85

Corvina 98

Corylus 16, 117

Coryplioenidae 181

Corypbsena . » 102

Coryphene 316

Cottus 103

Crautzia 85

Crassulaceae 84

Crepidula 12

Cristatella 193, 197, 198

Crius 316

Crotalus ^ 140

Crucifeiae 80

Cryptogramme 96

Cucuibitacese 85

■ Cupelopagus 87, 39, 40, 50, 51

Cupulilei-se 92

Cybium 232-235

Cyclopterus 45

Cylicbna. 104

Oylindrella 211

Cyperaceae . . . '. 94

Cypraea. 104

Cypi sedia 104

Cystopteris 96

Dahlia 15

PAGE.

Dentalium 112

Descbampsia 95

Deyeuxia 95

Diotlon . 46

Dictyocylindius 205

Dictyop'bora 37, 39, 50, 51

Distx)ma 47

Ditrupa 112

Dodocatbeon 88

Doliodon 124

Donatia 209

Porosoma 42

Drosera 84

Droseracese 84

Dryas 82

Dules 98

Dysidea 203

Ecbinoclatbria 204

Ecbinocystis . ,. 85

Ecbinonemata 204

Ecbiodou 175

Ecpantberia 283

Elymus 95

Empetraceae 90

Enipetrum 90

Encbeliopbis 175

Encbelyopbes 178

Eugraulis 34, 35

Epinephelus 98, 99, 102

Epilobium 84

Epi])begus 33

Equisetaceae 95

Equisetum 95

Equus 23

Erantbis 116

Ericaceaea 88

Erigeron 87

Eriophorum 94

Erysimum 80

Escbara 13

Esox 68, 74, 75, 182, 225

Eucalia 158

Eucalyptocrinus 148

Euleptorbampbus 221

Eumeces G6

Euonymus 15

Eupagurus 12

Euphrasia 89

Fascicolaria 190, 192

Fatzia 85

Festuca 95

Fiatola 311

Fierasfer 175

Fierasferidffl ; 169, 178

Fierasferina 178

388

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

PAGK.

Filaria 47, 48

Filices 96

Fissurella 303

Fistularia 161, 162

Fistulariae 161

Fistularidse 154, 160, 161, 162

Fistularinse 162

Fistularini 162

Fistularioidei 161

Formica 57, 59, 64

Fragaria 82

Fraxinus 88

Fulgur ...12, 292

Fungispongia 147

Fusus 304

Gadi 168, 171, 172

Gadidae 168, 170, 171, 172

Gadiformes 171

GadinsB 171

Gadini 170, 171

Gadinia 170, 172

Gadites 171

Gadoidea 170, 171, 172

GadoideaB 171

Gadoides 170, 172

Gadopsidse 183

Gadus Ill

Galeopsis 90

Galeus 100

Galium 86

Gasterocaiithus 158

Gasteropoda Ill

Gasterostei 157

Gasterosteidse 157

Gasterosteinse 158

Gasterosteini 157

Gasterosteoidea 154, 157

Gasterosteus 157, 158

Gastropacha 286

Gaultheria 88

Gelsemium 14

Gentiana 88

Gentianacese 88

Genypterus 178

Geodina 208

Geraniaceae 81

Geranium 81

Geum 82

Giunotini 178

Glaux 88

Gloveria 286

Glyceria 95

Glyphidodon 99

Gnaphalium 87

Gobiesox 45

Gordius 294

PAGB.

Gossypium 296

Graminse 94

GymnelinsB 180

Gymnothorax 101

Habenaria 93

Halesia 32

Halichondria 206, 208

Haliophis 179

Haliotis 303

Harpyia 284

Helianthus 15, 200 201, 287

Hemibi-anchii 154

Hemiramphus 98, 221-226

Hepatus 229

Heptranchias 100

Heracleum 85

Herpyllus 153

Heteromeyenia .216, 217

Heterostegina 190, 321

Heuchera 84

Hieracium 14, 87

Hierochlce 95

Hippocampidae 166

Hippocampus 103

Higginsia 205

Hircinia 203

Hircinida 203, 208

Holcus. 95

Holacanthus 1 02

Holobranches 1 67

Holorhaphidota 206

Hoiikenya . 81

Hordeum 95

Hybocrinus 145

Hypericacese . . 81

Hypericum 81

Hyijoramphus 222

Hyportliodus 98

Hypostomides 166

Impatiens. 81

Iridaceae 93

Isesthes 103

Isodictya 206

Isodictyosa 206

Isuius 100

Juglans 16

Jugulares 167

Juncacese 94

Juncus 94

Kalmia. .

Labiatae
Lacerta .

90
66

1884.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA.

389

PAOE.

Lamna 100

Lathyrus . 81

Lasiocampa 286

Ledum 88

Leguminosae 83

Leiurus 158, 316

Lemna 17

Lentibulariacese 90

Leontodon 87

Lepidolepridse 174

Lepidosomatidse 174

Lepidosteus 101

Leptophidium 178

Libinia 12

Lichia 128

Ligusticum 83

Liliaceas. 93

Liliura 298

Limnias 214, 218

Limulus. 13

Lingula 148

Linusea 86

Linum 33

Liquidamber 293

Lirus 316

Littorina 292

Lomaria 96

Lonicera 86

Lophionotes 173

Lophius 45, 46

Lophoteryx 285

Lotes 168

Lotinae 171

Lotini 171

Loxophyllum 51

Lumbriculus 260

Lupinus 82

Lutjauus 45

Luzula 94

Lycenchelys 180

Lycocara 180

Lycodes 180

Lycodidse 179

Lycodinse 180

Lycodoidea 179

Lycodonus 180

Lycodopsis 180

Lycopodiacese 96

Lycopodium 96

Lycosa 138

Lygosoma 66

Lysichitou 94

Machaerium 179

Macrorhamphosida) 156, 162

Macrorhamphosus 163

Macrouriformes 174

PAGE.

Macrourini 174

Macruridse 168, 173, 174

Macruroidea 170

Mactra 10, 13

Madia 87

Malacopterygii 168

Malthe 45, 98

Malvaceae 81

Manayunkia 21, 30, 48, 49, 218

Mastodon 23

Megalops 43

Melongena 190

Menobranchus 263-273

Menopoma 262-374

Mentha 90

Menziesia 88

Merluccia 171, 173

Meiluccnae 171, 173

Merluciidae 171, 173

Meiluciinae 178

Mertensia 89

Meyenia 213, 216, 217

Meti-osomes 170, 172

Meyenia 28, 184

Micaria 152, 153

Micromeria 87, 90

Mimulus 89

Mitchella 298

Modiola 12

Moneses ...... 88

Monotropa 31

Montia 81

Muraena 101, 804

Mya 10, 12, 108

Mylodon 23

Myrmellon 59

Myrophis 44

Mytilis 10, 12

Myxena 309

Nabulus : 87

Naidaceae 94

Nassa 12, 804

Nasturtium 80

Natica 12

Navarretia 89

Neillia 82

Niho 104

Nummulites 190, 321

Nuttallia 83

(Enanthe 85

Ofidiina 177

Oleaceae 88

Onagraceae 84

Onchidium 308

Oninae 173

390

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

PAGE.

Operculina 323

Ophichthys 43, 101

Ophididc-e 177

Ophidiidffi 169, 176, 177, 178

Ophidiina 177

Ophidiilortnes 177

Ophidiini 177

ophidinae 177

Ophidioidea 175

Ophidioidei 177

Ophidium 175, 178

Ophidonidse 177

Opisthobi-anchiatae 110

Opisthoneraa 42

Opunt a 15

Orbitoides 190, 321

Orchidacese ^ 93

Orthichthyinse 103

Orthichthys 163

Osmerus 131

Ostrea 10, 12, 104, 301

Oxytropis 82

Palinurichthys 316

Palinurus 316

Paludicella . .30, 213, 218, 219

Pammelas 316

Parantbias 98

Paraspongia 202

Pavnassia 84

Pam 312

Pasitbea 104

Paiella 302, 303

Pecten 104, 190, 302

Pedicularis 89

Pectinatella 195, 196, 197, 218

Pegasi 166

PegasidsB 165

Pegasini 1 66

Pegasoidei 166

Pentastomum 140

Peprilus 311-313

Perca 99

Percoides 157

Peristerite 215

Pescador 42, 46

Pezomachus 152

Pbegopteiis 96

Phillipsia 54

Pbleum 95

Pbycidse 171

Phycinse 171

Physoclysti 168

Picea 92, 117

Pinguicula 90

Pinus 92, 295, 296

Plautaginaceae 90

FAGK.

Plartago 90

PI atanus 1 4, 1 1 7

Platyonichus 12

Pleurotoma 104, 106, 107

Plumatella 218

Plumbagiuacese 8 <

Poa 95

Polemoniacese 89

Polycanthus • 159

Polygonacese 90

Polygonum 90

Polypodium 96

Polyprion 99

Polyptericbtbys 161

Pomaoantbus 102

Pomachia. . 1 66

PoroDOtus 311, 314

Portulacacese 81

Potamogeton 50

Potentilla 83

Primula 88

Primulaceae 88

Prinos 298

Prionotus 103

Pristis 101

Productus 54

Promicropterus 99

Prosartes 93

Proteus 308, 309

Prunus 83

Psammonemata .' 202

Pseudopriacantbus 98

Psoralea 82

Pteridium 175

Pteris 96

Pteropoda 110

Pygosteus 158

Pyretbrum 87, 95

Pyrola 88

Pyrula 104

Pyrus 82

Pyxicola.. 214, 218

Quercus 30, 92

Quinqueloculina 321

Rana 273

RanicepitidsB 173

Ranunculacese 80

Ranunculus 80

Ranz^-nia 100

Rapbyrus 207

Reniera 205, 206

Renierida 206

Rbampbosidse 165

Rvipbidiopbrys 293

Rbapbidonemata 204

1884.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

391

PAGK.

Rhea 47

Rhinobatus 43

Rhombus 311-314

Rhypticus 99

Ribes 84

Richardia 142

Rosa 14, 83

Rosacese 82

Rotalia 23

Rotifer 260

Rubiacese 8(i

Rubus 14, 83

Ruraex 90

Sagina 81

Salicacese 91

Sdlix 91, 151

Salmo 181

^5alpa 113

Sambucus 80

Sanguisorba 84

Sanicula 85

Saphindacese 81

barcodes 3 1

Saurus 131

Saxicava 108

Saxifraga 84

Saxifiagacese 84

Sceliomiuse 295

Wciaena 102

Scirpus 94

Scomber 233

Scomberjdae 161

Scomberoides 157

Scomberomorus 232-235

Scorpaena 45, 98, 99

Scrophularia 89

Scrophulariacese 89

Sc.\ phobrancbii 108

S^cytalina 179

Sedum 84

iSenecio 87

Serpula 13

Seserinus 311, 313

Sidalcea 81

Sidera 42

Sigaretus 104

Siphonostomes 161

Si phostoma 45

Siphostomia 161, 162

Sirembinae 170

Sisyrinchium 93

Sium " 85

Smerinthus 283

Sniilaciua 98

Solarium 104

Solen 10, 302

PAGE.

Solenostomus 161, 162

Solidago 13, 87

Sonchus 87

Squalus 97

Spcrgula 81

Spherionidi 166

Sphseroidina 321

Sphyr^na 67-75, 101

fepilosoma 284

Si)inachia 155, 159

Spi iiachianae 159

Spinachiinse 159

Spiraea 83

Spirauthes 93

Spirogyra 37

Spiroculina 321

Spirophyton 144

Spondylus 302, 303

Spongelia 203

Spongilla 28, 215, 217

Stachys 90

Stellaria 81

Stereolepis 99

Sternopygii 1 68

Stictopora 146, 147

Stolephorus 34, 35

Streptopus 93

Strix 47

Stromateidae 311

Stromateus 45, 31 1-314

Sternoptyx 312

Subbranchiani 168

Suberites 206

Symphoricarpus 86

Symplocos 1 17

Syngnathida3 166

Synodus 180-186

Tachynotus 45

Taenia 137

Tapirus 119

Taraxacum 87

Taxaceae 92

Taxus 92

Telliraa 84

Terebra 1C5

Tethya 208

Tetrodon 99, 100

Tetrapodes 167

Textularia 23

Teuthis 227-231

Thuja 93

Tiai ella 84

Tibiclla 110

Tolieldia 93

Tornatella 104

Trachelius 51, 52

392

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1884.

PAGE.

Trachinia 174

Tiachinidi 173

Trachiiiocephalus 131

Trachynotus ..101, 121-129

Triacrinus 144-146

Trientals 88

Ti-ifolium 82

Trigla 99

Triglidse 157

Triglochin 94

Tiiloculina 321

Trisetum 95

Trisotc opis 102

Trochita 104

Tseudtsuga 93

Tsuga 93

Tuba 204

Tiibella 216, 217

Tardus 228

Turris 106

UmbellifersB 85

Urnatella 29, 218, 283

PAGE.

Uronectes 180

Uiosphenidse 165

Vacciniuin 88

Venus 10, 12, 301

Veronica 89

Viburnum 86

Vicia 82

Viola 81

Violacese 81

Vomer 98

Xenocephalidae 182

Xenocephaliformes , 182

Xiphoides 177

Zaphrentis 54

Zeidae 157

Zinnia 210

Zircon 214

Zoarces 169, 179

Zoarcbidae 179

Zoarcinse 180

1884.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

398

GENERAL INDEX.

Announcement of

Announcement of

Report of the Cura-
8. Vaux Collect

Additions to the Library, 356.

Additions to the Museum, 351.

Amendments to By-Iiaws, Chapter
I, Art. 6, and Chapter XVI, Art.
4, 261.

Arango, Rafael. Descriptions of new
species of terrestrial mollusca of
Cuba, 113. 211.

Audenried, J. T. Announcement of
death of, 66.

Bayard, C. P.
death of, 282.

Bentliam, Geo.
death of, 236.

Binder, .Jacob.
tor of the Wm
tions, 3b 6.

Biological and Microscopical Section,
report of, 338.

Botanical Section, report of, 342.

Brinton, D. 6. Inaugural Lecture,
113; Tunisian Flints, 219 ; On the
Cuspidiform Petroglyphs, or so-
called Bird-track Rock-sculpture
of Oliio, 260, 275 ; Impression of
the Figures on a Meday Stick, 278 ;
Fired Stones and Prehistoric Im-
plements, 279 ; A Glacial Pebble,
299 ; Report of the Professor of
Ethnology and Archaeology, 348.

Buckley, Dr. S. B. Announcement
of death of, 66.

By-Laws, amendments to Chapter
I. Art. 6, and Chapter XVI, Art.
4, 261.

Carter, Henry J. Catalogue of
Sponges collected by Mr. J. Will-
cox, on the West Coast of Florida,
187, 202, 237.

Chester, F. D. The Geology of Del-
aware ; Laurentian, Palaeozoic and
Cretaceous areas, 200. 236.

Claghorn, Jas. L. Announcement
of death of, 215.

26

Conchological Section, report of, 339.

Corresponding Secretary, report of,
326.

Curators, report of, 330.

DoUey, Chas. S. On the Process of
Digestion in Salpa, 113.

Elections during 1884. 349.

Elwyn, Dr. A. L. Announcement
of death of, 66.

Engleniann, Geo. Announcement of
death of, 30.

Entomological Section, report of,
341.

Farnum, J. Edwards. Announce-
ment of death of, 282.

Fooie, A. E. A Large Zircon, 214.

Ford, John. Embryology of Ful-
g'lr, etc., 292.

Fordice, Morton W. A Review of
the American species of Stoma-
teidse, 299, 311.

Foulke, Sara G. Some Phenomena
in the Life History of Clathrulina
elegans, 9, 17; On a New Species
of Rotifer, of the Genus Apsilus,
28, 37 ; Some Notes on Manayuu-
kia speciosa, 48 ; Dictyophora as
Apsilus vorax, 51 ; A New Species
of Trachelius, 51.

General Index, 393.

Gill, Theo. On the Mutual Rela-
tions of the Hemibranchiate Fish-
es, 151, 154 ; On the Anacanthine
Fishes, 151, 167.

Gray, Asa. Flora of North America,
13 ; Some Notes on the Movements
of the Androecium in Sunflowers,
279, 287.

Guyot, Arnold. Announcement of
death of, 30.

Haines, Wm T.
death of, 28.

Hand, .Tames C.
death of, 20.

Announcement of
Announcement of

394

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1884.

Heilprin, Angelo. On an Ammonite
from the Carboniferous Formation
of Texas, 47, 53 ; Tlie Tertiary
Geolofry of Eastern and Soutbern
United States, 47 ; Antiquity of
Implement-making Man, 220 ; On
a Remarkable Exposure of Colum-
nar Trap near Orange, N. J,, 298,
318 ; Note on some new Forami-
nifera from the Nummulitic For-
mation of Florida, 298, 321 ; Re-
port of the Curators, 330 ; Repoi't
of the Professor of Invertebrate
Paleontology, 345.

Henszey, Wm. C. Report of the
Treasurer, 333.

Hess, Robert J. Report of the Bio-
logical and Microscopical Section,
339.

Horn, Geo. H. Report of the Cor-
responding Secretary. 326.

Index to Genera, etc.. 385.

Jordan, David S. List of Fishes
from Egmont Key, Florida, in the
Museum of Yale College, with De-
scriptions of two new Species, 28,
42 ; Notes on Species of Fishes
improperly ascribed to the Fauna
of North America, 66, 97.

Leidy, Joseph. Ant infected with
a Fungus, 9 ; Cassiterite from
Black Hill, 9 ; The New Jersey
Coast after the Storm of Jan. 8,
1884, 12; Fossil Bones from Lou-
isiana, 22 ; Foraminil'era in the
Drift of Minnesota, 22 ; Distoma
and Filarise, 47 ; Dictyophora as
Apsilus vorax, 50 ; On Eumeces
chalcides, 66 ; Vertebrate Fossils
from Florida, 118 ; A rare Human
Tapeworm. 137; Pentastomum
proboscideum, 140 ; Organisms in
Ice, 260 ; Report of the Curators,
332.

Lewis, H. Carvill. A Pi osph ores-
cent Variety of Limestone, 10 ;
Volcanic Dust from Krakatoa, 185;
Report of the Professor of Miner-
alogy, 346.

Librarian, jeport of, 328.

Library, additions to, 356.

McCook, Rev. Henry C. The Rufous
or Thatching Ant of Dakota and
Colorado, 50, 57 ; How Lycosa
fabricates her round Cocoon, 138 ;
Note on the Amphibious Habit of
Lycosa, 140 ; A Spider that makes
a Spherical Mud-daub Cocoon, 151;

Note on the Intelligence of a
Cricket parasitised by a Gordius,
293 ; A new Parasitic Insect upon
Spider Eggs, 294.

Meehan, Thomas. Botanical Notes ;
Double Flowers in Gelsemium
nitidium, Euonymus Japonicus,
Development of Fruit of Opuntia,
Helianthus tuberosus, Carya gla-
bra, 14 ; The Longevity of Trees,
30 ; Parasitism in Boschniakia
glabra, E. Meyer, 31 ; Variation in
Halesia, 3i ; Catalogue of Plants
collected in July, 1883, during an
Excursion along the Pacific Coast
in Southeastern Alaska, 56, 76;
Botanical Notes : Evolution of
Heat in Plants, Relation of Heat
to the Sexes of Flowers, Specific
Difi'erences in Picea nigra, the
Flowers of Platanus, Variation in
Symplocos fcetidus, Sugar in Cla-
dastris tinctoria, 116 ; The Natuie
of a Fasciated Branch, 140 ; On
Rapid Changes in the History of
Species, 142 ; Opposite Leaves in
Salix nigra, 151 ; On Elasticity in
the filaments of Helianthus, '-iOO ;
Sexual Characters in Zinnia, 210 ;
On derivation in Pinus edulis and
Piuus monophylla, 295 ; Immedi-
ate Influence of Pollen on Fruit,
297 ; Report of the Botanical Sec-
tion, 343.

Meek, Seth E. A Review of the
American Species of the Genus
Synodus, 113, 130.

Meek, Seth E., and Robert Newland.
A Review of the American Species
of the genus Sphyisena, 56, 67 ; A
Review of the Ameiican Species of
Scomberomorus, 219, 232.

Meek, Seth E., and David K. Goss.
A Review of the American Species
of the genus Trachynotus, 113,
121 ; A Review of the American
Species of the genus Hemiram-
phus, 219, 221. •

Meek, Seth E., and Martin L. Hoff-
man. A Review of the American
Species of the genus Teuthis, 219,
227.

Meyer, Otto. Notes on Tertiary
Shells, 66, 104.

Mineialogical and Geological Sec-
tion, report of, 345.

Museum, additions to, 351.

Nolan, Edw. J. Report of the Re-

1884.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

395

cording Secretary, 323 ; Report of
the Librarian, 328.

Officers lor 1885, 349.

Osborn, Henry F. Preliminary Ob-
servations on the Brain of Meno-
poma, 260, 263.

Potts, Edvr. Note on Manayunkia
speciosa, 21 ; Fresh-water Sponges
as Improbable Causes of the Pol-
lution of River-water, 28 ; Some
modifications observed in the form
of Sponge Spicules, 184 ; On a sup-
posed new Species of Cristatella,
185, 193 ; On Paludicella erecta,
213 ; On the wide Distribution of
some American Sponges, 215 ; On
the Minute Fauna of Fairmount
Reservoir, 217 ; An unfamiliar
Rhizopod, 292.

Poultney, Chas, W. Announcement
of death of, 236

Price, Eli K. Announcement of
death of, 282.

Professor of Invertebrate Paleontol-
ogy, report of, 345,

Professor of Mineralogy, report of,
346.

Professor of Invertebrate Zoology,
report of, 347.

Professor of Ethnology and Archae-
ology, report of, 348.

Putnam, F. W. Indian Mounds on
the Miami River, 20.

Rand, Theo. D. Report of the Min-
eral ogical and Geological Section,
345.

Randolph, N. A. A Preliminary
Note on a Reaction common to
Peptone and Bile salts, 115 ; On
the Digestion of Raw and of Boiled
Milk, 120; On the Behavior of
Petrolntum in the Digestive Tract,
278, 281 ; Cutaneous Absorption of
Nicotine, 280.

Recording Secretary, report of, 323.

Redfield, J. H. Report of the Bo-
tanical Section, 342.

Repot t of the Recording Secretary,
323.

Report of the Corresponding Secre-
tary, 326.

Repoit of the Librarian, 328.

Report of the Curators, 332.

Report of the Treasurer, 333.

Report of the Curator of the Wm.
S. Vaux Collections, 336.

Report of the Biological and Micros-
copical Section, 338.

Report of the Conchological Section,
339.

Report of the Entomological Section,
341.

Repoit of the Botanical Section, 342.

Reiiort of the Mineralogical and
Gei 'logical Section, 345.

Report of the Professor of Inverte-
brate Palaeontology, 345.

Report of the Professor of Miner-
alogy, 346.

Report of the Professor of Inverte-
brate Zoology, 347.

Repoi t of the Professor of Ethnology
and Archaeology, 348.

Ridings, James 11. Report of the
Entomological Section, 341.

Ringueberg Eugene N. S. New
Fossils from the Four Groups of
the Niagara Period of Western
New York. 120, 144.

Roberts, S. R. Report of the Con-
chological Section, 339.

Rogers, Robt. E. Announcement
of death of, 217.

Rothrock, J. H. Relation of Medul-
lary Rays to the Strength of Tim-
bers, 14.

Schaeffer, W. L. Announcement of
death of, 215.

Scribner, F. Lamson. Observations
on Cinna, with Description of a
New Species, 279, 289.

Sharp, Benj. Visual Organs of
Lamellibranchs, 10 ; On Semper's
Method of making Dried Prepara-
tions, 20, 24 ; Introductory Lec-
ture, 66 ; Homologies of the Ver-
tebrate Crystalline Lens, 297, 300 ;
Report of the Professor of Inver-
tebrate Zoology, 347.

Strecker, Herman. Descriptions of
New Species of North American
Heterocera, 279, 283.

Swain, Jos., and SetliE. Meek. Notes
on a Collection of Anchovies from
Havana and Key West, with an
account of a New Species, Stole-
phorus eurystole, from VVood's
Holl, Mass., 28, 34.

Treasurer, Report of, 333.

Weber, Robt. L. Announcement
of death of, 297.

Willcov. Jos, Notes on the Geology
and Natural History of the West
Coast of Florida, 184, 188.

Wm. S. Vaux Collections, Report (-f
Curator of, 336.

Proc. Acad Nat. Sci. Philad'A, i

PL VII.

SCRIBNER ON CINNA.

Proo. A. N. S. I=>l-iiUi. 1SS4.

1^1. VI IF.

PROCEEDING-S

d

^dt\\\i of |iat«tci( ^txtwm

PHILADELPHIA.

PABT I.— JANUARY— APRIL, 1884.

PUBLICATION COMMITTEE.

Joseph Leidy, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

J. H. Redfield.

EDITOR: Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

m.

PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,

S. W. Oor. of 19th and Kace Streets.
1884.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF PHILADELPHIA.

Eight volumes of the New Series of the Journal (Quarto) have been issued — 1847 to
1881. The price per volume of four parts is $10, or $3 per part, to subscribers ; and to others,
$12.50 per volume, or $i.75 per part. Vol. VII contains "The Extinct Mammalian Fauna
of Dakota and Nebraska, with a Synopsis of the Mammalian Remains of North America.
Illustrated with thirty plates. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D.

The First Series of the Journal, 1817 to 1842, in eight volumes, octavo, may be
obtained at $40 to members, and to the public, $48.

The First Series of the Proceedings of the Society, published in octavo, 1841 to
1356, of which eight volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1856, may be obtained at $24 to
members; and to the public, $30.

The Second Series of the Proceedings, commencing January 1, 1867 (of which
fourteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1870), may be obtained at $42 to members, or $3
per volume separately; and to the public, $3.76 per volume.

The Third Series op the Proceedings, Illustrated, commencing January 1, 1871,
(of which thirteen volumes were completed Dee. 31, 1883), is published at $6 per annum, payable
in advance, to subscribers; single volumes, $6.26.

American Journal of Conchology, 1865-71. Seven vols., 8vo. Containing 2500
pages, illustrated by one hundred and fifty plates, many of them colored, besides about a
thousand wood engravings. Published at $70. Price reduced to $42 for the set. Separate
volumes, $10 each.

The Academy has the following works for sale at the prices aflBxed:

Description op Shells of North America, with 68 colored plates. By Thomas Say.

1830-34. $10.50.
Monograph of the Terrestrial Mollusca op the United States. With illustrations

of all the species. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Fine edition, plate paper, with duplicate

plates, colored and tinted, $20 ; colored edition, $13.50 ; plain edition, $8.60. Only

one hundred copies printed, which have been mostly sold.
Monograph op the Fresh Water T^nivalve Mollusca op the United States. By S. S.

Haldeman, 1840-44. With Continuation to 1871. By George W. Tryon, Jr. 2

vols., with many colored plates. Fine edition, duplicate plates, $40 ; with colored

plates, $25; with plain plates, $18.

Either the original work or the continuation furnished separately, if desired.
Synonymy of the Species of Strepomatid.e (Melanians) of the United States. By

Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
List of American AVriters on Recent Conchology, with the Titles of their Memoirs

and Dates of Publication. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Monograph of the Order Pholadacea and other Papers. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.76.
Complete Writings on Recent and Fossil CeNCHOLOGY of C. S. Rafinesque. Edited

by Wm. G. Binney and G. W. Tryon, Jr. $2.50.
Observations on the Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D, 4to, Vols. 1 to 13. With

Index, Nos. 1, 2 and 3, complete. Illustrated with several hundred fine lithographic

plates. $60.

Same, Vols. 2 to 13 inclusive, except Vols. 4 and 12. Each volume separately, $5.
Synopsis op Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. Fourth edition. $3.
Contributions to Geology. By Isaac Lea. $6.
Fossil Foot-Marks. By Isaac Lea. Large folio, text and plate. $2.

Same, plate alone. 50 cents.

Notice to Booksellers. — All the publications of tlie Society will be sup-
plied to Booksellers at a discount of 20 per cent, on the prices charged to the public.

Application to be made to Edwakd J. Nolan, M.D., at the Hall of the
Academy, corner of Nineteenth and Race Streets,

May, 1884.

COISTTKNTS.

Leidt, Joseph, M. D. Ant infected with a Fungus,. .... 9

Leidy, Joseph, M. D. Cassiterite from Black Hills, Dakota, ... 9
Sharp, Benjamin, M. D. Visual Organs of Lamel 11 branchs, ... 10
Lewis, H. Carvill. A Phosphorescent Variety of Limestone, . . 10

Leidy, Joseph, M. D. The New Jersey Coast after the btorm of January

8, 1884, 13

Gray, Dr. Asa. Flora of North America, 13

RoTHROCK, J. H., M. D. Relation of Medullary Rays to the Strength of

Timber, ............. 14

Meehan, Thomas. Botarical Notes.— Double Flowers in Gelseminum
nitidum ; Euonymus Japonicus ; Development of Fruit of Opuntia ;

Helianthus tuberosus ; Carja glabra, 14

FouLKE, Sara Gwendolen. Some Phenomena in the life-history of Clath-

rulina eegans, • . 17

Putnam, F. ^V. Indian Mounds on the Miami River, . . . .20
PoTTS, Edward. Note on Manayunkia speciosa, . .... 21
Leidy, Joseph, M. D. Fossil Bones from Louisiana, .... 22
Leidy, Joseph M. D. Furaminifera in the Drift of Minnesota, . . 22
Shakp, Benjamin, M. D. On temper's Method of making Dried Prepa-
rations .... 24

Potts, Edavard. Fresh-water Sponges as improbable Causes of the Pol-
lution of Rivei'-water, 28

Meehan, Thomas. Indian Use of Apocynum cannabinum as a textile

fibre, 30

Meehan, Thomas. The Longevity of Trees, dO

Meehan, Thomas. Paiasitism in Boschniakia glabra E. Meyer, . . 81

Meehan, Thomas. Variation in Hale.sia, 32

Swain, Joseph and Seth E. Meek. Notes on a Collection of Anchovies
from Havana and Key West, with an Account of a new Species (Stole-
pboivis eurystole), from Wood's Holl, Mass., ..... 34

Foulke, Sara Gwendolen. On a New Species of Rotifei", of the Genus

Apsilus. (Plate I), ' 37

Jordan, David. List of Fishes from Egmont Key, Florida, in the Museum

of Yale College, with description of two new species, . . . .42

Leidy, Joseph, M. D. Distoma and Filarise, 47

FouLKE, Sara Gwendolen. Some Notes on Manayunkia speciosa, . 48

Leidy, Joseph, M. D. Dictyophoi a as Apsilus vorax, .... 50
Foulke, Sara Gwendolen. A new species of Trachelius, ... 51
Heii.prin, Angklo. On a Cai'bunifemus Ammonite fiom Texas, . . 53
McCooK, Rev. Henry C, D. D. The Rufous or Thatching Ant of Dakota

and Colorado, ' • . . .57

Leidy, Joseph, M. D. On Eumeces chalcides, 66

Meek, Seth E. and Robert G. Newland. A Review of the American

Species of the Genus Sphyrsena, 67

Meehan, Thomas. Catalogue of the Plants collected in July, 1883, during

an Exouision along the Pacific Coast in southeastern Alask^i, . . 76
Jordan, David S. Notes on Species of Fishes improperly ascribed to the

Fauna of Noith Ameri< a, . . . . . . . . .97

Meyer, Otto. Notes on Tertiary Shelli^, 104

DoLLEY, Chas. S., M. D. On the Process of Digestion in Sal pa, . .113
Randolph, N. A., M. D. A preliminary Note on a Reaction common to

Peptone and the Bile-salts, . . 115

Meehan, Thomas. Botanical Notes. — Evolution of Heat in Plants ; Rela-
tion of Heat to the Sexes of Flowers ; Specific Differences in Picea
nigra; The Flowers of Piatanus ; Variation in Symplocos fcetidus ;

Sugar in Cladastris tinctoria, 118

Leidy, Joseph, M. D. Vertebrate Fossils from Florida, . . . .118
Randolph, N. A., M. D. On the Digestion of Raw and of Boiled Milk, 120
Meek, Seth E. and David K. Gobs. A Review of the American Species

of the Genus Trachynotus 121

Meek, Seth E. A Revie v of the American Species of the Genus Synodus, 130

7S« i 786 SANSOM St., PHILAOELPhl.

^

r

PROCEEDINGS

^^cailemg of ^atural |^fienct$

®:

PHILADELPHIA.

PART II.— 3IAY— OCTOBER, 1H84.

PUBLICATION COMMITTEE.

Joseph Leidy, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

J. H. Redpield.

EDITOR: Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,

S. W. Oor. of 19th and Race Streets.
188 4.

^nm

PUBLICATIONS OF THK
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OP PHILADELPHIA.

Eight volumes of the New Series of the JouhNAL (Quarto) have been issued — 1847 to
1881. The price per volume of four parts is $10, or $3 per part, to subsxribers ; and to others,
$12.50 per volume, or $3.75 per part. Vol. VII contains "The Extinct Mammalian Fauna
of Dakota and Nebraska, with a Synopsis of the Mammalian Remains of North America,
Illustrated with thirty plates. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D.

The First Series of the Journal, 1817 to 1842, in eight volumes, octavo, may be
obtained at $40 to members, and to the public, $48.

The First Series op the Proceedings of the Society, published in octavo, 1841 to
1856, of which eight volumes were completed Dee. 31, 1856, may be obtained at $24 to
members; and to the public, $30.

The Second Series of the Proce-edings, commencing January 1, 1857 (of which
fourteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1870), may be obtained at $42 to members, or $3
per volume separately; and to the public, $3.75 per volume. ,

The Third Series op the Proceedings, Illostrated, commencing January 1, 1871,
(of which thirteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1883), is published at $5 per annum, payable
in advance, to subscribers; single volumes, $6.25.

American Journal of Conchology, 1865-71. Seven vols., 8vo. Containing 2500
pages, illustrated by one hundred and fifty plates, many of them colored, besides about a
thousand wood engravings. Published at $70. Price reduced to $42 for the set. Separate
volumes, $10 each.

The Academy has the following works for sale at the prices afSxedr

Description op Shells of North America, with 68 colored plates. By Thomas Sat.

1830-34. $10.50.
Monograph of the Terrestrial Mollusca op the United States. With illustrations

of all the species. By Geo. W. Trton, Jr. Fine edition, plate paper, with duplicate

plates, colored and tinted, $20 ; colored edition, $13.50 ; plain edition, $8.50. Only

one hundred copies printed, which have been mostly sold.
Monograph op the Fresh Water Univalve Mollusca of the United States. By S. S.

Haldeman, 1840-44. With Continuation to 1871. By George W. Tryon, Jr. 2

vols., with many colored plates. Fine edition, duplicate plates, $40 ; with colored

plates, $25; with plain plates, $18.

Either the original work or the continuation furnished separately, if desired.
Stnonymy op the Species of STREPOMATiOiE (Melanians) of the United States. By

Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
List of American Writers on Recent Conchology, with the Titles of their Memoirs

and Dates of Publication. By Geo. W. Tkyon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Monograph of the Order Pholadacea and other Papers. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Complete Writings on Recent and Fossil CeNCHOLOGY of C. S. Rafinesque. Edited

by Wm. G. Binney and G. W. Tryon, Jr. $2.50.
Observations on the Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. 4to, Vols. 1 to 13. With

Index, Nos. 1, 2 and 3, complete. Illustrated with several hundred fine lithographic

plates. $60.

Same, Vols. 2 to 13 inclusive, except Vols. 4 and 12. Each volume separately, $5.
Synopsis of Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. Fourth edition. $3.
Contributions to Grology. By Isaac Lea. $5.
Fossil Foot-Marks. By Isaac Lea. Large folio, text and plate. $2.

Same, plate alone. 50 cents.

Notice to Booksellers. — ^All the publications of the Society will be sup-
plied to Booksellers at a discount of 20 per cent, on the prices charged to the pu

Application to be made to Edward J. Nolan, M.D., at the Hall ox
Academy, corner of Nineteenth and Race Streets.

November, 1884.

COTSTTElSrTS.

Lbid?, Job., M. D. A Rare Human Tapeworm,

McCooK, Rev. H. C. How Lycosa fabricates her Round Cocoon,

McCooK, Rev. H. C. Note on the Amphibious Habit of Lycosa,

Leidy, Jos., M. D. Pentastomum proboscideum,

Meehan, Thos. The Nature of a Fasciated Branch,

Meeiian, Tnos. On Rapid Changes in the History of Species,

RiNGUEBERG, EuGENE N. S. New Fossils from the four Groups of the

Niagara Period of Western New York (Plates II and III),

Meehan, Thos. Opposite Leaves in Salix nigra,

McC< OK, Rev. H, C. A Spider that makes a Spherical Mud-daub Cocoon,
Gill, Theo. On the Mutual Relations of the Hemibranchiate Fishes, .

Gill, Theo. On the Anacanthine Fishes

Potts. Edw. Some Modifications observed in the form of Sponge Spicules,
Lewis, H. Carv'ill. Volcanic Dust from Krakatoa, . . . .

WiLLCOX, Jos. Notes on the Geology and Natural History of the We.st

Coast of Florida,

Potts, Edw. On a New Species of Cristatella (Plate IV),
Meehan, Thos. On Elasticity in the Filaments of Helianthus,
Carter, Henry J. Catalogue of Marine Sponges, collected by Mr. Jos.

Willcox on the West Coast of Florida,

Meehan, Thos. Sexual Characteii.stics in Zinnia,

Arango, Rafael. Description of new species of Terrestrial MoUusca of

Cuba,

Potts. Edw. On Palndicella erecta,

FooTE, Dr. a. E. a Large Zircon

Potts, Edw. On the wide Distribution of some American Sponges,
Potts, Edw. On the Minute Fauna of Fairmount Reservoir, .
Brinton, Dr. D. G, Tunisian Flints, . . . . .
Meek, Seth E., and David K. Goss. A Review.of the American Species

of the Genus Hemiramphus, . . . . . .

Meek. Seth E., and Martin L. Hoffman. A Review of the American

Species of the Genus Teuthis,

Meek, Seth E., and Robert G. Newland. A Review of the American

Si ecies of Scomberomorus,

Chester, Frederick D. Preliminary Notes on the Geology of Delaware

— Laurentian, Palaeozoic and Cretaceous Areas (Plate V), .

Leidv, Jos., M. D. Organisms in Ice, . •

OsBOKSi, Henry F. Preliminary Observations upon the Brain of Menopoma

(Flate VI),

Brinton, D. G., M. D. On the Cuspidiform Petroglyphs, or so-called

Bird-Track Rock-Sculptures, of Ohio

Brinton, D. G., M. D. Impression of the Figures on a "Meday Stfck,"
Brinton, D. G., M. D. Fired Stones and Prehistoric Implements, .
Randolph, N. A. Cutaneous Absorption of Nicotine, . . . .

PAGE.

137
138
140
140
140
142

144
151
151
154
167
184
185

188
193
200

202
210

211
213
214
215
217
219

221

227

232

237
260

262

794 i 796 SANSOM 91

PROCEEDINGS

ck

^dmi of l^itttttal ^mtt(^$

PHILADELPHIA.

PABT III.—]S^OVEMBEB—nECE3IBER, 1884,

PUBLICATION COMMITTEE.

Joseph Leidt, M. D., Geo. H. Hobn, M. D.,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

J. H. Redfield.

EDITOR: Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,

S. W. Cor. of 19th and Race Streets.
1885.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF PHILADELPHIA.

Eight volumes of the New Series of the Journal and Part I of Volume IX (Quarto)
have been issued — 1847 to 1884. Tho price per volume of four parts is $10, or $3 per part, to
subscribers; and to others, $12.50 per volume, or ${.75 per part. Vol. VII contains "The
Extinct Mammalian Fauna of Dakota and Nebraska, with a Synopsis of the Mammalian
Remains of North America." Illustrated with thirty plates. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D.

The First Series op the Journal, 1817 to 1842, in eight volumes, octavo, may be
obtained at $40 to members, and to the public, $48.

The First Series op the Proceedings of the Society, published in octavo, 1841 to
1856, of which eight volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1856, may be obtained at $24 to
members; and to the public, $30.

The Second Series of the Proceedings, commencing January 1, 1857 (of which
fourteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1870), may be obtained at $42 to members, or $3
per volume separately; and to the public, $3.75 per volume.

The Third Series of the Proceeuings, Illustrated, commencing- January 1, 1871,
(of which fourteen volumes were completed Dec. 31 , 1 884), is published at $5 per annum, payable
in advance, to subscribers; single volumes, $6.25.

American Journal op Conchology, 1865-71. Seven vols., 8vo. Containing 2500
pages, illustrated by one hundred and fifty plates, many of theui colored, besides about a
thousand wood engravings. Published at $70. Price reduced to $42 for the set. Separate
volumes, $10 each.

The Academy has the following works for sale at the prices afiBxedr

Description of Shells op North America, with 68 colored plates. By Thomas Sat.

1830-34. $10.50.
Monograph op the Terrestrial Mollusca op the United States. With illustrations

of all the species. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Fine edition, plate paper, with duplicate

plates, colored and tinted, $20; colored edition, $13.50; plain edition, $8.50. Only

one hundred copies printed, which have been mostly sold.
Monograph op thb Fresh Water Fnivalve Moi.lusca of the United States. By S. S.

Haldeman, 1840-44. With Continuation to 1871. By George W. Tryon, Jr. 2

vols., with many colored plates. Fine edition, dui>licate plates, $40 ; with colored

plates, $25; with plain plates, $18.

Either the original work or the continuation furnished separately, if desired.
Synonymy op the Species of StrepomatiDjK (Melanians) op the United States. By

Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
List op American Writers on Recent Conchology, with the Titles of their Memoirs

and Dates of Publication. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, J1.75.
Monograph of the Order Pholadacea and other >Papers, By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Complete Writings on Recent and Fossil CeNCHOLOGY op C. S. Rafinesque. Edited

by Wm. G. Binney and G. W. Tryon, Jr. $2.50.
Observations on the Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. 4to, Vols. 1 to 13. With

Index, Nos. 1, 2 and 3, complete. Illustrated with several hundred fine lithographio

plates. $60.

Same, Vols. 2 to 13 inclusive, except Vols. 4 and 12. Each volume separately, $5.
Synopsis op Qknus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. Fourth edition. $3.
Contributions to Geology. By Isaac Lea. $5.
Fossil Foot-Marks. By Isaac Lea. Large folio, text and plate. $2.

Same, plate alone. 50 cents.

Notice to Booksellers. — All the publication.s of the Society will bo sup-
plied to Booksellers at a discount of 20 per cent on the prices cliurgetl to tlio public.

Application to be made to Edward J. Noi-an, M.D., at the llall of the
Academy, comer of Nineteenth and Race Streets.

March, 1885.

COTSTTETSTTS.

FAGS.

Randolph, N. A. On the Behavior of Petrolatum in the Digestive Tract, 281

Leidy, Jos., M. D. Urnatella gracilis, 282

Strecker, Herman. Description of New Species of North American

Heterocera 283

Gray, Asa. Notes on the Movements of the Androecium in Sunflowers, . 287
SCRIBNER, F. Lamson. Observations on the Genus Cinna, with Description

of a New Species (Plate VII), 289

Ford, John. Embryology of Fulgur, etc., 292

Potts, Edw. An unfamiliar Rhizopod, 292

McCooK, Henry C, D. D. Note on the Intelligence of a Cricket parasitised

by a Gordius, 293

McCooK, Henry C, D. D. A New Parasitic Insect upon Spider Eggs, . 294
Meehan, Thos. On Derivation in Pinus edulis and Pinus monophylla, . 295
Meehan, Thos. Immediate Influence of Pollen on Fruit, .... 29^

Brinton, Daniel G., M. D. A Glacial Pebble, 299

Sharp, Benjamin, M. D. Homologies of the Vertebrate Crystalline Lens, 300
FoRDiCE, Morton W. A Review of the American Species of Stromateidae, 311
Heilprin, Angelo. On a Remarkable Exposure of Columnar Trap near

Orange, N. J. (Plate VIII), 318

Heilprin, Angelo. Notes on Some New Foraminifera from the Nummu-

litic Formation of Florida, 321

Repoit of the Recording Secretary, 323

Report of the Corresponding Secretary, . . . . . . . 326

Report of the Librarian, 328

Report of the Curators, 330

Summary of the Report of the Treasurer, 333

Report of the Curator of the Wm. 6. Vaux Collections, .... 336
Report of Biological and Microscopical Section, ...... 338

Report of the Conchological Section, . . . , 339

Report of the Entomological Section, . . . . . . . . 341

Report of the Botanical Section, 342

Report of the Miueralogical and Geological Section, 345

Report of the Professor of Invertebrate Palaeontology 345

Report of the Professor of Mineralogy, 346

Report of the Professor of Invertebrate Zoology, 347

Report of the Professor of Ethnology and Archaeology, .... 348

Officers for 1885, 349

Elections during 1884, 349

Additions to the Museum, 351

Additiont- to the Library, 356

Index to Genera, etc., 385

General Index, 393

'ILDARI'S PRINTINO HOUSE, T>4 li 7ie 9ANS0M ST., PHILAOII.PHM.

'^i?wmlf"OI LIBRARY